Mechanical

A-PDF Split DEMO : Purchase from www.A-PDF.
com to remove the watermark
TENDER DOCUMENTS
MAIN WORKS
RIYADH CHAMBER OF
COMMERCE
VOLUME 2
PROJECT:
RADISSON BLU
RIYADH CONVENTION
HOTEL
MEP WOKS
SPECIFICATIONS REV 0B
July 2015
LOCATION:
RIYADH,
KINGDOM OF SAUDI
ARABIA
VOLUME-III
M.E.P. Specifications
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BOOK - I
PART I
MECHANICAL SERVICES:
DIVISION01,07,09: GENERAL
DIVISION 21:
FIRE SUPPRESSION
DIVISION 22:
PLUMBING
DIVISION 23:
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING (HVAC)
DIVISION 25:
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
BOOK - II
PART II
ELECTRICAL SERVICES:
DIVISION 26:
ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 27:
COMMUNICATIONS & AV
DIVISION 28:
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

Table of Contents
VOLUME-III
PART - I
MECHANICAL SERVICES

Part I: Mechanical Services
VOLUME-III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISIONS 01, 07, 21, 22, 23 & 25 - MECHANICAL SERVICES
S. NO.
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
1.
01 00 00
General Requirements (Mechanical)
01 01 00
Design Criteria ( Mechanical)
01 88 45
Noise & Vibration Control Requirement
07 84 00
Fire Stopping Material
09 62 48
Floating Floors
DIVISION 21 : FIRE SUPPRESSION

6
21 10 00
Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
21 13 13
Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
21 13 39
Foam Water Sprinkler System
21 22 10
Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems FM 200 System
DIVISION 22 : PLUMBING
10
22 05 16
Expansion Fittings And Loops
11
22 05 17
Sleeves for Plumbing
12
22 05 18
Escutcheon for Plumbing
13
22 05 19
Meters And Gages for Plumbing
14
22 05 29
Hangers And Supports for Plumbing
15
22 05 53
Identification for Plumbing
16
22 05 53.1
Systems Identification
17
22 05 78
Plumbing Specialties
18
22 05 80
Cleaning of Piping Systems
19
22 07 00
Plumbing Insulation
20
22 09 13
Valves for Plumbing
21
22 10 00
Plumbing Pipe work
22
22 11 23
Domestic Water Pumps
23
22 12 00
Water Storage Tanks

Divisions 21, 22, 23 & 25- Mechanical Services: Table of Contents
M-1
VOLUME-III
S. NO.
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
24
22 13 19
Drainage Specialties
25
22 13 29
Sanitary Sewerage Pumps
26
22 14 29
Submersible Sump Pumps
27
22 32 00
Domestic Water Filtration
28
22 32 30
Grey Waste Water Recycling Plant
29
22 33 31
Solar Water Heaters & Accessories
30
22 34 36
Gas Fired Hot water Boiler system and HW Calorifiers
31
22 35 00
Plate Heat Exchanger
32
22 70 00
Liquefied Petroleum Gas System (LPG)
33
22 70 10
Fuel Handling System
DIVISION 23 : HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

34
23 05 19
Meters And Gages for HVAC
35
23 05 29
Brackets Anchors and Supports
36
23 05 48
Mechanical Sound, Vibration & Seismic Control
37
23 05 53
Systems Identification
38
23 05 66
UltraViolet (UVC) Irradiation System / UVC Emitter
39
23 05 93
Testing, Inspections & Commissioning
40
23 07 00
HVAC Insulation
41
23 09 13
Valves
42
23 09 14
Piping Specialties
43
23 21 00
Hydronic Piping and Accessories
44
23 21 23
HVAC Pumps
45
23 21 24
Packaged Pressurization Sets
46
23 25 00
HVAC Water Treatment
47
23 31 00
Ductwork
48
23 32 00
Air Chambers and Plenums
49
23 33 13
Dampers

M-2
VOLUME-III
S. NO.
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
50
23 33 19
Duct Silencers (Attenuators)
51
23 33 46
Flexible Ductwork
52
23 33 53
Duct Liner
53
23 34 00
Fans
54
23 35 16
Generator / Boiler Flues
55
23 36 00
Air Terminal Units ( VAV & CAV)
56
23 37 00
Air Outlets And Inlets
57
23 41 00
Air Filters & Ecology Units
58
23 64 26
Air Cooled Water Package Chillers
59
23 73 23
Air Handling Units
60
23 81 23
Close Control Units
61
23 82 19
Fan Coil Units
DIVISION 25 : INTEGRATED CONTROLS & BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

62
25 30 00
Building Management And Automatic Controls System
63
APPENDIX
-A
Schedule of Approved Manufactures For Mechanical Works /

Commissioning

M-3
VOLUME-III
MECHANICAL SECTION: 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL)
Mechanical Section 01 00 00: General Requirements
M-1
VOLUME-III
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL)
INDEX
PART -1: GENERAL
PART-2: PRODUCTS
1.0
GENERAL. .................................................................................................................................... 4
2.0
INTENT. ........................................................................................................................................ 7
3.0
EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS. .......................................................................... 7
4.0
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS. ...................................................................................... 7
5.0
CONTRACT DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................... 8
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. ................................................................................................. 8
7.0
SHOP DRAWINGS & MATERIAL SUBMITTAL ..................................................................... 9
8.0
RECORD DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................... 10
9.0
TEMPORARY SERVICE. .......................................................................................................... 11
10.0
COOPERATION ......................................................................................................................... 11
11.0
PROTECTION AND STORAGE ................................................................................................ 11
12.0
EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 11
13.0
SUPERVISION. .......................................................................................................................... 12
14.0
SCHEDULING. ........................................................................................................................... 12
15.0
WORK TO CONTINUE.............................................................................................................. 12
16.0
STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES......................................................................................... 12
17.0
WORKMANSHIP. ...................................................................................................................... 13
18.0
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. ............................................................................................ 13
19.0
CLEANING. ................................................................................................................................ 14
20.0
ACCESSIBILITY. ....................................................................................................................... 14
21.0
CUTTING AND PATCHING. .................................................................................................... 14
22.0
INSERTS, SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND CURBS. ........................................................... 14
23.0
ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS. ............................................................................................. 16
24.0
FLASHING. ................................................................................................................................. 17
25.0
GENERAL WELDING REQUIREMENTS. .............................................................................. 17
26.0
TESTS FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION. .............................................................................. 18
27.0
TESTING OF WELDED PIPEWORK INSTALLATION.......................................................... 19
28.0
PAINTING, IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS ............................................................. 20
29.0
FLUSHING AND CLEANING. .................................................................................................. 22
30.0
INSPECTION, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. .......................................................................... 22
M-2
VOLUME-III
31.0
TEMPORARY USAGE............................................................................................................... 24
32.0
INSPECTION OF THE WORK. ................................................................................................. 25
33.0
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER. .......................................................................... 25
34.0
COMMISSIONING OF SERVICES. .......................................................................................... 26
35.0
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE........................................................................................................... 27
36.0
CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION. ................................................................................... 27
37.0
GUARANTEES ........................................................................................................................... 28
38.0
MAINTENANCE. ....................................................................................................................... 28
PART-3: EXECUTION
M-3
VOLUME-III
PART -1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
1.1.1
The General and Supplementary Conditions are a part of the requirements for the Work under this
Division of the Specifications.
1.1.2
This section applies to all sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23 & 25.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.2.1
The Specifications require the furnishing and installing of all items, including every article,
device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to
facilitate each systems functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified.
Elements of the Work include, but are not limited to, materials, labour, supervision, supplies,
equipment, transportation, storage, utilities and all required permits, licenses, fees and royalties.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
The mechanical and public health installation shall be of the highest quality in accordance with
the standards as specified and shall conform to:
1.3.1.1 Local Code/Regulations

1.3.1.2 Rafal specifications and standard details drawings
1.3.1.3 Local Authorities Regulations related to Mechanical Services Installations.
1.3.1.4 Local Civil Defence Regulations.
1.3.1.5 Health and Safety at Work Act.
1.3.1.6 Relevant British, European, American and International Standards and/or Codes of Practice for
materials and equipment and method of installation.
All materials shall bear 3rd party assurance stamp such as UL, FM, LPC, British standards
Kitemark, or other marks stated within the specs.
1.3.1.7 Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers guides and memos.
1.3.2
Should any change in Drawings or Specifications be required to comply with governmental

regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Administrator prior to execution of the
Work. The Work shall be carried out according to the requirements of such code in accordance
with the instruction of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.3.3
The provisions of Standards, Codes, Laws, Ordinances, etc., shall be considered minimum
requirements. In case of conflict between their published requirements, the Construction
Administrator shall determine which is to be followed and his decision shall be binding. Specific
requirements of this Specification and/or the Drawings, which exceed the published requirements,
shall take precedence over them.
1.3.4
Execute the Work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,
substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen. Provide a competent, experienced,
full-time Superintendent who is authorised to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor.
M-4
VOLUME-III
1.4
DEFINITIONS
1.4.1
Use the following definitions for discernment within the Drawings and Specifications.
1.4.1.1 PROVIDE means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect, connect, test and turn over to
Employer, complete and ready for regular operation, the particular work referred to.
1.4.1.2 INSTALL means to move from property line, set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up
or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Employer of equipment supplied
under another division. Installation to be complete and ready for regular operation, the particular
work referred to.
1.4.1.3 FURNISH means to supply all materials, labour, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests,
accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application for
the particular work referred to.
1.4.1.4 WIRING means the inclusion of all wire ways, fittings, conductors, connectors and outlet
boxes, connections, joints and all other items necessary and/or required in connection with such
work.
1.4.1.5 CONDUIT means the inclusion of all fittings, hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.
1.4.1.6 AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Construction Administrator, or his representative.
1.4.1.7 CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall
furring or within double partitions, or installed within hung ceilings.
1.5
ABBREVIATIONS
1.5.6
CD
Civil Defence
1.5.8
BS
British Standards
1.5.9
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
1.5.10 CIBSE
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
1.5.11 BMS
Building Management System
1.5.12
Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association
HVCA
1.5.13 NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
1.5.14 ANSI
American National Standards Institute
1.5.15 AMCA
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
1.5.16 ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
1.5.17 SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
1.5.18 ARI
American Refrigeration Institute
1.5.19 ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
M-5
VOLUME-III
1.5.20 AWS
American Welding Society
1.5.21 AWWA
American Water Works Association
1.5.22 MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fitting Industry
1.5.23 IPC
International Plumbing Code
1.5.24 ASPE
American Society for Plumbing Engineers
1.5.25 UL
Under Writers Laboratory
1.5.26 EN
Euro Norms
1.5.27 IEE
Institution of Electrical Engineers
1.5.28 IEC
International Electro Technical Commission
1.5.29 ISO
International Organization of Standardization
1.5.30 C
Degree Celsius
1.5.31 F
Degree Fahrenheit
1.5.32 DB
Dry Bulb
1.5.33 WB
Wet Bulb
1.5.34 Kg
Kilogram
1.5.35 Kpa
Kilopascals
1.5.36 Pa
Pascals
1.5.37 Mm
Millimeter
1.5.38 NC
Noise Criteria
1.5.39 RPM
Revolution per minute
1.5.40 SS
Stainless Steel
1.5.41 W.G.
Water gauge
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.0
GENERAL.
1.1
The Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Main Conditions of contract, Note on Pricing, the
Preliminary Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract apply to and are part of this
Division and all subsections.
1.2
Sections of this Services Specification which relate to other Divisions are not intended to
supersede the specifications of these divisions, but to guide the Contractor in tendering and
performance. In no event shall a quality less than that indicated here be acceptable.
M-6
VOLUME-III
1.3
The precedence of various Documents and Drawings shall be as determined in the General
Contract Documents, subject to the limitation that any item shown or required in any of the
documents or drawings shall be considered by the Contractor to be included in all Documents.
1.4
The scope of works includes design and build by EPC contract including detailed design of the
concept drawings provided by the consultant, supply of material & euipment, delivery to site,
installation, testing, commissioning, demonstrating and staff training of the various complete
systems outlined in this specification and on the drawings and documentation including liaison
with the Main Contractor, Authorities, Master Plan Developer and their representatives and
Consultants as necessary for the duration of the works and the defects liability period.
1.5
The MEP contractor will be responsible for reaching an agreement on their Program with the
Main Contractor and coordinating every aspect of their design, submissions, approvals as well as
installation, testing, commissioning and handover works with them.
1.6
Wherever the term authority is indicated, it shall mean statutory authorities, the master plan
developer or their representatives and services provider.
2.0
INTENT.
2.1
Carry out Detailed design drawings as per the concept design drawings part of EPC contract, and
accept responsibility for proper performance of all mechanical and plumbing systems in
accordance with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter, AND in
accordance with Rafal specifications and standard details drawings.
2.2
Provide all items, articles, materials, samples, operations, sundries, labour, supervision,
guarantees, allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functionable and
acceptable system.
2.3
Consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the drawings. Consider
any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably implied on the other as
properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the work of this division.
2.4
The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make this
available as requested to the Consultant.
3.0
EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS.
3.1
Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and
limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might affect the
works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or others.
3.2
Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions before
bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
3.3
Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or expense
resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions, Drawing
implications, etc.
4.0
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS.
4.1
Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. This is
to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the termination of the
project. On completion of the work present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional
approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities and the master plan developer or their
representatives.
M-7
VOLUME-III
4.2
Pay fees / charges as levied by statutory authorities for inspections, approvals, services
connections, rerouting of existing services, etc. at no additional cost to contract.
4.3
Before commencing any work on site, submit the required number of copies to the relevant
Authorities (after coordination with present building Contractor) for checking and approval.
Follow the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities.
Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant immediately of
any such change for proper processing of these requirements. The Contractor, working on a
regular basis with the Authorities is expected to know which changes are likely at the time he
bids the job, and no extra cost will be allowed for such changes.
5.0
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
5.1
The drawings for services works are performance drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations of
apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate architectural or
structural details, nor do they show any fabrication or installation details.
5.2
Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items from
drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation of all
services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.) before proceeding
with the work.
5.3
Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment necessary to
accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns, etc.)
5.4
Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed, provided that
the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional material.
5.5
Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency
lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected ceiling
drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all trades. These must
be submitted for approval and be approved before any work commences on site.
5.6
Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or equipment as
indicated and/or supplied by another division of work of the contract. Install all pipe runs,
conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and clearances, and to conserve
space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to provide adequate space for service and
maintenance.
5.7
Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures. Confirm also location of outlets and
fixtures provided by any other division of work under the contract.
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS.
6.1
Prepare fully coordinated drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and
openings for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.
6.2
Prepare composite construction drawings in colour fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in
tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to avoid a
conflict of trades. Composite drawing shall include all MEP services in coordination with the
structure and false ceiling heights given in the Architectural drawings.
Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to, all
details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains, location
M-8
VOLUME-III
and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and agreement of,
all trades involved.
The location of final fix items such as supply / return air diffusers and sprinkler heads shown in
the contract drawings are indicative only. Contractor shall co-ordinate with the reflected ceiling
plans and Interior design drawings and agree the actual location in relation to other items such as
light fittings, smoke detectors, speakers etc. Final location should be based on the approved
reflected ceiling plans prepared by Contractor and obtain approval from the Architect / Engineer.
6.3
Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof curbs, wall
openings, trenches, pertaining to mechanical work.
6.4
Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Forward these drawings, approved
by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide transparencies and provide
printed copies in a number as specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.
6.5
Bind one complete set of construction drawings showing "as built" conditions in each operating
and maintenance instruction manual. The extent of these drawings will be indicated to the
Contractor in advance by the Consultant.
7.0
SHOP DRAWINGS & MATERIAL SUBMITTAL
7.1
Submit shop drawings and samples for materials and equipment as listed in this and in each
subsequent section.
Provide transparencies wherever possible and provide printed copies in a number as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents. The Consultant may retain the sample of each item at his
discretion until the completion of the contract.
7.2
Present a schedule of shop drawings and material submittal within two weeks after award of the
contract, indicating the anticipated date when the drawings will be submitted for review. Assume
full responsibility for timely submission of all drawings. Allow a minimum of three weeks for the
Consultant's review. At time of submission indicate order deadlines and cost implications, etc.,
otherwise the Consultant will advise the Owner that cost and completion date will be unaffected.
7.3
Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay on the Contractor's
behalf in making these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to
Contractual penalties and other remedies as determined by the Consultant.
7.4
The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and all
Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical dimensions, make,
performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use and location before
submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to correspond to the design
drawings.
7.5
Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,

accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes. Ensure
that shop drawings indicate the shipping and working weights of all equipment.
7.6
The submission of samples will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop drawings. One
set of such samples shall be required to be brought to site and kept there after approval till
substantial completion.
7.7
The Consultant will mark the drawings "resubmit specified item, "rejected", "no exception
taken", or "make correction noted". In the last case all revisions will be clearly marked on the
returned print and corrected prints may be issued for manufacture and construction.
M-9
VOLUME-III
Make the revisions shown on the "make corrections as noted" prints onto the tracings as soon as
practicable and forward copies to the Consultant for his records.
7.8
The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the Contractor's
drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken by the Contractor
to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be considered as a delay to the contract
caused by the Contractor.
7.9
When drawings are marked "resubmit specified item", the Contractor is to resubmit the item as
originally specified or as may be determined to be equivalent by the Consultant. The Consultant
is the sole arbiter of whether any item is satisfactory or equivalent.
7.10
When drawings are marked "rejected" a complete resubmission of the particular drawing is
necessary, subject to the same conditions as outlined above.
7.11
The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from
the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention to such
deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's review shall be construed to
apply to, and only to, general arrangements and shall not relieve the Contractor from the entire
responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall be on the understanding that any item
submitted shall be ordered with options and modifications to fully meet the specification. Any
fabrication, erection, setting out or other work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings
shall be done entirely at the Contractor's risk and cost.
7.12
Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper
coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.
7.13
Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work. Submit
two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in inspecting the
work.
7.14
Bind one complete set of checked shop drawings into each operating and maintenance manual.
8.0
RECORD DRAWINGS
8.1
As the job progresses, mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of installed work.
Have the white prints available for inspection at the site at all times, and present them for scrutiny
at all job meetings. Transfer all information onto the set of transparencies. Obtain the Contractor's
approval before forwarding these to the Consultant. Submit two sets of white prints to the
Consultant for checking and approval.
Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies and five sets of white prints to the consultant for
onward transmission to the client.
8.2
Show on the record transparencies the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the
building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in relation
to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation to floor level
of the building and give reference datums to Municipal benchmarks.
8.3
Indicate exact location of all services left for future work. Show and dimension all work
embedded in the structure.
M - 10
VOLUME-III
9.0
TEMPORARY SERVICE.
9.1
Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific written
approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically allowed elsewhere
in the Contract Documents.
9.2
The use of permanent facilities for temporary services will not affect, in any way, the
commencement day of the period in which the correction after completion is the Contractor's
responsibility. Such period will commence only when the overall project is completed and
certificates of acceptance are issued.
9.3
In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity during construction,
supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct capacity (which must be approved by
the Consultant.)
Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure site
power at all times.
9.4
The Contractor is to ensure that permanent services are operating within the show flat to allow its
use for the Client sales teams at the earliest opportunity, this must be identified and agreed with
the main contractor.
10.0
COOPERATION
10.1
Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and
arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of the
Contract.
10.2
Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.
10.3
Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work daily.
11.0
PROTECTION AND STORAGE
11.1
Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.
11.2
Protect all mechanical, plumbing & electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and
clean at all times.
11.3
Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in ducts and pipes
with polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made.
The quality of such cover must be determined with due regard to how long it may be until final
connection.
11.4
Be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any walls, floors,
ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, services, roads, gardens, etc.
12.0
EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT

Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in that
area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by himself if
not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be deemed
responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the Consultant
forthwith.
M - 11
VOLUME-III
13.0
SUPERVISION.
13.1
The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,
qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
The Contractor team is to be headed by a suitably qualified Engineer who will act as the MEP
Project Manager, he is to be assisted by Senior Engineers for Electrical, Mechanical, Fire Alarm
and Commissioning and covering each discipline as required and resident on the site full time
supported by a suitable structure of supervision based on a standard hierarchy format.
13.2
Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and
Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the proposed
Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the onus is
on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.
13.3
Where the Contractor's or Subcontractor's staff is, or becomes during the Contract deficient in the
choice of adequate or acceptable personnel, the Contractor is to remedy the situation by
appropriate measures.
13.4
Approval of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the
withdrawal of that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In
the event of such disapproval then the Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated
above within 14 days.
13.5
In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right to
order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a " forthwith" basis.
The Contractor will remedy the situation on a similar forthwith basis and in any event will not be
allowed to proceed with any area of work which as a result is left without proper supervision or
technical backup until such time as the Consultant is again satisfied by the measures taken.
14.0
SCHEDULING.
14.1
In the event that a completion date has been set before tendering it will be the obligation of the
Contractor to provide a schedule adequate for all trades to meet the completion date.
14.2
If no completion date is specified it will be the obligation of the Contractor to provide to the
Consultant a proposed schedule of work including mechanical trades, within 21 days of award of
Contract. This schedule will be either approved by, or negotiated with, the Consultant.
15.0
WORK TO CONTINUE.
15.1
Unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Consultant the works are to continue to
completion in the most expeditious manner.
16.0
STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES.
16.1
All equipment and installations shall be in accordance with local Codes and Regulations. In
general, all equipment and installation shall also be in accordance with :
-
Uniform plumbing code of USA.
National Plumbing Code
M - 12
VOLUME-III
Institute of Plumbing (UK)
ASTM
ISO
AWWA
ASME
UL Laboratories
16.2
Obtain approval of shop drawings from Authorities (Including the master plan developer or their
representatives) having jurisdiction including but not limited to Drainage Department,
Municipality, Ministry of Water and Electricity, Fire Brigade, Department of Health, and local
telephone authority. All costs towards such approvals to be borne by the contractor.
17.0
WORKMANSHIP.
17.1
Install equipment, ductwork, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a neat
appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install ducts and pipes
parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. Install all piping and ductwork concealed in
chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished areas. Install all exposed systems
neatly and group to present a neat appearance.
17.2
Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.
17.3
Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or eventual
replacement with due allowance for this.
17.4
Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation and avoid
placing them behind obstructions.
17.5
Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.
17.6
Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.
17.7
Replace all work unsatisfactory to the Consultant without extra cost and to the standard required
by the Consultant. This applies to any item which is found to be defective in service during the
maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.
17.8
Where height dimensions are given, the installation shall be reasonably expected to be within 1/8"
(3mm) of the design dimensions. Where room centre or proportion dimensions are not shown
these shall be reasonably expected to be located on site to within 1/2" (13mm) of actual position.
17.9
Items displaying a horizontal dimension or edge must be plumbed with a level, and must be to the
Consultant's satisfaction. Any apparent discrepancy between "level" electrical items and adjacent
items MUST be reported immediately to the Consultant.
18.0
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.
18.1
All materials used on the project shall be brand new and of high quality. Obtain approval of all
manufacturers from the Consultant and the Owner.
M - 13
VOLUME-III
18.2
"New" is defined as newly manufactured, "state of the arts," tested and proven item of equipment.
Items which have been held in stock for any extended period of time by either the Manufacturer
or the Supplier will be rejected.
18.3
All materials used on this project shall bear the third party quality assurance stamp like British
Standard kitemark, UL, FM, NFPA and/or other quality assurance authority as stated herein
elsewhere.
19.0
CLEANING.
19.1
Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up, vacuum, wipe down, remove labels
and markings from equipment and remove from the premises all rubbish, surplus material,
equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in the performance of the work.
Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings clear and free from rubbish, waste, dust, dirt,
debris and sand. Equipment is to be spotless and in Brand New condition at handover complete
with new or thoroughly cleaned filters and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.
19.2
Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over-painting,
etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
20.0
ACCESSIBILITY.
20.1
Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair without
removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other materials. For the large Air
Handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be built up on site from components
which can be taken into the area. Any openings, framing or special lifting equipment which may
be required shall be included by the General Contractor.
20.2
Any item of equipment needing maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for

maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other
materials.
20.3
Cleanouts shall be located to permit rodding of all drain lines. These shall be located wherever
possible external to occupied areas, and to minimize spillage problems during rodding.
21.0
CUTTING AND PATCHING.
21.1
Inform all other Divisions in time concerning required openings. Obtain the approval of the
Consultant before doing any cutting.
21.2
Obtain the approval of the Consultant before doing any cutting. Supporting members of any floor,
wall or the building structure shall only be cut and in such a manner as approved by the
Consultant. All reinstatement work must be done to the same standard as the original work.
22.0
INSERTS, SLEEVES, ESCUTCHEONS AND CURBS.
22.1
Under this section supply necessary sleeves and other inserts to other trades.
22.2
Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and anchors,
properly sized for the load to be carried. Place inserts only in portions of the main structure and
not in any finishing material.
22.3
Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where approved by
the Consultant and for light weights.
M - 14
VOLUME-III
22.4
Do not use powder activated tools except with the written permission of the Consultant.
22.5
Supply and locate all inserts, holes, anchor bolts, and sleeves in good time when walls, floors, and
roof are erected.
22.6
Pass insulation unbroken where pipe or duct is insulated. Size sleeves to provide adequate
clearance all around.
22.7
Use the following materials for pipe sleeves:

a)
b)
22.8
Through all interior walls above grade use uPVC Class D pipes, machine cut, flush with
finished structure. For non metallic pipe crossing in fire wall use steel pipe (medium).
Through all exterior walls above grade use uPVC Class D pipes, machine cut, flush with
finished structure inside and to suit flashing on outside.
c)
Through all exterior walls below grade and all other waterproof walls use uPVC Class D
sleeves, machine cut. Check flashing specification for further details.
d)
Through all waterproof floors, janitor's closets, mechanical rooms, kitchens, roofs, use
uPVC Class 150 sleeves, machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm above finished floor
upwards and cut flush with underside of floor. Refer to flashing detail through waterproof
floors.
e)
Provide 100 mm high, 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs with 20 mm chamfered
edges around all pipes passing through waterproof floors except where furred in. Read
Concrete specification before proceeding with curbs. All gaps to be filled up with
waterproof type sealant.
f)
Where uPVC pipes pass through fire rated walls/partitions, provide fire rated sleeves.
Pack all sleeves between the insulated pipe and the sleeve or where un-insulated between the pipe
and the sleeve with loose fibreglass insulation. Seal the annular space as follows:
a)
For all horizontal sleeves in exposed areas, use a seal equal or better fire rated than the
wall to be sealed.
b)
For all vertical sleeves through roofs, janitor's closets, equipment rooms, use permanently
resilient silicone based sealing compound, non- inflammable and waterproof.
Ensure that the seal is compatible with floor and ceiling finishes. Check the room
finishing schedules for further details and clarify if necessary with the Consultant.
c)
Cover exposed floor and wall pipe sleeves in finished areas with satin finish chrome or
nickel plated solid brass or with satin finished stainless steel escutcheons with
non-ferrous set screws. Split cast plates of the screw locking type may not be used. Do
not use stamped steel friction type split plates
Through roofs, provide curbs and sleeves as shown on drawings and to suit flashing
requirements.
22.9
Use the following sleeving for ducts:

For rectangular duct openings through walls and floors a removable hardwood box-out shall be
provided of the required size. soft wood or plywood will not be acceptable. Hardwood shall be
further protected with anti termite paint / solvent.
M - 15
VOLUME-III
Through fire walls, build fire dampers into wall, or make detailed fixing in accordance with DW
144 / SMACNA Standards.
Through floors where ducts are not furred in or enclosed in a duct shaft, provide 100 mm high
and 100 mm wide watertight concrete curbs, with 25 mm chamfered edges all around. Extend
sleeves where used flush to top of curb. Read Concrete Specification before proceeding. Through
floors where duct is enclosed in a duct shaft or furred in, provide the watertight curbs at the
extreme top and bottom only.
22.10
After ducts are installed, pack the opening and seal the packing as follows:
a)
Use fibreglass insulation for packing except through curbed concrete floors where
asbestos braid must be used.
b)
Seal the asbestos braid packing in openings through floors with permanently resilient
silicone base non inflammable waterproof compound. Press duct supports firmly down
into caulking before bolting it down to curb.
c)
Through all vertical walls seal the fibreglass packing using permanently resilient silicone
based sealant.
22.11
Brace duct sleeves and box-outs to retain their position and shape during the pouring of concrete
and other work.
22.12
Provide bracing for each duct at every passage through structure to prevent sagging.
22.13
Cover exposed pipework, gullies, duct sleeves and openings in exposed areas. Use 100 mm
galvanized steel escutcheons in the form of a duct collar or screw fixed pipework cap or similar
approved protection. Over curbs extend the collar 30 mm down the side of the curb, similar to
counter flashing Fix collar in place with Cadmium plated screws.
23.0
ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.
23.1
Install all concealed mechanical equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations

easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a
minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.
23.2
Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all pertinent
information for installation.
Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where applicable
23.3
Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with other
trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to obtain approval.
23.4
Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of structure and
Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a minimum opening of
600 x 450 mm.
23.5
Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations
23.6
Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
23.7
Provide panels in glazed tile walls of 2.6mm thick 304 alloy stainless steel, no. 4 finish, with
recessed frame secured with stainless steel, countersunk, flush-headed screws.
M - 16
VOLUME-III
23.8
Provide panels in plaster surfaces with dish shaped door and welded metal lath, ready to take
plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
23.9
Provide other access doors of welded 2.6 mm thick steel, flush type with concealed hinges, lock
and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat. Submit details to Consultant for approval.
24.0
FLASHING.
24.1
Flash all mechanical and electrical parts passing through or built into a roof, an outside wall, or a
waterproof floor.
24.2
Provide uPVC sleeves with puddle flanges for services crossing water proofed walls in basement.
24.3
Provide stainless steel puddle flanged connections where pipework penetrates walls of the water
storage tank.
24.4
All flashing shall suit roof angle and shall extend a minimum of 400 mm on all sides. Leave the
flashing as directed by the Contractor for him to build into the roofing system to render a
completely watertight connection.
24.5
Provide counter flashing on all stacks, ducts, and pipes passing through roofs to fit over flashing
or curb.
24.6
Flash pipes through waterproof floors as per approved detail.
24.7
Provide pipes and sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashings and as
directed by the Consultant. All visual aspects of such sleeves to be approved by the Consultant.
24.8
Pay special attention to the waterproofing conditions of basements and walls and floors that may
exist. Cooperate at all times with the waterproofing trade and do not cut or destroy any
waterproofing seal without the consent of the waterproofing trade.
Provide piping sleeves passing through waterproof walls with asphalt roofing felt wrapped
around so as to leave a 25 x 50 mm recess on both sides of the wall. These recesses and the space
between pipe and sleeve will be caulked by the General Contract, Moisture protection, or
Waterproofing, Division.
25.0
GENERAL WELDING REQUIREMENTS.
25.1
All welding shall be generally in accordance with ANSI B31. This will be modified where
appropriate for other materials and may be relaxed or varied by order of the Consultant, provided
that the Contractor has made a reasonably comprehensive request for an alternate.
25.2
Tack welds shall be performed by fully qualified welders and all tack welds shall be of a length
equal to twice the pipe thickness and shall fully penetrate the pipe walls.
25.3
Where welding is carried out in the proximity of inflammable materials special precautions shall
be taken to prevent risk of fire or other damage to the building fabric.
25.4
Where oxyacetylene cutting equipment or any welding plant is being used by an operative for any
of the works defined in the contract documents, then fire extinguishers shall be supplied and
carried as part of the equipment. The operators of cutting and welding equipment shall be trained
in the use of the fire extinguishers which they carry and all extinguishers shall be fully charged
and ready for use. In all cases, extinguishers shall be positioned immediately adjacent to the
position where cutting and welding is being carried out and shall be readily accessible for use in
the event of an emergency.
M - 17
VOLUME-III
25.5
All accommodation, benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen or electricity, filler rods and
electrodes, which are necessary for installations where welding is required shall be provided as
part of this contract.
25.6
Welding shall not be done at a temperature of 5 degrees Centigrade or below unless the parent
metal is preheated by torches or other approved means until it is warm to the hand (about 27
degrees C) for about 150mm either side of the joint. No welding shall be done below minus 18
degrees C. After preheating, the heated portion including the welded joints shall be covered with
muffs or suitable insulation materials to allow cooling free from draughts. Any open ends of the
pipe or assembly shall be effectively sealed to prevent heat flow by convection.
25.7
All welded pipe assemblies shall be constructed so that individual welded joints do not affect
each other. The distance between the centres of adjacent welds shall be not less than twice the
bore diameter of the pipe.
25.8
No welded joints shall be left partially completed. Any joints tacked in position must be promptly
finished within the working day. The Consultant will reject all work not done in accordance with
this instruction.
25.9
Where work is rejected, pipes must be machine cut at least 150 mm either side of rejected welds
and proper weld preparation must be used on the shortened sector. Where shorter fill-in sections
are required because of such rejection and reworking, then new full sized lengths must be
supplied by the Contractor.
25.10
Where pipes with longitudinal seams are specified, pipe seams shall be arranged such that
adjacent seams are opposed 45 deg. from each side of top dead centre and branches shall be made
only with weldable fittings
25.11
All filler metals which are coated shall be protected from excessive moisture changes. Filler
materials or flexes which show any sign of deterioration shall not be used. If requested by the
Consultant samples of filler rods to be used shall be submitted to him for approval before any
work is done on site.
These may be submitted, at the Contractor's cost, to an independent testing laboratory for
verification.
26.0
TESTS FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION.
26.1
The purpose of the welder's qualification tests is to determine the ability of the welders to make
sound and acceptable welds. Before any site welding on the contract is allowed, each proposed
welder shall carry out the tests required in the presence of the Consultant, or the Employer's
Insurance Inspector.
26.2
Any weld test specimens which have been suitably marked and approved shall be kept on site by
a responsible person, so that they can be produced at any time, at the request of the Consultant.
26.3
All accommodation, benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen, electricity, test pieces,
filler rods, electrodes, facilities for cutting and grinding, polishing, bending and examining, which
are necessary for welders qualification tests shall be provided by the Contractor. In the absence of
any items for inspecting the welds, the Consultant may submit the finished samples to an
independent laboratory for testing at the Contractor's expense.
26.4
Under no circumstances shall a welder be employed on the contract, either on or off the site for
welding operations other than those for which that welder is qualified.
M - 18
VOLUME-III
26.5
Copies and records of all test reports shall be promptly given to and kept by the Consultant.
26.6
Even welders holding a certificate for welding are to be tested at this job site in full accordance
with the specifications.
26.7
Tests for Qualification on Steel Pipes
26.7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding and brazing and shall provide the
testing of the welders employed. Certificates of such proficiency test, together with stamped
samples provided for Engineers review before welding work is commenced. The welders
proficiency standard to be equal to Lloyds Standard Class 2, certified by an authorized testing
laboratory paid for the contractor.
26.7.2 Qualification tests will be made for butt and branch welds in pipes. One test piece per welder
will be required for the qualification of welding of pipes exceeding 100m nominal diameter.
26.7.3 In addition, test pieces will be required for each position of a pipe. These positions will be
horizontal and rotated while welding, horizontal and fixed while welding, vertical and fixed while
welding for each range of nominal diameters specified.
27.0
TESTING OF WELDED PIPEWORK INSTALLATION.
27.1
Testing of welded pipework installation shall be by either destructive of non-destructive test

method.
27.2
Each butt-welded test piece to be subjected to two root bend tests and two nick break tests of the
welding.
Each branch welded test piece will be subjected to two root bend tests and two fillet break tests of
the welding.
Each test piece weld to be radiographically examined.
27.3
The Contractor shall assign an identification symbol to identify each welder and this will be used
to stamp the work done by that welder.
27.4
The Contractor will compile a set of safety instructions concerning welding procedures for the
welders and after review by the Engineer, these will be issued to the welding operatives and
foremen.
27.5
The Contractor shall allow for two percent of all the welds to be radiographically examined.
Determination of piping sections to be tested will be designated by the Engineer.
The timing of the radiographic examination of a weld or welds designated to be so examined will
be confirmed in writing by the Engineer during the installation and commissioning.
Radiographic examination of welds will be carried out by a specialist employed by the Contractor
subject to review by the Engineer. The specialist so employed will be responsible for the proper
indexing, interpretation and reporting of the results of the radiographic tests.
27.6
Any weld, whether radiographically tested or not which are considered by the Engineer to be
faulty, either in whole or in part, or which have failed under hydraulic or other tests so designated
by the Engineer, will be removed and replaced by the Contractor.
M - 19
VOLUME-III
27.7
The faulty part of a weld may be removed by flame gouging, chipping or grinding. Otherwise,
the Engineer may instruct that the portion of the works containing the fault weld be cut out and
replaced by the welding in of a new section of pipe or member.
27.8
Should any of the welders work (as defined by the Engineer) be found to be faulty during
radiographic tests, then that welder shall be removed from site and all other welds undertaken by
that welder shall be checked by radiographic means and replaced as necessary at the expense of
the contractor.
27.9
The extra radiography involved shall not be part of the 2% inspection previously stipulated.
28.0
PAINTING, IDENTIFICATION AND VALVE TAGS
28.1
All painting of plant, equipment, storage vessels, and the like, and all surfaces to be painted in the
areas where such items are installed, including generator area, condenser areas, etc., shall be
carried out by an approved specialist painting contractor.
28.2
Painting shall be applied to all exposed pipework, ductwork and associated components, valves,
fittings, etc., equipment, supports of any kind, insulation, plain mild steel, copper, or cast iron
surfaces. Where movement is required between adjacent surfaces, request clarification from the
Consultant.
28.3
The following items do not require site painting:

(a)
(b)
28.4
Insulation having any of the following finishes:

(1)
Aluminium foil.
(2)
Hot Dip Galvanized angles / channels
(3)
Polyisobutylene sheeting / bitumen coating.
(4)
Vinyl-glass/ resin-aluminium foil laminate.
Equipment or plant or supports or frames delivered to site with any of the following
finishes:
(1)
Painted finish, other than primed only, provided that the finish is not damaged in
any way.
(2)
Stainless steel or plastic coated steel.
(3)
Stoved enamel.
All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared by thoroughly cleaning and removing all rust, grease,
oil, dirt and surface corrosion, using wire brush, emery paper and/ or degreasing medium as
required. The paint shall be applied in accordance with the maker's instructions and the type of
paint to be used shall be in accordance with the following:
Ferrous surface, one coat of Calcium Plumbate metal primer plus wash primers as necessary,
followed by 2 undercoats and one finishing coat.
Non-Ferrous surface, one coat of zinc chromate primer plus wash primers as necessary, followed
by 2 undercoats, and one finishing coat.
All paint shall be manufactured by approved manufacturer and type of paint shall be selected by
the manufacturer based on the location i.e. Indoor / Outdoor.
M - 20
VOLUME-III
28.5
For factory applied finishes, repainting or refinishing of any surfaces damaged during shipping,
erection or construction shall be done using only factory supplied materials.
28.6
After insulation or final painting is completed, identify each piped and ducted service. Locate
identification bands, stickers and arrows :
(a)
Behind each access door.
(b)
At each change of direction on all joining pipes and ducts.
(c)
At not more than 10 meters apart in straight runs of exposed pipes and ducts, but on both
sides of sleeves.
(d)
At not more than 10 meters apart in straight runs of pipes and ducts behind removable
enclosures such as lay-in ceiling but on both sides of sleeves.
(e)
Above each floor or platform for pipes in shaft and vertical exposed pipes, preferably 1.5
meters above floor or platform level.
28.7
Identification Bands, stickers and arrows shall be made of self adhesive plastic long lasting type.
The stickers when used outdoor shall be weatherproof type suitable for the temperature in KSA.
28.8
Identification of ductwork shall be carried out as per DW 144 standards coloured triangle with the
type of service. Additionally the AHU / FAN reference no shall be identified in the ducts.
28.9
All insulated or un-insulated pipework shall be identified as detailed above by means of PVC tape
identification bands in accordance with British Code to BS 1710.
In addition the name of the service and flow direction arrow shall be provided.
28.10
The access doors and fire dampers in duct shall be identified by a suitable sticker.
28.11
All identifying band colours and finishing colour of services shall be agreed with the Consultant
prior to application.
28.12
All equipment shall have a nameplate secured to the item giving the following information:
Equipment reference number (as indicated on the record drawings.)
Make / Model No.
System.
Room / Area served.
Duty / output information.
Power fed from :
The name plate shall be 100 x 100 mm approximately, of white plastic 3 mm thick with the above
information engraved in black lettering and the plate shall be secured by screws, bolts, clips, etc.,
as appropriate to the item concerned.
This plate is in addition to any name plate supplied by the manufacturer of the item giving
detailed specification information for the equipment.
M - 21
VOLUME-III
28.13
All main valves in plant room, roof, risers shall be numbered system wise, each with a unique
number. The number shall be engraved in a tag 30mm dia and suspended with a stainless steel
chain from the valve handle.
The tag shall be of aluminium material for outdoors and plastic indoor.
The piping schematic diagrams shall have the valve numbers with valve chart and the same shall
be enclosed as a part of operating instruction and shall be framed with glass and displayed in the
relevant plant rooms.
29.0
FLUSHING AND CLEANING.
29.1
Flush all fluid-carrying systems after completion with a stream of water or appropriate fluid at the
highest obtainable pressure and velocity. Discharge the flushing fluid through all strainers and
out through line sized valves with hose ends. Clean all strainers. Repeat flushing operation to the
approval of the Consultant until the water is running clear, colourless and odourless and the
conductivity is no more than 30 ms/cm above the mains water.
29.2
If the water pressure normally available on site is, in the Consultant's opinion, inadequate to
perform proper flushing, then the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, pumps, tanks, etc.,
to give pressure and volume flows to the Consultant's satisfaction.
29.3
For layer systems, the flushing and cleaning shall be carried out in sections of every three floors.
29.4
During flushing and cleaning all cooling coils, heat exchangers shall be bypassed in order to
avoid debris / dirt going to coils.
30.0
INSPECTION, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
30.1
All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected and commissioned in
accordance with all relevant Specifications, and Codes of Practice and to the entire satisfaction of
the Consultant.
30.2
The Contractor shall employ the services of a specialist company approved by the Engineer
regularly engaged in providing a testing balancing and commissioning service and who has been
in continuous business for not less than 7 years employing fully trained staff having not less than
3 years dedicated experience.
A senior experienced Commissioning Engineer with minimum dedicated experience of 7 years
shall be responsible for supervising and directing the activities for the testing and commissioning
team.
30.3
Carryout all tests specified. Carry out all tests required by Authorities having jurisdiction. Test
equipment to the requirements of, and where necessary, in the presence of the Manufacturer.
30.4
Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, loading devices, incidentals, and pay for all fuel,
power and sundries required to carry out the tests.
30.5
All installations shall be inspected and tested in sections as the work proceeds and on completion
as composite systems and it shall be noted that the Consultant or any of the other relevant
Authorities may require to inspect or test any equipment during manufacture at the
Manufacturer's works. All necessary arrangements shall be made as part of this Contract.
This will generally not apply to specified items unless specifically noted in these documents, but
may be necessary for alternate equipment, should this be considered at all.
M - 22
VOLUME-III
30.6
All tests shall be arranged in cooperation with the Consultant and his Engineer and all other
concerned parties and shall be subject to at least five (5) days notice in writing of the time,
location and nature of the test to be performed. No test shall be considered valid unless the
Consultant is present.
30.7
All necessary skilled and unskilled labour shall be provided for attendance during the tests
(including pre- and post- test activities,) and the test media shall be provided and subsequently
disposed of except where specifically stated otherwise.
30.8
The testing and adjusting is the contractual responsibility of the Contractor but actual
performance of the tests is expected to be the sole responsibility of the Subcontractor.
30.9
Have all testing and balancing performed by only persons who are thoroughly versed in this type
of testing and balancing and with proven ability. Submit names, complete with experience
records, and references for approval of the Consultant.
30.10
Any defects occurring at any time during the test duration shall be made good and a complete
re-test shall be carried out, all at no cost to the Contract.
30.11
Where failure occurs during a test, inspection or commissioning procedure which results in
damage to the building fabric and/ or any services not provided as part of this Contract, or
requires subsequent builder's work to be carried out, carry out all such repair work to the entire
satisfaction of the Consultant at no cost to the Owner or the Consultant.
30.12
All test points shall be provided which are necessary to carry out the specified tests and
commissioning procedures including facilities for measuring or monitoring temperature, pressure,
pressure drop, volume flow, in-duct sound power or sound pressure, humidity, or other relevant
conditions in both air side and water side systems. Such points shall be fitted with removable
plugs, flanges, or other appropriate and approved devices.
30.13
Prepare test report forms for each test to be performed and submit these to the Consultant at least
two weeks prior to the commencement of any tests.
30.14
Test only after the system installation has been completed and the system has been put into
continuous operation. Perform the testing, adjusting, and balancing when outside conditions are
commensurate with the design conditions for the given system. Add dummy loads to the system
if outside and inside conditions are less severe than the specified points.
30.15
Prepare a complete list of instruments for each test containing for each instrument:
-
Name of instrument Manufacturer.

Scale and full scale accuracy.
Date of last calibration test.
Name of last calibrating company.
All instruments and consumables, such as recording paper, necessary for conducting the tests
shall be provided, including but not limited to the following:
-
Tube type velometer.

Sloping tube manometer.
Pitot tubes of various lengths.
Mercury in glass thermometers.
Weekly recording thermometers & digital thermometers.
Weekly recording relative humidity meter.
M - 23
VOLUME-III
30.16
Anemometer for diffusers, with collector.

Ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter.
Power factor meter.
Insulation tester.
Earth loop impedance tester.
Tachometer.
Duplicate signed test certificates shall be provided after each test which will be countersigned by
the Consultant who witnesses the test. The test certificate shall give the following particulars:-
Apparatus or section under test.

Maker's number (if any).
Nature, duration and conditions of test.
Result of test.
No test shall be valid until the test certificate is provided.

30.17
Duplicate copies of test certificates carried out at Manufacture's works shall be forwarded to the
Consultant for approval prior to despatch of the article to site.
30.18
No section of the works shall be insulated or in any other way concealed prior to testing and
inspection and subsequent concealment where applicable shall only take place following written
authority from the Consultant.
30.19
All necessary facilities, measuring and recording instruments including test pumps and gauges for
inspection, testing and commissioning requirements shall be provided and shall be checked or
calibrated as necessary before use.
The Consultant reserves the right to call for a demonstration of the accuracy of any instruments
provided.
30.20
All representatives present during inspection, testing and commissioning shall be fully conversant
with the system concerned and the method of system and instrument operation.
Manufacturer's or Specialist Subcontractors' representatives shall attend where specifically
indicated elsewhere in the specification or where necessary to ensure full service and cooperation
is available to the Consultant to enable the works to be tested and commissioned in accordance
with the requirements of the specification.
30.21
All necessary precautions shall be taken to safeguard against damage during inspection, testing or
commissioning. Any damage so caused shall be made good at no cost to the contract.
30.22
All tests shall last for the minimum time period stated or longer if necessary to ensure all sections
have been fully examined as required by the test.
One set of test instruments shall be made available during the warranty period to check the
system whenever required.
31.0
TEMPORARY USAGE.
31.1
The Consultant reserves the right to use any piece of electrical and mechanical equipment,
device, or material installed under this section for such reasonable lengths of time as may be
required to make a complete and thorough test of same before the final completion and
acceptance of the work.
M - 24
VOLUME-III
Such tests shall not be construed as acceptance of any part of the work, and it is agreed and
understood that no claim for damage will be made for any injury or breakage to any part or parts
of the above due to these tests, where caused by weakness, inaccuracy of parts, or by defective
materials or workmanship.
32.0
INSPECTION OF THE WORK.
32.1
The representatives of the Owner and the Consultant will make periodic visits to the site during
construction to ascertain that the work is being executed in reasonable conformity with all plans
and specifications, but will not execute quality control at all times. Each Subcontractor must
maintain the quality control as intended in the contract documents.
32.2
Correct all deficiencies immediately as noted during field inspections.
32.3
Request in writing that a final inspection of all services.

Do not issue this written request until:
All deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
All systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation.
All balancing reports have been submitted and reviewed.
All instruction manuals have been submitted and reviewed.
The cleaning up is finished in all respects.
All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided and receipt of the same
acknowledged.
33.0
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER.
33.1
Instruct the Owner's staff how to make minor adjustments, carry out necessary maintenance and
how to operate each system.
For new equipment, provide the Consultant with three copies of complete operating and
maintenance instructions for equipment at the time of delivery of the equipment.
Equipment will be rejected unless accompanied by instructions. Such documents must be
received at least one month prior to the completion date of the relative section of the works.
Instructions shall be bound in a suitable loose leaf booklet or binder, and shall include:
a)
b)
Prints of the following drawings:

1)
List of all equipment installed.
2)
General layout.
3)
Wiring diagram of control panels.
4)
Non-dimensional layout, showing location of all electrical devices

Switches etc.).
(Limit
Operation instructions, include start-up and shutdown procedure.
M - 25
VOLUME-III
c)
Maintenance instructions, including

components of the equipment.
preventative
maintenance
instructions
for
d)
Lubricating instruction and recommended cycle of lubrication.
e)
Complete parts list, showing manufacturer's name and catalogue number.
f)
Complete list of recommended spare parts for 2 year operation with price list for each
item of equipment.
The contractor is to prepare a draft for discussion with the Consultant prior to finalising the
documents.
Portable tools and spare parts shall be correctly labelled and handed over to the Consultant.
The Contractor is to provide operating and maintenance instruction and training presentations and
demonstration for the maintenance staff, these should be based on the content of the Operation
and Maintenance manuals and in sufficient detail to talk the Contactor through the practicalities
of the work on the site in situ.
33.2
The section dealing with complete systems shall be subdivided into each service with a ready
means of reference and detailed index. The function and manner of operation of each system shall
be clearly described together with illustrations and line diagrams in schematic form showing the
location and function of control valves, items of equipment and spaces or areas which are served
by these items. The colour coding and identification systems employed shall be explained.
34.0
COMMISSIONING OF SERVICES.
The Commissioning of HVAC and other mechanical systems shall be carried out by one of the
specialized commissioning agencies approved by the Engineer. The agency shall be appointed by
the MEP Contractor at an early stage of the project. The commissioning agent shall be an
approved company by client.
34.1
All piping systems shall be flushed, chemically cleaned and then filled with treated water, or
appropriate fluid, vented as necessary, and brought to operating conditions and the flows then
regulated to the design values.
34.2
All water circuits shall be balanced by means of the regulating valves provided and flow rates
shall be determined on a temperature and pressure drop basis.
Flow through pumps shall be measured by relating the pressure drop across the pump to
manufacturers test curves. A copy of the test curve indicating the final operating point shall be
forwarded to the Consultant.
34.3
All refrigerant systems shall be vacuumed, purged and charged according to A.S.H.R.A.E.
standard methods. All safety controls and interlocks will be tested as part of the commissioning
procedures.
34.4
Flow through coils shall be adjusted to give the design temperature difference. In general water
systems shall be balanced in accordance with the guidelines specified in NEBB Manual. Upon
completion of balancing and testing operations for heating and cooling systems, temperature
measurements shall be taken in all rooms and the readings tabulated in schedule form together
with hourly ambient temperature readings taken over the measuring period. Two copies of the
schedule shall be forwarded to the Consultant.
M - 26
VOLUME-III
34.5
All ventilating systems shall be commissioned in accordance with the procedures recommended
in the AABC / CIBSE Manual. Duplicate schedules of commissioning results shall be forwarded
to the Consultant and shall detail the recorded air volume and percentage deviation from design
air volume, for each air input and extract terminal. Wet and dry bulb temperature measurements
shall be taken in all rooms served by air supply systems and the results indicated on the schedule
of commissioning results.
These shall be recorded together with external ambient wet and dry bulb temperatures measured
at hourly intervals over the measuring period.
34.6
Sound pressure levels (dBA) shall be measured in all rooms containing supply or extract
terminals, all plant rooms, all rooms immediately adjacent to plant rooms and all rooms located
above or below plant rooms. The Consultant may at his discretion request a spectrum band
analysis of sound pressure in any locations.
34.7
All automatic controls shall be commissioned by the controls supplier.
34.8
Fault conditions shall be simulated and all alarms and safety devices shall function correctly.
Such proving tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Consultant and certificates shall be
provided specifically detailing all check procedures which have been carried out.
34.9
Following proving tests all installations shall be left in working order ready for handover.
34.10
All electrical systems shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with IEE regulations and
local authority codes.
35.0
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.
35.1
The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have inspected the
system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.
Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system acceptance, neither
does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The Consultant's acceptance may be
contingent on any or all of the following if applicable:
35.1.1 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their technical
representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are satisfied with the
methods of installation, connections and operation.
35.1.2 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.
35.1.3 Train owner's maintenance staff.
35.1.4 Satisfactory completion of 12 months guarantee period.
36.0
CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.
36.1
Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract for a period of one year
from the date of acceptance of the completed work, or if so noted, for longer periods for parts of
the work.
36.2
Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above and
repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work required by
other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair damage caused by
the failure of any part of this section.
M - 27
VOLUME-III
36.3
Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence when the
completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into operation. In the
event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to the Owner is involved,
this Contractor shall be liable to the full extent of the guarantee as indicated in the specification.
37.0
GUARANTEES
37.1.
The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least one year after
preliminary take over by the Owner.
37.2.
All warrantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of whether the
Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.
37.3.
Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges and
sundries.
37.4.
Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then the
guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.
38.0
MAINTENANCE.
38.1.
Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working

condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance period to
keep the equipment in best working order.
38.2.
Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than monthly.
38.3.
In the event that the Owner has his own staff, the Contractor is still to check monthly and advise
on any problems and is still to assume responsibility.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Refer to individual sections for requirements for execution of the work.
3.1.2
The flame spread rating for all materials shall be in accordance with the specifications mentioned
in each relevant section and in accordance with developer Requirements.
END OF SECTION
M - 28
VOLUME-III
DESIGN CRITERIA (MECHANICAL)

Mechanical Section 01 01 00: Design Criteria (Mechanical)
M-1
VOLUME-III
1.1
GENERAL
The Scope of works includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, testing and
commissioning of the various complete systems specified and shown on drawings.
The contractor shall be responsible to visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of
work, preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities
prior to execution of work.
2.0
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
The Mechanical services provided for this project are as follows:
2.1
Air Conditioning & Ventilation:

-
2.2
Plumbing (Water and Drainage):

-
2.3
Cold water services via central water tank.

Hot water services via solar hot water system and gas fired hot water boiler system.
Grey waste water recycling plant.
Sewerage drainage services.
Storm water drainage services.
Fire Protection Services:

-
2.4
Chilled water Central Air Conditioning system (Served via central chiller plant).
Mechanical Ventilation system.
Smoke Management & Staircase pressurization System.
Automatic Water sprinkler system.

Wet Riser network feeding landing valves and automatic hose reels.
Portable Fire Extinguishers.
Clean Agent Fire Suppression system for Electrical & Tel rooms
Wet Chemical Fire Suppression System for Kitchen hoods.
Foam-Water Sprinkler system for Generator room.
Building Management System:

-
Automatic Controls and Building Management System for all Mechanical and Electrical
Equipment / Systems.
3.0
AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS:
3.1
System Description
The project will be air conditioned via chilled water system with air cooled water chillers. The
plant shall comprise of chillers, primary pumps and secondary chilled water pumps, in addition to
the chemical treatment and pressurization unit.
The plant shall produce chilled water at 44 F (6.67 C) chilled water supply temperature and 56
F (13.33 C) chilled water return temperature (12 F delta T).
All the HVAC equipment shall be linked to the building management system (BMS) for
monitoring and control as specified.

M-2
VOLUME-III
3.2
Design Parameters:
Design, in general, shall be based on ASHRAE recommendations.
The following particular requirements shall be considered in detailed design
3.2.1
3.2.3
Design Conditions
External
115 F DB (46.1 CDB), 69.8 F WB (21.0 CWB) Summer.
Internal
75 F DB (24 C), 50% RH + 5% -Summer.
External
39.2 F DB (4 CDB), 34.16 F WB (1.2 CWB) Winter.
Internal
71.6 F DB (22 C), 50% RH + 5% -Winter.
Ventilation, Occupancy and Electrical Lighting & Power Requirements

The figures in the table below are intended for HVAC calculations as per ASHRAE standards
62.1-2007 for ventilation rates, and REZIDOR MEP Design Guidelines/Standards.
Area
Ventilation
Occupancy
Lighting Density
2.0 w/ft
Guest rooms
24 L/s
2 persons
Meeting rooms
3.1 L/s /person
1.5 Mtr/person
2.75 w/ft
Reception
4.8 L/s/person
3.3 Mtr/person
2.5 w/ft
Waiting area
3.5 L/s/person
3.3 Mtr/person
1.5 w/ft
Prayer rooms
2.8 L/s /person
0.8 Mtr/person
2.0 w/ft
Restaurant/ Cafeteria
5.1 L/s /person
1.75 Mtr/persons
2.75 w/ft
Entrance Lobbies
2.5 L/s / Person
10 Mtr/persons
2.5 w/ ft
Retail Shop
7.5 L/s /person
6.5 Mtr/person
2.0 w/ft
Gymnasium
7.26 L/s /person
2.0 Mtr/person
2.25 w/ft
Extract Air System

Extract Air
Area
-
Guest room Toilet
24 L/s
Public toilet WC cubicle
24 L/s
Commercial Kitchen
As per Kitchen Hood requirement
Commercial Laundry
As per Equipment requirements

M-3
VOLUME-III
3.2.4
Noise Levels
Noise levels shall be as specified in the Acoustic Report of the Acoustic Consultant.
Guest Rooms
NC 25- 30
3.2.5
Main Lobby
NC 40
Meeting / Executive Offices
NC 30
General Office rooms
NC 30-35
Prayer rooms
NC 25- 30
Corridors & Public Areas
NC 40
Kitchen, Laundry
NC 45
Plant rooms/ Car Parking
NC 55
Pressure Philosophy
Fresh Air requirement to each zone shall be generally determined by the level of extract from the
same, or to a value as required for the levels of occupancy in each zone, whichever is greater.
Toilets and Kitchens / Pantries any other area requiring extract shall be maintained under
negative pressure. Corridors shall be maintained under positive pressure.
3.2.6
Fire Philosophy & Smoke Management

Smoke / Heat detectors shall be positioned in all areas. A fire condition sensed by the detectors
will shut off the relevant FAHU / AHU through the fire alarm panel.
3.2.7
3.2.8
Air Filtration
Air filtration shall be based on ASHRAE 52-76.
Fresh Air handling units shall have two banks of filters; Primary filter EU4 and Final bag
filter EU9.
Ultra-violet emitter (UVC) shall be provided after the cooling coil in each recirculation
AHU in order to provide clean air by killing over 99% of all airborne pathogens
including fungi, moulds and yeasts and removing the noxious odors.
Fan coil units shall have 25mm thick cleanable panel filter at 25% efficiency.
Pipe & Duct sizing

-Chilled water inlet temperature to FCUs/AHUs:
-Chilled water outlet temperature from FCUs/AHUs:
44 F (6.67 C)
56 F (13.33 C)
-Pipe sizing
for pipes up 50mm
Water Velocity not to exceed (4 fps) P.D not to

exceed 6 ft / 100 ft.
-For Pipes above 50mm and

Upto 200 mm
P.D. not to exceed 4ft / 100 ft, velocity not to

exceed 8 fps

M-4
VOLUME-III
-For Pipes above 200 mm
Maximum velocity 10 fps
-Coil Connection Pipes to be sized for full

flow rate of respective coils.
-AHU / FCU Coil Face Area:
Air Velocity not to exceed 8 fps.
-Air Duct Sizes:
Pressure drop not to exceed 0.06 inch / 100 ft.
-Air Outlet Sizes:
Face Velocity through net Free Area not to exceed

500 fpm
-Duct Velocity supply:
1500 fpm in main ducts. (Pressure drop to be

limited to a maximum of 0.06 Pa/m
-Duct Velocity return: 1200 fpm

-Duct Velocity, Kitchen exhaust: 1800 fpm
-Duct Velocity, smoke extract: 2000 fpm
-Fresh air intake velocity at sand trap: 250
fpm
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
SECTION 018845 2
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL REQUIREMENT
1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Requirements for noise and vibration control of Mechanical, Electrical, and Public Health
(MEP) services.
B.
To prevent transfer of noise and vibration to occupied spaces and to prevent sound
insulation between spaces being degraded by services penetrations.
C.
This Specification shall be read in conjunction with all Equipment Data Sheets and
Schedules and all relevant Contract Drawings and Specifications.
D.
Where there are discrepancies between this Specification and other Specifications, with
regard to noise and vibration control, this Specification shall take preference, unless there
are specific technical or practical reasons that must take precedence over this
Specification, or unless otherwise instructed by the Employer or Engineer.
REFERENCES
A.
References shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
ASID American Society of Interior Designers (United States).
AHRI Air-conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (United States).
ANSI American National Standards Institute (United States).
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers (United States).
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (United States).
BCO British Council for Offices (United Kingdom).
BREEAM Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method
(United Kingdom).
BSI British Standards Institute.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization.
CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (England).
DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung e. V. (Germany).
EC European Commission. EN European Norms.

Section-018845-2 NOISE & VIBRATION CONTROL REQUIREMENT
M- 1
VOLUME-III
EPA Environmental Protection Agencies (United States & United Kingdom).
HVCA Heating & Ventilating Contractors Association.
IEC International Electrical Commission.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LEED Leadership in Energy and Environment Design (United States).
NFPA National Fire Protection Association (United States).
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
WHO World Health Organization.
B.
Related Specifications include Sections contained in the following Divisions, as prepared

specifically for this Project:
Division 1 General Requirements.
Division 10 Specialties.
Division 11 Equipment.
Division 13 Special Construction.
Division 14 Conveying Equipment.
Division 22 Plumbing.
Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
Division 26 Electrical.
Division 27 Communications.
C.
Related Acoustic Specifications include the following:

Section 018845-1 Acoustic Performance Requirements.
Section 230548-1 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.
Section 230593-1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
Section 233319 Duct Silencers.
Section 233353 Duct Acoustic Lining.
Section 260548-1 Noise and Vibration Control of Electrical Systems.

M- 2
VOLUME-III
1.03
CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Tender
Proposals:
The Contractor shall submit at the time of Tender the names and qualifications of the
noise and vibration control manufacturers. If a manufacturer is not one of the preapproved manufacturers, the submittal shall be accompanied by a complete
catalogue of that manufacturer's products and samples of each proposed vibration
and/or noise control hardware.
The Contractor shall supply at the time of tender the design sound power levels (Lw in
dB re 10-12 W) for the entire MEP device, or the design sound pressure levels (Lp in
dB re 2 x 10-5 Pa) at specified distances from each side of the device. This
information shall be submitted for each air moving, noise-generating and vibrationgenerating device including all
those described in this Specification and all others as described in the Contract
Documents and related Specifications.
If the actual sound power or sound pressure generated by any device exceeds the
levels for the equipment specified in the Contract Documents and related Schedules
and Specifications, the Contractor shall include in its price the cost for modifications
to compensate for the extra noise or vibration at no additional expense to others. Any
such modification shall be subject to the review and approval by the Engineer.
B.
Tender Submissions:
The Contractor shall submit detailed information on noise and vibration levels
associated with each equipment item to the Engineer prior to ordering plant and the
noise and vibration control hardware. This information shall demonstrate that the
selected plant and attenuating hardware can achieve the specified noise and
vibration criteria under the required design duties.
Prior to Contract Award, the Tenderer shall provide, as a minimum, the following
information with the Tender:
A statement of compliance with all related Specifications. Manufacturer's
details of the products and systems being offered.
Test certificates (in English or accompanied by a full English translation) from an
independent acoustic test laboratory to show compliance with the specified
acoustic performances for the products offered. Failing this, the Tenderer shall
allow in the Tender for the expense of such testing as necessary to show
compliance with this Specification and all other related Specifications.
After Contract Award, the Supplier shall provide, as a minimum, the following
information:

M- 3
VOLUME-III
Shop drawings showing the methods for installation of all equipment and
associated noise and vibration control measures.
Details for the complete noise and vibration control systems including
frames, seals, isolators, panels, etc., and all materials and methods for
acoustically sealing and fixing all elements and components.
C.
Laboratory Testing:
Certified and verifiable tests shall be provided in accordance with the standards
stated in this Specification and all other related Specifications.
Laboratory measurements shall be obtained from an independent acoustic test
laboratory, as approved by the Engineer, under test conditions on representative
samples (including joints, seals, bases, isolators, attenuators, etc.) of the products and
systems being offered. Test laboratories shall have certifications for their facilities,
including instrumentation, traceable to any of the following (or acceptable equivalent):
NAMAS (National Measurement Accreditation Service)
UKAS (United Kingdom Accreditation Service) NVLAP
(National Voluntary Laboratory Program) NIST (National
Institute of Science and Technology)
DIN EN ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing
and calibration laboratories.
Measurements obtained in accordance with equivalent standards acceptable to the
Engineer shall also be permitted, subject to their applicability.
Where existing data is available from a recognized independent test laboratory it
shall be considered acceptable providing the tests have been carried out for the
exact same product and system offered.
If test data is not available, within 8 weeks of the award of contract, or other period to
be advised by the Engineer, tests shall be undertaken in accordance with the
specified standards to demonstrate that the proposed products and systems,
together with the associated elements shown in the relevant Contract Drawings and
described in all related Specifications, comply with the specified performance
requirements.
D.
Mock-up Testing:
Where required and stated in the Contract Documents, Mock-up tests shall be
carried out for Air Handling Units (AHUs), Fans, Fan Coil Units (FCUs), Constant
Volume Units (CVs), Variable Air Volume Units (VAVs), Variable Refrigerant Volume Units
(VRVs) and any other MEP equipment as advised by the Engineer, to confirm compliance
with the acoustic performance requirements, as described below and in accordance with
all other related Specifications.

M- 4
VOLUME-III
The Mock-up room shall be constructed on site, at the manufacturers or
Subcontractors factory, or within an acoustic test laboratory. The relative merits of
each option shall be evaluated to ensure the following specified parameters are
achieved.
A representative unit of each proposed size shall be tested.
The unit(s) selected, shall be from the upper volume range for each size.
The unit(s) shall be complete with filters, coils, low velocity ductwork, plenum
box and diffusers, etc., to simulate a typical room/space layout.
All details of the proposed units and duties shall be submitted to the
Engineer for comment and acceptance.
The Mock-up room shall have the same nominal floor area and height as the area to
be served by that unit. The room/space shall be provided with a false ceiling of the
same type as proposed for the project, along with typical weaknesses to simulate
return air paths. Return air light fittings, diffusers, grilles and floor finishes shall be
fitted, as proposed for the Project, with the unit in its installed position within
the building. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to show the room/space in plan
and section along with the unit for comment and acceptance by the Engineer.
Where applicable, the Subcontractor shall ensure that noise from the discharge/outlet
side of the unit does not affect acoustic readings in the Mock-up room.
Prior to recording any noise levels, the background noise in the Mock-up room shall
preferably be at least 10 dB below the Mock-up room noise criterion, with a minimum
of 6 dB below.
The unit shall be set at its design speed and run on a 3 hour on /1 hour off basis for a
minimum of 200 hours prior to any acoustic testing, or other operational timing
sequence to be advised by the Engineer.
The units shall be operated at the agreed air volumes, which shall be verified by
separate measurement and accepted by the Engineer.
For VAV units, noise levels generated when the damper is closed to half flow at the
same total inlet pressure shall also be measured.
A minimum of 4 Nos. measurements shall be taken in the Mock-up room, which shall
be at least 1 m from a wall, or other measurement positions at least 1.2 m above the
floor. No individual measurement shall be exceeded by more than 2 dB and the
logarithmic average of all the measurements shall not exceed the Mock-up room
noise criterion.
Measurements shall be carried out by a competent person using a sound level meter
and octave band filter set complying with BS EN 60651 Type 1 which shall be
calibrated before and after use.

M- 5
VOLUME-III
The Subcontractor shall provide a report listing all test details, and measurements, to
show compliance with the Specifications.
A full method statement shall be prepared along with Shop Drawings, to show the
proposals for the Mock-up room and shall be submitted to the Engineer for
acceptance at least 20 working days prior to the day of the tests, or other period to be
advised by the Engineer.
E.
Site Testing:
All noise and vibration site tests and measurements shall be carried out in
accordance with Section 230593-1 (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC).
All other acoustic tests and measurements shall be carried out in accordance with
Section 018845-1 (Acoustic Performance Requirements). F.
Contractors and Manufacturers Responsibilities for Tests:
Noise data for items of plant not covered in this Specification or other related
Specifications shall also be provided by the Manufacturer or Supplier, to allow the
Contractor to demonstrate the following:
Confirm that the individual items of equipment offered shall achieve the
specified noise and vibration criteria in each space.
Identify which individual items of equipment offered require additional noise
and/or vibration control measures to ensure that the specified noise and
vibration criteria shall be achieved in each space.
All acoustic testing referred to in this Specification shall be allowed for in the
Contractor's Tender. A Method Statement for the test shall be provided in writing, not
less than 14 working days before the test, or other period to be advised by the
Engineer, for final acceptance by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be advised of the
date of the test, in writing, not less than 20 working days before the test, or other
period to be advised by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for testing
and securing approval for operation from the responsible legal authority having
jurisdiction over any item in this Specification and all other related Specifications.
The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing this Specification and considering
any special requirements from officials responsible for enforcing applicable codes
and standards. Where necessary, the Contractor shall make corrections, changes
and additions to the proposed methods and procedures for testing at no increase in
the Contract Price.
The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the completeness of the installations
and the overall suitability of the equipment to meet the intent of this Specification
and all other related Specifications. Any additional equipment needed to meet the
intent of this Specification, even if not specifically mentioned herein or in the Contract
Documents, shall be supplied by the Contractor without claim for additional
payment. The Contractor shall not construe performance or waiving of inspection,

M- 6
VOLUME-III
testing or surveillance by the Employer or Engineer to relieve the Contractor
from
total responsibility to perform in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents.
During any Laboratory, Mock-up or Site Tests, if any pure tones are audible, or of
there is doubt as to whether a pure tone exists, discrete frequency components tests
shall be undertaken. These shall be assessed as being significant and present in a
one-third octave band if the
measured sound power or pressure level in that one-third octave band exceeds the
arithmetic average of the measured sound power or pressure level in the two
adjacent one third octave bands by at least the values stated below:
<100
Discrete Frequency Sound Level Difference

Sound Pressure Levels in dB Leq (re 2 x 10-5 Pa)
Third Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
125
160
200
250
315-10k
6 dB
5 dB
4 dB
3 dB
3 dB
2 dB
If measurable tonal sound characteristics exist in the tested sound levels (as
determined by the discrete frequency test specified above), the Contractor shall
make every effort to eliminate them. Failure to achieve this shall require
attenuation of the pure tones by the amounts for each octave band given below:
Pure Tone Attenuation Requirements Sound
Pressure Levels in dB Leq (re 2 x 10-5 Pa) Octave
Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
1.04
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
3 dB
5 dB
9 dB
12 dB
14 dB
15 dB
NOISE CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A.

Acoustic Flexible Connections:
Where flexible connections are provided between a fan and its associated
attenuator/silencer (and at other positions shown on the Contract Drawings), they
shall be complete with the noise containment properties of the adjoining
ductwork system inclusive of any specified lagging.
Flexible connections shall typically be structured from sound barrier mat having a
minimum superficial density of at least 5 kg/m3.
Flexible connections shall be at least 50 mm long, straight but not rigid, with no
offset in order to prevent turbulence.
The acoustic flexible connections shall be measured in a test laboratory, accepted by
the Engineer, and designed to achieve the minimum performances tabulated below:

M- 7
VOLUME-III
In regard to Building Maintenance Units (BMUs), prospective manufacturers shall
consider the following:
Sound Reduction Index / Sound Transmission Loss
Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
10
13
13
13
The above performances shall be verified by measurements in a test laboratory in

accordance with the following, or acceptable equivalent, standards, which shall be
approved by the Engineer:
ASTM E 90: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
ISO 10140-1:2010 Acoustics - Laboratory measurement of sound insulation
of building elements Part 1: Application rules for specific products
B.
Acoustic Louvres:
Where shown on the Contract Drawings, or specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents,
or required as an additional means to control noise breakout to the environment,
acoustic louvres shall be purpose-built units constructed by a specialist manufacturer
with a minimum of 10 years of experience in acoustic louvre manufacture.
The acoustic louvres shall be constructed as single-banked or double-banked
systems, as required to meet the acoustic performance requirements, and designed
to prevent the ingress of rain and sand, under normally encountered meteorological
conditions in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
Sound transmission loss (STL) or sound reduction index (SRI) test data shall be
provided for acoustic louvers identical in every significant detail to those proposed,
for acceptance by the Engineer, before an order is placed/ This refers to airflow
velocity, pressure drop and, as far as is reasonable, entry and exit conditions, to
demonstrate that the following performance is achieved:
250
15
Sound Reduction Index / Sound Transmission

Loss
Octave Band Centre
Frequency
500
1k
2k
(Hz)
18
27
30
4k
33
The above STL or SRI performances shall be verified by measurements in a test

laboratory in accordance with ISO 10140-1, ASTM E 90 or acceptable equivalent
standards which shall be approved by the Engineer. Any extrapolation or calculation
used to produce the data shall be clearly stated. STL or SRI test data shall include
either, the static insertion loss and regenerated noise for the given airflow
M- 8
VOLUME-III
conditions, or both static and dynamic insertion losses for the given airflow
conditions.
The louvre frames shall be constructed from a suitable gauge of galvanised mild
steel, or aluminium, supporting louvre blades of similar material. The acoustic
material in the blades shall have a density of not less than 48 kg/m3, be inert, rot and
vermin proof, non-hygroscopic and composed of incombustible mineral fibre, faced
with mineral fibre tissue and retained on the lower blade by perforated,
galvanised mild steel or aluminium.
When the louvres are actually manufactured, each unit shall be shop assembled as a
whole unit unless the Contractor or Engineer instructs to the contrary.
If necessary, louvres shall be supplied with an integral bird screen of galvanised mild
steel or aluminium mesh, fixed in its internal face. The mesh pitch shall be a
maximum of 25 mm. The louvres shall be supplied complete with all necessary
fittings, flanges etc., for fitting into the louvered openings as required by
the Contractor or Engineer.
All gaps between the outside of the louvre frames and walls or ducts shall be made
good and sealed with a heavy grout and/or non-hardening, dense mastic.
C.
Acoustic Panels:
Documents, or required as an additional means to control noise breakout, acoustic
panels shall be fitted to walls and, if required, ceilings/soffits. These treatments apply
to large plena, plant rooms and builderswork shafts associated with, but not
limited to, chiller plant rooms, generator rooms, boiler/dilution flue rooms,
transformer rooms and exhaust fan rooms. These panels can also be used to build
acoustic enclosures around noisy plant items such as fans, motors, pumps and other
plant equipment.
The internal surfaces of the enclosure panels shall be designed to achieve the
minimum performances tabulated below using a Type A mounting as described in
ASTM E 795:
125
0.50
Random Incidence Sound Absorption Coefficient ()

250
500
1k
2k
4k
0.70
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
The above performances shall be verified by measurements in a test laboratory in

accordance with the following, or acceptable equivalent, standards, which shall be
approved by the Engineer:
ASTM C 423: Determination of Sound Absorption Coefficients in a
Reverberation Room.
ASTM E 795: Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During
M- 9
VOLUME-III
Sound Absorption Tests.
ISO 354: Acoustics - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation
room.
The acoustic enclosure panel systems (but excluding the effects of services
penetrations) shall be designed to achieve the following minimum performance
when measured in a test laboratory, accepted by the Engineer, in accordance with
ISO 10140-1, ASTM E 90 or acceptable equivalent standard which shall be approved
by the Engineer:
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
16
26
32
32
32
31
Where specified, the acoustic enclosure panels shall be constructed from galvanised
mild steel sheet at least 1.6 mm thick (16 swg) or as otherwise specified.
The absorbent internal lining shall be faced with glass fibre cloth or other infill
protection membrane and retained by perforated galvanised mild steel sheet having
an open area preferably in excess of 23%, with the whole panel not less than 50 mm
thick. Provision shall be made inside the panel to prevent settling of the acoustic
medium.
Full allowance shall be taken of any loss of insulation due to doors, windows,
ventilation openings through louvres/vents and panel joints.
Sections shall be designed to allow unskilled personnel to easily disassemble and
reassemble the parts without compromising the acoustic performance.
The Supplier shall ensure that the assembled enclosure is designed and constructed
to withstand site operating conditions such as wind or sandstorm loads, roof-mounted
plant, etc., and to be suitably weatherproofed for use outdoors.
D.
Air Cooled Condensers and Similar Types of Cooling Equipment:

Documents, Air Cooled Condensers, Dry Air Coolers or similar types of cooling
equipment shall be independently tested, in accordance with AHRI, ISO, Eurovent or
other accepted equivalent standards, in order to provide octave band noise data as
stated elsewhere in this Specification and/or other related Specifications. The tests
shall be carried out for the full range of operational volumes at pressure drops
equivalent to those expected in the installed systems.
To ensure minimal tonal noise is generated from the fan operations, electronic noise
filters or other noise-attenuating measures shall be provided. The noise filters shall
be factory-fitted items that consist of heavy copper coils inside a weatherproof IP55
enclosure where the copper coil will cut voltage peaks out of the controller
and smooth out tonal noises. Each noise filter shall have its dedicated capacitor

M- 10
VOLUME-III
supplied that will act as a compensator for the filters.
Based on the acoustic test data provided, noise and vibration attenuation
requirements shall be incorporated by the Contractor as required to achieve the
specified acoustics, noise and vibration.
E.
Air Handling Units (AHUs), Fresh Air Handling Units (FAHUs) and Computer Room Air
Handling Units (CRAHs):
Documents, all AHUs, FAHUs, CRAHs or similar types of equipment shall be
independently tested, in accordance with AHRI, ISO, Eurovent or other accepted
equivalent standards, in order to confirm compliance with the octave band
sound power levels (Lw in dB re 10-12 W) specified in the Schedules and other related
Specifications. The tests shall be carried out for the full range of operational volumes
at pressure drops equivalent to those expected in the installed systems. The in-duct
sound power levels specified shall include the effect of regenerated noise from
attenuators integral to the AHU.
Based on the acoustic test data provided, noise and vibration attenuation
requirements shall be incorporated by the Contractor as required to achieve the
specified acoustics, noise and vibration criteria.
The casing insulating material shall be a thermal, sound retarding and absorbing
media which is non-combustible, non-hygroscopic, inorganic, mildew resistant vermin
proof and shall comply with the requirements of BS 476-6 and BS 476-7, or other
acceptable equivalent standard advised by the Engineer. The media shall be
securely fixed to internal surfaces with suitable adhesives or mechanical fixings such
that voids are eliminated cold bridging is avoided and to ensure that it is held rigid
during shipment. The insulation shall be totally encapsulated to prevent migration of
particles into the air stream.
The minimum thickness of insulation shall be 25 mm for rigid polyurethane foam or
50 mm for units insulated with mineral fibre. The insulation thickness shall also be of
adequate thickness to ensure that condensation does not form on the casing and to
achieve a minimum overall thermal resistance for external air handling units or for
those located within naturally ventilated plant rooms of 1.0 m C/W and 1.25 m C/W
for internal units. (BS EN 1886 Table 5 Class T3). Polyurethane insulating materials are
to be CF and HCFC free and blown using agents with an ODP of zero.
The Subcontractor shall establish insulation thicknesses based on the worst
combination of external and internal conditions.
The insulation shall be either naturally impermeable to water or provided with a
continuous vapour barrier with due consideration given to insulation edges and cold
bridges.
F.
Air Terminal Devices (Miscellaneous):

Noise levels generated by air terminal devices, including Grilles, Registers and
Diffusers (GRDs), shall be specified in the schedule of air terminal devices either as

M- 11
VOLUME-III
limiting sound power levels or as room noise level selection figures. Where no
limiting sound power levels are specified, the air terminal devices shall be chosen to
achieve a noise rating at least 10 dB less than the specified room noise criterion for
the total number of terminal devices serving the space.
The noise data described above shall be derived from actual tests performed using
devices similar in every significant detail to those proposed and operating under the
same conditions as those proposed, e.g. in terms of air flow velocity, pressure drop,
angle of diffuser blades, volume control damper positioning and connecting ductwork
geometry.
All diffuser and grille plenums shall be constructed to suit the Specialist Suppliers
requirements. In general supply diffusers shall be fitted with purpose made plenum
boxes to
ensure stable air discharge flow patterns under all flow specified conditions. Spigot
connection sizes and their associated ductwork connections shall be sized by the SubContractor such that the specified room noise criteria are not exceeded.
Where grilles and diffusers are used for return air into ceiling voids purpose designed
acoustic plenums shall be provided in positions as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
In the event of any installed terminal devices failing to meet the specified room noise
criteria, the Contractor shall carry out remedial works or provide replacement units, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no extra cost.
G.
Chillers and Cooling Towers:

Noise attenuation requirements for all chillers, cooling towers and associated
equipment shall be incorporated by the Contractor, as required, to achieve the
specified acoustics, noise and vibration criterion.
Floating floors shall be considered by the Contractor, as required, in accordance with
Section 096248 (Floating Floors).
H.
Constant Volume Units (CVs), Fan Coil Units (FCUs), Variable Air Volume Units (VAVs) and
Variable Refrigerant Volume Units (VRVs):
Suppliers of CVs, FCUs, VAVs and VRVs shall provide suitable acoustic data in
order to determine compliance with the specified acoustics, noise and vibration
criteria.
Casing radiated levels shall be a combination of noise from the air intake opening
and the noise from the unit casing. The designs shall ensure that the motors are
adequately isolated from the unit casings to ensure that electrically induced vibration
does not result in excessive noise radiation from the units.
All noise data shall account for the specified external static pressures along with all
coil/filter losses, etc., as free flow operation is not relevant. The designs shall also
ensure that the motors are adequately isolated from the unit casings to ensure that
electrically induced vibration does not result in excessive noise radiation from the units.

M- 12
VOLUME-III
Unless otherwise agreed, the Sub-Contractor shall arrange for independent acoustic
laboratory and/or acoustic mock-up performance tests to be carried out on one or
more typical units, as selected by the Engineer, undertaken in accordance with all
relevant Clauses of this Specification and other related Specifications.
In-duct sound power levels (Lw in dB re 10-12 W) shall be measured at the air inlet
and outlet of the unit (after attenuation if necessary). Casing-radiated sound power
Levels shall also be measured and reported separately. Noise data shall be provided
for low, medium and high design fan speeds. The noise data shall be obtained in
accordance with the following, or other accepted equivalent standards, which
separate casing-radiated/inlet noise from discharge/outlet noise:
AHRI Standard 260: Sound rating of ducted air moving and conditioning
equipment.
BS 4856-4: Methods for testing and rating fan coil units, unit heaters and unit
coolers Determination of sound power levels of fan coil units, unit heaters
and unit coolers using reverberation rooms (2nd Method).
ISO 3741: Acoustics Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using
sound pressure - Precision methods for reverberation rooms. If tests are
carried out to ISO 3741 (2nd Method - ducted discharge), the duct end correction
shall be calculated using ISO 5135: Acoustics Determination of sound power
levels of noise from air-terminal devices, air-terminal units, dampers and valves
by measurement in a reverberation room.
In the event of an installed unit failing to meet the specified acoustic performance, the
Contractor shall include for provision of necessary remedial works or replacement
units to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
I.
Duct and Pipe Acoustic Lagging:

Cladding/lagging and thermal insulation requirements for ducts and pipes shall be
incorporated as required, to avoid break-out or break-back of noise through
ductwork, and to achieve the specified room noise criteria.
Where acoustic cladding/lagging is necessary and is located on both sides of a
flexible ductwork coupling, the coupling shall also be clad
The acoustic lagging shall be designed to achieve the following minimum
performance when measured/rated in a test laboratory, accepted by the Engineer, in
accordance with ISO 10140-1, ASTM E 90 or acceptable equivalent standard which
shall be approved by the Engineer:
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
16
18
22
30
35
45

M- 13
VOLUME-III
External pipe and duct acoustic lagging shall take the form of either of the following:
Construction using a minimum of 50 mm (density 32 kg/m3) fiberglass covered by
a sound barrier material of adequate surface weight to resist the level of break-through
envisaged (using dry construction techniques only).
Construction of a separate enclosure whereby a support is taken from the

ductwork and the surface weight is again adequate to resist the expected breakthrough, or equivalent, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The acoustic lagging shall be fixed to the duct wall using 100% coverage of fire
retardant adhesive. The lagging shall additionally be fixed using GI steel bands at not
less than 600 mm centres. No pin type fasteners linking the external layer of the
lagging to the duct wall shall be used. No fixings which pierce the duct wall shall be
used.
The fire rating of the lagging shall comply with BS 5588, BS 8313 or accepted
equivalent, and shall have a BS 476 Class 1 surface spread of flame rating, unless
otherwise advised by the Engineer.
J.
Duct Acoustic Lining:

Where additional measures are necessary to control duct-borne noise, acoustic duct
lining shall be provided to provide the following minimum performance when
measured in a test laboratory accepted by the Engineer, in accordance with ISO 354,
ASTM C 423 or acceptable equivalent standard which shall be approved by the
Engineer, using a Type A mounting as described in ASTM E 795:
Random Incidence Sound Absorption
Coefficient () Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
0.80
0.80
The acoustic duct lining shall be dry and free from off-cuts, dust, grease, solvents,
etc.
When fitting the acoustic duct lining insulation, all junctions shall be tightly
butted together to prevent heat leakage.
If the acoustic duct lining changes from internal to external, there shall be a minimum
overlap of 300 mm.
The lining facing shall be factory applied except when a sheet metal facing is specified.
Adhesives shall be restricted to those having the approval to the appropriate
authority in relation to fire hazard and shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The acoustic duct lining insulation shall be supported against the surface by means of
M- 14
VOLUME-III
stud welded pins and speed clips. At corners, sheet metal angles can be used to
provide a butted edge (to overlap the insulation joints) or the acoustic duct lining
insulation can be folded and compressed into the corners.
K.
Duct Attenuators:
Duct attenuators shall be purpose-built units constructed by a specialist manufacturer
with a minimum of 10 years of experience in sound attenuator manufacture.
Duct attenuators shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and to meet the
performance specification given in the attenuator schedules and shall be rectangular
or circular (as required) in cross-section and shall be straight in length.
Where applicable, to prevent ductwork and ceiling void penetrations reducing the
sound insulation between adjacent rooms, crosstalk attenuators shall be provided
where indicated on the drawings. If common ductwork feeds adjacent rooms, the
Contractors duct layouts shall be arranged to minimize the number of crosstalk
attenuators needed.
Insertion loss data shall be provided form tests undertaken in accordance with ISO
7235: Acoustics Laboratory measurement procedures for ducted silencers and airterminal units - Insertion loss, flow noise and total pressure loss, or other acceptable
equivalent standard approved by the Engineer. Any extrapolation or calculation used
to produce the data shall be clearly stated. Tests shall be carried out for attenuators
identical in every significant detail to those proposed, for approval by the Engineer,
before an order is placed. This refers to airflow velocity, pressure drop and, as far as is
reasonable, entry and exit conditions, to demonstrate that the installed insertion
losses required in the schedule are met. The insertion loss test data shall include
either, the static insertion loss and regenerated noise for the given airflow conditions,
or both static and dynamic insertion losses for the given airflow conditions.
Attenuator casings shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet. Joints shall be
longitudinal, lock-formed and mastic sealed during construction. End flanges shall be
welded to the casings, and shall be supplied with slotted bolt holes or other fixing
details as necessary.
Casing thickness and flange construction shall be in accordance with HVCA
Specification DW/144, but with a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm.
Sound absorbent materials used within attenuators shall be to BS 5422 (clause 4),
inert, incombustible, non-hygroscopic, rot and vermin proof and packed under not less
than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to settling. The materials shall withstand
an air passage velocity of 25 m/s without surface erosion or other forms of material
migration. The airways shall be free from projections into the air stream. The material
shall achieve. If special attenuators are required in ducts serving hygienic areas, the
filler material shall be totally encapsulated and sealed with melinex or mylar film with
a thickness of at least 38 microns. The encapsulated filler material shall be totally
separated from the internal perforated baffles using a non-combustible, erosionresistant, acoustic stand-off which must be factory installed.

M- 15
VOLUME-III
Vapour barrier materials shall be resistant to chemicals as required for the application.
Vapour barriers for use in aggressive atmospheres shall not exceed 0.07 mm thickness
and be installed in a non-taut state. The material shall achieve Class I to BS 476: Part 7,
and shall not emit toxic or hazardous fumes if ignited.
Attenuator insertion loss data provided shall include for the use of the vapour barrier.
The direction of airflow shall be clearly marked on the attenuator outer casing. The
airways shall be free from projections into the air stream.
Attenuators for site connection shall be delivered with blocked ends, and be
undamaged on completion of installation.
Rectangular attenuators splitter elements shall be round-nosed and stand vertically
and be close fitting within the casing and, where required, be easily removable for
cleaning.
Where required, access panels shall be fitted with effective airtight seals which shall
retain their performance after repeated use.
Notwithstanding the above requirements, all duct attenuators shall be designed,
manufactured and installed in accordance with Section 233319 (Duct Silencers).
L.
Fans:
Noise attenuation requirements for fans shall be incorporated as required to achieve
the specified acoustics, noise and vibration criteria.
The units shall be independently certified to the following standards, or accepted
equivalent standards to be advised by the Engineer:
AMCA Standard 301: Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data.
AMCA Publication 303 (R2012): Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for
Fans.
ANSI/AMCA Standard 300: Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans.
To minimize tonal noise generated by the fan operations, electronic noise filters shall
be provided. These shall be factory fitted items that consist of heavy copper coils
inside a weatherproof IP55 enclosure where the copper coil will cut voltage peaks out
of the controller and smooth out tonal noises. Each noise filter shall have its dedicated
capacitor supplied that will act as a compensator for the filters.
Where additional means are required to control noise breakout to the environment,
fans shall be attenuated with purpose-built acoustic enclosures, as described in
Clause 1.4c.
M.
Generator Exhaust Systems:

M- 16
VOLUME-III
Refer to Section 263213 (Engine Generators). N.
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers:
Refer to Clause 1.4F. O.
Motors:
Noise attenuation requirements for motors shall be incorporated as required to
achieve the specified acoustics, noise and vibration criteria.
The maximum A-weighted sound power levels for factory acceptance testing shall be
specified in accordance with EN 60034-9 (IEC 60034-9) - Rotating electrical machines
Noise limits, and shall not exceed the following no-load overall sound pressure
levels (in dB re 2 x 10-5 Pa) at 1 m from any side of the motor :
Motors 22 kW
75 dBA
Motors > 22 kW and 112 kW
80 dBA
Motors > 112 kW
85 dBA
motors shall be attenuated with purpose-built acoustic enclosures, as described in
Clause 1.4C.
P.
All addition noise control requirements for Electric Motors shall be incorporated as
specified in Section 260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of Electrical Systems).
Pumps:
Noise attenuation requirements for pumps shall be incorporated as required to
achieve the specified acoustics, noise and vibration criteria.
pumps shall be attenuated with purpose-built acoustic enclosures, as described in
Clause 1.4C.
Q.
Transformers and Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) Systems:

Transformers and UPS systems shall comply with NEMA (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association) Standards Publication No. TR 1-1993 (R2000)
Transformers, Regulators and Reactors, or other accepted equivalent standards or
publications as advised by the Engineer.
Maximum permissible sound pressure levels (SPLs) at 1 m from any side (or top) of
each transformer shall not exceed the values specified below:

M- 17
VOLUME-III
Liquid-Immersed
Distributed &
Network
Transformers
Dry-Type
Self-Cooled or
Sealed
Transformers
0 1000
58 dBA
65 dBA
68 dBA
1501 2000
61 dBA
66 dBA
69 dBA
2001 3000
72 dBA
68 dBA
71 dBA
3001 4000
74 dBA
70 dBA
73 dBA
4001 5000
75 dBA
71 dBA
74 dBA
5001 6000
76 dBA
72 dBA
75 dBA
6001 7500
77 dBA
73 dBA
76 dBA
TwoWinding
Size
(kVA)
Dry-Type
Forced
Ventilation
Transformers
Noise attenuation for Substations, Transformers and UPS Equipment shall be

incorporated as specified in Section 260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of
Electrical Systems).
R.
Transportation Systems:
The Specialist Manufacturers for Lifts/Elevators and Escalators shall be responsible
for informing the Engineer of items concerning their packages for which the Main
Contractor and/or the Electrical Contractor have responsibility. This shall include but
not be limited to builders work requirements, delivery times, temporary power and
access requirements, power supply locations and electrical power for testing and
commissioning.
Noise and vibration levels from escalators and lists shall comply with all requirements
specified in Section 260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of Electrical Systems).
1.05
VIBRATION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Air Cooled Condensers and Similar Types of Cooling Equipment:

Vibration isolation requirements shall be incorporated as specified in this
Specification and Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC).
Rubber mounts or tico pads shall be installed between the feet of the condenser and
steel works or finished roof/floor finish level as a minimum. Vibration or spring type
isolators shall not be provided unless the Engineer supplies specific information
separately. If vibration/spring isolators shall be provided, pipe work shall use flexible
connections to isolate the unit from rigid fixed pipe work. If used, spring isolators
shall be located below the support beams, and not the feet which only provide
stability.
To ensure no significant tonal noise is generated from the fan operation, electronic
noise filters shall be provided. These are factory fitted items that shall consist of
heavy copper coils inside a weatherproof IP55 enclosure where the copper coil will
cut voltage peaks out of the controller and smooth out tonal noises. Each noise filter
shall have its dedicated capacitor supplied that will act as a compensator for the

M- 18
VOLUME-III
filters
B.
Air Handling Units (AHUs), Fresh Air Handling Units (FAHUs) and Computer Room Air
Handling Units (CRAHs):
Vibration isolation requirements shall be incorporated as specified in this
Specification and Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC). C.
Compressors:
All floor mounted compressors shall be bolted and grouted to Type 3 or Type 4
concrete inertia bases and supported on Type B or Type C isolators, as specified in
Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC). Drain lines and air lines
shall be supported on Type A hangers, as specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration
and Seismic Controls for HVAC), for the first three supports. Thereafter, isolated
pipe clamps shall be used to prevent vibration entering the structure.
D.
Chillers and Cooling Towers:

Vibration attenuation requirements for all chillers, cooling towers and associated
equipment shall be incorporated by the Contractor, as required, to achieve the
Notwithstanding the above requirements, vibration isolation shall be incorporated, as
required, in accordance with Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC).
E.
Constant Volume Units (CVs), Fan Coil Units (FCUs), Variable Air Volume Units (VAVs)
and Variable Refrigerant Volume Units (VRVs):
The designs shall ensure that motors are adequately isolated from the unit casings to
ensure that electrically induced vibration does not result in excessive noise radiation
from the units.
F.
Equipment without Motors or Pumps:

Expansion tanks, deaerators, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc., without pumps or
motors
which are floor-mounted, shall be supported on Type D, E or F mounts, as specified in
Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC).. Where piping on
isolators is connected to these units the connection shall be made with a neoprene
flexible connector.
G.
Expansion tanks, deaerators, heat exchangers, water heaters, etc., without pumps or
motors which are suspended, shall be supported on Type A or C hangers, as specified
in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC). Where piping on
isolators is connected to these units the connection shall be made with a neoprene
flexible connector.
Expansion Joints or Arched-Type Connectors:
The tie rod systems on expansion joints used for vibration isolation shall be designed

M- 19
VOLUME-III
to achieve the vibration isolation required across the joint. The tie rod fixings shall use
rubber or neoprene bushed washers to prevent metal to metal contact throughout the
normal range of movement of the joint.
H.
Fans:
Fan plena, air mixing plena and package air handling plena shall be installed on Type
3, 4 or 5 inertia bases, as specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC), furnished with continuous Type D, E or F mounts located at the
entire perimeter of each base, as specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC). The plenum manufacturer shall supply and furnish all factory
fabricated panels, joiners, access doors, structural supports, channels, fasteners,
sealing accessories, assembly drawings and all other items necessary for erection.
Coils and filters in built-up air handling units shall be supported from the
housekeeping pads on neoprene pads. Any remaining gaps beneath the coil/filter
frames shall be sealed airtight with approved non-hardening sealant.
Each floor-mounted fan or packaged air handling unit shall be mounted on a Type 2
steel base or Type 3, 4 or 5 concrete inertia base with Type B. C or I un-housed steel
spring isolators, as specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC).
Drain pipes for air handling units shall be supported only from the isolated air
handling unit frame. The condensate shall drip into a funnel that is supported from
the floor or floor drain. A gap of at least 50 mm shall be maintained between the end
of the air handling unit drain pipe and funnel or floor drain.
Suspended fans and air handling units from overhead structures shall be hung on
Type B or C steel spring hangers, as specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC).
Unless otherwise specified in the Vibration Isolator Schedule, the static deflection of
the isolators shall be 50 mm. If the fan does not contain a frame with mounting
brackets of suitable rigidity and strength, or if there exists an extreme overhang
condition, then a structural steel base shall be used. Fans shall be suspended from
above only if expressly noted as such on the Contract Drawings or advised by the
Engineer. Any required thrust restraint shall only be by pre-compressed isolators.
I.
Flexible Couplings:
Flexible couplings shall be fitted on connections to dynamic plant and equipment
including circulating pumps, water pressure boosting sets and refrigeration plant and
elsewhere as indicated on the Contract Drawings and instructed by the Engineer.
Couplings shall be suitable for the system fluid, temperatures and pressures and
shall be selected to minimize the transmission of vibration to the connecting
pipework.
Couplings shall be constructed from terylene reinforced neoprene, corrosion resistant
metal or other accepted equivalent material. Couplings shall be complete with flanged

M- 20
VOLUME-III
ends to match the pipework system specification.
Vibration isolated restraining tie bars shall be provided on flexible couplings to
refrigeration plant and other dynamic plant connections where recommended by the
plant supplier.
All flexible couplings shall be selected with a natural frequency remote from the
exciting frequency of the plant to minimize the risk of fatigue failure.
J.
Flexible Hoses:
Flexible hoses shall be fabricated from EDPM rubber covered with a stainless steel
braid and shall be suitable for use with the working fluid on which they are installed
and for the specified system working and test pressures.
Flexible hoses shall be provided with a self-sealing, quick-connect coupling as TEMA
or accepted equivalent.
Flexible hoses shall be installed in accordance with the requirements and
recommendations of the manufacturer, the HMSA and BSRIA COP 11/2002
Flexible pipe hose connectors of corrugated metal, or rubber, neoprene or other
flexible liner with braided metal or other similar internal or external reinforcing, and
intended for use without tie rods, shall have the minimum live lengths recommended
by ASHRAE when used for anti-vibration purposes. When, however, the hose
connecters are used to connect equipment with high pressures > 16 bar(g), multiple
grooved couplings (MGC) shall be used. The guidelines tabulated below shall be
considered for hose connections to different plant equipment.
Equipment
Isolator Type
Pump connections (less than 16 bar(g) Flexible connectors (FC)

Pump connections (greater than
16 bar(g)
AHU connections, less than 80 mm
Multiple grooved couplings

(MGC) to provide adequate
vibration
isolation
Direct connection
AHU connections, 80 mm and greater Flexible connector (FC) or multiple

grooved couplings to provide
adequate vibration isolation
K.
FCU connections less than 25 mm
Direct connection
FCU connections 25 mm and above
Flexible hose (FH)
Connections to expansion
tanks, deaerators, heat
exchangers, etc.
Connections to chillers, cooling
towers and similar plant

vibration isolation
vibration isolation
Flexible Joints:

M- 21
VOLUME-III
Wherever the natural flexibility of the pipework cannot practicably be used to
accommodate differential expansion, victaulic flexible joints shall be designed into a
system to cater for pipe movement, thermal expansion and contraction, providing
the design of the installation complies with the manufacturers recommendations
and the movement limits of the joint are not exceeded.
L.
Flexible Pipe Connectors:

Reinforced flexible pipe connectors shall be used where pipes are to be located
adjacent to acoustically sensitive spaces needing to achieve NR 35.
The correct selection of connector shall provide pipe flexibility so that isolators can
function properly, protect equipment from strain due to misalignment and
expansion or contraction of piping, and to reduce noise and vibration transmission
along the piping.
All flexible connectors require end restraint to counteract pressure thrust.
Overextension caused by pressure thrust on isolated equipment will cause failure
which shall be avoided.
Manufacturers recommendations on restraint, pressure and temperature limits
shall be followed. Flexible neoprene pipe connectors manufactured of multiple plies
of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic rubber
presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement.
Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Neoprene elbows shall be manufactured
with a single sphere
forming the corner of the joint itself. Connectors up to and including 50 mm diameter
may have threaded ends. Connectors 63mm and larger shall be manufactured with
floating steel flanges needed to lock the connector's raised face neoprene flanges.
All connectors shall be rated a minimum of 1000 kN/m2 at 105C. All straight through
connections shall be made with either flanged or screwed twin spheres properly preextended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under
pressure.
Size 300 mm and larger operating at pressures above 650 kN/m2 shall employ
control cables with end fitting isolated from the anchoring plates by means of 12
mm thick bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum of 0.7
kN/mm2.
Flexible pipe connectors of corrugated metal, or rubber, neoprene or other flexible
liner with braided metal or other similar internal or external reinforcing, and
intended for use without tie rods, shall have the minimum live lengths tabulated
below (as per ASHRAE guidelines) when used for anti-vibration purposes.
Nominal Pipe Bore Diameter

Live Length
M- 22
VOLUME-III
0 65
80mm
100
300 mm
125 mm
250 mm
600 mm
300 mm or greater
900 mm
450 mm
Note that the above live length applies to the end-to-end length for flanged flexible
rubber hose. For other types of hose, the live length applies to the overall end-toend length less the fitting length.
M.
Generators:
Refer to Section 263213 (Engine Generators). N.
Inertia Bases:
Refer to Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC). O.
Isolation of Ducts, Fittings, Pipes and Valves:
Vibration isolation to all distributed ducted and piped services shall follow the
requirements specified in Section 230548-1 (Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC), and the following additional requirements.
The table below recommends where Resilient Inserts (RI) within pipe clamps,
neoprene hangers (NH), spring hangers (SH) and neoprene mounts (NM) shall be
used for different building services.
Service
Heating
Chilled Water
Pipe Diameter
Isolator Types
Static Deflection
Less than 50 mm
NH, NM
8 mm
50 150 mm
SH, SM
25 mm
More than 150

mm
Less than 50 mm
SH, SM
50 mm
NH, NM
8 mm
50 150 mm
SH, SM
25 mm
SH, SM
50 mm
NH, NM
8 mm
SH, SM
25 mm
NH, NM
8 mm
SH, SM
25 mm
NH, NM
8 mm
SH, SM
25 mm
RI
Not applicable
RI
Not applicable
More than 150

Domestic Water mm
Less than 50 mm
Heat Recovery
Condenser
Cooling
Rainwater
More than 150

mm
Less than 50 mm
More than 150
mm
Less than 50 mm
More than 150
mm
Less than 50 mm
More than 150
mm

M- 23
VOLUME-III
Sprinklers, Dry
Risers / Vents,
Hose Reels &
Sanitary Air
Compressed
Sewers
All
RI
Not applicable
All Steel
RI
Not applicable
The above requirements shall be read in conjunction with Section 230548-1

(Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC), all other related Specifications, and the
following specific requirements.
Within plant rooms, all pipes connected to equipment installed on spring vibration
isolators shall be suspended, supported and guided by means of appropriate spring
vibration isolators. This includes domestic water, heating, compressed air, hydraulic
fluid, steam and chilled water/glycol pipes, etc. The only exclusions are roof and floor
drains and sprinkler piping which shall be supported by Type SM isolators or hung
from the structure on Type SH isolators.
The first isolator both upstream and downstream of equipment on springs shall have
a static deflection equal to 1.5 times that of the equipment isolators, up to a
maximum of 50 mm. The static deflection of the remaining SM/SH pipe isolators in
the plant room shall be 25 mm.
Piping in the plant room that is connected only to machinery installed on neoprene
isolators shall be either supported from the floor on Type NM mounts or suspended
from the structure on Type NH hangers.
Where a pipe run connects multiple items of equipment in the plant room the
pipe isolators for the entire run shall be chosen to suit the connected equipment
of greatest static deflection.
Piping, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or supported on
other equipment, pipes, or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. It shall be
supported on or suspended from the building structure.
Where pipes are ganged on a trapeze the pipes shall rest on the trapeze and the
trapeze shall be isolated from the structure with the appropriate isolators.
Neoprene pipe riser guides shall be used where lateral restraint is required.
All pipes outside the plant room with a diameter greater than 50 mm (including
domestic water, sanitary sewer and HVAC pipes, excluding roof/floor drain pipes and
vent pipes) shall be supported on Type SM isolators or suspended on Type SH
isolators, for the first 15 m.
Outside plant rooms all HVAC, compressed air and domestic hot and cold water
pipes with a diameter less than or equal to 50 mm shall be isolated on Type NM and
NH isolators for the first 15 m. All drain pipes and vent pipes shall be isolated from
the structure with closed cell neoprene, felt or glass/mineral fibre sleeves between
the pipe and pipe clamp or with neoprene pads between the clamp and the
structure.
When it is compressed, the sleeve shall be not less than 3 mm in thickness. This
provision shall apply to all piping not otherwise required to be installed on vibration
M- 24
VOLUME-III
isolators. In-line domestic water pumps and the surrounding piping shall be installed
on isolators as described above.
Where pipes or flues rise in a vertical chase and are supported from a structure with
Type SH or NH isolators and require lateral bracing, Neoprene riser guides shall be
mounted around the pipe to limit lateral movement and to prevent direct contact
with the supporting structure.
Riser guides for isolated pipes and flues shall be Type NM mounts based on the
vertical edge of a steel angle. The guide shall allow the pipe to move axially, but shall
limit lateral movement to 25 mm.
Drainage pipework, including rainwater pipes and soil pipes located within spaces of
NR 35 or below shall be cast iron and shall be lagged and boxed-in. All pipe supports
shall incorporate neoprene inserts with a minimum thickness of 1/10th of the pipe
diameter.
Pipes, ducts, and their contents, or other services connected, shall be supported to
avoid load on equipment items.
Flexible duct connectors at connections to fans or AHUs shall be a coated fabric with
200 mm across a clear gap of 100 mm.
The first five supports for ductwork on either side of the vibration source shall also be
provided with vibration isolators equal in static deflection to that of the fan or AHU.
Electrical connections to equipment mounted on vibration isolation bases shall be
made through flexible conduit which changes direction by at least 90 in a minimum
length of 25 conduit diameters.
Mineral insulated cables shall be looped through at least 360 at 75 mm radius or
double the permissible minimum radius, whichever is larger.
For conduit, where isolated containment is ganged on a trapeze it shall rest on the
trapeze and the trapeze shall be isolated from the structure with the appropriate
isolators. Neoprene pipe riser guides shall be used where lateral restraint is required.
The first three containment support vibration isolators shall provide the same static
deflection as the equipment vibration isolators.
P.
Motors:
Vibration isolation for Electric Motors shall be incorporated as specified in Section
260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of Electrical Systems).
Q. Pumps:
Rotating impellers of fans, pumps, chillers, etc., shall be balanced to standards not
inferior to the balance quality grades of BS 6861 (ISO 1940/1) or to the corresponding
residual
eccentricities. The criteria shall apply to finished impeller and shaft assemblies at
M- 25
VOLUME-III
delivery. Where the balancing quality grades are not indicated they shall be to the
following minimum standards:
Grade G6.3: Where the product (impeller mass in kg x operating speed in Hz)
is less than 250.
Grade G2.5: Where the product (impeller mass in kg x operating speed in
Hz) is greater than 250.
Grade G2.5: For impellers on equipment located in occupied areas, on fan
convectors, packaged ventilation extract units and warm air heaters with
motor power inputs greater than 100 W, or canned rotor pumps or similar.
Impellers operating below 10 Hz shall be balanced as if they operated at 10
Hz.
Impellers of multi-speed or variable speed machines shall be balanced to the
quality grade determined by their highest operating speed.
Vibration caused by fluid dynamic effects of any kind shall not be greater than the
equivalent permissible vibration due to an impeller rotating at the frequency of the
vibration.
Base mounted pumps 1.1 kW shall be bolted and grouted to prefabricated,
reinforced concrete inertia bases, which shall weigh 1.5 times the combined weight
of the fluid filled pump(s) and motor(s). Minimum thickness of the concrete base shall
be 225 mm for pumps < 2.2 kW and 300 mm for pumps > 2.2 kW. Any rigid pipe
elbows at the pump suction and discharge connections shall be supported from the
inertia base. The inertia base shall be supported on Type B or Type C isolation
hangers.
Base mounted pumps < 1.1 kW and installed on floors above-grade shall be installed
on Type CIB concrete inertia bases with at least 4 Nos. Type D or Type E isolation
mounts.
Base mounted pumps < 1.1 kW and located on grade shall be mounted directly on a
concrete housekeeping pad, and shall be supported on at least four Type D or Type E
isolation mounts.
In-line pumps 1.1 kW shall be supported by the piping which is isolated on Type B
isolation hangers. If support is required below the pump, the pump shall be supported
on Type B or Type C isolation hangers.
In-line pumps < 1.1 kW and adjacent pipework shall be supported on Type A isolation
hangers, unless other provisions of this Specification or other Specifications call for
greater deflections.
If an associated circulation pump or chemical feed pump is to be mounted on the
unit, and if the pump is 0.4 kW, the pump shall be mounted to the unit through Type
H restrained isolation hangers. Such pumps > 0.4 kW shall be supported from the
building structure on Type A isolation hangers or Type E isolation mounts.
Circulation pumps > 1.2 kW shall be supported on Type C concrete inertia bases

M- 26
VOLUME-III
which are supported on Type B or Type C isolation hangers. All connections to
circulation pumps shall be with flexible connections.
Provide motor slide rails, pump base elbow supports, height saving brackets,
equipment bolting provisions and isolators as required by the application.
Concrete inertia bases shall be formed in structural steel perimeter bases and
reinforced to prevent flexure, misalignment of drive and driven unit, and stress
transferral to the equipment. Inertia bases shall be designed to the following
thicknesses:
Motor
Size
Less Than 15 kW
Inertia Base Minimum

Thickness
150 mm
15 39
40kW
69
200 mm
70kW
99
100kW
149
300 mm
150kW
199
AbovekW
200 kW
400 mm
250 mm
350 mm
450 mm
Concrete inertia bases for pumps shall be sized to support the suction elbow of end
suction pumps and both the suction and discharge elbows of horizontal split-case
pumps. The bases shall be T-shaped where necessary to conserve space.
All inertia bases shall be sized to extend a minimum of 100 mm beyond the base of
the equipment, and in the case of belt-driven equipment, 100 mm beyond the end
of the drive shaft.
R.
Substations, Transformers and UPS Equipment:
S.
Vibration isolation for Substations, Transformers and UPS Equipment shall be

incorporated as specified in Section 260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of
Electrical Systems).
Vertical Transportation Systems:
Vibration levels from escalators and lists shall comply with all requirements specified
in Section 260548-1 (Noise and Vibration Control of Electrical Systems).
1.06
SERVICES PENETRATIONS A.
General:
Where ducts or pipes penetrate the building structure it is essential to prevent such
penetrations being either vibration flanking paths or sources of noise leakage. The
penetrations shall, therefore, be sleeved with a 25 mm thickness of mineral wool
having a density of at least 50 kg/m3. Care shall be taken to seal any gaps by means

M- 27
VOLUME-III
of heavy grout and the hole shall be finished with a liberal application of dense nonsetting mastic.
All openings around pipes and ducts in the structure surrounding the plant rooms and
surrounding noise-critical spaces of NR 40 and below, and any structure with a
sound insulation requirement, shall be sealed airtight as described herein and on the
drawings. This includes all slab penetrations and penetrations of noise sensitive walls
indicated on the architectural drawings. It also includes penetrations of all
drywall ceilings and concrete slabs suspended on isolators, and entry/exit of all
enclosed shafts. The sealing of penetrations shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
Where each duct passes through a wall, floor or ceiling, there shall be a clear annular
space of 20 mm between the duct and structure. After all of the ductwork is
installed the Contractor shall check the clearance, pack the voids full depth with glass
/mineral fibre, and caulk both ends with a non-ageing, non-hardening sealant
backed by a polyethylene foam rod or permanently flexible firestop material.
Where there is not sufficient access space to pack around all sides of a duct (e.g., at
the underside of a slab), first place a short stub duct in the wall, pack and caulk
around it and then attach the inlet and outlet ducts to each end.
Where ducts enter or leave a shaft or pass through a wall or slab in sufficient
numbers and density that individual pack-and-caulk details are not possible, a special
isolation detail shall be developed.
Before the shaft is fully enclosed the penetration shall be sealed with a heavy
membrane surrounding the ducts on each side of the wall or slab being penetrated.
Each membrane may be 2 layers of plasterboard, 25 mm plaster or 14 gauge lead
sheet. Other materials may be acceptable. The void between the two membranes
shall be packed with mineral fibre or pumped full of resilient closed cell firestop foam.
All edges shall be caulked airtight. (This detail shall be assigned to the Contractor
unless otherwise specified. In all cases the proposed details shall be approved by the
Engineer.
B.
HVAC, Domestic Water, Sewer and Vent Piping:

Where a pipe passes through a sound-sensitive wall, ceiling or floor slab, a steel
sleeve shall be cast or grouted into the structure. The internal diameter of the sleeve
shall be 40 mm larger than the external diameter of the pipe passing through it.
After all of the piping is installed in a specific area, the Contractor shall check the
clearance and correct it, if necessary, to within 12 mm. Then the void shall be packed
full depth with glass /mineral fibre and sealed at both ends, 20 mm deep, with sealant
backed by foam rod.
Where pipes pass through a masonry wall in sufficient numbers and density that
individual pack-and-caulk details are not possible, a special isolation detail shall be
developed.
Cast the pipe sleeves in a block of concrete with the sleeves located at least 50 mm
apart and then build the sleeved block into the wall. The block shall be at least as
thick as the surrounding wall construction. Each sleeve shall have a diameter 40 mm

M- 28
VOLUME-III
larger than the external diameter of the pipe passing through it. After the pipes are
installed, the voids shall be packed and caulked as described above.
C.
Compressed Air and Sprinkler Piping:

Fire protection and compressed air pipes may be sleeved and sealed as described above,
or may be grouted and caulked into the structure as follows:
Before grout has set, rake a groove around the pipe on each side of the wall or slab.
The groove shall be 12 mm wide and 12 mm deep. After grout has set, fill the groove
full depth with sealant.
Penetration of sound isolating ceilings (concrete or multi-layer plasterboard) by
sprinkler pipes and heads shall be sleeved and sealed as described herein. There
shall be no rigid connection between ceilings and pipes or heads.
1.07
ACOUSTIC COMMISSIONING
A.
If required by the Contract, noise and vibration commissioning shall be undertaken by the
Main Contractor
and MEP Sub-Contractor
to confirm compliance
with the
B.
Method statements shall be prepared as necessary, for the following site measurements to
be completed:
Section 230593-1 (Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC).
Section 230800 Commissioning of HVAC.
C.
The type and number of noise and vibration measurements and tests to be completed
shall be discussed and agreed with all interested parties.
D.
The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of tests and inspections (inclusive of
retests and re-inspections) required because of failures and shall be responsible for all
remedial works required to meet the specified acoustics, noise and vibration criteria.
END OF SECTION

M- 29
VOLUME-III
FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL

Mechanical Section 07 84 00: Fire Stopping Material
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of Division 01, General Requirements and documents referred to
therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1
Furnish and install Fire stopping material around MEP services crossing fire walls and slabs.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general use,

centrifugal pumps with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.3.2
Certification, Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performances, under specified

operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Fire Stop System Summary

Applications of fire stop systems include:
2.2
Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping,
electrical bus ways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls
and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor / ceiling assemblies), and vertical
service shaft walls and partitions.
Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partition or walls containing fire doors.
Multiple electrical boxes located within the same stud cavity.
All materials shall conform to relevant North American or European

Standards.
Definitions
Fire stopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated
construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke,
water and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
2.3
System Description
Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems that have been manufactured
and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects,
damage or failure.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.4
a.
Submittals
b.
c.
-
General: Submit listed submittals in accordance

Conditions of the Contract and Submittal Procedures Section.
with
Product Data: Submit product data including manufacturers SPEC-DATA

product sheet, for specific products.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product
components.
Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
Certificates: Product certificates stating that materials comply with specified

performance characteristics and physical requirements.
Manufacturers Instructions: Manufacturers installation instructions.
2.5
2.6
Quality Assurance
-
Source Limitations: Obtain firestop through-penetration and joint systems

from a single manufacturer.
A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site

during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor
personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done
per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and
drawing details.
Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable

governing codes having local jurisdiction.
Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing

partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult
the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
Delivery, Storage, And Handling

Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels.
Store materials protected from weather and damage and at temperature conditions in
compliance with manufacturer's requirements.
Before handling, read product data sheets and material safety data sheets. Do not
use damaged or expired materials.
2.7
Fire stop Systems

-
Penetrations of fire resistant assemblies

Penetrations of pipes, tubes, conduits, wires, cables, ducts and vents
through fire resistant walls and shaft enclosures, and floor, ceiling, and roof
elements of fire resistant assemblies shall be protected in accordance with

M-3
VOLUME-III
the following:
-
Non-combustible penetrations
Non insulated metal ducts and non-combustible pipes shall be protected by
an approved through-penetration protection system. The annular gap around
the penetrates shall be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall
be filled and sealed with Fire stop silicone sealant to an appropriate depth.
Combustible penetrations
Metal ducts with combustible jackets or insulation shall be protected by an
approved through-penetration protection system. The annular gap around the
duct shall be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled
and sealed with Firestop intumescent sealant to an appropriate depth.
Single cable or bunched cables

The annular gap around cable or bunches of cables shall be packed with
rockwool / mineral wool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with
intumescent sealant to an appropriate depth.
-
Cable trays crossings:
Permanent system Firestop intumescent sealant shall be applied around and

between the cables. The opening shall be sealed with trowlable fireresistant
cement-based mortar.
Temporary system where future changes are expected ready-to-use,
intumescent flexible block firmly seated shall be built up inside the opening sealing it
completely. Firestop intumescent sealant shall be applied around and between the
cables.
Non metal pipe crossings less than 50 mm diameter: The annular gap around the
penetrates shall be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled
and sealed with Firestop intumescent sealant.
Non metal pipe crossings of 50 mm diameter and more: The annular gap around the
penetrates shall be packed with mineral wool/ rockwool and the ends shall be filled
and sealed with Firestop intumescent sealant to an appropriate depth.
The pipes shall be provided with a pre-assembled graphite based intumescent jacket
contained in a metal housing, fixed around the pipe with metal fixings.
2.8
Execution
2.8.1
Manufacturers Instructions
Comply with manufacturer's product data including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions.
2.8.2
Examination

M-4
VOLUME-III
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be

performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
2.8.3
Preparation
Prepare surface to receive firestop system products in accordance with
manufacturers instructions for surface preparation.
Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of
materials.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
2.8.4
Installation
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration or
construction joint fill materials.
Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant
seal.
Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior
to installation of firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers
as it pertains to duct work.
2.8.5
Field Quality Control

Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or
enclosing areas.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
2.8.6
Protection
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
SECTION096248
FLOATINGFLOORS
1. PART1-GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Where indicated on the Contact Drawings or in other documentation, floating
floors shall be installed where required to prevent excessive transmission of
noise and vibration through structural slabs.
Floating floor shall be provided below mechanical equipment located at roof
like Chillers, Chilled water pumps and Fresh Air Handling Units.
B.
Related Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited to, Sections
contained in the following Divisions, as prepared specifically for this Project:
Division 2 Site Conditions.
Division 3 Concrete.
Division 4 Masonry.
Division 8 Openings (Doors and Windows).
Division 9 Finishes.
Division 13 Special Construction.
Division 21 Fire Suppression.
Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning. Division 26 Electrical.
C.
Related Acoustic Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
following: Section 018845-1 Acoustic Performance Requirements
Section 018845-2 Noise and Vibration Control Requirements.
Section 092000 Plaster and Gypsum Board.

Section 096248 FLOATING FLOORS
M- 1
VOLUME-III
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E 90: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
B.
ASTM E 413: Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class
C.
ISO 10140-1:2010 Acoustics - Laboratory measurement of sound insulation of

building elements - Part 1: Application rules for specific products
D.
ISO 717-1: Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building

elements - Part 1:Airborne sound insulation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
The manufacturer and supplier shall have substantial track records of not less
than 10 years for the design and installation of high-performance floating
floors in similar applications and tested to the referenced standards.
PERFORMANCE
A.
The floating floor systems, in combination with the structural base-build slab,
shall achieve a minimum performance rating of STC/Rw 80 measured and rated
in accordance with the standards stated in Clause 1.02 and verified by an
independent acoustic test laboratory with accreditation traceable to one of
those stated in Clause 1.04B.
B.
Certified and verifiable tests results shall be provided which are undertaken in
accordance with the reference standards listed previously. Test can be taken only
at certified test laboratories such as traceable to any of the following (or
equivalent):
NAMAS- National Measurement Accreditation Service
UKAS - United Kingdom Accreditation Service
NVLAP - National Voluntary Laboratory Program
NIST - National Institute of Science and Technology
DIN EN ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of
testing and calibration laboratories
C.
If test data is not available, within 8 weeks of the award of contract (or other
period to be specified by the Engineer), tests shall be undertaken (in accordance
with the specified standards) to demonstrate that the proposed products,
together with the associated elements shown in the relevant architectural

M- 2
VOLUME-III
drawings, comply with the specified performance requirements.
1.05
1.06
CONSTRUCTION:
A.
In each of the areas shown on the acoustic mark ups, the floating floor shall
be a fully engineered system supplied and installed by a specialist contractor who
has completed previous similar installations. The floor shall consist of a regular
array of high density fibreglass, neoprene, natural rubber or equivalent
types of mountings supporting a permanent formwork, a waterproofing
layer, a concrete floating slab, and all necessary seals and sealants. The gap
between the structural floor and the concrete floating slab shall be filled with
a layer of low density fibreglass.
B.
The floating floor systems shall consist of a 100-300 mm thick floating

concrete slab isolated from and supported 50-200 mm above the
waterproofed structural slab by resilient neoprene isolators or pads. The
thickness of the floating slab and depth of the air space between the structural
slab and floating slab shall be determined by the manufacturer, based on
the plant equipment loads to be accommodated and the acoustic performances
required.
C.
Where flanking transmission needs to be controlled, sound barrier drywalls or

wet walls shall be installed around the floating floors. The flanking walls shall not
rest on the floating floors so that all floating floors are installed within each
room and separated by slab-to- slab flanking walls.
D.
The floating floor slabs shall be isolated from adjoining walls, columns and
curbs by means of perimeter isolation boards.
E.
Any floor drains, piping, conduit and duct penetrations must not short circuit
the isolation system.
F.
In seismic zones the floating floors shall be restrained horizontally by curbs

or walls designed to withstand the horizontal seismic forces. Solid bridge
bearing neoprene pads shall be interspersed between perimeter isolation
fiberglass to withstand the seismic forces. The maximum allowable deflection
shall not exceed 5 mm unless advised otherwise by the manufacturer or by a
seismic specialist.
G.
The floor shall be protected by embedded double acting resilient floor

snubbers set in opposition to the overturning moments at the equipment
snubbers in all locations where the centre of gravity of major equipment is high.
PROCEDURE:
1.
The setting of all isolation materials and floating floor shall be performed by or
under the supervision of the specialist manufacturer.
2.
Set and waterproof any drains and lower pipe seals in keeping with
waterproofing specifications.

M- 3
VOLUME-III
1.07
3.
Cement perimeter isolation board around all walls, columns, curbs, etc. In seismic
zones intersperse the perimeter isolation board with bridge bearing quality
neoprene pads the thickness of the isolation board.
4.
Cover entire floor area with 6 mil (0.15 mm) plastic sheeting and carry
sheeting up perimeter isolation board.
5.
Place all isolators in strict accordance with the approved drawings prepared
by the isolation manufacturer. Where required, spacing can be increased to
straddle machinery locations. Additional reinforcement must be detailed on
isolation manufacturers drawings when required.
6.
Place reinforcing as shown on the drawings and pour floor monolithically.
7.
Install the floating floor as per the manufacturers recommendations and I

nstructions.
8.
If sound barrier walls are used, perimeter isolators shall be selected to

support the wall weight in addition to the perimeter of the floating floor.
9.
In seismic zones attach double acting resilient seismic snubbers to the

structural slab on either side of high centre of gravity equipment to
withstand the overturning moment generated by the machinery snubbers and
to prevent failure of the floating floor. Adjust the double acting snubbers after
machinery is in place to provide a maximum up and down clearance of 3 mm.
10.
Caulk perimeter isolation board in all locations and grout all holes.
11.
If site conditions are unsatisfactory or raise questions about the installation of

the floating floor, the work will not proceed until the condition has been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the specialist manufacturer. The sub floor
must have the same pitch as the top of the floating floor or special provisions
shall be made for isolator housings of different heights.
12.
Coordinate work with other trades and coordinate scheduling with the
construction supervisor to minimize delays.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The following information shall be provided:

Detailed product drawings,
technical specifications
and
catalogue information indicating the overall construction build-up,
materials to be used and dimensional data.
Load and deflection curves of all isolators and double acting floor
snubbers. Dead, live and concentrated loads.

M- 4
VOLUME-III
Certification of the elastomeric compounds to be used.
Dynamic frequency test data verifying that 10 Hz can be
achieved. Isolator sizes, deflections, frequencies and locations of
seismic snubbers. Any drain and penetration locations.
Size, type, elevation and spacing of concrete reinforcement.
Caulking details.
If sound barrier walls are used, details of the wall sway braces and
isolated angle iron brace sizes and locations.
Floor or floor and wall construction procedure.
B.
Method Statement shall be submitted which shall include, but will not be
limited to, the following:
Overall procedure for the installation of the floor.
Method of fixing mountings and edge boarding.
Program for installation of floor
C.
The following shall also be supplied for the floating floor installation:
A schedule of pad types and locations.
The compressive stresses and resultant static deflections under
dead load only and dead plus live load, for each bearing point.
Test data indicating the natural frequency of the proposed
mountings under the specified loads.
Detailed calculations to show the vibration isolation efficiency
of the proposed vibration mountings.
Detailed information on routine and special requirements with
regard to pad storage, handling and installation, e.g. limitations on
adjacent welding work.
A list of installations of the proposed mountings for the specific
purposed of providing a high sound insulation.
A list of installations of the proposed mountings within KSA and
elsewhere.
D.
Test certificates (in English or accompanied by a full English translation) shall be

provided from an independent acoustic test laboratory to show compliance
with the specified acoustic performance for the exact systems offered. Failing

M- 5
VOLUME-III
this, the Tenderer shall allow in the tender for the expense of such testing as
necessary to show compliance.
2. PART2PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Mason
B.
Kinetics
C.
Isolgomma
D.
CDM
E.
Christie and Grey
F.
Other equal and approved by acoustic consultant
MATERIALS
A.
Provide all materials as recommended by the specialist manufacturer.
B.
Use at least 20 mm thick fiberglass perimeter isolation board with a density of

at least160 kg/m3. A sample of the material shall be provided to the Engineer for
approval prior to the commencement of work on site. The boarding shall extend
from the base of the floor to 5 mm above finished floor level and shall be
retained with adhesives that will not degrade, attack or damage the edge
boarding materials in any way. All joints in the edge boarding shall be taped to
ensure a fully waterproof joint between each section of boarding. The edge
boarding shall be trimmed after the floating slab has cured so as to leave a 5
mm void between the top of the board and the finished floor level. A suitable
silicone sealant, to be approved by the Engineer, shall be used to fill the void
between the board and the finished concrete floor level. The contractor shall
ensure that no rubble or debris be allowed to fall into the isolation joint during
construction.
C.
The resilient mountings shall be high density fibre glass with neoprene coating,
neoprene, natural rubber or equivalent and shall be supplied by a single,
recognized supplier of such materials that is approved by the Engineer. They
shall fully comply with the requirements of this specification. Only one type of
material shall be supplied. Design and installation of the mountings shall be
consistent with BS 6177.
D.
The resilient mountings shall be clearly marked to show which way they are to
be installed and shall be sized and selected such that, when located as indicated
on the drawings, the natural frequency of the floating floor section is not less
than 10 Hz at the design dead load. The design shall allow for dead load and
live load but the mountings and supports shall be capable of withstanding a
load of at least twice the total of the design dead and live loads. The increase
in deflection between the dead load only and overall (dead plus live) load

M- 6
VOLUME-III
conditions shall not exceed 3 mm.
E.
The resilient mountings shall have a life expectancy of at least 25 years.

Ageing effects, e.g. hardening and creep, shall not result in the natural frequency
of any pad increasing by more than 2 Hz over 50 years. Long term creep shall
not exceed 2 mm. The mounting shall be suitable for use in an ambient
temperature range from 0C to 40C, with relative humidity between 20% and
99%. The installation shall comply with local fire regulations and shall be
acceptable to the Fire Authorities. The mountings shall be resistant to
rodents, insects, bacteria, fungus, ozone and water and securely packed such
as to provide protection from mechanical damage, heat and dust.
F.
One (1) layer of 6 mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene sheeting shall be placed on the
shuttering and the contractor shall ensure that the polyethylene film layer
is waterproof prior to pouring the floating concrete slab, and that no damage
occurs when the reinforcement is added. The contractor shall ensure that under
no circumstances shall any concrete be allowed to bridge the resilient
mountings
G.
In seismic zones perimeter isolation board shall be interspersed with 20 mm

thick, 60 durometer pads equal in height to the perimeter material. Pads
shall be sized for a maximum deflection of 50 mm at maximum earthquake
forces, unless otherwise advised by the manufacturer or seismic specialist.
H.
In seismic zones double acting resilient cast-in floating floor snubbers shall
consist of a ductile iron housing locked into the floating floor. The housing
shall have a removable cover plate to provide access to the adjustment of
clearances in both the up and down directions of the resilient stops. Resilient
stops shall be attached to a restraining bolt attached to the structural floor
with an approved anchor.
3. PART3-EXECUTION
3.01
SITE CONDITIONS:
A.
The contractor shall check that the cinish on the structural floor is
adequate before commencing the installation of the flatting floors.
B.
The worksite shall remain clean and tidy all times.
C.
No materials shall be stored with the structural floor void and the working
area shall be roped off to ensure that the access is controlled until the floating
floor slab is completer and the concrete is adequately cured.
D.
the contractor shall ensure that the site is adequately protected from a water
during the construction period.

M- 7
VOLUME-III
3.02
3.03
STORAGE
A.
The floor components shall not be delivered to the site until immediately
before the installation will commence.
B.
All materials shall be stored such as to provide protection from extreme

temperatures, prolonged exposure to sunlight, moisture, fumes and vermin.
C.
Any materials damaged prior, during or subsequent to installation shall be

replaced.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install the floating floor systems according to the installation and adjustment
procedures recommended by the specialist manufacturer.
B.
Waterproofing treatments should be carried out in accordance with the

waterproofing specifications.
C.
Provision of sleeves, sealants at all penetrations and permiter isolation boards at

all walls and columns.
D.
The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer at least 24 hours
before the following operations are to take place, to enable site inspection by
the Engineer:
Mountings and edge boarding installed, prior to
shuttering. Prior pouring of concrete.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. On completion, submit a signed certificate from the manufacturer of
vibration control materials attesting to the proper installation of the systems and
the acoustic performance. Any deviation to be rectified at no additional cost to
the contract.
END OF SECTION

M- 8
VOLUME-III
WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

Mechanical Section 21 10 00: Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of section1, General Requirements and documents referred to

therein.
1.1.2
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1
The work Includes supply, installation, testing and commissioning of combined Fire Sprinkler
and Wet Riser system as an integral part of the complete Fire Services Installation.
1.2.2
The work shall also include not only the major items of the system and equipment but also all
the incidental sundry components necessary together with the resources for installing such
components, for the complete execution of the systems and for trouble free operations,
whether or not these sundry components are stated in detail in this contract document.
1.2.3
Particularly related sections:

a)
b)
c)
220529: Hangers and supports

220553: Mechanical Identification
220578: Plumbing Specialties
All related electrical works shall be provided to comply with the requirements of Electrical
Divisions.
1.3
STANDARDS AND CODES

A)
All applicable local authority regulations and codes
B)
International Building Code 2009 edition.
C)
International Plumbing Code 2009 edition
D)
International Fire Code 2009 edition
E)
F)
NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2007 edition.

NFPA 11 - Low, Medium and High Expansion Foam
G)
NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2007 edition.
H)
I)
J)
NFPA 14 Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 2007 edition.

NFPA 15 - Water Spray Systems for Fire Protection
NFPA 16- Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems.
K)
L)
NFPA 20 Installation of Fire Pumps 207 edition.

NFPA 22- Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
M)
NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Services Mains and Their Appurtenances 2007
edition
N)
NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 2008 edition

M-2
VOLUME-III
O)
NFPA 45 Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals 2004

edition.
P)
NFPA 70 National Electric Code 2008 edition.
Q)
NFPA 72 Automatic Fire Detectors 2007 edition
R)
NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities 2005 edition.
S)
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2006 edition.
T)
NFPA 291 Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marketing of
Hydrants 2007 edition.
U)
Factory Mutual (FM) Requirements for Fire Protection Equipment
V)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listings
W)
British Standards: BS EN 671-1:2001
1.4
DESIGN CRITERIA
1.4.1
The combined fire suppression system shall be selected to meet the required duties stated in
the drawings and schedules.
1.4.2
The entire Fire Protection System shall be hydraulically analyzed and installed by a specialist
Civil Defence approved Subcontractor only.
1.4.3
The sprinkler system shall meet all requirements of National Fire Protection Association and
shall also satisfy local Civil Defence Authorities regulations and requirements.
1.4.4
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

Office Areas
General Storage Areas and Equipment Rooms
Medical Centre & Laboratory Areas
Main Kitchen Block
1.4.5
1.4.6
: Light Hazard
: Ordinary Hazard Group 2
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a)
Light-Hazard Occupancy
: 4.1 LPM/SQ.M over 139-sq. m area.
b)
Ordinary-Hazard-Group-1
: 6.5 LPM/SQ.M over 139-sq. m area.
c)
Ordinary-Hazard-Group-2
: 7.5 LPM/SQ.M over 139-sq. m area
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

Light Hazard
: 20.9 sq. m.
Ordinary Hazard
: 12.1 sq. m.

M-3
VOLUME-III
1.5
SUBMISSIONS
1.5.1
Submit the complete fire protection system data sheets. List piping material types, ASTM
number, schedule or pressure class, joint type, manufacturer and model number where
appropriate. List valves, specialities and equipment with manufacturer and model number.
1.5.2
Submit product data for each fire stop system. Submittals shall include product
characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data, installation details and
procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project.
1.5.3
Shop drawings shall indicate water supply location and size, piping layout and size, sprinkler
locations and type, hanger locations and type, equipment locations and type, valve locations
and type, occupancy classes, hydraulic calculations reference points, node references of
remote area and discharge densities. Fire suppression data, classification, and fire and smoke
partitions shall also be indicated.
1.5.4
Submit hydraulic calculations for water supply and sprinkler systems. Include summary sheet
and detailed work sheets. Describe characteristics of water supply and location of effective
point used in calculations. Include graph illustration of water supply, hose demand, sprinkler
demand
1.5.5
Together with Shop Drawings and Product Data, Plans and Specifications shall be submitted
in conformance with NFPA. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals from
Civil Defence Authority.
1.5.6
Test Reports shall be submitted in accordance with the approved format giving all required
test details.
1.5.7
Steel pipes: Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that the pipe furnished meets the
BS and/or ASTM specification contained in this section. Contractor shall submit the Mill
certification papers, also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for this project,
in English. Heat numbers on these papers to match the heat numbers stencilled on the pipe.
Chemical analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet or exceed the
requirements of the referenced BS and/or ASTM specification.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL
1.6.1
Contractor shall use all Steel pipes with heat numbers rolled, stamped, or stenciled to each
length or each bundle, depending on the size of the pipe, and in accordance with the
appropriate specifications.
1.6.2
Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with
material that meets these specifications.
1.6.3
All equipment and components used for fire fighting installation shall be UL / FM approved.
1.7
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.7.1
Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged pumps or components, replace with new.
1.7.2
Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.

M-4
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE PIPE WORK MATERIAL
2.1.1
All above ground fire pipe work shall be of (ERW) welded galvanized steel piping to ASTM
A53 SCH 40, screwed and socketed. The fittings shall be of malleable iron or wrought iron
galvanized and of steam quality or Grooved type fitting (UL/FM approved).
Pipe joints shall be threaded for pipe sizes 50 mm and smaller, and for large sizes grooved
with mechanical coupling and gaskets or flanged.
2.1.2
All below ground (buried underground) fire pipe work shall be in HDPE material
withstanding the working pressure of 1200 KPA (12 bars) and test pressure of 1800 KPA.
2.1.3
Material and works with specified Steel Pipework, Grooved Steel Pipes with Couplings,
Mechanical Joints and Gaskets, Flange Adapters, Fire Protection Fittings shall conform to
requirements as specified within Section, pipes and tubes.
2.1.4
All materials and products shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Standards,
ANSI/AWWA and other applicable Standards and manufacturers published
recommendations. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.
2.1.5
All pipework and fittings shall conform to the relevant clauses in this specification.
2.1.6
Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of BS
and/or ASTM specifications as listed in this section of specifications.
2.1.7
Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in
accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 8 bar unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.1.8
Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows
having a centre line radius of 1.5 pipe diameters.
2.1.9
No elbows will be allowed on fire service systems where all changes of direction shall be by
means of standard bend springs or long radius bends.
2.1.10 Where pipes cross fire rated walls and slabs, beams and waterproof membranes, galvanised
steel sleeves shall be used and the penetrations shall be fireproofed (using flexible materials)
to the same rating as the wall. The fire proofing materials shall be applied strictly as per the
manufacturers recommendations.
2.2
SPRINKLER HEADS
2.2.1
Only approved Sprinkler Heads specified by model number identifying the type and style of
head shall be acceptable for installation. The temperature classification rating shall meet
NFPA requirements based on the area classification.
2.2.2
Sprinkler Head Connections: Direct sprinkler head connections, branch connections, drop
nipples and sprigs shall be made with outlet connections with locating collar engaging into
hole.
2.2.3
Glass bulb type, cast brass or bronze construction. Provide heads with nominal 20mm
discharge orifice except where greater than normal density requires large orifice.
2.2.4
Select sprinkler head temperature rating to not exceed maximum ambient temperature rating
allowed under normal conditions at installed location. Provide ordinary temperature
classification rating of 74 0C in internal areas, 100 0C where exposed to ambient temperature
such as skylights, sealed display windows, unventilated attics and roof spaces. The sprinkler

M-5
VOLUME-III
head for different areas shall be selected based on the area applicable and shall fully comply
with the regulations.
2.2.5
Provide 24 Nos of spare sprinkler heads and 1 wrench for each type of sprinkler head and
temperature range installed. The steel cabinet shall be provided to store the sprinkler heads.
2.2.6
Sprinkler head types shall be as indicated on drawings. Guards shall be selected where
mechanical damage is likely. Corrosion resistant coating shall be provided wherever subject
to corrosive atmosphere. If not otherwise specified, the following finishing are required as a
minimum:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Pendant: chrome plated finish and escutcheon.

Upright: brass finish.
Horizontal Sidewall: chrome plated finish and escutcheon.
Vertical Sidewall: chrome finish.
Quick Response Pendant: chrome plated finish and escutcheon.
Quick Response Sidewall: chrome plated finish and escutcheon.
In all areas with false ceiling, sprinkler heads shall be concealed type with flat cover plate at
false ceiling level. Colour of cover plate shall be approved by the Consultant.
2.3
VALVES
2.3.1
Ball valves:
50mm and smaller: Bronze, 2-piece, threaded or sweat ends, standard port, blowout proof
stem, chrome plated ball, glass reinforced seats, UL approved at 1,720 kPa (17.2 bar).
2.3.2
Gate valves:
50mm and smaller: Outside screw and yoke gate valves, 1,200 kPa (12 bar), bronze body,
bronze mounted, screwed bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge, with normally open
supervisory/tamper switch with double wire leads.
65mm and larger: Outside screw and yoke gate valves, 1,200 kPa (12 bar), cast iron body,
bronze mounted, bolted bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge, with normally open
supervisory/tamper switch with double wire leads and rising stem.
2.3.3
Butterfly valves:
50mm and smaller: Bronze body butterfly valve, 1,200 kPa (12 bar), geared operator, visible
position indicator, normally open supervisory/tamper switch with double wire leads, stainless
steel disc and stem.
50mm and larger: Cast or ductile iron body butterfly valve, lug style, 1,200 kPa (12 bar),
geared operator, visible position indicator, normally open supervisory/tamper switch with
double wire leads, EPDM resilient seat, EPDM seals, nickel plated ductile iron disc. Valve
assembly to be bubble tight to 12bar with no downstream flange/pipe attached. Use cap
screws for removal of downstream piping while using the valve for system shutoff.
2.3.4
Supervisory/tamper switches:
For O S & Y valve or butterfly valve installations, UL/FM listed/approved, to monitor
position of valve, tamper resistant cover screws, single or double SPDT switch contacts,
corrosion resistant, for indoor or outdoor use, NEMA 4 & 6P enclosures.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.3.5
Check valves:
50mm and smaller: Bronze body, threaded end, Y-pattern, regrindable bronze seat, renewable
bronze disc, 1,200 kPa (12 bar), suitable for installation in a horizontal or vertical line with
flow upward.
65mm and larger: Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or grooved ends, bronze trim, bolted cap,
renewable bronze seat and disc, 1,200 kPa (12 bar), suitable for installation in a horizontal or
vertical line with flow upward.
Provide 12mm automatic drip drain on inlet of fire dept. connection check valve.
2.3.6
Spring loaded check valves:

50 and smaller: Bronze body, threaded ends, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, stainless steel
center guide pin, 1,200 kPa (12 bar ), teflon seat unless only bronze available.
65 and larger: Cast or ductile iron body, wafer or globe type, bronze trim, bronze or EPDM
seat, stainless steel spring, stainless steel stem if stem is required, 12bar pressure rating.
2.3.7
Pressure-Restricting Valves: The valve shall be rated for 2067-kPa minimum, brass
construction. Include, female NPS inlet and outlet; adjustable setting feature; and straight or
90-degree angle pattern design.
2.3.8
Drain valves:
20mm min. two or three piece bronze body ball valve; threaded ends, chrome plated bronze
ball; glass filled teflon seat; teflon packing and threaded packing nut; blowout-proof stem;
2,760 kPa (27.6 bar), with hose thread outlet and cap.
2.3.9
Double check valves:

Double check backflow preventer with 2 independent spring loaded check valves, 2 isolation
ball or gate valves with normally open tamper switch with double wire leads and 4 valve test
ports. Construct of bronze or epoxy coated cast iron body with bronze and plastic internal
parts, stainless steel springs, silicone rubber valve discs, bronze seats, the valve shall be rated
for minimum of 1,200 kPa (12 bar).
2.3.10 Alarm check valves:

Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or grooved ends, 1,200 kPa (12 bar) minimum working
pressure, bronze grooved seat with o-ring seal, single hitch pin and latch design. Provide trim
for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber,
drip cup assembly piped to floor or hub drain, fill line attachment with strainer.
2.4
FLOW SWITCHES
A vane type water flow switch with metal enclosure with adjustable pneumatic retard and
electrical characteristics to be compatible with alarm system. Flow switches shall be UL/FM
approved.
2.5
PRESSURE SWITCHES
Pressure actuated switch with field adjustable settings, metal enclosure and electrical
characteristics compatible with alarm system. Pressure switches shall be UL/FM approved.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.6
LOCAL ALARM BELL

Weatherproof electric alarm bell with red painted metal housing, mounting base and gong;
solenoid operator; weatherproofing o-ring seal and electrical characteristics compatible with
alarm system. Alarm bells shall be UL/FM approved.
2.7
PRESSURE GAUGES
Cast aluminium, stainless steel or brass case of not less than 9 cm in diameter, double strength
glass window, black lettering on a white background, phosphor bronze bourdon tube with
bronze bushings, recalibration from the front of the dial, 99% accuracy over the middle half
of the scale, 98.5% accuracy over the remainder of the scale. Include bronze 3-way globe
valve with plugged outlet for Fire Inspector's test gauge. Pressure gauges shall be UL/FM
approved.
2.8
FIRE PUMP TEST METER(Where applicable)

Fire Pump Test Meter, UL/FM approved, incorporating a calibrated venturi and attached
GPM meter, to be installed on the discharge side of the fire pump, to accurately measure
pump performance. Test Meter shall be supplied with grooved ends for installation with
grooved end couplings.
2.9
WATER MOTOR ALARM

Factory assembled water motor shall consist of body, impeller, gasket and cover. Body shall
be cast from highly corrosion resistant aluminum magnesium alloy.
2.10
LANDING VALVES
Hydrant outlets should be of a type acceptable to the public fire brigade and should comprise
a valve 65mm bore constructed in gun metal, screwed or flanged for attachment to the riser
and fitted with a 65 mm instantaneous female coupling and a blank cap secured by a suitable
length of chain. The valve gate should lift clear of the waterway and the valve cover should
be securely fitted to the valve body so that it does not unscrew when operated. The valve
spindle should not be less than 22mm diameter and fitted with a gun metal hand wheel about
150mm in diameter which should be anti-clockwise. The whole fitting should be of sound
construction and shall be suitable for a working pressure of 16 bar. Valve shall comply with
BS 5041.
The hydrant outlet valves used shall be of the type incorporating a device to limit the outlet
pressure to a maximum of 4.5 bar. The instantaneous coupling shall be of the single-lug twist
release instantaneous pattern with vulcanized rubber blank cap. Valves shall be UL listed.
2.11
EXTERNAL FIRE HYDRANTS

Hydrants shall be located in strategic locations generally at 60-70 meters intervals.
Hydrants shall be a standpipe/pillar type with 2 outlets/landing valves per standpipe
and shall be of a type approved by the Local Civil Defence. The hydrant valves shall be
provided with pressure reducing valve to limit the pressure to manageable levels.
Hydrants shall not be located closer than 12.2 metres to the structure being protected or be
separated from the structure with materials providing a 2 hour fire rating, except with the
specific permission of the Client.
The design of hydrant connections to fire mains shall take into account the reactive forces
that will be experienced during hydrant operation. Provide all necessary anchors and thrust
blocks.

M-8
VOLUME-III
Bollards shall be provided around the hydrants to protect them from any mechanical
damage by vehicles.
2.12
FLEXIBLE FIRE HOSES AND NOZZLE

Hoses shall be 65mm diameter suitable for a maximum working pressure of 17 kg/cm2. Hoses
shall be all synthetic nylon wrap and weft totally encapsulated in PVC/N to forma unified
lining and cover. Hoses shall be UL/FM approved or certified by an equal certification
authority for use on fire service. Hose length shall be 30M and shall terminate in a nozzle at
one end. Nozzle shall be light weight of aluminum alloy with three operating positions-OFF,
STRAIGHT JET and WATER SUPPLY.
The other end of the flexible hose shall have a quick connect coupling to suit the landing
valve.
2.12
FIRE BREECHING CONNECTIONS

4 ways breeching connections for use as alternative water supply entries by the Local Fire
Department shall be of 65 mm male inlet type in accordance with BS 5041 Part 3: 1975
(1987) and local civil defence requirement. The pressure rating shall comply with the system
pressure.
Breeching connections shall be housed in glass fronted boxes to BS 5041: Part 5: 1974 (1987)
marked "Wet Riser Inlet" in English and Arabic. Cabinet shall be of stainless steel
construction.
2.13
FIRE HOSE CABINET
2.13.1 Fire Hose Cabinet

Fire hose cabinets, valves, hose and accessories shall be approved by and shall be in
conformance with the requirements of the Consultant.
2.13.2 Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, fire hose and landing valve cabinet shall be a vertical
combined unit with two compartments, one for hose reel and the other for landing valve,
hose, nozzle and fire extinguishers.
2.13.3 All cabinets shall have stainless steel doors and architrave.
2.13.4 Cabinets shall be suitable either for recessed or surface installation in locations as indicated
on drawings.
2.13.5 Painted on the door of the fire hose cabinet with minimum 7mm block letters shall be the
following notice in English and Arabic.
IMPORTANT
PULL HOSE FROM REEL
WATER WILL FLOW AUTOMATICALLY
2.13.6 Hose reel cabinet shall contain a chrome plated swing hose reel complete with 30m of 25mm
double red braided rubber fire hose to BS-EN 671-1 with chrome plated brass shutoff nozzle
clamped ends, automatic valve to open water flow after2 turns of the reel and 25 mm key
operated shut-off valve. All metal parts shall be polished and chrome plated.

M-9
VOLUME-III
2.13.7 Where recessed enclosure with timber door is provided on the architectural drawings as a fire
cabinet, only the fire equipments shall be provided inside with signs on the timber door in
Arabic and English.
2.14
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
2.14.1 Fire extinguishers shall be 5 kg carbon dioxide type and 4.5 Kg dry powder type to the
approval of the local authorities.
2.14.2 Fire extinguishers shall be provided in each Fire Cabinet, and in each Mechanical, telephone
and Electrical Rooms and where required by the local Civil Defence Authority.
2.14.3 Water fire extinguisher shall be provided wherever indicated on the drawings; these shall be
of 9 liter capacity water filled made of stainless steel material approved by the Local
Authorities.
2.14.4 Extinguishers for use in Mechanical, Electrical and telephone Rooms shall be furnished with
wall bracket and shall be mounted on walls.
2.14.5 The pressure test on the extinguishers shall remain valid for 5 years.
2.14.6 Diesel generator room shall be equipped with 6Kg. Foam extinguisher mounted on wall
brackets.
2.14.7 Mount all fire extinguishers in offices and public areas in Fire Extinguisher Cabinets similar
to the cabinets described for those reels with die cut lettering label 'Fire Extinguisher'.
2.15
AUTOMATIC FIRE HOSE REELS

Fire hose reel shall be slim type , recess mounted, swinging type to comply or exceed with BS
5274/EN 671and shall be housed in cabinets.
The main contractor to Architectural specification shall install installation of doors and
identification marks.
All the internal parts used shall be made of material according to BS 1490 LM 16/24. The
hose tubing should be 25mm internal diameter rubber reinforced with double braiding and
30mtr long to comply with BS 3169 type 1 class B or EN 694 with the exception pf car
parking areas where hose reels, with extended coverage tubing to be used.
The hose reel nozzle to comply with EN 671-PN 16/DN 25/6.
The unit shall be complete with lockshield valve and 25mm pressure reducing valve to
maintain pressure of 3 bar at outlet.
For testing and maintenance drain line with non return valve to be used. Brief operating
instructions should be clearly displayed on each hose reel.
2.16
FITTINGS FOR SITE FIRE SERVICES
2.16.1 External Fire Hydrants

External Fire hydrant shall be of the pillar type with protecting shell and shall meet or exceed
the specifications of the local civil defence authority and French Standard NFS 61213. The
hydrant shall include following features:
M - 10
VOLUME-III
Upper barrel shall be of best quality ductile iron. Lower barrel shall be of cast iron. All barrel
castings shall be painted inside and outside with 300 micron thick non toxic fusion bonded
epoxy. Aluminum shell shall be painted with 60 micron thick polyester paint to colour as
approved by the local Civil Defence Authority.
Hydrant rod shall be of steel, zinc electroplated in two part construction held together by a
rod connector made of hot dip galvanized ductile iron.
A cast bronze nut shall directly actuate the hydrant rod. Grease groove shall ensure complete
lubrication and long life `O' rings shall seal the lubrication chamber and prevent water
entering the operating mechanism.
Drain ring shall be of bronze.
Hydrant shall be with one front outlet size 100mm diameter and two side outlets each 65mm
diameter. Outlets shall be provided with quick connect couplings, protective caps held in
place by chains. Fire hydrants shall be with enclosed outlets in an aluminium casing as
approved by the Civil Defence Authority and shall be suitable for a maximum working
pressure of 16 Bars. Hydrants outlets shall be provided with quick connect couplings to the
approval of the Local Civil Defence Authority.
2.16.2 Flexible fire hoses and Nozzle
Hoses shall be 65mm diameter suitable for a maximum working pressure of 17 Kg/cm2.
Hoses shall be all synthetic nylon wrap and weft totally encapsulated in PVC/N to form a
unified lining and cover. Hoses shall be UL/FM approved or certified by an equal certification
authority for use on fire service. Hose length shall be 30M and shall terminate in a nozzle at
one end. Nozzle shall be light weight of aluminium alloy with three operating positions OFF, STRAIGHT JET and WATER SPRAY.
The other end of the flexible hose shall have a quick connect coupling to suit the fire hydrant.
Two flexible hoses along with nozzles shall be housed within a weather proof fire cabinet
located near each fire hydrant.
Fire cabinets construction shall be of 3 to 4 mm nominal thickness GRP using standard
resins. Each cabinet shall be fitted with internal fire hose support 300 mm from the top and
reinforced space to facilitate mounting of 610mm tubular pedestal support finished in black
powder coat.
Minimum size of cabinet shall be 930 mm height x 690 mm width x 285 mm depth with a
door aperture of 765 mm height x 500 mm width. Each cabinet shall be complete with a
lockable door with recessed handle, nylon/stainless steel ball catch, powder coated tubular
pedestal support and door mounted break glass key unit.
2.17
Kitchen Hood Fire Extinguishment System

An automatic suppression system shall be provided for the kitchen hood areas as ndicated on
the drawings. In a fire situation the system shall be automatically actuated to discharge a
spray of wet chemical to suppress the fire. A supervised alarm siren shall sound in the hazard
area until manually silenced at the control panel. Warning signs outside hazard door shall be
illuminated and the local air conditioning system shall be shut down.
The system shall also be interlocked with the fire alarm system to indicate an alarm both at
the local fire alarm panel and at the fire station.

M - 11
VOLUME-III
2.18
Foam Proportioning System

Wherever indicated on the drawings the contractor shall provide foam proportioning system
with full design from specialist supplier, design and calculations shall be approved by
Consultant prior to the selection of equipment The system shall include the following:
Foam concentrate stored within butyl rubber fixed inside steel pressure vessel connected to
balanced pressure foam proportioners. Upon operation, water at fire main pressure enters the
tank between the vessel wall and the rubber bag. Foam concentrate is then expelled from the
bag into the balanced pressure proportioner.
The system shall be complete with the following facilities:
Automatic operation pressure operated valve.
Sight glass within the bladder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Piping and Fittings. Ream all pipe to full inside diameter after cutting and thoroughly clean
before erection. All material shall have proper identification marks that can be verified prior
installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA rulings, listings and manufacturers
recommendations. Locate where accessible for servicing and replacement.
Install piping so that system can be drained. Where possible, slope to main drain valve.
Where piping cannot be fully drained, install nipple and cap for drainage of less than 20 lit or
valve/nipple/cap for drainage over 20 lit. Pipe drain valves to grade or to air gap sewer
receptor.
General installation works shall be in accordance with section Pipes and Tubes.
Run all piping as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets. Conceal piping in finished
rooms unless shown or specified otherwise.
Where piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective sleeve covering of
elastomeric pipe insulation. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction.
Provide clearance for access to valves. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or
expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment
or the building.
Riser clamps: Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the
building structure or secured to the building structure below at each floor.
Sprinkler heads shall locate sprinkler heads as indicated on fire protection plan and reflected
ceiling plan maintaining minimum clearances from obstructions, ceilings and walls. Install
sprinkler heads level in locations not subject to spray pattern interference.
Switches: Locate flow and pressure switches where indicated and where required to obtain
specified zoning to isolate floors and major areas of floors. Provide valved test connection for
flow switch adjacent to flow switch. Pipe to floor drain. Test flow switch to verify proper
operation.

M - 12
VOLUME-III
Gauges: Provide a valved pressure gauge in main fire protection riser, at the top of each
piping riser, at inlet and outlet of pump and elsewhere as indicated.
Valves: Properly align piping before installation of valves. Do not support weight of piping
system on valve ends. Mount valves in locations where access for operation are available for
servicing and replacement. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal
position. Valves installed with the stems down will not be accepted. Provide a riser shutoff
valve and a capped hose thread drain valve at the bottom of each riser. Provide capped hose
thread drain valves to allow draining of each portion of piping.
Specialty Valves: Install in vertical position fire protection riser. Install trim recommended by
manufacturer including drain and test valves. Pipe drains to hub or floor drains. Test and
adjust operation of valves, alarms and pressure maintenance devices.
Fire Department Connections: Mount on wall where indicated. Support from structure
independent of piping. Fill wall penetration with insulation and caulk exterior and interior
face of wall opening weathertight. Provide an automatic ball drip installation in the inlet
piping between the F.D.C. and the check valve, for drainage.
3.3
PAINTING
All fire fighting pipework (whether exposed or concealed) shall be given one coat of
approved primer (similar to Jotun Jotamastic 80 and Hardtop XP as primer and paint) which
can meet the LEED requirement for VOC content, and two coats of approved post office red
enamel paint. Identification and marking shall be in accordance with Section 15075
Mechanical Identification and shall fully comply with NFPA regulations.
3.4
SIGNAGE
Careful consideration shall be given to the location of fire protection signage. A set
of layouts shall be produced advising the type of fire protection signage and their location.
Signage shall be supplied as of type approved by the Local Civil Defence. Details of
signage shall be submitted to Client and approved prior to the commencement of
construction.
All signs shall be Arabic and English, with the Arabic (medium Naskh) being above
the English (Helvetica medium).
The floor area beneath each fire extinguisher shall be delineated to stop the storage of
articles below them so that there is a clear access path should it be required to use the
extinguisher.
Exact location of the fire extinguishers shall be agreed with the client during a visit on site.
3.5
PRE-COMMISSIONING CLEANING
Before installations are handed over or subjected to inspection and testing, the entire
installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installation shall be flushed out with clean water. During the flushing out,
provision/special care shall be made for water discharge and subcontractor should ensure that
the cleaning operation avoids any damage to the plant and other services installed. The entire
operation shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Consultant. The contractor shall submit
the method statement for Consultants review prior to commencement of any works related
with commissioning.

M - 13
VOLUME-III
3.6
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Testing and Commissioning shall be as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as
per Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, Section Pipes and Tubes.
The testing and commissioning of diesel driven and electrical pumps shall fully comply with
NFPA regulations and should also satisfy the local Civil Defence requirements.
The fire protection piping system shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2 hours at 1
times the system pressure without leak.
Testing of pipe networks in sections or entire system shall be carried out as required by
sequence of construction program. Do not conceal any pipework unless and until it has been
successfully tested and certified. If required for the additional pressure load under test,
provide temporary restraints at fittings or expansion joints. The entire test must be witnessed
and certified by the Consultant. All pressure test reports are to be documented in accordance
with NFPA Contractor's Material and Test Certificate forms.
Use clean water and remove air from the piping being tested where possible. Measure and
record test pressure at the high point in the system.
END OF SECTION

M - 14
VOLUME-III
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Mechanical Section 21 13 13: Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

Fire-protection valves.
Fire-department connections.
Sprinklers.
Excess-pressure pumps.
Alarm devices.
Manual control stations.
Control panels.
Pressure gages.
Related Sections:
1
Section 211000 "Water based fire suppression systems.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure higher than standard 175 psig (1200 kPa), but not higher than 300 psig
(2050 KPa).
Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum

working pressure.
High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 300-psig (2070-kPa) working pressure.
Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis

by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by Authorities.

1
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications shall be as per design drawings and

NFPA-13.
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be as per design

drawings and NFPA standards.
Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be as per design

drawings and NFPA standards.
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per design drawings and UL listing.
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless

otherwise indicated:
a.
b.
c.
Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 60 minutes.

Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 minutes.
Extra-Hazard Occupancies: 500 gpm (31.5 L/s) for 90 minutes.
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product provide manufacturers catalog sheet indicating size,
capacity and accessories.
Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, to be coordinated with all MEP
services.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer .
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by Local Authorities, including hydraulic calculations.
Welding certificates.
H
I
Fire-hydrant flow test report.

Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
Field quality-control reports.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE

M-3
VOLUME-III
Installer Qualifications:
1
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler

systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and

field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 7 years
experience approved by manufacturer.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and

testing shall comply with the following:
1.8
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and

Including Four Stories in Height."
NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A
1.9
Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service
according to requirements indicated:
1
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of sprinkler service.
Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction

Manager's written permission.
COORDINATION
A Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.10
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

M-4
VOLUME-III
PART 2 RODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
2.1.1
All above ground fire pipe work shall be of standard weight galvanized steel piping to ASTM
A53 Grade B SCH 40, screwed and socketed. The fittings shall be of malleable iron to ASME
B16.3 or wrought iron galvanized and of steam quality or Grooved type fitting (UL/FM
approved).
Pipe joints shall be threaded for pipe sizes 50 mm and smaller, and for large sizes grooved
with mechanical coupling and gaskets or flanged.
Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C"
shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, GI bolts, nuts, and washers.
Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with inte-gral pipe stop and O-ring pocked
and O-ring, uniformly com-pressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe.
2.1.2
All below ground (buried underground) fire pipe work shall be in HDPE material
withstanding the working pressure of 1200 KPA (12 bars) and test pressure of 1800 KPA.
2.1.3
Material and works with specified Steel Pipework, Grooved Steel Pipes with Couplings,
Mechanical Joints and Gaskets, Flange Adapters, Fire Protection Fittings shall conform to
requirements as specified within Section, pipes and tubes.
2.1.4
All materials and products shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Standards,
ANSI/AWWA and other applicable Standards and manufacturers published
recommendations. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.
2.1.5
All pipework and fittings shall conform to the relevant clauses in this specification.
2.1.6
Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of BS
and/or ASTM specifications as listed in this section of specifications.
2.1.7
Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in
accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 8 bar unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.1.8
Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows
having a centre line radius of 1.5 pipe diameters.
2.1.9
No elbows will be allowed on fire service systems where all changes of direction shall be by
means of standard bend springs or long radius bends.
2.1.10 Where pipes cross fire rated walls and slabs, beams and waterproof membranes, galvanised
steel sleeves shall be used and the penetrations shall be fireproofed (using flexible materials)
to the same rating as the wall. The fire proofing materials shall be applied strictly as per the
2.2
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

M-5
VOLUME-III
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face
gaskets.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493, solvent cement
recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe
and fittings. Include cleaner or primer recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer.
1
2
Use solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 650 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, and Bolts and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
Description: System of support brackets and covers made to protect sprinkler piping.
Brackets: Glass-reinforced nylon.
Covers: Extruded PVC sections of length, shape, and size required for size and routing of
CPVC piping.
2.4
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

Refer Section 211000
2.5
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
Branch Outlet Fittings:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standard: UL 213.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required
to match connected branch piping.
Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:

1
2
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.

M-6
VOLUME-III
3
4
5
C
2
3
4
5

Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
Size: Same as connected piping.
Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
Adjustable Drop Nipples:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Standard: UL 199.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
Body Material: Brass.
Inlet: Threaded.
Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:

1
Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
Branch Line Testers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standard: UL 1474.
Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
Length: Adjustable.
Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:

1
Standard: UL 1474.
Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to
ceiling grid.
Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
2.6
SPRINKLERS
General Requirements:

Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed recessed type with face plate to match ceiling finish.
1
Finish: powder coated.

M-7
VOLUME-III
Face Plate Finish: To match ceiling or as instructed by Engineer.
Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with guard.

1
2
Finish: Brass.
Sidewall Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate and
guard.
1
Finish: Brass.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass.
Dry Sprinklers: Standard pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
1
Finish: Brass.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass.
Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.
Spray Nozzles: Brass with solid cone discharge, 30 degrees of arc with blow-off dust cap.
Note: All sprinklers heads for residential application shall be of the quick re-sponse type.
2.7
ALARM DEVICES
Refer section 211000.
2.8
MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15)
pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent
accidental opening.
2.9
CONTROL PANELS
Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated,

including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries;
field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm
bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1
Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by
breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

M-8
VOLUME-III
Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe
nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by
breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A
1
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities
having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved
working plans.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device
materials and installation in NFPA 13.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to
drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and
with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install
gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

M-9
VOLUME-III
Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.
O Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject to
freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 "Heat Tracing for FireSuppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression
Systems Insulation."
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for FireSuppression Piping."
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Fire-Suppression Piping."
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Escutcheons for FireSuppression Piping."
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for
water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1
2
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer
lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings
with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

M - 10
VOLUME-III
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube
Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings
Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
Plastic-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1
2
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements. Apply primer.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to
manufacturer's "Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R for supports.
3.5
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
Specialty Valves:

M - 11
VOLUME-III
3.6
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in

main supply to system.
2
Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3
Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main
supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections,
ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line
attachment.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling
grid.
3.7
Perform tests and inspections.
Tests and Inspections:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8
CLEANING
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-maintenance pumps.
END OF SECTION

M - 12
VOLUME-III
FOAM WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Mechanical Section 21 13 39: Foam System
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
Concentrate piping and piping specialties.

Bladder tanks and proportioning devices.
Foam concentrate.
Discharge devices.
Monitoring and alarm devices.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A
B
AFFF: Aqueous film-forming foam.

AR-AFFF: Alcohol-resistant aqueous film-forming foam.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Description: Engineered, fixed, deluge, automatically actuated, low-expansion, AFFF fireextinguishing system for flammable-liquid fires. System includes diaphragm proportioning
tanks and devices as described in NFPA 16.
1.5
Standard Working Pressure of Piping-System Component: Listed for at least 175 psig (1200
kPa).
Unless authorities having jurisdiction have stricter requirements, minimum design parameters
are as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Solution: 3 percent foam-water solution.

Sprinkler Spacing: Maximum of 100 sq. ft. (9.5 sq. m) per sprinkler, and maximum
12-foot (3.7-m) spacing.
Design Density: Minimum 0.16 gpm/sq. ft. (0.108 L/s per sq. m).
Foam Supply: Minimum 10 minute discharge time.
Water Supply: Minimum 60 minutes.
Remote Area: Open-sprinkler systems shall discharge over the entire system area.
Sprinkler Temperature Rating: Maximum 250 to 300 deg F (121 to 149 deg C) at a
roof or ceiling, and 135 to 170 deg F (57 to 77 deg C) for intermediate sprinklers.
Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to NFPA 13.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1
2
3
Piping, valves, fittings, and hangers.

Seismic restraints for all equipment.

M-2
VOLUME-III
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
Foam concentrate.
Discharge devices. Include flow characteristics.
Monitoring and alarm devices. Include electrical data and supervision method.
Foam-concentrate pumps. Include power supply and controller.
Foam-concentrate storage tanks.
Strainers.
Test connections.
Shop Drawings: For each hazard area, drawn to scale, and signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1
2
3
4
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Design Calculations: For amount of foam concentrate required for each hazard area.
Plans: Show the following:
a
b
c
d
Foam-solution proportioning tanks and devices, piping, discharge devices,

monitoring and alarm devices, and accessories.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Fire-alarm panel.
Equipment and furnishings.
Permit-Approved Drawings: Working plans prepared according to NFPA 16 and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations complying with NFPA 13.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For foam fire extinguishing to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Valves and specialties.

Foam concentrate.
Discharge devices. Include flow characteristics.
Monitoring and alarm devices. Include supervision method.
Foam-concentrate pumps. Include controller.
Foam-concentrate storage tanks.
Strainers.
Test connections.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
FM Global Compliance: Provide components that are FM Approved and that are listed in
FM's "Approval Guide."

M-3
VOLUME-III
D UL Compliance: Provide equipment listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
1
2
Discharge Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
Foam Concentrate: Not less than 200 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCENTRATE PIPING MATERIALS
Comply with requirements specified in Division 21 Section 211000 for pipes, fittings, joining
materials, and valves.
2.2
VALVES
General Valve Requirements:

1
2
UL listed or FM Approved for use in fire-protection systems.

Compatible with type of foam concentrate used.
Comply with requirements specified in Division-21 section wet pipe sprinkler systems.
2.3
SPECIALTIES
Specialties shall comply with NFPA 16, be compatible with the foam concentrate, and be
designed to be drained and cleaned.
Foam-Concentrate Storage Tanks: Buna-N, bladder-type proportioning tank complying with

UL 162 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; designed for use with
foam-concentrate pumps and for specific type of foam concentrate used. Include bladder,
internal piping, fill and drain, glass sight gage, piping, and valves. Contain concentrate in the
bladder.
Orientation: Horizontal design with saddle support.
Foam-Concentrate Storage Tanks: Atmospheric type, complying with UL 162 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; designed for use with foam-concentrate
pumps and for specific type of foam concentrate used. Include pressure-vacuum vent, fill and
drain, glass sight gage, piping, and valves.
Foam-Concentrate Pumps: Listed for use in foam-water systems according to NFPA 20.
Include supply side pressure relief valve and drain cock or valve.
Proportioning Controllers: Venturi type complying with UL 162 and of capacity to match
design at minimum and maximum flow.
Concentrate Control Valves: Water-operated ball or deluge valve designed to open with flow
through the proportioning controller.
Concentrate Strainers: Bronze body and stainless-steel mesh strainer with minimum 0.125inch (3.2-mm) perforations to remove solids that would block system components.

M-4
VOLUME-III
Pressure Gages: Comply with UL 393; with 3-1/2-inch (90-mm) minimum-diameter dial, 0to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) dial range, and caption "WATER" or "CONCENTRATE" on
dial face.
2.4
FOAM CONCENTRATE
Description: AR-AFFF liquid concentrate, complying with NFPA 11 and UL 162, for making
foam-water fire-extinguishing foam solution.
2.5
DISCHARGE DEVICES
Discharge devices shall be UL listed or FM Approved.
Sprinklers: Open, air-aspirating type; UL listed or FM Approved and listed for use with type
of foam concentrate used.
Spray Nozzles: For foam water; include foam generator and distributing deflector to
distribute foam or water.
2.6
MONITORING DEVICES
Valve Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw, with normally closed contacts
complying with UL 753. Switch shall signal fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when valve is
in other than fully open position.
Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw, UL listed or FM Approved and complying with
UL 753. Switch shall signal an alarm condition at the fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when
switch is in other than fully open position.
Flow Switches: Single pole, double throw, UL listed or FM Approved and complying with
UL 753. Switch shall signal an alarm condition at the fire-alarm panel or releasing panel when
switch is in other than fully open position.
2.7
ALARM DEVICES
Description: UL listed or FM Approved, low voltage, and surface mounting. Alarm and
monitoring devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm
System" or Division 28 Section "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
Install concentrate storage tanks on concrete bases. Concrete bases are specified in Division
21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
Install concentrate storage tanks anchored to substrate according to tank manufacturer's

written instructions.
Install tanks level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced
standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and
devices needing service are accessible.
Install seismic restraints for tanks.

M-5
VOLUME-III
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION
Install piping and other components level and plumb.
Comply with requirements for basic pipe installation and joint construction in Division 21
Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge devices according to requirements listed in
NFPA 16, "Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems."
1
2
3
Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.

Install seismic restraints for concentrate storage tanks and piping systems.
Install monitoring and alarm devices according to NFPA 16 and NFPA 72.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on piping, valves,
apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for
foam concentrate. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1
2
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.
Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems and with foam concentrate.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler
Systems" or Division 21 Section "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Provide concentrate control and drain valves with piping to permit maintenance of the foam
concentrate with continuous sprinkler-system service.

M-6
VOLUME-III
Install proportioning controller in fire-suppression piping to provide coverage to area

indicated on Drawings.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
Connect electrical devices to building's fire-alarm system. Comply with requirements for
wiring and connections in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" or
Division 28 Section "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."
Install a fire department connection on the supply side of the proportioning controller when
required.
3.4
A
LABELING
Install labeling on piping, equipment, and panels according to Division 22 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.5
CHARGING SYSTEM
Fill proportioning tanks with foam concentrate after field quality-control testing is complete
and satisfactory results have been achieved.
3.6
Inspection: Engage the services of a qualified professional engineer to inspect installed fireextinguishing systems, prepare installation report, and certify that installation complies with
the Contract Documents, calculations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 16, "Acceptance Tests" Chapter.
Include the following tests and inspections to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
Check mechanical items.

Inspect equipment and check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
Check electrical systems.
Flush supply piping.
Perform hydrostatic pressure test.
Perform acceptance test.
Perform proportioning system test.
Perform discharge test.
Flush system piping.
Correct malfunctioning equipment; retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or does not perform as specified and
indicated; retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations including connections,
and to assist in testing.

1
After installing foam fire-extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2
3
4
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start systems to
confirm proper unit operation.
and equipment.
Foam fire-extinguishing piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
(FM-200 SYSTEM)

Mechanical Section 21 22 10: Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems (FM 200)
M-1
VOLUME-III
GENERAL CONDITIONS :
1) SCOPE:
This specification outlines the requirements for a Total Flooding Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described in this
specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary,
and required, to complete and test the suppression system.
2) APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS:
The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in
the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1) NFPA No. 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
2) NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code
3) NFPA No. 72 - Standard For Fire Alarm System
4) Factory Mutual Approval Guide
5) U.L Listings
6) Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards, shall be used as
"minimum" design standards. Also to be considered are good engineering practices.
I.
REQUIREMENTS:
The FM 200 Fire Suppression System installation shall be made in accordance with the
drawings, specifications and applicable standards.
II.
SCOPE OF WORK
The Specialist contract shall include the following materials / works in their scope but
not limited to:
1. Design & Engineering of clean Agent fire suppression system;
2. Prepare workshop drawing and technical submittals;
3. Perform Flow calculation;
4. Clean Agent gas storage cylinders filled with gas and all hardware accessories;
5. Cylinder Manifold and discharge piping;
6. Discharge Nozzles;
7. Gas low pressure switch & Gas discarge pressure switch;

M-2
VOLUME-III
8. Fire Detection and Alarm system c/w Optical smoke detectors, manual release, Auto /
Manual selector switch, Abort unit, First stage Alarm bell, second stage Alarm
sounder, strobe horn, Gas discharge warning sign and associated cabling etc;
9. Gas release control panel
10. Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers
and/or electric power supplies, relays or shunt trip breakers.
11. Providing Drop curtains for any permanent openings;
12. Integrity Test and Functional test;
13. Training to the client representatives;
14. Provide As Built drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
The work listed below shall be provided by others, or under other sections of this
specification:
1) 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC power supply to the Fire suppression control panel.
2) Connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station.
3) Sealing of openings to maintain the protected room enclosure as Air tight.
III.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
IV.
MANUFACTURER:
1) The manufacturer of the Suppression System hardware and detection components
shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar
types of suppression systems and who can refer to similar installations providing
satisfactory service.
2) The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on all
major components.
3) All devices, components and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturers latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
4) All equipment shall be U.L listed and/or FM approved.
V.
INSTALLER:
1) The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test and
maintain Suppression Systems.
2) The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems in strict
accordance with all applicable standards.

M-3
VOLUME-III
3) The installing contractor must have a minimum of eight (8) years experience in the
design, installation and testing of Clean Agent, or similar,fire suppression systems.
A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request.
4) The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a Clean Agent recharging
station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the largest
Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of bulk agent
storage available.
5) The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the Clean
Agent system
equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available from
inventory.
6) The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a
twenty-four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.
VI.
SUBMITTALS:
1) The installing contractor shall submit the following information for approval to the
local Fire Prevention Agency, owners Insurance Underwriter, Architect/Engineer, and all
other Authorities Having Jurisdiction before starting installation:
a) Field installation layout drawings scale shall be 1:100m detailing the location of all
agent storage tanks, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s),
detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
b) Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders, special
sealing requirements and equipment shutdowns.
c) Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, ( i.e.; room,
underfloor, and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical work.
d) A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage containers,
mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include point-topoint conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector mounting.
Internal control panel wiring diagram shall include power supply requirements and field
wiring termination points.
Graphic Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration shall
be provided. (Optional device)
Complete flow calculations shall be provided from a U.L. listed computer program, for
all engineered Clean Agent systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include the manufacturers
name and U.L. listing number for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each
fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified and included in the
calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown and detailed by zone.
Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration the
power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components under full
load conditions.
A complete sequence of operation detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,
remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone or
system.

M-4
VOLUME-III
VII.
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS :

1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION:

A) The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Suppression System supplied &
installed by an Authorised by the manufacturer.
B) The system shall provide minimum design concentration of 7.0%, by volume, in all
areas and/or protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature within the
protected area. System design shall not exceed the NOAEL value of 9.0%, adjusted for
maximum space temperature anticipated, unless provisions for room evacuation, before
agent release, are provided.
C) The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and
electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, FM
200 agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible
and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface,
caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other operations
necessary for a functional, U.L. Listed and/or F.M. approved FM 200 Clean Agent
Suppression System.
D) Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made
at 6 month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service.
E) The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10 minute "hold" period.
F) The system(s) shall be actuated by cross zoned photoelectric detectors installed at a
maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. (23.2 sq. m) per detector, in both the room, underfloor
and above ceiling protected spaces. If the air flow is one air change per minute,
photoelectric detectors shall be installed at a spacing not to exceed 125 sq. ft. (11.6 sq.
m) per detector. (Ref. NFPA No. 72 - current edition)
G) Detectors shall be wired in Sequential Detection method of operation, standard CrossZoned detection, or Single Detector Release, using either a Class "A" or Class "B" wiring
arrangement. No other detection / wiring arrangements will be acceptable.
H) Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1) Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a) Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator.
c) Transfer sets of 5 Amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform auxiliary system
functions such as:
1) Operate door holder/closures on access doors.
2) Transmit a signal to a fire alarm system.
3) Shutdown HVAC equipment.
d) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
2) Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:

M-5
VOLUME-III
a) Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.

b) Energize an predischarge horn or horn/strobe device.
c) Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d) Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). System abort sequence is
enabled at this time.
f) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
3) After completion of the time-delay sequence, the HFC-227ea Clean Agent system
shall discharge and the following shall occur:
a) Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment
c) Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge occurred.
d) Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
4) The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located at
each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence description
above except that the time delay and abort functions SHALL be bypassed. The manual
discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type and shall be supervised at the
main control panel.
VIII.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When one or
more pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates
produced by one manufacturer.
1) All devices and equipment shall be U/L Listed and or FM approved.
2.
CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM AND DISTRIBUTION:

Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.
The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both design
criteria.
Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
3) Each supply container shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as possible,
to reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
4) The clean agent shall be stored in Agent Storage Containers. Containers shall be
super-pressurized, with dry Nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70 F. (2482
kpa at 21 C). Containers shall be of high-strength alloy steel construction and conform
to NFPA 2001.

M-6
VOLUME-III
5) Clean agent containers with an Impulse valve can be actuated by the following
methods and Solenoid valve is not allowed:
Method 1: Electric actuation Single container system with Impulse valve operator
(IVO) & Impulse release Module (IRM)
Method 2: Electric actuation Multi container system with Impulse valve operator (IVO)
& Impulse release Module (IRM)
Method 3: Electric & Pneumatic actuation Two container system with Impulse valve
operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
Method 4: Electric & Pneumatic actuation Multi container system with Impulse valve
operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
6) Each container shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual
and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low pressure switch shall be
wired to the control panel to provide an audible and visual "Supervisory" alarm in the
event the container pressure drops below 288 psi (1986 kpa). The pressure gauge shall
be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container pressure.
7) Each container shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates when
the internal temperature exceeds 150F. (66C).
8) Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided, within the manufacturers guidelines,
to distribute the clean agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution.
a) Nozzles shall be available in pipe sizes 3/8 thru 2.0 (BPS 10mm thru 50mm). Each
size shall be available in 180 and 360 distribution patterns.
b) Ceiling plates, can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes through
ceiling tiles.
9) Distribution piping, and fittings, shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards and guidelines.
All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using good, accepted
practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored
at all directional changes and nozzle locations.
a) All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove
burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
b) All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the male
thread ONLY.
IX.
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS :
1. CONTROL PANEL :
The control panel shall be a SHP (Single Hazard Panel) Control Panel.
The SHP Control System, and its components, shall be UL listed and FM approved for
releasing service and be suitable for clean Agent release service.

M-7
VOLUME-III
The SHP Control System shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation and auxiliary functions, as outlined.
The SHP Control System shall be capable of providing 7AH or 18AH battery standby
power supplies.
The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software
integration designed to guarantee reliability.
The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector Release
and Manual Release detection/actuation methods.
The SHP Control System shall provide the following capabilities and functions:
a) Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24
VDC.
b) Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
c) Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
d) Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC normal;
alarm; pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced and system abort.
e) Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
f) Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
g) Five (5) optional Abort types
h) Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor failure
from inadvertently activating release outputs
i) A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
j) Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, pre-discharge,
discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on panel configuration.
k) Two (2) Form C relays, rated at 5 amps, are provided on the SHP panel board.
Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will provide four (4)
additional 5 amp relays.
l) Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
m) 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and strobes.
Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a total of 10.6 amps
of available power.
n) Available in either Red or Gray finish
2. OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR:
The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72 current edition.
The optical smoke detector shall continuously measures the smoke level in the air, and gives a
proportional output. It shall comply with the requirements of EN54 part 7.
The detector shall be an optical light scattering type sensitive to visible smoke and be stable
under all environmental conditions. The internal test and calibration circuits shall use the same
M-8
VOLUME-III
optical elements as the smoke sensing circuits, to ensure reliability.
A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in alarm
3. MANUAL RELEASE (ELECTRIC):
The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a means
of manually discharging the Suppression System when used in conjunction with the Fike
SHP Control System.
The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the system
to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in the same
manner as if the system had operated automatically.
A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard and shall
have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
4. ABORT STATION :
The optional Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next to
each manual switch.
The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the SHP
Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
"Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.
5. AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS:
Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the SHP Control Panel.
The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc
power to allow supervision of the circuit wires.
The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a distance
of 3m.
Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with flash rate
of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the protected
space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
6. CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGNS:
Provide signs, as required, to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the
equipment supplier:
Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
M-9
VOLUME-III
Manual Discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station.

Flashing Light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected
space.
7. SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING:
All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and must be
installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs of
conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, installed
parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color coded
wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from
shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings), and crosses between
conductors. Final terminations between the SHP control panel and the system field
wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory trained representative.
All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike manner,
to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, and Article 760, except as
otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72 - current
edition. Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or country codes.
The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
8. SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT:
After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked out,
inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.
All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to
earth.
The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be
operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
a) Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
procedures, and test values recorded.
b) All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual
devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as required
and designed.
c) Each SHP control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble
condition into the system.

M - 10
VOLUME-III
9. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS:
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include system SHP
Control Panel operation, manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
10. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE:
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and
maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the owner. All
aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping
isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design,
sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the
system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques,
maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.
11. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of
system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation
details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent container(s),
detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and conduit routing details.
Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper installations
completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be provided
reflecting all actual installation details.
12. ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
1) At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted,
the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used to
test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all
tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be
employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements
of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the
owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been approved.
2) The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and manual
actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices and manual
override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and
battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
3) A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to determine
the presence of openings which would affect the agent system concentration levels. The
test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system, or equivalent,
with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
4) If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in
leakage and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the general
contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for
adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing
contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been
M - 11
VOLUME-III
adequately and properly sealed. THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING

CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM
PRESSURIZATION TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in
accordance with these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general
contractor to determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The installing
contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the
owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be
submitted to the owner for record.
5) Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.
13. SYSTEM INSPECTIONS:
The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system, installed under
this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six
month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval, after system
acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's
guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 2001.
Integrity Test must be done by qualified certified Engineer. The installer must have UL
Approved filling station in U.A.E for refilling and maintenance purpose
Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the owner
upon completion of each inspection.
14. WARRANTY:
All system components furnished, and installed under this contract, shall be guaranteed
against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which
is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of
system acceptance.
END OF SECTION

M - 12
VOLUME-III
FIRE FIGHTING PUMPS

Mechanical Section 21 30 00: Fire Fighting Pumps
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1

therein.
1.1.2
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1
Furnish and install pumps as indicated on drawings
1.2.2
This section specifies the requirements for the fire pumpset.
1.2.3
Provide the electrical works related to this section, in compliance with the requirements of
related sections.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general use,

centrifugal pumps with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
1.3.2
Certification, Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performances, under specified

operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Product Data : Submit manufacturers pump specifications, installation and startup

instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection
points clearly indicated.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings : Submit manufacturers assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,

weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components.
1.4.3
Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
pumps. Submit manufacturers ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring.
Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be
field- installed.
1.4.4
Full hydraulic calculations based on shop drawings to verify actual flow and head operating
conditions. Calculations shall be approved by the Consultant prior to final selection of
equipment.
1.4.5
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump, control
and accessory, including trouble shooting maintenance guide. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual.
1.5
1.5.1
Handle pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged pumps or components, replace with new items.
1.5.2
Store pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKAGED FIRE PUMPSET
2.1.1
Electric Pump
2.1.2
2.1.3
a)
Type - The pump shall be UL/FM approved, especially designed and constructed for
quiet operation in compliance with NFPA-20.
b)
Pump shall be of Vertical Turbine design.
c)
Motor shall be drip proof, 2900 RPM and shall be especially selected for quiet
operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non
overloading of the motor through the capacity range of the pump.
d)
Installation A concrete base 200 mm higher than the surrounding floor shall be
provided. Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the drawings. Provide a
minimum of four 12 mm anchor bolts from concrete to pump base.
e)
Controls The pump shall be controlled by a combined manual and automatic across
the line type fire pump control panel. The control panel shall have an externally
operated circuit breaker, a pilot light to indicate when power is on, switches or push
button for manual or automatic operation, a pressure switch control for automatic
operation and a remote alarm signal when pump is operating. The entire control panel
shall be factory assembled in a steel cabinet. The panel shall have provision for
connection to the BMS. Controllers to have auto-program for start/stop for future
periodic maintenance. Controllers shall be UL listed and FM approved.
Jockey Pump
a)
Type - The jockey pump shall be vertical multi-stage type, especially designed and
constructed for quiet operation.
b)
Motor - Shall be drip proof, 2900 RPM and shall be especially selected for quiet
operation. The horse-power of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure nonoverloading of the motor throughout the capacity range of the pump.
c)
Controls - The jockey pump shall have a relief valve set for the proper pressure and a
pressure switch for automatic operation. There shall be a magnetic across-the-line
starter with "Hand-Off-Automatic" selector switch in cover provided to start and stop
the pump. Provision for connection to BMS shall be provided.
Diesel Driven Pump

a)
Fire pump shall constitute a diesel engine and fire pump of Vertical Turbine. Pump
specification shall be as mentioned above under item 2.1.1 except for pump speed
which shall be accordingly to the choice of the diesel engine speed.
b)
Rating of diesel engine shall be chosen at the prevailing conditions at U.A.E, i.e.
ambient temperature of 120 deg F. and a humidity ratio of more than 90%.
c)
Automatically Controlled Diesel Engine The diesel engine for driving the fire pump
shall be UL listed, FM approved specifically designed for fire pump service. It shall
develop sufficient horse power to drive the pump and shall have bare engine brake
horse power not less than 20 percent greater than the maximum horsepower required
to drive the pump at its rated RPM.

M-3
VOLUME-III
d)
The engine shall be an open type self contained power unit including the following
accessories :1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Stub shaft
Fuel pumps and filters.
Air Cleaner.
Adjustable governor capable of regulating engine speed within a range of 10
percent between shut-off and maximum load conditions. The governor shall
be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
Lube oil pump.
Lube oil filter.
Overspeed shut down device arranged to shut down engine at a speed
approximately 20 percent above rated engine speed and with manual reset.
The overspeed shut down device shall be so supervised that the automatic
engine controller will continue to show an overspeed trouble signal until the
device is manually reset to normal operating position.
Electric Starter, generator or alternator and voltage regulator.
Dual storage battery units. Each unit shall have capacity to maintain cranking
speed through a 6 minute cycle (15 seconds cranking and 15 seconds rest, in
12 consecutive cycles). Provide certification that the battery unit complies
with this requirement. Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition,
with electrolyte liquid in a separate container. Electrolyte shall be added at
the time the engine is put in service, and the battery is given a conditioning
charge.
Dual battery chargers, automatically controlled.
Chargers shall be specifically designed for fire pump service.
The rectifier shall be a semiconductor type.
The charger for a lead acid battery shall be a type which automatically
reduces the charging rate to less than 500 milliamperes when the battery
reaches a full charge condition.
The control equipment incorporated in an "off-on" type of charger for a lead
acid battery shall start the rectifier hourly. It shall shut off automatically
when the battery has been fully charged.
The battery charger at its rated voltage shall be capable of so delivering
energy into a full discharged battery in such a manner that it will not damage
the battery. It shall restore to the battery 100 percent of the battery's ampere
hour rating within 24 hours.
An ammeter with an accuracy of five percent of the normal charging rate
shall be furnished to indicate the operation of the charger.
The charger shall be designed so that it will not be damaged or blow fuses
during the cranking cycle of the engine when operated by an automatic or
manual controller.
A manual charge switch with indicator light shall be provided or, in lieu
thereof, the charger shall automatically charge at the maximum rate whenever
required by the state of charge of the battery.
When not connected through a control panel it shall be arranged to indicate
loss of current output on the load side of the d-c over-current protective
device.

M-4
VOLUME-III
Storage batteries shall be substantially supported, secured against

displacement, and located where they shall be readily accessible for
servicing.
2.1.4
11)
Engine cooling system

Cooling water shall be from the discharge of the pump, taken off prior to the
pump discharge valve. Threaded rigid pipe shall be used for this connection.
The pipe shall include a manual shut off valve, flushing type strainer,
pressure regulating valve, automatic electric solenoid valve and a second
manual shut off valve. A bypass line with manual shut off valve shall be
installed around the manual shut off valve, strainer, pressure regulator and
solenoid valve.
12)
Engine jacket temperature regulating device.
13)
Engine jacket water pump.
14)
Instrument panel with water temperature gauge, oil pressure gauge, ammeter,
tachometer of the totalizing type or an hour meter.
15)
Exhaust mufflers and flexible connectors, stainless steel non-sparking.
16)
The engine shall be arranged for automatic operation with all wiring
terminating in a junction box suitable for field hook-up.
17)
Exhaust piping from flexible connection at engine to muffler and from

muffler to point of discharge to atmosphere shall be schedule 40 black steel
pipe and fittings, welded. A flap valve shall be provided at the external end of
piping.
18)
Pump and diesel engine shall be mounted on a common base plate, direct
connected through a flexible coupling, and equipped with a coupling guard.
Coupling shall be a spacer type to permit pump shaft and impellers to be
removed without moving diesel engine or pump bottom casing.
Automatic Diesel Engine Control Panel
2.1.4.1 The automatic engine control panel shall be UL listed, FM approved specifically designed for
fire pump service. The panel shall be enclosed in a floor mounted duct and moisture resistant
housing. The controller shall have possibility to program the start/stop of equipment for
periodic maintenance.
2.1.4.2 The controller shall be the combined manual and automatic type including a "Manual-OffAutomatic selector switch.
2.1.4.3 A pressure switch and single phase power failure relay with local visual indication and
auxiliary contact for remote indication of 240 volt AC power failure shall be provided which
will, upon drop in system pressure or loss of single phase AC power, cause the controller to
open or close all circuits necessary to automatically start the engine by performing the
following functions :(a)
Turn on fuel supply.
(b)
Open the cooling water solenoid valve.
(c)
Crank the engine in a series of crank-rest cycles automatically alternating between the
dual batteries on each cycle.

M-5
VOLUME-III
(d)
Disconnect cranking motor upon engine start.
(e)
Once the engine is started, it shall remain in operation until shut down manually. A
signal in the Synoptic Panel shall indicate that the Diesel Engine is operating.
(f)
If the engine should fail to start after several cranking attempts, the controller shall
disconnect all starting circuits and energize an audible and visual alarm to indicate
"overcrank" in the synoptic panel as well as in the engine control panel.
2.1.4.4 Alarm and Signal Devices on Controller

A pilot lamp(s) shall be provided to indicate that the controller is in the "automatic" position.
The lamp shall be accessible for replacement. Separate pilot lamps and a common bell shall
be provided to indicate trouble caused by:Low oil pressure in the lubrication system. The controller shall provide means for testing the
position of the pressure switch contacts without causing trouble alarms. Failure of engine to
start automatically.
Shutdown from overspeed.
Battery failure. Each battery shall be provided with separate lamps which shall be lighted or
extinguished on battery failure on attempt to start.
High engine jacket water temperature.
2.1.4.5 Water Pressure Control : A pressure actuated switch having high and low calibrated
adjustments and responsive to water pressure in the fire system shall be provided in the
controller circuit. Suitable provision shall be made for relieving pressure to the pressure
switch to test the operation of the controller and the pump.
2.1.4.6 Enclosure : The structure or panel shall be securely mounted in an enclosure(s) which will
protect the equipment against mechanical injury and falling drops of water striking the
enclosure from the downward vertical. All switches required to keep the controller in the
"automatic" position shall be within the locked cabinets having to break glass panels.
2.1.4.7 A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the enclosure
showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of identifying numbers of
individual components. All wiring terminals shall be plainly marked to correspond with the
wiring diagram furnished.
2.1.4.8 Wiring Elements : Wiring elements of the controller shall be designed on a continuous-duty
basis.
2.1.4.9 Field Wiring : All wiring leading from the panel to the engine and to the batteries shall have
adequate carrying capacity. Such wiring shall be protected against mechanical injury.
Controller manufacturer's specifications for distance and wire size shall be followed.
Provision for connection to BMS shall be provided.
2.1.4.10 Marking : Each operating component of the controller shall be marked to plainly indicate an
identifying number referenced to the wiring diagram. The markings shall be located so as to
be visible after installation.
Instructions: Complete instructions covering the operation of the controller shall be provided
and conspicuously mounted on the controller.
2.1.5
Fuel Storage Tank

M-6
VOLUME-III
The fuel storage tank shall be an integral part of the unit and shall be mounted within the
support base of the unit. The tank shall have a capacity of 8 hours operation. Provide all
piping, fittings and valves required.
The unit support base shall be designed to allow space for oil pan clearance.
2.1.6
Tests
2.1.6.1 Prior to shipment, the pump and engine shall be thoroughly shop-tested as a unit by the pump
manufacturer. A characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the results of
the shop test shall be submitted to the Consultant prior to shipment, and shall include the
performance pump and engine at the set-governor's speed. Absence of these test reports,
indicating that the complete unit has been tested in the factory by the driver, will be ample
grounds for the equipment rejection.
2.1.6.2 Each control panel shall be fully assembled and factory tested by the control manufacturer
prior to their shipment, and evidence of this test shall be furnished with the controller.
2.1.6.3 Field Acceptance Tests
(a)
The field acceptance test results shall be as good as the manufacturer's certified shop
test characteristic curve for the pump being tested within the accuracy limits of the
test equipment.
(b)
Overheating : The pump shall operate at peak load conditions without objectionable
heating of the bearings or of the prime mover. The operating pump speed shall be the
speed at which the pumping unit would be expected to operate during a fire.
(c)
The engine shall not show signs of overload or stress and its governor shall properly
regulate the speed.
(d)
Controllers:
The automatic controller shall be put through not less than ten (10) automatic and ten
(10) manual operations.
A running interval of at least five minutes at full speed shall be allowed before
repeating the starting cycle.
In an automatic operation, the controller shall start the pump from all the provided
starting features, such as pressure switches, valves, etc.
Length of Test. The pump shall be in operation not less than one hour (total time)
during the foregoing tests.
2.1.7
Single Source Responsibility :

The pump, driver, and all controls and necessary attachments, specified herein, shall be
purchased under a unit contract. The pump manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility and
shall provide the services of a qualified Consultant to supervise the installation and alignment
of equipment.
Field tests shall be conducted in the field to satisfy the Consultant and Local Authorities
having jurisdiction of satisfactory operation of pump, driver and controller. The pump
manufacturer's Engineer shall be at the job site, supervising the installation and testing. The
control manufacturer shall have their representative at the job site to train operators in the use
of the controls. All costs related to the services shall be born by the Contractor.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.1.8
Spare Parts and Tools

Spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation, as recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be provided as a part of the contract for the engine. A list of these spares
shall be included in the offer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.1.1
Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with installer present for compliance
with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting pump performance. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.1.2
Examine the installed fire fighting system, verify actual locations of piping and connections
prior to testing and commissioning.
3.2
CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES
3.2.1
Install concrete equipment bases of dimensions required for fire pumps, and controllers.
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.3.1
Comply with pump manufacturers written installation and alignment instructions.
3.3.2
Install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic maintenance,
including removal of motors impellers, couplings and accessories.
3.3.3
Set base-mounted pumps on concrete equipment bases as indicated on drawings. Disconnect

couplings halves before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have
been completed.
3.3.4
Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal wedges having
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 19 to 38 mm between pump
base and foundation for grouting.
3.3.5
Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check couplings
faces and pump suctions and discharge flanges to verify that they are level.
3.3.6
Install valves of types and at locations indicated that are same size as the piping connecting
fie pump, bypasses, test headers and other piping systems.
3.3.7
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge in such a manner to be easily readable
and completely isolated from vibrations.
3.3.8
Support pumps and piping separately so that weight of piping system does not rest on pumps.
3.3.9
Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves meters and gages, and
equipment support as indicated for complete installation.
3.3.10 Install flow meter and sensing elements where indicated, install flow-measuring system
components and make connections according to manufacturers written installation
instructions.

M-8
VOLUME-III
3.3.11 Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified as factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram for submittal to
the Consultant.
3.3.12 Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers recommendations and
installation requirements. Do not proceed with equipment start up until wiring installation is
acceptable.
3.4
ALIGNMENT
Align pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on foundation and after
grout has set and foundation bolts have been tightened.
Once the alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill base
plate completely with non shrink, non metallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges
in place. After grout has hardened, fully tighten foundation bolts. Check alignment and take
corrective measures if required.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
Connect suction and discharge side of the piping system to the pumps. Connect flowmeasuring and other hydronic system components according to manufacturers written
installation instructions.
3.6

Contractor to ensure services of pump manufacturer representative to supervise field assembly
of components, installation of fire fighting pump units, including piping and electrical
connections and field acceptance tests. Report test results in writing.
Check all connections for tightness.
Perform field-acceptance tests for the pump unit (pump, driver and controller) and system
piping when pump unit installation is complete. Where possible, fieldcorrect malfunctioning
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be
satisfactorily corrected or that does not perform as specified and as indicated, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Verify that each pump unit performs as specified and as indicated.
3.7
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
3.7.1
General.
After completion of the Work, Contractor shall run a test over a sufficient period of time to
prove the proper capacity and performance of all apparatus, etc., and the system as a whole.
The Contractor shall carry out commissioning and testing of all equipment installed.
Startup Services: Contractors shall provide services of pump manufacturer representative to
provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Employers maintenance personnel as
specified below:
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
components.
Review data in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
Final Checks Before Startup: perform the following preventive-maintenance operations and
checks before startup wherever applicable:

M-9
VOLUME-III
Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.

Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene and thoroughly
clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturers recommendations.
Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match
direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
Check that the pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate the pump if it is bound or if it
drags even slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
3.7.5
Starting procedure for pumps (open circuit):

Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.
Open sealing liquid supply valve if pump is so fitted.
Start motor.
Open discharge valve slowly.
Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to ensure
lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immediately, but let packing run in before
reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
3.7.6
Commissioning shall be deemed to include all operations required in order to correctly set the
plant to work, adjust and calibrate to design conditions to the complete satisfaction of the
Consultant. The above shall include but not limited to testing and balancing of all fire fighting
systems, including associated plant and equipment, balancing and adjusting to achieve correct
flow rates, including setting valves and other regulating devices.
3.7.7
Final setting positions for all regulating and controlling devices shall be recorded and such
records shall form part of the manual of the operating and maintenance instructions.
3.7.8
All systems shall be field tested and run on load, with all automatic controls in operation and
all circuits balanced to produce design conditions, in presence and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant.
3.7.9
In case of unsuccessful test run, the Contractor shall take necessary step for the rectification
and retested to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
3.7.10 The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost services of skilled and unskilled staff during
the test run of all the systems as required by the Consultant.
3.8
TRAINING
3.8.1
Train Employers maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3.8.2
Schedule training with at least 7 days advance notice.
END OF SECTION

M - 10
VOLUME-III
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS

Mechanical Section 22 05 16: Expansion Fittings And Loops
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1 Flexible-hose packless expansion joints.
2 Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.
3 Rubber packless expansion joints.
4 Grooved-joint expansion joints.
5 Pipe loops and swing connections.
6 Alignment guides and anchors.
1.3
Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working
pressures, and temperatures.
Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1
2
3
4
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems

and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.
Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and
methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.
Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
Flexible-hose Packless Expansion Joints:

1
Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two
flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center
section of flexible hose.
Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.
Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Copper-alloy
fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a
Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100):
Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections.
a
Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at

70 deg F (3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 325 psig at 600 deg F (2250 kPa at 315
deg C) ratings.
Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig
at 70 deg F (4830 kPa at 21 deg C) and 515 psig at 600 deg F (3550 kPa at
315 deg C) ratings.
Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): Stainlesssteel fittings with flanged end connections.
a

deg C) ratings.
Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at
deg C) ratings.
Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel fittings
with threaded end connections.
a
Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F
(3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 340 psig at 450 deg F (2340 kPa at 232 deg C)
ratings.
Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F
(4830 kPa at 21 deg C) and 500 psig at 450 deg F (3450 kPa at 232 deg C)
ratings.

deg C) ratings.
deg C) ratings.
Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Stainlesssteel fittings with flanged end connections.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:

1
Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint

Manufacturers Association, Inc."
Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 300ig (2070) unless otherwise indicated.
Configuration: double joint with base class unless otherwise indicated.
Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows,

copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds.
A
B

70 deg F (860 kPa at 21 deg C) and 90 psig at 600 deg F (625 kPa at 315 deg
C) ratings.
deg C) ratings.
End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder
joint or threaded.
End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger flanged.
Rubber Packless Expansion Joints for PPR and PVC pipes:

1
Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion

Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."
Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703.
Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods.
Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 300ig (2070) at 194g F (90eg C).
Material for Water: Buna-N.
End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.
2.2
GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS
Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples,

couplings, and grooved joints.
Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.
Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved
ends.
Couplings: Seven flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
Buna-N gasket suitable for diluted acid, alkaline fluids, and cold and hot water and bolts and
nuts.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.3
ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
Alignment Guides:
1
Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer
cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for
bolting to pipe.
Anchor Materials:
1
2
3
4
Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
a
b
c
Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened

portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
a
b
c
Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component

epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud
unless otherwise indicated.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.
Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint
Manufacturers Association, Inc."
Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.
Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping
3.2
PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension
or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in
main.
Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in riser.

M-5
VOLUME-III
Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings
including tee in main.
3.3
A
ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to
expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.
Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME
B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
Anchor Attachments:
Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME

B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications."
Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS
SP-69, Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.
Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,
Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.
Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with
ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1
2
Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow
fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
END OF SECTION

M-6
VOLUME-III
SLEEVES FOR PLUMBING

Mechanical Section 22 05 17: Sleeves for Plumbing
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
1.3
Sleeves.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
SUBMITTALS
A Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.2
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping
ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.3
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match
piping OD.
2.5
GROUT
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.
1
2
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
A
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas

or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1
2
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1
2
3
4
5
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
3.4
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves.
b
Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves.

M-4
VOLUME-III
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) : Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal system.
1)
Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) : Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a
b
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a
Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150) : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Interior Partitions:
a
b
Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING

Mechanical Section 22 05 18: Escutcheon for Plumbing
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and
setscrew fastener.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with
concealed hinge and setscrew.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet

hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2
FLOOR PLATES
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Escutcheons for New Piping:

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel
type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposedrivet hinge.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or
split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or splitplate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or splitcasting brass type with polished, chrome-plated rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or
split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stampedsteel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or splitplate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel
type with exposed-rivet hinge.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposedrivet hinge.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stampedsteel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
polished, chrome-plated rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type
with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with
OD that completely covers opening.
1
2
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
3.2
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION

M-4
VOLUME-III
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING

Mechanical Section 22 05 19: Meters And Gages for Plumbing
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
Filled-system thermometers.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
Light-activated thermometers.
Thermo wells.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Gauge attachments.
Test plugs.
Test-plug kits.
Sight flow indicators.
Related Sections:
1
Division 21 Section 21 10 00
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
Thermometer: ASTM E 1, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with
enamel finish.
1
2
3
4
Size: 7 inch (175 mm) scale.

Window: Clear glass.
Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E 77.
Calibration: Degrees F.
Thermometer: ASTM E 1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast
aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjust-able joint with positive locking
device.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1
2
3
4
5
Size: 7 inch (175 mm) scale.

Window: Clear glass.
Stem: 3/4 inch (20 mm) NPT brass.
Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E 77.
2.2
DIAL THERMOMETERS
Thermometer: ASTM E 1, stainless steel case, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid
damping, white with black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel
stem.
1
2
3
4
Thermometer: ASTM E 1, stainless steel case, adjustable angle with front recalibration,
bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black
pointer hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1
2
3
4
Size: 2 inch (50 mm) diameter dial.

Lens: Clear glass.
Accuracy: 1 percent.
Size: 3 inch (75 mm) diameter dials.

Lens: Clear glass.
Thermometer: ASTM E 1, stainless steel case, vapor or liquid actuated with brass or copper
bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black pointer glass
lens.
1
2
3
4
5
Size: 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) diameter dial.

Lens: Clear glass.
Length of Capillary: Minimum 5 feet (1500 mm).
2.3
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required,
and with cap and chain.
Flange: 3 inch (75 mm) outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal
air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.4
PRESSURE GAGES
Gage: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bour-don tube, rotary
brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration ad-justment, black scale on white
background.
1
2
3
4
Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.

Size: 2 inch (50 mm) diameter.
Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
Scale: Psi.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.5
PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) NPT for minimum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch (6 mm) connec-tions.
Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch (6 mm) angle or straight pattern.
2.6
TEST PLUGS
Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for re-ceiving 1/8 inch (3
mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up
to 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Nordel core for temperatures up to
350 degrees F (176 degrees C).
mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to
400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 2-1/2 inch (60 mm)
diameter pressure gages, one gage adapters with 1/8 inch (3 mm) probes, two 1 inch (25 mm)
dial thermometers.
2.7
SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS
Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow.
Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and paddle wheel indicator, and
threaded or flanged ends.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F (93 deg C).
End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position
in piping tees.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

M-4
VOLUME-III
Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect
cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
Install thermometers in the following locations:

1
2
3
4
Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.
Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.
Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1
2
3
Building water service entrance into building.

Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
3.3
ADJUSTING
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.4
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be stem type.
Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be stem type.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be stem type.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be stem type.
E Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.5
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.
Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F and 0 to 150 deg C.
Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg

M-5
VOLUME-III
3.6
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
Pressure gage location:

1
2
3
At discharge of each water service into building.

At inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve.
At suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
3.7
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.
Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 300 psi and 0 to 2500 kPa.
END OF SECTION

M-6
VOLUME-III
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING

Mechanical Section 22 05 29: Hangers And Supports for Plumbing
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3
Fiberglass pipe hangers.
4
Metal framing systems.
5
Fiberglass strut systems.
6
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
7
Fastener systems.
8
Pipe stands.
9
Pipe positioning systems.
10
Equipment supports.
Related Sections:
1
2
Division 21 Section 21 10 00 "Water based fire suppression systems".

Division 21 Section 21 13 13 "Wet pipe sprinkler system".
Division 22 Section 22 05 16 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping"

for pipe guides and anchors.
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4
Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE.
1
2
3
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment .
1.5
SUBMITTALS

M-2
VOLUME-III
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
1
2
3
4
5
Trapeze pipe hangers.

Metal framing systems.
Fiberglass strut systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1 Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.
2 Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS
D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1
2
3
4
5
Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1
2
3
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
Copper Pipe Hangers:

1
2
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .
2.2
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made
from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles,
and U-bolts.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.3
FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS
Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1
2
Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made
of fiberglass or fiberglass-reinforced resin.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of fiberglass or stainless
steel .
Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1
2.4
Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 9 or Type 10, steel pipe hanger except
hanger is made of fiberglass-reinforced resin.
2
Hanger Rod and Fittings: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of stainless
steel.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.
Standard: MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into
channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.
Paint Coating: Epoxy.
Plastic Coating: PVC or Epoxy.
Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into
channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Coating: Paint or PVC.
2.5
FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly similar to MFMA-4 for

supporting multiple parallel pipes.
1
2
3
Channels: Continuous slotted fiberglass or other plastic channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Fiberglass nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and,
when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of fiberglass.
2.6
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
Insulation- for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum
compressive strength and vapor barrier.

M-4
VOLUME-III
Insulation- for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with
100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862kPa) minimum compressive strength.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.7
A
FASTENER SYSTEMS
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated stainless- steel anchors, for

use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.8
PIPE STANDS
General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1
2
3
4
Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support,
Base: Stainless steel.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or
stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1
2
3
4
5
Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports,
Bases: One or more; plastic.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from

structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
2.9
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

M-5
VOLUME-III
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
2.10
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural

carbon-steel shapes.
2.11
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1
2
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual
pipe hangers.
2
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
Fastener System Installation:

1
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Pipe Stand Installation:

M-6
VOLUME-III
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth
roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on
permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for
requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top
of inserts.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Insulated Piping:
1
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.

M-7
VOLUME-III
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a
b
c
d
e
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048
inch (1.22 mm) thick.
NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06
NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075
NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105
Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicateinsulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1
2
3
4
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4
ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).
3.5
PAINTING
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

M-8
VOLUME-III
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments for
general service applications.
Use stainless-steel pipe hangers attachments for hostile environment applications.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg
C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to
DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

M-9
VOLUME-III
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of

Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension
of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).
Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN
100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or
carbon-steel plate.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN
100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or
carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25
to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
18
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
19
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50
to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN
50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation
might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1
2
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS
3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:
1
2
3
4
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.

M - 10
VOLUME-III
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)
piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent
to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a
b
c
13
14
15
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1
2
3
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1
2
3
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger
with springs.

M - 11
VOLUME-III
4
5
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system
from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
from base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
from trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:
a
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION

M - 12
VOLUME-III
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING

Mechanical Section 22 05 53: Identification for Plumbing
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
Stencils.
Valve tags.
Warning tags.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
Valve numbering scheme.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
Metal Labels for Equipment:

1
2
3
Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness,

and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2
Letter Color: White.
3
Background Color: Black.
4
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6
7
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
8
substrate.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.3
PIPE LABELS
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.4
STENCILS
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar
operational instructions.
1
Stencil Material: Aluminum.
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1
2.5
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1
2
B
Tag Material: Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch

(0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.6
WARNING TAGS
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1
2
3
4
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum (100 by 178 mm).
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

M-4
VOLUME-III
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section.
Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each
piping system.
1
2
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
Near each valve and control device.

Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1
Domestic Water Piping:

a
b
Background Color: White.

Letter Color: Black.
Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a
b

3.4
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-

M-5
VOLUME-III
watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.
List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a
b
Valve-Tag Color:
a
b
Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round.

Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round.
Cold Water: Green.

Hot Water: Green.
Letter Color:
a
b
Cold Water: White.

Hot Water: White.
3.5
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
END OF SECTION

M-6
VOLUME-III
MECHANICAL SECTION: 22 05 53.1

SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION

Mechanical Section 22 05 53.1: Systems Identification
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Work of this Section includes all labour, materials, equipment and service necessary to
complete the MEP systems identification as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.1.2
Valve identification.
1.1.3
Equipment identification.
1.1.4
Piping identification.
1.1.5
Duct identification.
1.1.6
Health and Safety Signage.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1
Shop Drawings: Submit valve tag chart; pipe, duct and equipment labels.
1.2.2
Product Data: Manufacturers latest published data for materials, equipment and installation,
including samples of valve tags, equipment identification and piping identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Refer to approved manufacturers list in the Appendix.
2.1.1
For valves use 50mm minimum diameter tags fabricated of shatter-proof plastic, brass,
stainless steel or aluminium. Attach tags with chain S-hook or split ring as appropriate of
same materials. Identification discs shall be colour coded in accordance with BS 1710.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
For painted identification use colour in accordance with BS 1710 (1984) sharply contrasting
with background. If necessary, paint a strip background of black or white to obtain contrast.
3.1.2
For stamped tags, use 6 mm letters; painted letters to be 15 mm high. Smaller painted letters
may be used only when space does not permit 15 mm height lettering.
3.2
VALVES
3.2.1
Tag valves with identifying number and system. Number valves by floor level. Do not tag
valves whose use is obvious, such as equipment isolation valves.

M-2
VOLUME-III
3.2.2
Prepare lists of all tagged valves showing location, floor level, tag number and use. Prepare
separate lists for each system. Mount lists under glass in all plantrooms. Include copies as part
of record drawings and in the maintenance manuals.
3.2.3
Provide charts showing equipment lubrication points, lubricant required and frequency, and
columns for date and initials. Include as part of record drawings and in maintenance manuals.
3.2.4
EQUIPMENT
3.2.5
Stencil equipment with identifying letters and numbers as used on drawings. Where space is
available use full name of equipment.
3.3
CONTROLS
3.3.1
Identify all controls included in Contract Documents such as motor starters, motor control
centres, float switches and alarms.
3.4
PIPING
3.4.1
Piping identification shall be in conformance wherever possible with BS 1710.
3.4.2
Provide adhesive bands identifying the service and direction of flow to the various piping
systems. Provide such bands in all occupied and unoccupied rooms as well as in all the other
space (such as shafts) in which piping may be viewed. Identify direction at every change of
direction and entry and exit from every room. Affix a set of such bands to each pipe, on
insulation when insulated, not less frequently than every 5 metres. Provide tape around the
pipe at each end of band. Tape shall be same colour as background of band.
3.4.3
Each set consisting of one (1) band on which the name of the service is printed in black letters
not less than 36 mm high, and one (1) band on which is printed a black directional arrow.
Include the letter F to denote flow and letter R to denote return. Apply bands where they can
be easily read and with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Provide bands
with backgrounds of different colours from the various service groups.
END OF SECTION

M-3
VOLUME-III
PLUMBING SPECIALITIES

Mechanical Section 22 05 78: Plumbing Specialties
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
To be read in conjunction with Division 1 General Requirements.
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Suction strainers.
1.1.2
In line Y-type strainers.
1.1.3
Back flow preventers.
1.1.4
Vacuum Breakers.
1.1.5
Automatic relief valves.
1.1.6
Automatic pressure reducing valves.
1.1.7
Automatic air vents.
1.1.8
Hose bibs and hydrants.
1.1.9
Curb stops and surface boxes.
1.1.10 Floor drains.

1.1.11 Area drains.
1.1.12 Clean outs.
1.1.13 Roof drains.
1.1.14 Vent caps.
1.1.15 Rain water shoes.
1.1.16 Manhole covers and frames.
1.1.17 Fixture waste adaptors.
1.1.18 Trench and pit gratings.
1.1.19 Quick coupling valves.
1.1.20 Expansion compensators
1.2
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
1.2.1
Brackets, Hangers, Anchors and Supports
1.2.2
Piping and Accessories
1.2.3
Valves
1.2.4
Plumbing Pipework

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
ANSI A112.14.1 Backwater Valves.
1.3.2
ANSI A112.21.1 Floor Drains.
1.3.3
ANSI A112.21.2 Roof Drains.
1.3.4
ANSI A112.26.1/PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters.
1.3.5
ASSE 1001
Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers.
1.3.6
ASSE 1010
Water Hammer Arrestors
1.3.7
ASSE 1011
Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
1.3.8
ASSE 1012
Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.
1.3.9
ASSE 1013
Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers.
1.3.10 ASSE 1018
Trap Seal Primer Valves.
1.3.11 ASSE 1019
Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining, Anti-Backflow Type.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Submit product data, samples and installation details.
1.4.2
Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use and location.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1
Vacuum breakers, trap primers, hydrants etc. shall be tested and certified for conformity with
the requirements of ASME standards.
1.5.2
Water hammer arrestors shall be tested and certified for conformity with ANSI standards.
1.5.3
Pressure relief valves and pressure and temperature relief valves shall be tested and certified
for conformity with the requirements of ASME standards.
1.5.4
The construction of the specialties shall be of corrosion resistant materials like cast iron,
stainless steel or dezincification resistant copper alloys (bronze, brass).
1.5.5
All castings used in the construction of the drainage specialties shall be of good quality,
without blow holes or inclusions and shall be finished smooth by sand or shot blasting. All
these castings shall be given appropriate coatings, internally and externally, at the factory.
1.5.6
Flashing clamps, where used shall be non-puncturing type and shall be fixed by corrosion
resistant fasteners. Drainage flanges shall have seepage holes to conduct away the water
collected.
1.5.7
As far as practicable items of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer.
1.5.8
Use heavy duty gratings / covers in areas subjected to vehicular traffic.

M-3
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Refer to approved manufacturers list in Appendix.
2.2
SUCTION STRAINERS
2.2.1
For Copper and UPVC Pipes: Fabricate from line size copper pipes (Type K Hard) and
bronze flange. Minimum total area of perforations (6mm size) shall be four (4) times the
sectional area of the pipe. Use straightened pipe fabric brazed to the pipe end as end cap for
copper strainers.
2.2.2
All fasteners shall be of corrosion resistant material like stainless steel or high tensile brass.
2.3
IN LINE Y-TYPE STRAINERS
2.3.1
50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller:
2.3.1.1 Bronze body with threaded ends, screwed on retainer cap with threaded plug and twenty (20)
mesh stainless steel screen. Provide blow off connection with valve on the retainer cap, where
required.
2.3.2
65 mm (2 1/2 inch) and larger:
2.3.2.1 Cast steel body with flanged ends, flanged cover with threaded bronze plug and stainless steel
screen. Provide blow off connection with valve, where required.
2.3.2.2 Screen shall have 1.5 mm perforations for sizes from 65 to 100 mm (2 to 4 inch) nom. dia.
2.3.2.3 Screen shall have 3.0 mm perforations for sizes over 100 mm (4 inch) nom. dia.
2.4
BACKFLOW PREVENTORS
2.4.1
50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller:
2.4.1.1 Bronze body, stainless steel trim with atmospheric vent, complete with strainer, gate valves,
test cocks and air gap fitting at vent connection.
2.4.2
65 mm (2 1/2 inch) and larger:
2.4.2.1 Bronze body, stainless steel trim with atmospheric vent, complete with flanged strainer and
gate valves, test cocks and air gap fitting at vent connection.
2.5
VACUUM BREAKERS
2.5.1
Chrome plated brass, atmospheric type with flat pipet type, rubber discs and hose thread
outlet.
2.5.2
Bronze body, pressure type with heat resistant disc opening to atmosphere at less than 12 mm
(1/2 inch) mercury vacuum.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.6
AUTOMATIC RELIEF VALVES
2.6.1
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
2.6.1.1 Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim, with pipet type manual actuation lever. The unit
shall be preset and sealed at the factory. The label shall contain the manufacturer's name,
serial no., maximum working pressure and set pressure.
2.6.2
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RELIEF VALVES:
2.6.2.1 Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim, one ceramic coated temperature sensing element
and pipet type manual actuation lever. The unit shall be rated for relieving the maximum heat
input to the water heater and preset and sealed at the factory. The label shall contain the
manufacturers name, Serial no., maximum working pressure and temperature, set pressure and
temperature and relieving capacity in Btuh.
2.6.3
AUTOMATIC PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
2.6.3.1 CONSTANT PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES FOR BOOSTER PUMP SETS

2.6.3.2 Pilot operated type of globe pattern cast iron construction with bronze trim, for performing
the following functions.
2.6.3.3 Maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuating demand.
2.6.3.3.1 Shut off the pump set in the event of very low upstream pressure created by rupture of
piping or similar run off conditions.
2.6.3.3.2 The valve shall have flanged ends and the assembly shall be complete with size adjustment
spools, dielectric flange unions etc.
2.6.4 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
2.6.4.1 Bronze body with non ferrous float and internal working parts. Construction shall be take
apart type for easy maintenance. Outlet shall be tapped for connection to drain line.
2.7
HOSE BIBS AND HYDRANTS
2.7.1
Hose bibs: Chrome plated brass, globe type with integral vacuum breaker with 1/2 inch male
threaded inlet and 3/4 inch hose thread outlet. The valve operation shall be by loose keys
where required. The inlet shall be of male thread with wall flange.
2.7.2
Hydrants: Hose bibs as above in cast brass housing suitable for recessed installation. The door
of the housing shall be lockable with the same key as the hose bib.
2.8
CURB STOPS AND SURFACE BOXES
2.8.1
All bronze ball valve with union or pack joint ends with extended spindle and base. The base
shall have a telesopic extension with threaded top for receiving the lid and arch pattern or
directly threaded on base. The lid shall have a brass pentagonal operating head
2.9
PRESSURE RATING
2.9.1
All speciality items mentioned above shall be rated for 1379 Kpa (200 psig) working water
pressure at 121 deg.C (250 deg.F), unless otherwise stated

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.10
QUICK COUPLING VALVE
2.10.1 Red brass construction with /1 inch female threaded inlet and valved, quick coupling outlet
with self closing thermoplastic rubber cover. Furnish coupling adaptor (Key) and swivel
elbow with /1 inch hose threaded outlet with each valve.
2.11
EXPANSION COMPENSATORS
2.11.1 Provide expansion compensators for the expansion and contraction of all pipes. Install
expansion compensators to have sufficient flexibility to prevent end thrust and movements
caused by thermal expansion or contraction causing detrimental distortion or damage of
connected equipment. Provide offsets between mains and equipment of sufficient length to
safely absorb the expansion of the main. Provide guides as necessary.
2.11.2 If expansion compensators in chilled water lines are installed at a time when the ambient air
temperature is above 300C, they shall be pre-compressed in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. Expansion compensator shall have sufficient number of corrugations
to absorb the expansion between anchors in the pipe plus not less than 25% safety factor for
the temperature range between 40 C to 500 C.
2.11.3 Provide one expansion compensator between every two rigid supports for all chilled water
risers. Provide guides at distances of 4 pipe diameters, 14 pipe diameters and at 3 meter
intervals after that, from the expansion compensator.
2.11.4 Provide expansion compensator for all pipes crossing building expansion joints.
2.12
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

a)
b)
c)
d)
2.13
Provide flexible connectors at all air handling units, pumps, and chillers.
Provide flexible hoses for all fan coil units
Install units as per manufactures printed installation instructions.
Support pipes and equipment such that connector carries no weight
FLOW SENSING DEVICES
3.13.1 Pitot tube flow sensors:

Install where indicated on the drawings and details for flow sensing in hydronic and/or steam
piping systems. Butterfly valves installed at the location of a flow sensing device are to have
a memory stop.
3.13.2 Vortex shedding flow sensors:
piping systems. Do not install close to elbows, valves, or other piping specialties which
might affect the reading of the sensor; follow manufacturer's installation instructions.
Butterfly valves installed at the location of a flow sensing device are to have a memory stop.
2.14
WATER METERS
Install water meters on cold water line to each building, on makeup water line to hot water
and chilled water systems ahead of water pressure reducing valve and as shown on drawings.
Water meters shall be digital type and shall be linked to BMS for monitoring.
2.15
DRAIN POINTS
2.15.1 Adequate provisions shall be made for emptying sections of all services as required for
M-6
VOLUME-III
maintenance purposes whether indicated on the drawing or not.

2.15.2 Particular attention shall be paid to the requirements of the Civil Defence and the NFPA
regulations with respect to the provision of drain taps on fire service pipework systems.
2.15.3 All cylinders, coils and pumps together with all low points of pipework within plant rooms
shall be provided with drain cocks.
2.15.4 All other low points shall be provided with drain taps.
2.15.5 Drain taps shall also be provided on the flow and return of all sub-circuits provided with
isolating facilities and shall be located on the isolated side of the valves
2.15.6 Drain cocks shall be in accordance with BS 2879 : 1980
2.15.7 Schemes involving external distribution mains below ground level are to be provided with
ample sized dirt pockets to which the drain cock shall be provided. Underground mains shall
be provided with a 54 mm gland cock with hose union outlet at the lowest position for the
purpose of flushing out.
2.15.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all drain points.
2.15.9 THERMOMETERS
2.15.9.1 Stem type:
Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details using a separable socket
in each location.
2.15.9.2 Thermometer Sockets
Install at each point where a thermometer or temperature control sensing element is located in
a pipeline.
2.16
TEST WELLS
Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details wherever provisions are
needed for inserting a thermometer at a later date.
2.17
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details.
test plugs.
2.18
Do not insulate over
PRESSURE GAUGES
Install in locations where indicated on the drawings and/or details, including any gauge
piping, with scale range appropriate to the system operating pressures.
2.19
PRESSURE SNUBBERS
Install in gauge piping for all gauges used on water services.
2.20
COIL SYPHONS
Install in gauge piping for all gauges beside vibrating equipment.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.21
GAUGE VALVES
Install at each gauge location as close to the main as possible and at each location where a
gauge tapping is indicated.
2.22
EXPANSION LOOPS
Install where indicated on the drawings or details, locating anchors and guides as detailed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUCTION STRAINERS
3.1.1
Install suction strainers on all supply connections from water storage tanks, with bend down
elbows in low level connections.
3.1.1.1 Use bronze / fabricated copper suction strainers for copper piping.
3.1.2
IN-LINE Y STRAINERS
3.1.2.1 Use dielectric, brass mating flanges with cast steel strainers used in copper piping.
3.1.2.2 Install in line strainers before pumps, pressure reducing valves, meters and other sensitive
equipment, where indicated on the drawings or otherwise.
3.1.3
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
3.1.3.1 Install at makeup connections to HVAC system and elsewhere as indicated in drawings.
3.1.4
VACUUM BREAKERS
3.1.4.1 Install vacuum relief valves at inlet to all central water heaters (install in line check valves at
inlet of wall mounted water heaters).
3.1.5
AUTOMATIC RELIEF VALVES
3.1.5.1 Provide automatic pressure and temperature relief valves on all central electric water heaters.
3.1.5.2 Provide pressure relief valves on unit electric water heaters.
3.1.5.3 Provide bypass type pressure relief valves between discharge and suction manifolds of
pressure controlled booster sets.
3.1.5.4 Pipe the discharge of water heater relief valves to safe locations, to prevent injury to
personnel.
3.1.6
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
3.1.6.1 Pressure reducing valves shall be selected for the flow rates rather than the line size (these
need not necessarily be of the line size).
3.1.6.2 Selection, marked on the cavitations chart, shall be submitted for the approval of the
Engineer.

M-8
VOLUME-III
3.1.7
AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
3.1.7.1 Provide automatic air vents on top of all central electric water heaters, as detailed.
3.1.7.2 Provide automatic air vents at system high points, as indicated on drawings.
3.1.8
HOSE BIBS AND HYDRANTS
3.1.8.1 Provide hose bibs with operating handles or with loose operating keys as appropriate.
3.1.9
DRAINS GENERALLY
3.1.10 Coordinate location of floor drains in tiled areas, so as to attain an acceptable pattern of
cutting the tiles. Accommodate square tops in one tile and round tops centrally at tiling
junctions.
3.1.11 Ensure that the floor drain / clean out tops are installed true to finished grade. Where box outs
are provided for installation of floor drains use non-shrink type concrete mix for filling the
same.
3.1.12 Provide fixture waste adapters of rubber or neoprene to connect tail pipes of sanitary fixtures /
drains to the waste piping.
3.1.13 Repair damages to shop coats of drains, prior to installation.
3.1.14 Keep the drains plugged, by appropriate means, throughout the construction period to prevent
closure by cement slurries, paint and similar construction wastes. Remove prior to
commissioning.
3.1.15 Allow for localized slopes at parking area drains and similar items installed in level finished
areas.
3.1.16 Protect the surfaces of exposed metallic surfaces from damage by covering with PVC tapes or
similar material.
3.20
TESTING OF PIPEWORK AND PIPEWORK SPECIALITIES
3.20.1 Refer to relevant Section of TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

3.20.2 Unless specifically indicated otherwise, Contractor shall apply following general procedures.
3.20.3 All pipework shall be tested hydraulically after assembly on site and before any insulation is
applied or pipework made inaccessible by building cladding, to a pressure equal to twice the
working pressure. If the working pressure is greater than 600 kPa the test pressure may be one
and a half times the working pressure. The minimum test pressure for water pipes shall be 700
kPa.
3.20.4 Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by means of a purpose made test pump, which
shall be locked after the desired pressure is obtained.
3.20.5 The test pressure shall be registered at the lowest part of the system being tested and
maintained for a period of two hours during which time all parts must remain completely
watertight and no pressure loss is indicated on the test gauge. In the case of Fire Mains wet
risers and Hose reel supplies, the pressure test shall be maintained for 24 hours. Any leakage
must at once be made good and the pressure test repeated until the desired test conditions are
maintained. During this period all welds on steel pipe shall be well hammered. Any defects
shall be made good and the relevant section shall be re-tested all at the Contractor's expense.
M-9
VOLUME-III
3.20.6 Chillers, Heat exchangers, Water Heaters, Boilers, Cylinders, Pumps and any other ancillary
items of equipment which may be liable to damage by the test pressure, shall be isolated or
suitably protected during the test, and all necessary precautions shall be taken. Any damaged
equipment shall be replaced.
3.20.7. In order not to delay the building operations sections of the pipework may be pressure tested
independently as the work progresses. All necessary plugs, caps or blank flanges shall be
provided for testing and these shall be removed after the pressure tests have been approved.
3.20.8 A test certificate shall be issued for each section of the pipework satisfactorily.
3.21
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

Valves and Specialities.
All valves and specialities shall be adjusted to operate smoothly and without binding or
leaking. All vents shall be tested and proven to open freely for passage of air.
Locate strainers as necessary to allow easy cleaning.
END OF SECTION

M - 10
VOLUME-III
CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

Mechanical Section 22 05 80: Cleaning of Piping Systems
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Work of this Section includes all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the cleaning of piping systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
1.1.2
Preliminary cleaning.
1.1.3
Cleaning and flushing.
1.1.4
Chemical cleanout.
1.1.5
Filling of systems.
1.2
RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
1.2.1
Water Treatment
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Product Data:
1.3.2
Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation indicating
chemical compatibility with exposed surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
All stages of flushing, cleaning and filling must be witnessed by the Main Contractor.
3.1.2
The Contractor shall not proceed with further stages of cleaning or filling until agreed with
the Main Contractor.
3.1.3
The Contractor is to provide for freeze protection of filled pipes.
3.1.4
The Contractor is to check where effluent can be discharged and make all arrangements for its
removal. Pipe cleaning chemicals cannot be discharged to the drainage system and must
therefore be disposed off by a specialist company. A certificate of disposal will be required.
3.1.5
The Contractor is to allow for the treatment of all mains water to eliminate pseudomona
bacteria before use for flushing and filling. Allow for taking regular samples and testing.

M-2
VOLUME-III
3.2
PRELIMINARY CLEANING
3.2.1
Clean new piping internally by flushing prior to the application of pressure tests, and before
the chemical cleanout procedures specified herein. Provide temporary strainer baskets at the
inlet to all pumps before the start of cleaning procedures.
3.2.2
Block off and isolate circulating pumps, heating coils, cooling coils, heat exchangers and
other equipment during the preliminary flushing and draining process. Provide bypass to
allow flushing of equipment separately.
3.2.3
Thoroughly flush piping clear of foreign matter with mains water under pres-sure, and then
drain before proceeding with pressure testing. Provide tanks, pumps and required equipment
to pressurize during flushing. Blow down accumulations of grit, dirt and sediment at each
strainer and each low point in the piping systems. Flush in both directions to ensure removal
of all trapped sediment. Drain ports shall be a minimum of 50mm.
3.2.4
Provide bypass flush valves and required piping to permit full circulation of water during the
washout of the piping systems. Close shutoff and balancing valves on branch piping to the
terminal equipment units during the washout operation to prevent water circulation through
the automatic control valves. All equipment isolated from general flushing of main piping
shall be individually flushed and cleaned.
3.3
CLEANING AND FLUSHING
3.3.1
Following the completion of and prior to the handing over of the domestic water systems,
disinfect these systems, including water service connections and storage tanks, with chlorine
before they are placed in service. The amount of chlorine supplied shall be such as to provide
a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Following a contact period of not less than 39
hours, the chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the
residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. All valves, after they have
been disinfected, shall be opened and closed several times during the eight-hour period.
Disinfection shall be re-peated until piping meets Main Contractor's and local bacteriological
test criteria.
3.3.2
All other piping systems shall be flushed free of foreign matter with clean water and left with
strainers clean upon completion of the work.
3.3.3
Bacteriological tests shall be conducted by an independent licensed testing laboratory at the

Contractor's expense. Results of the test shall be furnished to the Main Contractor.
3.4
CHEMICAL CLEANOUT
3.4.1
After completion of pressure testing and just prior to filling and balancing, chemically clean
internally each circulating water system. All water used for cleaning and flushing must be
chemically treated to ensure no pseudomona bacteria is introduced into any system.
3.4.2
Provide temporary connections with valves to fill the piping and remaining equipment with
water for the purpose of draining piping and equipment after completion of the chemical
cleanout procedure. Provide temporary blind flanges and/or caps to isolate the piping and
equipment noted herein.
3.4.3
Provide temporary piping connections, valves, strainers, bypasses, and blank connections
where required to clean out systems. Line each strainer basket with a fine mesh nylon screen,
and replace the screens at the end of each day's circulation until each system is thoroughly
cleaned.

M-3
VOLUME-III
3.4.4
Temporary pumps shall be capable of circulating full water volume once every 30 minutes, at
required system operating pressures. (Permanent pumps shall not be used for this task.)
3.4.5
Utilize chemical detergents which will not adversely affect pipe coating, pipe liners, pipe
materials, valve seats, plant equipment, etc. Isolate any portion of the system which may be
adversely affected by chemical cleanout and ensure no adverse effect on plant and equipment.
3.4.6
All recirculating water systems, both open and closed, to be filled and flushed with a solution
of a non-foaming chemical detergent, to remove all foreign matter. Circulate the solution for a
minimum of 7 hours and drain as rapidly as possible to remove suspended matter. Flush the
system with fresh water, drain a second time and refill. After final filling, the pH of the water
must not exceed the pH of the fresh incoming water by more than 0.5 pH.
3.4.7
Introduce the chemical solution into the system gradually by injecting into the suction side of
the circulating pump, or by means of a bypass chemical feeder located on the discharge side
of the water system circulating pump.
3.4.8
While the water is being circulated, open each drain connection for a short flow. Repeat at
hourly intervals. Replace any water drained during blowdown with chemical solution as
required until air is eliminated from the system. The chemical cleanout procedure to be
continuous in this manner for 2 full 7-hour periods.
3.4.9
At the conclusion of the chemical cleanout period completely drain the entire system. Flush
out with fresh mains water prior to final activation of the system. Remove temporary
equipment and strainers, reconnect permanent pump and replace items previously removed.
3.5
FILLING OF WATER SYSTEM
3.5.1
After completion of chemical cleanout, fill each water system with fresh water, air vent, and
add chemical treatment.
3.5.2
Allow for testing and commissioning of chillers prior to hand over of building. Include for retesting of chillers during peak summer conditions, including attendance of manufacturers
representative, commissioning engineers and all relevant personnel.
3.6
CHLORINE DIOXIDE EQUIPMENT FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
3.6.1
Provide a chlorine dioxide dosing unit for the control of microbiological populations in the
water supply.
3.6.2
The unit shall comprise of a floor standing polypropylene module complete with integral
moulded bunds suitable for 200 litre drums of precursor.
3.6.3
All COSHH details are to be clearly displayed on each chemical housing in compliance with
the Health and Safety at work act.
3.6.4
The unit shall come with a pre piped injection manifold incorporating but not limited to:
3.6.4.1 Isolating valves

3.6.4.2 Back flow prevention valve suitable for the fluid category risk
3.6.4.3 Bypass
3.6.4.4 Contacting head water meter to ensure dosing is proportional to the water usage
M-4
VOLUME-III
3.6.4.5 Reaction chamber

3.6.4.6 20 micron filter incorporating pressure drop sensors and automatic backwash facilities.
3.6.5
The unit is to be per assemble with pumps and electronics in separate enclosures.
3.6.6
Pulse monitors are to be installed in each chemical injection line to ensure the correct quantity
of each chemical is being pumped to the reaction chamber. The monitors will also give an
alarm and BMS output if a fault occurs
3.6.7
Chemical injection tubes to be double walled.
3.6.8
A programmable logic controller with LCD display of data shall be installed in a secure
tamper proof enclosure.
3.6.9
Low level cut out switches are to be installed in the chemical drums which initiate alarms and
BMS output when either chemical requires replacing.
3.6.10 Provide test kits for onsite monitoring of the chlorine dioxide and total oxidant level.
3.7
WATER TREATMENT CONTROL TESTING EQUIPMENT
3.7.1
Provide test equipment described hereinbefore and as follows:
3.7.1.1 Supply a one-year's quantity of testing chemicals to properly analyse the treated water for pH,
molybdate chlorine nitrite, phosphate and sulfite. Furnish the necessary test kits for these tests
complete with instruments, reagents, materials and supplies.
3.7.1.2 Provide a Myron L "DS" meter, 5 range, 0-0.5, 0-5, 0-50, 0-500, 0-5000, MICROMHOS/CM
auto-temp compensation 50-160F, 9-volt transistor batteries.
3.7.1.3 Furnish a supply of log sheets on which to record the test results and bound copy of full test
instructions.
3.7.1.4 Provide and install a corrosion coupon test rack as directed with four (4) insert positions for
steel and copper coupons furnished by the water treatment company, and to be inspected
every 90 days. Test rack to comply with ASTM D-2688 Method B.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
PLUMBING INSULATION

Mechanical Section 22 07 00: Plumbing Insulation
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Divisions 21, 22 & 23
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of mechanical insulation is specified in this section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation material shall comply with the following British Standard:
BS 476 (Part 4, 6, 7)
BS 874
BS2972
BS3958 (Part 4,5)
BS 5422
BS6676 (Part 1)
ASTM C195 Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation Cement
ASTM C547 Mineral Fibre Pre-formed Pipe Insulation
ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM B209 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet and Plate
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Product Data : Submit manufacturers technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation, submit schedule showing manufacturers product number,
k-value, thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
Submit samples for each types of mechanical insulation.
Provide mock up installation before progressing with work.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Protect insulation from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure and polythene
wrapping in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
1.6
MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit maintenance data for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data, product
data, and certifications in the maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed
hereafter:

M-2
VOLUME-III
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATERIAL
TYPE
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY.
W/M/DEG.C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mineral wool
Sectional
0.04
Mineral wool
Slabs
0.04
Fibre Glass
All
0.034
Closed Cell
All
0.034
Polyurethane
Sectional
0.025
Styrofoam
Rigid
0.026
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------All conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 24 deg C.
2.2
LAGGING ADHESIVE
Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive compound suitable for vapour sealing insulated
ducts and pipes.
Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity environments.
Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.05 perms at 0.030 inch dry film thickness when
tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame spread
shall be 10 and smoke developed 15.
Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 90A and
90 B 25/50.
2.3
FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS

Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of chilled water pipes
and ductwork.
Coating shall be a polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specially formulated for long term
fungicidal activity with no loss of activity on aging. It shall prevent the spread of molds and
odour causing bacteria on the applied surface.
Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.4
APPLICATION
2.4.1
Water Pipes Insulation

a)
Hot water supply and return pipe insulation

Hot water pipes embedded in block walls shall not be insulated.
In all other areas, hot water pipes shall be insulated with preformed sections of
aluminum foil faced and banded rigid fiber glass insulation, minimum density 65
Kg/M3. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Pipe Size
mm
Upto 28
35 to 50
Above 50
Insulation
thickness (mm)
25
40
50

M-3
VOLUME-III
As an option, the hot water pipes shall be insulated with elastomeric rubber insulation
of 19 mm thick up to 50 mm pipe size and 25 mm above 50mm pipe size, with
density of 55-70 Kg/m3, thermal conductivity of 0.034 W/mK at 20 C, water vapour
diffusion resistant > 7000, water vapour permeability < 0.09 ugm /Nh to BS 4370,
closed cell content >90%, Fire rating class 0 rated to BS 476 part 6 for fire
propagation and class 1 rated to BS 476 part 7, corrosion resistant.
Pipework at roof shall be insulated with 32 mm thick insulation.
All insulated pipework installed on roof, within plantroom and wherever exposed to
view shall be cladded with plain aluminium sheets at least 0.9 mm thick.
2.4.2
Drainage Pipes Insulation

Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, the following drainage piping shall be
acoustically insulated or sound proof PP drainage pipes shall be used.
a)
All horizontal & vertical drainage pipework within false ceiling and drainage shafts
of occupied areas and all elbows and floor drains connecting this pipe to vertical
stacks.
b)
Any piping specifically noted.
2.5
ADHESIVES
2.5.1
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.2
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
1
2.5.3
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin
adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus
149 deg C).
1
2.5.4
Flexible Elastomeric & Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1
2.5.5
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1
2.5.6
Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
2.5.7
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5.8
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1
2.6
MASTICS
2.6.1
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
2.6.2
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1
2
3
4
2.6.3
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1
2
3
4
2.6.4
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil
(0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1
2
3
4
2.6.5
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm)
at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
Color: White.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1
2
3
4
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch

Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.
2.7
LAGGING ADHESIVES
2.7.1
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1
2
3
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Color: White.

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.8
SEALANTS
2.8.1
Joint Sealants:
1
2
3
4
5
2.8.2
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1
2
3
4
5
2.8.3
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Color: White or gray.
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Color: Aluminum
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1
2
3
4
5

Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
The whole of the insulation work shall be carried out by an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract
accordingly and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to the
Contract and for coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
3.2
All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1 surface
spread when tested in accordance with B.S. 476, part 7. They shall not in any way attack the
insulation or the surface to which the insulation is being applied and shall be suitable for the
working temperatures.
3.3
The Contractor is to allow in his price for the removal and replacement of two sections of
each type of insulation. If, however, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for
inspection, and all cutout sections shall be replaced at no cost to the Contract.
If further defects are revealed then the Consultant shall have the right, when in its opinion it is
necessary, to issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to be removed and
replaced. The replacement with new insulation shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant
and the cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the Contract.
3.4
Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation which
must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe layouts, etc.
3.5
Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated to

M-6
VOLUME-III
the Consultants satisfaction.

3.6
All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Consultant prior to installation of
insulation.
3.7
The insulation, in sizes indicated shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Adjoining sections
of insulation should be butted firmly together with the longitudinal seam of the jacket located
on the bottom half of the pipe.
3.8
Insulate and finish valves and fittings in the same manner and same thickness as piping in
which such items are installed. Moulded, factory shaped sectional pipe covering, factory- or
job-fabricated may be used subject to satisfactory visual checking by the Consultant.
3.9
Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hangers shall pass outside of the
sheet metal protection saddle, which shall cover a section of high density insulation, of
sufficient length to support the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapour barrier shall
be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented to it. Minimum thickness of metal saddle is
1.5 mm.
3.10
The insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
END OF SECTION

M-7
VOLUME-III
VALVES

Mechanical Section 22 09 13: Valves
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the valves as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited
to, the following:
1.1.2
Valves.
1.1.3
Ball valves.
1.1.4
Butterfly valves.
1.1.5
Gate valves.
1.1.6
Regulating valves.
1.1.7
Pressure reducing valves.
1.1.8
Drain cocks.
1.1.9
Installation of automatic control valves provided under the Building Management Systems
Specification.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Testing, Inspections and Commissioning
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
API 600 general design specifications for gate, globe and check valves.
1.3.2
ANSI B16.34 pressure temperature ratings for valves.
1.3.3
ANSI B16.10 face to face dimensions of cast iron gate, globe and check valves.
1.3.4
ANSI B16.24 end flange dimensions of bronze valves.
1.3.5
ANSI B16.1 end flange dimensions of cast iron valves.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings:
1.4.2
Valves, regulating valves.
1.4.3
Product Data:
1.4.4
Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Valves and valve construction to be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and water quality
of the service.
2.2
2.3
MANUAL VALVES
2.3.1
Construct manual air vents from short vertical sections of 2-inch (50 mm)
diameter pipe to form air chamber. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) brass needle valve at top of
chamber. Provide at system high points, and where indicated on the drawings.
2.4
AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
2.4.1
Float type brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve, and valve seat. Suitable
for system operating temperature and pressure.
Provide at system high points not readily accessible for servicing.
2.5
AIR SEPARATOR
2.5.1
Air separator shall be constructed of steel designed and fabricated per ASME Section VIII
Division I with a maximum working pressure rating of 250 PSIG at 375 F units up to 2 1/2"
connection sizes shall have threaded connections and units 3" and above connection sizes
shall have flanged connections. Units shall have separate top connections for system
expansion tank and air venting, and bottom connection for blow down cleaning. Air separator
shall be furnished with a removal stainless steel strainer with a free area not less than five
times the cross-sectional area of the connections pipe.
2.6
EXPANSION TANKS
2.6.1
Bladder type tanks shall be designed and constructed per ASME section VIII, Division I and
rated for a maximum working pressure of 250 PSI at 240 F. Units shall be furnished with
lifting rings, and have the system connection and charging valve at the tank top and a tank
drain connection at the bottom. Bladder type expansion tanks shall have an internal
replaceable elastomer bladder with maximum acceptance volume and factory precharge
pressure as shown on the plans. The bladder shall be suitable for a maximum system
operating temperature of 240. Bladder type tanks shall be furnished with a steel base ring for
vertical mounting. Bladder type CA tanks shall be furnished with galvanised cover for
corrosion resistance. Bladder type tanks shall be furnished with a factory installed replaceable
California code "Bulls Eye" sight glass. All bladder type tanks shall be furnished with seismic
mounting clips. All materials of construction shall be compatible with water and ethylene and
propylene glycol mixtures. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, for
installation of accessories.
2.7
GATE VALVES
2.7.1
2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, rising or non-rising stem and union bonnet solid
wedge or disc, threaded ends, manufactured to comply with MSSSP-80 standards.
2.7.2
21/2" inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), OS&Y, solid wedge,
renewable seats, flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-70 standards.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.8
GLOBE VALVES
2.8.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, rising or non-rising stem; union bonnet, renewable
composition disc, screwed ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-80 standards. 2 1/2
inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising or non rising stem,
OS&Y, renewable seat flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-85 standards.
2.9
BALL VALVES
2.9.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle threaded ends, manufactured to comply with MSSSP- 110 standards. 2 1/2
inches (65mm) and over: Stainless steel, full bore, floating ball, teflon seat and stuffing box
seals, lever or key operated handle flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-72
and 25 standards.
2.10
CHECK VALVES
2.10.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze, resilient seat and disc, spring loaded, screwed ends. 2
1/2 inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composition
disc and seat flanged ends, manufactured to ANSI B16.1 and MILV-18436 F standards.
2.11
DRAIN VALVES
2.11.1 Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet with nipple and cap for hose
connection, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-80 standards.
2.12
REGULATING (BALANCING) VALVES
2.12.1 Use for throttling for water services: 50 mm and smaller variable orifice double regulating
bronze valve with inside rising stem, screwed bonnet, hand wheel operated with micrometer
style indicator and pressure test points. 65 mm to 150 mm larger cast iron variable orifice
double regulating valve with rising stem, outside screw and yoke and bolted bonnet. All
valves to be backseating with adjustable packing nut and be capable for repacking under
pressure. Moulded teflon impregnated mineral wool packing. Provide valves for throttling
service with renewable metallic seats of nickel alloy or stainless steel.
2.13
2.13.1 35 mm and Smaller:

2.13.2 Valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of varying inlet pressures
and/or changing flow rates.
2.13.3 Valve shall be capable of reducing a maximum inlet water pressure of 18 bars to a lower
desired pressure.
2.13.4 The valve shall close drop-tight when the downstream pressure rises above the spring setting.
2.13.5 Valve shall be of the balanced single seat design and shall contain an integral strainer
constructed of chrome-nickel stainless steel.
2.13.6 All necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valve from the line.
2.13.7 The pressure reducing unit shall be replaceable without the requirement of a new pressure
adjustment.
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.13.8 The diaphragm assembly shall be fully guided at both the top and the bottom.
2.13.9 All trim shall be chrome-nickel stainless steel throughout.
2.13.10 Valve shall be constructed with union ends at the inlet and the outlet.
2.13.11 It shall be possible to check the pressure on the downstream side of the valve from threaded
tappings located on either side of the valve with an installed pressure gauge.
2.13.12 The body and the cover shall be constructed of heavy-duty bronze.
2.13.13 50 mm and larger:
2.13.14 This valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in
demand, or varying inlet pressures.
2.13.15 Valve shall be a hydraulically operated pilot controlled valve.
2.13.16 No external packing glands shall be permitted, and there shall be no pistons operating the
main valve or any pilot controls.
2.13.17 The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open diaphragm
valve, designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting.
2.13.18 Valve shall be all bronze with stainless steel trim.
ENTIRE INSTALLATION SHALL BE ASSEMBLED AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
2.14
NON RETURN VALVES
2.14.1 Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with screwed bonnet. 65
mm and larger with bolted bonnet. Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
2.15
BUTTERFLY VALVE
2.15.1 Use butterfly valves for shutoff purpose for all sizes from 6 inch and above in place of gate
valves. Use gate valves only up to and including 4 inch. Valves shall be raised face class 250
flanges. Body to be ductile iron and manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP-67. Body to
have at least 2 inch extended neck for insulating. Valves to have EPDM rubber encapsulated
disc with polymer-coated body. Stem shall be 400 series stainless steel and shall not have
exposed stem to disc fasteners. Valves shall be capable for use as isolation valves for Bidirectional dead-end service at full pressure. Sizes up to 6 inch shall be lever operated. Sizes 8
inch and above shall be gear operated.
2.15.2 All butterfly valves shall be of the lug body style with lugs drilled and tapped and have drip
tight shutoff capabilities in either direction up to and including maximum system working
pressure. Butterfly valves shall be capable of closing tight after long periods of inactivity. All
valve bodies 600 mm and above to be dual flanged.
2.15.2.1 Lug body valves shall provide tight shutoff up to the full valve rating on dead end or
isolation service without the use of downstream flanges.
2.15.2.2 All valves shall be furnished with self-lubricated bronze bearings. Shaft seals shall be
provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from internal or external corrosion.
M-5
VOLUME-III
2.15.2.3 Seats shall be of the reinforced resilient type (or retained seat on high performance valves)
and shall also act as a body liner to prevent flow from contacting the body casting. Resilient
seats shall have flange sealing lips to provide a positive seal without use of flanges gaskets.
2.15.2.4 Seats shall be Nordel suitable for use with HVAC water to 120C. Shafts shall be one piece
and shall be of 416 stainless steel. Shafts shall be finish ground and polished to minimise
bearing and shaft seal wear. Shafts of 200 mm and larger valves shall have a non-adjustable
thrust collar.
2.15.2.5 Discs shall be semi-steel with welded nickel edge. The disc-to-shaft connections shall be type
316 stainless steel. Pins, shaft and disc of all valves shall be individually machined and
completely interchangeable.
2.15.2.6 On manually operated valves, latch lock levers shall provide automatic, positive latching in
the open, closed or eight intermediate positions. These levers shall allow locking in any
position with a standard padlock. Infinite position levers shall allow manual throttling and
locking in any position from open to close.
2.15.2.7 All manually actuated valves 200 mm and larger shall be operated using a cast iron housed
handwheel actuator with chainwheel. All units to have adjustable open and closed position
stops with provision to prevent accidental adjustment changes. Operating shafts to be
supported axially and radially at input end by permanently lubricated bronze thrust and sleeve
bearings.
2.16
PRESSURE RATINGS
2.16.1 Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 300 P.S.I.G working pressure (class
250) at 250 degree F (121 degree C). Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure
rated valves to meet the valve construction features.
2.17
RELIEF VALVES
2.17.1 ASME rated direct spring-loaded type, lever operated, non-adjustable factory set discharge
pressure. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low-pressure side of reducing valves,
heating converters, and compression tanks.
Select system relief valves capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve
capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
2.18
WAFER STYLE VALVES (100MM THROUGH TO 800MM)
2.18.1 Wafer style valves (100mm through 800mm): Class 150 or 300 Wafer valves shall consist of
grey iron (ASTM A-126-61 T, Class 30), or ductile iron (ASTM, A536-65T, class 60-45-18)
body and single or multiple, parallel-installed stainless steel cartridge assemblies; shall be
rated at 1380 Kpa/120 C, (Class 150) or 3450 kPa 200 C, (Class 300); class 150 shall be
mechanically compatible with ANSI B/16.1-1967 125 lb. cast iron flanges, or ANSI B16.51968 or MSS-SP-44 150 lb. steel flanges; class 300 shall be mechanically compatible with
ANSI B16.1 1967 250 lb cast iron, ANSI B16.5-1968 or MSS-SP-44 300 lb. steel flanges;
shall be supplied with dual pressure and temperature test valves.
2.18.2 All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility.
2.18.3 Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with a valve kit consisting of 1/4 inch x
2 inch minimum size nipples, quick disconnect calves (to be located outside of insulation),
and fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments specified.
M-6
VOLUME-III
2.18.4 Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag to be metal
stamped with zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential
pressure range.
2.18.5 Flow measuring instrument (minimum two) to verify flow rates shall be furnished.
2.18.6 Correct flow shall be verified by establishing that the operating pressure differential across
the valve tapings is within the range indicated on the identification tag.
2.18.7 The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a pressure gauge with a 4
1/2" diameter dial, instructions, hoses and connections; and push buttons 3 way valve which
transmits either of two pressures to a pressure gauge and a carrying case.
2.20
WATER STRAINERS
2.20.1 Provide Y-Type pipe line strainers with removable stainless steel basket 1200
micron size as shown on drawings.
2.20.2 Strainers shall be of the same size as the pipe to which it is connected and end material will
match with the material of connecting pipe.
2.20.3 Strainers shall be suitable for 250 psig working pressure with type 304 stainless steel screen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
Install valves so that they are accessible for repacking.
3.1.2
Install with stem vertical where possible, never with stem below horizontal position.
3.1.3
Install with operating clearance for handle and stem.
3.1.4
Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not interfere with equipment
removal or maintenance. Install unions or flanges on equipment side of valves unless valve is
flanged type.
3.1.5
Provide valves of a design permitting packing while open and under pressure.
3.1.5.1 Provide an isolation valve in the common supply line and a double regulating valve or globe
valve as shown on drawings in the return line from each water coil, water-to-water
interchanger, and all heat transfer elements. For isolation service use ball type valve for pipe
sizes 65 mm and smaller, and butterfly type on larger sizes.
3.1.5.2 Provide a gate valve in each supply riser near main and a lubricated tapered plug valve in
each return riser near main.
3.1.5.3 Provide capped drain cocks with threaded ends for hose connections at all drain points.
3.1.5.4 Provide all valves 200 mm and larger having a rating of over 10 bar with a 25 mm bypass
valve of same pressure rating as the bypassed valve.
3.1.5.5 Provide all required manual or automatic vent valves at all high points of piping systems to
facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet operation. Pipe vent valves to nearest gully.
M-7
VOLUME-III
3.1.5.6 Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for all cast iron body valves.
3.1.5.7 Use double regulating or lubricated tapered valves or plug cocks for all throttling service and
where noted on the drawings.
3.1.5.8 Install valves of the lubricated tapered plug type for pump discharge application.
3.1.5.9 Provide lubricated tapered plug cocks with the manufacturer's proper lubricant for water
service before shipment to the job site. Furnish 4 hand wrenches for each size valve, where
gear operators are not required.
3.1.6
Provide chain operated sheaves and chains for all valves which are more than 2 m above the
floor in Pump or Equipment Rooms or in Fan Rooms.
3.1.7
Furnish and install all other hand valves, non-return valves, cocks, and other equipment as
required for the complete and proper valving of the entire installation.
3.1.8
Furnish and install tamper switches for all valves used in public health and fire protection
systems.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
PLUMBING PIPEWORK
GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA

Mechanical Section 22 10 00: Plumbing Pipework
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Pipes and pipe fittings.
1.1.2
Domestic cold and hot water piping.
1.1.3
Sanitary Soil, waste and vent piping.
1.1.4
Storm water piping.
1.1.5
Kitchen/Laundry waste piping.
1.1.6
AC condensate drain piping.
1.2
1.2.1
Brackets, Hangers, Anchors and Supports
1.2.2
1.2.3
Valves
1.2.4
Plumbing Specialties
1.2.5
Health care/ Lab Gas piping & Equipment
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
DIN 19535 - Pipes and fittings of high density PE for hot water resistant waste and soil
installation within buildings.
1.3.2
DIN 19537 - Pipes and fittings of high density PE for drainage and sewerage.
1.3.3
DIN EN 1451 & DIN 19560 Polypropylene pipes and fittings, acid resistant.
1.3.4
DIN 8074 - HDPE soil waste and vent pipe and fittings; dimensions.
1.3.5
DIN 8075 - High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipes, general quality requirements and
testing.
1.3.6
ASTM D635 - Polypropylene pipe and fittings.
1.3.7
ASTM D3311 - Polypropylene heat fusion fittings.
1.3.8
AWWA C 601 - Standard methods for the examination of water and waste water.
1.3.9
ASTM A 120 - Pipe, steel, black and hot dipped zinc coated (galvanized), welded and
seamless, dimensions.
1.3.10 ASTM A 106 - Wrought steel pipes for corrosion resistant service.
1.3.10 ANSI B 16.3 - Malleable iron threaded fittings class 150 and 300.
M-2
VOLUME-III
1.3.11 ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe threads.

1.3.12 ANSI B 16.1 - Cast iron flanges.
1.3.13 BS 4375 - PTFE tape for pipe thread sealing application.
1.3.15 DIN 16962 - Pipe Joint assemblies and fittings for polypropylene pressure pipes.
1.3.16 ASTM B 88 - Seamless copper water tube.
1.3.17 ANSI B 16.18- Cast bronze solder joints pressure fittings.
1.3.18 ANSI B 16.22- Wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings.
1.3.19 ASTM B 32 - Solder metal.
1.3.20 ASTM D 1785 - PVC pressure pipe, schedules 40, 80, and 120.
1.3.21 ASTM D 2466 - Socket type PVC fittings, schedule 40.
1.3.22 ASTM D 2467 - Socket type PVC fittings, schedule 80.
1.3.23 ASTM D 2564 - Solvent cement for PVC pipes and fittings.
1.3.24 ASTM D 2855 - Making solvent cemented joints with PVC pipes and fittings.
1.3.25 ANSI B 16.21- Non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
1.3.26 ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and brazing qualifications.
1.3.27 AWS A 5.8 - Brazing filler metal.
1.3.28 AWS D 10.9 - Standard for building services piping.
1.3.29 DIN 16833 Multilayer composite pipes.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
All valves and similar control gear shall have the manufacturer's name or logo, size, pressure
rating and direction of flow cast-on, on the body.
1.4.2
Welding materials and procedures: Conform to AWS codes.
1.4.3
Employ welders certified in accordance with ASME Section 9.
1.4.4
Equivalent British (BS), German (DIN) or other international standards are acceptable,
provided that the Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility
with other components of the system.
1.4.5
For each product specified, provide from same manufacturer throughout, where possible.
1.4.6
Test certificates from approved independent laboratories or testing agencies shall be furnished
at no extra cast if required by the Engineer.
1.4.7
Maintain uniformity in respect of connection standards (threads or flanges) throughout.

Where this is not practical due to justifiable reasons, ensure compatibility, by using

M-3
VOLUME-III
appropriate adaptors, conversion spools, mating flanges and the like, with the written
approval of the Engineer.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
1.5.1
Submit product data,

recommendations.
1.5.2
Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valve and accessories and recommended coating
materials.
1.5.3
Submit copies of valve ordering schedules for approval prior to ordering valves.
1.6
1.6.1
Deliver products to site, store and protect.
1.6.2
Store plastic and copper pipes on elevated racks only.
1.6.3
Store plastic and rubber products out of direct sunlight.
1.6.4
Keep ends of pipes closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent entry of foreign matter.
1.6.5
Apply two coats of approved primer to all untreated ferrous pipes prior to storage.
1.6.6
Repaint ductile iron and cast iron pipes and fittings with factory recommended paint, prior to
installation; where factory coating has been damaged.
1.6.7
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
1.6.8
Store plug and ball valves in open position and gate / globe valves in closed position to
prevent damage to valve seats. Retain flange protectors on the valves, until installation to
prevent damage to the flange faces.
samples
and
manufacturer's
installation
instructions
or
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
COLD AND HOT WATER PIPEWORK
2.2.1
All above ground cold water and hot water pipe work for domestic water use including pipes
embedded in wall chase shall be in Multilayer composite pipes, type M to EN ISO 21003 and
DIN 16833. Refer clause 2.4 for Multilayer composite pipes specifications.
2.2.2
The incoming cold water pipe to water tank shall be in uPVC pressure pipe class E to BS EN
standards.
2.2.3
The hot water supply & return pipe work shall be insulated as specified elsewhere in the
specifications.
2.3
SANITARY DRAINAGE, RAIN WATER AND VENT PIPING INSTALLED BELOW

GRADE

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.3.1
Sanitary Drainage pipe work (Soil, waste, vent, rain water pipes) below grade within the
building and up to manhole shall be in uPVC to to BS 4514 for pipe sizes 80mm dia and
above and MuPVC/ABS to BS 5255 for pipe sizes 50mm dia and smaller. Fittings shall be
with solvent welded fittings to BS4346.
2.3.2
All above grade drainage pipes shall be sound proof pipes and fittings as specified in clause
2.5 below.
2.3.3
Drain pipework between manholes shall be uPVC to BS EN 1401-1 (BS 4660).

For above ground uPVC drainage pipes shall be to BS EN 1329 & BS EN 1455.
2.3.4
Drain pipework installed below buildings and roads shall be provided with 15cm concrete
encasement.
2.3.5
Kitchen and Laundry Drainage pipe work below and above grade within the building and up
to manhole shall be in high temperature resistant (up to 95 C) Polypropylene (PP) to DIN EN
1451, DIN 19 560-10, DIN EN 4102-1 B1 or in High density polypropylene pipes (HDPE) to
DIN 8074 & 8075 with fusion welded joints.
2.4
MULTILAYER COMPOSITE PIPES
2.4.1
All above ceiling (exposed) cold and hot water pipe work shall be Multilayer composite
pipes, Type M to EN ISO 21003 and DIN 16833.
2.4.2
All cold and hot water pipe work embedded in builders work shall be Multilayer composite
pipes, Type M EN ISO 21003
2.4.3
Material Description:
Pipe
Multi-layer pipes are produced using a longitudinal overlap-welded aluminum pipe as a core,
with an extruded inside layer of raised temperature polyethylene (PE-RT). An adhesive layer
is used to bond the inside layer to the wall of the aluminum pipe. An outer layer of raised
temperature polyethylene (PE-RT) and an adhesive layer are extruded to the outer wall of the
aluminium pipe.
Fittings
Fittings shall be tin plated brass fittings or PPSU polyphenysulfone in accordance with DIN
50930-6
2.4.4
Standards / approvals
Pipes
DVGW DW-8236AT2301
DVGW DW-8237AT6103
WRAS
Fittings
KIWA K6415/10
WRAS
M-5
VOLUME-III
DVGW
2.4.5
Physical Characteristics
Physical Characteristics
Pipe roughness
Linear coefficient of expansion
Thermal conductivity
Oxygen Diffusion
2.4.6
Value
0.0004 mm
25 x 10-6 m/m.K
0.4 W/m.K
According to DIN 4726
Application ranges
In accordance to ISO 21003

70C at 10 bar for 50 years
2.4.7
Installation
All pipe work installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation. The
joining of multi-layer pipe with fittings can be done either using Brass or PPSU fittings as per the
manufacturers recommendation and installation manual. Any installation tools required shall be from
the same manufacture of the pipes.
2.5
SOUND PROOF DRAINAGE PIPES
2.5.1
All above ground soil, waste and rain water pipes in the building shall be sound proof
drainage pipes and fittings made of mineral-reinforced polypropylene homopolymer and
copolymer. The typical density of the mineral filler shall be = 2.03 g/cm3 for pipes and 1.25
g/cm3 for fittings.
2.5.2
The sound isolation shall be 20 DB for 4.0 l/s flow rate in accordance with DIN EN 14366
and DIN 4109.
2.5.3
The sound proof pipes & fittings shall be fire resistant class B2 to DIN 4102.
2.5.4
The sound proof pipes & fittings shall be fungus and bacteria resistant, and shall have smooth
surface, corrosion resistant.
2.5.5
Soundproof drainage pipe system shall comply with following standards:

-
DIN 4109m sound proof, absorption standards.
DIN 4102, B2. Self-extinguishing flameless.

DIN 19560 / DIN EN 1451. Hot water resistance, 90C (Long term), 90C (short
term).
Physical characteristics
Mineral Filler Density - 1.9 g/cm DIN 53479

Elongation at break
- 50%
Tensile strength
- 20N / mm
E-modulus
- 3800 N / mm for 1 Layer and 1500 N/ mm for 3 Layer

M-6
VOLUME-III
Linear expansion
- 0.09 mm / mk
Drainage pipe work inside building shall be made of sound proof piping system made
from mineral supplemented polypropylene. The pipes should consist of three layers
(polypropylene-mineral additives-polypropylene) with a sound insulation layer,
density should not be less than 1.9gr/cm3 for soil and waste, or one thick layer pipe
made of mineral-reinforced polypropylene.
2.5.6
The sound proof pipes and fittings shall be self extinguishing flameless for the fire behavior
and complies with DIN 4102, B2.
2.5.7
The sound proof drainage pipes shall have the following wall thickness.
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outside dia
(mm)
58
78
110
160
200
Wall thickness
(mm)
4.0
4.5
5.3
5.3
6.3
Wall thickness
(mm) 3 Layer
2.1
2.5
3.9
4.9
2.5.8
The floor trap shall also be of sound proof material to DIN 4109.
2.6
NOT USED.
2.7
CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
2.7.1
uPVC Class E to BS EN 1452-2 (BS 3505) with solvent welded fittings to BS4346 for
installation not exposed to view.
2.7.2
GI pipes to ASTM A53 Grade B Sch-40 with threaded fittings to BS 1740 for installation on
roofs and within plant rooms.
2.8
COMPRESSED AIR PIPEWORK
2.8.1
The compressed air piping shall be in galvanized steel to BS 1387 medium weight, with
screwed fittings up to 50mm to BS 143 & 1256.
2.9
FUEL OIL PIPING & FITTINGS
2.9.1
Fuel Oil piping shall be in black mild steel to BS 1387 heavy weight, with screwed
malleable iron fittings for pipes up to 50 mm to BS 143 & 1256 and to BS EN 10242 and for
pipe of 65 mm and above, Butt welded fittings to BS 1965 part 1.
2.10
FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
2.10.1 For pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under:

2.10.1.1 Copper piping: Bronze unions, brazing ends
2.10.1.2 UPVC , PP and HDPE Piping: Unions of respective materials, solvent or fusion ends.
2.10.2 For pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and over:
M-7
VOLUME-III
2.10.2.1 Copper piping: Bronze flanges with pipe stop, brazing ends.
2.10.2.2 Plastic piping: Flanges of respective materials, solvent or fusion ends.
2.10.3 Grooved and shouldered pipe end couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape
composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for
galvanized pipe.
2.10.4 Dielectric connections: Use dielectric unions with one end malleable iron threaded and the
other end copper solder for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and under. Use dielectric
flanged fittings for pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and above. Both unions and
flanges shall have water impervious isolation barrier certified to withstand a minimum 600
volts on a dry line with no flashover.
2.10.5 All flanges, unions and couplings shall be pressure rated as the pipe joints.
2.11 PEX PIPES & FITTINGS
2.11.1 General
Cold and hot water distribution pipework embedded within builders work inside toilets,
bathrooms, kitchen shall be composed of :
-
Crosslinked polyethylene pipe according to DIN 16892 and 16893 pulled in a corrugated
conduit of ordinary polyethylene.
Fittings and valves of DZR brass construction.
2.11.2 Pipes
2.11.2.1The inner pipe shall be a cross link polyethylene pipe withstanding upto 95 deg. C at a max.
pressure of 10 bar without deformation or damage. Short time temperature loading upto 110
degree C.
2.11.2.2 The pipe shall be resistant to all natural constituents of drinking water to DIN 2000,
disinfectants and cleaning agents to DVWG W291 and DIN 2000, anti-corrosion agents to
DIN 1988 T4 (E) and common building materials, such as mortar, cement and plaster.
2.11.2.3The pipe manufacturer shall offer minimum of 50 years guarantee for the pipes and 10 years
guarantee for the complete system.
2.11.2.4All pipes shall be stamped on equal intervals showing clearly the name of the manufacturers
along with the pressure and temperature rating of these pipes.
2.11.2.5All pipes shall be laid so that the 16mm pex water pipe can be replaced, if necessary.
2.11.3 Fittings & Accessories
2.11.3.1 Pipes shall be connected to the different fittings via a wall box of reinforced plastic fitted
with DZR brass elbow suitable for 15mm or 20mm threaded connection. The box should be
suitably designed in order to enable the replacement of existing pipes in the even of their
damage.
2.11.3.2 All valves, box elbows, tees, bends shall be of DZR brass. Connection shall be of a cone grip
unions type allowing : full flow capacity, minimum pressure loss, easily detachable with
M-8
VOLUME-III
torque clearly defined for a fool proof installation. Contractor shall use proper tools for
assembly as recommended by manufacturer, i.e. assembly pliers, Ratchet torque wrench,
cutters, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.1.1
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
3.1.2
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
3.1.3
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
3.2.2
Install piping in a way that conserves building space and does not interfere with the use of
space.
3.2.3
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
3.2.4
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe joints or
connected equipment.
3.2.5
Install exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls, except where otherwise
shown on the Contract Drawings.
3.2.6
Where changes in pipe sizes occur, install tapered reducer fittings. Use of bushings is not
permitted. Install eccentric reducer fittings with level crown.
3.2.7
Where changes in pipe direction occur install factory manufactured fittings. Bending or
forming of piping is not permitted without Engineer's written permission.
3.2.8
Provide adequate clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
3.2.9
Provide minimum clearances between piping covered by this Section and other services.
3.2.10 Provide access doors where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location
of access doors.
3.2.11 Slope water piping and arrange to drain at system low points.
3.2.12 Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 90 cm (3 ft)
of cover.
3.2.13 Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
3.2.14 Use main sized saddle branch connections or directly connecting profiled branches
(weldolets) to mains in steel piping if main is two pipe sizes larger than branch. Do not
project branch pipes inside the main pipe.
3.2.15 Establish invert elevations; slope drainage pipes to one percent minimum unless otherwise
stated. Maintain gradients as shown on the contract drawings.
M-9
VOLUME-III
3.2.16
Install test-tees in soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipe risers at minimum 450 mm (18 inch)
above the ground floor level, at every alternate level and at other locations as shown on the
contract drawings.
3.2.17 During progress of work keep the ends of all piping closed with factory manufactured plugs
or blind flanges to prevent entry of foreign matter. Ensure the removal of such plugs or
flanges on completion of the works. All blind flanges shall have integral indicating flags.
3.2.18 Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
3.2.19 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted, except with written permission of
the Engineer for each location.
3.2.20 All valves shall be same size as pipeline except if otherwise noted on the contract drawings.
3.2.21 Provide flanges / unions on above grade horizontal pressure piping at spacing not exceeding
18.0 Ms (60 feet) on straight runs so as to enable taking down of the piping easily, when
required.
3.2.22 Use valves with flanged ends in valve pits and when directly buried, irrespective of size.
3.3
APPLICATION
3.3.1
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
3.3.2
Install unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
3.3.3
Install dielectric unions or flanged fittings wherever joining dissimilar metals.
3.3.4
Install drain valves at system low points and at each riser base. Use ball valves with flanged
connections for drainage of below grade mains in valve pits.
3.3.5
Install gate valves for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
3.3.6
Install butterfly valves for isolation of life support system underground mains.
3.3.7
Install globe valves for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services.
3.3.8
Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
3.3.9
Install lever and weight type check valves on discharge of sump pumps and sewage ejectors.
3.4
SETTING OUT AND EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES FOR BELOW GRADE MAINS
3.4.1
Trenches shall be excavated only after completion of site development work like backfilling,
if any. Care shall be taken to ensure that no heavy equipment shall be worked or moved over
piping which is not designed to take up such loads.
3.4.2
Clear the existing ground levels along the line of all mains, particularly at all manholes,
building connections etc.
3.4.3
Where long lengths of piping mains are to be laid in trenches at slight slope, sight rails should
be fixed across the trench at intervals of at least 5 meters at a height equal to the length of the
boning rod to be used above the required invert level of the drain or sewer at the point where

M - 10
VOLUME-III
the sight rail is fixed. There shall be not less than two sight rails in position on each length of
the main under construction.
3.4.4
The trench shall be excavated to the actual required depth such that the pipe shall bear
uniformly on undisturbed ground at every point between joint holes.
3.4.5
The Contractor shall examine any unfitting or weak ground material, which may be found
below the pipe laying level and report the same in writing to the Engineer, before laying any
pipe. In such cases, the unsuitable material shall be removed and made up by backfilling, at
additional cost to the Employer.
3.5
INSTALLATION PARTICULAR FOR BELOW GRADE MAINS
3.5.1
Handle pipes with utmost care so as not to subject the pipes to shocks, which may crack or
break the internal lining, if any. Cement lined pipes which are cut to length on site shall be
tapered at their spigot ends by a grinder and a fast drying coal tar coat applied at the uncoated
areas.
3.5.2
The pipes shall be laid directly on the undisturbed bottom of the trench with special recesses
made for the joints or placed on a concrete bed. The pipes must be aligned carefully both in
line and level. Wooden supports must not be placed under the pipes. Precautions shall be
taken to prevent dirt from entering the pipe.
3.5.3
Ductile iron pipes shall be wrapped up with polyethylene sleeving before laying. Adhesive
tapes shall be used to secure the sleeving at socket and spigot ends. Plastic coated wire shall
be used to secure the encasement at every one third length of the pipe. After jointing is done
and testing completed, encasement shall be pulled to close the whole joint and be secured
with plastic coated wire strapping. The pipes shall be laid with the folded part of the
polyethylene encasement on the crown of the piping.
3.5.4
Piping shall be protected against the ingress of foreign material before the pipe is placed in
the trench. If the case is such that the pipe cannot be laid, in the trench and in place, without
getting earth into it; each end shall be covered with a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of
suitable size before lowering the pipe into the trench. The bag shall be left there until the
connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe.
3.5.5
When jointing pipes, a mark shall be made to check the position of the end of the barrel.
Leave a gap of 5 to 10mm between the ends of the pipes, for piping with flexible joints.
3.5.6
The joints shall be left exposed until the line is pressure tested and approved by the Engineer.
3.5.7
Deviations from given levels may not be greater than + or - 1 cm at any point and gradients
not greater than 1/20 of the given value.
3.6
BACKFILLING OF PIPE TRENCHES
3.6.1
All surplus, suitable and approved excavation material shall be used for backfilling the
trenches.
3.6.2
All backfill material shall be free of cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic matter,
boulders, stones or other material which are unsuitable for the purpose, in the opinion of the
Engineer.
3.6.3
Excavations shall be backfilled without unnecessary delay, but not before completion of
testing of the piping. The first 30 cm fill shall only be compacted by hand tamping;

M - 11
VOLUME-III
subsequent layers being compacted by power tampers as approved by the Engineer. No heavy
mechanical equipment shall be used for backfilling or compaction.
3.6.4
The pipe trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to a minimum of 95 % of AASHO T 180 density, in layers of not exceeding 15 cms and fills shall be brought up simultaneously on
the full width of the trench.
3.7
INSTALLATION OF MANHOLE ACCESSORIES
3.7.1
Frame of manhole cover shall not be cast in together with roof slab of manhole.
3.7.2
Covers and frames shall be fixed in such a way as to match adjacent surface levels with
tolerances not exceeding + or - 3 mm. Before the maintenance period expires, check all
manhole covers and readjust them if they are in excess of above mentioned tolerances.
3.7.3
Fix all cast iron accessories to concrete manholes using cement and sand mortar (1:3).
3.8
PROTECTION
3.8.1
Give the following protective coating / wrapping to piping. All piping above louvered ceilings
shall be painted black.
3.8.2
Exposed uninsulated copper piping:
3.8.2.1 Two (2) coats of clear, synthetic lacquer.

3.8.2.2 Two (2) coats of enamel paint as coded or to match with the surrounding architectural finishes
(in areas exposed to view)
3.8.3
Copper distribution piping (cold water supply) in shafts, chases and ceiling spaces: 3.8.3.1
Black PVC tape wrapping with 12mm (1/2 inch) overlaps.
3.8.4
Copper risers in shafts:
3.8.4.1 Two (2) coats of clear, synthetic lacquer.

3.8.5
Insulated copper piping in technical areas:
3.8.5.1 Heavy canvas jacketing with Benjamin Foster finish.

3.8.6
Buried copper piping:
3.8.6.1 Two (2) coats of clear synthetic lacquer.

3.8.6.2 One (1) layer of asphalt impregnated felt wrap with 25 mm (1 inch) overlaps.
3.8.7
Buried plastic piping in areas subjected to traffic loading:
3.8.7.1 Encasement with minimum 10cm thick, class K 140, plain concrete.
3.8.7.2 Colored metal coated plastic foil warning grids.
3.8.8
Concealed (in shaft, walls, above false ceiling) HDPE Piping:
3.8.8.1 Plastic foil as sound insulation.

M - 12
VOLUME-III
3.8.9
Plastic piping buried within/below raft foundation:
3.8.9.1 Monolithic concrete channel enclosing the pipe with water proofing membrane extended under
the same when pipe work is below the raft level.
3.8.10 Plastic piping exposed to direct sunlight:
3.8.10.1 One layer of self adhesive, aluminium foil backed kraft tape with 10% overlap.
3.8.10.2 One layer of Densopol 60 with 50% overlap.
3.8.11 Insulated plastic piping in technical areas and below grade pipe trenches.
3.8.12 HDPE storm/drainage piping in areas where the piping is diverting and running horizontally
should be acoustically insulated.
3.9
TESTING OF PRESSURISED PIPING
3.9.1
The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24 hours,
before the tests are carried out.
3.9.2
The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. The Contractor shall furnish
all labour, and necessary testing instruments such as gauges, pumps etc. as directed by the
Engineer. A minimum of two (2) nos identical pressure gauges shall be installed at extremities
of the piping circuit to be tested.
3.9.3
Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow for purging of air.
Allow a soaking period of at least 24 hours for cement lined or concrete pipes.
3.9.4
Pressurize the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the test pressure.
Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure increment. Pressure testing using
motor driven pump is not permitted.
3.9.5
Do not over pressurize the system under any circumstance. If the test pressure is close to the
maximum permissible pressure of any of the system components, install calibrated pressure
relief valves in the tested circuit.
3.9.6
Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After completion of
pressure test, close each valve one at a time starting from the pressure release end, so as to
ensure tightness of the valve.
3.9.7
The piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 690 Kpa (100 psig) or 1.5 times the
system working pressure, whichever is greater, but limited to 1379 Kpa (200 psig) for copper
and steel piping and 1034 Kpa (150 psig) for UPVC piping. The pressure shall be maintained
for at least 4 hours. In metallic piping, allow for pressure fluctuations due to ambient
temperature variations. Record the circuit temperature along with the pressure readings.
3.9.8
Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10 Kpa (1.5
psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
3.9.9
Do not subject sanitary fixture chrome fittings to the test pressure.

M - 13
VOLUME-III
3.9.10 Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an official log
book for recording the tests carried out on sections of piping, including test pressure, date of
test and approval signature of Engineer's representative witnessing the test.
3.10
TESTING OF DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
3.10.1 The pipes shall be joined, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24 hours before
the tests are carried out.
3.10.2 The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. Furnish all labour and
necessary testing instruments as directed by the Engineer.
3.10.3 Install compression type rubber plugs with bleeding caps to plug branch risers in horizontal
piping. Install inflatable pneumatic rubber plugs for vertical risers and other inaccessible
areas.
3.10.4 Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all the high points open to allow purging of air.
3.10.5 All soil, waste, vent and storm piping shall be tested by filling entire system with water to a
minimum head of 3 Ms (10 feet) minimum at any part of the system. The system shall hold
the water level to within 100 mm (4 inch) drop in 8 hours. Vertical piping shall be tested in
sections of two or three floors at a time.
3.10.6 Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue.
3.10.7 Test completed piping by simultaneous flushing of all water closets. Test drainage branches
by simultaneous discharge of filled bath tubs, washbasins etc.
3.11
DISINFECTION AND FLUSHING OF FRESH WATER PIPING SYSTEM
3.11.1 Prior to starting work, verify that system is complete, flushed and clean.
3.11.2 Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid (hydrochloric acid).
3.11.3 Add disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder or tablet form to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L
residual.
3.11.4 Fill the system piping with chlorinated water and bleed water from outlets to ensure
distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
3.11.5 Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
3.11.6 During the disinfections period install temporary warning signs in both Arabic and English at
conspicuous places throughout the Project against using the chlorinated water.
3.11.7 If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, at any outlet, repeat treatment.
3.11.8 Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
3.11.9 Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from remote outlet of each riser and
from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. Submit result of analysis to
Engineer for approval.

M - 14
VOLUME-III
END OF SECTION

M - 15
VOLUME-III
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

Mechanical Section 22 11 23: Domestic Water Pumps
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete the pumps as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not limited
to, the following:
1.1.2
Constant Speed Water Booster pump set
1.1.3
Variable Speed Water Booster pump set
1.1.4
In-Line water pumps (Cold and Hot water)
1.1.5
Manufacturer's factory representative's supervision of installation and start-up.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1
Sound Control
1.2.2
Vibration Isolation
1.2.3
Insulation
1.2.6
Motor Control Centres
1.2.7
Variable Frequency Controllers
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Provide pumps with manufacturer name, model and rating/capacity identified.
1.3.2
Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapour binding and
cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation. Operate within 25 percent
of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.3.3
Provide pumps having local agents certified by the manufacturers to check, align, test, adjust
and commission the pump sets.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.1 Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned shop drawings and performance data for each pump.
Submit certified performance curves for each pump.
1.4.1.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.
1.4.1.3 Submit characteristics such as full load starting and running amps and power factor.
1.4.1.4 Submit wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly differentiating between
portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed.

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
2.2.1
Furnish and install where indicated, the centrifugal pumps of sizes, types and performance
ratings as listed in the schedule.
2.2.2
Provide mechanically sealed pumps with balanced mechanical seals made with tungsten
carbide seat and stainless steel Cyclo-clean filters. Pump brake horsepower at design speed
must not, under any condition, exceed the nominal motor horsepower.
2.2.3
Mechanical seals to be supplied and piped up with separator and sight flow indicator. All
pumps that develop pressure less than 105 kPa to be provided with 50 micron Cuno filter in
lieu of Cyclone separator. The Contractor to be responsible for changing the filter cartridges
until pumps is accepted by the Contract Administrator.
2.2.4
Select pumps to operate at or near their point of peak efficiency, allowing for operation at
capacities of approximately 25% beyond design capacity. In addition, select the design
impeller diameter so that the design capacity of each pump (litre per second and developed
pressure) does not exceed 85% of the capacity obtainable with maximum impeller diameter at
the design speed for that model.
2.2.5
In order to insure stable operation and prevent any possibility of hunting, the pump curve
shall be continuously rising from maximum capacity up to the shut-off point.
2.2.6
All pumps are to be provided with suction guide vanes or combined guide vane/strainer to
control the input conditions to the impellers.
2.2.7
Pump to have heavy-duty type permanently sealed grease type lubricating bearings and are to
be contained in moisture and dust-proof bearing housings. Only cartridge type housings that
can be replaced without opening the pump casing will be acceptable. Bearings shall be easily
removable with no special tools being required to achieve this operation.
2.2.8
Provide flanged connections on suction and discharge drilled to British Standards.
2.2.9
Guarantee each pump to circulate not less than the specified quantity of water against the
specified circulating head when operating continuously without overheating the motor or
bearings, at an approved point of its head-capacity curve, and without producing noise,
audible anywhere in the building, outside of the space in which the pumps are installed. Quiet
operation is mandatory.
2.2.10 The Contractor shall undertake a final check of the hydraulic resistance of each piping system
prior to selection of a pump. Submit these calculations for approval via the Contract
Administrator.
2.2.11 Provide pumps suitable for maximum system operating pressure. All pumps shall be
hydrostatically tested to 150% of the maximum pump working pressure.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.3
CONSTANT SPEED DOMESTIC WATER PUMP SET
2.3.1
The pump set shall be supplied by a BS EN ISO 9001 registered company for the design and
manufacture of packaged water booster sets.
2.3.2
The pump set shall be assembled on a common base plate at the manufacturer's works, fully
wired and tested prior to despatch. Factory test certificates are to be made available to the
project engineer upon request. The project engineer reserves the right to inspect the
equipment at the manufacturers works.
2.3.3
Pumps and motors
2.3.4
Unless otherwise stated the pumps will be of vertical multistage, inline construction with
direct-coupled motors and formal WRAS approval for use on potable water systems.
2.3.5
The pumps will have stainless steel bodies with stainless steel shaft and impellers, and fitted
with tungsten carbide faced mechanical seals.
2.3.6
The pump motors are to be of squirrel-cage, aluminium construction with totally enclosed fan
cooling. The motors shall have class F insulation and IP55 protection, with performance in
line with the requirements of IEC34-1. EFF2 motors are to be fitted as standard with the
option of high efficiency EFF1 motors over 0.75kW.
2.3.7
Three-phase pump motors under 5.5kW are to be arranged for direct-on-line starting,
otherwise they operate under electronic soft start/soft stop control. Single-phase motors are to
operate via capacitor.
2.3.8
Motors over 45kW shall be fitted with electronic overloads and PTC thermistors for
additional protection.
2.3.9
Anti-vibration material such as Tico matting is to be used to isolate the pumps from the base
plate.
2.3.10 Pipework, valves and fittings:

2.3.11 Unless otherwise stated pump set pipework shall consist of proprietary copper tube to BS EN
1057. Copper fittings shall comply with BS 864 and threads to BS 2779 and BS 21 where
applicable.
2.3.12 Flanges shall comply with the requirements of BS 4504.
2.3.13 Each pump shall be fitted with a suitably rated lever operated isolating ballvalve on both the
suction and delivery with a spring-loaded check valve on the delivery.
2.3.14 The hydraulic accumulator shall be fitted with a lever operated isolating ballvalve and a drain
valve with hose connection.
2.3.15 Common suction and delivery manifolds shall be terminated in BS 4504 flanges, suitably
rated for the maximum expected working pressure of the system.
2.3.16 All valves, tube and fittings shall be suitable for use on potable water systems with WRAS
approval, where applicable.
2.3.17 Hydraulic accumulator:
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.3.18 The hydraulic accumulator shall be incorporated within the confines of the booster set as an
integral part of package.
2.3.19 The vessel will have a replaceable internal membrane and be of mild steel construction, with
formal WRAS approval for use on potable water systems. The vessel construction will be
based on BS 4814.
2.3.20 The vessel capacity shall be at least 200 litres and sized so that the number of pump starts is
limited to twelve per hour, unless otherwise stated.
2.3.21 The accumulator shall have a working pressure suitable for the expected maximum system
pressure. The test pressure will be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure of the vessel.
2.3.22 The vessel shall be provided with isolating and drain valves. The valves shall be arranged in
such a way that whilst maintenance procedures are carried out on the vessel the booster set
will remain fully operational.
2.3.23 Pressure Controls and Indications:
2.3.24 The pumps will be controlled by duplex pressure transducers in conjunction with a dedicated
programmable electronic pump controller. The pressure transducers will be directly mounted
to the delivery pipework via individual isolating ballvalves.
2.3.25 The electronic controller interface shall display the system pressure.
2.3.26 The pressure transducers shall operate on a 24v DC supply and provide a 4-20mA signal with
a minimum accuracy of 1.0% across the full range of the device. The transducer should have
a full scale greater than the closed valve pressure of the pumps.
2.3.27 Where pressure control valves are used on the common discharge manifold, pressure gauges
shall be provided before and after the valve to indicate the unregulated and regulated
pressures in the system. Each gauge is to be provided with a dedicated isolating ballvalve.
2.3.28 Control panel:
2.3.29 The control panel shall conform to the latest edition of the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations and
have an overall protection rating of at least IP54. Mains and control cabling shall use tri-rated
cable and be suitably identified and labelled according to the wiring diagram. A detailed
wiring diagram shall be issued for the project. Generic drawings will not be acceptable.
2.3.30 The control panel enclosure shall be of 1.2mm thick (minimum) mild steel construction with
powder coat finish and galvanised steel mounting plate. A removable gland plate shall also be
provided. Standard 3mm DIN locks are to be used on all enclosures unless otherwise
specified by the project engineer.
2.3.31 Control panel components shall consist of but not be limited to the following:
2.3.32 Four pole, main door interlocking isolator.
2.3.33 Mains distribution system to each pump motor comprising motor protective switches, DOL
contactor or electronic soft start, soft stop device and set of motor connection terminals.
2.3.34 Motor rated fuses and thermal overload relays may be used in place of motor protective
switches. Note: Pump sets incorporating starters over 45kW should be housed in separate
cubicles in a form 4 style, wardrobe type enclosure system, with separate cubicles for
M-5
VOLUME-III
incoming mains, BMS terminals, common controls and individual pumps. In such cases, the
contractor should allow for all site wiring between the local pump isolators, pressure switches
and control panel.
2.3.35 240v to 24v AC safety extra low voltage controls transformer with suitably rated fuse or
MCB protection on both primary and secondary windings.
2.3.36 Programmable electronic pump control unit (PCU) for all pump control, sequencing and
timing requirements. The PCU shall retain its programme permanently and be capable of
being reprogrammed via a cable link and PC.
2.3.37 The pump controller shall provide adjustable settings for the nominal set point and pressure
differential.
2.3.38 All support pumps are to be inhibited within the software by adjustable timers to prevent
simultaneous pump starts. Adjustable minimum run timers are provided nominally set to 3
minutes, to prevent hunting and to ensure the storage volume within the accumulator
maximised.
2.3.39 The PCU will provide both high and low level break tanks monitoring for single and dual
break tank installations. The pumps will stop immediately under low level conditions and on
restoration of normal operating levels, the pumps will remain off for a further 3 minutes
(adjustable) prior to restarting. Where dual or split tanks are used a break tank maintenance
override facility shall be incorporated into the controls to enable the booster set to remain
operational. Level monitoring is to be by either float switches or conductive electrodes.
2.3.40 The PCU also provides optional high and low pressure alarms. The set value of the alarms can
be adjusted as can the function associated with each alarm. Under low pressure conditions the
PCU can be set to provide either a warning or shutdown the pumps. Under high pressure
conditions the PCU can be set to provide warning, shutdown or automatic restart when the
pressure has dropped back to normal levels.
2.3.41 After a power failure, low level condition or other system shut down the pump set will enter a
reduced start mode whereby only one pump will be permitted to run for an adjustable period
of time until normal working pressure has been achieved. Once normal pressure has been
reached the pumps will revert to normal operation. If normal pressure is not achieved within
the set time an alarm is raised and the pump set switched off.
2.3.42 The pump controller shall house the pump hand-off-auto selectors, selected through the
function keys of the HMI.
2.3.43 All pumps must be able to run if required by the system, including those designated as
standby pumps.
2.3.44 All pumps of equal capacity within the system are to share the load and automatically rotate
the starting sequence. Any failed pumps are to be omitted from the operating cycle. The
system should also be capable of operating with one or more jockey pumps as required by the
system.
2.3.45 LED indications are provided for power on and common fault plus individual pump run and
fault. The PCU HMI will also provide appropriate text messages as to the current status of the
pump set.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.3.46 The PCU will provide a permanent fault history facility. It shall not be possible to delete an
event from the fault log. The memory shall hold at least 100 alarms deleting old events on a
first in, first out basis when the memory becomes full.
2.3.47 The fixed speed pumps are started and stopped by the PCU automatically via relay contacts
rated at a minimum of 5A @ 230vAC (or locally available voltage).
2.3.48 A single common fault volt free contact is provided, rated at a minimum of 5A @ 230vAC (or
locally available voltage).
2.3.49 Specific general assembly drawings and wiring diagrams pertaining to the project shall be
issued by the manufacturer for the booster sets concerned. Generic or brochure drawings will
not be accepted.
2.3.50 The equipment is to be supplied with suitably rated flexible pipe couplings for both suction
and delivery manifolds and baseplate mounted set of anti-vibration mountings.
2.3.51 The equipment shall be finished with one coat of primer and two coats of either semi-gloss or
hammer finish topcoat paint. Colours should be based on BS 4800.
2.3.52 The equipment is to be delivered to site with adequate protect to limit the ingress of dirt, dust
and water under normal site storage conditions.
2.3.53 The original equipment manufacture is to commission the booster set to the satisfaction of the
project engineer and issue completed, comprehensive checklists and commissioning
certificates accordingly.
2.3.54 At least four copies of the operating and maintenance manuals pertaining to the booster sets
are to issued for the project contain the following section and/or such information as required
by the Employer:
Contents
Description of operation;
Equipment data sheet;
Installation guidelines;
Commissioning guidelines;
General information on pumps, panel, accumulator, pressure switches etc
Recommended spares list;
Maintenance guidelines;
General assembly drawings, wiring diagram and PCU information.
2.3.55 The equipment shall be complete with manufacturers guarantee effective for 12 months after
commissioning or 18 months after despatch whichever is the sooner. If required by the
Employer, extended warranties are to be made available for a maximum period of five years,
subject to a suitable maintenance regime or agreement with the original manufacturer being in
place.
2.4
VARIABLE SPEED DOMESTIC WATER BOOSTER PUMP SET
2.4.1
The pump set shall be supplied by a BS EN ISO 9001 registered company for the design and
manufacture of packaged water booster sets.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.4.2
The pump set shall be assembled on a common base plate at the manufacturer's works, fully
wired and tested prior to dispatch. Factory test certificates are to be made available to the
project engineer upon request. The project engineer reserves the right to inspect the
equipment at the manufacturers works.
2.4.3
Pumps and motors:
2.4.4
The pumps and motor specification shall be as specified in Clause 2.3.
2.4.5
Pump Logic Controller
2.4.5.1 The pump logic controller shall be provided and the operator interface flush mounted in the
door of the packaged pumping system control cubicle. The pump logic controller assembly
shall be listed by and bear the label of Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. (U.L). All components
within the pump logic controller panel shall be U.L. listed or recognized components. The
pump logic controller shall meet FCC Part 15, for Class A computing devices.
2.4.5.2 The pump manufacturer shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable
solid stage Variable Speed Pump Logic Controller. The controller shall function to a proven
program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
Motor overload
NPSHR above NPSHA
Hunting
2.4.5.3 The adjustable frequency drives shall be controlled by a direct digital pump logic controller
with discrete input signal selection. Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not
acceptable. All individual sensor/transmitters shall be individually wired to the pump logic
controller for continuous scan and comparison function. The pump logic controller shall be
microcomputer based and hold its software in EPROM. On line field modified data entries,
such as set point, shall be stored in RAM memory. EPROM memory storage shall prevent
accidental loss of data due to voltage surge or spike. RAM memory shall be backed up by
EEPROM. In the event of a complete power outage, all factory preset values remain stored
and shall be able to be recalled by the operator.
2.4.5.4 The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two process variable analog
input signals. It will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greatest amount from
its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed
loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal may be
programmed for a different set point and set points shall be able to be changed in the field by
keypad entry through password security.
2.4.5.5 The pump logic controller shall be capable of displaying an additional analog input
corresponding to flow. The analog input signal shall be the feedback and the set point shall be
the command. The closed loop hydraulic stabilization function shall have the capability of
performing the traditional proportional, integral and derivative modes. The proportional
function shall have range and be infinitely programmable with that range.
2.4.5.6 Rates shall be in percent gain. The integral function shall also be infinitely programmable and
compatible with the adjustable frequency drive (s) (AFD(s) and the hydraulic system. It shall
be entered as repeats/minute. Derivative shall be entered in units of seconds and be fully
programmable within the range allowing infinite entries with that range.
2.4.5.7 The scan and compare rate that selects the command set point and process variable signal
shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum operation. Each sensor shall be
M-8
VOLUME-III
scanned every 20 milliseconds.

2.4.5.8 The pump controller shall have off line and on line diagnostic software. Off line diagnostics
shall consist of CPU, EPROM, EEPROM and RAM memory test. It shall have self calibration
of all analog inputs with diagnostics, display test, program test, and all I/O tested and status of
above displayed. The controller shall include a Watchdog Circuit to provide system
protection/operation in the event of a controller failure. In the event of a controller failure, the
system shall be able to be operated manually across the line operation. On line diagnostics
include off line diagnostics and operational diagnostics including but not limited to individual
pump fault (s), AFD fault (s), overloads and sensor/transmitter fault(s).
2.4.5.9 Further fault information may be accessed by interrogating the pump logic controller through
the front mounted keypad. In case of failure, the controller shall fail in a predetermined safe
operating mode. Reset after failure shall not result in a no flow condition unless all equipment
fails.
2.4.5.10 The pump logic controller and sensor/transmitters shall be self powered. The pump logic
controller shall be powered by 240/1Ph/50 Hz. The incoming power and I/O circuitry shall
reject electromagnetic (EMI) and radio frequency (RFI) interference. All digital outputs shall
be electrically isolated.
2.4.5.11 All external transmitters furnished by the pumpset manufacturer shall be powered by the
pump logic controller through a quality integral 24 volt power supply. Overvoltage and short
circuit protection shall be on board.
2.4.5.12 The pump logic controller shall operate the pump (s) in a pre determined manner as indicated
in the sequence of operation section.
2.4.5.13 Failure of any pump, motor or drive in the system shall cause the controller to not only
display the fault conditions, but alternate or transfer the operation to another operating unit as
indicated in the sequence of operation section. The pump logic controller shall be capable of
utilizing individual differential pressure switches to determine pump failure.
2.4.5.14 Pump, AFD and overload trip faults shall not clear automatically. They must be manually
reset after correction of the fault. All above faults shall be displayed before starting. First
faults shall always be displayed. Faults shall not trigger erroneous fault messages.
2.4.5.15 The pump logic controller shall be self prompting. It shall display all messages in plain
English. The messages shall include, but not be limited to, how to obtain default values, when
to turn it on, and if it is in the active remote control mode.
2.4.5.16 The operator interface shall have the following:
Multi fault memory and recall
On screen help functions.
LEDs (pilot lights) and switches.
2.4.5.17 Light and switch shall also be displayed in plain English messages scrolled continuously.
2.4.5.18 The operator interface shall be capable of remotely being started/stopped.
2.4.5.19 The operator interface and process controller units shall be modular. They shall be able to be
interchanged with locally available parts without further programming required.
2.4.5.20 The readout shall be bright LCD super twist backlit capable of displaying any set point value,
M-9
VOLUME-III
input or output signal (s), and alarm function in engineering units.

2.4.5.21 There shall be forty 6 mm characters in a two line display.
2.4.5.22 The pump logic controller shall be capable of operating in automatic, manual or off line
diagnostic modes.
2.4.5.23 Three levels of password and software security shall be provided for protection of field
programs and user accessible features.
2.4.6
Adjustable Frequency Drive
2.4.6.1 Drive shall be of a microprocessor based PWM design, employing a diode bridge rectifier to
convert 3 phase AC to a fixed DC voltage. No. input transformer may be used for either
power supply or DC Bus power within the drive. A constant displacement power factor of .95
shall be at all speeds and rated loads.
2.4.6.2 The DC Bus shall consist of a choke and a capacitor bank to eliminate line disturbances. A
switching power supply operating off the DC bus will provide excellent undervoltage and ride
through capability.
2.4.6.3 Control and invertor logic shall be isolated from the power section.
2.4.6.4 Bipolar power transistors shall be used in the invertor section converting a fixed DC voltage
to a 3 phase adjustable frequency output with a minimum 97% efficiency at rated load.
2.4.6.5 For maintenance purpose, the drive shall be capable of starting, stopping and running with
stable operation with the motor completely disconnected (no load).
2.4.6.6 Drive must protect itself against all phase to phase and phase to ground faults, removal of
load, single phasing, power outages, and prevent starting with wrong phase rotation.
2.4.6.7 Protection is defined as normal shut down with no component damage.
2.4.6.8 The drive shall employ adjustable torque limit control which will override the speed
command and decrease the frequency while maintaining the correct volt/hertz ratio whenever
the load level surpasses the drive design level.
2.4.6.9 Torque limit shall be setable from 50 to 115% of full drive rating. When torque limit engages,
the output frequency is steadily reduced until the load reduces to the design capacity. At that
point the speed will stabilize. If the load reduces further the drive will reaccelerate to the
preset speed.
2.4.6.10 Electronic Motor Overload provides electronic equivalent to thermal motor overload and
shall be adjustable from 60 to 100% of the drive rating.
2.4.6.11 The drive shall be capable of being started by a 2 wire or 3 wire control circuit, a 240 Vac
signal, or application of input power.
2.4.6.12 Adjustments shall include:
Current Limit
Min/Max Speed
Motor Boost
Accel time
Decel Time
V/Hz Ratio

M - 10
VOLUME-III
Speed Reference signals shall be :

Poentiometer input
Voltage input
Current input
10,000 Ohms
0 to 10 VDC
0 to 20 or 4 to 20 mAmp.
Analog output shall be a non isolated 0 to 5 VDC, selectable for frequency or amperage.
2.4.6.13 The drive shall provide as standard 3 relays to indicate Drive Run, Drive Fault, and Current
limit condition.
2.4.6.14 Full RS 232 Communications shall be provided.
2.4.6.15 The Variable Frequency Drive including all factory installed option shall have ETL or UL
agency approvals.
VFD Specifications
2.4.7
Input voltage
240V/1PH/50Hz
415V/3PH/50HZ
Input Range
+/- 10%
Speed Range
20:1 Maximum or as specified
Ambient Temperature :
0-40 C
Humidity
0-95% Non Condensing
Altitude
to 3300 feet above sea level
Efficiency
96% or greater at rated load
Power Factor
0.95 regardless of speed or load
Adjustments
Min/Max speed, accel/decel independently adjustable to min.

120 sec, current limit, 12T.
Drive Protection
Over temperature, under/over voltage, phase to phase short

circuit, phase to ground short circuit, overcurrent, current
limit, decel limit.
Status Indication
Drive enabled, power on, fault indication for under/over

voltage, over current, motor trip, accel/decel limit.
Sequence of Operation
2.4.7.1 With the pumpset in the "Automatic" mode and the duty pump selector on "Pump No. 1,2" ,
the duty pump 1 shall operate through the AFD which is being controlled by a signal
generated by the pump logic controller. Pump 2 shall remain as standby.
2.4.7.2 In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to a pump or overload fault, the
pump logic controller will automatically initiate a timed sequence of operation to start the
standby pump in the variable speed mode. A solid red indicator light shall signal this
M - 11
VOLUME-III
condition and a message shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic
controller indicating the failure. A subsequent AFD fault shall automatically initiate a time
sequence of operation to start the standby pump across the line.
2.4.7.3 In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to an AFD fault, the pump logic
controller shall automatically initiate a timed sequence of operation to start the selected pump
across the line. A solid red indicator light shall signal this condition and a message shall be
displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller indicating the failure.
A subsequent overload trip or pump failure shall automatically start a timed sequence of
operation to start the standby pump across the line.
2.4.7.4 When in the "Bypass" mode and the pump selector on "Pump No. 1,2" , "Pump No.1 shall
operate across the line at constant speed with motor overload and ground fault protection. A
solid red indicator light shall signal this condition. The standby pump shall be locked out.
2.4.7.5 In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be
removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available,
shall remain in the scan/compare program for control.
2.4.7.6 The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the
operator interface of the pump logic controller.
2.4.7.7 In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the AFD shall maintain
100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure.
2.4.7.8 Pump, AFD, overload fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator
interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the pump logic
controller has been manually reset.
2.5
INLINE PUMPS
2.5.1
Furnish and install as shown in the drawings and as described in these specifications, vertical
in-line bronze fitted, single stage, single or double suction centrifugal pumps. Each pump
shall be capable of delivering litres per second against a total head as scheduled.
2.5.2
Pumps shall each be close-coupled to a ball-bearing, drip proof totally enclosed BS 5000
Parts 10 and 17 vertical electric motor. Motor shall be of such size that it will operate
continuously without exceeding its kW rating, exclusive of service factor, at the design
capacity and head.
2.5.3
Pump casing shall be constructed in cast iron with PN16 flanges for working pressure up to
12 bars at 65 deg C and ductile iron with PN25 flanges for working pressure of 25 bars at 65
deg C. Models 80mm and larger shall have balanced double volute design to minimise radial
shaft deflection.
2.5.4
Suction and discharge connections shall be the same size flanged and 180 opposite on
centerline for pipeline mounting. Casing shall have bronze replaceable wear ring.
2.5.5
Impeller shall be bronze, fully enclosed, statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced.
Motor shaft shall be one-piece stainless steel. Pump shall have stainless steel mechanical shaft
seal of the type multi-spring outside balanced type with secondary seal, carbon rotating face
and silicon carbide stationary seat which are to be properly vented to the suction connection.

M - 12
VOLUME-III
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
The pump manufacturer is to be responsible for aligning in the field prior to the start-up of all
flexibly coupled pumps. Alignment to be with dial indicator with an accuracy of plus or
minus 0.05mm. The pump manufacturer must submit a written report certifying that the
alignment work has been performed by his personnel and that the pumps are ready for
operation.
3.1.2
All base mounted pumps to be levelled up on tapered steel wedges in such manner to permit a
minimum of 18mm of grout between the pump base and the top of the concrete base, unless
otherwise noted.
3.1.3
All pumps are to be installed in such a manner as to provide access for periodic maintenance
as well as removal of motors, impellers couplings etc.
3.1.4
All in-line pumps are to be independently supported of the connecting pipework. Base
mounted pumps are to be carefully aligned on the concrete/inertia bases prior to bolting down
and grouting.
END OF SECTION

M - 13
VOLUME-III
WATER STORAGE TANKS

Mechanical Section 22 12 00: Water Storage Tanks
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Provide water storage tanks for domestic cold water as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein, complete, in position, and ready for operation.
1.2
1.2.1.1 Plumbing Pipe work

1.2.1.2 Piping and Accessories
1.2.1.6 Pumps
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Applicable Standards:
1.3.1.1 Water Regulations

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
WATER TANKS
2.2.1
Tanks shall be supplied with internal division plates, central where sizes permit, to create two
independent compartments for maintenance purposes. The internal division plates are to be
adequately braced to enable drain down of one compartment whilst the other compartment
remains operational.
2.2.2
The separate compartments of the tank shall be provided with an interconnecting valved pipe
manifold from which the various distribution services shall be taken.
2.2.3
Each compartment shall be provided with a connection for draining down the contents of the
tank, which shall be provided with a lock shield pattern valve and shall be piped to a
convenient discharge point on a drainage system to discharge in open air at least 150 mm
above the discharge point.
2.2.4
Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow of the appropriate size to carry away
all water discharged to the tank in the event of the inlet control device, ie float operated valve
becoming defective, without the inlet control device becoming submerged. In addition a
warning pipe of not less than 28 mm diameter shall be provided at least 50 mm below the
lowest point of the overflow where tanks exceed 1,000 liters.
2.2.5
For tanks exceeding 10,000 liters a device may be fitted to give audible or visual alarm in
substitution for a warning pipe as detailed in the Project Specification.
2.2.6
Overflow and warning pipes shall be piped independently to a discharge point on a drainage
system to discharge in open air at least 150 mm above the discharge point. Pipes discharging
to a common point shall be labeled such as to identify the source of the discharge.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2.7
All overflows and warning pipes shall be labeled throughout their length and fitted with
screens to prevent the ingress of insects and vermin. The device shall be fitted with a
corrosion resistant mesh of maximum perforations of 0.65 mm diameter and still maintain the
cross sectional area of full overflow or warning pipe.
2.2.8
Each compartment shall be provided with an air inlet ventilator fitted with a corrosion
resistant mesh screen having maximum perforations of 0.65 mm diameter to prevent the
ingress of insects and vermin.
2.2.9
Each compartment shall be provided with an air inlet ventilator fitted with a corrosion
resistant mesh screen having maximum perforations of 0.65 mm diameter to prevent the
ingress of insects and vermin.
2.2.10 Each compartment shall be provided with access covers hinged and lockable or bolted down
in a secure manner, suitably sized for the maintenance of the float operated valve.
2.2.11 Each compartment shall be provided with access covers hinged and lockable or bolted down
in a secure manner, suitably sized for man access to enable interior inspection and cleansing
of the tank. All tanks shall be provided with internal ladders constructed from GRP where
man entry is required for tanks 1.2 meters or more in depth.
2.2.12 Tank covers shall be heavy duty flat covers bolted down constructed from materials which
will not contaminate any water which may condense on its underside.
2.2.13 Galvanized mild steel or aluminum ladders constructed in accordance with BS 4211: l987
shall be provided to the tank for easy access to float operated valve positions.
2.2.14 The entire tank shall be insulated against heat and frost in accordance with this Specification.
2.2.15 Construction
2.3
GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC SECTIONAL
2.3.1
Tanks shall be constructed from hot press mouldings of glass reinforced plastic from standard
1.0 m x 1.0 m, half plates 1.0 m x 0.5 m and corner angles.
2.3.2
The panels shall be manufactured by hot tool moulding at a temperature of 140 C at 1.7 bar
using chopped BS 3691 'E' glass rovings and BS 3496 continuous filament 'E' glass matt, UV
stabilised BS 3532 unsaturated isoplithalic modified polyester resin, calcium carbonate filler
and a Ditertiary butyl peroxy trimethyl cyclohexane catalyst with pigment coloring.
2.3.3
The panels shall be assembled and bolted together with 12 mm stainless steel nuts and bolts
conforming to type 316/A4 in accordance with BS 6105 and shall be provided with flat
washers to bolt head and nut.
2.3.4
All water tanks shall be externally flanged.
2.3.5
The manufacturers sealant strip shall be laid between each joint and shall be non-toxic and
prohibitive to the support of bacteriological or fungous growth.
2.3.6
G.R.P. Tanks (Particular Specifications)

The Contractor shall supply and assemble at Site sectional water tank of hot pressed
moulded GRP insulated panels (Glass Reinforced Plastic) of ivory or grey colour
provide with lockable manhole cover air vent with overflow and all piping

M-3
VOLUME-III
connections. The panels shall comply with BS 7491 : Part 3 : 1994 and shall have
convex shape to assist a complete draining of water of the following characteristics :(a)
Specific gravity of 1.8
(b)
Tensile strength of not less than 850 kg/cm2
(c)
Flexural strength of 1800 kg/cm2 to ISO 178.
(d)
Impact strength of 80 kg/cm2 to ISO 179
(e)
Thermal expansion of 2.1 x 10-5 deg. C to ATM D 696.
(f)
Thermal conductivity of 0.6 W/m2 C to BS 7491: Part 3.
(g)
Water absorption less than 0.2% to ISO 62.
(h)
Glass content more than 30%
(i)
No light transmission
(j)
Gasket of synthetic rubber
(k)
Bolts and nuts of stainless steel 316 / A4.
(l)
Frame angles and frame plates of hot dipped galvanized steel.
(m)
External ladder of hot dipped galvanized steel.
(n)
Internal ladder of GRP or S.S. according to Manufacturer's standards.
(o)
Tie rods of stainless steel
(p)
G.R.P. panel thick not less than 8mm
(q)
Resin cover of 2mm
(r)
Glass tube level indicator for all compartments.
(s)
Insulation 25mm.
2.4
STEEL SECTIONAL (For Fuel Tanks)
2.4.1
Tanks shall be constructed from BS 4360, Grade 43A quality steel, hot pressed in one piece
with flanges on all four sides of a 1.0 m x 1.0 m plate or 1.22 m x 1.22 m plate in accordance
with BS 1564: 1975 (1983) type 1.
2.4.2
Internal cleats and stays are to be manufactured from steel to BS 4360 Grade 43A designed to
ensure the strength and rigidity required for the size of tank is maintained.
2.4.3
Plates shall be supplied from the manufacturer with one coat of black non-toxic bituminous
primer. The tank shall be erected by the manufacturer and after erection shall have two further
coats of non-toxic bituminous paint applied prior to testing. External decorative painting shall
be carried out by the Contractor to the CA/Engineers requirements.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.4.4
Panels shall be assembled and bolted together with 12 mm stainless steel nuts and bolts
conforming to type 316/A4 in accordance with BS 6105 and shall be provided with flat
washers to bolt head and nut.
2.4.5
The manufacturers sealant strip shall be laid between each joint and shall be non-toxic and
prohibitive to the support of bacteriological or fungous growth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
3.1.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring accurate detailed construction drawings are
produced. The drawings shall illustrate the size, location and type of all connections required,
details of float operated valve fixings, location and provision of access covers, vents, etc
together with the detailed requirements and Specification for the base support system.
3.1.2
The workshop drawings shall be issued to the CA/Engineer for review to ensure the
Employers requirements have been met in full.
3.1.3
The issue of the drawings for review shall be well in advance of any works to be carried out
on site for the preparation of the Builders work requirements of the tank and shall be issued
sufficient to allow the CA/Engineer fourteen (14) days from receipt to comment.
3.2
CONNECTIONS TO COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.2.1
Connections to GRP and concrete water tanks shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations using materials and components supplied by the
manufacturer and shall in all cases be two piece PVC flange connections with mastic seal and
secured with stainless steel nuts and bolts conforming to type 316/A4 in accordance with BS
6105.
3.2.2
All such types of tank connections shall be provided with pipe support immediately after the
assembly to ensure no load is transmitted directly to the connection assembly.
3.2.3
Connections to steel manufactured tanks shall be factory fixed prior to dispatch and shall be
tapped flanges for screwed pipe work up to and including 50 mm pipe work and pads with
studs for flanged pipe work 75 mm and above.
3.2.4
Builders work
3.2.5
All materials and works associated with the provision of the tank base or support on which
the tank will be erected shall be supplied and executed by the Contractor in accordance with
workshop drawings produced by the tank manufacturer.
3.2.6
The Contractor shall neither procure materials nor execute the works until such time as the
CA/Engineer has completed the review of the workshop drawings.
3.2.7
The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the specific requirements as required by the particular
tank manufacturer shall conform to the following minimum requirements.
3.3
SOLID CONCRETE PLINTHS
3.3.1
Solid concrete plinths shall be structurally designed to support the weight of the tank,
including the contents, and shall take into account the ground bearing conditions or load
limitations of the floor constructions.

M-5
VOLUME-III
3.3.2
Plinths shall be a minimum of 150 mm high and in length and breadth 300 mm longer than
the tank overall dimensions including flanges so as to create a plinth 150 mm larger around
the extremities of the tank. The top surface of the plinth shall be smooth and level to within 2
mm laterally or diagonally across the extremities of the tank, without any abrupt changes in
level.
3.4
DWARF WALLS
3.4.1
Dwarf walls shall be constructed from engineering bricks or reinforced concrete to a

minimum width of 200 mm. The walls shall be constructed at 500 mm centres arranged as
required to length or breadth of the tank and shall exceed the overall dimensions of the tank
by 150 mm at each end.
3.4.2
The walls shall be structurally designed to support the weight of the tank including the
contents and shall take into account the ground bearing conditions or load limitations of the
floor construction.
3.4.3
The tolerances applicable to the level of the walls shall be 2 mm across the length of the wall
and between walls farthest from each other as well as diametrically across the walls.
3.5
STEELWORK
3.5.1
Where steelwork mill rolled sections are to be provided the sections are to be located at 500
mm centers arranged as required to length or breadth of the tank and shall exceed the overall
dimensions of the tank by 150 mm at each end.
3.5.2
The steel sections shall be selected to be structurally suitable to support the weight of the tank
including the nominal contents taking into account the ground bearing conditions or load
limitations of the floor construction.
3.5.3
The maximum permissible deflection of the steel section shall not exceed 1/ 500th of the
unsupported span.
3.5.4
The tolerance applicable to the level of the steel sections shall be 2mm across the length of
the wall and between sections farthest from each other as well as diametrically across the
sections.
3.6
ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING
3.6.1
The erection of the tanks upon plinths, dwarf walls or steel constructed by the Contractor
shall be carried out by the tank manufacturer.
3.6.2
The tank manufacturer shall ensure that the plinths, dwarf walls or steel supports for tank are
strictly in accordance with the agreed installation/ workshop drawings and that all
construction tolerances meet with his requirements and the requirements of this Specification,
before commencement of the erection of the tank.
3.6.3
The Contractor shall be in attendance at all times to ensure sufficient access, lighting and
power is available for the Works and that activities by the tank erectors does not impede other
site activities and also that the highest standard of workmanship is maintained at all times.
3.6.4
Upon completion, the erected tank is to be offered for inspection by the CA/ Engineer prior to
any further works being carried out.

M-6
VOLUME-III
3.6.5
After acceptable inspection by the CA/Engineer the tank may be filled with clean, fresh mains
water to determine water tightness of the installation. The water tightness testing of the tank
shall be continuous for 24 hours during which time the Contractor shall be in constant
attendance to action any failure of joints which may occur during this period.
3.6.6
A certificate shall be issued by the Contractor to the CA/Engineer to confirm satisfactory

completion of the test. The test certificates shall be included in the Record Documents.
3.6.7
Where tanks are required to be insulated, execution of the insulation works shall not be
carried out until satisfactory water tightness of the tank has been achieved.
3.6.8
Sterilization procedures to be adhered to for the commissioning of the storage tank shall be in
accordance with this Specification.
END OF SECTION

M-7
VOLUME-III
DRAINAGE SPECIALITIES

Mechanical Section 22 13 19: Drainage Specialties
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Compliance with relevant General Requirements of Mechanical Services.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1
Manufacturer qualification
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of floor drains, cleanouts and roof drains of types and
sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in the similar service for not less
than 5 years.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Product data
Submit manufacturers technical product data, installation instructions and dimensioned
drawings for each type of items.
1.4
MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit maintenance data as per manufacturer recommendations. Include this data, product
data, and certification in maintenance manual.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Floor Drains
Floor drain body shall be in uPVC with rodding eye (110 dia top inlet, 82 dia outlet) with
minimum water seal of 7 cm.
Floor drain buried underground at plant rooms: Laquered Cast iron body with heavy duty
150 x 150mm nickel bronze gratings and covers. The open area of strainer shall be at least
two third of the cross sectional area of the drain line to which it connects. Note wherever
floor drain is indicated it shall be connected to floor trap unless other wise indicated.
Funnel floor drain for Labs shall include a 6 round stainless steel 316L funnel secured to the
grating for equipment indirect waste discharge.
Flower bed drain where specified shall be heavy duty, dome type drain coated cast iron body
with bottom outlet complete with combination membrane flashing clamp/gravel guard, low
silhouette dome and stainless steel mesh screen over dome, no floor trap is required.
Internal Channel grating shall be stainless steel 316L and the external channel grating shall be
heavy duty ductile iron to dimensions as indicated on drawings.
External channel grating and catch basins shall be in heavy duty ductile iron material.
2.1.2
Roof Drains
a)
Rain water outlets shall be epoxy coated cast iron body and dome, wide serrated

M-2
VOLUME-III
flashing flanged, flashing clamp device with integral gravel stop. Rain water outlets
shall be selected to suit the type of roof where installed and shall be provided with a
no hub outlet for mechanical jointing to rain water pipe. Rain water outlets shall be
provided with perforated extension assemblies, where required to match the roof
construction.
b)
2.1.3
Scupper type rain water outlets shall be dura coated cast iron body with reversible
back or bottom outlet, oblique grate with combination frame and membrane flashing
clamp.
Clean Outs
Floor type: uPVC body with square or round adjustable, secured, nickel bronze top with
3mm tile recess.
Wall type: uPVC body with square nickel bronze smooth wall access cover and frame, 150 x
150mm.
Clean out at high level shall be uPVC with screw cap and washer.
2.1.4
Grease Interceptors
Automatic grease separator shall be provided with automated cleaning and disposal system,
based on EN 1825-1, manufactured from polyethylene for grease separation from commercial
kitchen drain piping.
The grease separator shall be buried underground type with integrated sludge trap,
polyethylene quick release odour tight covers, with inspection window, with direct disposal
hook up pipe on left or right side for sludge and grease disposal, with disposal flange DN 65,
PN 10 (DIN 2501) Storz-B-coupling 2.5 inch for disposal truck connection, automated switch
over from cleaning to disposal, twin 1 inch solenoid valves, rinse / refill inlet according to
DIN 1988, high pressure cleaning / rinsing system with spray jets and flood jets, exterior (left
or right) mounted submersible (IP 68) cutting pump with con-trol unit, with refill equipment,
inlet / outlet fits SML pipe (DIN 19522) and plastic pipe (DIN 19560). Sludge and grease
capacity shall be as shown on drawings.
2.1.5
Oil Interceptors
Large capacity acid resistant coated interior and exterior fabricated steel lint interceptor non
skids secured cover, permanent primary straining baffle. Regularly furnished with high inlet
and low outlet.
a
b
c
d
2.1.6
Material: Epoxy coated fabricated steel.

Rough-in: On floor.
Accessories: Integral deep seal trap, removable integral flow control, adjustable drawoff assembly, sediment bucket.
Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme
injection port, recessed for floor finish.
Manholes/gully traps covers

All covers shall be ductile iron with black bitumen coating.
Manhole covers shall have clear opening of 600 x 600 mm.
All manholes and gully traps shall be vented as per drainage department requirements.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Gully trap covers shall have clear opening of 300 x 300 mm.
All manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 part 1.
Internal Manholes:
All internal manhole covers shall be bolt down air tight double seal recessed type with brass
trim, they shall be insitu concrete filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor. Covers
shall be medium duty, locking and sealed.
External Manholes:
Covers in paved areas shall be medium duty, double seal, recessed type. They shall be insitu
concrete/pavement filled with surface finish to match surrounding floor.
Covers subject to vehicular traffic shall be kite marked heavy duty, single seal, non-rock with
square push fit seal plate complete with lifting key-holes.
2.1.7
GULLY GRATES
Where indicated on drawings provide kitemarked kerb gully unit of ductile iron hinged grate,
road retaining bar with clear opening size 532x405mm. Unit to be black bitumen coated and
shall be designed to deter ingress and help prevent blockage. A GRP grid shall be provided
as standard.
Storm water / car park gratings shall be kitemarked, heavy duty ductile iron, non rock clear
openings size as indicated on drawings, grey - epoxy coated and shall comply with BS 497.
2.2
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Generally the construction of all sewer and storm water manholes with covers, gully traps,
road kerb gullies shall comply with the standard details drawings of Abu Dhabi Municipality.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
All roof and floor drains shall be installed with water proof membrane extended up to and
within the drain, and flashed to prevent any water penetration through the drain. Water
proofing shall be carried out as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the
Consultant.
3.1.2
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturers
written installation instructions. Maintain integrity of water proof membrane where
penetrated.
3.1.3
Position roof drains and floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
3.1.4
Unless otherwise mentioned provide traps at each drain to stop seepage of sewer gases into
occupied spaces.
3.1.5
Provide transition piece with mechanical joint connectors to couple drains to pipes specified.
3.1.6
Install floor drains at low points of surfaces to be drained, set grates of drains flush with finish
floor or as indicated.

M-4
VOLUME-III
3.1.7
Clean outs shall be installed at change of direction of drainage pipes inside building and
where indicated on the drawings. Clean outs shall be not more than 15m apart in horizontal
lines for pipe diameters of 100 mm and smaller, and 30 m apart for larger pipes.
3.1.8
A clean out shall be provided at the foot of each vertical waste or soil stack and at each floor,
the clean out shall be at 0.6 m height from finished floor level.
3.1.9
Clean outs on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with finished
wall or floor. Pits or chases may be left in walls or floors provided they are of sufficient size
to permit removal of clean outs plug and proper cleaning of the system.
3.1.10 Where it is necessary to conceal a cleanout plug, a heavy duty stainless steel covering plate
200 x 200 mm shall be provided which permits ready access to the plug.
3.1.11 Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes up to 100 mm pipe diameters and not
less than 100 mm for larger piping.
3.1.12 Cleanouts shall be so installed that there is a clearance of not less than 450 mm for the
purpose of rodding and cleaning.
3.1.13 Protect cleanouts during construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and avoid
damages from traffic and construction works.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

Mechanical Section 22 13 29: Sanitary Sewerage Pumps
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
to, the following:
1.1.2
Packaged waste water pump sets
1.1.3
Sump pumps and sewage ejectors
1.1.4
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1
Sound Control
1.2.2
Vibration Isolation
1.2.3
Insulation
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2
GENERAL
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
Administrator.
2.3
SUMP PUMPS AND SEWAGE EJECTOR PUMPS
2.3.1
Provide in concrete pits, provided under the Specifications of another Trade, duplex sump
pump units, submerged non-clog type. Each pump shall have the capacity indicated on the
drawings.
2.3.2
Provide on each concrete basin a 35mm thick steel diamond plate cover having openings for
two pumps and manhole. Cover shall have crossbeams to support the pumps and be properly
supported on a galvanised angle iron frame, in an approved manner. Deliver to the building

M-3
VOLUME-III
all required frames, anchor clips and drawings to facilitate the installation of the covers and
adjacent concrete work. The cover and supports must be of adequate strength to guarantee
proper alignment of the pumps without deflection in the cover assembly.
2.3.3
Each pump shall be directly connected to the drive motor with a flexible coupling and
mounted on a heavy floor plate with watertight gland and packing type stuffing box around
the shaft, machined registered surface for the motor tripod to assure permanent alignment of
the pump and motor shafts, and discharge pipe with flanged fitting.
2.3.4
Discharge pipe shall be of galvanised wrought steel sealed at both ends by non-rigid
connections to prevent strain on the pump unit and with a 45 degree flanged fitting bolted to
the floor plate.
2.3.5
Motors shall be vertical heavy duty, solid shaft type, mounted on heavy, rigid supports with
the bottom end bell not less than 300mm above the floor plate.
2.3.6
Each pump shall have a heavy cast iron volute casing with volute and discharge nozzle in one
piece symmetrical casting, flanged galvanised wrought steel shaft column with tongue and
grooved construction at all bearing housings, high tensile Type 416 stainless steel shaft
turned, ground and polished, two blade cast iron non-clog impeller and with all flanges
accurately machined and registered.
2.3.7
The shaft and impeller shall be supported by a sealed ball-thrust bearing in a moisture-proof
and dustproof housing mounted above the pump floor plate providing precise location for the
impeller in the pump casing. Impeller shall be dynamically and hydraulically balanced to
prevent excessive wear on the casing bearing, with top section having a machined sealing
surface to prevent flushing action from the liquid in the pump casing. Impellers shall pass a
minimum of a 60mm sphere.
2.3.8
Lower bearing shall be extra long heavy duty type locked in the casting above the casing,
with spiral grooving to insure distribution of the bearing lubricant. A minimum of one
intermediate bronze bearing shall be provided for every 1 m of pump shaft, with individual
grease lubricating line to each upper, lower and intermediate bearing. Shaft and bearings shall
be guaranteed for two years, including related labour required for pulling and replacing
pumps.
2.3.9
An automatic alternator of the mechanical type shall be provided to alternate the pump
operation and to allow both pumps to operate when one cannot carry the load. A standby
switch shall be provided to start both pumps at a third water level setting.
2.3.10 Mount high water alarm switch on a stand bolted to basin cover. Provide auxiliary contacts
for remote annunciation.
2.3.11 All devices penetrating the cover plate shall be watertight.
2.3.12 Alarms, alarm wiring and control wiring shall be provided by this trade. Remote alarm shall
be provided.
2.3.13 The installation shall be complete with all accessories required.
2.3.14 Provide a horizontal swing non-return valve in the discharge from each pump. The valve shall
be equipped with a lever weight for quick closure.

M-4
VOLUME-III
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
operation.
3.1.2
otherwise noted.
3.1.3
3.1.4
and grouting.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

Mechanical Section 22 14 29: Submersible Sump Pumps
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
Related Section:
1
1.3
1.5
Submersible sump pumps.

Wet-pit-volute sump pumps.
Sump-pump basins and basin covers.
Packaged drainage-pump units.
Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps" for effluent and sewage pumps.
SUBMITTALS
A
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in operation and
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
Submersible, Fixed-Position, Single-Seal Sump Pumps:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested sump-pump unit.

Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhungimpeller, centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A
cast iron design for clear wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft.
Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
Seal: Mechanical.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;

lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and
with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
a
Controls:
a
b
c
d
e
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

Switch Type: Pedestal-mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons.
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple
pumps if one cannot handle load.
Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 60 inches (1500 mm).
High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric
bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
Controls:
a
b
c
d
10
Motor Housing Fluid: Air or Oil.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 wall-mounted.

Switch Type: Mercury-float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple
pumps if one cannot handle load.
High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with
mercury-float switch matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with
transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
Control-Interface Features:
a
Remote Alarm Contacts: For remote alarm interface.
Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump controls

for interface to building automation system and capable of providing the
following:
1)
2)
On-off status of pump.

Alarm status.
Submersible, Fixed-Position, Double-Seal Sump Pumps:

1
Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled,

overhung-impeller, centrifugal sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2
and HI 1.3.
Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet, legs that elevate pump to
permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge for piping
connection.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M,
Class No. 25 A cast iron design for clear wastewater handling, and
keyed and secured to shaft.
Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, greaselubricated ball bearings.
Seals: Mechanical.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture

alarm.
Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in

overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor,
waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug
and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
a
Controls:
a
b
c
d
e
10
11
Motor Housing Fluid: Air or Oil.

with mounting rod and electric cables.
Switch Type: Pedestal-mounted float switch with float rods
and rod buttons.
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and
start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load.
Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in
basins of depth greater than 60 inches (1500 mm).
High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe
alarm, with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and
contacts for remote alarm bell.
Controls:
a
Switch Type: Mercury-float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6

enclosures with mounting rod and electric cables.
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and

start multiple pumps if one cannot handle load.
High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6

enclosure with mercury-float switch matching control and
electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for
remote alarm bell.
a
Remote Alarm Contacts: For remote alarm interface.
Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in

pump controls for interface to building automation system
and capable of providing the following:
1)
2)

Alarm status.
2.2
WET-PIT-VOLUTE SUMP PUMPS

M-4
VOLUME-III
Pump Type: Wet-pit-volute, single-stage, separately-coupled, overhung-impeller, centrifugal

sump pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
Pump Casing: Cast iron, with strainer inlet and threaded connection for NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller and flanged connection for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger discharge piping.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A cast iron
design for clear wastewater handling, and keyed and secured to shaft.
Sleeve Bearings: Bronze. Include oil-lubricated, intermediate sleeve bearings at 48-inch

(1200-mm) maximum intervals if basin depth is more than 48 inches (1200 mm), and greaselubricated, ball-type thrust bearings.
Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment.
Support Plate: Cast iron or coated steel and strong enough to support pumps, motors, and
controls. Refer to Part 2 "Sump-Pump Basins and Basin Covers" Article for requirements.
Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-yarn rings and bronze packing
gland.
Motor: Single-speed; grease-lubricated ball bearings and mounting on vertical, cast-iron

pedestal.
Controls:
1
2
3
4
5
Controls:
1
2
3
4

Switch Type: Pedestal-mounted float switch with float rods and rod buttons.
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if
one cannot handle load.
Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than
60 inches (1500 mm).
High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

Switch Type: Mercury-float type, in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures with mounting
rod and electric cables.
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps if
one cannot handle load.
High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with Mercury-float
switch matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for
remote alarm bell.
1
Remote Alar2 Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump

controls for interface to building automation system and capable of providing the
following:
a
b

Alarm status.

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.3
SUMP PUMP CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
As per design drawings.
2.4
SUMP-PUMP BASINS AND BASIN COVERS
Basins: Factory-fabricated, watertight, cylindrical, basin sump with top flange and sidewall
openings for pipe connections.
1
2
3
Basin Covers: Fabricate metal cover with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for
access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power
cables.
1
Material: Cast iron.

Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and accessories.
Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or attached
to sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.
Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins
installed in foot-traffic areas.
Capacities and Characteristics:

1 As per design drawings.
2 Cover Material: Cast iron.
3 Cover Diameter: not less than outside diameter of basin top flange.
4 Manhole Required in Cover: Yes.
5 Vent Size: as per design drawings.
2.5
PACKAGED DRAINAGE-PUMP UNITS
Packaged Pedestal Drainage-Pump Units:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, automatic-operation, freestanding, sumppump unit.

Pump Type: Wet-pit-volute, single-stage, separately-coupled, overhung-impeller
centrifugal pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
m Contacts: For remote alarm interface.
Pump Casing: Corrosion-resistant material, with strainer inlet, design that permits
flow into impeller, and vertical discharge for piping connection.
Impeller: Aluminum, brass, or plastic.
Motor: With built-in overload protection and mounted vertically on sump pump
column.
Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less than
72 inches (1830 mm), with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection
at pump.
Control: Float switch.
Packaged Submersible Drainage-Pump Units:

1
2
3
4
5
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, automatic-operation, basin-mounted,

sump-pump unit.
Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhungimpeller centrifugal pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
Casing: Metal.
Impeller: Brass.
Pump Seal: Mechanical.

M-6
VOLUME-III
6
7
8
9
C
Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection.

Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less than
72 inches (1830 mm), with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection
at pump.
Control: Motor-mounted float switch.
Basin: Plastic.
Capacity and Characteristics:

1
As per design drawings.
2.6
MOTORS
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1
2
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2
EXAMINATION
Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping
connections before sump pump installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
Pump Installation Standards: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm
Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.5
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,

M-7
VOLUME-III

1
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
and equipment.
Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE
Perform startup service.

1
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.7
ADJUSTING
Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
Adjust control set points.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION & SOFTENING

Mechanical Section 22 32 00: Domestic Water Filtration & Softening
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following types of water filtration equipment for water systems
in buildings:
1 Bag-type filters.
2 Freestanding cartridge filters.
3 Off-floor cartridge filters.
4 Carbon filters.
5 Circulating sand filters.
6 Multimedia sand filters.
7 UV Sterilizer
8 Water Softener
B Related Sections include the following:
1 Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for small cartridge-type
water filters for plumbing fixtures and for plumbing piping strainers.
2 Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for hydronic piping strainers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
D PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F ppm: Parts per million.
G PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

M-2
VOLUME-III
B Shop Drawings: Detail water filtration equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
1
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have ASME
label, signed by product manufacturer.
D Welding certificates.
E Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water filtration
equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division
22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include
the following:
1 Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
F Source quality-control test reports.
G Field quality-control test reports.
H Startup service test reports.
I Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in emergency,
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
water filtration equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
C Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.
D Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

M-3
VOLUME-III
E Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable
water.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to
requirements indicated:
1 Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of water service.
2 Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction
Manager's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1 Bag-Type Filter Bags: Bags for bag-type filters equal to 200 percent of
amount installed for each size and media indicated.
2 Cartridge-Filter Elements: Elements for cartridge filters equal to 200
percent of amount installed for each size and media indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0
PACKAGED WATER FILTERATION UNIT AND SOFTENING UNIT
2.1
Pre Chlorination
The raw water supplied by the Municipality has to be chlorinated by means of

Sodium hypochlorite solution. The Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing set shall comprise of dosing
tank (PVC), Electronic metering pump (PP).
DATA SHEET FOR THE CHLORINATION DOSING SYSTEM

Description
Type of Chemical
Data
Chlorination Details
Sodium Hypochlorite solution
Dosing tank details

Number
Type
Material of tank
Capacity
1
Vertical, Circular
Polyethylene
300 Ltrs
M-4
VOLUME-III
Number
Type
1
Electronic Metering
Material of pump
Capacity
2.2
PVC
0 20 Lph
AUTO MULTIMEDIA FILTRATION UNIT

Type of Treatment for Removal of Suspended impurities
2.2.1
Vessel:
The filter vessels shall be fabricated from high grade steel and internally lined with
epoxy paint. The External surface of the vessels shall be protected with a primer undercoat
and Epoxy paint.
The vessel shall be designed for 100 PSI working pressure and tested to 150 PSI. The
vessel shall be supplied internally coated with Zinc Epoxy and externally painted.
2.2.2
Valves :
Automatic Solenoid driven Pneumatic Diaphragm / Butterfly valve to control the

operating steps. The valves shall be made of Carbon Steel. The water treatment equipment
supplier as per the requirement shall arrange necessary compressed airline.
2.2.3
Frontal Piping
The frontal piping of the filter unit shall be u PVC surface protected with U.V
resistant paint.
2.2.4
Media
The Multi Media Sand Filter bed shall consist of a top layer of a uniformly graded
granular form of anthracite. The intermediate layer shall consist of three grades of Silica sand.
The under bed shall consist of a layer of gravel, which is a granular material of extra ordinary
density available in graded sizes for fine filtration.
Charge of carefully graded filtering Sand and Anthracite Media complete with
supporting gravel underbed.
2.2.5
Pressure Gauge
Inlet / Outlet gauge shall be fitted to give indication of pressure drop through filter.
2.2.6
Controls
The filters shall be provided with Specialized PLC Controllers with timer mechanism
to enable to program the backwash cycle of the filter at any time of the day. The PLC
Controller shall complete with Soft Key Board and LCD display and shall give signals to the
Solenoid driven Pneumatic Butterfly valves.
2.3
DUPLEX SOFTENER
2.3.1 The unit shall consist of softener vessels for continuous supply of the softened water.
The plant shall be capable of producing zero temporary hardness at the rate as scheduled.
M-5
VOLUME-III
2.3.2 The Duplex softener should consist of two tanks in CS Epoxy Internally and
Externally construction. Pressure rating for the tanks is 10 bars.
2.3.3 Control valve mounted on the vessel shall be constructed from brass for strength,
durability and corrosion resistance to ensure longer life. The controller shall be equipped with
volume based Electronic controller in which regeneration is initiated after specified volume of
water has passed.
2.3.4 Setting conditions for volume based regeneration shall be programmed depending on
raw water hardness.
2.3.5
Provision for Manual initiation of regeneration shall be provided.
2.3.6 The interconnecting pipe system shall be specially designed for the units and
hydraulically balanced to allow uniform load on each resin tank. These shall be dimensioned
to ensure minimum pressure loss in the pipe system.
2.3.7 The unit shall come with a brine tank of PVC / Fiberglass material of 300 litres
capacity.
2.4
ULTRA-VIOLET STERILIZER
2.4.1 The UV unit shall utilize a compact integrated design, incorporating both the UV
treatment chamber and electrical base, where all electrical components and instrumentation
are located. These compact one piece UV models shall be engineered for indoor installations
and controlled operating environments. The unit shall be suitable for the design flow
mentioned on drawings.
2.4.2
The unit shall have the following features:

- 316L stainless steel treatment chamber.
- Endplate, mounted 360 UV.
- Intensity sensor.
- 4-20mA Output signal.
- Temperature safety control.
- Lamp out alert circuit.
- Sanitary inlet and outlet fittings.
- UV dosage> 30,000 micro watt-sec/cm2.
.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A Hydrostatically test before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times
pressure rating.
B Prepare test reports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of filters.

M-6
VOLUME-III
B Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.
C Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where filters will be installed.
D Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A Anchor filters to concrete bases.
1 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around
full perimeter of base.
2 For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3 Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
5 Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
6 Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified
in Division 03.
3.3 CARBON-FILTER INSTALLATION
A Install carbon filters on concrete bases, level and plumb.
1 Prepare carbon-filter tank distribution system and underbed, if any, for
filter media and place specified media into tanks.
B Install seismic restraints for carbon-filter housings and anchor to building structure.
3.4 SAND-FILTER INSTALLATION
A Install sand-filter tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb.
1 Prepare sand-filter tank distribution system and underbed for filter media
and place specified sand and other media into tanks.
B Install seismic restraints for sand-filter tanks and accessories and anchor to building
structure.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

M-7
VOLUME-III
C Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal

water piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22
D Install shutoff valves on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water
filtration equipment filter and on inlet and outlet headers.
1 Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "GeneralDuty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
2 Plastic valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping."
3 Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed shutoff valves
at locations indicated.
E Install pressure gages on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water
filtration equipment filter. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
1 Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed pressure gages
2 Exception: Cartridge water filters.
F Install valved bypass water piping around each water filtration equipment filter.
Piping."
3 Water piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
4 Exception: Bag-type water filtration equipment.
5 Exception: Cartridge water filtration equipment.
G Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
H Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
I Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in
writing.
B Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

M-8
VOLUME-III
1 Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation.
3 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C Remove and replace water filtration equipment that does not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
3.7 STARTUP SERVICE
A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for carbonand sand- filter water filtration equipment.
1 Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B Sample filter filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four
samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain carbon- and sand- filter water filtration equipment. Refer to
Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

M-9
VOLUME-III
GREY WASTE WATER RECYCLING PLANT

Mechanical Section 22 32 30: Grey Waste Water Recycling Plant
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and section 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
The Scope of Work includes the following:
- Engineering & calculations.
- Manufacture & supply of equipment.
- Installation & Commissioning.
- Training of Engineers / Operators.
B Related Sections include the following:

1 Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for hydronic piping strainers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B Shop Drawings: Detail water filtration equipment assemblies and indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
1 Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have
ASME label, signed by product manufacturer.
D Welding certificates.
E Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water
filtration equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Include the following:
1 Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified."
b The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event."
M-2
VOLUME-III
2 Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3 Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
F Source quality-control test reports.
G Field quality-control test reports.
H Startup service test reports.
I Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in emergency,
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
water filtration equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
C Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.
D Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.1
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Grey water treatment system capacity up to 60 m3/day will contain the following :
two
Basket Strainer
One
Pre-chlorination dosing system.
Three
(1D/1S) Air Blowers with complete accessories for Equalization Tank.
One
Set of Aeration Grid comprising of air Diffusers, pipes etc.
two
(1D/1S) Filter Feed Pumps.
One
Coagulant dosing system.
Two
(1D/1S) Automatic Multimedia Filter.
Two
(1D/1S) Automatic Activated Carbon Filter.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Two
.
1.2
(1D/1S) Backwash pumps.
One
Odour control dosing system.
One
Lot, Interconnecting piping within our battery limits.
One
Control Panel.
One
Lot, Cabling.
Two
O&M Manuals in English.
One
Set of Drawings: Process Flow Diagram. & Preliminary plant layout
TERMINATION POINTS
Description
Size
Connection
Location
Suction of Grey Wastewater Feed

Pump
Outlet flange of Irrigation Tank
Outlet valve/ nozzle of Sand Filter
& Activated Carbon Filter
Inlet of NaOCl Dosing Tank
Grey Water System 60 m3/day

Raw Grey Waste Water
65
Treated Grey Waste Water

Backwash water
40
65
F
F
Sodium hypochlorite
Electric Supply
Voltage (V)
Phase (pH)
Frequency
Feed power supply to control panel
380
60hz
Note:
F: Flanged
2.0
System Components
2.1
Introduction
This system shall be for recycling the grey water from wash basins, showers and sinks only to be
reused for toilet flushing, make up water to cooling towers and landscape irrigation.
2.2
Process Description
The treatment process shall involve:
-Flow Equalization
-Filtration
-Organic removal
-Chlorination

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.2.1
Flow Equalisation
The tank receives raw grey wastewater generated from the showers, wash basins and sinks in
the building and collected in the Raw Grey Water Collection Tank Equalisation Tank. The raw grey
wastewater is collected to dampen the variation in hydraulic & organic load. The wastewater is kept in
agitated condition to avoid putrification and settling of suspended solids. Air is injected through
coarse bubble diffusers in the tank. Sodium hypochlorite solution is dosed in tank to reduce the
BOD/COD.
2.2.2
Automatic Multimedia Filter
The aerated grey wastewater is pumped into the Media Filter via the Grey Wastewater Feed
Pumps and after. Level switches actuate the pumps.
The water is dosed by a coagulant by dosing pump then it passes through a self cleaning filter then it
goes through graded sand media and that will increase the efficiency of removing the suspended
solids from the grey water.
As solids accumulate in the sand bed the pressure loss through the media rises & periodically reaches
a value above which the plant will not further as designed. At this time the filter needs to be
backwashed clear of accumulated solids. The media is backwashed by controlled flow of tertiary
wastewater delivered from the Treated Grey Waste Water Tank by using the back wash pumps. The
backwash water is sent to the drain.
Filtration will be automatically controlled for Operation & backwashing.
2.2.3
Automatic Activated Carbon Filter
The filtered grey water passes through a bed of Activated Carbon. The porous carbon media having
large surface area helps in absorption of dissolved organic matter on to the surface.
Provision is made for backwashing of filter media to limit headloss build up due to accumulation of
suspended solids. The backwash water is sent to the drain.
2.2.4
Post-Chlorination
The filtered water is then dosed with Sodium Hypochlorite (12% chlorine) for further removal of
organics & disinfections, moreover, part of sodium hypochlorite is dosed to the collection tank for
reduction of influent BOD and COD. Controlled dosage is by metering dosing pump. The sodium
hypochlorite solution is drawn from the dosing tank and that is controlled by chlorine analyser.
2.2.5 Treated Water Tank
The finally treated wastewater flows into the Treated Grey Wastewater Tank. The treated water is
pumped for toilet flushing, make up water to cooling towers and for landscape irrigation.
2.3
Design Data
The Plant is designed for grey wastewater treatment with an average flow of 60 m/day, and
based on the estimated analysis report of influent as follows:
2.3.1
Raw Influent Quality
Parameter
Unit

Concentration
M-5
VOLUME-III
M3/day
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
o
C
60
6 8.0
110
65
185
Ambient
Parameter
Unit
Concentration
BOD
TSS
COD
PH
Mg/l
Mg/l
Mg/L
<10
< 10
< 20
6-8
Flow
PH
TSS
BOD
COD
Temperature
2.3.2
3.0
3.1
3.2
Treated Effluent Quality
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
Chlorine Dosing System

Reagent
Sodium Hypochlorite
Quantity
One set
Type
Positive displacement, diaphragm type,

adjustable stroke length
Duty
4 l/h @ 7 bar
Liquid end material
PVC
Suction & delivery hoses
Polyethylene
Mode of adjustment
Automatic with circulating pump and

REDOX sensor
Chemical solution tank capacity
100 Litre
Air Blowers
The two air blowers are designed to operate on a (1 duty + 1 standby) basis, and provide air
for equalization tank
Quantity
Two (1 Duty + 1 Standby)
Type
Rotary- positive displacement

M-6
VOLUME-III
Filter
At inlet
Silencer
At exhaust
Motor arrangement
Vee belt coupled
Protection
IP 55 TEFC
Insulation
Class F
Valves
Isolation valve
Non-return valve
Pressure relief valve
Fittings
Steel support base

Belt tensioner
Flexible connections
Anti-vibration mounts
Finish
3.3
Manufacturers standard enamel
Air Diffusers
Quantity
as required
Duty
15 m3/hr each
Air pressure
0.37 m at 3.0 m total liquor depth
Type
Medium bubble rubber diaphragm valve
Fluid depth
3.0 m
Material of construction
Plastic body
diaphragm
NPT
Air connection
3.4
with
neoprene
rubber
Support
Down-comer manifold, upto six diffusers per

down-comer
Valves
Globe /Gate, one per down-comer
Submerged Air drop pipes
PVC
Filter feed Pumps

Quantity
Two (1 duty +1 standby)
Fluid
Grey product wastewater
Fluid Density
1 Kg/dm3

M-7
VOLUME-III
3.5
3.6
Fluid Viscosity
1oCp
Duty
2.5 m3/hr
Total head
20 meters( to be verified by the contractor)
Surface Finish
As per manufactures standard
Coagulant Dosing System

Reagent
Coagulant
Quantity
one set
Type
Positive displacement,
Duty
4 l/h @ 7 bar
Liquid end material
PVC
Polyethylene
Mode of adjustment
Manual
100 Litre
diaphragm
Automatic Multimedia Filter

Quantity
Type
Vertical , circular
Application
Reduction of suspended solids
Diameter
750 mm
Height of Straight
1500 mm
Operating pressure
3.0 bar
Design Pressure
5 bar
Material
FRP
Service flow
2.5 m3/hr
Media type
Anthracite/ Sand/ Gravel
Media depth
150 /600/400 mm

M-8
type,
VOLUME-III
3.7
3.8
Operation
Automatic backwashing is initiated by timer.
Accessories
Complete with frontal piping, header, lateral,

media, automatic inlet, outlet, backwash inlet &
outlet valves- electrically operated , drain valve,
pressure gauge etc.
Automatic Activated Carbon Filter

Quantity
Type
Vertical , circular
Application
Reduction of dissolved organics & odor
Diameter
750 mm
Height of Straight
1500 mm
Operating pressure
3.0 bar
Design Pressure
3.5 bar
Material
FRP
Service flow
2.5 m3/hr
Media type
Activated Carbon
Media depth
750/400 mm
Operation
Automatic backwashing is initiated by timer.
Accessories
Complete with frontal piping, header, lateral,

media, automatic inlet, outlet, backwash inlet
& outlet valves- electrically operated , drain
valve, bypass valve, pressure gauge etc.
Backwash Pumps
Quantity
Fluid
Grey product wastewater
Fluid Density
1 Kg/dm3
Fluid Viscosity
1oCp
Duty
10 m3/hr
Total head
15 meters
Surface Finish
As per manufactures standard

M-9
VOLUME-III
3.9
3.10
Odour control Dosing System

Reagent
Chemical
Quantity
one set
Type
Positive displacement,
Duty
4 l/h @ 7 bar
Liquid end material
PVC
Polyethylene
100 Litre
diaphragm
type,
Control Panel
Quantity
One
Type
Wall mounted control panel completely

assembled, wired & tested at the factory. Its
Form 2 Control Panel made of sheet steel
suitable for outdoor installation. The panel
shall be for indoor use in a humid, 50 Deg. C
ambient temperature to IP 54 standard.
Mountings
The panel shall be complete with all push

buttons, fuses, selector switches, contactors,
relays, indicating lights, timers, etc. to form a
local central control station.
Cabling
Wiring shall be brought out to screw type

terminal block, labelled and identified in
accordance with wiring diagram
Nameplates
All push buttons and selector switches shall be

appropriately tagged.
Finish
All steel work shall be bonderised or given

similar treatment before priming and painting
with epoxy paint to a smooth finish.
Lights
Alarms, indicator lights and other auxiliaries

shall be suitable for 220V,
Main power supply
415 Volt,3 Phase,
3.11Pressure Gauge (Waste Water)

M - 10
VOLUME-III
Type
Diaphragm type with chemical seal
Location
Grey wastewater feed pumps
Measuring system
Stainless Steel
Case
Black phenolic
Bezel
Phenolic block
Accuracy
+/- 1.0% of FSD
Case Filling Fluid
Glycerine
Protection
IP 65
Nominal Size
Measuring Range
0/10 bar
Process connection
1/2 NPT Male
Connector Position
Lower mount
Window
Acrylic
Pointer
Adjustable Black aluminium pointer
3.12 Level Controller

Qty.
Three
Type
Float type Level Switch
Location
Switch Enclosure
Raw grey waste & treated water collection

tanks
Polypropylene
Dimensions
120 mm x 90 mm (approx)
Switch
Micro Switch, SPDT
Contact rating
10 Amp @ 250 V
No. Of Floats
Three
3.13 Pipe work

1. Complete piping for raw and treated water shall be in u PVC Class 10 (ASTM 1785-76).
2. Air pipe material outside tanks shall be Galvanized (BS1387, Medium Duty).
3. Submerged air pipe inside tanks in U-PVC
PART 3 EXECUTION
M - 11
VOLUME-III
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of filters.
B Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
C Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where filters will be installed.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A Anchor filters to concrete bases.
1 Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around
full perimeter of base.
2 For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3 Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
5 Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22
6 Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified
in Division 03.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal
water piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22
D Install shutoff valves on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water
filtration equipment filter and on inlet and outlet headers.
Piping."
3 Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed shutoff valves
M - 12
VOLUME-III
E Install pressure gages on feed water-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water
filtration equipment filter. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
1 Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed pressure gages
2 Exception: Cartridge water filters.
F Install valve bypass water piping around each water filtration equipment filter.
Piping."
3 Water piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
4 Exception: Bag-type water filtration equipment.
5 Exception: Cartridge water filtration equipment.
G Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
H Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
I Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in
writing.
B Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1 Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation.
3 Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C Remove and replace water filtration equipment that does not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

M - 13
VOLUME-III
A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for carbonand sand- filter water filtration equipment.
1 Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B Sample filter filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four
samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain carbon- and sand- filter water filtration equipment. Refer to
Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

M - 14
VOLUME-III
SOLAR WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES
Mechanical Section 22 33 31: Solar Water Heaters And Accessories AH/1080
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
The term "solar" for the purposes of this specification, shall cover all systems that intercept solar
radiation and convert it to thermal energy. The thermal energy is collected by a heat transfer fluid
and stored in thermal energy storage tank for use.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Design Requirements
Design, furnish and install new solar water heating (SHW) systems for the heating of domestic
water. The solar water heating system offsets the use of natural gas, propane or electricity by
heating water before the conventional auxiliary heating system is used (if needed). System types
incorporating overheat protection is required. Supplied equipment must be rated and warranted to
withstand and operate under highest-record-high temperature for the location.
Solar system shall be a pressurized closed loop system; it shall use expansion to absorb pressure
increase in the system in case of overheating and stagnation.
Solar system installation based on drain back as a procedure to protect system against overheating
shall be considered, specialist shall insure all changes incorporated using drain back are
addressed, method statement shall be submitted for solar thermal system amendment such as but
not limited to:
1- Solar Circulation Pump Size: the pump has to be calculated by adding the circulation losses
(friction) and the static head, circulation pump power shall be less than 50W.
2- Expected noise level, and power consumption results shall be considered, and subject to the
consultant approval
3- Collector Row Tilt: all the collector rows must be tilted to one side to insure that heat transfer
fluid drains back.
4- Solar Piping Tilt: all the piping runs for the solar circuit must be tilted towards the tank to
insure that the heat transfer fluid drains back.
5- Due to the drainback system dependence on gravity, it shall only be accepted when the tanks
are on a lower altitude than the solar collectors.
6- Pipe sizing sheet must be submitted for consultant review.
System must use energy storage tanks with internal corrugated stainless steel domestic hot water
heat exchangers.
Include with each system, components that consist of a solar collector array, array support
structure, energy storage tank, interconnecting piping and fittings, thermostatic mixing valve,
flush-and-fill valves, pressure relief valves, and as required by the system type, any necessary
pumps, advanced controls or heat exchangers, as well as all other accessories and equipment
required for the proper operation of the solar system.
Installer must work with site supervisors, roofers, plumbers, and other specialists, to determine
the best installation sequence and schedule what materials should be provided, in order to
optimize working sequence and to avoid unnecessary work, roof penetrations, etc; Installer must
confirm solar exposure before mounting any equipment on the roof, to avoid shadows from vents,
trees and/or buildings; Installer must protect pipe circuit from other trades that may also need
access to the same spaces or that may need to create circuits of their own; Installer must label and
fix pipe circuits, to insure that they are not pushed up and out of the way, creating water traps.
The installation of the hot water solar system must be done in accordance to the solar specialist
recommendation & manufacturer specifications.
1.2.2 Performance Requirements
Solar water heating systems must be safe, reliable, require no operator intervention for normal
operation, be visually unobtrusive, and be designed and installed in accordance with all applicable
codes such as ISO 9806, BS EN 12975:2006 & AS/NZS 2712:2007. Design and size the system
M-2
VOLUME-III
to insure an average annual energy supply of at least 70% solar fraction and a minimum of 65%
average annual system efficiency.
Daily demand will be calculated using ASHRAE, BS, ADDC, DEWA or The Uniform Plumbing
Code of United Arab Emirates. The appropriate daily hot water demand profile must be used in
the design of the solar system and calculations of the peak hour demand. The volume of storage
tank shall be at least 150% of the daily demand, based on building profile, standard and solar
specialist recommendations. In case storage volume is less that 100% of daily demand, a heat
dissipating device must be installed on the solar circuit to insure collector daily temperature will
not exceed 90oC.
The solar specialist shall provide monthly simulations by 3rd party software & detailed manual
calculations proving the validity of the design and peak hour demand, calculations shall include
all system parameters such as but not limited to inlet temperature in winter and summer, water
draw-off temperature, auxiliary back up calculation and etc. The solar specialist shall provide the
appropriate sizes of the expansion vessels and cooling tanks along with supporting documentation
showing size calculations and insuring all solar fluid expansions and pressure increased are
catered for.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Standard or Pre-approved Products
Solar specialist shall confirm all proposed products have been up and running in similar weather
climate conditions for at least 5 years. Proposed products shall be sourced from manufacturers
regularly engaged in the heating & solar thermal industry for at least 30 years.
2.1.2 Nameplates
All solar collectors should have a visible and durable label displaying all information required
according to BS EN 12975, and including at least the following.
1- Name of manufacturer
2- Collector type
3- Serial number
4- Year of production
5- Gross area of collector
6- Maximum operation pressure
7- Stagnation temperature at 1000 w/m2 and 30oC ambient
8- Volume of heat transfer fluid
9- Weight of empty solar collector
10- Location of manufacturing
11- Diminutions of the collector
All energy storage tanks should carry a label with the following information:
1- Manufacturers name
2- Production year
3- Nominal overall volume capacity
4- Max operation temperature
5- Type of vessel
6- Heat exchanger info
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM
Provide a piping system complete with pipes, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion loops,
pipe hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories with this specification
and the drawings. Pipes shall be designed to observe limits on flow velocity, temperature,
M-3
VOLUME-III
pressure drop, and gauge pressure associated with the pipe type and characteristics. Provide,
install and test the piping.
The solar system will include 4 types of piping,
1- The solar circuit (from the collector banks to storage tanks) :
Solar circuit piping shall be selected & sized to accommodate solar fluid with velocity
between 0.4 1 m/s. All solar circuit piping shall be pre-insulated hard copper (Cu-DHP
CW024A acc. To BS EN 12499) with a max temperature of 150oC and max pressure of 16
bar. The solar pipe shall have polyurethane foam insulation with a thermal conductivity
0.0285 W/m K at +50C in compliance to BS EN 253 and shall be protected with an outer
casing made from UV-resistant high density polyethylene 80 (in accordance with ISO
12162). The pipe insulation cross section surface area should be at least 76% of the total pipe
cross section surface area.
2- The thermostat mixing valve connection (from the storage tanks to the three way mixing
valve, this insures that the DHW temperature never goes over the required temperature, thus
providing protection from scolding accidents.)
All piping from the storage tank or heat exchanger to the three way mixing valve shall be
made of stainless steel 316.
3- The DHW circuit (from the thermostat mixing valve to the building hot water circuit)
DHW circuit piping shall be multilayer PEX/Aluminum/PEX in compliance with EN 288-8
and with ISO TR 10358 at a continuous maximum working temperature of 95 C and a
maximum pressure of 10 Bar.
4- All cold water piping supplying the SWH system up to 3m from the tank shall be stainless
steel 316 to avoid bulging and rupture due to proximity to the higher temperatures of the
solar system.
2.2.1 Calibrating Balancing Valves (for multiple collector banks)
If systems are proposed with multiple collector banks, provide calibrated balancing valves
suitable for 10 Bar and 130oC service. The balancing valve shall have a flow meter and specially
made for solar thermal system applications with direct reading of flow rate on the balancing
valve. The balancing valve shall have brass valve body and shall be Chrome plated. A ball valve
type for flow rate adjustment will be used. The balancing valve shall use a graduated scale flow
meter with magnetic movement flow rate indicator.
Provide calibrated balancing valve and ball valve at the outlet of each collector bank to insure
flow balance in the system. The ball valves are required to enable the array to be disconnected for
maintenance or repair. This requirement for balancing valves is not applicable to systems of only
one collector bank, where balance of flow is not an issue.
2.2.2 Safety Relief Valve

A safety relief valve shall be installed at every collector row; each safety relief valve shall be
made from a brass body that has been chrome plated. The safety relief valve shall be certified by
well know institutes such as TUV or WRAS.
Temperature range: -30oC to 160oC
Power discharge ratting: for 50 kW, for - 100kW
2.2.3 Pressure Gauges
Provide pressure gauges with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff
valve.
2.2.4 Thermometers
Supply thermometers with wells and separable bronze sockets.
2.2.5 Pipe Hangers and Supports
Support and hang piping so that the weight of the piping is not supported by drywall, siding, or
other building members not designed to bear load. Support piping so that thermal expansion and
contraction of pipe lengths is accommodated.
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.2.6 Valves
Provide valves compatible with the piping. Ball valves shall be used for shutoff, with full port,
bronze body, bronze ball and Teflon seat. Bronze hose-end gate valves shall be used for draining
low points of piping.
2.3 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM
2.3.1 Solar Collector Construction:
Flat-Plate Solar collector shall have at least 2.1 m2 net absorber area as per the SRCC (SOLAR
RATING AND CERTIFICATEION CORPORATION), the weight of each collector should not
exceed 50 Kg and the absorber water content shall not be more than 1.5l for portrait type.
Collector shall be labeled by the Keymark and CEN certification mark; the collector must have
min. 92% light transmission, min. 95% 2 absorption and max. 5%2 emission.
The collectors must be hermetically sealed with inert gas (preferably argon) filling between glass
and absorber to prevent condensation and dirt accumulation inside the collector, collectors
optical efficiency shall not be less than 80% in accordance with the solar key mark and BS EN
12975-2 test and certificate. The collector must be certified by the SRCC. The collector must
have hydraulic connections of 18 mm; each collector must have stainless steel compensators in
the hydraulic connections in order to accommodate any expansion problems. Collectors shall be
covered with 3.2 mm thick single-pane safety tempered glass.
Absorber:
The Absorber shall be a powerful full-area absorber with double meander for hydraulic flow, the
effective copper surface absorber is provided with a highly selective vacuum coating, the coating
must be titanium oxide (TINOX) and applied on the copper with PVD (Physical Vapor
Deposition) sputter technology to prevent damages in the future, absorber coating of the collector
must be permanently protected against dust, moisture and airborne pollutants.
Absorber piping:
The absorber shall have a double meander type piping to increase the balance of flow in each
collector and keep the flow in turbulent state thus increasing the efficiency of the collector. a
double meander will insure a lower pressure drop than a single meander design and give the
collector excellent emptying behavior in case of stagnation. The double meander shall be
ultrasonically welded to the absorber to ensure maximum heat transfer. To provide higher thermal
insulation and efficiency, the backside of the absorber must be insulated.
Collector Frame:
The casing of the solar collector shall consist of a lightweight, strong fiber glass frame profile;
the back panel shall be made from 0.6 mm aluminum zinc-coated monoblock coated sheet steel,
or highly stressable polycarbonate case construction, tight all around due to deep-drawn
manufacturing process of one piece, permanently corrosion resistant.
Glass:
The glass must have extremely good load-bearing capability, low-ferrous, slightly structured cast
and highly transparent.
2.3.2 Collector Warranty
Provide a minimum 5-year extended warranty against any manufacturing defect including
replacement & repair of defected materials & equipment.
2.3.3 Solar Collector Performance
Solar collector efficiency graph must be submitted for the BS EN 12975-2 solar keymark
standard of 1000w/m, the graph shall be of the following equation:
(G (tm-ta)) = o a1a
G
tin
- a2a
tm =
= Global irradiance on the collector area (w/m2)
= Collector inlet temperature (oC)
M-5
VOLUME-III
te
= Collector outlet temperature (oC)
ta
= Ambient temperature (oC)
o
= Collector solar optical efficiency
a1a, a2a = Effective heat transfer coefficient
(tm ta) = Shall be taken as a variable, the graph shall be of actual efficiency Vs (tm ta)
(tm ta) = 30 shall be shown on graph.
2.4 SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY

2.4.1 Net Absorber Area and Array Layout
Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same direction. Space collectors
arranged in multiple rows so that no shading from other collectors is evident between 10:00am
hours and 2:00pm hours solar time on December 21. Collectors should be south-facing and a tilt
of 30 to 40 degrees to insure maximum solar harvest in winter. Solar specialist must indicate
minimum spacing between rows.
2.4.2 ARRAY PIPING
Connect interconnecting array piping between solar collectors, in a reverse-return configuration
with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path. Indicate flow rate through the
collector array. Provide each collector bank isolated by valves, with a pressure relief valve and
with the capability of being drained. Locate manually operated air vents at system high points.
Supply calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each collector bank as indicated.
2.4.3 SUPPORTS FOR SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY
Provide support structure for the collector array of aluminum or stainless steel. Furnish a support
structure which secures the collector array at the proper tilt angle with respect to horizontal and
orientation with respect to true south. Consideration should be made to mounting collectors
parallel to the pitched roofs. The collector tilt angle may vary by +/- 25 degrees, and the azimuth
angle may vary by +/-45% from the optimal tilt. Provide a support structure that will withstand
the static weight of filled collectors and piping, wind, seismic, and other anticipated loads without
damage. Provide a support structure which allows access to all equipment for maintenance,
repair, and replacement. Neoprene or EPDM washers shall separate all dissimilar metals.
2.5 ENERGY TANK
The hot water storage tanks shall be a vertical type energy tank of Carbon Steel lined internally
with Glass / Copper sheets consistent of an inner tank made of temperature-steady and a thermal
insulation that is in turn protected to the outside by a GRP jacket and withstanding max
temperature of 950C. The vertical energy tanks will guaranty excellent system stratification thus
improving system efficiency and speed up the system response to solar energy.
The energy tank shall be provided with internal corrugated tube heat exchangers made from highgrade corrugated stainless steel (V4A) 316S11 according to BS standard, EN 10088-2, 316L to
ASTM/AISI, or prepared for connection with external heat exchangers
The standard heat exchangers for the energy tank are:
Solar heat exchanger for heat storage.
Heater and/or reheating heat exchanger to heat storage (heat sources: Oil and/or gas heating,
solid fuel heating etc.) and heat emission for heating purposes
Water heat exchanger for the heating up of hot water and Drinking water
The energy tank base shall have100 mm thick, pressure resistant PU plate. The thermal insulation
of the wall shall consist of at least 100 mm, roof 200 mm thickly inorganic damming wool. The
insulation has a outward aluminum covered foil and GRP coat and/or GRP Roof protector.
The energy tank thermal conductivity of used materials shall be according to below table:
Material
Usage
Thermal conductivity
M-6
VOLUME-III
Mineral wool
Styrodur
High-grade steel
Glass fibre reinforced
plastics
Cover- and jacket insulation

Bottom insulation
Heat exchangers
in [W/(m*K)]
0,040
0,034
15,000
Tank material
0,197
2.6 AUXILIARY HEATING SYSTEM

Storage capacity and power demand must be taken into consideration to calculate an auxiliary
backup system that is able to handle peak domestic hot water demand. Solar specialist must
submit peak demand calculation showing the required auxiliary power needed for the solar
heating system in accordance with the storage capacity.
2.6.1 ELECTRICAL BACK UP HEATER:
The electrical back up heater shall be carbon steel (C22.8) flange type in accordance with DIN
2527.the tubular heating element shall be made of stainless steel 1.457. The electrical back up
heater terminal box shall be made of varnished steel; Varnish shall be red RAL 3000. Each
electrical heater shall have an in-built thermostat safety limiter that is adjustable up to 150oC. In
case the electric heater malfunctions, a back electric heater will also be included in each energy
tank.
2.7 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM
2.7.1 Pumps
Provide electrically-driven, modulating centrifugal type circulating pumps. Support pumps on a
concrete foundation or mounting intended for the purpose, or by the piping on which installed if
appropriate to the size. Construct the pump shaft of corrosion resistant alloy steel with a
mechanical seal. Provide stainless steel impellers and casings of bronze. Control motors with
switches that can be activated by either the intelligent temperature controller or by manual
override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Pumps shall be installed with isolation valves so the pump can
be serviced without draining the system. Electrical input power of the primary pump in the solar
system should be less than 50W or 2% of peak thermal power of collector, whichever is the
higher. Pumps must be present in the solar circuit as a set of two, one on duty and one as standby
in case the first one fails.
Pump volume flow must be calculated on the bases of a low flow rate of 12 l/h to 24 l/h for each
collector m2 to insure high efficiency.
2.7.2 Heat Transfer Fluid
Heat transfer fluid shall be compatible with all materials in the system. The nature and amount of
heat transfer fluid will depend on the type of system proposed. Any corrosion inhibitors added to
the heat transfer fluid must be non-toxic and intended for use in potable water systems. The
transfer fluid in the collector primary loop should be chosen so as not to deposit limescale,
sludge, ice or other solids that could either restrict circulation or impair the tare of heat transfer
within the absorber.
2.8 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM
2.8.1 Differential Control Equipment
The differential controller shall be a digital controller specifically for solar thermal systems. The
differential controller shall be complete with wall mounting basis for plug-in electrical connection
& have 3 probes sensors. The differential controller shall have a set tank temperature, and will run
the solar circulation pump when the tank temperature is at least 5 degrees less than the collector
temperature. In case of low solar harvest the solar controller must operate the electric heater back
up to insure a constant demand supply.
2.8.2 Intelligent Thermostatic Mixing Valve:
M-7
VOLUME-III
All systems installed under this procurement action must have a mixing valve to limit the
temperature of the hot water supplied to the plumbing fixtures. The mixing valve is to be located
downstream of the solar water heater and is to be set to a temperature suitable for the application.
To insure hygienic safety and proper thermal disinfection of the hot water distribution pipe
system, the Thermostatic Mixing Valve must be electronically controlled and programmable for
thermal disinfection.
The Intelligent Thermostatic Mixing Valve shall be programmed to run 60oC water in the hot
water distribution pipe system for least 2 min in periods of low consumption (nighttime) to insure
the thermal disinfection of bacteria. All parameters shall be updated every day and logged,
recording the temperatures by time.
The Intelligent Thermostatic Mixing Valve shall be composed of three-way valve with stainless
steel ball, actuator, regulator, stainless steel flow temperature probe and stainless steel return
temperature probe.
A interface for local or remote transmission and management of the Intelligent Thermostatic
Mixing Valve should be optional incase of BMS connection.
Adjustment temperature range: 20oC to 85oC
Disinfection temperature range: 40oC to 85oC
Max working pressure: 10 Bar
Max inlet temperature: 100oC
2.9 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electric motor-driven equipment complete with motor, motor starters, and controls.
Provide electrical equipment and wiring in accordance with NFPA 70. Furnish motor starters
complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor
control specified. Provide each motor of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
2.10 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Furnish equipment and component items, with the factory applied manufacturer's standard finish.
END OF SECTION
M-8
VOLUME-III
GAS FIRED HOT WATER BOILER SYSTEM &
HOT WATER STORAGE CALORIFIERS

Mechanical Section 22 34 36: Gas Fired Hot Water Boiler System & HW Calorifiers
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SECTION INCLUDES
Gas Fired Hot water boilers
Boiler Chimney
Chemical Feed System
Hot water storage calorifier
Hot water circulating pumps
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.
B.
Product Data: Size, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, accessories and special features and
operating characteristics of all equipments.
C.
Shop Drawing: Detailed equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field connection.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring diagram for each item of equipment with electric power
supply.
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for solar heater, control and
accessories, including trouble shooting maintenance guide. Include this data and product
data in maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.
1.04
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement and framework
requirements are to be coordinated with respective civil work.
1.05
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Product shall be delivered to site stored and protected under provisions of General Conditions
of Contract.
B.
Factory packaged items shall be stored in shipping containers or in safe covered storage until
time of installation.
PART 2 PRODUCT
A
GAS FIRED HOT WATER BOILER SYSTEM
1.0
Hot water Boiler
1.1
Boiler characteristics (Hot water)

The Hot Water Boiler capacity shall be as shown on drawing. The maximum water

M-2
VOLUME-III
temperature will be 95C and the maximum system temperature drop will be 20C.
General Boiler Design
1.2
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, assembled, and pressure tested, fire-tube, high mass

condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including
insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; water supply, dual returns, and condensate drain connections.
B. Heat Exchanger: Type 316ti, stainless steel first, second and third passes in contact with flue
gases. Only boilers employing nonferrous materials on all flue gas passes will be considered.
C. Minimum AHRI Thermal Efficiency: 94 percent.
D. The boiler shall be completely preassembled and fire tested at the factory. The unit shall be
ready for immediate mounting on floor or simple foundation and ready for attachment of
water, steal, fuel, electrical, vent and blow down connections.
1.3
Casing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.

Finish: Electrostatic powder-coated protective finish.
Insulation: Minimum 80mm thick, glass fiber insulation surrounding the heat
exchanger.
Combustion Chamber and Other Flue Passage Access: Full-sized front access door,
reversible hinged left or right.
Access: For cleaning fire tubes on combustion side from front of boiler.
Draft Hood: Flue canopy and rear flue connection constructed of stainless steel.
Hot Water Boiler Trim

A.
Low Water Cutoff

A low water cutoff control (manual reset) shall be mounted on the top centerline of
the boiler wired into the burner control circuit to prevent burner operation if boiler
water falls below a safe level.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Gauges

Pressure and temperature gauges shall be mounted on the boiler with temperature
sensing element located adjacent to the hot water outlet.
C.
Relief Valves
Water relief valves of a type and size to comply with EN code requirements shall be
shipped loose.
D.
Temperature controls
Temperature controls to regulate burner operation shall be mounted on the unit with
temperature sensing elements located adjacent to the hot water outlet. Controls shall
be high limit (manual rest), operating limit (auto reset), and firing rate control (30
800 hp).
1.4
Burner and Controls

M-3
VOLUME-III
A. Burner: natural gas, forced draft.

B. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and post-purge the combustion chamber.
C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
D. Gas Train: Two gas valves with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.
E. Ignition: Pilot ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame
supervision.
1.4.1
Fuel specification and piping

1.
Fuel Series 700 Gas Fired

1.
Burner Type The burner shall be integral with the front head of the boiler
and of high radiant multi-port type for gas. The burner shall be approved for
operation on natural gas fuel.
2.
Gas Pilot The gas pilot shall be a premix type with automatic electric
ignition. An electronic detector shall monitor the pilot so that the primary
gas valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established. The pilot train
shall include two manual shut-off valves, solenoid valve, pressure regulator
and pressure gauge.
3.
Gas Burner Piping Gas burner piping on all units shall include primary gas
shutoff valve, motor operated with proof of closure switch and plugged
leakage test connection. The main gas valve(s) shall be wired to close
automatically in the event of power failure, flame failure, low water or any
safety shutdown condition. A lubricating plug cock or butterfly shutoff valve
shall be provided as a means for a tightness check of the primary shut off
valve. An additional plug cock on butterfly valve shall be furnished at
entrance to gas train. Select one of the following:
-
60 100 hp high and low gas pressure switches shall be provided.
125 250 hp high and low gas pressure switches shall be provided.
A second motorized safety shutoff valve, plus an additional plugged leakage
test connection shall be provided.
1.5
Boiler Flame Safeguard Controller and Control Panel

The controller and control panel shall comprise of the following:
1.
Flame safeguard
2.
Boilers with control Each boiler shall be factory equipped with flame safeguard
controller providing technology and functions.
Controller shall be computerized solid state having sequence and flame-on lights and
digital first out fault code indications of flame safeguard trip functions. It shall
include dynamic self-check logic. The controller shall have a fixed operating
sequence incapable of being manually altered. The sequence shall include start, prepurge, pilot and main fuel ignition run and post-purge cycles.
The controller shall have a run / test switch. It shall allow interruptions to sequence

M-4
VOLUME-III
just after prepurge, during pilot ignition trial and run cycles for adjustments to firing
rate motor, damper linkages and pilot flame for minimum turndown tests.
3.
Control panel: The control panel shall be mounted on the front door of the boiler in a
location convenient to the operator.
The panel shall contain the boiler flame safeguard controller, blower motor starter,
indicating lights and selector switches.
The panel shall have a removable sub-base for mounting the flame safeguard
controller, blower motor starter, and terminal blocks. For combination gas-Gas and
heavy Gas fired boilers the panel will contain the fuel selector and / or Gas heater
selector switch.
5.
Control switches
-
Burner ON-OFF.
Manual-Automatic.
Manual Firing Rate Control.
6.
Gas, heat and moisture resistant wire shall be used and identified with circuit numbers
corresponding to the electrical wiring diagram.
7.
All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in conformance with Underwriters

Laboratories requirements.
8.
Boiler to be supplied with a control circuit transformer and fuse protection for the
control circuit.
9.
Flame Safeguard
Each boiler shall be factory equipped with a Boiler Management Control System
providing technology and functions.
The system shall consist of a computer based boiler controller and solid state sensors
totally integrated to provide automatic burner sequencing, flame supervision, and
indications of system status, faults, and self-diagnostics.
The boiler controller shall consist of chassis, program module, keyboard display, and flame
signal amplifier. It shall be the non-recycle type and have a fixed operating sequence
incapable of being manually altered. The sequence shall include standby, pre-purge,
pilot, main fuel ignition, and run, and post-purge periods.
The system shall incorporate full modulating control of fuel and combustion air as well
as firing rate control based on system demand.
The boiler controller shall have a non-volatile memory that retains history files and
sequence status after interruptions.
Separate status indicators will show:
Ready: Operational.

M-5
VOLUME-III
Demand: call for heat.
Main Valve: fuel valve open.
Low Water: low water condition.
Alarm: safety shutdowns.
The boiler controller shall incorporate a five function run/test switch.
The system shall be characterized for each individual model boiler. The system shall also
incorporate a tailored pre-purge cycle that minimizes pre-purge energy losses, while
maintaining the maximum required air changes. It shall permit the user to select a specific
rate control program for precise load tracking that reduces on-off cycling due to load
swings. The system shall also provide an integrated thermal stress protection program to
prolong boiler life. An assured low fire cutoff feature shall also be provided.
The system shall monitor inputs from solid state sensor for Gas pressure, Gas pressure,
and temperature. A single solid state sensor shall be used for both on-off and
proportioning control of the burner. The high/low limits and operating set points of all
sensors will be programmable from the keyboard display. The system shall be capable of
detecting a jumpered or defective sensor. A dynamic check of the Gas pressure sensor
shall be made prior to the main flame establishing period to ensure it is fully operational.
An optional 2 way communications module with built-in modem to allow for remote
control of non-safety settings and monitoring of up to 6 boilers shall also be available.
Up to 3 preprogrammed telephone numbers shall be called in the event of a fault
condition. Options such as Lead/Lag, Boiler Efficiency, and Heating Boiler packages can
be interfaced to this module without any change to the existing system structure. The
communications module shall be able to interface with an IBMTM PC or compatible
system.
10.
Control Panel: The control panel shall be mounted on the front door of the boiler in a
location convenient to the operator. The hinged metal cabinet will have NEMA 1A rating
that includes a neoprene dust seal and a Yale cabinet key type lock.
The panel shall contain the boiler flame safeguard controller, indicating lights and
selector switches.
Panel shall have a removable sub-base for mounting the flame safeguard controller, and
terminal blocks. For combination gas-Gas and heavy Gas fired boilers the panel will
contain the fuel selector and/or Gas heater selector switch.
11.
Gas, heat, and moisture resistant wire shall be used and identified with circuit numbers
corresponding to the electrical wiring diagram.
12.
All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in conformance with Underwriters

Laboratories requirements.
13.
Boiler to be supplied with a control circuit transformer and fuse protection for the
control circuit.
1.7 Warranty

M-6
VOLUME-III
1.
All equipment is to be guaranteed against defects in materials and/or workmanship for

a period of 12 months from date of start-up or 18 months from date of shipment,
whichever comes first.
17.1 Shop Tests

1.
The packaged boiler must receive factory tests to check the construction, controls, and
operation of the unit. All tests shall be witnessed by the Client and Consultant Engineers.
1.
Start-up Service
1.
After boiler installation is completed, the manufacturer shall provide the services
of a field representative for starting the unit and training the operator at no
additional costs.
a.
1.10
A factory approved and authorized start-up report shall be submitted to

the customer/user at the time of start-up.
DRAWINGS
Two copies of the Boiler General Arrangement Drawings and Electrical Wiring Diagrams
shall be provided.
1.11
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
One set of our Standard Comprehensive Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be
provided.
2.0
BOILER STACK AND BREECHING COMPONENTS

Boiler stack and breeching components, supports and terminations shall be factory
prefabricated.
All stack and breeching components shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories
(UL and ULC), and / or equivalent European standards for use with building heating
equipment burning Gas, liquid, or solid fuels, as described in NFPA 211, Chapter 2.
All stacks and breechings will have inner walls of 20-gauge Type 304 stainless steel for Gas
and No. 2 Gas, or 20-gauge Type 316 stainless steel for coal, solid fuels, and No. 4 thru No. 6
Gas.
Outer walls shall be 24-gauge aluminum-coated steel or stainless steel for sizes up to 24" ID
and 20-gauge for sizes of 26" to 48" ID.
The stack and breeching shall be engineered, approved, and manufactured for the boiler
equipment manufacturer.
The stack and breeching manufacturer must supply complete CAD system design drawings
which include a complete component bill of materials.
Stack and breeching systems must be designed to adjust to thermal expansion caused by the
heating and cooling of normal boiler operation.
All stack and breeching components must be warranted for a minimum of 15 years when
installed according to the manufacturer's installation instructions.

M-7
VOLUME-III
The stack and breeching shall comply with national safety standards and all building codes
where applicable.
The stack section joints shall be field sealed by use of containment bands with captive
fasteners and high temperature joint sealant.
All stack and breeching components shall be shipped on pallets and shrink-wrapped to
simplify on-site handling and protect materials until installation.
The system is to maintain air-tight integrity at pressures up to 72" WC at room temperature.
The system shall have a minimum clearance to combustibles with flue gas temperatures
ontinuous.
3.0
CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS AND METERING PUMPS
3.1
GENERAL
Provide two completely preassembled, packaged chemical feed system(s)/chemical metering
pump(s)for the boiler packages. Package shall be hydraulically and electrically tested at the
factory and shall be assembled to the fullest extent possible. Package shall be furnished with
all required lubricants, special tools, and installation instructions.
3.2
PUMP
Pump capacity shall be adjustable through 100% of the range by manual micrometer dial
while the pump is running or stopped. Pump stroking speed shall not exceed 60 spm.
The pump shall be sized to deliver the required capacity at 85% of maximum stroke length.
Stroke adjustment shall be a variable micrometer type mechanism, with the plunger powered
through its entire travel. Lost motion designs are not acceptable.
The pump shall include an automatic vent and refill mechanism on the hydraulic side, which
operates once each stroke. The pump shall have an external hydraulic relief valve which is
adjustable.
Double ball check valves shall be provided on the discharge to ensure accurate repeatable
metering. The pump valves shall be removable for cleaning or replacement without the need
to disturb suction or discharge piping.
The pump shall be field convertible to automatic stroke adjustment without the use of special
tools, and without the need to replace any major frame parts.
The pump shall be furnished with a factory-mounted driver suitably sized for continuous
operation at the maximum relief setting. The motor shall be integrally mounted direct
coupled. No belts or pulleys should be used in the drive train or for capacity adjustment.
3.3
FEED SYSTEM
Complete chemical feed system(s) shall be furnished suitable for handling the required size of
plant. Each system will consist of two pump(s), tank, piping, and accessories as defined
below. Manufacturer will select all materials in contact with the chemical and guarantee their
suitability for the particular service.

M-8
VOLUME-III
3.4
TANK
The tank shall be constructed of stainless steel and furnished with a removable cover. Tank
shall include connections for pump suction, drain, level gauge, chemical fill, dilution water,
and relief valve return piping. Drain connection shall be separate from pump suction
connection. Drain shall be located in the bottom of the tank for complete emptying of
contents.
Tank shall be furnished with a drain valve and a level switch (level gauge).
3.5
MIXER
An angle plate mount mixer with 304SS shaft and propeller shall be furnished. The mixer
propeller shall operate at 1450 rpm. The purpose of the mixer shall be to mix liquids after
pouring it in the tank.
4.0
HOT WATER STORAGE CALORIFIER

Carbon Steel Glass / Copper Lined Hot Water Vertical Storage Calorifiers manufactured to
the following specification:
4.1
Capacity
as shown on drawings.
4.2
Shell
Carbon Steel lined internally with Glass / Copper sheets
4.3
Supports
3- Carbon Steel legs 150mm high made from 150x 76 RSC
4.4
Battery
Low Fin Copper Integron u tubes expanded into a RNB tube plate
with fabricated steel header chest
4.5
Inspection Opening :
4.6
Gaskets
Non asbestos Fibre/ Nitrile Rubber.
4.7
Connections
Carbon steel copper lined flanges to PN16, Gun Metal Screwed.
4.8
Duty
Battery to raise specified capacity in 1 hour with a deg C

temperature rise, when supplied with primary hot water @ 4.5 Bar
(g) as show on drawings.
4.9
Insulation
Each calorifier will be supplied with factory fitted insulation

consisting of mineral wool laced to the shell and encased in stucco
aluminium sheets.
4.10
Accessories
Each calorifier will be supplied with 100mm dial thermometer,

100mm dial water pressure gauge, 100mm dial steam pressure
gauge, safety valve , drain cock , anti vacuum valve
4.11
Code
Designed and manufactured to BS853 1996 Part 1 Grade A.
4.12
Testing
In accordance with BS853 1996. Suitable for a secondary working

pressure of 7.0 Bar and hydraulically tested 11.55 Bar. Primary
tested 7.0 Bar, Test certificates are to be supplied.
4.13
Drawings
Full manufacturing drawings shall be submitted for approval.
Each calorifier will be fitted with a 450mm dia carbon steel / glass
copper lined inspection manhole.

M-9
VOLUME-III
5.0
HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS

Pumps shall be all bronze construction with cast bronze body rated for 150 psi working
pressure, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft and mechanical seals. Motor shall be TEFC,
Class F insulation, 1450 rpm. Pump shall be controlled and monitored at BMS as indicated
on data point schedules.
END OF SECTION

M - 10
VOLUME-III
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
Mechanical Section 22 35 00: Plate Heat Exchanger
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Provide water storage tanks for domestic cold water as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein, complete, in position, and ready for operation.
1.2
1.2.1.1 Plumbing Pipe work

1.2.1.2 Piping and Accessories
1.2.1.6 Pumps
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Applicable Standards:
1.3.1.1 Water Regulations
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.0
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
2.1
The plate heat exchanger shall consist of a pack of corrugated metal plates with portholes for
the passage of two fluids between which heat transfer will take place. The plate pack shall be
assembled between a frame plate and a pressure plate and compressed by tightening bolts.
2.2
The plates shall be fitted with a gasket which seals the channel and directs the fluids into
alternate channels. The number and size of the plates shall be determined by the flow rate,
physical properties of the fluids, pressure drop and temperature program. The plate
corrugations shall promote fluid turbulence and support the plates against differential
pressure.
The plates and the pressure plate shall be suspended from an upper carrying bar and located
by a lower guiding bar both of which are fixed to the support columns. Connections shall be
located in the frame cover, or if either or both fluids make more than a single pass within the
unit, the frame and pressure plates.
The plate shall be of stainless steel AISI 304 and the gaskets shall be of nitrile rubber.
2.3
The heat exchanger shall be tested and approved by ASME.
2.4
The complete assembly to be factory assembled and tested in accordance with PED pressure
vessel code requirements or equivalent European pressure vessel code and furnished with a
certification for the stated design pressure for both circuits.
2.5
The supplier to confirm availability locally in the UAE of all essential spare parts for the plate
heat exchanger proposed.
M-2
VOLUME-III
2.6
Manufacturer to supply pre-fabricated insulated cover and drip tray. Removable and reusable
panel type insulation cover for the PHE to enable expedient removal and replacement of
insulation to facilitate removal and cleaning of plates. To facilitate assembly and disassembly
the insulation pieces shall be held together with stainless steel suitcase type latches.
Panels shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3 / 4 h exterior plating, 50mm polyurethane foam
insulation, 0.05mm Aluminium fGas inside layer and 20mm Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.
Insulated housing to come complete with a drip tray constructed of 0.75 mm galvanized steel
plate, 50mm polyurethane foam insulation with waterproof wood supports and valved drain
connection.
END OF SECTION
M-3
VOLUME-III
LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG)

Mechanical Section 22 70 00 : LPG SYSTEM
M-1
VOLUME-III
1.0
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
Reference
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Section 01.
1.2
Description of Work
1.2.1
Furnished and install LPG installation as indicated on drawings within the buildings. The
following technical specifications apply to the specialist LPG supplier except where details for
connecting to this distribution system within or immediately external to the building by
Contractor apply. Gas detection within building by contractor in accord with Civil Defense
requirements. The LPG installation shall be as per GASCO requirements and regulations.
1.2.2
This section specifies the requirements for the LPG components.
1.2.3
Provide electrical work related to this section and complying with requirements of Division 16.
1.3
Quality Assurance
1.3.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the field of LPG & Natural Gas
Piping work and distribution components with characteristics, sizes and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.3.2
Professional Engineer Certification : Approval/ compliance certification shall be submitted from

the following agencies to certify that the professional engineer is legally qualified to practice in
the jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
1.4
Local Civil Defense Authority

GASCO
NFPA 54
NFPA 58
British Standards Code of Practice LPG ITA.
I.G.E.
Submittals
1.4.1
Product Data: Submit manufactures product specifications, installation and startup instructions.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating tank locations, weight loadings, required
clearances and LPG pipe work distribution complete with valves, fittings and controls.
1.4.3
Submit the following elements of the LPG Distribution and Storage System: Pipe and fittings,
valves, dielectric unions, strainers, meters, instruments, storage tanks, Leak detection and alarm
system.
1.4.4
Steel Pipes : Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that the pipe furnished meets the
international standards specified and contained in this section. Subcontractor shall submit the
Mill certification papers, also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for this
project, in English. Code numbers on these papers to match the code numbers stenciled on the
pipe. Chemical analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet or exceed the
requirements of the referenced International Standard specification.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.4.5
Certificates to be provided for welding procedure with qualification of welders including list of
welders names and symbols.
1.4.6
Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring.
Submit manufacturers ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field
installed.
1.4.7
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each component control and
accessory, including trouble shooting maintenance manual.
1.4.8
List of spare parts for two years operation and maintenance of complete system.
1.5
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.5.1
Handle LPG System components carefully to prevents damage, breaking, denting and scoring.
Do not install damaged components, replace with new.
1.5.2
Store LPG system components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
2.0
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1
LPG Storage Tank
2.1.1
General
a. This section includes design, fabrication and marketing provisions for containers, and
features normally associated with container fabrication, such as container openings,
appurtenances required for these openings to make as containers gastight entities, physical
damage protecting devices, and container supports attached to, or furnished with the
container by the manufacturer.
b. Containers shall comply with 2.1.1 ( c ) or shall be designed, fabricated, tested and marked
using criteria which incorporate an investigation to determine that it is safe and suitable for
the proposed service, is recommended for that service by the manufacturer and is acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction.
c. Containers shall be designed, fabricated, tested and marked (or stamped) in accordance with
Regulations of the U.S Department of Transportation (DOT), the Rules for the Construction
of Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Division 1, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, or the API-ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids and
Gases applicable at the data of manufacture or BS5500 or European Standards
d. Containers showing serious denting, bulging, gouging or excessive corrosion shall be
removed from service.
e. Repair or alteration of containers shall comply with the regulations, Rules or Codes under
which the container was fabricated. Other welding is permitted only on saddle plates, lugs or
brackets attached to the container by the container manufacturer.
f.
Heating or cooling coils shall not be installed inside storage containers.
g. Containers shall be painted either with yellow color using a paint made with a medium
yellow chrome pigment or white color with titanium oxide pigment.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.1.2
Container Design or Service Pressure

a. The minimum design, or service, pressure of DOT specification containers shall be in
accordance with the appropriate DOT regulations.
b. The minimum design pressure for ASME or European Standards containers shall be in
accordance with Table 2.1.2.
c. Containers shall be designed to be self- supporting without the use of guy wires and shall
satisfy proper design criteria taking into account wind, seismic (earth-quake) forces, and
hydrostatic test loads.
d. Design pressure (see Table 2.1.2) shall be interpreted as the pressure at the top head with
allowance made for increased pressure on lower shell sections and bottom head due to the
static pressure of the product.
Table 2.1.2
For Gases with Vapor Pressure in Psig (Mpa Minimum Design Pressure in Psig (Mpa
gauge) at 100 deg. F (37.8 deg. C) not to gauge) ASME Code Section VIII, Division
Exceed
1, 1980 Edition ( Note 1) or European
Standards
80 (0.6)
100 (0.7)
100 (0.7)
125 (0.9)
125 (0.9)
156 (1.1)
150 (1.0)
187 (1.3)
175 (1.2)
219 (1.5)
215 (1.5)
250 (1.7)
215 (1.5)
312.5 (2.2)
e. Wind loading on containers shall be based on wind pressures on the projected area at various
height zones above ground in accordance with Design loads for buildings and other
structures, ANSI A58.1. Wind speeds shall be based on a Mean Occurrence Interval of 100
years.
2.1.3
Container Openings
a. Containers shall be equipped with openings suitable for the service in which the container is
to be used. Such openings may be either in the container proper or in the manhole cover, or
part in one and part in the other.
b. Connections for pressure relief valves shall be located and installed in such a way as to have
direct communication with the vapor space, whether the container is in storage or in use. If
located in a well inside the container with piping to the vapor space, the design of the well
and piping shall permit sufficient pressure relief valve relieving capacity. If located in a
protecting enclosure, design shall be such as to permit inspection.
c. Containers shall be fabricated so that they can be equipped with a fixed liquid level gauge(s)
capable of indicating the maximum permitted filling level (s).

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.1.4
Container Markings
a. Containers shall be marked as provided in the Regulations, Rules or Code under which they
are fabricated and in accordance with 2.1.4 (b) and 2.1.4
b. When L P Gas and one more other compressed gasses are to be store or used in the same
area, the containers shall be marked Flammable and either L P Gas, Propane or
Butane.
c. ASME or AD- Merkblatter containers shall be marked as noted hereunder. The markings
specified shall be on a metal nameplate attached to the container, so located as to remain
visible after the container is installed. The nameplate shall be attached in such a way that
corrosion of the nameplate or the container will be minimized:
i.
Service for which the container is designed; i.e underground, above ground, or both.
ii.
Name and address of container supplier or trade name of container.
iii.
Water capacity of container in lb or U.S Gallons.
iv.
Design pressure in Psig
v.
The wording This container shall not contain a product having a vapor pressure in
excess of psi at 100 , F
vi.
Tare weight of container fitted for service for containers to be filled by weight.
vii.
Outside surface area in sq. ft.
viii.
Year of manufacture.
ix.
Shell thickness
x.
OL
xi.
Manufacturers Serial Number.
xii.
ASME or AD- Merkblatter Code Symbol
Head thickness
OD -
2.2
Container Appurtenances
2.2.1
General
HD
a. This section includes fabrication and performance provisions for container appurtenances,
such as pressure relief devices, container shut off valves, backflow check valves, plugs, level
gauges and pressure gauges connected directly into the container openings.
b. Containers appurtenances shall be fabricated of materials suitable for LPG service and
resistant to the action of L P- Gas under service conditions. The following shall also apply:
i.
Pressure containing metal parts of appurtenances, shall have a minimum melting point of
1500 deg. F (816 deg.C) such as steel, ductile (nodular) iron, malleable iron or brass.
Ductile iron shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 395 or equivalent and malleable
iron the requirements of ASTM A 47 or equivalent.
ii.
Cast iron shall not be used for parts such as bonnets or bodies.

M-5
VOLUME-III
a. Container appurtenances shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 Psig (1.7
Mpa gauge).
b. Gaskets used to retain L.P.Gas in containers shall be resistant to the action of L P Gas.
They shall be made of metal or other suitable material confined in metal having a
melting point over 1500 deg. F (816 deg. C) or shall be protected against fire exposure,
except that aluminum O- rings and spiral wound metal gaskets are acceptable. When a
flange is opened, the gasket shall be replaced.
c. Each tank shall be equipped with at least :
i.
A continuous liquid level monitor with remote indicator.
ii.
A fixed maximum level gauge eg. Of the vent-valve type, with 1.5 mm or less orifice
diameter.
iii.
A shut-off device for each connection of the outlet pipes for both gaseous and liquid
phases and in addition an excess flow valve for the liquid phase.
iv.
A safety relief valve, it may be of the internal or external type. The minimum rate of
discharge shall be calculated to the formula:
Discharge rate = 10.6552 S 0.82 m3/Min air at 1 atm.
S = Total exterior surface in m2.
2.2.2
Pressure Relief Devices

a. Containers shall be equipped with one or more pressure relief devices which shall be
designed to relieve vapor.
b. DOT containers shall be equipped with pressure relief devices which shall be designed to
relieve vapor.
c. ASME or European Standards containers for L P-Gas shall be equipped with direct springloaded pressure relief valves confirming with applicable requirements of the standard on
Safety Relief Valves for Anhydrous Ammonia and L P Gas, UL 132; Standards for safety
Relief Valves of the factory mutual research corporation; or other equivalent pressure relief
valve standards. The start to leak setting of such pressure relief valves, with relation to the
design pressure of the container shall be in accordance with Table 2.2.2.
Table 2.2.2
Containers
All ASME Codes prior to 1949
Edition and the 1949 Edition
paragraphs U-68 and U-69 or AD Merkblatter
ASME
Code,
1949
Edition
Paragraphs U-200 and U-201 and all
ASME Codes later than 1949 or AD Merkblatter

Minimum
Maximum
110 %
125 %
100 %
100 %
M-6
VOLUME-III
Manufacturers of pressure relief valves are allowed a plus tolerance not exceeding 10 percent of
the set pressure marked on the valve.
d. Pressure relief valves for ASME or European Standards containers shall also comply with
the following:
2.2.3
i.
Pressure relief valves shall be sufficient individual or aggregate capacity as to provide

the relieving capacity for the container on which they are installed and to relieve at not
less than the rate indicated before the pressure is in excess of 120 percent of the
maximum (not including the 10 referred to in the footnote of Table 2.2.2) permitted
start-to-leak pressure setting of the device
ii.
Each pressure relief valve shall be plainly and permanently marked with:
The pressure in psi at which the valve is set to start-to-leak;
Rated relieving capacity in cu ft. per minute of air at 60 deg. F (15.6 deg. C) and
14.7 Psig (0.1 Mpa absolute).
The manufacturers name and catalogue number. Example A pressure relief valve is
marked 250-4050 AIR. This indicates that the valve is set to start to leak at 250 Psig
(1.7 Mpa gauge); and that its rated relieving capacity is 4050 cfm (1.9m3/s) of air.
iii.
Shut off valves shall not be located between a pressure relief device and the container,
unless the arrangement is such that the relief device relieving capacity flow specified in
3.2.4 (a) will be achieved through additional pressure relief devices which remain
operative.
iv.
Pressure relief valves shall be so designed that the possibility of tampering will be
minimized. Externally set or adjusted valves shall be provided with an approved means
of sealing the adjustment.
Connection for Flow Control (Filling, Withdrawal, Equalizing).

a. Shut Off Valves, excess-flow check valves, back flow check valves and quick closing
internal valves, used individually or in suitable combinations, at container filling, withdrawal
and equalizing connections, shall comply with 2.2.3 (b) and 2.2.3 (c).
b. Filling, withdrawal and equalizing connections shall be equipped with the appurtenances for
the appropriate type and capacity of container and the service in which they are to be used.
Cylinder valve outlet connections on all DOT cylinders from which vapor can be withdrawn
shall not be interchangeable with those used for liquid for liquid withdrawal.
c. Manual shut off valves shall be designed to provide positive closure under service
conditions.
d. Excess flow check valves shall be designed to close automatically at the rated flows of vapor
or liquid specified by the manufacturer. Excess flow valves shall be designed with a bypass,
not to exceed a No. 60 drill size opening, to allow equalization of pressure.
e. Backflow check valves, which may be of spring loaded or weight-loaded type with in line or
swing operation, shall close when flow is either stopped or reversed. Both valves of double
backflow check valves shall comply with this provision.
f.
The appurtenances specified herein above may be installed as individual components or as

combinations completely assembled by the appurtenance manufacturer.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.2.4
Liquid Level Gauging Devices

a. Liquid level gauging devices shall be provided on all containers filled by volume. Fixed level
gauges or variable gauges of the slip tube, rotary tube or float types (or combinations of such
gauges) may be used to comply with this provision.
b. Variable liquid level gauges shall be so marked that the maximum liquid level, or percent of
capacity of the container in which they are to be installed, is readily determinable.
c. The markings indicating the various liquid levels from empty to full shall either be directly
on the system nameplate and on the gauging device.
2.2.5
Other Container Connections

a. Container openings shall be equipped with a positive shut off valve in combination with an
excess-flow valve.
b. First and second stage vapor pressure regulators shall be sized to bring down the pressure of
gas to the required pressure. The regulators shall be complete with pressure relief and
venting devices in accordance with NFPA 58.
2.3
Piping, Fittings and Valves
2.3.1
General
This section includes basic design provisions and material specifications for pipe, tubing, pipe
and tube fittings, valves used to connect container appurtenances with the balance of the L P Gas
system.
2.3.2
Pipe
a. LPG fill line shall be seamless steel to ASTM A53 GrB, API 5L GrB schedule 80.
b. Below ground Distribution pipe work shall be seamless steel to ASTM A53, A 106 with
Factory applied polythene sleeve or HDPE/MDPE SDR11.
c. Above ground distribution pipe work shall be Seamless Carbon steel Pipe to ASTM A53
Gr.B or copper to BS 2871 Table X or Y
d. Final connections to equipment shall be soft copper tubes to BS 2871 TableX or Reinforced
Flexible Hose steel over braided.
e. The Pipe selection should match the natural gas service in future.
2.3.3
Pipe and Tubing Fittings

a. Pipe joints in steel, brass or copper pipe shall be welded or brazed.
b. The requirements of the Local Civil Defense shall be accommodated, including pipe-in-pipe
installations within the building. Extremely ventilated shafts shall be incorporated to comply
with civil defense requirements.
c. Fittings used at pressure higher than container pressure, such as on the discharge of liquid
transfer pumps, shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 350 psi ( 2.4 Mpa gauge).

M-8
VOLUME-III
d. Fittings used with liquid L.P-Gas, or with vapor LP-Gas at operating pressures over 125 Psig
(0.9 Mpa gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250 Psig (1.7 Mpa
gauge).
e. Fittings for use with vapor LP-Gas at pressure not exceeding 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge) shall
be suitable for a working pressure of 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge).
f.
2.3.4
Soldering or brazing filler material shall have a melting point exceeding 1,000 deg. F (538
deg. C).
Valves, Other than Container Valves

a. Pressure containing metal parts of valves (except appliance valves), including manual
positive shut off valves, excess flow check valves (either manually or automatically
operated), used in piping systems shall be of steel, ductile (nodular) iron, malleable iron or
Brass. Ductile iron shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM A 395 or equivalent and
malleable iron the requirements of ANSI/ASTM A 47 or equivalent. All materials used
including valve seat discs, packing, seals and diaphragms shall be resistant to the action of L
P Gas under service conditions.
b. Valves shall be suitable for the appropriate working pressure, as follows:
i.
Valves used at pressures higher than container pressure, such as on the discharge of
liquid transfer pumps shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 350 psig (2.4
Mpa gauge). [400 psig (2.8 Mpa gauge) WOG valves comply with this provision.
Valves should be UL listed.
ii.
Valves to be used with liquid L P Gas, or with vapor L P-Gas at pressures in excess of
125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge), but not to exceed 250 psig (1.7 Mpa gauge), shall be suitable
for a working pressure of at least 250 psig (1.7 M pa gauge).
iii.
Valves (except appliance valves) to be used with vapor L P Gas at pressures not to
exceed 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 125
psig (0.9 Mpa gauge).
c. Manual shut off valves, excess flow check valves and backflow check valves used in piping
systems shall comply with the provisions for container valves.
d. Emergency shut off valves shall be approved and incorporate all of the following means of
closing.
i.
Automatic shut off through thermal (fire) actuation. When fusible elements are used they
shall have a melting point exceeding 250 deg.F (121 deg.C)
ii.
Manual shut off from a remote location.
iii.
Manual shut off at the installed location.
e. Solenoid valves shall be intrinsically safe construction suitable

f.
2.4
Valves selection should match the Natural Gas conversion in future
Gas Leak Detection System

A gas leak detection system shall be installed to monitor for gas leaks at different locations of
the gas network.

M-9
VOLUME-III
2.4.1
Control Panel
a. The central control panel shall be located in the control room located on the site and shall
easily be accessible in the event of an emergency. (Geca or Equivalent.)
b. The central panel shall have a modular design incorporating input alarm/display module for
each gas detector. Each channel shall have indication for low alarm at 15% LEL, high alarm
at 30 % LEL and fault at 0-100% LEL indicator.
c. Main LPG supply shall be shut off at 30% LEL indication.
d. The concentration of the gas shall be displayed on a common indicator with selector switches
to display the concentration of the desired channel or zone indicator.
e. Below the gas control panel is the system control panel which shall have the following
indications:
AC healthy
DC healthy
Sprinkler on
Gas pressure status
Gas Solenoid Valve operated
Common fire signals
Gas leak high
Gas Percentage at Tank
The panel shall have the following switches:
2.4.2
Sprinkler manual operate

Gas manual shut off
Test lamp
System reset
Gas Detectors
The gas detectors shall use a pellistor sensor to detect flammable gases and vapors. The sensor
shall be housed in a stainless steel, flame proof housing, fitted onto an explosion proof junction
box.
2.4.3
Sound Flasher
A sound flasher unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the panel located in a visible area.
2.4.4
Cables
MICC or Fire Proof cables of at least 1.5 sq. mm area shall be used to interconnect between each
detector and the control panel.
2.4.5
Logic of operation
When low-level gas leak is detected in any zone, local internal alarm and indication shall show
on the control panel. When high level gas leak is detected in any zone, the following sequence
shall occur:

M - 10
VOLUME-III
a. The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed automatically.
b. External alarm shall be operated.
Connection to the fire alarm system:
In the event of a fire alarm signal, the following sequence shall occur.
In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to bypass the automatic system and operate the
system manually, this shall include:
a. Manual hut off/on of the gas through the emergency shut-off push button.
b. Manual operation of the sprinkler system On/Off
c. Manual reset.
3.0
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
General
3.1.1
All pipe work, pipe supports and brackets shall be painted with 2 undercoats and 2 finishing
coats of yellow color paint.
3.1.2
The corridor Gas Pipes should be by Pipe in Pipe work. The sleeve Pipe can be Steel or Clear
PVC (George Fischer)
3.1.3
Gas detectors should be provide for Tank Yard , PRDP , Pipe in Pipe ( Each 18 mtr or each 3
Joints.) , Air well and Kitchens
3.1.4
LPG piping shall be painted with a specific color different than other pipes. Orange or yellow
colors are recommended. Valves shall also be painted. Direction arrows to indicate the flow of
gas in the system shall be painted.
3.1.5
The system in parts and as a whole shall be tested to ensure that it will operate safely, without
leaks and to the satisfaction of the Civil Defense Authority.
3.1.6
Commissioning of the system shall be tested to ensure that all the equipment and the whole
system are in good working order.
3.1.7
The LPG contractor shall accommodate any acceptance of the system.
3.1.8
The gas network shall be leak tested using gases such as nitrogen or argon. Oxygen or flammable
gases will not be used. The leak test shall include all the different pressure stages of the system
including:
a. The filling line operating pressure up to 20 bar.
b. The Tank and high pressure stage operating pressure 16.5 bar
c. The first stage regulator operating pressure 1.5 bar.
d. The second stage pressure, operating pressure 1.5 bar.
3.1.9
Test pressure shall be at least 1.5 times the operating pressure. The leak test duration shall be 1
hour. The specified test pressure shall be monitored for a minimum of one hour during which the

M - 11
VOLUME-III
soap water method shall be used to leak test every joint. If no leak is detected and the pressured
gauge indicates no drop in the test pressure then the system will be proven to be leak free.
3.1.10 If a leak is found, the leaking joint shall be repaired or the leaking equipment shall be replaced.
The testing procedure shall be repeated to prove the complete system as leak free.
3.1.11 A test report shall be submitted to the Company for approval.
3.2
Testing and Commissioning
3.2.1
Before installations are handed over or subjected to inspection and testing, the entire installation
shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
3.2.2
Purging
Vessels and their ancillary equipment shall be purged until the oxygen level is reduced below
that which will support combustion before commissioning. When purging into or out of service
is required this shall be carried out in accordance with LPGA Code of practice No. 17.
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
LPG shall not be introduced into a pipe work system unless it has passed a leak test for the entire
system to be commissioned, and signed records are available.
Purging of pipe work systems shall only be carried out by or under the supervision of competent
persons. Pipe work should be purged with an inert gas e.g. nitrogen, so that the oxygen level is
reduced to less than 9% by volume, before introducing LPG. Purge gas should be introduced in a
controlled manner using an adjustable pressure regulator.
When commissioning liquid systems, sudden chilling of the system from rapid vaporization shall
be avoided by purging with LPG vapor up to vapor pressure before introducing liquid, or by prepressurization with the inert gas.
During the introduction of LPG the gas shall be released at a safe location and must not be
allowed to accumulate in any confined space.
The introduction of LPG may be under taken in sections if necessary, provided suitable purge gas
release points have been provided.
END OF SECTION

M - 12
VOLUME-III
FUEL HANDLING SYSTEM

Mechanical Section 22 70 10: Fuel Handling System
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the fuel oil tanks and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
1.1.1.1 Fuel oil tank, tank gauge and accessories.

1.1.1.2 Fill box, vent, dipstick gauge.
1.1.1.3 Fuel oil filters.
1.1.1.4 Shutoff valves.
1.1.1.5 Fuel oil pumps.
1.1.1.6 Anti-syphon valves.
1.1.1.7 Fuel oil day tank and main tank.
1.1.1.8 Control system.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Valves
1.2.3
Leak detection systems
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional installation details, capacities, construction details and
piping details.
1.3.2
Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
FUEL PIPING
2.1.1
Fuel oil piping material for Diesel Generator feed line shall be as follows:
Fuel oil, vent,
fill and dump
systems
15mm to50mm
Black mild steel to BS Screwed malleable iron

1387 - heavyweight.
to BS 143 and 1256 and
BS EN 10242.
65mm to 150mm
Black mild steel to BS Butt welded fittings to

1387 - heavyweight.
BS 1965 Part 1. Run
pipe in pipe where
indicated
on
the
drawings.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2
FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS
2.2.1
Provide where indicated on plans welded steel fuel oil tanks and supports. Tanks shall bear a
fixed nameplate bearing the material gauge and tank capacity.
2.2.2
Tanks to be fabricated of not less than 7.5 mm thick steel plate throughout, with stiffeners and
reinforcement as required. Provide tanks complete with a 600 mm diameter manhole, brass
bolts, cover and metallic gasket and welded outlets to accommodate the piping connections.
Test each tank to 1 bar test pressure.
2.2.3
Exterior of tanks to be painted with one coat of red lead and one coat of bitumastic shop coat
solution.
2.2.4
Tanks to be mounted on steel gantry. Size of the steel gantry to be determined as required
maintaining the integrity of the bottom of the fuel oil storage tank. A minimum of 18 mm of
grout between the steel gantry and the top of the concrete plinth should be provided.
2.2.5
Provide tappings in top of tank for all piping and sensor connections, including fuel oil supply
pipe, fuel oil return pipe, vent, gauge, high level sensor, low level sensor, etc.
2.2.6
Tank construction and installation shall be according to NFPA standards and local Civil
Defence requirement.
2.3
TANK GAUGING SYSTEM
2.3.1
Provide a remote gauging system located in filling cabinet of the electronic digital display
type. The tank level to be sensed by a lever float assembly with a factory assembled
transducer mounted outside the tank. The indicating instrument shall be a solid state unit
encased in a diecast aluminium housing suitable for wall mounting. The digital display shall
be provided with an adjustable high and low level alarm indication. Provide two (2)
adjustable level trip switches for alarm point sensing and two (2) no volt free alarm contacts
for monitoring by the Building Management and Control System. System shall operate on
230 Volt 50 Hz. Control wiring to be done by the Contractor.
2.4
TANK LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
2.4.1
Provide float level switch and controller to detect oil spillage in storage tank sump. Provide
extra volt free contacts for connection to BMS for lead alarm.
2.5
FILL PIPE CONNECTION AND VENT
2.5.1
Provide water tight fill pipe connections where shown on the drawings. All pipe connections
to consist of black mild steel body, recessed for gasket, with a cast brass cap and iron key.
Connection to be fitted with oil-treated gasket to make it watertight.
2.6
ANTI-SYPHON VALVE
2.6.1
Provide and install at the highpoint of each tank's suction line an anti-syphon valve where
shown on the drawing. Valve shall be of bronze construction and shall be equipped with dash
pot for noiseless operation.
2.7
STRAINERS
2.7.1
Provide and install on the suction line where shown on the drawings a flanged duplex oil
strainer with removable strainer baskets on each side, of the correct perforations for diesel oil

M-3
VOLUME-III
for the generator. Strainer shall be one piece cast iron construction with clamped covers and
handle for easy access to the perforated brass baskets.
2.8
SHUTOFF VALVES
2.8.1
Provide in each fuel oil supply line a quick-closing lever gate valve held open by a wire with
a fusible link arranged so that the valve will automatically close if the link melts. Also
provide a manually operated gate valve in series for non-emergency shutoff.
2.9
FUEL OIL PUMPS
2.9.1
Furnish and install, where indicated on the drawings, a factory-assembled, packaged duplex
fuel oil pump set for pumping the fuel from the main storage tank to the day tank serving the
emergency generator. The set shall be factory piped and wired, with components mounted on
a steel base support made of 6 mm steel plate with 80 mm side rails for the base. Base support
shall be fabricated with a 25 mm overflow lip complete with 12 mm plugged drain
connection. The base shall be provided with steel brackets for the mounting and support of
the electrical control panel. The set shall consist mainly, but not necessarily exclusively, of
the following components:
2.9.1.1 Two (2) fuel oil pumps as scheduled on the drawings. Pumps shall be mounted on a steel
channel base, flexibly coupled to a motor suitable for 400 volt, 3 phase, 50 Hz service.
2.9.1.2 Two (2) oil strainers, sized equal to the suction line piping, for suction side service. Strainer
shall have one-piece cast iron body and shall be suitable for pressure to 14 bar. Strainer
baskets to be fabricated of brass mesh and shall be complete with lever wrench handle.
2.9.1.3 Two (2) fuel oil pump relief valves. Each valve shall be cast bronze body with brass and
bronze internals. Valves to have 20 bar body rating with adjustable range of 7 to 20 bar.
2.9.1.4 Gate valves shall be provided on suction and discharge sides of the pumps and prior to all
pressure gauges and switches. Valves to be threaded bronze bodied, with bonnet, discs and
stem of bronze. Packing to be fuel oil resistant.
2.9.1.5 Size 110 mm faced dial compound gauge having dial range from 1 bar of vacuum to 1 bar of
pressure. Case shall be black finished steel, with steel dial. Movement to be brass with
phosphor bronze bourdon type. Gauges shall be located on the suction and discharge sides of
the strainer.
2.9.1.6 Size 110 mm faced dial pressure gauges having dial range from 0 to 20 bar. Construction as
listed for compound gauges. Gauges to be on discharge side of each pump.
2.9.1.7 Vertical ball non-return valves, cast bronze body and bronze internals, to be located on the
discharge side of each pump.
2.9.1.8 Control panel shall be mounted to base support bracket. Panel to be fabricated of 2 mm thick
steel, all-welded construction, galvanised dipped, and finished in durable hammer tone grey
enamel. Panel shall be factory wired and include required items to provide for audible and
visual alarm signals, manual changeover from one pump to the other, automatic operation of
standby pump should operating pump fail, and operation based on level sensing devices
installed in the day tank. Provide all wiring for day tank level controls. Control panel shall
include the following:
2.9.1.8.1 Control circuit transformers: 400/230/1/50.
2.9.1.8.2 Fuel oil pump motor circuit breakers.
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.9.1.8.3 Fuel oil pump motor starters.

2.9.1.8.4 Fuel oil pump selector switch for hand changeover.
2.9.1.8.5 Control circuit fuse.
2.9.1.8.6 Lead/lag alternator relay for backup pump operation.
2.9.1.8.7 Lead pump fail relay and reset button.
2.9.1.8.8 Lead pump fail relay and light and alarm.
2.9.1.8.9 Lights to indicate pump "On", lead pump failure, total pump failure together with audible
alarm for fail functions.
2.9.1.8.10 Terminal strip wiring.
2.9.1.8.11 Disconnect for each pump motor.
2.9.1.8.12 Extra contacts for wiring to the BMCS for malfunction alarms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Cap all unused tank outlets airtight.
3.1.2
Obtain all permits required. Provide adequate notice to inspector(s) for installation and testing
of new equipment.
3.1.3
Provide foot valve at the bottom of suction stub in tanks, sized for full line size.
3.1.4
Retest all fuel oil tanks after installation.
3.2
OIL PIPING
3.2.1
Provide containment pipe around the fuel fill line, vent line, supply line etc., for all areas
external to the fuel oil tank store room, to falls to allow any leakage to return to the fuel tank
store room, and be properly supported. All piping must be free from vibration.
3.2.2
Provide pressure gauges as shown on Drawings in fuel oil suction and return lines at locations
visible from the floor. Gauge on the suction side to be 100mm diameter. Gauge on discharge
side to be 100mm diameter.
3.2.3
Oil piping to be provided with ground joint unions near each piece of apparatus, to facilitate
connecting and disconnecting. Piping must be properly valved, as approved. Each oil line to
generator to be provided with a cutoff gate valve.
3.2.4
Provide double drain valves in series with single hose connection for draining oil at all low
points of system.
3.2.5
Oil pipe connections to tanks to be properly graded and shall be provided with a minimum of
three (3) elbow swing joints with arms of ample length to permit movement of the tank or
pipe in any direction without impairing the efficiency of the pipe connections, and to be so
constructed that any settlement of the tank will tend to tighten the threads in said joints.

M-5
VOLUME-III
Screwed elbows shall be used at swing joints only; all other underground pipe fittings shall be
welded.
3.3
TANK MONITORING AND GAUGES
3.3.1
Install sensors in tank as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3.2
Provide wiring from sensors to monitoring panels. Run wires in 20mm rigid galvanised
conduit (see Electrical Specification).
3.3.3
Mount gauges, alarms, bells, etc. in Fire Command Centre plant room at Podium. Mount
alarm bell on tank vent pipe, 2000mm above grade. Provide wiring between equipment as
required (power wiring provided by Electrical Contractor).
3.4
PUMPS
3.4.1
The pump manufacturer to be responsible for aligning in the field prior to startup of all
flexibly coupled pumps. The pump manufacturer must submit a written report certifying that
the alignment work has been performed by his personnel and that the pumps are ready for
operation.
3.4.2
Pumps to be levelled up on tapered steel wedges in such a manner as to permit a minimum of

20mm of grout between the pump base and the top of the concrete base.
3.4.3
Pumps to be in line, vertically mounted and to be suitable for pumping fuel oil. RPM not to
exceed 1440 rpm.
END OF SECTION

M-6
VOLUME-III
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC

Mechanical Section 23 05 19: Meters And Gages for HVAC
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
Filled-system thermometers.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
Light-activated thermometers.
Thermowells.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Gage attachments.
Test plugs.
Test-plug kits.
Sight flow indicators.
Orifice flowmeters.
Pitot-tube flowmeters.
Turbine flowmeters.
Venturi flowmeters.
Vortex-shedding flowmeters.
Impeller-turbine, thermal-energy meters.
Ultrasonic, thermal-energy meters.
Related Sections:
1
Divisions 22 & 23
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F
and deg C.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle with unified-inch screw threads.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.
Window: Plain glass.
Ring: Stainless steel.
Element: Bimetal coil.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
2.2
FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal
diameter.
Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.
Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and
connection to pointer.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in
deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360
degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem
and of length to suit installation.
a
b
11
B
Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Case: Sealed type, plastic, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360
degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
a

M-3
VOLUME-III
b
11
C
Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
D

Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal
diameter with back front flange and holes for panel mounting.
deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, back with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
a
b
Remote-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Case: Sealed type, plastic 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter with back flange
and holes for panel mounting.
deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass.
Connector Type(s): Union joint, threaded, back with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
a
b
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum
of 1.5 percent of scale range.
2.3
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Case: Cast aluminum 6-inch (152-mm) nominal size.
Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

M-4
VOLUME-III
a
b
8
9
Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Plastic-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Case: Plastic 6-inch (152-mm) nominal size.
Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.
Tube Background: Nonreflective with permanently etched scale markings graduated
in deg F and deg C.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.
a
b
8
9

Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Case: Cast aluminum 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
Window: Glass
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a
b
8
9


Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Plastic-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Case: Plastic 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
Window: Glass.
Stem: Aluminum, brass, or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.
a
b


M-5
VOLUME-III
8
9
Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
2.4
LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS
Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:

1
2
3
4
5
Case: Stainless steel 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Scale(s): Deg F and deg C.
Case Form: Adjustable angle.
Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a
b
6
7

Display: Digital.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1 deg C).
B Remote-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:

1
2
3
Case: Plastic, for wall mounting.

Scale(s): Deg F and deg C.
Sensor: Bulb and thermister wire.
a
b
4
5

Display: Digital.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1 deg C).
2.5
DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS
Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold
thermometer stem.
2.6
THERMOWELLS
Thermowells:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee
fitting.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,) ASME
B1.20.1 pipe threads.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw
threads.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

M-6
VOLUME-III
11
Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
2.7
PRESSURE GAGES
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9

Case: Sealed type; plastic; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
psi and kPa.
Window: Glass.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D

psi and kPa.
Window: Glass.
Direct-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1
2
3
4

Case: Liquid-filled type cast aluminum or drawn steel ; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal
diameter.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal
diameter with back flange and holes for panel mounting.
psi and kPa.
Window: Glass.
Remote-Mounted, Plastic-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

M-7
VOLUME-III
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Case: Sealed type; plastic ; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter with back flange
and holes for panel mounting.
psi and kPa.
Window: Glass.
2.8
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS (DN8) ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston
type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
Siphons: Loop-shaped section of stainless-steel pipe with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) pipe threads.
Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8) ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
2.9
TEST PLUGS
Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).
Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.
2.10
TEST-PLUG KITS
Furnish two test-plug kit containing two thermometers, one pressure gage and adapter, and
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-)
diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F
(minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).
High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-)
diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F
(minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).
Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-)
diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).
Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

M-8
VOLUME-III
2.11
SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS
Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow.
Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and ball, flapper, or paddle
wheel indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.
End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
2.12
FLOWMETERS
Orifice Flowmeters:
1
2
3
Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and
conversion chart.
Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system
served.
Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation
between pipe flanges.
a
b
c
d
Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for
connected sensor and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with
fittings and copper tubing for connecting to sensor.
a
b
7
8
Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second).

Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.
Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected

sensor and having two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, with carrying case.
a
b
Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water.

Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and
caps, and calibrated nameplate.

Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons and
(liters).
Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator.
Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.
Pitot-Tube Flowmeters:
1
2
Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator.

served.

M-9
VOLUME-III
Sensor: Insertion type; for inserting probe into piping and measuring flow directly in
gallons per minute (liters per second).
a
b
c
d
4
5
6
7
8
C
Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter.

Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent.
(liters).
Turbine Flowmeters:
1
2
3

served.
Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping and
measuring flow directly in gallons per minute (liters per second).
a
b
c
d
4
5
6
7
D

Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with
integral transmitter and direct-reading scale.
Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading
scale for water.
Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller.

(liters).
Venturi Flowmeters:
1
2
3
Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing,

fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart.
served.
Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and
attached tag with flow conversion data.
End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged or welded.
Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating
range of equipment or system served.

M - 10
VOLUME-III
Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for
connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent,
dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element.
a
b
6
7
8
E

Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected

flowmeter element and having two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, with carrying case.
a
Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters).
Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor.
Vortex-Shedding Flowmeters:
1
2
3

served.
Sensor: Inline type; for installing between pipe flanges and measuring flow directly in
gallons per minute (liters per second).
a
b
c
d
e
4
5
6
7
Design: Flow obstruction device, vortex-measurement type for liquids.

Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and directreading scale.
Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.

Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent.
liters.
2.13
THERMAL-ENERGY METERS
Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters:

1
Description: System with strainer, flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter,

indicator, and connecting wiring.
Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter;

for installing in piping.
a
b
c
3
4
Design: Total thermal-energy measurement.

Minimum Temperature Range: 39.2 to 250 deg F (4 to 121 deg C).
Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer.

Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack; for wall
mounting.

M - 11
VOLUME-III
a
b
5
6
7
8
Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts

per hour or British thermal units (joules).
Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.

Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-energy
flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules).
Strainer: Full size of main line piping.
Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter
system.
Ultrasonic, Thermal-Energy Meters:

1
2
3
4
Description: Meter with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and
connecting wiring.
Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter.
Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type or strap-on transducer.
Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack.
a
b
5
6
7
Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts

per hour or British thermal units (joules).
Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.

Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-energy
flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules).
Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter
system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position
in piping tees.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect
cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

M - 12
VOLUME-III
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.
Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements
and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
P
Q
Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges.

Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths
of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
S
T
Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.
Install thermometers in the following locations:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.
Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.
Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.
Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1
2
3
Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

Inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger.
Suction and discharge of each pump.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.
Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.
3.3
ADJUSTING
After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

M - 13
VOLUME-III
3.4
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following:
1
2
3
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be one of the following:
1
2
3
Liquid-filled bimetallic-actuated type.

Compact -style, liquid-in-glass type.
Direct -mounted, light-activated type.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank shall be one of the following:
1
2
3

Compact style, liquid-in-glass type.
Direct mounted, light-activated type.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit shall be one of the
following:
1
2
3
Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.

Direct mounted, light-activated type.
Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger shall be one of the
following:
1
2
3

Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up
central systems shall be one of the following:
1
2
3


Direct mounted, metal plastic-case, vapor-actuated type.
Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be one of the following:
1 Liquid-filled bimetallic-actuated type.
2 Compact style, liquid-in-glass type.
3 Direct mounted, light-activated type.
Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.5
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A
B
C
Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C).
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F (0 to 150 deg C).
Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C) 0 to 150 deg F and
minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

M - 14
VOLUME-III
3.6
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be one of the following:
1
2
Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger and boiler.
1
2
Liquid-filled or Sealed, direct mounted, metal case.

Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case.

Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be one of the following:
1
2

3.7
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa).
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 600 psi (0 to 4000 kPa).
3.8
FLOWMETER SCHEDULE
Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Orifice or Venturi type.
Flowmeters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Orifice or Venturi type.
3.9
THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE
Thermal-Energy Meters for Chilled-Water Piping: Ultrasonic type.
Thermal-Energy Meters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Ultrasonic type.
END OF SECTION

M - 15
VOLUME-III
BRACKETS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

Mechanical Section 23 05 29: Brackets, Anchors and Supports
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the brackets, anchors, and supports as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Sound Control
1.2.3
Vibration Isolation
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
ANSI B 31.1 Power piping
1.3.2
MSS-SP-69 manufacturers Standardisation Society standard on support and hangers
1.3.3
ASPE Data Book, Volume 1, chapter 13.
1.3.4
NFPA 13 & 14 Standards for installation of automatic sprinkler and stand pipe systems.
1.3.5
ASHRAE Handbook HVAC systems and applications.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings: Submit details of pipe hangers, anchors and supports for each pipe size and
pipe service. Submit details of support methods and point loadings, anchor reactions.
1.4.2
Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.
Submit samples.
1.4.3
Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.
1.4.4
Submit selection charts for expansion anchors, relating permissible working loads to types
and shapes of concrete elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
PIPE HANGERS
2.2.1
Provide hangers of heavy construction suitable for the size of pipe to be supported. All
materials to be of steel, except rollers of wrought or malleable iron. Hangers for pipes up to
and including 125 mm to be swivel ring, split ring, wrought pipe clamp, or adjustable
wrought clevis type. Hangers for pipes 150 mm and above to have 2 rods and cross-rod with
cast iron pipe roll complete with adjustable sockets and nuts.
2.2.2
Ferrous piping up to 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.: Adjustable galvanised steel clevis complete
with galvanised steel pipe covering shield for insulated piping.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2.3
2.2.4
Fire protection piping up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia.: Use of adjustable galvanised steel band
(FM approved) is permitted. Use copper plated hangers for copper piping.
Copper piping (non-insulated): Adjustable galvanised steel band with rigid, preformed, 6 mm
(1/4 inch) thick felt, pipe isolator.
2.2.5
Copper piping (insulated): Adjustable galvanised steel band with steel pipe covering shield.
2.2.6
Plastic piping: same as ferrous piping.
2.2.7
Multiple hangers: Steel channels / angles, suspended or attached to framework. Pipe hanger /
supports shall be as specified before (make appropriate selection), for piping placed above the
cross member, the use of U-bolts.
2.2.8
Hangers for copper pipe shall be non-ferrous or dielectric type.
2.3
FLOOR SUPPORTS
2.3.1
Ferrous piping upto 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.: Adjustable pipe stanchion saddle support
complete with U-bolt, stand pipe with adjuster and floor flange, use galvanised steel pipe
covering shield for insulated piping.
2.3.2
Copper piping (non-insulated): Adjustable pipe stanchion saddle support complete with UBolt, stand pipe with adjuster and floor flange and rigid preformed felt, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick,
pipe isolator.
2.3.3
Copper piping (insulated): Adjustable pipe stanchion saddle support complete with U-bolt,
stand pipe with adjuster and floor flange and galvanised steel pipe covering shield.
2.3.4
Plastic piping: same as that of ferrous piping.
2.4
VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORTS
2.4.1
Ferrous piping up to 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.: Galvanised steel riser clamps or offset pipe
clamp, use solid wood inserts for insulated piping.
2.4.2
Copper piping (non-insulated) up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia.: Galvanised malleable iron

wall clamps with rigid, preformed felt, pipe isolator.
2.4.3
Copper piping (non-insulated) over 50-mm (2-inch) nom. dia.: Galvanised steel offset riser
clamp with isolator.
2.4.4
Copper piping (insulated): Galvanised steel offset riser clamps over insulation.
2.4.5
Plastic piping: Galvanised steel riser clamps or offset pipe clamp.
2.5
DISTRIBUTION PIPING IN SHAFTS AND CHASES
2.5.1
Copper piping: Semi circular copper straps with ears for attaching to walls.
2.6
PIPE ANCHORS
2.6.1
Horizontal ferrous piping (non-insulated): Galvanised steel anchor chair and U-bolt attached
to structural steel framework.
2.6.2
Horizontal ferrous piping (insulated): Steel plate (minimum thickness as that of the pipe and
length equal to the diameter) welded to pipe, projecting beyond the insulation; attached to

M-3
VOLUME-III
structural steel framing by bolting or welding. Seal the vapor barrier around the plate with
mastic sealants.
2.6.3
Vertical ferrous piping (non-insulated): Steel hold down anchor clamp and base plate attached
to RCC / structural steel supports. Back weld clamp to pipe after installation.
2.6.4
Vertical ferrous piping (insulated): Same as the support of vertical insulated ferrous piping
over 150 mm (6 inch) nom. dia.; excluding the vibration isolation pad. Bolt down / weld the
bearing plate to the cross channel.
2.6.5
Horizontal copper piping: Galvanised steel anchor chair and U- Bolt over 150 mm (6 inch)
long wood inserts all round, attached to structural steel frame work.
2.6.6
Vertical copper piping: Galvanised steel offset riser clamps, over 6 inches long wood inserts
all round.
2.6.7
Horizontal plastic piping: Galvanised steel anchor chair and U-bolt attached to structural steel
framework.
2.6.8
Vertical plastic piping: Galvanised steel hold down anchor clamp and base plate attached to
RCC/structural steel supports.
2.7
BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
2.7.1
Concrete inserts: Provide malleable iron or galvanised steel concrete inserts complete with
adjustable insert nut, suitable for hanger rods of size 22 mm (7/8 inch) diameter and under.
Provide galvanised steel continuous concrete insert at Contractor's option.
2.7.2
Self drilling type concrete inserts: Provide galvanised steel self drilling expansion type
concrete inserts for hanger rods up to 12 mm (1/2 inch) dia., at Contractor's option.
2.7.3
Support rails (cast-in type): Electro zinced steel sections with anchor lugs and filler strip,
complete with hammer head nut or extension pieces.
2.7.4
Support rails (surface mounted type): Electro zinced steel sections with anchor lugs and filler
strip complete with hammer head nut or extension pieces. The rail shall be single or double as
appropriate.
2.8
LASHING
2.8.1
Metal flashing: 0.5-mm (26 gauge) thick galvanised steel.
2.8.2
Lead flashing: 24.5 kg/sq.M (5 lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for waterproofing; 5 kg/sq.M (1 lb/sq.ft.)
sheet lead for soundproofing.
2.8.3
Flexible flashing: 1.25-mm (47mil) thick sheet compatible with roof and wall waterproofing.
2.8.4
Caps: Galvanised steel, 0.8 mm (22 gauge) minimum; 1.5 mm (16 gauge) at fire resistant
elements.
2.9
CURBS
2.9.1
Provide factory manufactured sound attenuator curbs to suit the building construction, for all
roof exhaust fans and whenever specified.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.10
SLEEVES
2.10.1 Sleeves for pipes through fire rated and fire resistive floors and walls: Schedule 40 galvanised
steel pipe sleeve; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density fibre glass and caulk both ends
with approved fire rated sealant.
2.10.2 Sleeves for pipes passing through non-fire rated beams, walls, footings and dry floors:
Schedule 40 galvanised steel pipe sleeve; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density fibre
glass and caulk both ends with approved type sealant. For vertical piping, extend sleeve 50
mm (2 inch) above the finish floor level.
2.10.3 Sleeves for ferrous pipes passing through external retaining walls: Cast iron or ductile iron
with integral puddle; pack with 96 kg/cu.M (6 lbs/cu.ft.) density fibre glass; caulk internal
side with approved sealant; caulk external side with hemp yarn and lead.
2.10.4 Sleeves for cast iron drain, waste and vent piping through wet floors: Provide PVC pipe
sleeve or wooden box to form the opening; remove this sleeve or box after curing of the
concrete. After completion of cast iron pipe installation, fill the opening with non-shrinkable
grout; trowel both sides of slab, smooth and level.
2.11
ESCUTCHEONS
2.11.1 Provide set screw type escutcheons, size sufficient to completely cover exposed penetrations.
Prime coat finish where adjoining surface is to be field painted; Baked enamel white finish
where adjoining surface is fibre board. Chrome finish where adjoining surface is tiled with
ceramic, marble, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Support horizontal piping in accordance with the following schedule:

Maximum Pipe Size
25 mm and smaller
32 mm to 50 mm
65 mm to 80 mm
100 mm to 125 m
150 mm
200 mm to 300 mm
75 mm (C.I. drainage)
Hanger Spacing
1800 mm
2700 mm
3000 mm
3600 mm
3600 mm
3600 mm
1800 mm
1800 mm
1800 mm
1800 mm
Rod
M10
M10
M16
M16
M16
M32
M16
M16
M32
M32
3.1.2
Cast iron, copper and fire protection risers shall be supported at each floor. Other risers shall
be supported as shown on drawings.
3.1.3
Each length of drainage pipe shall have at least one hanger within 400 mm of the pipe joint.
3.1.4
Provide hangers at each change in direction and both sides of each valve.
3.1.5
Support hangers from concrete inserts or beam clamps. Construct inserts of malleable iron or
pressed steel with space for rods of all sizes. Install all inserts for pipes 80 mm and larger in
size with a reinforcing rod 15 mm in diameter run through a slot in the insert specifically
provided for this purpose.

M-5
VOLUME-III
3.1.6
Pipes in an approved manner, including the furnishing and installation of supplementary steel,
if required. Supplementary steel shall be mill-rolled sections. Submit shop drawings,
indicating support methods, point loadings to the building structure and hanger locations for
review sufficiently in advance of concrete pouring schedules to permit evaluation, critique
and any necessary changes to handling and support methods.
3.1.7
Set all inserts for all pipes in ample time to allow concrete work to be performed on scheduled
time.
3.1.8
Hangers may be directly bolted to steel beams of building construction, with Contract
Administrator's authorisation only. Smaller pipes may be suspended from cross-pieces of pipe
or steel angles, which in turn, are to be securely fastened to building beams or hung from
building concrete construction by means of rods and inserts. The intention is to provide
supports which, in each case, shall be amply strong and rigid for the load, but which will not
weaken or unduly stress the building construction.
3.1.9
Provide roller support, floor stands, wall brackets, etc., for all lines running near the floor or
near walls, which can be properly supported or suspended by the floors or walls. Pipelines
near walls may also be hung by hangers carried from approved wall brackets to a higher level
than the pipe.
3.1.10 Do not hang piping from other piping. Support of hangers by means of vertical expansion
bolts is not permitted.
3.1.11 Wherever hangers using pipe rolls are used provide approved steel pipe covering protection
saddles, spot welded to the piping at each hanger location.
3.1.12 Anchor piping where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping and
branches. Anchors to be entirely separate from accepted design. All anchor designs when
submitted for review, to include piping reactions which respective anchors are capable of
supporting. Provide expansion loops as indicated on drawings.
3.1.13 Support all lines of copper tubing individually by approved type hangers not more than 2.0 m
apart, or as shown on the drawings. Hangers for uncovered lines: especially designed for
copper tubing and of exact outside diameter of tubing. Hangers for covered tubing: broad
straps fitting outside of covering.
3.1.14 Hangers for cold piping to support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Use insulation
shields to protect the insulation cold pipes. Weld insulation protection saddles to insulated hot
pipes at roller supports. Wherever fibrous glass pipe insulation is installed, install calcium
silicate of equal thickness in lieu thereof wherever hangers and insulation shields bear only on
an insulation material which is of such density that it will not compress, crush or deform.
3.1.15 For piping 100 mm and larger, support the elbows of the piping adjacent to the pumps with
steel supports from the floor or hung from the steel above, or from the inertia base where
pump is on such a base to prevent loading heavy weights of piping on pump casing.
3.1.16 Spacing of hangers and brackets to take into account insulation. Provide a minimum of 25
mm gap between insulated surfaces and a minimum of 50 mm space between walls and
ceilings and insulated surfaces.
3.1.17 The Contractor is to be responsible for removal, under supervision and instruction, of any
spray type fire protection to structure to enable hangers, brackets and supplemental steel to be
fixed.
END OF SECTION

M-6
VOLUME-III
SECTION 230548
VIBRATION ANDSEISMICCONTROLS FORHVAC
1.
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
This Section includes the vibration isolation (and noise control) of various
machinery, equipment, piping, ductwork and other related elements contained in
the building services engineering specifications.
B.
Related Specifications include, but are not necessarily restricted to, Sections
contained in the following Divisions, as prepared specifically for this Project:
C.
1.
2.
3.
Division 21 Fire Suppression.
4.
5.
Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
6.
Division 26 Electrical.
7.
Division 27 Communications.
Related Acoustic Specifications include, but are not necessarily restricted to, the
following:
Section 018845-1 Acoustic Performance Requirements.
Section 018845-2 Noise and Vibration Control Requirements.
Section 096248 Floating Floors.
Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
Section 233319 Duct Silencers.
Section 233353 Duct Acoustic Lining.
Section 260548 Vibration and Seismic Control of Electrical Systems.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and AirConditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE): ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Chapter 48 Noise and Vibration Control.

Section 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
M- 1
VOLUME-III
1.03
B.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and AirConditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE): ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Chapter 55 Seismic- and Wind-Restraint
Design.
C.
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 171-2008 - Method of Testing Seismic Restraint Devices

for HVAC&R Equipment
D.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

SMACNA 1650, Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,
2nd Edition.
E.
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE): Guide B5

Noise and vibration control for HVAC.
F.
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE): Guide B3 Ductwork

Guide.
G.
BS 6472: Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings (1 Hz

to 80 Hz).
H.
ISO 4866: Evaluation and measurement for vibration in buildings Part 1: Guide
for measurement of vibrations and evaluation of their effects on buildings.
I.
DIN 4150 Part 3: Structural vibration in buildings: Effects on structures.
J.
ISO 10816-3: Mechanical vibration Evaluation of machine vibration by

measurements on non-rotating parts Part 3: Industrial machines with
nominal power above 15 kW and nominal speeds between 120 rev/min and
15,000 rev/min when measured in situ.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer and supplier shall have

substantial track records of not less than 10 years for the design of highperformance floating floor systems in similar applications and tested to the
referenced standards.
B.
A single vibration isolation manufacturer, or qualified representative, shall supply

vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, and
be responsible for coordination of this Work.
C.
The vibration isolation manufacturer, or qualified representative, shall provide

such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and
adjustment of the isolation equipment, inspect the installation in operation, and
submit a report in writing certifying the correctness of installation and
compliance with approved submittal data, and indicating the actual measured
isolator deflection compared with the predicted and that specified.

M- 2
VOLUME-III
1.04
PERFORMANCE
A.
1.05
Static deflection of vibration isolators shall conform to the Schedules as a

minimum, and shall be no less than recommended in the ASHRAE Guide and
Data Books for the actual floor spans involved. Replace at no charge any
isolator failing to conform to these Specifications as applied to the actual
systems involved.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following data for approval, clearly identifying each item of
equipment supported and the isolation to be installed at each point of
support:
Floor span if the equipment is to be supported by structure above
grade. Horsepower of each motor and rpm of both driven and
driver, in each supported unit.
Calculated horsepower transmitted to the structure through the
vibration isolation as applied.
Calculated static load of each isolator, in kg.
Deflection recommended by the ASHRAE Systems Guide, in
millimeters.
Scheduled deflection of each isolator and identification of each
isolator selected by model number and spring colour.
Deflection of each isolator under the calculated load, actual
loaded and unloaded measurable spring height.
The loading at which each isolator would be fully compressed to
solid.
The load at which each isolator would operate at the
deflection recommended by the ASHRAE Guide, and at scheduled
deflection.
Shear stress at solid, calculated stress as applied and maximum
allowable stress for infinite cycle life classification.
Horizontal stiffness KX, vertical stiffness KY, at calculated load
at each isolator.
Calculated lateral load imposed on each isolator, and lateral
deflection under load.
Design details of lateral restraints.

M- 3
VOLUME-III
Factory certified data to allow submitted conditions of selection to
be easily verified, with calculations.
Complete base details.
Complete flexible connection details.
B.
1.06
2.
If an increase or decrease in calculated load of 20% would cause the mount to

deflect more than 75% of full range, or to deflect less than called for by this
Specification, submit an alternative mount.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store materials in manufacturers original packaging labelled to

show name, brand, type and grade. Store materials in protected dry location
off-ground in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Do not open
packaging or remove labels until time for installation.
B.
Do not proceed with the Work during inclement weather or when whether
forecasts are unfavourable, unless the Work can proceed in accordance with
the manufacturers instructions.
C.
Submit maintenance and operating manuals for Owners / Employers

documentation. Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and
procedures to be followed in operating, cleaning and maintaining the Work.
Include manufacturers brochures and parts list describing actual materials used in
the Work, including isolators and other major components. Assemble manuals for
component parts into single binders identified for each system.
D.
Do not permit free discharge from conveyor units or transporting in mortar trays.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
A.
Mason Industries / Energy International
B.
VMC Group (Amber Booth)
C.
Vibro-Acoustics
D.
Kinetics Noise Control Corporation
E.
CMS
F.
Optima
G.
CDM
H.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

M- 4
VOLUME-III
A.
All vibration isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other
markings so that after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection
under load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper
range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being
provided according to the design.
B.
All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection
curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and
shall be linear over a deflection range 50% above the design deflection.
C.
The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall not be less than 1.0 or greater than
2.0.
D.
The vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per
isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ by more than plus or minus 10%.
E.
Isolation above the resonant frequency shall follow the theoretical prediction
based upon an undamped single degree of freedom system, with a minimum
isolation of 50 decibels above 150 cycles per second.
F.
All vibration isolation systems shall be designed to provide a minimum of 95%

isolation efficiency.
G.
Isolators supporting a given piece of equipment shall be selected for

approximately equal spring deflection.
H.
Isolators for equipment installed outdoors shall be designed to provide

adequate restraint due to normal wind conditions and to withstand wind loads
of 1.5 kN/mm2 applied to any exposed surface of the equipment without
failure.
I.
Horizontal deflection of isolators under operating conditions shall not exceed

2% of the height of the loaded elastic element. Provide stabilizers if necessary
to limit such horizontal movement to 2% or 6 mm, whichever is the least.
J.
Fiberglass Components
Pre-compressed molded fiberglass noise and vibration isolators,
individually coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric
membrane.
Material shall be manufactured specifically for isolation purposes and
be produced in a range of density and spring rate to afford load
bearing capacities from 1 to 500 psi (3500 kN/m2).
Natural frequency of isolators as applied shall be 12 Hertz or less.
K.
Neoprene Isolator Components.

M- 5
VOLUME-III
Neoprene shall be bridge bearing quality, 400 durometer unless
specified otherwise, with a Shore hardness of 50 to 60 after
minimum aging of 20 days or corresponding over aging.
L.
Steel Spring Components

Springs shall be of the stable type having horizontal stiffness at
least equal to the vertical stiffness.
Each isolator shall be so selected that static deflection is no greater
than 75% of total deflection from free height to fully compressed or
"solid".
Shear stress at solid shall be sufficiently low that the spring does not
exceed its elastic limit and is certified by the manufacturer for infinite
cycle life classification.
Springs shall be coated in colored PVC. Colors shall be chosen such
that each spring is visibly identifiable by color and physical size.
M.
Floor Mounts
Floor mounted spring isolators shall be of the open type without
horizontal restraint unless specified otherwise.
Where indicated, limit stops shall be provided to limit motion of the
supported equipment when the load is temporarily lessened or when
equipment is subjected to external forces.
Floor mounts may be of the single or multi-spring type so designed to
force concentration of the supported load at the center of support.
Floor mounted isolators shall be equipped with a glued-on
neoprene sound pad on the bottom.
Floor mounts shall be so selected that a minimum of adjustment is
required to level the equipment.
N.
Hangers
Hangers may be of the open or box type.
Metal-to-metal contact between the supporting rods and hanger
components shall be prevented by neoprene inserts.
Box hangers shall be designed to withstand temporary loading of
400% of the design load without visible deformation.
Spring hangers shall be so selected that no more than 25 mm of

adjustment is required to level the equipment.
M- 6
VOLUME-III
O.
Corrosion Protection
Vibration isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to
corrosion.
Steel components shall be PVC coated or phosphated and painted
with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc
electroplated.
Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag
and primed with zinc chromate or metal etching primer, with a
finish coat of industrial enamel applied over the primer.
Isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts PVC coated,
hot-dip galvanized or zinc electroplated plus coating of neoprene or
bitumastic paint.
Aluminum components for outdoor installations shall be etched and
painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts and washers
shall be zinc electroplated.
P.
Brackets
Where height-saving brackets for side mounting of isolators are
specified, the height-saving brackets shall be designed to provide for
an operating clearance of 25 mm under the base and designed so
that the isolators can be installed and removed without moving the
machine when the operating clearance is 25 mm and the base is
supported on shims.
The operating distance between the top of the isolator spring
compression plate and the underneath side of the bracket shall not
exceed the static deflection of the spring.
When used with spring isolators having a deflection of 60 mm or
more, the height-saving brackets shall be of the pre-compression
type to limit exposed bolt length between the top of the isolator and
the underneath side of the bracket.
2.03
VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS AND MOUNTS
A.
Type A Neoprene Hanger

Hangers shall consist of a molded neoprene or encapsulated
glass fiber isolating element in a steel hanger box.
A neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger rod
passes through the steel hanger box, such that the hanger rod
cannot contact the steel hanger.
The diameter of the clear hole in the hanger box shall be at least

M- 7
VOLUME-III
19 mm larger than the diameter of the hanger rod, or an alternative
design approach shall be incorporated to permit the hanger rod to
swing through a 30 arc without defeating the vibration isolation
effectiveness of the hanger.
The isolator shall be manufactured with bridge bearing quality
neoprene, and selected for a maximum durometer of 50 and 10% to
15% strain. Unless otherwise specified, the static deflection shall be
at least 8 mm.
B.
Type B Spring Hanger

A spring hanger, consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring,
spring cups, neoprene impregnated fabric and steel washer, with an
elastomeric element at the top of the box for acoustic isolation.
The design shall be such as to prevent metal-to-metal contact
between the hanger rod and the top of the hanger box.
The elastomeric element shall be designed for approximately
6 mm deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed
15% of the free- height of the element.
C.
Type C Spring and Neoprene Hanger

A combination spring and elastomeric hanger consisting of a
rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring cups, neoprene impregnated
fabric washer, and steel washer, with an elastomeric element at the
top of the box for acoustic isolation.
The design shall be such as to prevent metal-to-metal contact
between the hanger rod and the top of the hanger box.
The elastomeric element shall be designed for approximately
6 mm deflection and loaded so that deflection does not exceed
15% of the free- height of the element.
Provide a load transfer plate to hold the equipment or piping at
a fixed elevation during installation and to permit transferring the
load to the spring after installation.
D.
Type D Threaded Neoprene Mount

A rubber mount isolator incorporating a thread bolt or capturethreaded connection to connect to the equipment or parts thereof.
The isolator mount shall be selected depending on the load imposed.
The type and shape of the isolator mount shall be conical or cylindrical.

M- 8
VOLUME-III
E.
Type E Neoprene Mount

A single deflection elastomeric mount with embedded nuts on the
top to hold the equipment or material in place.
There shall also be an embedded stud plate within the base of the
isolator to provide strength, stability and extensions with drilled
holes to bolt to the floor.
Aluminum plated cap screws and washers shall be provided with
the isolators.
The neoprene shall be bridge bearing neoprene molded into a
conical shape to allow for proper deflection of the mount.
The durometer shall vary from 30 to 70 depending on the load
imposed. The deflection shall range from 2 mm to 6 mm.
F.
Type F Double Deflection Neoprene Mount

A double deflection elastomeric mount with embedded nuts on the
top to hold the equipment or material in place.
There shall also be an embedded stud plate within the base of the
isolator to provide strength, stability and extensions with drilled
holes to bolt to the floor.
Aluminum plated cap screws and washers
the isolators.
shall be provided with
The neoprene shall be bridge bearing neoprene molded into a

conical shape to allow for proper deflection of the mount.
The durometer shall vary from 30 to 70 depending on the load
imposed. The deflection shall range from 8 mm to 12 mm.
G.
Type G Distributed Isolation Material

A pad type isolator consisting of a 7.5 9.5 mm ribbed or waffled
neoprene pad with a steel load distributing plate on top.
The load distributing plate shall be thick enough to distribute the
load evenly over the face of the neoprene pad without discernible
deflection.
The area of the pad shall be sized to match the load and
achieve
the scheduled static deflection when loaded to
approximately 20 to 60 psi.

M- 9
VOLUME-III
Provide stacked pads (for scheduled deflection in excess of
1.5 mm) consisting of two or more layers of neoprene pads,
each bonded to a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate
between pads.
H.
Type H Restrained Spring Isolator

An adjustable, open spring isolator having one or more coil springs
rigidly attached to a top compression plate and a baseplate.
A ribbed or waffled neoprene pad having a minimum thickness of 6
mm shall be bonded to the baseplate.
The isolator shall fit within a welded steel enclosure consisting of a
top plate and rigid lower housing, serving as a blocking device during
installation.
Restraining bolts shall connect the top plate and lower housing to
prevent the isolated equipment from rising when drained of water.
For outdoor installations, neoprene grommets shall be provided to
prevent metal-to-metal contact between the restraining bolts and
isolator housings under severe wind conditions.
Baseplates shall be sized to limit pad loading to 650 kN/m2.
Springs shall be designed for a minimum KX/KY (horizontal-to-vertical
spring rate) of 1.0.
I.
Type I Free Standing Spring Isolator

An adjustable, freestanding, open spring mounting with combination
leveling bolt and equipment fastening bolt.
The spring (or springs) shall be rigidly attached to mounting
baseplate and to the spring compression plate.
Baseplates shall be sized to limit pad loading to 650 kN/m2.
Springs shall be designed for a minimum KX/KY (horizontal-to-vertical
spring rate) of 1.0.
A neoprene pad having a minimum thickness of 6 mm shall be bonded
to the baseplate.
2.04
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A.
Type 1 Base Brackets

Gusseted welded steel brackets bolted or welded directly to
equipment, and arranged to accommodate pads or isolators with

M- 10
VOLUME-III
static deflections less than 25 mm and without having to raise the
equipment. B. Type 2 Base Steel Frame
A rectangular structural steel base for increasing rigidity of equipment
mounted thereon.
The steel members shall be structural channels or lightweight
beams having a minimum depth of 1/2 of the longest span, but not
less than 150 mm deep.
Where height restrictions prevent the use of members having a
depth of 1/2 of the largest span, beams of less depth may be used
provided they have equal rigidity.
The frame shall be arranged for isolator installation directly under
the base and be of dimensions necessary to articulate with the
structure. Cross members shall be provided where necessary
to support the equipment or to prevent twisting of the main
members.
C.
Type 3 Base Inertia Base

Concrete inertia base formed in a structural steel perimeter base
and reinforced to prevent flexure, misalignment of drive and driven
unit of stress transferal to equipment.
For pumps, provide motor slide rails, pump base elbow supports,
height- saving brackets, equipment bolting provisions and isolators
as required by the application.
Also for pumps, concrete inertia bases shall be sized to support the
suction elbow of the end suction pumps and both the suction and
discharge elbows of horizontal split case pumps. The bases
shall be T-shaped where necessary to conserve space.
Concrete inertia base thicknesses for pumps shall be based on the
motor sizes, as follows:
Motor size (kW)
3.7 to 11.2
15 to
37.3
45 to
56
74 to
187
224 to 373
Minimum Thickness
150
200
mm
mm
250
mm
300
mm
450mm
All inertia bases shall be sized to extend a minimum of 100 mm

beyond the base of the equipment, and in the case of belt-driven
equipment, 100 mm beyond the end of the drive shaft.
D.
Type 4 Base Height-Saving Concrete Inertia Base

A concrete inertia base, consisting

of a perimeter
steel pouring
M- 11
VOLUME-III
form, reinforcing bars welded in place, bolting templates, and
height-saving brackets for side mounting of the isolators.
The perimeter steel members shall be structural channels having a
minimum depth of 12 mm of the longest span, but not less than 150
mm deep.
E.
Type 5 Base Curb Mounted Rooftop Equipment Vibration Isolation Base

Extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom member to
provide water runoff independent of the seal.
The aluminum members shall house cadmium plated springs with 25
mm minimum deflection with 50% additional travel to solid, and
spring diameters of not less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated
load.
Provide wind resistance by means of resilient snubbers in the
corners with minimum clearance of 6 mm so as not to interfere
with spring action except in high winds.
Provide continuous closed cell sponge weather seal material both
above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct, with an
EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum
members.
Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity
closure.
F.
Type 6 Base Steel Suspension Frame

A structural steel base constructed of angle iron or channels,
designed to spread base area of equipment to increase stability
and/or permit suspension with hanger rods.
2.05

A.
Type FC Flexible Connectors

All flexible pipe connectors shall be designed to withstand at least the
same pressure ratings as the piping systems in which they are
installed.
Flexible neoprene pipe connectors manufactured of multiple plies of
nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in
hydraulic rubber presses.
No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement.
Straight connectors shall have two spheres.

M- 12
VOLUME-III
Neoprene elbows shall be manufactured with a single sphere forming
the corner of the joint itself.
Connectors up to and including 50 mm diameter may have threaded
ends. Connectors 63 mm and larger shall be manufactured with
floating steel flanges needed to lock the connector's in place.
All connectors shall be rated a minimum of 1000 kN/m2 at 105C.
All straight through connections shall be made with either flanged or
screwed twin spheres properly pre-extended as recommended by
the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under pressure.
Connectors with diameters 300 mm and larger operating
pressures above 650 kN/m2 shall employ control cables with end
fittings isolated from the anchoring plates by means of 12 mm thick
bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum
of 0.7 kN/mm2.
3.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
CONCRETE WORK
A.
Where housekeeping pads are not poured integrally with the floor slab,
construct housekeeping pads at least 100 mm high, unless otherwise noted
herein, reinforced with three steel wire meshes of 150 mm x 150 mm each,
fastened to structural slabs with 12 mm diameter bolts embedded in structural
slabs with expansion bolts at all corners (inset 75 mm) and no farther apart
than 450 mm. Score structural slab thoroughly to assure concrete bonding of
the structural slab and housekeeping pad. Finish tops of housekeeping pads
smooth and level within 1% of the span. Provide housekeeping pads (plinth)
for:
Each floor mounted fan.
Each base mounted pump.
Each air compressor unit.
Each floor mounted air handling unit.
Each refrigeration machine.
Each refrigerant air cooled condenser.
Miscellaneous equipment indicated to be pad mounted.
B.
Housekeeping pads which are an integral part of the floor slab shall be
furnished, installed, and left in a finished condition. Coordinate the
dimensions required for the equipment actually furnished and provide
anchor bolts and templates as required.

M- 13
VOLUME-III
C.
Provide concrete inertia blocks, affixed to a piece of moving equipment or

rotating equipment, and then isolated from the building structure, or from the
housekeeping pad. Inertia blocks shall be not less than 150 mm in thickness, nor
weigh less than three times the weight of all the equipment mounted thereon,
(unless specified otherwise) and shall be constructed of reinforced standard
dense aggregate concrete weighing not less than 2,250 kg/m3. Provide a
structural steel or rigid sheet metal form with (at least) 12 mm centers both
ways.
D.
3.02
3.03
Provide anchor bolts for equipment mounted directly on concrete. Anchor

bolts shall be embedded in the concrete (length as necessary for applied
anchor bolt loading) and equipment shall be bolted down firmly.
EQUIPMENT ISOLATOR INSTALLATION

A.
The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any damage of
position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping
connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. Maintain equipment and
piping in a rigid position during installation. The load shall not be transferred to
the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational load.
B.
Support the machine to be isolated by base or by brackets, attached

directly to the machine, where no other base is required.
C.
Provide brackets to accommodate the isolator and provide a mechanical stop.

The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified by the isolator
manufacturer. The operating clearance between the bracket and the
housekeeping pad or floor shall be 9.5 mm plus or minus 1.5 mm. The minimum
operating clearance between the base and the pad or floor shall be 25 mm
D.
Place the base in position and support the brackets temporarily by 9.5 mm
shims prior to the installation of the machine or isolators. Install the isolators
without raising the machine and base assembly.
E.
After the entire system installation is completed, and under full operational
load, adjust the isolators so that the load is transferred from the shims to the
isolators. When the isolators are properly adjusted, the shims will be barely free.
The shims shall be used as a gage to check that the 9.5 mm clearance is
maintained so that the system will remain free of stress. After this has been
completed, the shims shall be removed.
F.
Install and adjust horizontal snubbers or lateral restraints on machinery subject

to lateral loads in excess of the isolator capacity.
DUCT ISOLATION
A.
Isolate supply air ducts from air handling units operating at more than 750 Pa
discharge static pressure (i.e., external static pressure at fan or unit discharge
connection).

M- 14
VOLUME-III
3.04
B.
The stanchions supporting such ducts in equipment rooms and the first two
support points in vertical risers shall rest on 12 mm deflection Type E Neoprene
Mounts.
C.
Provide 38 mm deflection Type A Neoprene Hangers for the first 4 hangers

from the fan for such ducts.
PIPE ISOLATION
A.
For supported pipes, the installation procedures are similar to the

equipment isolator installation procedures described in Clause 3.2.
B.
For suspended pipes, adhere to the following procedures:

Install the isolators with the isolator hanger box as close as
possible to the structure.
Suspend the isolators from massive beams, or intermediate beams
and never from the slab diaphragms between beams.
Align hanger rods to clear the hanger box.
Load transfer isolators, when utilized, which shall temporarily
maintain the load in a rigid position until the installation is complete
and fully loaded.
3.05
VIBRATION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE

A. Provide the different types of vibration isolators and bases as detailed in Part
2 of this Specification, ensuring that the following tabulated minimum
requirements and performances are achieved:
Equipment
Base
Type
Isolator
Type
Deflection
Chillers and Refrigeration Equipment
50 mm
Chilled & Condenser Water Pumps
50 mm
Suspended In-Line Pumps > 7.5 HP
--
25 mm
End Suction Pumps including

Stanchion Pipe Support
Suspended Supply and/or Exhaust Fans
25 mm
38 mm
Suspended Air Handling Units
--
50 mm
Floor Mounted Air Handling Units
50 mm
Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans
38 mm
Suspended Cabinet Fans

Suspended In-Line Fans
---
C
B
38 mm
50 mm

M- 15
VOLUME-III
B.
3.06
Centrifugal Exhaust Fans

Engine Generators
1
3
J
J
38 mm
50 mm
Chilled Water & Condenser Water Risers
--
25 mm
Chilled Water Piping Within Mechanical

Room and at AHUs, Pumps and Machines
--
25 mm
Connectors at all Pumps and Chillers
--
FC
--
Although the minimum isolator deflections are tabulated in Clause 3.6A, it is

acceptable to alternatively select the required vibration isolators and equipment
bases on isolation efficiencies for each equipment item operating at its lowest
speed.
UNSCHEDULED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment, systems, constructions or conditions that may be altered, added or

changed, or not specifically considered herein or shown on the Contract
Drawings, shall be treated in a manner to similar equipment, systems,
constructions and conditions used on the Project.
B. Do not isolate fans smaller than 2 horsepower.

C.
Provide lateral restraints (snubbers) wherever required to prevent excessive

equipment dislocation due to thrusts during operation (such as fans).
D.
Apply low-lift grouting before masonry is laid, tied to the foundation dowels and
braced at1200 mm intervals. Apply high-lift grouting after masonry is laid, braced
at 1200 mm intervals with steel centering devices laid in the bed joints as
required.
END OF SECTION

M- 16
VOLUME-III
HVAC SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

Mechanical Section 23 05 53: HVAC Systems Identification
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary to
complete the systems identification as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.1.2
Valve identification.
1.1.3
Equipment identification.
1.1.4
Piping identification.
1.1.5
Duct identification.
1.1.6
Health and Safety Signage.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.2.1
Shop Drawings: Submit valve tag chart; pipe, duct and equipment labels.
1.2.2
Product Data: Manufacturers latest published data for materials, equipment and installation,
including samples of valve tags, equipment identification and piping identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
Metal Labels for Equipment:

1
2
3
4
5
Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness,

and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1
2
3
4
5
6
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

M-2
VOLUME-III
7
8
substrate.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
PIPE LABELS
2.3
A
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.4
STENCILS
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar
operational instructions.
1
Stencil Material: Aluminum.
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1
2.5
VALVE TAGS
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1
2
B
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1
2.6
A
Tag Material: Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch

(0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
WARNING TAGS
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1
2
3
4
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum (100 by 178 mm).
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or
"DO NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
For painted identification use colour in accordance with BS 1710 (1984) sharply contrasting
with background. If necessary, paint a strip background of black or white to obtain contrast.
3.1.2
For stamped tags, use 6 mm letters; painted letters to be 15 mm high. Smaller painted letters
may be used only when space does not permit 15 mm height lettering.
3.2
VALVES
3.2.1
Tag valves with identifying number and system. Number valves by floor level. Do not tag
valves whose use is obvious, such as equipment isolation valves.

M-4
VOLUME-III
3.2.2
Prepare lists of all tagged valves showing location, floor level, tag number and use. Prepare
separate lists for each system. Mount lists under glass in all plantrooms. Include copies as part
of record drawings and in the maintenance manuals.
3.2.3
Provide charts showing equipment lubrication points, lubricant required and frequency, and
columns for date and initials. Include as part of record drawings and in maintenance manuals.
3.2.4
EQUIPMENT
3.2.5
Stencil equipment with identifying letters and numbers as used on drawings. Where space is
available use full name of equipment.
3.3
CONTROLS
3.3.1
Identify all controls included in Contract Documents such as motor starters, motor control
centres, float switches and alarms.
3.4
PIPING
3.4.1
Piping identification shall be in conformance wherever possible with BS 1710.
3.4.2
Provide adhesive bands identifying the service and direction of flow to the various piping
systems. Provide such bands in all occupied and unoccupied rooms as well as in all the other
space (such as shafts) in which piping may be viewed. Identify direction at every change of
direction and entry and exit from every room. Affix a set of such bands to each pipe, on
insulation when insulated, not less frequently than every 5 metres. Provide tape around the
pipe at each end of band. Tape shall be same colour as background of band.
3.4.3
Each set consisting of one (1) band on which the name of the service is printed in black letters
not less than 36 mm high, and one (1) band on which is printed a black directional arrow.
Include the letter F to denote flow and letter R to denote return. Apply bands where they can
be easily read and with their long dimension parallel to the axis of the pipe. Provide bands
with backgrounds of different colours from the various service groups.
3.4.4
For ductwork, identification labels shall be bonded to the duct or in the case of insulated ducts
to the insulated finish. These labels shall be white self-adhesive PVC, 30mm wide x 150mm
high.
Each label shall have 25mm high black lettering denoting the nature of the ducted system and
area served, i.e. air conditioning supply - north zone, and be complete with black direction of
flow arrows.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
ULTRAVIOLET AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEMS / UVC EMITTER

Mechanical Section 23 05 66: Ultra Violet Air Purification System / UVC Emitter
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1: GENERAL
The UVC emitter shall be provided after the cooling coil in all AHUs and FAHUs.
PART2: PRODUCTS:
I)
UVC EMITTER (LAMP):
1.
The UVC Lamp shall be similar to Sanuvox Coil Mounted Object Purifier or equivalent. The
UVC lamp shall be mounted in the AHU after the cooling coil section. The UVC lamp shall
also be mounted in the supply air duct of the FCUs.
2.
The UVC Lamp and reflective fixture will be factory assembled and tested. The power source
for the lamp is housed in an aluminum enclosure that will mount separately.
3.
The UVC source is a high output, low-pressure (3.0 Torr.) mercury laden argon-neon type
that is internally coated to reduce the effects of solarization which would typically reduce
output and have a bearing on overall lamp performance and life. The UVC source is a pure
fused quartz type 219 shell, properly doped with Titanium Oxide in order to filter out
99.999% of the 185 nm wavelength to avoid the production of ozone.
4.
The UVC source net output for the lamps will be at least the intensity listed below in
microwatts/cm2 at 36 inches in the 245 nm to 266 nm band while operating at nominal
temperature in an air stream moving at 400 fpm:
270 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 24 inch lamps,
290 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 30 inch lamps
500 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 40 inch lamps;
580 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 50 inch lamps;
640 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 60 inch lamps.
5.
The UVC source design is based on a 4- pin type connection, hot cathode, T6 diameter (19
mm). The UV source shall be available in lengths of 12, 18, 24, 30, 40 and 60 inches.
6.
To effectively irradiate the coil surface and drain pan, the UVC source shall be mounted on a
geometrically adequate, parabolic shape, back-reflector to redirect at least 90% of the total
emitted UVC onto the coil that will continuously clean the coil and drain pan, and kill odor
causing mold and fungus that may develop in an HVAC unit.
7.
The reflector will be built from a heavy single piece anodized aluminum extrusion,
aerodynamically shaped to be capable of withstanding fast air velocities up to 2000 fpm
without wobble, vibrations or noisy whistle.
8.
In order to guarantee the adequate performance for a given coil, the vendor shall specify in
detail, a manufacturer-approved layout of the number of UVC sources required, their
respective position (distance from the coil and alignment on the coil). Adequate performance
is defined by the IUVA (International Ultraviolet Association) guidelines as the irradiation
intensity required so that a bacteria requiring a lethal UV dose of 100,000 microwatts/cm2
will not survive more than 60 minutes anywhere on the surface of the coil. In order to validate
the performance of the proposed arrangement, the vendor shall submit a manufacturer
approved computer simulation showing the resulting bacteria kill time map of the coil.
9.
The power source will be an electronic type, rapid start with a power factor greater than 0.95
and an energy conversion of at least 75% and have an output matched to the length of the UV
lamp. The power source will be protected from the air stream impurities by an adequate
aluminum enclosure that will enable it to be mounted on a rigid surface by way of screws. It
shall be available in 110V or 208/230V AC and be able to operate reliably in environments

M-2
VOLUME-III
ranging from 35oF to 170oF temperature, with relative humidity up to 100% and air velocities
up to 2000 fpm. The power source will carry a 5-year corrosion warranty. The UVC net
output directed at the coil is at least 10 microwatts/cm2 per inch of lamp at 1 meter in the 245
nm to 266 nm band while operating in a 35oF air stream moving at 1000 fpm.
10.
Electrical Requirements:
Will depend on Lamp length and input voltage
11.
Each UVC source will be clamp-mounted for easy installation, positioning and maintenance
onto a inch anodized aluminum tube which is supplied by the manufacturer, or field
supplied if longer than 70 inches as a permanent support structure. The support structure will
field installed and be adequately fixed with non-corrosive hardware so that the UVC source
does not vibrate or loosen.
12.
According to the 2008 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 16,
titled Ultraviolet Lamp Systems, UVGI Systems can be installed Upstream or Downstream of
the Cooling Coil. Both locations have advantages and disadvantages. It would be prudent to
investigate which side of the coil provides the best installation for the application. If the
installation is to mount the UVC source facing the coil on its return side thereby treating the
coil at the earliest possible time, the parabolic reflector will act as a protector for the UVC
source so that it remains clean from Lamp Fouling (dust, moisture, bio-aerosols) and protects
the lamp from Lamp Cooling Effects, requiring a minimum of maintenance.
13.
The Fixture shall be CSA or UL Certified
14.
The UVC source (Lamp) will be guaranteed for 12,000 hours of operation.
II)
UV AIR PURIFICATION UNIT:

The air purification unit shall be utilized to provide clean air by killing over 99% of all
airborne pathogens including fungi, moulds and yeasts and removing the noxious odours. The
unit shall be ducted-in-line and provided at Fume extract air duct before duct connection to
Fume hood fans and as shown on drawings.
The unit shall be linked to BMS for monitoring.
The hybrid air purification unit shall comprise of four stage configuration:
1.
Stage 1 Optimal air flow:

Air within the air cleaning unit shall pass over a turbulator or similar device which acts to
spin the air. This serves two purposes: it increases the dwell time of the particles of air in
each UV chamber, thereby ensuring the air achieves maximum dosage of UV which oxidises
the odour forming compounds in the airflow and secondly, maximises the chances of all the
air particles coming into contact with the treated filter.
2.
Stage 2 Safe Ozone chamber for odour removal and biological kill:
The air shall be exposed to safely generated and contained ozone. In this chamber a series of
special UV tubes shall produce UV light at a frequency of 184nm. This UV shall break down
the oxygen into single oxygen atoms which form a bond with normal oxygen molecules (O2)
to form ozone (O3). This process is known as UV enhanced oxidation, promoting the
production of ozone and hydroxyl radicals. Ozone and hydroxyl radicals are highly reactive
free radicals which attack the odorous molecules in the chamber, breaking them down into
harmless, odourless compounds. The result is the destruction of odours by oxidation of the
odour-causing compounds before passing into the next chamber.

M-3
VOLUME-III
3.
Stage 3 Antimicrobial Nanotechnology Matrix:

Utilise a unique environmentally friendly antimicrobial that uses charged elements to attract
microbes and then physically ruptures their cell membranes, and lipid envelopes, and then
electrocute the cell of the micro-organisms using a biostatic discharge rendering them
harmless. The matrix attracts only living particles. Non-living matter passes through the
system bouncing off the intelligent antimicrobial surface leaving the matrix free from
clogging. Often viruses travel in lumps of living matter and hide inside them similar to a
Trojan horse. The matrix kills the living matter and separates the much smaller viruses. The
matrix eliminates the vast majority of the micro-organisms before the air continues on its
journey into the final phase.
4.
Stage 3 Ozone removal and Biological kill:
The air now passes through a UV light chamber which contains a series of lamps producing UV light at
a frequency of 254nm. This UV chamber has a duel function: a. First the destruction of any surviving
single microbes by the disruption of their DNA/RNA. b. Secondly the neutralization of any remaining
ozone (O3) into harmless oxygen molecules (O2) which can be safely returned to the atmosphere. This
ensures that no ozone is discharged to atmosphere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION GENERAL
3.1.1
Install all air cleaning devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.2
Reinforce unit holding frames per manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.3
Access doors shall be provided for maintenance and renewal of unit elements and related
items. Maintain necessary clearance for changing elements.
3.1.4
Where air handling equipment is to be used for temporary heating or ventilation of a facility,
do not operate the equipment until specified media has been installed. Subcontractor shall be
responsible for maintaining the cleanliness of air handling apparatus and air distribution systems
during construction through regular inspection and changing of media throughout the construction
period.
3.1.5
Where air handling apparatus is used during the construction period, install new filter media
prior to start of air balancing. Additionally, deliver one new set of media to the Consultant prior to
substantial completion.
3.2
START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE
3.2.1
Clean and vacuum filter the inside of units and plenums and sections of the air distribution
system to the satisfaction of the Consultant prior to starting air handling systems.
3.2.2
Install or deliver replacement UV lamps as directed by the Consultant.
3.3
TESTING, BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING
Testing, Balancing and Commissioning shall be as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as
per section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
3.4
SPARE PARTS
3.4.1
One set of UV lamps for each unit.

END OF SECTION

M-4
VOLUME-III
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, ANDBALANCING FORHVAC
1.
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
1.03
This Section includes the requirements for noise and vibration testing of HVAC
equipment for both indoor and outdoor locations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
ADC: Air Diffusion Council.
C.
ANC: Association of Noise Consultants (United Kingdom).
D.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
E.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers.
F.
CIBSE: Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers.
G.
EN: European Norms.
H.
IEC: International Electrical Commission.
I.
ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
J.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
K.
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
L.
TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI S1.4: Specification for Sound Level Meters.
B.
ANSI S1.6: Preferred Frequencies, Frequency Levels, and Band Numbers for
Acoustical Measurements.
C.
ANSI S1.8: Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
D.
ANSI S1.10: Method for the Calibration of Microphones.
E.
ANSI S1.11: Specification for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analogue

and Digital Filters.
F.
ANSI S1.40: Specification for Acoustical Calibrators.

Section 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
VOLUME-III
1.04
G.
ANSI S2.11: Specification for Selection of Calibrations and Tests for Electrical
Transducers Used for Measuring Shock and Vibration.
H.
EN 60651: Specification for Sound level meters.
I.
EN 60804: Integrating- averaging sound level meters.
J.
IEC 60942: Electroacoustics Sound calibrators.
K.
IEC 61183: Electroacoustics Random-incidence and diffuse-field calibration

of sound level meters.
L.
IEC 61260: Electroacoustics Octave-band and fractional-octave-band filters.
M.
IEC 61672 Electroacoustics Sound level meters.
N.
ISO 5347: Methods for the calibration of vibration and shock pick-ups (Parts
thereof).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: TAB Firm to submit qualifications to Construction

Administrator for approval and to have at least 5 consecutive years of
experience in the acoustic commissioning of buildings.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Employers and Engineer's representatives on

approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual
understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members,
equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives; HVAC controls
installers, and other required personnel. Provide 14 days' advance notice (or
other period to be specified by the Engineer) of scheduled meeting time and
location and prepare an agenda to include at least the following items:
Submittal distribution requirements.
Contract Documents examination report.
TAB plan.
Work schedule and project-site access requirements.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports to include the
following:
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to
prepare certified TAB reports.

VOLUME-III
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the
procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from CIBSE Commissioning Code, or
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing or TAB firm's
forms, all of which shall be approved by the Contract Administrator.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: Provide all relevant

information on instrumentation as stated in the following:
CIBSE Commissioning Code.
AABC National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems
NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" (Section II Required Instrumentation for
NEBB Certification).
F.
1.05
1.06
Instrumentation Calibration: Use instruments which have been calibrated in

accordance with the periods recommended by the instrument
manufacturers. Provide certificates confirming the last dates of calibration
and names of parties performing the calibrations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed (or

other period to be specified by the Engineer), submit documentary evidence
that the TAB firm and the Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications
specified.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's

Notice to Proceed (or other period to be specified by the Engineer), submit a
Contract Documents Review Report.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to

Proceed (or other period to be specified by the Engineer), submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures, to include a complete set of TAB
report forms intended for use on this Project.
COORDINATION
A.
Cooperate with the Engineer during TAB operations to minimize conflicts

with on-site operations.
B.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for

systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other engineers to
operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist the TAB
activities.
C.
Provide 7 days advance notice (or other period to be specified by the

Engineer) for each test and include scheduled test dates and times.

VOLUME-III
D.
Perform TAB tests after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOTAPPLICABLE)
3.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION (REFER TO OTHER RELATED SPECIFICATIONS)
3.02
PREPARATION (REFER TO OTHER RELATED SPECIFICATIONS)
3.03
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR NOISE AND VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A.
Perform noise and vibration testing on each system according to this

Section and the procedures contained in the following documents:
ANC-9701 ANC Guidelines - Noise Measurements in Buildings,
Part 1: Noise from Building Services.
ANC-9801 A N C Guidelines - Noise M e a s u r e m e n t s i n
Buildings, P a r t 2 : Noise from External Sources (e.g., traffic noise)
within Buildings.
ISO 2204: Acoustics - Guide to International Standards on the
measurement of airborne acoustical noise and evaluation of its
effects on human beings.
CIBSE "Commissioning Code".
SMACNA "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing".
B.
Perform noise and vibration measurements in accordance with the following

standards (or accepted equivalent):
ANSI/ASA S12.2: American
Evaluating Room Noise.
National
ANSI S3.29: Guide to Evaluation

Vibration in Buildings.
Standard
of Human
Criteria
for
Exposure
to
BS 6472: Guide to Evaluation of human exposure to vibration in

buildings (1 to 80 Hz).
BS 7385-1: Evaluation and measurement for vibration in buildings
Part 1: Guide for measurement of vibrations and evaluation of
their effects on buildings.
3.04
PROCEDURES FOR NOISE MEASUREMENTS

A.
Perform sound pressure level measurements with an octave-band analyser

complying with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for
octave-band filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless
otherwise indicated.

VOLUME-III
B.
Calibrate sound level meters before each day of testing and check the
calibration after each day of testing and note any variations. Use a
calibrator provided with the sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and
that has NIST certification.
C.
Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured
and use a windscreen on the microphone.
D.
Perform sound level testing after air and water balancing and equipment
testing are complete.
E.
Close windows and doors to the space and clear the space of temporary
sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured.
F.
Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the
occupant noise level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a
minimum.
G.
Position all personnel in locations which are outside the direct line-of-sight
between the sound source and the sound level meter and ensure that all
personnel are located at least 1 m from the ,microphone during the
measurements.
H.
Where practicable, sound pressure levels of internal noise fields shall be

determined from measurements taken from at least three randomly chosen
points in the area under test. Sound pressure levels of external noise fields
shall also be determined. Results for both internal and external noise fields
shall be compared with the specified levels.
I.
Sound level measurements shall be taken with the source operating under
design duty using a microphone positioned between 1.2 and 1.5 m from
the floor, and at least 1 m from walls or other sound reflecting surfaces
within the room. Where this not possible (e.g. in small compartments) the
details of the measurement positions shall be included in the test data. The
microphone shall be located at a point not less than 1 m from any 'small'
identified sound emitting surface or point (e.g., grilles, diffusers, ducts,
etc.). For 'large' surfaces (e.g. louvres, etc.) the measurement distance shall
be not less than 3 m. Site variations imposed shall be reported.
J.
Sound level measurements shall include weighted single-figure dB LAeq (T)

and octave band dB Leq(T) levels covering the frequency range from 63 Hz
to 8 kHz. The sound levels shall use a fast time constant and cover a
measurement period (T) of at least 1 minute when the noise sources are
steady, or periods which are long enough to ensure that a representative
sound level has been recorded of the noise source.
K.
Sound level measurements without the noise source(s) operating shall be

recorded to determine the influence of background noise (from external or
other extraneous sources) on the measured sound levels. Corrections shall
then be applied to the measured data so that an estimate of the actual noise
source can be reported.

VOLUME-III
L.
Perform sound testing in at least three locations in each of the following space
types.
Inside each mechanical equipment room.
In each space above, below and adjacent to each mechanical
equipment room.
All other locations required by the Engineer.
M.
3.05
For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the
greatest sound level. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select
at least one location that is near and at least one location that is remote
from the predominant sound source.
PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A.
Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
Velocity range of 2.5 to 254 mm/s.
Displacement range of 0.0254 to 2.54 mm.
Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
B.
Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
C.
Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
D.
Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
E.
Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration

sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of
equipment being tested.
F.
Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with the testing, clear
the space of people and clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration
transducer.
G.
Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and

equipment testing is complete.
H.
Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written

instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment
being tested.
I.
Measure vibration on rotating equipment over 2.2 kW.
J.
Measure casing/housing vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base

VOLUME-III
vibration, and building structure vibration, using the velocity, acceleration or
displacement parameter, in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes, on the
following equipment:
Pumps:
a.
Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end
b.
Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end
c.
Pump Base: Top and side
d.
Building: Floor
e.
Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections
Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a.
Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end
b.
Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end
c.
Equipment Casing: Top and side
d.
Equipment Base: Top and side
e.
Building: Floor
d.
Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible
connections
e.
Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections
K.
For equipment with vibration isolation, verify the following:

Vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
Installations are level and plumb.
Isolators are properly anchored.
3.06
L.
For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring
outside diameter and the travel-to-solid distance.
M.
Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Check that there is unobstructed clearance between
the bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
NOISE SURVEY REPORTS

A.
Report sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms and on an
NR chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for
both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings.
B.
Report each tested location on a separate NR chart. C.
Report the following on the forms:

Date and time of test.
Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
Space location within the building including floor level and room
number.

VOLUME-III
Diagram o r colour photograph of the space showing
the measurement location.
Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
Description of the measured sound, e.g., steady, transient, or tonal.
Description of predominant sound source.
3.07
VIBRATION SURVEY REPORTS

A.
Report vibration measurements on third octave band vibration test forms in

accordance with BS 6472 and provide charts indicating the vibration level
measured in each 1/3 octave frequency band for both "background" and
"HVAC system operating" readings.
B.
Report each tested location on a separate vibration chart. C.
Report the following on the forms:

Date and time of test.
Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed,
and motor horsepower.
Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement
locations. Measurement readings for each measurement location.
Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
Description of predominant vibration source.
END OF SECTION

VOLUME-III
HVAC INSULATION

Mechanical Section 23 07 00: HVAC Insulation
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services 5.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of mechanical insulation is specified in this section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Insulation material shall comply with the following British Standard:
BS 476 (Part 4, 6, 7)
BS 874
BS2972
BS3958 (Part 4,5)
BS 5422
BS6676 (Part 1)
ASTM C195 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement
ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pre-formed Pipe Insulation
ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Product Data : Submit manufacturers technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation, submit schedule showing manufacturers product number,
k-value, thickness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
Submit samples for each types of mechanical insulation.
Provide mock up installation before progressing with work.
1.5

Protect insulation from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure and polythene
wrapping in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
1.6
MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit maintenance data for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data, product
data, and certifications in the maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed
hereafter:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

M-2
VOLUME-III
MATERIAL
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY.
W/M/DEG.C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mineral wool
Sectional
0.04
Mineral wool
Slabs
0.04
Fibre Glass
All
0.034
Closed Cell
All
0.034
Polyurethane
Sectional
0.025
Styrofoam
Rigid
0.026
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------All conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 24 deg C.
2.2
TYPE
LAGGING ADHESIVE
Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive compound suitable for vapour sealing insulated
ducts and pipes.
Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity environments.
Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.05 perms at 0.030 inch dry film thickness when
tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame spread
shall be 10 and smoke developed 15.
Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 90A and
90 B 25/50.
2.3
FUNGICIDAL PROTECTIVE COATINGS

Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of chilled water pipes
and ductwork.
Coating shall be a polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specially formulated for long term
fungicidal activity with no loss of activity on aging. It shall prevent the spread of molds and
odour causing bacteria on the applied surface.
Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.4
APPLICATION
2.4.1
Ductwork Insulation
a)
Concealed supply, return and extract air ducts.

Unless otherwise indicated insulate all ductwork with 25 mm thick, 48 Kg/M3
density aluminium foil faced rigid fibreglass duct board insulation complying with
ASTM, water vapour permeance and class 0 definition. Fasten the insulation with
adhesive (with low emission) on 200 to 250 mm centres. Butt all joints tightly and
seal all breaks and joints by adhering a 75 mm Aluminium foil vapour barrier tape or
sheet with a fire retardant adhesive.
Insulate flexible connections and connections to diffusers with 25 mm thick, 24
Kg/M3 density reinforced aluminium foil faced flame resistant flexible fiberglass
insulation. Overlap onto adjacent insulation and seal with adhesive duct tape to give
good closure.

M-3
VOLUME-III
Where ductwork is installed in ceiling voids and masonry shafts, which are not used
as return air plenums insulate with 50mm thick, 48 Kg/M3 density aluminium foil
faced rigid fibreglass duct insulation.
b)
Exposed supply, return and extract air ducts.

For ducts exposed inside conditioned spaces, insulate as described above for
concealed air ducts using 25mm thick aluminium foil faced fiberglass boards with
density 48 kg/M3.
Exposed ductwork within conditioned areas shall be clad with plain aluminium sheet
0.9mm or thicker.
For ducts exposed in non air conditioned areas, insulate using the method described
for concealed ducts, but using insulation with a minimum thickness of 50 mm, 48
Kg/M3 density rigid fiberglass insulation.
Then cover with plain sheet Aluminium, 0.9 mm or thicker.
All ductwork exposed externally to the building, installed on roof and within
mechanical plant rooms is to be clad with plain aluminium, 0.9 mm or thicker.
Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and
waterproofed before any insulation is applied.
2.4.2
Chilled Water Pipework Insulation

Chilled water pipes shall be generally insulated with rigid sections of aluminium foil faced
glass fibre insulation with density of 65 Kg/m3 having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.034
w/m.k at 10 deg. C.
Internal chilled water pipes (inside buildings) shall be insulated by 25 mm thick for pipes upto
20 mm dia, 40mm thick rigid insulation for pipes 25mm upto 50mm dia and 50mm thick for
pipe sizes 65 mm dia and above.
As an option, the internal chilled water pipes shall be insulated with elastomeric rubber
insulation of 19 mm thick up to 50 mm pipe size, 25 mm for 50mm 100mm pipe size and
32mm for pipe size >100 mm. The insulation shall be with a density of 55-70 Kg/m3, thermal
conductivity of 0.034 W/mK at 20 C, water vapour diffusion resistant > 7000, water vapour
permeability < 0.09 ugm /Nh to BS 4370, closed cell content >90%, Fire rating class 0 rated
to BS 476 part 6 for fire propagation and class 1 rated to BS 476 part 7, corrosion resistant.
External chilled water pipes (on roofs and in chiller yard) shall be insulated by 50mm thick
rigid insulation for pipe sizes up to 50 mm dia and 75 mm for for 65mm dia and above.
As an option, the external chilled water pipes shall be insulated with elastomeric rubber
insulation of 32 mm thick up to 100mm pipe size and 50 mm for pipe size >100 mm. The
insulation shall be UV resistant with a density of 55-70 Kg/m3, thermal conductivity of 0.034
W/mK at 20 C, water vapour diffusion resistant > 7000, water vapour permeability < 0.09
ugm /Nh to BS 4370, closed cell content >90%, Fire rating class 0 rated to BS 476 part 6 for
fire propagation and class 1 rated to BS 476 part 7, corrosion resistant.
Where insulated pipework is run on roof, in plant room and chillers yard it shall be clad using
an outer covering of plain aluminium sheet of 0.9mm or thicker.
The buried chilled water pipes shall be pre-insulated pipes as specified in section 23 21 00.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.4.3
Refrigerant pipework insulation

Refrigerant pipework shall be insulated with closed cell synthetic rubber foam insulation,
19mm thick with density of 55-70 Kg/m3 and finished as described for chilled water pipes.
2.4.4
Condensate drain pipework

Condensate drain pipeworks shall be insulated with 25mm thick, 24 kg/M3 density fiberglass
or closed cell synthetic rubber foam insulation, 19mm thick with density of 55-70 Kg/m3.
2.4.5
Aluminium Cladding
a)
Aluminum cladding shall be provided to ducts with neat 90 degree joints and finish
material shall be with stone finish.
b)
In pipework the longitudinal joints shall be cleated or held in position with stainless
steel bands and clips. Elbows and other fittings shall be made with mitered section
and riveted. All valves strainers, flexible connection etc. shall have easy removable
boxes with stainless steel toggle clips.
c)
In ductwork the joints shall be riveted or bended with stainless steel band and clips to
avoid sagging. Boxes to be made around duct traverse joints.
d)
All gaps shall be to a minimum and shall be sealed with silicon mastic suitable for
outdoor.
e)
Aluminium cladding shall be 0.9 mm thick plain sheet or thicker
2.5
ADHESIVES
2.5.1
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.2
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
a)
2.5.3
Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus
149 deg C).
a)
2.5.4
Flexible Elastomeric & Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
a)
2.5.5
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

a)

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.5.6
Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service

temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
2.5.7
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
a)
2.5.8
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

a)
2.6
MASTICS
2.6.1
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
2.6.2
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.6.3
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.6.4
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.6.5
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm)
at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
Color: White.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 104 deg
C).
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch

Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.7
LAGGING ADHESIVES
2.7.1
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
a)
b)
c)
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Color: White.
2.8
SEALANTS
2.8.1
Joint Sealants:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
2.8.2
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
2.8.3

Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
C).
Color: White or gray.

C).
Color: Aluminum
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

C).
Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
The whole of the insulation work shall be carried out by an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract
accordingly and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to the
Contract and for coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
3.2
All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1 surface
spread when tested in accordance with B.S. 476, part 7. They shall not in any way attack the
insulation or the surface to which the insulation is being applied and shall be suitable for the
working temperatures.
3.3
The Contractor is to allow in his price for the removal and replacement of two sections of
each type of insulation. If, however, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for

M-7
VOLUME-III
inspection, and all cutout sections shall be replaced at no cost to the Contract.
If further defects are revealed then the Consultant shall have the right, when in its opinion it is
necessary, to issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to be removed and
replaced. The replacement with new insulation shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant
and the cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the Contract.
3.4
Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation which
must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe layouts, etc.
3.5
Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated to
the Consultants satisfaction.
3.6
All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Consultant prior to installation of
insulation.
3.7
The insulation, in sizes indicated shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Adjoining sections
of insulation should be butted firmly together with the longitudinal seam of the jacket located
on the bottom half of the pipe.
3.8
Insulate and finish valves and fittings in the same manner and same thickness as piping in
which such items are installed. Moulded, factory shaped sectional pipe covering, factory- or
job-fabricated may be used subject to satisfactory visual checking by the Consultant.
3.9
Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hangers shall pass outside of the
sheet metal protection saddle, which shall cover a section of high density insulation, of
sufficient length to support the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapour barrier shall
be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented to it. Minimum thickness of metal saddle is
1.5 mm.
3.10
The insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
VALVES

M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the valves as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including, but not limited
to, the following:
1.1.2
Valves.
1.1.3
Ball valves.
1.1.4
Butterfly valves.
1.1.5
Gate valves.
1.1.6
Regulating valves.
1.1.7
Pressure reducing valves.
1.1.8
Drain cocks.
1.1.9
Installation of automatic control valves provided under the Building Management Systems
Specification.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Testing, Inspections and Commissioning
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
API 600 general design specifications for gate, globe and check valves.
1.3.2
ANSI B16.34 pressure temperature ratings for valves.
1.3.3
ANSI B16.10 face to face dimensions of cast iron gate, globe and check valves.
1.3.4
ANSI B16.24 end flange dimensions of bronze valves.
1.3.5
ANSI B16.1 end flange dimensions of cast iron valves.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings:
1.4.2
Valves, regulating valves.
1.4.3
Product Data:
1.4.4

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Valves and valve construction to be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and water quality
of the service.
2.2
2.3
MANUAL VALVES
2.3.1
Construct manual air vents from short vertical sections of 2-inch (50 mm)
diameter pipe to form air chamber. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) brass needle valve at top of
chamber. Provide at system high points, and where indicated on the drawings.
2.4
AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
2.4.1
Float type brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve, and valve seat. Suitable
for system operating temperature and pressure.
Provide at system high points not readily accessible for servicing.
2.5
AIR SEPARATOR
2.5.1
Air separator shall be constructed of steel designed and fabricated per ASME Section VIII
Division I with a maximum working pressure rating of 250 PSIG at 375 F units up to 2 1/2"
connection sizes shall have threaded connections and units 3" and above connection sizes
shall have flanged connections. Units shall have separate top connections for system
expansion tank and air venting, and bottom connection for blow down cleaning. Air separator
shall be furnished with a removal stainless steel strainer with a free area not less than five
times the cross-sectional area of the connections pipe.
2.6
EXPANSION TANKS
2.6.1
Bladder type tanks shall be designed and constructed per ASME section VIII, Division I and
rated for a maximum working pressure of 250 PSI at 240 F. Units shall be furnished with
lifting rings, and have the system connection and charging valve at the tank top and a tank
drain connection at the bottom. Bladder type expansion tanks shall have an internal
replaceable elastomer bladder with maximum acceptance volume and factory precharge
pressure as shown on the plans. The bladder shall be suitable for a maximum system
operating temperature of 240. Bladder type tanks shall be furnished with a steel base ring for
vertical mounting. Bladder type CA tanks shall be furnished with galvanised cover for
corrosion resistance. Bladder type tanks shall be furnished with a factory installed replaceable
California code "Bulls Eye" sight glass. All bladder type tanks shall be furnished with seismic
mounting clips. All materials of construction shall be compatible with water and ethylene and
propylene glycol mixtures. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, for
installation of accessories.
2.7
GATE VALVES
2.7.1
2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, rising or non-rising stem and union bonnet solid
wedge or disc, threaded ends, manufactured to comply with MSSSP-80 standards.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.7.2
21/2" inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), OS&Y, solid wedge,
renewable seats, flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-70 standards.
2.8
GLOBE VALVES
2.8.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, rising or non-rising stem; union bonnet, renewable
composition disc, screwed ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-80 standards. 2 1/2
inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising or non rising stem,
OS&Y, renewable seat flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-85 standards.
2.9
BALL VALVES
2.9.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle threaded ends, manufactured to comply with MSSSP- 110 standards. 2 1/2
inches (65mm) and over: Stainless steel, full bore, floating ball, teflon seat and stuffing box
seals, lever or key operated handle flanged ends, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-72
and 25 standards.
2.10
CHECK VALVES
2.10.1 2 inches (50mm) and under: Bronze, resilient seat and disc, spring loaded, screwed ends. 2
1/2 inches (65mm) and over: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composition
disc and seat flanged ends, manufactured to ANSI B16.1 and MILV-18436 F standards.
2.11
DRAIN VALVES
2.11.1 Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet with nipple and cap for hose
connection, manufactured to comply with MSS-SP-80 standards.
2.12
REGULATING (BALANCING) VALVES
2.12.1 Use for throttling for water services: 50 mm and smaller variable orifice double regulating
bronze valve with inside rising stem, screwed bonnet, hand wheel operated with micrometer
style indicator and pressure test points. 65 mm to 150 mm larger cast iron variable orifice
double regulating valve with rising stem, outside screw and yoke and bolted bonnet. All
valves to be backseating with adjustable packing nut and be capable for repacking under
pressure. Moulded teflon impregnated mineral wool packing. Provide valves for throttling
service with renewable metallic seats of nickel alloy or stainless steel.
2.13
2.13.1 35 mm and Smaller:

2.13.2 Valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of varying inlet pressures
and/or changing flow rates.
2.13.3 Valve shall be capable of reducing a maximum inlet water pressure of 18 bars to a lower
desired pressure.
2.13.4 The valve shall close drop-tight when the downstream pressure rises above the spring setting.
2.13.5 Valve shall be of the balanced single seat design and shall contain an integral strainer
constructed of chrome-nickel stainless steel.
2.13.6 All necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valve from the line.
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.13.7 The pressure reducing unit shall be replaceable without the requirement of a new pressure
adjustment.
2.13.8 The diaphragm assembly shall be fully guided at both the top and the bottom.
2.13.9 All trim shall be chrome-nickel stainless steel throughout.
2.13.10 Valve shall be constructed with union ends at the inlet and the outlet.
2.13.11 It shall be possible to check the pressure on the downstream side of the valve from threaded
tappings located on either side of the valve with an installed pressure gauge.
2.13.12 The body and the cover shall be constructed of heavy-duty bronze.
2.13.13 50 mm and larger:
2.13.14 This valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in
demand, or varying inlet pressures.
2.13.15 Valve shall be a hydraulically operated pilot controlled valve.
2.13.16 No external packing glands shall be permitted, and there shall be no pistons operating the
main valve or any pilot controls.
2.13.17 The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open diaphragm
valve, designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting.
2.13.18 Valve shall be all bronze with stainless steel trim.
ENTIRE INSTALLATION SHALL BE ASSEMBLED AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
2.14
NON RETURN VALVES
2.14.1 Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with screwed bonnet. 65
mm and larger with bolted bonnet. Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
2.15
BUTTERFLY VALVE
2.15.1 Use butterfly valves for shutoff purpose for all sizes from 6 inch and above in place of gate
valves. Use gate valves only up to and including 4 inch. Valves shall be raised face class 250
flanges. Body to be ductile iron and manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP-67. Body to
have at least 2 inch extended neck for insulating. Valves to have EPDM rubber encapsulated
disc with polymer-coated body. Stem shall be 400 series stainless steel and shall not have
exposed stem to disc fasteners. Valves shall be capable for use as isolation valves for Bidirectional dead-end service at full pressure. Sizes up to 6 inch shall be lever operated. Sizes 8
inch and above shall be gear operated.
2.15.2 All butterfly valves shall be of the lug body style with lugs drilled and tapped and have drip
tight shutoff capabilities in either direction up to and including maximum system working
pressure. Butterfly valves shall be capable of closing tight after long periods of inactivity. All
valve bodies 600 mm and above to be dual flanged.
2.15.2.1 Lug body valves shall provide tight shutoff up to the full valve rating on dead end or
isolation service without the use of downstream flanges.

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.15.2.2 All valves shall be furnished with self-lubricated bronze bearings. Shaft seals shall be
provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from internal or external corrosion.
2.15.2.3 Seats shall be of the reinforced resilient type (or retained seat on high performance valves)
and shall also act as a body liner to prevent flow from contacting the body casting. Resilient
seats shall have flange sealing lips to provide a positive seal without use of flanges gaskets.
2.15.2.4 Seats shall be Nordel suitable for use with HVAC water to 120C. Shafts shall be one piece
and shall be of 416 stainless steel. Shafts shall be finish ground and polished to minimise
bearing and shaft seal wear. Shafts of 200 mm and larger valves shall have a non-adjustable
thrust collar.
2.15.2.5 Discs shall be semi-steel with welded nickel edge. The disc-to-shaft connections shall be type
316 stainless steel. Pins, shaft and disc of all valves shall be individually machined and
completely interchangeable.
2.15.2.6 On manually operated valves, latch lock levers shall provide automatic, positive latching in
the open, closed or eight intermediate positions. These levers shall allow locking in any
position with a standard padlock. Infinite position levers shall allow manual throttling and
locking in any position from open to close.
2.15.2.7 All manually actuated valves 200 mm and larger shall be operated using a cast iron housed
handwheel actuator with chainwheel. All units to have adjustable open and closed position
stops with provision to prevent accidental adjustment changes. Operating shafts to be
supported axially and radially at input end by permanently lubricated bronze thrust and sleeve
bearings.
2.16
PRESSURE RATINGS
2.16.1 Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 300 P.S.I.G working pressure (class
250) at 250 degree F (121 degree C). Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure
rated valves to meet the valve construction features.
2.17
RELIEF VALVES
2.17.1 ASME rated direct spring-loaded type, lever operated, non-adjustable factory set discharge
pressure. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low-pressure side of reducing valves,
heating converters, and compression tanks.
Select system relief valves capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve
capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
2.18
WAFER STYLE VALVES (100MM THROUGH TO 800MM)
2.18.1 Wafer style valves (100mm through 800mm): Class 150 or 300 Wafer valves shall consist of
grey iron (ASTM A-126-61 T, Class 30), or ductile iron (ASTM, A536-65T, class 60-45-18)
body and single or multiple, parallel-installed stainless steel cartridge assemblies; shall be
rated at 1380 Kpa/120 C, (Class 150) or 3450 kPa 200 C, (Class 300); class 150 shall be
mechanically compatible with ANSI B/16.1-1967 125 lb. cast iron flanges, or ANSI B16.51968 or MSS-SP-44 150 lb. steel flanges; class 300 shall be mechanically compatible with
ANSI B16.1 1967 250 lb cast iron, ANSI B16.5-1968 or MSS-SP-44 300 lb. steel flanges;
shall be supplied with dual pressure and temperature test valves.
2.18.2 All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.18.3 Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with a valve kit consisting of 1/4 inch x
2 inch minimum size nipples, quick disconnect calves (to be located outside of insulation),
and fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments specified.
2.18.4 Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag to be metal
stamped with zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential
pressure range.
2.18.5 Flow measuring instrument (minimum two) to verify flow rates shall be furnished.
2.18.6 Correct flow shall be verified by establishing that the operating pressure differential across
the valve tapings is within the range indicated on the identification tag.
2.18.7 The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a pressure gauge with a 4
1/2" diameter dial, instructions, hoses and connections; and push buttons 3 way valve which
transmits either of two pressures to a pressure gauge and a carrying case.
2.19
AUTOMATIC TWO WAY PRESSURE INDEPENDENT VALVES (PICV)
2.19.1 Provide pressure independent modulating two way control valves on chilled water pipe
connection to each building zone and pump circuit and where indicated on the drawings.
Valves shall have the capacities and pressure differential characteristics as indicated.
2.19.2 Each control valve shall be individually flow tested at factory and verified to deviate no more
than 5% through the selected pressure range. A calibration performance tag shall be
provided with each valve that verifies the flow rate in 10 rotation increments up to full rated
flow.
2.19.3 Control valve bodies shall be cast iron or bronze rated for 300 PSIG pressure. All internal
parts shall be stainless steel, Teflon, brass or bronze. Plastic internal parts are not acceptable.
2.19.4 In all control valves, it shall be possible to modify the valve flow characteristics without
removing the valve from its position.
2.19.5 The control valve actuator shall modulate all valves from 0 to 100% design flow while
rotating the valve stem a maximum of 90. All actuators shall be mounted on the valves at the
factory.
2.19.6 It shall be possible to verify the flow rate through the control valve using the valve stem
position and the differential pressure measurement between the first and second port in the
valve. If these valves features are not available, a flow meter shall be installed to verify the
actual rate in operation through the valve.
2.20
WATER STRAINERS
2.20.1 Provide Y-Type pipe line strainers with removable stainless steel basket 1200
micron size as shown on drawings.
2.20.2 Strainers shall be of the same size as the pipe to which it is connected and end material will
match with the material of connecting pipe.
2.20.3 Strainers shall be suitable for 250 psig working pressure with type 304 stainless steel screen.
2.21
PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSER

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.21.1 Furnish and install suction diffusers with the characteristics as shown on the plans at each
pump suction.
2.21.2 Casing shall be constructed of cast iron for unit sizes up to 10" inlet x 8" discharge as with
ratings of 175 PSIG working pressure and 250F. Larger size units shall be constructed of
fabricated steel with a rating of 125 PSIG at 250F. Each unit shall be right angle body type,
with internal straightening vanes. Thecasing shall have connections sizes to match the pump
suction and pipe sizes, and provided with an adjustable bottom support to relieve piping stains
at the pump suction.
2.21.3 Unit shall be furnished with an internal combination strainer-diffuser with 3/16" diameter
openings, and be supplied with a disposable fine mesh start-up strainer, which shall be
removed 30 days after initial star-up.
2.21.4 Each unit shall be furnished with a magnetic insert to remove cast iron and steel debris in the
system.
2.21.5 Gauge port connections will be provided at the suction diffuser inlet.
2.22
PUMP DISCHARGE MULTIPURPOSE VALVE
2.22.1 Furnish and install multi-purpose valve of the size and type as shown on the plans at each
pump discharge.
2.22.2
The valves are to be combination balancing valve, check valve, shut-off valve and flow
measurement device in a single semi-steel body and be suitable for horizontal or vertical
mounting. When mounted horizontally, the valve may be rotated around its centerline from
12 to 9 O'clock.
2.22.3 All valves are to be straight-thru design. Valves up through 3" size shall have threaded
connections and 3" and larger sizes shall have flanged connections.
2.22.4 The valve shall have brass seat, disk, top, bottom plug bearing and stainless steel stem sleeve
to maximise seal life and to prevent corrosion. A dual O-ring stem seal shall be replaceable
under system pressure.
2.22.5 Non-slam check feature shall incorporate a captured 0-ring in the seat. The disk shall be
spherical design to insure positive seal. Valve check feature shall close and not required more
than 1 foot of static pressure to fully close without any leakage.
2.22.6 High and low sensing ports shall be provided integral to the valve to sense a differential
pressure to determine flow through the valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
Install valves so that they are accessible for repacking.
3.1.2
Install with stem vertical where possible, never with stem below horizontal position.
3.1.3
Install with operating clearance for handle and stem.
3.1.4
Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not interfere with equipment
removal or maintenance. Install unions or flanges on equipment side of valves unless valve is
flanged type.

M-8
VOLUME-III
3.1.5
Provide valves of a design permitting packing while open and under pressure.
3.1.5.1 Provide an isolation valve in the common supply line and a double regulating valve or globe
valve as shown on drawings in the return line from each water coil, water-to-water
interchanger, and all heat transfer elements. For isolation service use ball type valve for pipe
sizes 65 mm and smaller, and butterfly type on larger sizes.
3.1.5.2 Provide a gate valve in each supply riser near main and a lubricated tapered plug valve in
each return riser near main.
3.1.5.3 Provide capped drain cocks with threaded ends for hose connections at all drain points.
3.1.5.4 Provide all valves 200 mm and larger having a rating of over 10 bar with a 25 mm bypass
valve of same pressure rating as the bypassed valve.
3.1.5.5 Provide all required manual or automatic vent valves at all high points of piping systems to
facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet operation. Pipe vent valves to nearest gully.
3.1.5.6 Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for all cast iron body valves.
3.1.5.7 Use double regulating or lubricated tapered valves or plug cocks for all throttling service and
where noted on the drawings.
3.1.5.8 Install valves of the lubricated tapered plug type for pump discharge application.
3.1.5.9 Provide lubricated tapered plug cocks with the manufacturer's proper lubricant for water
service before shipment to the job site. Furnish 4 hand wrenches for each size valve, where
gear operators are not required.
3.1.6
Provide chain operated sheaves and chains for all valves which are more than 2 m above the
floor in Pump or Equipment Rooms or in Fan Rooms.
3.1.7
Furnish and install all other hand valves, non-return valves, cocks, and other equipment as
required for the complete and proper valving of the entire installation.
3.1.8
Furnish and install tamper switches for all valves used in public health and fire protection
systems.
END OF SECTION

M-9
VOLUME-III
PIPING SPECIALITIES

Mechanical Section 23 09 14: Piping Specialties
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
therein.
1.1.2
1.2
QUALITY CONTROL
1.2.1
Design working pressure to be 16 bar for all pipe work, specialties and equipment unless
stated otherwise. Contractor to ensure that all components of pipework installation are
suitable for the working pressure and test pressure to be applied.
1.2.2
All relevant British Standards.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
All materials submittals shall include a detailed, clause-wise, compliance statement.
1.3.2
All materials submittals shall include detailed catalogues, product literature and descriptions
of all equipment and fittings with selection charts, capacities etc.
All material submittals shall include copies of relevant standards.
1.3.4
Provide detailed shop drawings of the items of equipment being provided, indicating the
dimensions, materials and characteristics.
1.3.5
Materials selection data to be submitted.
1.3.6
Submittals for sample/mock up of piping specialities required for approval by Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR VENTS
2.1.1
Air vents shall be installed on all coils and all other high points required for efficient
operation and venting of system.
2.1.2
Air vents shall be provided at all high points in the pipework, whether indicated on the
drawings or not.
2.1.3
Large diameter automatic air vents shall be provided at all primary venting positions, such as
plant rooms and at the head of vertical risers.
2.1.4
Heating and cooling coils on air handling units, fan coils and ductwork systems, in addition to
all high points of pipe work which require venting, shall be provided with 6 mm diameter air
cocks unless some other form of venting is specified or has been indicated on the drawings.
2.1.5
For coils and similar cased appliances, the air cock shall be located for convenient operation
external to the outer casing.
2.1.6
Air bottles shall be provided at all venting points.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.1.7
Air bottles shall be formed from pipe of equal bore to the pipe being vented and of length
equal to the bore plus 150 mm. Each air bottle shall be provided with a 6 mm vent pipe
welded into the top and terminating in a conveniently accessible position, approximately
1.600 m above floor level, with a 6 mm lockshield needle valve. The needle valve shall be
provided with a 6 mm tailpiece with mitred end.
2.1.8
Each automatic air vent shall be preceded by a lockshield pattern stop valve, and the
discharge from the air vent shall be 12 mm copper pipe terminating with an open discharge in
a position to be agreed over a conveniently located drain, gulley or sump.
2.1.9
The contractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all air vents.
2.1.10 Automatic Vents.

For fire protection systems (i.e. sprinklers and wet risers) the vents shall be UL listed/FM
approved and approved by the Civil Defence Authority.
Vents on air separators shall be float actuated designed to purge free air from the system and
provide positive shut-off at the working pressures kPa at a maximum working temperature .
Vents shall be tightly sealed against loss of system water and prevent entrance of air in
negative pressure situations. Vents shall be constructed of cast iron and fitted with
components of stainless steel, brass, EPDM, and silicone rubber.
2.1.11 Manual Vents.
The vents on coils and other mechanical equipment shall be as per approved equipment
manufacturers standards. Only these may be manual type and all other vents shall be
automatic.
2.2
2.2.1
Expansion compensators for 75 mm diameter pipe and larger shall be packless bellow type
with equalizing rings, stainless steel bellows, limit stops, internal telescoping sleeves and
carbon steel bevelled welding ends.
2.2.2
Expansion compensators for 65mm diameter and smaller shall be packless bellows type with
stainless steel bellows, anti-torque device, limit stops, guides and threaded pipe ends.
2.3

The flexible connector shall be made of multi layer in nylon tire cord fabric reinforcement
with EPDM cover and liner. Straight connectors shall have minimum two spheres. Connectors
50mm and smaller may have threaded ends. Larger sizes shall have baked enamel ductile iron
floating flanges. There shall be a molded in ductile iron reinforcing ring.
Standard duty flexible connector shall be rated for 1723 kPa at 76.6oC, and 1130
kPa at 121 oC.
Where flexible connectors are connected to unanchored piping or isolated equipment, provide
control cables and rods when pressure exceeds the maximum recommended for this
application by the manufacturer.
Flexible hoses shall be stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
2.4
WATER CHEMICAL FEEDER (I.E. MANUAL DOSING POT)

M-3
VOLUME-III
The unit shall be a steel one, shot type with the design pressure in accordance to the system
pressure. Feeder shall be supplied complete with fill and drain valves, filling funnel, and air
cock. Provide non return valve at pipe connections to dosing pot.
2.5
STRAINERS
2.5.1
Furnish "Y" type strainers throughout the job unless specifically noted otherwise.
Furnish one manufacturer throughout Project.
2.5.2
Strainers 50 mm and smaller.

Furnish screwed ends, screwed bronze cap and gasket in sizes 40 mm and smaller and with a
bolted cap on 50 mm size. Screens on water service shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel
with screen perforation of 0.8mm. Furnish bronze strainers to BS 1400 LG2 in all piping upto
50mm diameter.
2.5.3
Strainers 65 mm through 300 mm.

Furnish flanged ends, bolted iron cap and gasket cast iron body to BS 1452 GR 220. Screens
on water service shall be Type 304 stainless steel with screen perforation of 0.6mm. Strainer
shall be rated for PN16 (minimum).
2.6
UNIONS
2.6.1
All unions in steel pipes shall be minimum 1200 kPa malleable iron, screwed, with brass to
iron ground joints.
2.6.2
All unions in copper pipe shall be cast bronze, wrought copper or wrought bronze, with
threaded or solder-joint tube ends.
2.7
PRESSURE GAUGES
2.7.1
General.
Provide pressure gauges with white dial and black scale, size 115 mm dial. Locate gauges for
easy reading. Install gauges as shown and on all pumps suction and discharge with isolating
cock. Equip each gauge with an integral or separate siphon and connect by means of a brass
snubber pipe and fittings containing a shut-off cock.
2.7.2
Water system pressure gauges shall have a range to cover pumping head as well as static
head.
2.8
THERMOMETERS
2.8.1
Thermometers in water systems.

Furnish thermometers of the bimetal dial type with brass insert. The case diameter shall be
160mm. Casing and bezel ring made of stainless steel. Window shall be of instrument glass.
Thermometers shall be mounted for convenient reading. Install stems longer than pipe
diameters in pipe tee. Ranges shall be as follows:
Chilled Water - 0 to 60 degrees C.
Hot Water - 1 to 116 degrees C.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.9
THERMOMETER SOCKETS
Sockets shall be made of Brass with threaded connections suitable for thermometer stems and
temperature control sensing elements in pipeline. Furnish with extension necks for insulated
piping systems.
2.10
TEST WELLS
Test wells shall be similar to thermometer sockets except with a brass cap that thread into the
inside of the test well to prevent dirt from accumulating. Secure cap to body with a short
chain. Furnish with extension necks, where appropriate, to accommodate the pipeline
insulation.
2.11
INSULATING COUPLINGS
Provide at all interconnections between piping systems of dissimilar material and at all
connections of piping systems to equipment where piping and equipment are of dissimilar
materials the appropriate sizes of insulating couplings. Couplings shall be specifically
designed for the purpose of electrically isolating pipelines from other piping systems or
equipment.
2.12
TEST PLUGS
2.12.1 Provide test plugs of solid brass or stainless steel at locations shown on Drawings and as
required for the efficient and proper testing and commissioning of the system. Plugs shall be
capable of receiving either a temperature probe or pressure probe. Fittings shall have a valve
core of neoprene suitable for temperatures to 100 deg C., and shall be rated for zero leakage
for highest working pressures of the respective systems.
2.12.2 Provide two (2) test kits each consisting of a minimum 65 mm dial face pressure gauge, with
pressure ranges expected within the system; 25 mm dial thermometer, -4 to 52 degrees C.; and
a standard gauge adapter all contained within a carrying case. The pressure gauge and
thermometers shall be capable of easy recalibration.
2.13
2.13.1 Contractor shall provide all flow sensing devices as indicated on the drawings. Proper
schedule indicating the flow rate that is to be sensed, the type of flow sensing device, and the
permanent pressure loss at the design flow rate shall be submitted for approval of the
Consultant.
The flow sensors shall be one of following types:
PITOT TUBE FLOW SENSORS: Multi-port averaging type flow sensor designed to sense
the velocity of a fluid flowing in a pipe and produce a pressure output that is proportional to
the fluid velocity
VORTEX SHEDDING FLOW SENSORS: Wafer type, unit with an analog output.
2.14
PIPING SPECIALITIES IDENTIFICATION

Refer to Section MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

M-5
VOLUME-III
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Piping and Fittings. Ream all pipes to full inside diameter after cutting and thoroughly clean
before erection.
3.2
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION
General:
Provide valves at each piece of equipment to isolate equipment from its connected system.
Locate strainers and valves as necessary to provide easy isolation and cleaning of strainers.
Strainers shall be installed ahead of all automatic valves and elsewhere as indicated on
Drawings. Provide a ball valve and 1.5 m of rubber hose in the blow off opening of each
strainer.
Unions shall be provided adjacent to each screwed type valve and shall be on the outlet side
of the valve.
Install thermometers and gauges for easy reading.
Furnish piping accessories where shown and as necessary for complete installation of
mechanical Work .
3.3
THERMOMETERS
3.3.1
Stem type:
Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details using a separable socket
in each location.
3.3.2
Thermometer Sockets
Install at each point where a thermometer or temperature control sensing element is located in
a pipeline.
3.4
TEST WELLS
Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details wherever provisions are
needed for inserting a thermometer at a later date.
3.5
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

Install in piping systems as indicated on the drawings and/or details. Do not insulate over test
plugs.
3.6
PRESSURE GAUGES
Install in locations where indicated on the drawings and/or details, including any gauge
piping, with scale range appropriate to the system operating pressures.
3.7
PRESSURE SNUBBERS
Install in gauge piping for all gauges used on water services.

M-6
VOLUME-III
3.8
COIL SYPHONS
Install in gauge piping for all gauges beside vibrating equipment.
3.9
GAUGE VALVES
Install at each gauge location as close to the main as possible and at each location where a
gauge tapping is indicated.
3.10
EXPANSION LOOPS
Install where indicated on the drawings or details, locating anchors and guides as detailed.
3.11
3.11.1 Provide expansion compensators for the expansion and contraction of all pipes. Install
expansion compensators to have sufficient flexibility to prevent end thrust and movements
caused by thermal expansion or contraction causing detrimental distortion or damage of
connected equipment. Provide offsets between mains and equipment of sufficient length to
safely absorb the expansion of the main. Provide guides as necessary.
3.11.2 If expansion compensators in chilled water lines are installed at a time when the ambient air
temperature is above 300C, they shall be pre-compressed in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. Expansion compensator shall have sufficient number of corrugations
to absorb the expansion between anchors in the pipe plus not less than 25% safety factor for
the temperature range between 40C to 500C.
3.11.3 Provide one expansion compensator between every two rigid supports for all chilled water
risers. Provide guides at distances of 4 pipe diameters, 14 pipe diameters and at 3 meter
intervals after that, from the expansion compensator.
3.11.4 Provide expansion compensator for all pipes crossing building expansion joints.
3.12
3.13

a)
Provide flexible connectors at all air handling units, pumps, and chillers.
b)
Provide flexible hoses for all fan coil units
c)
Install units as per manufactures printed installation instructions.
d)
Support pipes and equipment such that connector carries no weight
STRAINERS
Install all strainers where required or indicated on the project details, allowing sufficient space
for the screens to be removed. Rotate screen retainer where required by the installation so
blowdown can remove accumulated dirt from the strainer body.
3.15
AIR VENTS
3.15.1 Manual key type vents:

Install at all high points where air may collect and not be carried by the system fluid. Use a
soft Type L copper "pigtail" so the vent can be positioned for venting and collecting any
water that might escape.
M-7
VOLUME-III
3.15.2 Manual ball valve vents:

Install on air handling coils and where indicated elsewhere as shown on drawings and details.
3.15.3 Automatic vents:
Install on the top of air separators on systems using bladder type expansion tanks. Install at
other locations as indicated on the drawings or details. All locations to have a ball valve
installed upstream of the vent for maintenance purposes.
3.16
SUCTION DIFFUSERS
3.16.1 Install at each pump suction connection for end suction pumps where shown. Provide
sufficient space for removal of the strainer. Install a capped drain valve in the blowdown
connection. Install support below the suction diffuser so the weight of the suction piping does
not rest on the pump suction connection.
3.16.2 Install a pressure gauge across the suction diffuser, valved so that a single gauge can be used
to read the inlet pressure and the outlet pressure across the strainer. Use gauge valves as
specified with the gauges. This gauge can be the same one used to read pressures across the
pump. Select gauge range appropriate to the system pressures.
3.16.3 Open the drain valve and blowdown the strainer after system cleaning and again after 30 days
of operation. If the unit is furnished with a fine mesh startup strainer, remove this strainer
after the system has been flushed and cleaned.
3.17
3.17.1 Pitot tube flow sensors:

piping systems. Butterfly valves installed at the location of a flow sensing device are to have a
memory stop.
3.17.2 Vortex shedding flow sensors:
piping systems. Do not install close to elbows, valves, or other piping specialties which might
affect the reading of the sensor; follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Butterfly
valves installed at the location of a flow sensing device are to have a memory stop.
3.18
DRAIN POINTS
3.18.1 Adequate provisions shall be made for emptying sections of all services as required for
maintenance purposes whether indicated on the drawing or not.
3.18.2 Particular attention shall be paid to the requirements of the Civil Defence and the NFPA
regulations with respect to the provision of drain taps on fire service pipework systems.
3.18.3 All cylinders, coils and pumps together with all low points of pipework within plant rooms
shall be provided with drain cocks.
3.18.4 All other low points shall be provided with drain taps.
3.18.5 Drain taps shall also be provided on the flow and return of all sub-circuits provided with
isolating facilities and shall be located on the isolated side of the valves
M-8
VOLUME-III
3.18.6 Drain cocks shall be in accordance with BS 2879 : 1980

3.18.7 Schemes involving external distribution mains below ground level are to be provided with
ample sized dirt pockets to which the drain cock shall be provided.
Underground mains shall be provided with a 54 mm gland cock with hose union outlet at the
lowest position for the purpose of flushing out.
3.18.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all drain points.
3.19
TESTING OF PIPEWORK AND PIPEWORK SPECIALITIES
3.19.1 Refer to Section TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

3.19.2 Unless specifically indicated otherwise, Contractor shall apply following general procedures.
3.19.3 All pipework shall be tested hydraulically after assembly on site and before any insulation is
applied or pipework made inaccessible by building cladding, to a pressure equal to twice the
working pressure. If the working pressure is greater than 600 kPa the test pressure may be one
and a half times the working pressure. The minimum test pressure for water pipes shall be 700
kPa.
3.19.4 Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by means of a purpose made test pump, which
shall be locked after the desired pressure is obtained.
3.19.5 The test pressure shall be registered at the lowest part of the system being tested and
maintained for a period of two hours during which time all parts must remain completely
watertight and no pressure loss is indicated on the test gauge. In the case of Fire Mains wet
risers and Hose reel supplies, the pressure test shall be maintained for 24 hours. Any leakage
must at once be made good and the pressure test repeated until the desired test conditions are
maintained. During this period all welds on steel pipe shall be well hammered. Any defects
shall be made good and the relevant section shall be re-tested all at the Contractor's expense.
3.19.7 Chillers, Heat exchangers, Water Heaters, Boilers, Cylinders, Pumps and any other ancillary
items of equipment which may be liable to damage by the test pressure, shall be isolated or
suitably protected during the test, and all necessary precautions shall be taken. Any damaged
equipment shall be replaced.
3.19.8. In order not to delay the building operations sections of the pipework may be pressure tested
independently as the work progresses. All necessary plugs, caps or blank flanges shall be
provided for testing and these shall be removed after the pressure tests have been approved.
3.19.9 A test certificate shall be issued for each section of the pipework satisfactorily.
3.20
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

Valves and Specialities.
All valves and specialities shall be adjusted to operate smoothly and without binding or
leaking. All vents shall be tested and proven to open freely for passage of air.
Locate strainers as necessary to allow easy cleaning.
END OF SECTION
M-9
VOLUME-III
HYDRONIC PIPING AND ACCESSORIES

Mechanical Section 23 21 00: Hydronic Piping and Accessories
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
1.1.2
Pipe and pipe fittings.
1.1.3
Welding of piping.
1.2
1.2.1
Valves
1.2.2
Expansion and Ball joints
1.2.3
Water Specialities
1.2.4
Strainers
1.2.5
Hangers, Anchors and Supports
1.2.6
Cleaning of Pipe Systems
1.2.7
Insulation
1.2.8
Sound Control
1.2.9
Vibration Isolation Control
1.2.10 Testing, Inspections and Commissioning
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
ANSI/ASME B16.3 black or galvanised malleable iron threaded fittings class 150.
1.3.2
ANSI/ASME Sec 9 Welding an brazing qualifications
1.3.3
ANSI/ASTM B32 solder metal
1.3.4
ANSI/AWS D1.1 structural welding code
1.3.5
ASTM A53 pipe, steel, black and hot dipped zinc coated, welded and seamless.
1.3.6
ASTM A106 Wrought steel pipes
1.3.7
ANSI B16.9 pipe fittings of wrought steel or alloy steel for moderate and elevated
temperatures.
1.3.8
AWS A5.8 Brazing filler metal.
1.3.9
ASTM B.88 seamless copper water tube.
1.3.10 ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast bronze solder joints pressure fittings.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.3.11 ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings.
1.3.12 ANSI/ASME B16.5 steel flanges.
1.3.13 ANSI/ASME B16.5 steel fittings.
1.3.14 ANSI/ASME B16.21 non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
1.3.15 ANSI/ASME B16.24 bronze flanges.
1.3.16 ANSI/ASME B2.1 pipe threads.
1.3.17 BS 4375 PTFE tape for pipe thread sealing application.
1.3.18 ASME B31.9 building services piping.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1
Welding materials and procedures: Conform to ASME/AWS codes.
1.4.2
Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9.
1.4.3
Equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) standards are acceptable, provided
the contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility wit other
components of the system.
1.4.4
For each product specified, provide from the same manufacturer throughout, where possible.
1.4.5
Test certificates from approved Independent Laboratories or Testing Agencies shall be

furnished at no extra cost if required by the Engineer.
1.4.6
Maintain uniformity is respect of connection standards (threads and flanges) throughout.

Where this is not practical, contractor shall ensure compatibility by using appropriate
adaptors, conversion spools, mating flanges and the like, with the written approval of the
Engineer.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
1.5.1
Shop Drawings:
1.5.2
Submit at a scale of 1:50 piping layout including: dimensioned plans, profiles and sections;
pipe details including joints, fittings, elbows, and transitions
1.5.3
Product Data:
1.5.4
1.5.5
Submit maintenance data for each type of hydronic specification.
1.6
1.6.1
Deliver products to site.
1.6.2
Store and protect products.
1.6.3
Store plastic and copper pipes on elevated racks only.

M-3
VOLUME-III
1.6.4
Store plastic and rubber products out of direct sunlight.
1.6.5
Keep ends of pipes closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent entry of foreign matter.
1.6.6
Apply two coats of approved red oxide primer paint to all ferrous pipes prior to storage.
1.6.7
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling place.
1.6.8
Store plug and ball valves in open position and Gate/Globe valves in closed position to
prevent damage to valve seats. Retain flange protectors on the valves, until installation to
prevent damage to flange faces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
2.1.1
Piping, fittings, valves and accessories to be suitable for the pressure and temperatures of the
service. Ascertain system working pressure and provide piping accordingly, based on the
systems to be tested at 150 percent of maximum system working pressure. Where any item
will not withstand test pressure then it is to be isolated and bypassed, and the Contractor shall
make necessary changes to suit.
2.1.2
Galvanising: Hot process inside and outside of pipe with zinc coating, minimum 0.1 gm per
cm.
2.2
PIPE FITTINGS
2.2.1
Steel Elbows: Long radius pattern.
2.2.2
Steel Welding: Fittings shall be of the same schedule (weight) as the pipe to which it will be
welded. Make all welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) by use of forged 1-piece
welding flanges, caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees. Submit cut samples for
approval if directed. Provide all such fittings of a type which maintains full wall thickness at
all points, ample radius and fillets, and proper bevels or shoulders at ends.
2.2.3
Steel Flanges: Provide carbon steel welding flanges at all flanged valves and equipment, and
as required for union connections. Flanges to be either slip-on type, bored to match diameter
of pipe and front and back welded thereto, or welding neck pattern. On piping systems with a
working pressure above 10 bar, use flanges with a working pressure equal to or above 150
percent of the maximum system working pressure.
2.3
UNIONS
2.3.1
Provide unions for threaded pipe where required for the removal of equipment.
2.3.2
Insulating Coupling Type: At each joint between steel or zinc (galvanised) and copper; up to
30 mm size, Capitol Series CS or Epco "Dielectric Union"; larger sizes, Capitol Series FG,
flange type with insulator spacers and washers.
2.4
LUBRICANT FOR THREADED JOINTS
2.4.1
Use on male threads of screwed pipe: teflon tape.
2.5
GASKET IN FLANGED JOINTS

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5.1
4 mm thick, asbestos-free compound. All public health gaskets must be Water Research
Council Approved.
2.6
BLOTS IN FLANGES
2.6.1
Machine bolts with heavy pattern semi-finished hexagon nuts made of steel. Use studs
threaded both ends and ready made bolts, with hexagon nuts, where necessary to facilitate
removal of valves or disassembly of flanged fittings.
2.7
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
2.7.1
Provide guides as described under Section Vibration Control".
2.8
DRAIN PANS
2.8.1
Provide protective pans under piping passing over electrical equipment and where indicated.
Construct pans of 1.5 mm galvanised iron, watertight with 25 mm drain line to nearest slop
sink or mechanical room floor drain. Suspend pans with suitable pipe hanger supports. Pans
over electrical equipment and under pressure piping to be fully enclosed around the piping,
containing the piping.
2.8.2
Where pipes run through electrical plantrooms, the electrical requirements for the plant take
precedence and there must be consultation with the Electrical Contractor to agree on
Mechanical Services runs before they are installed.
2.9
PIPE SCHEDULE :
Service
Chilled Water
Nominal Size
Note:
Black mild steel to Screwed malleable iron

ASTM A53-SCH40
to BS143 & 1256 and
BS EN10242, or ASME
B16.3
65mm to 150mm
Black mild steel to

ASTM A53-SCH40
All
Butt welded fittings

BS 1965: Part 1,
ASME B16.9
Black carbon steel to Butt welding fittings
ASTM A53-SCH30
BS 1986: Part 1,
ASME B16.9
Copper tube to EN1057

R250
For plumbing pipework, refer related sections
PRE-INSULATED CHILLED WATER PIPES & FITTINGS (Not Applicable)

to
or
to
or
Non-dezincifiable
capillary type to BS
864: Part 2
- Compression fittings are not permitted for use on chilled water systems.
-
2.10
Fittings
15mm to50mm
200mm to 300mm
Refrigerant
Pipework / Pipe
runs out to fan
coil units
Pipe
M-5
VOLUME-III
2.10.1 All below grade chilled water lines shall be pre insulated steel pipes with foam insulation and
HDPE jacketing. The system shall be non corrosive, non-metallic, structurally strong,
completely water proof, and entirely resistant to attacks by salts, water and all ground chemicals
normally encountered in an underground environment. The system manufacturer shall have
fabricated systems of the composition defined hereinafter for at least two years. All straight
section, fittings, anchors, end seals and other accessories shall be factory prefabricated to job
dimensions, and designed to minimize the number of field welds. The system design shall be in
strict conformance with ANSI B 31.1, Latest Edition. Pipe movement due to thermal expansion
or contraction shall be accommodated with expansion loops or elbows. The system
manufacturer shall supply an integrated leak detection/location system factory installed within
the piping system as described herein.
The complete system shall be computer analyzed by the preinsulated piping system
manufacturer to determine stress and anticipated thermal movement of the service pipe.
2.10.2 Service Pipe
Internal piping shall be seamless black steel to ASTM A53 Sch. 40 for pipe size upto 150mm
dia and Sch.30 for pipes 200mm dia and above. All joints shall be butt welded for sizes 65mm
and larger and socket welded for 50mm and below. Where possible, straight sections, shall be
supplied in 12M random length.
2.10.3 Insulation
The pipe insulation shall be rigid polyurethane foam conforming to ASTM C 591, with a
nominal density of 48 Kg/M3. The insulation shall completely fill the annular air space between
the pipe and the jacket. Support guides shall be factory installed to assure equal thickness of
insulation around the pipe.
Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Pipe Size
MM Dia.
Insulation
thickness
Upto 25
32-40
50-80
100-200
Above 200
25
40
50
65
80
2.10.4 Leak Detection/Location

The leak detection cable shall be factory installed and supplied by the prefabricated system
manufacturer. The leak detection/location system shall consist of microprocessor based
monitoring unit(s) capable of continuous monitoring of a sensor string for leaks/faults. The
units shall have a sensing range of (2000) (5000) feet per cable. The alarm unit(s) shall operate
on the principle of pulsed energy reflection and be capable of mapping the entire length of the
sensor cable and storing the digitized system map in nonvolatile memory. An analog system
using an alarm threshold value, fixed for the length of the cable, or a portion of the cable, will
not be allowed as it will not detect a second leak smaller than any acknowledged leak. The
alarm unit(s) shall provide continuous indication that the sensor cable is being monitored.
After proper acknowledgement of a minor leak, the leak detection/location system shall be
capable of monitoring the entire sensing string for additional leaks even if they are smaller than
the leaks previously acknowledged. The system shall be capable of accounting for minor
installation irregularities, static moisture and puddles (such as condensation) with no loss in
accuracy or sensitivity. The system shall locate the point of origin of the first leak or fault
within 5 feet, whichever is greater. The monitoring unit shall report and record, to nonvolatile
memory, the type of fault, distance, date, and time of an alarm.
M-6
VOLUME-III
2.11
THERMOMETER POCKETS AND PRESSURE TAPPINGS
2.11.1 Provide and install two (2) thermowells for each pipe temperature sensor required.
2.11.2 Provide 10mm pipe tapping with stopcock for each chiller, cooling coil, and fan coil unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Support or suspend all piping properly on stands, clamps, hangers, etc., of approved design
and make. Design supports to permit free expansion and contraction while minimising
vibration. Anchor pipes where required by means of steel clamps, or other approved means,
securely fastened to the pipe and the building construction.
3.1.2
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
3.1.3
Cut screw threads clean and true. Do not use bushings. Make all reductions with eccentric
reducers or eccentric fittings unless otherwise indicated. Ream out all pipe 50 mm and less
after cutting to remove all burrs.
3.1.4
The drawings indicate generally the size and location of piping and while sizes must not be
decreased, the Contractor can change runs and sizes of pipes in order to accommodate
conditions at the job with written approval from the Contract Administrator. Install pipework
to the following requirements:
3.1.5
Properly grade piping to secure easy circulation and prevent noise and water hammer. Pitch
water piping 25 mm to 180 mm upward in direction of flow.
3.1.6
During the installation of the Works, the Contractor shall be instructed to provide additional
test pockets for gauges, instrument probes and thermometers, both in pipework and ductwork,
over and above those indicated on the Contract Drawings. Provisional quantities are to be
priced and included for by the Contractor in the Tender.
3.1.7
Install (at valves, taps, instruments, and other items of equipment, and wherever else directed)
approved screw unions, with steel or bronze bodies and ground brass taper or spherical joints
to permit easy connection and disconnections.
3.1.8
Make riser branches and other offsets with expansion bellows including copper risers and
branches.
3.1.9
Provide drain cocks with hose connection and chained cap (minimum 18 mm) at low points
and vent traps at high points, with vent connections piped to nearest drain.
3.1.10 After plant is in operation, if any coils do not circulate quickly and noiselessly (due to trapped
or airbound connections), make proper alterations in these defective connections including
altering finished construction and refinishing without additional cost to the contract.
3.1.11 Pipe Nipples: Any piece of pipe 75mm in length or less is considered a nipple. All nipples to
be of extra heavy construction. Do not use close nipples.
3.1.12 Make all piping connections to coils and equipment with offsets provided with screwed or
flanged unions so arranged that the equipment can be serviced or removed without
dismantling the piping. Do not screw unions directly to coil header piping connections.

M-7
VOLUME-III
3.1.13 Install exposed work in a neat, workmanlike manner; parallel to the closest wall with
maximum headroom.
3.1.14 Position valves with stem vertical, handle up, wherever possible.
3.1.15 Use special angles where required for larger valves. In no case shall stems be below
horizontal axis.
3.1.16 Make flanged connections with flange faces true and perpendicular to the centreline of the
pipe to which the flanges are attached.
3.1.17 Flanged connections are only acceptable with in plantrooms, or similar type spaces for easy
access to valves, strainers, or the like. Where they are used around valves, strainers, etc. they
shall completely conform to BS 4504.
3.1.18 Flanges will not be permitted in any riser shafts, floor runouts, or above office areas.
3.1.19 Place all piping in proper alignment and position prior to connections to anchors, expansion
loops, joints and equipment. Furnish jacking devices, temporary steel structural members and
assembled structures as necessary.
3.1.20 Remove temporary equipment and structures at the completion of the work.
3.1.21 Allow space for pipe insulation. Refer to the insulation section for insulation thickness. A
minimum of 50 mm air space after insulation is applied.
3.1.22 Correct leaks in piping immediately using new materials. Leak-sealing compounds or peening
is not permitted.
3.1.23 Do not connect bottom of pipe risers until riser is complete. Rod or tap to clear all loose
material before making bottom connection.
3.1.24 Do not use short lengths or nipples at locations where a full length of pipe will fit.
3.1.25 All coils and vessels which contain water to have connections suitably located, and valved
outlets, to permit individual venting and draining.
3.1.26 Final connections to terminal units such as fan coil units may be run in copper tube to BS
2871: Part 1, Table "X".
3.1.27 All underground cast iron pipework and fittings once installed shall be protected with a layer
of bituminous hessian or bitumen reinforced glass fibre tissues or totally wrapped in
Densotape.
3.1.28 All underground copper pipework to be double wrapped with Denso Tape in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.29 All exposed pipework and fittings in toilet areas and kitchens shall be copper chrome plated
with chrome plated wall plates where pipes pass through walls.
3.1.30 Provide dielectric couplings at all junctions of copper and ferrous piping.
3.1.31 Provide for expansion and contraction of all piping systems.
3.1.32 Provide valved drains at low points of all piping systems including each riser. Locate drain
valves in Plant Rooms not higher than 2 metres above floor and pipe to nearest floor drain.
Provide one 300 metre length of heavy duty 25 mm hose for connection to drain cocks with
M-8
VOLUME-III
threaded end caps. At high point in piping provide manual air vent valves piped to nearest
gully.
3.1.33 Prior to installation of hanger rods and other pipe supports, obtain approval from the Contract
Administrator for proposed method of hanging and for exact location of all mounting points.
Submit weights and location of all mechanical equipment and piping to the Contract
Administrator for review well in advance of general construction work to allow sufficient
time for any structural redesign to accommodate the installation.
3.1.34 Make all soldered joints with 95% tin and 5% antimony solder, having a melting point of not
less than 235C. Thoroughly clean all soldered joints before the application of the solder. Cut
pipe square with burrs removed and apply flux before soldering. Make all soldered joints for
tubing larger than 50 mm in size with the simultaneous application of two or three blow
torches.
3.2
PROTECTION
3.2.1
Give the following protective coatings/wrappings to pipework.
3.2.2
Insulated black steel pipework: Two coats of red oxide primer.
3.2.3
Exposed, un-insulated black steel pipework: 1) Two coats of red oxide paint, 2) Two coats of
enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding architectural finishes (in areas
exposed to view).
3.2.4
Concelaed (in shafts) black un-insulated Iron pipework: 1) Two coats of zinc chromate
primer, 2) Two coats of enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding architectural
finishes (in areas exposed to view).
3.2.5
Exposed Un-insulated galvanised Iron pipework: 1) Two coats of zinc chromate primer, 2)
Two coats of enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding architectural finishes
(in areas exposed to view).
3.2.6
Concealed (in shafts) Un-insulated galvanised Iron pipweork: 1) Two coats of zinc chromate
primer, 2) Two coats of coal tar enamel.
3.2.7
Exposed Un-insulated copper pipework: 1) Two coats of clear, synthetic lacquer, 2) Two
coats of enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding architectural finishes (in
areas exposed to view).
3.3
PIPING WITHIN ELECTRICAL PLANTROOMS
3.3.1
Pipework running in electrical plantrooms or over any electrical plant, even at false ceiling
level, shall be without joints wherever possible but, if joints cannot be avoided, they must be
made by welding or brazing as appropriate. High duty capillary fittings are acceptable for
copper services. Normal capillary fittings shall not be acceptable.
3.4
WELDING OF PIPING
3.4.1
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, specified or directed, use welded joints, outlets and
flanges. Welded joints may also be provided elsewhere, at the Contractor's option, except at
points where it may be explicitly specified or shown to leave flanged joints in order to
facilitate future changes.
3.4.2
Welding outlets may be used instead of tees, wherever a branch from a main is two sizes
smaller than the mains.

M-9
VOLUME-III
3.4.3
Whenever welding piping connects to equipment valves or other units needing maintenance,
servicing, or possible removal, flange the connecting joints. Match the pressure rating of the
pipe flanges with the pressure rating of the flanges on the equipment to which the piping
connects. Provide flanged pipe sections to permit removal of equipment components.
3.4.4
Welding process: All sizes use metallic arc process.
3.4.5
Preparation of pipe ends: for thicknesses up to 4.5 mm ends shall be finished square or with
37 bevel with a 1.5 mm band; for thicknesses 4.5 mm to 18 mm inclusive, ends shall be
machined or ground to have a 37 bevel with a 1.5 mm band.
3.4.6
Employ only skilled welders, each holding a currently active certificate, dated within 12
months, from a recognised testing laboratory, indicating satisfactory welding test results in
accordance with the "Recommended Practice and Test for Certificate of Competency of
Oxyacetylene and Metal Arc Welds in Mild Steel Pipework" issued by the Heating and
Ventilating Contractors Association or a locally recognised Certifying body. Retest is
required if welder has not performed welding for a period of 90 days. The Contract
Administrator retains the right to test welders on site.
3.4.7
The Contract Administrator may, from time to time during the progress of the work, select
welded joints which shall be cut out and examined in such a manner as may be required. In
the event of the welded joint in question proving unsatisfactory the whole of the cost of
cutting out, testing and replacing shall be borne by the Contractor. If the weld is passed by the
Contract Administrator as satisfactory, the cost of cutting out, testing and replacing shall be
borne by the Contract at the Daywork Rates.
Penetration tests shall only be required if specified elsewhere. Poor work brought to light by
these examinations would nullify the Employer's obligation in this clause, and all work
considered by the Contract Administrator to be of poor quality would have to be replaced
entirely.
3.4.8
Whenever welding is carried out, the Contractor shall provide all necessary screens and
enclosures as deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator and shall obtain a Hot Works
permit from the Main Contractor.
3.4.9
Where welding is carried out in the proximity of inflammable material, the Contractor shall
take special precautions to protect the building fabric from the risk of fire.
3.4.10 All welds shall be reinforced on the external surfaces run off smoothly at ends with no
undercutting.
3.4.11 Upon completion, all welded joints shall be thoroughly cleaned off with a stiff wire brush
and, after inspection, painted with a coat of zinc phosphate anti-corrosion paint.
3.4.12 No welding will be permitted on any galvanised pipework whatsoever. Black steel fabricated
work can be hot dip galvanised after manufacture.
3.4.13 Where an oxy-acetylene flame is used for cutting, the flame shall be used by a qualified
operative, care being taken to avoid damage to the metallic structure of the tube.
3.4.14 All welded branches shall be formed by burning into the main run and welding on specially
prepared branch shoes which must be the correct size for the diameter of the pipe. In each
case, the position of the hole must be carefully marked out with a scriber using the
appropriate branch shoe, and the edges properly chamfered to form a "vee". In all cases the
welding shall be carried out at floor level in the "hand down" position.

M - 10
VOLUME-III
3.4.15 All welded branches shall be gradually swept as to allow uninterrupted flow of liquid to that
particular branch. If the branch needs to be reduced in size, it shall have an concentric reducer
at least 150 mm downstream of the gradual swept branch.
3.4.16 The following table shows the largest permitted.
Branch
--15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
Main
15 mm
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
3.4.17 The distance between the centres of two adjacent branch welds shall not be less than twice the
diameter of the largest branch.
3.4.18 Joining Alternative: Mechanical fittings similar to "Victaulic Style 77" or approved equal are
permitted for use on heating and chilled water systems for rises and in exposed locations in
mechanical rooms only.
3.4.19 If the Victaulic alternative is chosen, then it must be submitted to the Contract Administrator
prior to installation.
3.4.20 Reinforce piping at all anchor points as shown on the drawing details.
3.4.21 Cap openings in pipes during progress of the work to prevent ingress of dirt and foreign
bodies into the installation. Failure to comply shall mean that the Contract Administrator has
the right to order the pipework be dismantled for as far as considered necessary and the
pipework cleaned internally. Such work to be carried out at no extra cost to the Contract.
3.4.22 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and removal of any stoppage, foreign
matter or air lock, which cannot be remedied by an existing air cock or A.A.V., which is
found to impede the circulation or passage of the medium during or after commissioning of
the systems until the end of the maintenance period, including the making good of all
pipework.
3.4.23 All welded joints on the chilled water pipework for the supplemental chilled water system
shall be tested ultrasonically and witnessed by the Engineer. Contractor to provide a method
statement for ultrasonic weld testing.
END OF SECTION

M - 11
VOLUME-III
HVAC PUMPS

Mechanical Section 23 21 23: HVAC Pumps
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
to, the following:
1.1.2
Chilled water primary and secondary pumps. (End suction and horizontal split case pumps)
1.1.3
Condenser water pumps (Horizontal split case pumps)
1.1.4
Make up water pumps (In-line or End suction water pumps)
1.1.5
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2.1
Sound Control
1.2.2
Vibration Isolation
1.2.3
Insulation
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
SUBMITTALS

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
Administrator.
2.3
END SUCTION BASE MOUNTED CHILLED WATER PUMPS
2.3.1
Pump shall be end suction, vertically split case centrifugal type capable of delivering
litres/second at a total head as scheduled with an efficiency of not less than scheduled.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.3.2
Pump casing shall be cast iron with smooth water passages and fitted with a bronze
replaceable wearing ring.
2.3.3
The impeller supplied for the specified conditions shall be one-piece bronze casting of a
diameter not greater than 80% of the casing cutwater diameter.
2.3.4
Pump shaft shall be carbon steel of a size and design to limit shaft deflection at the stuffing
box to no more than .05mm.
2.3.5
Sealing of the pump liquid cavity shall be accomplished with a face type mechanical seal with
stainless steel stationary seat, carbon washer, ethylene propylene flexible members, brass
metal parts and 18-8 stainless steel spring. Seal shall be mounted over a bronze shaft sleeve.
2.3.6
Pump shall be flexibly coupled to a standard frame open drip proof (ODP) electric motor.
Motor and pump bearing shall be grease lubricated and sized for a minimum of 20,000 hours
B10 life which is equivalent to 100,000 hours average bearing life. Motor and pump shall be
aligned and mounted on a steel base. A coupling guard shall be provided.
2.4
HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASED CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMPS
2.4.1
The secondary chilled water and condenser water pumps are to be constructed of cast iron and
are to be axially split with a low tilted parting angle to allow for lower NPSH requirements
and to minimize pump dimensions all as scheduled. The pumps are of the centrifugal type
capable of delivering litres/second at a total head as scheduled with an efficiency of not less
than scheduled.
2.4.2
The suction and discharge connections shall be on the same elevation and shall be flanged
with British Standard flanges, drilled and tapped for gauge connections. The top of the casing
and the rotating assembly shall be removable without disturbing the piping connections.
2.4.3
The pump shaft shall be constructed of carbon steel, designed for minimum deflection and
vibration. The shaft sleeves shall be stainless steel and fitted with cartridge type mechanical
seals. The seal component shall be of stainless steel construction with carbon/ceramic faces
and EPDM secondary seal. The mechanical seal, shaft sleeve and seal plate shall be easily
removable as a single component.
2.4.4
The pump impeller is to be of bronze construction and to be the fully enclosed, double suction
type and are to be statically and dynamically balanced prior to delivery.
2.4.5
The secondary chilled water pumps shall have variable frequency drive as specified
2.5
INLINE PUMPS
2.5.1
Furnish and install as shown in the drawings and as described in these specifications, vertical
in-line bronze fitted, single stage, single or double suction centrifugal pumps. Each pump
shall be capable of delivering litres per second against a total head as scheduled.
2.5.2
Pumps shall each be close-coupled to a ball-bearing, drip proof totally enclosed BS 5000
Parts 10 and 17 vertical electric motor. Motor shall be of such size that it will operate
continuously without exceeding its kW rating, exclusive of service factor, at the design
capacity and head.
2.5.3
Pump casing shall be constructed in cast iron with PN16 flanges for working pressure up to
12 bars at 65 deg C and ductile iron with PN25 flanges for working pressure of 25 bars at 65

M-4
VOLUME-III
deg C. Models 80mm and larger shall have balanced double volute design to minimize radial
shaft deflection.
2.5.4
Suction and discharge connections shall be the same size flanged and 180 opposite on
centerline for pipeline mounting. Casing shall have bronze replaceable wear ring.
2.5.5
Impeller shall be bronze, fully enclosed, statically, dynamically, and hydraulically balanced.
Motor shaft shall be one-piece stainless steel. Pump shall have stainless steel mechanical shaft
seal of the type multi-spring outside balanced type with secondary seal, carbon rotating face
and silicon carbide stationary seat which are to be properly vented to the suction connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
operation.
3.1.2
otherwise noted.
3.1.3
3.1.4
and grouting.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
PACKAGED PRESSURISATION SETS

Mechanical Section 23 21 24 : Packaged Pressurization Sets
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the factory pre-packaged pressurization sets, as shown on the drawings and
specified herein for the chilled water systems, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.1.2
Expansion tanks.
1.1.3
Pre-packaged pressurization sets.
1.1.4
Sealed Acceptor
1.2
1.2.1
Insulation
1.2.2
Pumps
1.2.3
Electric Motors
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Shop Drawings
1.3.2
Expansion tanks and pressurization sets; piping details.
1.3.3
Product Data
1.3.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
EXPANSION TANKS
2.2.1
Provide diaphragm type expansion tanks integral to the packaged pressurisation sets, and
connect complete with all necessary appurtenances, of ample strength for the pressure to
which they will be subjected.
2.2.2
Tanks to be of quantity and size suitable for system water content, maximum system
temperature, system static pressure and maximum system working pressure, indicated on
drawings, set on suitable supports and provided with all necessary tappings. All tanks to be
constructed in accordance with the local codes, but steel plate should not less than 5 mm
thick.
Provide the factory mounted tanks with pre-piped expansion inlet connection, make-up water,
drain, and vent connection. Pipe drain to building drainage system with indirect connections.
2.2.3

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.3
MAKE UP PRESSURIZATION SET
2.3.1
The make-up pressurization sets shall be packaged at the manufacturer's works and when
delivered to site ready for commissioning with the minimum site works.
2.3.2
A fully automatic make-up unit comprising the following shall be provided. Duty and standby
pumps of bronze construction, pressure gauge, high and low pressure switches for
interlocking with the system equipment served in fault conditions. Gate valves are to be
provided to enable any pump or vessel to be removed without shutting down the system.
2.3.3
A mild steel cubical with hinged door housing, door interlocated mains isolator, individual
motor starters, fuses, hand/off/auto switches (one per pump) and a selection switch to enable
either pump to be duty while the other is on automatic standby. Indicator lights for pump
running, pump tripped and power on, Anti-condensation heater and volt free contacts for
remote monitoring for pump running, pump tripped, high pressure, and low pressure.
2.3.4
Units standard with test button, pump start frequency/leakage detector, alternative pump
starting on the two pump sets.
2.3.5
Provide break tank low water level warning alarms, high system temperature alarm, hours run
meter, motor starter(s) if not in local motor control centre, complete with run and trip lamps,
and pump suction strainer(s).
2.3.6
Water treatment systems shall not be introduced into the break tank.
2.3.7
Provide volt free contacts to enable all alarm functions to be annunciated to the fire alarm
panel as well as locally at the unit and monitoring functions to be controlled and annunciated
to the local MCC panel as well as locally at the unit.
2.4
SELED ACCEPTOR
2.4.1
Provide a pressurisation system that seals the system expansion in a sealed tank at
atmospheric pressure, as apposed to using fixed air cushion bladder in the tank. This will
enable us to use of a pressurisation system which will enable large expansion volumes to be
handled with a system that is much smaller in volume/size.
2.4.2
The unit is to be supplied with a transfer/control package including microprocessor control,

accumulator, backflow preventer and the necessary valves etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Each tank to be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times maximum operating pressure.
3.1.2
Install all pressurisation systems according to manufacturers installation and alignment

instructions.
END OF SECTION

M-3
VOLUME-III
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
FOR CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
AND FOR THE BOILER HOT WATER SYSTEM

Mechanical Section23 25 00: Chemical Treatment & Water Filtration
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
TREATMENT PROGRAMME
1.1.1
Normal Treatment Program

The complete recirculation water chemical treatment program shall utilize corrosion & Scale
Inhibitor fed on a continuous basis. The treatment program shall also include an Alternating
Slug application of Non Oxidizing Micro biocide to handle micro organism problem. When
required PH adjusting facilities shall also be included.
1.1.2
Initial Dosages
The initial dosage shall be a slug dosage of chemical sufficient to establish the desired
residual. It shall be one time application based on the system volume and product residual.
1.1.3
Start Up Treatment Levels

The new system shall be started with double or triple the normal levels of continuously fed
products to ensure the rapid development of corrosion inhibiting films. The high treatment
dosage for two or three days shall ensure the residuals being brought to their normal levels.
1.1.4
Maintenance Chemicals
a)
Corrosion & Scale Inhibitor

The product shall be either a Synergistic Al Organic formulation Corrosion or Scale
inhibitor based on Phosphonates or a Zinc Phosphate based formulation with
dispersants for maintenance of clean heat transfer surfaces. The product shall be
dosed continuously based on the rate of blow down.
b)
Biocide 1
The product shall be a powerful non-oxidizing quaternary ammonium compound
based micro-biocide in liquid form, which controls bacterial and algae growth in
cooling water systems. The product shall be shock dosed alternatively with Biocide
2 to prevent the immunity of the biocide to micro organism .The product shall be
dosed once a month based on the system volume.
c)
Biocide 2
The product shall be a powerful broad spectrum activity non-oxidizing isothiozaline
based micro-biocide in liquid form, which controls bacteria, fungi, algae growth in
cooling water systems. It should also be effective against Legionela Pneumophila and
sulphate reducing bacteria. The product shall be shock dosed alternatively with
Biocide 2 to prevent the immunity of the biocide to micro organism. The product is
dosed once a month based on the system volume.
1.2
CLEANING &PRE-TREATMENT CHEMICALS

a)
Pre-treatment Chemical
This product shall be a liquid blend of Sequestrant and Dispersant designed for the
gradual on or of line cleaning of non potable water systems to remove grease ,debris

M-2
VOLUME-III
and mil scale. The chemical shall be dosed during precommissioning of the system,
normally during start up.
b)
High Level Passivation

The Corrosion & Scale Inhibitor shall be dosed at double the normal levels for two to
three days to insure the rapid development of corrosion inhibitor films.
1.3
OPERATING PARAMETERS
The cooling tower parameters shall be maintained and operated under the following
conditions;
1.4
PARAMETER
OPERATION RANGE
PH
Total Dissolved Solids (mg/l)
Total Suspended Solids (mg/l)
Total Alkalinity (mg/l)
Zinc (mg/l)
Phosphonate (mg/l)
Inorganic Phosphates (mg/l)
Total Hardness (mg/l)
Total Iron (mg/l)
Chlorides (mg/l)
Oil& Grease (mg/l)
Corosion Rate
Total Viable Count
Sulfate Reducing Bacteria
Scaling
Mg X Sio2 (mg/l)
Silica (mg/l)
8.2 8.8
1500 Max
10 -50
200 -300
1-3
2
6 -8
200 -300
<3
< 400
- 10
5 mils per year
x 105
100 / 100 ml
30 mg / cm2 / year
< 35,000
100 -125
GUARANTEES:
a)
Corrosion rates -
For Mild Steel :

Copper
:
SS
:
3 - 5 MPY.
0.5 MPY.
< 0.1MPY.
b)
Scaling
15 30mg/cm2/year.
c)
Total Viable Count
5 x 10 5
d)
Sulphate Reducing Bacterias
100/100 ml.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CHEMICAL DOSAGES
2.1.1
Maintenance Chemical for one year

M-3
VOLUME-III
Product
Dosage
(ppm)
Initial
fill
(kgs)
Maint.
(kg/hr)
Kgs/day
Kgs/
Kg/
month year
Pack size Drums

per Drum
/year
Corrosion &
Scale Inhibitor
Slit Dispersant
Biocide 1
80- 100
0.6179
3090
28
110
193
34
Biocide- 2
Biodispersant
0.0386
100
90
1080
25
44
100
90
1080
25
44
108
25
10
Initial Fill & High Level Passivation

Product
Dosage
(ppm)
Initial
fill
(kgs)
Maint.
(kg/hr)
Kgs/day
Kgs/
month
Kg/
year
Pack size Drums

per Drum
/year
115
35
100
45
25
100
45
25
1500
600
28
22
250
High Level
Passivation
Biocide 1
Biocide- 2
Cleaning
Chemical
NOTE :
a)
All hourly chemical consumption shall be based on the following calculation:

Quantity (kgs/hr) = Blow down m3/hr x Dosage mg/l
1000
b)
All slug dosing of biocide shall be based on the following calculation:

Quantity (kgs/dose) = System Volume m3 x Dosage mg/l
1000
2.2
AUTOMATIC CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLED CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEM
2.2.1
Concept
The automatic dosing system shall provide an effective and foolproof way of Corrosion
inhibitor dosing. The system shall be based on Conductivity control, blow down and makeup
quantity, with ancillary equipment selected to meet the exact application.
2.3
FLUSHING AND CLEANING

Flush all fluid-carrying systems after completion with a stream of water or appropriate fluid at
the highest obtainable pressure and velocity for a period of two hours. Discharge the flushing

M-4
VOLUME-III
fluid through all strainers and out through line sized valves with hose ends. Clean all strainers,
Repeat flushing operation to the approval of the Consultant until no foreign matter collects in
the strainers. Drain all tanks and clean tanks.
If the water pressure normally available on site is, in the Consultants opinion, inadequate to
perform proper flushing, then The Contractor shall provide at his own expense, pumps, tanks,
etc. to give pressure and volume flows to the Consultants satisfaction.
Ensure that all valves including control valves are fully open during the flushing and
cleaning. Before starting up any fans, inspect and dean the inside of all air handling systems
including fans, ducts, coils, terminal units, to ensure that they are free from dust and debris.
Carry out additional cleaning operations of systems as specified in other sections of this
Division.
2.4
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM TREATMENT (CHEMICAL CLEANING)

The chilled water system shall be prepared as detailed elsewhere herein-The system will then
be further treated.
Prior to testing and commissioning, the consultant shall be provided with water conditioning
program, to control water quality. Cleaning shall be supervised, and program of conditioning
administered by the conditioning company.
For Pre-commission cleaning, the system shall be dosed with Die prescribed amount of the
non-acid cleaning agent and a surfactant as advised by the chemical company.
Cleaner shall be run into the system and retained for a period of 72 hrs. or more as advised by
the chemical company, at the end of this period the system shall be drained and flushed with
clean water.
All strainers and trapping points shall be inspected, and any debris removed.
System shall be refilled with clean water, re-circulated or run through for a further four hours,
and again drained and flushed. The flushing shall continue till the effluent is clear, colourless,
odourless, free from suspended solids and such that the iron level is not more than 10 ppm
and the conductivity is no more than 30 s/cm greater than the make up water.
upon completion of flushing all strainers shall he inspected and any debris removed.
The system shall be refilled with clean water and a specified amount of inhibitor added.
The Chemical Company representative shall conduct an analysis of the systems water after
the cleaning operation, and shall submit a roped to the Consultant.
Note: The Mechanical Contractor shall advise on the holding capacity of the systems to be
cleaned to the Chemical Company, in order that tie amount of cleaner required may be
calculated. The mechanical Contractor shall provide automatic closing system complete with
chemical tank, pump and control panel.
2.5
CHILLED WATER & BOILER HW SYSTEM TREATMENT (CHEMICAL DOSAGE)
2.5.1
Initial Requirement of Chemicals:

The quantities shown below are indicative. The actual quantities to be checked by the
specialist supplier based on the system demand.

M-5
VOLUME-III
Cleaning Chemical
Corrosion Inhibitor
Microbiocide
Biocide
Passivation Chemical
2.5.2
= 100 -150 Kgs

= 200 250 Kgs
= 10 Kgs
= 50 Kgs
= 100 150 Kgs
Chemicals for one Year consumption:

Cleaning Chemical
Corrosion Inhibitor
Microbiocide
Passivation Chemical
= 4 drums
= 8 drums
= 2 drums
= 4 drums
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Engage a suitable Water Treatment Specialist to provide a supervised water treatment

program for a period of one year from the date of initial treatment, for the systems and/or
equipment indicated hereafter:
3.1.2
The Water Treatment Specialist to have at least one officer or official holding a college or
university degree in chemistry, chemical engineering, or sanitary engi-neering. He should
have at least 10 years' experience in treating the water in systems of similar size and capacity
and be in active responsible charge of all treatment work.
3.1.3
Provide 8 hours of training to Employer's personnel in the proper operation of systems and
application of written instructions.
3.1.4
Provide all chemicals, chemical feeding equipment and testing equipment, as described in the
following paragraphs.
3.1.5
Obtain samples from all systems at least once per month for one year and analyse samples and
furnish written reports and recommendations to Employer 's and/or Main Contractor.
3.1.6
pH adjustment, inhibitor and dispersant tanks shall be shipped in shipping containers. Pump
suction assemblies previously specified will pump directly from these shipping drums.
3.1.7
Installation and startup shall be supervised by factory representatives of the equipment

manufacturer and chemical manufacturer.
3.2
WATER TREATMENT PROGRAMME
3.2.1
Obtain an approved representative sample of the water supply and perform the following
analyses:
Analyses
Sodium
Silica
Calcium
Magnesium
Iron and aluminium oxides
Bicarbonates
Carbonates
Phosphates
Carbon dioxide (free CO2)
Submittal Concentrations
ppm as Na
ppm as SiO2
ppm as Ca
ppm as Mn
ppm as Fe2O3AL3O
ppm as CaCO3
ppm as CL
ppm as PO4
ppm

M-6
VOLUME-III
Total hardness
Total dissolved solids
Suspended solids
Free acid
ppm as CaCO3
ppm
ppm
ppm as CaCO3
3.2.2
Based on this analysis prepare and submit a water treatment programme for approval.
3.3
PRELIMINARY CLEANING
3.3.1
Clean new piping internally by flushing prior to the application of pressure tests, and before
the chemical cleanout procedures specified herein. Provide temporary strainers at the inlet to
the chilled water and hot water pumps before the start of cleaning procedures. 3.3.2 Block off
and isolate circulating pumps, cooling coils, heating coils and heat exchangers during the
preliminary flushing and draining process.
3.4
PIPE CLEANING
3.4.1
All Piping Systems
3.4.1.1 Provide temporary connections with valves to fill and drain the piping and equipment after
completion of the chemical cleanout procedure. Provide temporary blind flanges and/or caps
to isolate the piping and equipment.
3.4.1.2 Provide temporary piping connections, valves, strainers, bypasses, and blank connections
where required to clean out systems.
3.4.1.3 After each hydrostatic leak testing procedure is complete, drain the system until empty. The
piping systems are internally chemically treated and protected during the hydrostatic testing
procedure as described in the Section entitled "Testing, Balancing and Adjusting".
Thoroughly clean the piping and flush as follows:
3.4.1.3.1 Cleaning will not take place more than 14 days prior to start-up. Give the chemical
manufacturer's representative at least 30 days notice prior to start-up.
3.4.1.3.2 Prior to the start of the chemical cleaning procedure submit three lengths of the piping
installed on this project to the chemical manufacturer for analysis of the interior coating on
the piping. Refer to the Section entitled "Testing, Balancing and Adjusting" for additional
requirements.
3.4.1.3.3 Before the chemical cleaning procedure is begun, install in each closed recirculating water
system a temporary skid mounted portable side stream filtering system. The filtering
assembly shall have 150mm flanged connections and multiple cartridge filters capable of at
least 2500 l/sec, an integral Barco type flow venturi, and be pressure rated for the system to
which it is connected. Install the filter cartridges and change out until the system is clean.
Initially provide twenty (20) micron cartridges, the intermediate set five (5) microns, and the
final set one (1) micron.
3.4.1.3.4 Add chemical pipe cleaning compound as recommended by the chemical manufacturer's
representative to the system simultaneously with the filling of the system.
3.4.1.3.5 Circulate the cleaning compounds in the system for the time period specified by the
chemical manufacturer.
3.4.1.3.6 Drain the system until empty from its lowest point.

M-7
VOLUME-III
3.4.1.3.7 Fill the system again with fresh water and flush thoroughly until clean water is obtained.
(Maintain continuous blow-down and make-up as required during flushing operation). Use a
one (1) micron cartridge type strainer element at end of drain hose to confirm that discharge
water is free of foreign material.
3.4.1.3.8 The cleaning and flushing procedure must be approved in writing by the chemical
manufacturer. The chemical manufacturer's representative shall supervise and certify in
writing the cleaning and flushing of the piping systems. The Contractor shall provide and
install injection pumps, water meters, and coupon racks to control and monitor the cleaning
process.
3.4.1.4 Additional Requirements for Hot Water Systems:
3.4.1.4.1 Fill system with City water; start circulation pump and vent high points manually until all air
is released from the system.
3.4.1.4.2 Flush the system with fresh water, drain a second time and refill. After final filling, the pH
of the water must not exceed the pH of the fresh incoming water by more than 0.5 pH.
3.4.1.4.3 Introduce the chemical cleaning solution into the system gradually by injecting into the
suction side of the circulating pump, or by means of a bypass chemical feeder. Slowly raise
and then maintain the temperature of the circulating hot water at 50C.
3.4.1.4.4 While the water is being heated and circulated open each drain connection for a short flow.
Repeat at hourly intervals. Replace water drained during blow-down with chemical solution
as required until air is eliminated from the system. The chemical cleanout procedure shall be
continuous in this manner for two full 8-hour periods.
3.4.1.4.5 At the conclusion of the chemical cleanout period completely drain the entire system and
allow to cool. Flush out with fresh City water prior to final activation of the system. Remove
temporary equipment and strainers, reconnect permanent pump and replace items previously
removed. Immediately add required treatment as specified to passivate metal and prevent
corrosion of cleaned metal surfaces.
3.5
FILLING OF WATER SYSTEM
3.5.1
After completion of chemical cleanout, fill each water system with fresh water, air vent, and
immediately add chemical treatment to passivate metal.
3.6
CHEMICALS
3.6.1
Furnish the following chemicals, to match existing, as required for the system until the Main
Contractor has issued a "Certificate of Practical Completion":
3.6.1.1 pH Adjustment Chemicals: Provide suitable pH adjustment chemicals in 200 litre drums to
control pH at the 7.8-8.8 level.
3.6.1.2 Corrosion Inhibitor: Provide 100 litre drums of liquid corrosion inhibitor. Provide nonpolluting corrosion inhibitor, which complies with local regulations covering waste water
discharge, and as permitted by the local authorities having jurisdiction.
3.6.1.3 Dispersant: Provide 100 litre drums of dispersant. Provide non-polluting dispersant which
complies with local regulations covering waste water discharge, and as permitted by the local
authorities having jurisdiction.

M-8
VOLUME-III
3.6.1.4 Biocide: Provide 100 litre drums of biocide. Provide non-polluting biocide, which complies
with local regulations covering waste water discharge, and as permitted by the local
authorities for the local water characteristics.
3.7
TECHNICAL SERVICE AND CONTROL
3.7.1
For a period of one year after completion of system commissioning, be on call at no

additional cost to the Employer to make on-site inspections of equipment during scheduled or
emergency outages in order to properly evaluate their effect on the water treatment
programme.
3.7.2
Insulate water treatment piping and tanks containing chilled water and hot water in
accordance with insulation material as specified for the respective system.
3.7.3
Wherever possible, all water treatment equipment is to be located in mechanical equipment

rooms.
END OF SECTION

M-9
VOLUME-III
DUCTWORK

Mechanical Section 23 31 00 : Ductwork
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Low Pressure Ductwork.
1.1.2
Fume Hood Exhaust Ductwork.
1.1.3
Duct cleaning
1.2
1.2.1
Sound Control
1.2.2
Vibration Control
1.2.3
Building Management Control System
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
1.3.2
ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
1.3.3
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3.4
NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3.5
UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3.6
ASHRAE - Handbook 1997 Fundamentals; Chapter 32 - Duct Design.
1.3.7
ASHRAE - Handbook 1996 HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 16 - Duct Construction.
1.3.8
ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
1.3.9
ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
1.3.10 ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
1.3.11 ASTM A 312 - Seamless & Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
1.3.12 ASTM A 366 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
1.3.13 ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip.
1.3.14 ASTM A 568 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold
Rolled.
1.3.15 ASTM A 569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip,
Commercial Quality.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.3.16 ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3.17 ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.3.18 ASTM C 14 Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe.
1.3.19 ASTM C 443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
1.3.20 AWS D9.1-90 - Sheet Metal Welding Code.
1.3.21 NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.3.22 NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
1.3.23 NFPA 91 Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists &
Noncombustible Solids.
1.3.24 NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
1.3.25 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
1.3.26 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
1.3.27 SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
1.2.28 DW 144 Specification for Sheet metal ductwork
1.3.28 UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.1 Submit shop drawings & product data under provisions of General Conditions & Division 1.
1.4.1.2 Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start
of work for the various duct construction, exhaust and laboratory exhaust systems.
1.4.1.3 Submit full duct shop drawings for areas of the building detailing duct equipment, duct and
control devices.
1.4.1.4 Submit samples for stainless steel duct fabrication. One sample for field weld and one sample
for shop weld.
1.4.1.5 Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure,
and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
1.4.1.6 Fume Hood Exhaust Ductwork One hour Fire Wrap (Fire rated ductwork).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
A firm with at least five years of successful installation experience on similar project.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.1.3
For duct material schedule refer item 2.6 below.
2.2
GALVANIZED STEEL (GI) DUCTWORK
2.2.1
General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or

UL 181.
2.2.2
Steel Ducts: ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc-coating
designation of G90 in conformance with ASTM A525. Mill phosphatized for exposed
locations.
2.2.3
Stainless steel ducts: ASTM A167 stainless steel sheets; Type 316 with epoxy coating on the
interior and exterior. Sheet metal gauge and construction shall conform to recommendations
in SMACNA / DW 144 duct construction standards, metal and flexible, latest edition.
2.2.4
Flexible Ducts: Interlocking spiral of galvanized steel or aluminium construction or fabric

supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG (500
Pa) positive and 1.5 inches WG (375 Pa) negative for low pressure ducts.
2.2.5
Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fibre insulation, enclosed
by seamless aluminium pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75
degrees F mean temperature.
2.2.6
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
2.2.7
Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials;
liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
2.2.8
Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously
threaded.
2.4
STAINLESS STEEL DUCTWORK
2.4.1
Stainless Steel Duct - Identified as SS 4 Inch w.g. Duct Construction
2.4.2
Provide stainless steel round exhaust ducting from each fume hood to point of connection to
combined exhaust ductwork, as indicated on drawings. Ducts and connections from fume
hoods shall be in accordance with this Section. The exhaust systems shall be for the use of
corrosive, flammable and reactive material and shall be constructed and installed in
accordance with UBC Standard (1999 Edition) "Blower and Exhaust System for Dust, Stock
and Vapor Removal."
2.4.3
Construct ductwork from ASTM A312 Type 316L stainless steel and built for structural
strength and stability and of a thickness not less than 18 gage.
2.4.4
Joints between ductwork and fitting shall be butt welded. Joints and seams shall be Heliarc or
Mig welded using 18-8 stainless steel rod or wide type 318.
2.4.5
Elbows and angle to have the same gauge as ductwork, inside radius not less than width of
duct.
2.4.6
Fit the fume hood duct system with copper-grounding straps, connected to the duct and to an
effective grounding system.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5
DUCT FABRICATION
2.5.1
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing,
and sealing for pressure classes indicated.
2.5.2
Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of
equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted
except by written permission.
2.5.3
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centreline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [airfoil]
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal
with glass fiber insulation.
2.5.4
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence. Divergence upstream of
equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 30
degrees.
2.5.5
Provide easements where ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements
exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
2.5.6
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
2.5.7
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
2.5.8
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degrees
conical tee connections may be used.
2.6
DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
HVAC Supply , Return , Fresh air & General Exhaust Ducting
Staircase & Lift pressurization ductwork inside masonary shafts
Smoke Exhaust Ducting , Staircase & Lift pressurization
ductwork within false ceiling voids
Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork
Laundry and Dishwashers Exhaust Ductwork
MATERIAL
Galvanized steel (GI)
Galvanized steel (GI)
Galvanized steel-18gFire Rated for 2 hrs
Stainless steel, 316L
Aluminium material
2.6.1
The return air ducts used for smoke extract in case of fire shall be 2 hours fire rated by
applying flame bar coating or equal approved material.
2.7
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
2.7.1
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
Do not exceed rated pressure of ductwork. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a
time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or
bypass during cleaning.

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.7.2
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into
ductwork for cleaning purposes.
2.8
LEAKAGE TESTS
2.8.1
Test all ducts.
2.8.2
Test Equipment: Use equipment arranged as recommended for testing and balancing
specified in Section xxxx.
2.8.3
Field Test Procedures
2.8.4
Seal openings in duct section to be tested.
2.8.5
Test apparatus to test section of duct, using a flexible duct connection or hose.
2.8.6
Close damper on blower suction side to prevent excessive build up of pressure.
2.8.7
Start blower and gradually open damper on suction side of blower.
2.8.8
Build up pressure in duct test section to 3 inches w.g. for 2-inch w.g. duct construction, 4
inches w.g. for 3-inch w.g. duct construction and 5 inches w.g. for 4-inch w.g. duct
construction.
2.8.9
Record indicated pressure or instrument that is connected to section of duct under test.
2.8.10
Maintain this pressure for ten minutes and check for audible leaks. Mark location of each
leak.
2.8.11
Reduce pressure to 0 inch WG and repair visual and audible leaks.
2.8.12
Upon completion of repairs, build up pressure to 1.25 times system design operating
pressure, and read leakage pressure on instrument connected across test apparatus orifice.
The design operating pressure for the exhaust or return system shall be equal to the total
static pressure developed by the fan.
2.8.13 The design operating pressure for air conditioning supply side shall be equal to the total static
pressure developed by the supply fan minus final filter pressure drop (filter located
downstream of the fan) and the cooling coil pressure drop. Leakage C.F.M. to be read by
consulting chart calibrated with orifice diameter. If no leakage exists, zero pressure
differential shall be indicated. Leakage C.F.M. shall not exceed 1%.
2.8.14 Engage the testing agency specified in Section, to verify the leakage tests of ducts and submit
a certification attesting to the results obtained.
2.8.15 Tested sections of ductwork to be visually marked by agency with certification sticker and
initials of field test inspector. Tests shall be made before duct sections are concealed.
2.8.16 Provide Access Doors: Hinged, airtight, access doors shall be provided where required for
access to control elements or for inspection. Access doors for inspection and cleaning should
be located not less than 10 metres apart through the entire duct run. Size doors for
M-6
VOLUME-III
maintenance of concealed items. Construct access doors in accordance with Figure 2-12 of
the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,". Furnish hinged doors except where space does
not allow the door to swing open furnish removable doors. Insulate access doors where ducts
are insulated with same insulation as on ductwork or housing.
2.8.17 Outlet Frames: Where ducts terminate at grilles, registers or diffusers, furnish with angle or
channel iron frames with mitered welded corners and with provisions for attaching said
grilles, registers, or diffusers.
2.8.18 Install six-inch flexible connections between rigid ductwork or casing and fans. Connections
shall be of fireproof material and shall withstand temperatures and pressure involved. Allow
at least 1 inch slack in these connections to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fan to
ductwork. The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar
frames at each end to prevent air leakage.
2.8.18.1 Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognised industry practices
which will achieve airtight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated
service. Install each run with minimum 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal
surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type,
which will hold ducts true-to-shape, and to prevent buckling.
3.1.2
Seal ductwork, after installation, in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
3.1.3
Supply concrete inserts for installation by others during casting for support of ductwork, as
required to avoid delays in work.
3.1.4
Complete fabrication of work at the Project site as necessary to match shop fabricated work
and accommodate installation requirements.
3.1.5
Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid
diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations
or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable
space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls,
overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of
building. Limit clearance to 1/2 where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of
ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork
for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces,
conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or
above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as
specifically shown. Co-ordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and
similar finished work.
3.1.6
Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge
as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".
3.1.7
Co-ordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,

equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

M-7
VOLUME-III
3.1.8
Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA.
3.1.9
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in
insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
3.1.10 Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
3.1.11 Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches (150 to 3300mm) above floor. Arrange door swings so that
fan static pressure holds door in closed position.
3.1.12 Connect terminal units to ducts directly or with one-foot (300-mm) maximum length of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
3.1.13 During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.1.14 Provide air leakage tests for supply, return, fresh air, exhaust ducts and submit data for
approval.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
AIR CHAMBERS AND PLENUMS

Mechanical Section 23 32 00: Air Chambers and Plenums
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the air chambers and plenums as shown on the drawings and specified herein,
including, but not limited to, the following.
1.1.2
Field fabricated air conditioning plants.
1.1.3
Return and extract fan plenums.
1.1.4
Fresh air intake and discharge air plenums.
1.1.5
Supply air diffuser plenums.
1.2
1.2.1
Ductwork General
1.2.2
Low Pressure Ductwork
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Shop Drawings:
1.3.2
Per Sections Air chamber and plenum construction details, double wall casing construction
details.
1.3.3
Product Data:
1.3.4
Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR CHAMBERS AND PLENUMS
2.1.1
Provide air chambers for field assembled air supply apparatus, starting from outdoor air
opening in building and/or starting from return air duct (whichever results in the greater
length) to the supply duct, entirely of "double-wall" construction.
2.1.2
Blanking plates at architectural louvers where shown on drawings.
2.1.3
Construct the sheets comprising the casing panels of not less than 1 mm thick galvanised
steel. In portions of apparatus for which duct lining is specified, perforate the inner sheet
(instead of solid) and use "Fiberglas" sonic liner or equal as the insulating material. Construct
each panel of 2 such sheets, spaced sufficiently far apart to include a layer of 50 mm thick
fibrous glass 96 Kg/m3 density insulating board. Butt top edges of vertical panel into the
bottom of the horizontal or sloping top panels with the joint fully caulked. Form the interior
top and bottom edges of the casing with continuous angle caulked where adhering to casing.
Form panels occurring at corners of casings to "L" shape so that no joint occurs at such
corners. Make vertical and horizontal seams (connecting any panels) with caulked 35 mm x
35 mm x 10 mm angles. In addition provide necessary internal structural bracing members.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.1.4
Caulk joints to make them airtight. Gasket the bottoms of air chambers at the floor to prevent
air leakage. Provide knee braces and additional bracing for chamber roofs, as required, to
prevent sagging.
2.1.5
Place longitudinal reinforcing angles on the inside of the casing in accordance with the
following schedule:
Height of Side Walls or
Width of Roof
Up to 2 m 2 m to 3 m 3 m
to 4 m Over 4 m
Number of Angles
Angle Spacing
0 1 2 Variable
Middle 1/2 points 1.3 m centres
2.1.6
Provide angle size of 35 mm x 35 mm x 3 mm up to 4 m casing length, and 45 mm x 45 mm x

5 mm over 4 m casing.
2.1.7
Provide air chambers and plenums for extract fans of "Single casing" construction of No. 1.5
mm thick galvanized iron braced and stiffened on the outside by means of 50 mm x 50 mm x
6 mm steel angles, or with standing seam panels not to exceed 630 mm in width. Provide
standing seams with additional right angle bend and cap with 1.2 mm thick galvanised "U"
cap over entire length of seam.
2.1.8
Provide discharge and intake air chambers and plenums required herein for connecting up the
fresh air intake openings to the various systems, as shown on the Drawings, of No. 1.5 mm
thick galvanized sheet steel construction, braced and stiffened on outside by means of 50 mm
x 50 mm x 6 mm steel angles, or with standing seam panels not to exceed 630 mm in width.
Standing seams shall have additional right angle bend and shall be capped with 1.2 mm thick
galvanized "U" cap over entire length of seam.
2.1.9
Provide at least 1 access door or the number of access doors as shown on the Drawings for
each sheet metal plenum or chamber. Provide 2 door latches operable from both sides of
casing. Provide extra heavy, zinc plated, 150 mm T-hinges and minimum of 2 per door.
Provide doors felted or with rubber gaskets so as to make them airtight. Make doors with
inner and outer shells 50 mm apart so that they may be properly insulated and properly
operated. Provide doors not smaller than 500 mm x 1000 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Provide drain pan construction for air intake and discharge plenums bottom portion of 1.5 mm
thick aluminum sheet metal constructed and braced to support a man's weight with (2) coats
mastic sealant at all joints. Pitch bottom of plenums connected to outdoors for drainage or to
drainage outlets located within.
END OF SECTION

M-3
VOLUME-III
DAMPERS

Mechanical Section 23 33 13: Dampers
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the dampers as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.1.2
Automatic damper installation.
1.1.3
Fire dampers.
1.1.4
Volume control dampers.
1.1.5
Back draft dampers.
1.1.6
Motorized fire/smoke dampers.
1.1.7
Automatic Fire & Smoke drop Curtains
1.2
1.2.1
Ductwork - General
1.2.2
Low Pressure Ductwork
1.2.3
Building Management System
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
NFPA 90A Installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.
1.3.2
SMACNA Duct construction standards.
1.3.3
UL 33 Heat responsive links for fire protection service
1.3.4
UL 555 Fire dampers and ceiling dampers
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings:
1.4.2
Submit size, location and quantity of all dampers. Submit damper construction details.
1.4.3
Product Data:
1.4.4
1.4.5
The Contractor to provide schedule of all fire dampers and smoke dampers to allow for
checking and inspection by the Contract Administrator and fire officials before Hand Over.

M-2
VOLUME-III
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
AUTOMATIC DAMPER INSTALLATION
2.2.1
Install automatic dampers, as indicated on the Drawings or as required, in inlet ducts and/or
plenums, discharge ducts and/or plenums, from extract fans, etc. These dampers to be
furnished by the manufacturer of the automatic control system or the air handling unit
manufacturer as necessary.
2.3
FIRE DAMPERS
2.3.1
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555 and as indicated.
2.3.2
Provide fire dampers in ducts piercing shaft walls, floors, fire rated ceilings and fire rated
partitions. All fire dampers, mounting frames and sleeves shall be to a pattern approved by
the Local Civil and Fire Defence Association and the Municipality Building Regulations
Control Officer. Provide conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the
dampers.
2.3.3
All fire dampers shall have approval from the Civil Defence before submitted to the
consultant for approval.
2.3.4
Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanised steel, 22 gauge (0.76mm) frame and 16 gauge
(1.5mm) flap, two layers 0.125 inch (3.2mm) ceramic fibre on top side, and one layer on
bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
2.3.5
Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanised steel, 22 gauge (0.76mm) frame, stainless steel
closure spring, and light weight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket closure.
2.3.6
Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanised steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless
steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air
stream only for ducts up to 12 inches (300mm) in height.
2.3.7
Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gauge (1.5mm) galvanised steel frame and
blades, oil impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plate steel axles, 1/8 x
inch (3.2 x 12.7 mm) plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade
stops, and lock.
2.3.8
Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for
combinations fire/balancing dampers.
2.3.9
Factory galvanise or factory paint with one coat of rust inhibiting paint over entire fire
damper assembly before installation.
2.3.10
Provide all motorised dampers and fire smoke dampers with micro switches to provide a
signal to the BMS to give a fire damper closed alarm. Wiring to BMS by BMS SubContractor.
2.4
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
2.4.1
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA construction standards, and as indicated.

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.4.2
Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm).
2.4.3
Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72
inch (300 x 1825 mm). Assemble centre and edge crimped blades in prime coated or
galvanised channel frame with suitable hardware.
2.4.4
Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade
dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
2.4.5
Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where
rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750mm) provide regulator at both ends.
2.4.6
On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adaptors.
2.4.7
Provide actuators, motors, all accessories required where motorized dampers are specified.
2.4.8
Provide volume control dampers as shown on the Drawings and as required by Contract
Administrator and Commissioning specialist, whether they are 'in-house' to the Contractor or
not in the various branches of the ductwork for use in balancing the system. Dampers are to
be installed separate and independent from the registers hereinafter specified to be set behind
supply air grilles.
2.4.9
Provide multi-blade dampers in ducts above 600 mm in width or 600 mm in height.
2.4.10 On all dampers located above inaccessible plaster or drywall ceilings provide remote gear
operators.
2.4.11 Provide volume dampers of the quadrant type, of heavy construction, pivoted to turn easily
and provided with approved operating and locking devices mounted on outside of the duct in
an accessible place.
2.5
PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
2.5.1
Pressure relief dampers shall be manufactured to size and schedule shown on drawings. Back
draft dampers shall be low leakage with parallel blades and neoprene edge seals
2.5.2
Dampers frames shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel with Aluminium blades.
Blade stub shafts shall be brass with PVC bearings. Sealing Strips on blades shall be
polyester foam.
2.5.3
Pressure relief damper shall be multi-parallel blade with spring, factory tested and certified
for the pressure rating . All pressure relief dampers shall be rated to 30Pa pressure. Each
damper shall be certified and marked for the required
2.6
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
2.6.1
Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving
equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
2.6.2
Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge (1.5
mm) galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with centre pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch
(150 mm) width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner
with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to
permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.7
MOTORISED COMBINED SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS (FSDS)
2.7.1
Smoke/Fire damper shall be classified by UL as a leakage rated damper for use in smoke
control system.
2.7.2
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555 (Fire Damper) and UL 55S (Smoke
Damper), class I.
2.7.3
Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers shall have a fire resistant rating of 1 hour and minimum
air leakage class II with elevated test temperature of 250 F. It shall be tested at 2400 FPM air
velocity at 4.5 inch static pressure to be rated at 2000 FPM air velocity at 4 inch static
pressure. It shall be fitted with a spring return actuator and Thermoelectric Tripping Device
with temperature rating of 165 F (74 C). The device shall cut off power supply to actuator in
case of fire that will activate the spring return to close the damper blades.
2.7.4
Damper frame shall be 5 x 7/8 x 16 gauge galvanised steel hat channel.
2.7.5
Blades shall be roll formed single thickness 16 gauge galvanised steel, 8 inch maximum
width parallel action.
2.7.6
Axles shall be 1/2 square plated solid steel.
2.7.7
Bearing shall be oil impregnated bronze.
2.7.8
Blade edge seals, as required, shall be high temperature silicon rubber and metallic
compression seals shall be used to control leakage at jambs. Frame caulking shall consist of
UL listed sealant.
2.7.9
Each motorised smoke damper shall be provided with UL approved electric actuator, motor
etc, and shall be connected (BY HARD WIRE) to and operable from smoke control panel and
fire alarm system and monitored by BMS.
2.7.10 Smoke /fire dampers shall be approved by Civil defence.

2.8
SMOKE DAMPERS
2.8.1
Provide automatic smoke dampers of size and location as indicated on the Drawings. Provide
dampers with factory installed motors and position switches to suit the local single phase
electrical voltage supply. Motors shall be wired for fail-safe closed or open operation as
required. Provide each motor with a disconnect switch.
2.8.2
A combination fire damper/automatic smoke damper may be used where fire dampers are
used in conjunction with smoke dampers. Construct damper to meet specifications for fire
dampers, including electrically operated motors to suit the local single phase electrical
voltage supply, and firestat to release fire damper. Activation of motor shall re-open damper
even if firestat has released. Protect each motor with a disconnect switch.
2.8.3
Smoke dampers shall have a temperature rating of 300C for one hour except for car park
smoke extract service shall be rated for 300C for two hours.
2.9
TERMINAL STRIPS FOR ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS CONTROLLED BY

BOTH THE BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) AND THE FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM (FAS)

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.9.1
Dampers which require a fire and/or smoke rating shall be furnished and installed under this
contract. The actuators for these dampers are being furnished as an integral part of the
damper. Main power to the actuator shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Those
dampers controlled by both the BMS and FAS shall have their actuators wired to a terminal
strip provided under this contract. The BMS and FAS interface with the actuators shall be at
the terminal strip. The terminal strips shall be provided under this contract as follows:
2.9.2
The damper actuators for fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be wired to a terminal strip
which shall provide the interface for the BMS and FAS. The terminal strip interconnect
wiring, relays and other components required to meet these specifications shall be furnished
by the damper manufacturer in a wall mounted enclosure meeting the same specifications as
the enclosures for local starters. Wiring and conduit between the actuator and the terminal
strip shall be provided under this contract and main power will be provided to the actuator by
the electrical works contractor.
2.9.3
The terminal strip shall be wired such that the BMS and Fire Alarm System can undertake the
following control and monitoring functions:
2.9.4
BMS Open Control

A pair of terminals shall be wired such that when a BMS relay closes a contact pair across
these terminals the damper is driven open. Alternatively if the damper is two position with an
actuator which drives closed and springs open on loss of power then when a BMS relay
closes a contact pair across these terminals the damper shall spring closed. This signal from
the BMS shall be overridden by a close signal from the FAS.
2.9.5
BMS close Control

A pair of terminals shall be wired such that when a BMS relay closes a contact pair across
these terminals the damper is driven closed. Alternatively, if the damper is two position with
an actuator which drives open and springs closed on loss of power then when a BMS relay
closes a contact pair across these terminals the damper shall spring closed. This signal from
the BMS shall be overridden by an open signal from the FAS.
2.9.6
Motor interlock
A pair of terminals shall be wired to an end switch on the actuator such that a contact pair
between the terminals shall be closed when the damper is fully open and open with the
damper is not fully open. This pair of terminals shall be used for interlocking a damper with a
motor such that the motor will not be able to start if the damper is not fully open.
2.9.7
FAS Open Control

A pair of terminals shall be wired such that when a FAS relay closes a contact pair across
these terminals the damper is driven open. Alternatively, if the damper is specified to spring
open on loss of power, the power will spring open when a contact pair across these terminals
is closed. FAS control of the dampers shall override BMS control.
2.9.8
FAS Close Control

A pair of terminals shall be wired such that when a FAS relay closes a contact pair across
these terminals the damper is driven closed. Alternatively, if the damper is specified to spring
closed on loss of power, the damper shall spring closed when a contact pair across these
terminals is closed. FAS control of the damper shall override BMS control.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.9.9
FAS Open Status Monitoring

A pair of terminals provided by the damper manufacturer shall be wired such that the FAS
monitors a closed dry contact pair across these terminals when the damper is open.
2.9.10 FAS Closed Status Monitoring

A pair of terminals provided by the damper manufacturer shall be wired such that the FAS
monitors a closed dry contact pair across these terminals when the damper is closed.
2.9.11 The damper manufacturer shall provide all necessary wiring diagrams to the BMS and FAS
subcontractors.
2.9.12 Terminals shall be wired in the order listed in 2.6.1.2 above from left to right (or top to
bottom). If a set of terminals is not applicable for a particular damper then the wiring
between the terminals strip and the actuator shall be omitted but the terminals shall not be
assigned for an alternative purpose.
2.9.13 Where dampers are controlled only by the BMS and do not have a fire and/or smoke rating,
they will be furnished by the BMS subcontractor who will also furnish the damper actuator
for factory mounting by the damper manufacturer. On-site damper installation will be under
this contract and all wiring from the actuator to the BMS will be by the BMS subcontractor.
2.9.14 A damper with a fire and/or smoke rating which is controlled by the FAS only or by the BMS
only will be treated in the same way as detailed in 2.6.1.2 above and terminals not used will
not be wired.
2.10
AUTOMATIC FIRE & SMOKE DROP CURTAINS
2.10.1 Smoke Curtain

The smoke curtains shall be automatic, electrically operated and designed to provide a virtually
continuous barrier against smoke produced in a fire. The curtains shall comprise of flexible
heat resistant fabric which is impervious to smoke and hot gases wound around a circular tube
which is normally held retracted. In the event of a fire a signal from the control panel shall
allow the curtain to unroll at a controlled rate and drop to a preset height under gravity fail safe
manner.
The curtain material shall be satin weave fibreglass fabric with silver polyurethane coating on
both sides providing excellent reflection of heat, in silver grey colour. It should achieve an A2
elemental class a2-sl-d0 in accordance with EN 13501-2.
For continuous curtain consisting of several individual curtain modules the overlap of the
curtains need to be a minimum of 250mm to prevent smoke passing through the curtain.
The head box shall be provided in a natural mill finish to be installed above the false ceiling.
The bottom bars shall have a non-metallic standard RAL colour powder paint finish.
The curtain shall be designed and tested to withstand hot air and smoke at temperatures up to
600oC for 120 minutes. The smoke curtains shall be tested and should comply with the
requirements of EN 12101-1.
2.10.2 Control Panel

M-7
VOLUME-III
The smoke curtain shall be controlled by a dedicated control panel, supplied by the same
manufacturer, for automatic operation of the smoke curtain by signal from fire alarm system.
There shall be facility for manual testing of the smoke curtain from the face of the panel.
Upon receiving a signal from the fire alarm control panel the curtain shall automatically
unwind in a controlled, gravity failsafe manner. A heavy bottom bar shall be fitted to the
bottom edge of the fabric to pull the curtain down to keep the material taut and to provide a
suitable finish when the curtain is retracted.
Metal side guides with a fabric retaining system shall provide a seal between the curtain
fabric and the building. The fabric retaining system shall ensure that a seal is maintained and
that the fabric does not spill out of the side guides under fire or other pressures.
2.10.3 General
The smoke curtain should be listed and approved by the Abu Dhabi Civil Defense. The ECCertificate of Conformity to EN 12101-1 for the smoke curtains shall be submitted for
approval, prior to starting of the works.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
Mount dampers plumb and level. Provide additional duct bracing and supports to properly
support dampers.
3.1.2
Provide duct access doors for internal access to all fire dampers, automatic dampers and back
draught dampers.
3.1.3
Where possible, rotating equipment and equipment with static pressure control dampers
should be at least 3 m from a noise-sensitive space. HVAC fan equipment serving more
than one space should be farther from the rooms than equipment serving only one space.
3.1.4
To reduce the use of volume control dampers the system should be designed as much
as possible on a symmetrical basis so that the pressure drop on secondary runs shall be
as close as possible to the index run.
3.1.5
The avoidance of volume control dampers is preferred but it is accepted that some will be
necessary and these should be located on the plant side of the system attenuators.
Control dampers on the terminal side of the final attenuators must however be avoided
where spaces require NC/NR 30 or below.
3.1.6
Control dampers should not be located within 5 duct dimensions of any element other
than a straight length of duct. Preference should be given to airfoil splitter dampers.
All fire dampers shall be out-of-the-airstream (curtain) type.
END OF SECTION

M-8
VOLUME-III
SECTION 233319
DUCT SILENCERS
1.
PART1-GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
AMCA 300 Test Code for Sound Rating.
B.
AMCA 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data.
C.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE): "ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Chapter 48 "Noise and Vibration
Control".
D.
ASTM E 477: Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers
for Acoustical and Airflow Performance.
E.
BS 476-7 Part 7. Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test
to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
F.
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE): CIBSE Guide B5

Noise and vibration control for HVAC.
G.
ISO 7235: Acoustics. Laboratory measurement procedures for ducted

silencers and air- terminal units. Insertion loss, flow noise and total pressure
loss.
H.
ISO 5135: Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise from airterminal devices, air-terminal units, dampers and valves by measurement in a
reverberation room.
I.
NEBB Procedural Standard for Measuring Sound and Vibration.
J.

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
Duct Silencers which may also be referred to as Duct Attenuators or Sound

Traps.
Installer's qualifications: The manufacturer and supplier shall have substantial

track records of not less than 10 years for the design and installation of highperformance duct acoustic lining in similar applications and tested to the
PERFORMANCE
A.
Please refer to the Acoustic Report for more details on the insertion loss of thee
different Duct silencers required.

Section 233353- DUCT SILENCERS
VOLUME-III
B.
If static (without airflow) insertion loss data is measured with pink noise, the
data should be supported by test data showing the airflow self-regenerated
noise for the specified design air volumes.
C.
Pressure drop ratings shall be measured for the same attenuator tested for
acoustical and airflow performance and the data shall be submitted with the
acoustical performance data.
D.
Test laboratories shall have certifications for their facilities, including

instrumentation, traceable to any of the following (or equivalent):
DIN EN ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence
of testing and calibration laboratories.
1.05
2.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings. Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data,

pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout and connection details.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalogue information indicating materials, dimensional

data, pressure losses and acoustical performance. The Contractor shall require
the manufacturer to document insertion loss and airflow regenerated noise
data. Over extrapolation and data from out-dated equipment is unacceptable.
C.
A statement of compliance with the acoustic specification.
D.
Manufacturers details of the products being offered.
E.
Test certificates (in English or accompanied by a full English translation) from

an independent acoustic test laboratory to show compliance with the specified
acoustic performance for the products offered. Failing this, the Tenderer shall
allow in the tender for the expense of such testing as necessary to show
compliance.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
AAT Ltd. (UK) c/o Seagull HVAC LLC (www.seagullhvacindustry.com)
B.
Absol (www.absol.ae)
C.
Gmamco LLC (www.gmamco.ae)
D.
IAC c/o Arabian Thermal Aire Industries (www.ataico.com)

VOLUME-III
2.02
E.
Safid c/o Al Taqah A/C Systems Industrial Center (www.safid.com)
F.
Swegon c/o Intercool (www.intercooluae.com)
G.
Vibro Acoustics - c/o Prime Technology (www.primetechnologies.ae)
H.
GENERAL SYSTEMS DESCRIPITIONS

A.
Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill
material, and inner casing of perforated sheet metal, incorporating interior
baffles of similar construction. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B.
Casing thickness and flange construction shall be in accordance with HVCA

Specification DW/144. Minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized outer casing steel
stiffened as required, with mastic-filled lock-formed or welded seams, 50 mm
long, 11-gauge slip joints on both ends.
C.
Duct attenuators shall be purpose-built units constructed by a specialist

manufacturer and match the adjacent assemblies. The airways shall be free
from projections into the air stream.
D.
Attenuator casings shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet. Joints

shall be longitudinal, lock-formed and mastic sealed during construction. End
flanges shall be welded to the casings, and shall be supplied with slotted bolt
holes or other fixing details as necessary.
E.
Sound absorbent materials used within attenuators shall be inert,

incombustible, non- hygroscopic, rot and vermin proof and packed under not
less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to settling. The materials
shall withstand an air passage velocity of 25 m/s without surface erosion or
other forms of material migration. The material shall achieve Class 1 when
tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7 and shall not emit toxic or hazardous
fumes if ignited.
F.
Vapour barrier materials shall be resistant to chemicals as required for the

application. Vapour barriers for use in aggressive atmospheres shall not exceed
0.07 mm thickness and be installed in a non-taut state. The material shall
achieve Class I to BS 476: Part 7, and shall not emit toxic or hazardous fumes if
ignited.
G.
Attenuator insertion loss data provided shall include for the use of the vapour
barrier.
H.
The direction of airflow shall be clearly marked on the attenuator outer casing.
I.
Attenuators for site connection shall be delivered with blocked ends, and be
undamaged on completion of installation.
J.
Rectangular attenuators splitter elements shall be round-nosed and stand

VOLUME-III
vertically and be close-fitting within the casing.
2.03
K.
If L-section and T-section splitter attenuators are required due to space

restrictions, each one shall be designed for smooth airflow to minimize selfgenerated noise.
L.
Where required, splitters in bend attenuators shall be fitted perpendicular to

the plane of the bend.
M.
Where required, splitter elements shall be easily removable for cleaning.
N.
Where required, access panels shall be fitted with effective airtight seals which
shall retain their performance after repeated use.
RECTANGULAR DUCT SILENCERS

A.
Configured as rectangular casings with lined splitters, radiused nose and

contoured tails, to be designed and installed in accordance with the
B.
The rectangular duct silencers shall be measured in a test laboratory,

accepted by the Engineer and Acoustic Consultant, and shall be rated to
achieve the following minimum dynamic (with airflow) insertion losses for
the design air volumes specified in Equipment Data Sheets, Schedules or
other related Contract Documents:
C.
Dynamic Insertion Loss (dB re 2 x

10-5 Pa) Octave Band Centre
Frequency (Hz)
63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k
Ref
Length
Type A
900 mm
16
19
17
12
10
10
Type B
1200 mm
10
20
24
23
15
12
12
Type C
1500 mm
10
13
24
29
28
17
13
13
Type D
1800 mm
13
15
28
35
33
20
15
13
Type E
2100 mm
15
16
31
41
38
22
16
14
The pressure drop across the rectangular duct silencer shall not exceed
the following values according to the design NR level of the room being
ventilated:
NR Level of Room
Being Served, dB
Leq,5mins
Maximum Pressure Drop

Across Silencer (Pascals)
45
75
40
62.5
35
50
30
37.5
25
25

VOLUME-III
2.04
CIRCULAR DUCT SILENCERS

A.
Tubular with or without inner casing and liner, without centre body, with
absorptive, aerodynamically shaped centre body with nose cone and truncated
tail cone, splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails, to be designed and
installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
B.
The circular duct silencers shall be measured in a test laboratory, accepted by

the Engineer and Acoustic Consultant, and shall be rated to achieve the
following minimum dynamic (with airflow) insertion losses which are based
on a silencer face velocity of +10 m/s and which should be adjusted and prorated to the design air volumes specified in Equipment Data Sheets,
Schedules or other related Contract Documents:
Ref
Diameter
Dynamic Insertion Loss (dB re 2 x

10-5 Pa) Octave Band Centre
Frequency (Hz)
Length
Type F
300 mm
900 mm
6 125 250 500

34 9
16 30
1k
2k
4k
8k
34
37
33
27
Type G
600 mm
1200 mm
11
18
26
36
37
24
20
Type H
900 mm
1800 mm
14
19
35
36
31
23
17
Type I
1200 mm 2400 mm
16
20
34
35
26
20
16
Type J
1500 mm 3000 mm
1
0
1
17
23
35
31
23
17
15
1
C.
The pressure drop across the rectangular duct silencer shall not exceed
the following values according to the design NR level of the room being
ventilated:
NR Level of Room
Being Served, dB
Leq,5mins
Maximum Pressure Drop

Across Silencer (Pascals)
45
75
40
62.5
35
50
30
37.5
25
25

VOLUME-III
3.
PART3-EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and all other relevant
Specifications.
B.
Support duct silencers independent of ductwork and in accordance with other

relevant Specifications.
END OF SECTION

VOLUME-III
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

Mechanical Section 23 33 46: Flexible Ductwork
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the flexible ductwork as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.1.2
Related Work Specified in Other Sections
1.1.3
Ductwork - General Section
1.2
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.2.1
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals; Chapter on Duct Design.
1.2.2
ASHRAE Handbook of Equipment; Chapter on Duct Construction.
1.2.3
UL Factory made air ducts and connectors.
1.2.4
NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B, where applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
2.1.1
Provide insulated flexible ductwork as indicated on the Drawings. Flexible ductwork shall
have an outer jacket of reinforced aluminium, uniform layer of fibreglass insulation, highstrength steel helix encapsulated in an aluminium laminate interior core.
2.1.2
Flexible ductwork shall include compression collars with screw-down clamps at both ends of
standard lengths for each attachment to take-off collars. Maximum standard length of duct
sections shall be 600 mm on low pressure system and 400 mm on medium pressure systems.
2.1.3
The flexible ductwork assembly shall consist of the following: Vapour barrier foil scrim
material; factory installed insulation of 25 mm nominal glass fibre; liner of continuous airtight
aluminium core which completely shields the air flow from fibreglass erosion; and helix of
zinc coated, high carbon steel.
2.1.4
The entire assembly shall be capable of passing the test of flame spread to Class O.
2.1.5
Provide spin-in fittings for connection to sheet metal duct, incorporating die-formed locking
groove with adjustable damper using spring loaded retractable bearing and positive locking
regulator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
As a general principal never provide flexible ductwork bends, however, only because of space
limitations can bends with minimum centreline radius equal to 2 times duct diameter be
submitted to the consultant only as an alternative.
3.1.2
Take precautions to avoid crushing or deforming flexible ductwork. Replace damaged

sections.

M-2
VOLUME-III
3.1.3
Cut duct sections to fit application. Excess bends and coiling to take up extra material will not
be permitted.
3.1.4
Fabricate and install ductwork and components in a manner that results in streamlined air
flow.
3.1.5
Replace, without additional cost to the contract, any ductwork or components found to be
noisy after installation, with said noise resulting from faulty material or workmanship.
3.1.6
Do not run flexible ductwork through partitions, walls or floor of any type.
END OF SECTION

M-3
VOLUME-III
SECTION 233353
DUCT LINERS
1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.02
Where indicated on the drawings, internal duct acoustic lining in plenums,

ducted air intakes and ducted outlets shall be incorporated to reduce in-duct
noise propagation to sound sensitive spaces.
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE): "ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Chapter 48 "Noise and Vibration Control".
B. ASTM C 423: Determination of Sound Absorption Coefficients in a Reverberation
Room.
1.03
C.
ASTM E 477: Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers
for Acoustical and Airflow Performance.
D.
ASTM E 795: Practice for mounting test specimens during sound absorption tests.
E.
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE): CIBSE Guide B5 Noise

and vibration control for HVAC.
F.
ISO 354: Acoustics - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room.
G.

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
Installer's qualifications: The manufacturer and supplier shall have substantial

track records of not less than 10 years for the design and installation of highperformance duct acoustic lining in similar applications and tested to the
PERFORMANCE
A. The duct acoustic lining performance shall be measured in a test laboratory,
accepted by the Engineer, and shall be rated to achieve the following minimum
random incidence sound absorption coefficients based on 25 mm thick lining
material, in accordance with thestandards specified in Clause 1.02:

Section 233353- DUCT LINERS
VOLUME-III
Minimum Random Incidence Sound Absorption
Coefficient () Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
0.20
0.50
0.65
0.75
0.80
0.80
B.
Test samples shall be tested for A type mounting as described in ASTM E 795.
C.
Laboratory measurements shall be obtained from an independent acoustic test

laboratory, as accepted by the Engineer, under test conditions on representative
samples (including joints and seals) of the products being offered.
D.
Measurements obtained in accordance with equivalent standards acceptable to the

Engineer and/or Acoustic Consultant may also be permitted, subject to their
applicability.
E.
Where existing data is available from a recognized independent test laboratory it

shall be considered acceptable providing the tests have been carried out for the
exact same product offered.
F.
If test data is not available, within 8 weeks of the award of contract (or other
period to be specified by the Engineer), tests shall be undertaken (in accordance
with the specified standards) to demonstrate that the proposed products,
together with the associated elements shown in the relevant architectural
drawings, comply with the specified performance requirements.
G.
Test laboratories shall have certifications for their facilities, including

instrumentation, traceable to any of the following (or equivalent):
DIN EN ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of
testing and calibration laboratories
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide catalogue information indicating materials, thicknesses,

dimensional data, acoustic performance, fixing and sealing details.
B.
Test certificates (in English or accompanied by a full English translation) from an

independent acoustic test laboratory to show compliance with the specified
acoustic performance for the products offered. Failing this, the Tenderer shall
allow in the tender for the expense of such testing as necessary to show
compliance.

VOLUME-III
2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
A.
Armacell (www.armacell.com)
B.
Kimmco (www.kimmcoinsulation.com)
C.
Knauf Insulation (www.knaufexceedinsulation.ae)
D.
Owens-Corning (www.afico.com.sa)
E.
Rockwool (www.rockwoolfujairah.ae)
F.
SYSTEMS DESCRIPITIONS
A.
The acoustic lining material and associated fixing accessories shall comply with local
Fire Regulations.
B.
The duct acoustic lining shall be dry and free from off-cuts, dust, grease, solvents,
etc., and shall also be incombustible, non-hygroscopic, vermin proof and not
impart any odor to the airstream inside the ducts.
The lining facing shall be factory applied except when a sheet metal facing is
specified.
The absorbent media shall be fiberglass-faced with a permeable covering such
that no fibre erosion occurs at the rated air velocities, and shall have a density
between 24 and 32 kg/m3 and of minimum thickness 25 mm.
C.
D.
E.
Where duct lining is specified, the lining shall be applied to all internal
surfaces of the ductwork. The lining shall be fixed to the duct with 100%
coverage of fire-resistant adhesive. The lining shall also be additionally
secured with mechanical fasteners on maximum 400 mm centres on all sides
and a perforated metal lining. Mechanical fasteners that pierce the ductwork
are unacceptable.
F.
The leading edge of the duct lining exposed to the airstream shall be sufficiently
protected to prevent erosion. All other ends of the duct lining shall be coated before
assembly with a cementing material that will prevent delamination, leakage or
erosion.
G.
Adhesives shall be restricted to those having the approval to the appropriate

authority in relation to fire hazard and shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
H.
No damaged materials shall be used.

VOLUME-III
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and all other relevant
Specifications.
B.
The duct acoustic lining shall be supported against the surface by means of stud
welded pins and speed clips. The acoustic duct lining insulation shall be supported
against the surface either by means of stud welded pins and speed clips or a metal
lining perforated to > 50% open area. At corners, sheet metal angles can be used to
provide a butted edge (to overlap the insulation joints) or the duct acoustic lining
insulation can be folded and compressed into the corners.
C.
When fitting the duct acoustic lining insulation, all junctions must be tightly butted
together to prevent heat leakage.
END OF SECTION

VOLUME-III
FANS

Mechanical Section 23 34 00: Fans
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the centrifugal fans for air handling units as shown on the drawings and specified
herein, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.1.2
Centrifugal Fans
1.1.3
Axial and Mixed Flow Fans.
1.1.4
Twin cabinet type Fans for toilet extract.
1.1.5
Smoke Exhaust Fans.
1.1.6
Inline centrifugal fans for staircase pressurization.
1.1.7
1.2
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER WORK SECTIONS
1.2.1
Noise Control
1.2.2
Vibration Control
1.2.3
Electric Motors
1.2.4
Electric Motor Starters
1.2.5
Air Handling Units
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
1.3.2
AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
1.3.3
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
1.3.4
AMCA 210 & 211 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
1.3.5
AMCA 300& 311 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
1.3.6
AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
1.3.7
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
1.3.8
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings:
1.4.1.1 Fan performance data, dimensioned installation details.

1.4.2
Product Data:
1.4.2.1 Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.
1.4.2.2 Certified sound power ratings with octave band analysis.
1.4.2.3 Certified fan curves including volume pressure horsepower characteristics from shut-off to
free delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 & 211 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating
Seal.
2.1.2
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 & 311 and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
2.1.3
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
2.1.4
Performance Base: Sea level conditions.
2.1.5
Temperature Limit: Maximum 55 degrees C for normal operation and 300 C for smoke
extraction.
2.1.6
Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.
2.1.7
Use fan size, class, type, arrangement, and capacity as per schedules to be provided on the
drawings.
2.1.8
Furnish complete with motors, wheels, drive assemblies, bearings, vibration isolation devices,
and accessories required for specified performance and proper operation. All single phase
motors to have inherent thermal overload protection.
2.1.9
Provide fixed pitch sheaves for fans with V-belt drives for the belt driven fans. Design all Vbelt drives for 150% of motor rating.
2.1.10 Use OSHA approved belt guards that totally enclose the entire drive except in air handling
units. Construct guards of expanded metal to allow for ventilation; provide tachometer
openings at shaft locations.
2.1.11 Use AMCA Type A spark resistant construction for all fans handling flammable or grease
Fans to be UL705 and UL762 certified for commercial kitchen extraction from exhaust hoods.
Fans handling fumes to the allowable standards need to be spark proof.
2.1.12 Provide companion duct flanges for connecting inlet and outlet ductwork.
2.1.13 Provide solid state speed controller for all single phase direct drive fans.
M-3
VOLUME-III
2.1.14 Provide vibration isolators for each fan.

2.1.15 Provide disconnect switch for each fan.
2.1.16 Provide thrust restraints for each inline fan.
2.1.17 All exhaust and outside air equipment shall incorporate back draft dampers that automatically
close during periods of non-use. The dampers shall be either motorized or gravity type.
2.1.18 All belt drive fans shall have permanently fixed rpm tags on the end of fan shaft.
2.2
Refer to approved manufacturers list.
2.3
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
2.3.1
Provide where shown on the drawings, and connect complete, all supply, return, and exhaust
fans of the backward-curved, non-overloading, silent-running, high-speed centrifugal type.
Provide fan wheels with a constant rising pressure characteristic from shutoff to free delivery.
2.3.2
Provide fan capacities and performance in accordance with fan schedules to be provided on
the final design drawings. Fan to have direction of rotation, discharge direction, and
arrangement to suit space conditions and conform to the layouts shown on the drawings.
2.3.3
Fan housings to be rigidly built and braced. Fan housing for outdoor application to be weather
proof and to have special plastic coating for severe weather protection. Where fan scroll is
465 mm or more in width provide an access door of the pan type set in a raised frame so that
the inner surface is flush with the scroll. Where fan housing is insulated, extend the raised
frame so that the outer surface is flush with the insulation.
Stainless steel grade (316) screws to be used for the outdoor fan construction application.
2.3.4
Provide self-aligning bearings to prevent leakage of oil or grease. Provide cups, oil chambers,
Zerk or Alemite lubrication fittings in accessible locations outside of the duct connections for
easy lubrication. All bearings to be of the split pillow block tube with double row spherical
roller assemblies. Bearings to have AFBMA B-50 rated lives in excess of 400,000 hours, at
maximum catalogued fan operating conditions.
2.3.5
Guarantee all fans to fulfil the specified requirements, without producing any noise that can
be heard anywhere in the building outside of the mechanical rooms and other machine spaces;
replace any fans found unsatisfactory in this regard. Provide fan wheels and blades of ample
strength, and statically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration, and to secure quiet,
efficient operation.
2.3.6
Furnish for approval, for each fan, AMCA certified air performance and sound power ratings
with an octave band analysis and the volume-pressure-power characteristic curves from
shutoff to free delivery.
2.3.7
All fans to be quiet-operating. Generally, the fans are to be driven with V-belt drive, of ample
capacity, of fennel, or approved make, or direct drive for fans of 1 HP rating. For fans 20 kW
or less with 2 or less sheaves, provide adjustable ratio type sheaves, of steel and of approved
make, sized to give the required fan performance with the motor sheave at about the middle of
its range of adjustment. Provide at least 2 belts, capable of carrying the entire load with one

M-4
VOLUME-III
belt broken. Provide belt guards of preformed metal for all sheaves and belts. Belt guards to
have grommeted openings at the fan and motor shafts to facilitate tachometer readings.
2.3.8
Size each fan motor to drive its respective fan when fan is operating at a speed (due to pulley
adjustment) of 5% in excess of that required to meet fan performance. Do not select motor
within the service factor range. Motors for general duty to be TEFC.
Fan selection shall be made in such a way that BHP is 20% less than motor power including
all losses.
2.3.9
Where shown on the schedules, provide pre-rotation (vortex) inlet vanes, furnished and
installed with necessary linkage and all required accessories for automatic control or manual
control. Provide minimum stops to prevent full closure.
2.3.10 Factory paint the interior surfaces of all fans and all fan wheels with 2 coats of non-scaling
paint in accordance with manufacturer's standard.
2.3.11 Equip fans discharging directly up through the roof with 35 mm casing drains, piped with a
shutoff gate valve to the nearest floor drain.
2.3.12 Belted vent sets to have overhung wheels and motors mounted on a common base with the
bearings, furnished with weatherproof motor housings where located outdoors.
2.3.13 Provide fans of the roof exhaust type with motors and multiple matched V-belt drives entirely
outside air stream, fully accessible for servicing. Wheels to be centrifugal type, statically and
dynamically balanced and of aluminium construction. Provide base and hinged cover of
heavy gauge aluminium or flame retardant glass fibre retardant glass fibre reinforced resin.
Provide heavy gauge bird screen, for each fan an aluminium sound absorption type curb.
Provide weatherproof casing for all fans located outdoors.
2.3.14 Provide with standby motor where indicated on drawings or to comply with local codes.
2.3.15 Provide reinforced galvanized steel inlet guard screens for all floor mounted fans. Provide
guards for V-belt drives and shafts.
2.3.16 Centrifugal Fan housing and components used for Fume Hood exhaust shall be chemical
resistant.
2.4
AXIAL AND MIXED FLOW FANS
2.4.1
Provide the required axial and mixed flow fans where shown on the drawings and of the
capacities and types as indicated in the fan schedule.
2.4.2
Fabricate fan housing of hot-rolled steel with a minimum 4.6 mm thickness and 6 mm end
flanges on fans up to 930 mm in diameter; 6 mm thickness and 10 mm end flanges on 1,030
mm in diameter and larger. End flanges to be continuously welded around the entire periphery
of fan housing and provided with bolt holes for bolting to inlet bell, cones, companion
flanges, or duct, etc. Housing to be continuously welded expanded by mechanical means to
insure concentricity. Housing to be shot blasted to relieve welding stresses and to ensure good
paint adherence inside and outside. The motor support plate to be 12 mm plate steel and
welded to fan housing by means of motor support ring and vanes. Support ring to be
continuously welded to motor support plate. Provide weatherproof casing for all equipment
located outdoors.

M-5
VOLUME-III
2.4.3
Construct fan rotor hub and blades of cast aluminium. Hub to be cast aluminium capable of
transmitting full motor horsepower, heat treated, and blades cast of silicon aluminium alloy.
Fan blades to be airfoil shaped for maximum efficiency and vary in twist and width from hub
to tip to obtain equal air distribution along the blade length. Blade tip clearance to fan housing
not to exceed 1.25 mm for 880 mm or smaller fan rotor and 2.5 mm for all other sizes.
2.4.4
Fan blades to be controllable through a pitch range of sufficient angularity to vary volume
and pressure characteristics across design range. Each blade to be index marked for various
pitch settings and be capable of stepless control across the complete pitch range while the
motor is operating at full speed. The pitch of the blades in the controllable pitch rotor to be
varied by a positive acting externally mounted electric actuator furnished and mounted by the
fan manufacturer. The actuator to be controlled by a signal from a remote controller.
Controllable pitch mechanism to be equipped with safety stop to prevent blade pitch setting
being increased beyond maximum design setting and overloading motor. For fans which
cannot be equipped with an electric operator provide a pneumatic operator with a pilot
positioner, an electric to pneumatic transducer and an electric air compressor mounted on the
fan casing. The compressor motor shall be 230V single phase. The fan motor manufacturer to
provide all necessary wiring controls and air piping.
2.4.5
Fans to be motor driven as follows:
2.4.5.1 Direct driven axial fans to be Arrangement No. 4 with motor inside the fan housing and fan
rotor assembly attached directly to a motor shaft, properly keyed and secured by means of a
ball bearing locknut and washer for a positive locking method of securing rotor to fan shaft.
2.4.5.2 The fan rotor to be whirl-tested at 125% of operating speed and statically and dynamically
balanced on fan motor shaft to a maximum tolerance of one mil double-amplitude at design
operating speed guaranteed in writing.
2.4.5.3 Motor to be equipped with all bearings AFBMA "PP", with B-10 life and Class "F" insulation
using thermosetting insulating varnish fortified with water repelling silicone. Provide external
copper grease leads for lubrication of motor bearings to relieve excess grease pressure.
2.4.5.4 Fan motors to be British Standard for totally enclosed air over (TEFC), "C" face, flangemounted, squirrel cage induction, single-speed, or two-speed as scheduled, single-winding or
two winding, continuous duty variable torque, and suitable for operation in either vertical,
horizontal, or angular position. Motor flanges to be recessed into motor support plate to
preclude any shear effect on bolts.
2.4.5.5 A conduit box to be mounted on the exterior of fan casing and lead wires from the motor
conduit box to be protected from the air stream by being encased in an airtight metal conduit
pipe. Lead wires to be connected by others in accordance with wiring diagram inside conduit
box.
2.4.5.6 Mount motors at the discharge side of the fan.
2.4.5.7 Provide inlet bells and discharge cones as shown on the drawings with flanges on both ends
for attachment to fan. Cone flanges to be same thickness as fan flanges.
2.4.5.8 Provide supports for fans for horizontal or vertical mounting. Horizontal fan supports to be
provided by the fan manufacturer, bolted to the inlet and discharge flanges of the fan.
Supports for fans 1,176 mm diameter and larger to be cross-braced with angle braces to
prevent misalignment and structural rigidity. Construct supports of the following gauges of
carbon steel: 4.6 mm for fans up to 930 mm diameter; 6 mm for 1,030 mm and larger. Provide
suitable vertical supports.
M-6
VOLUME-III
2.4.5.9 Provide companion flanges to receive sheet metal duct or flexible connectors. Companion
flanges to be of the same thickness as the fan flanges and provided by fan manufacturer.
2.4.5.10 Furnish published performance curves and data, based on tests in accordance with AMCA.
2.4.5.11 Furnish published sound power levels data based on tests conducted in accordance with
AMCA. Such data is to define sound power levels (PWL), re: 10-12 watts for each of the 8
frequency bands. Manufacturers furnishing estimated data will not be approved.
2.4.5.12 Provide reinforced galvanized steel inlet guard screens for all floor mounted fans.
2.5
NOT USED.
2.6
CENTRIFUGAL FAN ROOF MOUNTED
2.6.1
Provide centrifugal type roof exhausters of the type, wheel size and capacity scheduled on the
drawings. V-belt drive shall have adjustable pitch motor sheave. Motor shall be mounted on
adjustable base.
2.6.2
Housing shall be fully weatherproofed. Outlet shall be provided with a removable bird screen.
Motor and fan assembly shall be on vibration isolating mounts. Fan housing shall be
furnished with an epoxy based corrosion resistant exterior paint. Cabinet shall be capable of
withstanding 500-hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM(U.S.A.) B-117 standard.
2.6.3
Fan bearings shall be ball bearing type and provided with means of lubrication.
2.6.4
Fan housing shall be easily removable for access to all parts.
2.6.5
Motor shall comply with Section 262419
2.6.6
Backdraft dampers shall be gravity type manufactured by the fan manufacturer.
2.6.7
Furnish roof curbs where noted on the drawings. Provide sound attenuating curbs with
fiberglass packing where noted.
2.7
IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
2.7.1
Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal belt driven in-line
type. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized
steel and shall include square duct mounting collars.
2.7.2
Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the
motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to
all interior components.
2.7.3
The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall
include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances.
Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
2.7.4
Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished
at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted out of the
airstream. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

M-7
VOLUME-III
2.7.5
Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated
pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of
200,000 hours at maximum catalogued operating speed.
2.7.6
Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.
2.7.7
Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel
and motor shafts.
2.7.8
Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch
shall be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnects are
optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box.
2.7.9
All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance.
2.7.10 Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturers nameplate containing the model
number and individual serial number for future identification.
2.8
IN LINE SMOKE EXHAUST FANS
2.8.1
Duct mounted smoke foil exhaust fan unit suitable for day to day and emergency use with
Class "H" motor, 300 deg. C, 2 hour fire rating Smoke fan shall be listed and approved UL/
LPC and have Civil Defence & Fire Department approval.
2.8.2
Unit case is manufactured in aluminum alloy and is of square section, predrilled for
installation into compatible ducting, Non rusting fastenings are used throughout. A removable
panel shall be provided for quick and easy access for commissioning, cleaning, inspection and
maintenance purposes.
2.8.3
Impeller is single inlet high performance axial flow type, dynamically balanced after
assembly and shall be direct driven or belt driven.
2.8.4
Provide polyester or equivalent anti corrosion protection cover for impeller, housing, and all
components.
2.9
TWIN FANS
2.9.1
Twin fans centrifugal extract units for ducted inlet and outlet. Unit shall incorporate integral
backdraft dampers. The Twin fan shall allow automatic change over to standby by fan in even
of fan or motor failure and ensure continuity of ventilation. Unit motor shall be thermally
protected. Fan and control module shall be replaceable without altering the field wiring. The
fans shall be of low noise with acoustic enclosure and silencers.
2.9.2
All fans shall have their static pressures calculated by the Contractor and the calculations shall
be submitted to the Engineer for his approval, before ordering the fans. The required fan and
motor h.p. shall be provided without additional costs. Provide one spare motor for each motor
size and provide one belt/ bearing for each fan.
2.10
POWER ROOF EXHAUST FANS
2.10.1.1 Provide upblast or downblast units, as scheduled, with aluminum housing, non-overloading
type centrifugal wheel, inlet cone, factory mounted and wired motor and disconnect switch,
and bird screen.

M-8
VOLUME-III
2.10.1.2 Upblast units to have motor, bearings, and drives completely enclosed and isolated from the
exhaust air stream with ventilation provided by outside air. Units handling grease laden
vapors to be U.L. listed for conveying such vapors, operating continuously at 200 degrees C.
2.10.1.3 Motor and fan assembly shall be on vibration isolation mounts.
2.10.1.4 Provide gravity type backdraft damper provided by manufacturer.
2.10.1.5 Motors shall be in accordance with Section 262419.
2.10.1.6 Furnish sound attenuating roof curb with fiberglass packing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2
Install fans with flexible electrical leads.
3.1.3
Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of
connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running.
3.1.4
Install fan restraining snubbers as required. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible
connectors when fan is operating.
3.1.5
Provide one extra set of fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
3.1.6
Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
3.1.7
Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
3.1.8
For motor data refer to Section 262419
3.1.9
Provide scroll drains to nearest floor drain as indicated.

END OF SECTION

M-9
VOLUME-III
GENERATOR / BOILER FLUES

Mechanical Section 23 35 16: Generator / Boiler Flue
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Provide self-supporting twin wall, stainless steel flue systems for the standby diesel
generators, including all structural supports, fastenings, bracing, shop and field coat painting,
cleanout door, double cone rain caps, condensate drains, and all related items and
appurtenances, as required to comply with local codes and factory installation requirements.
1.2
1.2.1
Pipe and Accessories
1.2.2
Generators Electrical Services Specification
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.3.1
Shop Drawings:
1.3.1.1 Equipment sizes and installation details.

1.3.1.2 Product Data:
1.3.1.2.1 Manufacturer's latest published data for materials, equipment and installation.
1.3.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.2.1 The manufacture of the system shall be a firm certified under ISO 9000. When requested the
manufacturer shall submit to the Consultant copies of the relevant certificate of
registration for the products specified.
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.4.1
EN 1856, EN 1859.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERATOR FLUE
2.2.1
General
2.2.1.1 Provide a flue exhaust system to serve the standby diesel generators from the outlet of the
silencer on the generator set, to terminate at roof level, as indicated on the drawings.
2.2.1.2 The flue manufacturer shall furnish all items which form a part of the assembly including
straight sections, tee sections, elbows, cleanouts, drains, expansion joints, guybands, flashing,
counter flashing, rain cap and insulated thimble where required.
2.2.1.3 Installation shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and in
compliance with local codes. Product shall be rated for 10mm clearance to combustibles.
M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2.2
Construction
2.2.2.1 The system shall be prefabricated under quality controlled factory conditions. It shall be of
twin wall construction, having a 25mm air gap between the inner liner and outer casing. The
vertical seam of the inner liner shall be continuously welded and shall have a 12mm flange
formed on each end of the liner.
2.2.2.2 The vent sections and fittings shall be joined by clamping a Vee Band over the mating flanges
of adjacent components. Sealant supplied by the manufacturer shall be applied to the inside of
the Vee Band before fitting and also to the flange faces. The inner liner shall be the structural
load bearing component and expansion of the liner due to changes in gas temperature shall be
catered for by bellow(s) fitted, as necessary, throughout the system. Expansion length(s) can
be used if no positive pressure is produced by the unit.
2.2.2.3 The outer casing shall be non-load bearing and shall be retained around the liner by suitable
spacing clips. A Channel Band fitted in grooves in the outer casing shall be provided to close
the space between adjacent components.
2.2.3
Fire Rating
2.2.3.1 The system shall have a 4-hour fire rating when installed using the appropriate fire stop
assemblies and within a suitable enclosure which prevents contact with outer casing. Where
required the manufacturer shall submit to the engineer test reports in support of the above.
2.2.4
Performance
2.2.4.1 Working pressure:

a.
With expansion lengths up to 13mm wg (0.13 kPa)
b.
With expansion bellows up to 1500mm wg (15 kPa)

Temperature (max)* Continuous Intermittent
Expansion Lengths
600C 750C
Expansion Bellows
760C 1000C
*
2.2.5
(Min 10C above flue gas acid dew point on the inner liner surface
throughout the system).
Components
2.2.5.1 The system shall comprise of a full range of starting components, lengths, tees and elbows,
load bearing components, flashing and terminals necessary to provide a complete system.
2.2.5.2 The load bearing and wind load capacity of all components when installed within a system
shall have been determined by the manufacturer using appropriate structural tests and
analysis. Details of the maximum loading for each item shall be indicated in the installation
instructions. When required the manufacturer shall submit relevant test reports in support of
the above to the Engineer.
2.2.5.3 A complete set of the bolts and nuts necessary for the correct assembly of each accessory
shall be provided, with each unit, by the manufacturer.
2.2.5.4 Special components shall be available if required. A detailed dimensioned drawing of the
item(s) shall be provided for the manufacturer by the erector.
M-3
VOLUME-III
2.2.5.5 Material
2.2.5.5.1 Lengths and Fittings
Inner liner and all surfaces in contact with the flue gases shall be 1mm gauge stainless steel as
per the following schedule.
Outer Casing :
Interior Use: aluminised steel
Exterior Use: stainless steel 304
Components: stainless steel/galvanised steel
2.2.5.6 Insulation
2.2.5.6.1 Mineral fibre insulation shall be installed either within the product annulus by the
manufacturer or externally on site by the erector if necessary.
2.2.5.6.2 To meet the minimum operating conditions specified.
2.2.5.6.3 Where the vent is installed close to combustible material.
2.2.5.6.4 To prevent a personnel hazard.
2.2.5.6.5 The specification for the insulation required for a particular application shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
A set of installation instructions covering the installation of all components and accessories
shall be provided with the product by the manufacturer. The installation of the complete
system shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instruction.
3.1.2
Each change in direction of the system shall be by means of an easy sweep bend using a
combination of Elbows, or Elbows and 135Tees. A 90 Tee shall only be used where site
dimensions do not facilitate an easy sweep arrangement.
3.1.3
The manufacturers load bearing and lateral support components must be used in every case.
Where these components require to be extended to suit site conditions a suitable extension
bracket shall be supplied and fitted by the installer. Extension brackets shall be manufactured
from a suitable gauge to suit the application.
3.1.4
Adequate access shall be provided throughout the chimney system to enable service personnel
to clean the system or inspect the bellows, when fitted, without dismantling the exhaust.
3.1.5
A condensate collector(s), as provided by the manufacturer, shall be installed throughout the

system as necessary. The collector(s) shall be fitted with a screwed boss to facilitate the
installation of drain pipe(s). Provide copper pipe work condensate drains from boiler flues run
to local floor gully.

M-4
VOLUME-III
3.1.6
The system shall be fixed to the unit outlet using an adaptor provided by the unit
manufacturer. The adaptor to be packed with fibre rope and fire cement to provide a gas seal.
If necessary a purpose made adaptor shall be provided by the erector to make the transition
from the unit outlet to the manufacturers adaptor.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
AIR TERMINAL UNITS (VAV & CAV)

Mechanical Section 23 36 00: Air Terminal Units (VAV & CAV)
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Provide air terminal units as indicated on the drawings and as specified, size and duty shown
on the drawings and schedules.
1.1.2
Section includes constant volume terminal units, variable volume terminal units, integral
sound attenuation, integral heating coils (where required), integral damper motor operators,
integral controls.
1.2
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.2.1
ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
1.2.2
AMCA 500D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for. Rating.
1.2.3
ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.2.4
ARI 410
1.2.5
ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets
1.2.6
ARI 880-89
1.2.7
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
1.2.8
SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test
Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
1.3.2
Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1
Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
1.5.1
Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1.
1.5.2
Provide data: Provide product description, list of materials, performance of components, noise
levels.
1.5.3
Provide leakage test for VAV boxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1
Refer to approved list of manufacturers in Appendix.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2
VARIABLE OR CONSTANT VOLUME SINGLE DUCT BOXES
2.2.1
Terminal Box.
2.2.1.1 Furnish and install single duct, variable or constant air volume terminals of the sizes and
capacities shown in the plans.
2.2.1.2 Terminals should be certified under the ARI Standard 880-98 Certification Program and carry
the ARI Seal.
2.2.1.3 The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with 1
thick 1-1/2 lbs/ cu.ft density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Unit
shall incorporate thermally isolated primary inlet (where applicable) and be capable of
accepting 50 F primary air at the inlet without casing condensation at ambient air conditions
of 80% and 60% relative humidity. The discharge connection shall be slip-and-drive
construction for attachment to metal ductwork. The casing shall be constructed to hold
leakage to the 4% at 3 in. wg. from maximum cfm rated for the unit. A 3-0 long sound
attenuator shall be provided per Specification. A control transformer shall be provided and
factory mounted on the unit.
2.2.1.4 The damper shall be 20 gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze oilite selflubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the
end to indicate damper position. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent
overstroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage.
2.2.1.5 Actuators shall be capable of supplying at least 35 in./lb. of torque to the damper shaft, and
shall be mounted externally for service access. Terminals with internal actuator mounting or
linkage connection must include gasketed access panel, removable without disturbing
ductwork. Casing with access panel shall be constructed to hold leakage to the 4% at 3 in. wg.
from maximum cfm rated for the unit.
2.2.1.6 At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm, the differential static pressure required to operate terminal
size shall not exceed .10" wg. for the basic terminal or .15" wg. for the terminal with integral
attenuator.
2.3
CONTROLS
2.3.1
The terminals shall be equipped with pressure independent electronic controls (Type II)
which can be reset to modulate airflow between minimum and the maximum cfm as
scheduled.
2.3.2
The terminals shall incorporate multi-point, centre-averaging velocity sensors. A minimum of

four measuring ports must be parallel to the take-off point from the sensor. Sensors with
measuring ports in series are not acceptable. The sensor must provide a minimum differential
pressure signal of .03" wg. at inlet velocities of 500 fpm. The sensor must provide control
signal accuracy of +/-5%, with the same size inlet duct at any inlet condition.
2.3.3
Control devices shall be factory set for the scheduled minimum and maximum flow rates.
Flow measuring taps and flow curves shall be supplied with each terminal for field balancing
air flow. Each terminal shall be equipped with labelling showing unit location, size, minimum
and maximum cfm setpoints, damper fail position, and thermostat action.
2.4
ELECTRIC HEATING COIL (WHERE APPLICABLE)

Electric coils shall be mounted in a minimum 20 gage zinc coated steel casing and shall be
UL listed. Coils shall have :

M-3
VOLUME-III
2.4.1
2.4.2.
2.4.3.
2.4.4.
2.4.5.
2.4.6.
2.4.7.
Elements shall be nickel chrome and supported by ceramic isolators.

The integral control panel shall be housed in a NEMA 2 enclosure with hinged access
door for access to all controls and safety devices.
Electric coils shall contain a primary automatic reset thermal cutout and deferential
pressure airflow switch for proof of airflow
Electric coils shall include fused or non-fused door interlocking disconnect switch,
mercury contactors, fuseblock, dust tight enclosure construction, all mounted and / or
wired within the control enclosure.
Heaters shall be designed for the capacity, electrical characteristics and steps of
control as shown on the equipment schedule.
Coils are factory-wired and include all limit switches.
An SSR (solid-state relay) proportional heat control shall meet the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 62, Addendum N.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.1.2
DDC controllers and actuators shall be provided by temperature control contractor to be

factory installed by terminal unit manufacturer. Terminal unit manufacturer to provide
240V/24V transformer mounted on each box as well as provide enclosure for DDC controller
and actuator.
3.2
LEAKAGE TEST
3.2.1
Provide leakage test for each VAV and fan terminal unit. Casing of the units shall be sealed to
hold leakage to the maximum of 4% from the maximum rated cfm at 3 in. wg. The leakage
testing procedure and results are subject to the Employer Representative's approval.
3.2.2
Provide 5 feet minimum lined plenum (non fibre lining) after VAV terminal unit, where
indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION

M-4
VOLUME-III
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Mechanical Section 23 37 00: Air Outlets And Inlets
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1

therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1
Furnish and install air outlets as indicated on drawings.
1.2.2
Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
Ceiling air diffusers
Wall registers and grilles
Louvres
1.2.3
Refer to section ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and
inlets.
1.2.4
Refer related sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and

inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
1.3.2
Codes and Standard:
1.3.3
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI650 Standard for
air outlets and inlets
1.3.4
ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlet in accordance with ASHRAE 70
Method of Testing for Rating the Air flow Performance of outlets and Inlet.
1.3.5
ADC Seal : Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC certified rating seal.
1.3.6
AMCA compliance : Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 Test Method for
Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
1.3.7
AMCA Seal : Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified rating seal.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Product Data : Submit manufacturers technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawings designation, room location, number
furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished, indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
M-2
VOLUME-III
Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,
temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate
selections on data.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings : Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight
loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.
1.4.3
Submit mock-up installation for Consultant approval before final selection.
1.5
1.5.1
Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory fabricated fiber board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
1.5.2
Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade
and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.1.1
Select all diffusers to provide uniform air coverage without overlap. Air velocity up to a
height of 6 (1.8m) above the floor shall be 25 to 50 fpm (0.13 to 0.25 m/s).
2.1.2
Noise generated by outlet or inlet at peak volume shall be such that room sound pressure level
does not exceed noise criterion 26 with an 8 Db. Room attenuation; the sound power level
reference to 10-12 power watts.
2.1.3
All volume and air pattern devices shall be fully adjustable from the face of the diffuser,
register or grille.
2.1.4
Size of all round flexible or rigid duct connections to diffusers shall be the same size as
diffuser inlet diameter.
2.1.5
Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be arranged for flush mounting in lay-in type ceilings and
over lap mounting in plaster, mineral tile and similar ceilings, with concealed fixings unless
otherwise directed.
2.1.6
Grilles, register and diffuser locations shall be adjusted to suit reflected ceiling drawings, or
site instructions. It is recommended that all grilles, registers, diffusers, louvres be from one
manufacturer.
2.1.7
All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be supplied completely factory powder coated. Finish
colour shall be to the approval of the Consultant. The interior of all grilles and diffusers is to
be factory painted matt black.
2.1.8
All supply grilles and diffusers will have opposed blade balancing dampers. All will have
foam rubber sealing band around the edge to seal to the structure. All pivots will be round
section, not of formed sheet, and not relying on a spring steel locking wire.
2.1.9
Unless otherwise specified basic grilles and diffuser materials shall be Aluminium extruded
sections. Sections in the airstream shall be carefully selected to minimize turbulence.
2.1.10 All grilles and diffusers supplied on this project shall be tested and rated in accordance with
M-3
VOLUME-III
ASHRAE Standard 70-72, ADC Test Code 1062-GRD and ISO 3741.
2.2
LINEAR BAR GRILLES

Linear bar grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium, with 6.4mm wide bars on 12.5mm
centres pressed into a notched steel retaining bar. The core can be either welded into the cuter
frame, or, where the grille is used in a sill application, held in the outer frame by spring clips
fixed to the core retaining bar.
The outer frame shall be 35mm deep and shall have a visible flange 25.4 mm wide. Mitred
end caps shall be welded to give a near invisible joint.
The grill shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black, and shall be
fixed with universal mounting brackets. Both the damper and the fixing brackets shall be
accessible through the face of the grille.
Continuous grilles shall be provided with positive alignment strips, which fit into special
keyways extruded into the frame of the grille to ensure clean unbroken lines.
2.3
FOUR-WAY CEILING DIFFUSERS

Ceiling Diffusers shall be multicone giving 4 way horizontal discharge. Unless otherwise
indicated, face size of diffusers shall match the size of ceiling tiles.
The three centre cones of the diffuser shall be manufactured from pressed aluminium, with the
remaining cones and the outer frame fabricated from extruded aluminium welded at the
corners to give near invisible joints. The core shall be removable without the use of special
tools, but for safety, shall be fixed to the outer frame by a small length of chain.
The diffuser shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black. All supply
air diffusers shall be provided with an equalizing grid.
2.4
PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS (Where Applicable)

Perforated ceiling diffusers shall be (aluminum, flush face), for supply and return. The return
models shall have the same face and border construction as the supply models for harmonious
appearance in the room. Diffusers shall have a perforated face with 3/16" diameter holes on
" staggered centers and no less than 51% free area. Perforated face shall be aluminum. The
back pan shall be one piece stamped heavy gauge steel of the sizes and mounting types shown
on the plans and outlet schedule. The diffuser neck shall have 11/8" depth for easy duct
connection.
Diffusers must discharge a uniform horizontal blanket of air into the room and protect ceiling
against smudging. Pattern controllers in the supply models shall be mounted on the back of
the perforated face and must be field adjustable to allow the discharged air to enter the room
in either vertical or 1,2,3 or 4-way horizontal jets. The perforated face must be easily
unlatchable from the back pan to facilitate removal of the face for pattern controller
adjustment or to access damper.
Damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must be operable from the face of
the diffuser by unlatching the diffuser face. The diffuser must be designed such that complete
removal of the face is not required during damper adjustment.
The contractor shall provide published performance data for the perforated diffuser.
The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE standard 70-1991.
M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5
WALL REGISTERS
Wall registers shall be double deflection fabricated from aluminium, the front vanes being
horizontal, the rear vanes vertical. This grille shall be complete with an opposed blade damper
painted matt black and adjustable from the face of the diffuser.
Both sets of vanes shall be fully adjustable without the use of special tools.
2.6
EGGCRATE GRILLES
Eggcrate return or extract grille shall be provided with a steel lattice core of 12.7mm x
12.7mm openings, giving a free area of 90%.
The core shall be fixed into an extruded aluminium frame, with welded corners and a 25mm
face flange.
The grille shall be complete with wire mesh and an opposed blade damper painted matt black
and adjustable through the face of the diffuser.
2.7
CIRCULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

Circular ceiling diffuser shall be of aluminium construction with two concentric inner
spinnings.
The diffuser core shall be fully adjustable for vertical or horizontal air discharge, and shall be
removable without the use of special tools.
A flap damper shall be provided in the neck of the diffuser which is adjustable from the
diffuser face.
2.8
LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS

Linear Slot diffusers shall provide an unobtrusive continuous air diffusion with a pleasing
aesthetic appearance. Hairline butt joints shall ensure clean unbroken linear runs for active
and dummy sections. Slot width shall be 16 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
The diffusers shall be complete with pattern control blades, fully adjustable from face of
diffuser through 180 degrees and shall be fitted with end caps at each end.
The diffuser members shall be constructed from high quality aluminium extrusions to BS
1474 while the pattern control blades shall be of black rigid PVC.
2.9
EXHAUST DISC VALVES

Exhaust valves shall be manufactured from high quality sheet steel spinnings protected by a
stove enameled or powder coated paint finish. Flanges shall be fitted with sealing gaskets.
The valves shall be installed with the aid of a mounting ring and air flow adjusted by rotating
the central disc. Finish of valves shall be to the Consultants approval.
2.10
EXTRACT AIR LOUVRES

Louvres shall be extruded Aluminium frame with Aluminium blades of not less than 2 mm
thickness, and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not
exceed 1800 mm.
M-5
VOLUME-III
Behind each louvre shall be an insect mesh screen 76 x 6 mm made from 2 mm diameter
stainless steel wire. The screen will be clamped by a 20 mm frame and will be firmly fixed to
the outer edges of the louvre. The frame shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
The connection to the louvre shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted to
the louvre.
Louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Consultant.
2.11
SAND TRAP LOUVRE FOR AIR INTAKE

Sand trap louvres shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming
air by means of centrifugal forces. Separation efficiency particle size 350-700 shall not be less
than 90% at a face velocity of 1M/Sec and not less than 70% at a face velocity of 2M/sec.
Sand trap louvre shall be of aluminium construction, self cleaning and maintenance free. The
base of the louvre shall have self-emptying sand holes. Pressure drop at 2 M/Sec average face
velocity shall not exceed 120 pascals. Stainless steel insect mesh shall be included.
Sand louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Consultant.
2.12
RADIAL FLOW DIFFUSERS (where Applicable)

The radial diffusers shall be flush face and shall be designed to produce a low velocity, multi
directional air pattern
The diffuser shall have perforated face flush with the ceiling line for a continuous pleasant
architectural appearance.
The plenum, equalization baffle and perforated face shall be powder coated steel construction
with sterile white thermal setting finish.
The diffuser shall have fixed pattern control blades set at precise discharge angles to provide
effective directional air control with minimum resistance and noise generation.
The diffuser shall have an internal air baffle to equalize the airflow and guides it to critical
locations across the face of the diffuser.
The face panel shall be removable from the room side via quarter turn fasteners providing
access for damper adjustment or cleaning.
The semi-cylindrical air pattern and low noise level of the diffuser shall allow selection at
higher air volumes than conventional diffusers, making it suitable for laboratories application.
The diffuser shall be two-way full radial air flow pattern and shall have neck mounted volume
control damper fabricated of coated steel with nickel plated operators and finished in sterile
white.
2.13
JET DIFFUSERS
Jet nozzles shall be suitable for long throw distances with optimum acoustic properties. The
adjustment facility shall allow variation in discharge angle to compensate for changing
temperature differences, adjustment angular range 30 upwards to 30 downwards.
The fixed jet nozzle shall consist of an aerodynamically shaped discharge nozzle deep-drawn
in one piece or more, with fixing holes. Adjustable construction shall consist of a discharge
M-6
VOLUME-III
nozzle with spherical outlet mounted in housing, a mounting flange and in a circular duct rear
connection spigot for direct connection to a circular or rectangular duct.
Materials:
The discharge nozzle and face cover ring shall be in aluminium with powder coating, the
mounting for the eyeball is with two plastic rings colour to Architect choice, the connection
element and saddle connection shall be in galvanised sheet steel.
The surface shall be pre-treated and powder coated in white or any other RAL colour to
Architect/ Interior Designer choice.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.1.1
Verify inlet/outlet locations.
3.1.2
Verify the size of air terminals to achieve proper air pattern.
3.1.3
Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.
3.1.4
Ensure the noise generated by air terminals is within the permissible range.
3.1.5
Coordinate beginning and completion of installation with other works.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
Install all Air Inlets and Air Outlets as indicated on project drawings and in accordance with
the manufacturers installation instructions.
3.2.2
Where electrical reheat coils are provided with air terminal boxes, provide duct access doors
in ductwork upstream and downstream of reheat coil. Duct access doors shall be of the
necessary dimensions to access and replace reheat coils.
3.2.4
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Or as per architectural
specifications.
3.2.5
Interface with other products

Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3.3
CLEANING
3.3.1
Protect all Air Inlets and Air Outlets against entry of foreign matter during construction
works.
3.3.2
Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the entire duct system and clean diffusers, registers
and grilles before operating fans.
3.3.3
Provide temporary capping to prevent entry of foreign matter during construction.
3.3.4
Clean duct systems, Air Inlets and Air Outlets with high power vacuum machines. Protect
equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.
Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
M-7
VOLUME-III
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
The identification shall be as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as per Section
15075 Mechanical Identification.
3.5

Coordinate adjustment of Air Inlets and Air Outlets with procedures of Testing, Balancing
and Commissioning as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as per Section
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
END OF SECTION
M-8
VOLUME-III
AIR FILTERS & ECOLOGY UNITS

Mechanical Section 23 41 00: Air Filters & Ecology Unit
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the air filters as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.1.2
Panel filters.
1.1.3
Bag filters.
1.1.4
Electro-static Filters
1.1.5
Odor Neutralizer
1.2
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.2.1
ANSI/UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.
1.2.2
ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
1.2.3
ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Filter media shall be as ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class 1 or Class 2.
1.3.2
Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer, where possible.
1.3.3
Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Submit shop drawings and product data on filter media, filter performance data, filter
assembly and filter frames.
1.4.2
Submit two samples of replacement filter media of each type and filter frame.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
BAG FILTERS (EU 8/ MERV14)
2.2.1
Where indicated on the drawing, bag filter sections shall be incorporated
2.2.2
These can comprise a composite section of the air handling unit and shall be arranged to
enable side withdrawal of the filter media from the unit.
Holding frames shall be constructed from a J return channel of galvanized sheet steel with
suitable seals provided to prevent air bypass around the filters.

M-2
VOLUME-III
2.2.3
The filter media shall consist of high density glass micro fibre media with individual dust
holding compartments, reinforced with a backing to form a lofted filter blanket. The filter
media shall have an average efficiency of not less than 95% on ASHRAE test standard 52 76
and shall have and average arrestance of not less than 99% on that standard. The media shall
also have a minimum efficiency of 99.9% in filtering 5 microns particles and larger. The
filter unit shall be completely factory assembled & tested by the manufacturer in accordance
with Eurovent 4/5, rated to EU8 or MERV 14.
2.2.4
The configuration of the dust holding compartments shall be controlled by means of

progressive link stitching. The stitching shall be such that it forms a supported compartment
resulting in uniform velocities in the passage of the air exit side of the filter.
2.2.5
The pockets shall be chemically adhered around the periphery of the galvanized steel
retainers.
2.2.6
Retainers shall have rolled edges to reduce possible cuts to media, or lacerations to installers. .
2.2.7
The dust holding compartments shall be equipped with a minimum of 516 support points per
square meter of the filter media.
2.2.8
All stitching points shall be sealed with a hot melt adhesive.
2.2.9
Filter bank shall be fitted with an inclined tube manometer connected at the works by the
manufacturer.
2.3
PANEL FILTERS (G4 / MERV 8)
2.3.1
Filter media shall consist of chemical fibers reinforced with non-wetted plastic bonding agent.
The filter media shall be tested in accordance Eurovent 4/5 rated to EU4 or G4 (MERV 8) as
per EN 779 having an average synthetic dust weight arrestance of 86%.
2.3.2
Media support grid shall be welded wire grid with an effective open area of not less than
96%. The welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to eliminate the possibility of
media oscillation and media pull away. The media support grid shall be formed in such a
manner that it affect a radial pleat design, allowing total use of filter media.
2.3.3
Enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy dotty, high wet strength beverage board
with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and air existing side of each pleat
to ensure pleat stability.
2.3.4
They shall be fixed in permanent holding frames, and clips to ensure quick and easy removal
of pre filters. The arrangement of the prefilters shall not impair access to and serviceability of
the bag filters. All frames and clips shall be galvanized steel or other acceptable corrosion
resistant material.
2.3.5
All filter elements shall be bedded firmly into permanent frame seals and presses firmly and
other continuously onto face of bag filter frame by a cam operated mechanism or a series of
accessible clips for front withdrawal type to prevent air by passing.
2.3.6
Panel filter assemblies shall be 50 mm thick unless otherwise specified and have efficiencies
of not less than those given below for various types of media when tested, to BS 2831 Test
Dust No. 2, or ASHRAE 52-76 test.
2.3.7
Typical performance requirements :

M-3
VOLUME-III
Nominal
Face Velocity
m/s
Initial
PD
Efficiency
Pa
BS2831-
at Design
ASHRAE 52-76
1
2
2.0
2.0
70
80
83
86
Media
No.
Typical Construction
1.
2.
Laminated two stage glass filament media.

As type 1. followed with a synthetic scrim.
Media
Volume
Type
92
96
2.3.8
The filter media shall provide a normal servicing frequency of 4 months with a rise in
pressure drop from clean to dirty of not more than twice the initial pressure drop.
2.3.9
Each filter bank shall be fitted with an inclined tube manometer connected at the works by the
manufacturer.
2.4
Not Used.
2.5
ELECTROSTATIC FILTERS
2.5.1
Principle of Operation
The principle of operation shall be based on negative or positive electrical charge (ionization)
to a particle. The particle shall then be passed between finely spaced parallel metal plates
(average spacing of 5 to 10mm) which are held at opposite electrical potentials. One plate
shall be charged to the same polarity as the ionized particle whilst the other shall be earthed
(opposite with respect to the positive/ negative).
As the charged particle travels between the two metal plates it shall be forced away from the
plate held at the identical polarity and drawn towards the earthed plate. During the path of
travel the parallel effect takes place resulting in the charged particle becoming attached to the
earthed plate due to the electrostatic difference. Once attached the particle shall remain
suspended on the plate until cleaned off during maintenance / washing system.
The electrostatic precipitator shall separate the small grease and smoke particles that penetrate
the main grease filters in the kitchen exhaust hood and the prefilter of the unit.
2.5.2
Unit Housing
Housing shall be 16-gauge zinc coated steel construction to protect against rust and corrosion.
Each section shall include single door access, located one side of the unit. The access door
shall be mounted on steel hinges and secured with adjustable, gasket sealed lever latches
allowing for component access and removal. All doors shall be gasketed to prevent air and
water leakage. Between each section a permanent 1/8 thick gasket shall be installed to
prevent leakage. The bottom drain pan on modules containing integral washing systems shall
be pitched downward 1/4 per foot minimum toward a drain nipple.
The unit shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of 5 years against corrosion.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5.3
Base Construction
The modules shall be mounted on a channel for rail or floor mounting or ceiling suspension.
Lifting lugs shall be incorporated in the base channel to allow for rigging.
2.5.4
Finish
The external casing finish shall be a durable industrial grade semi gloss baked- on epoxy
ester, not less than 3 mil minimum thickness.
2.5.5
Efficiency
The operating efficiency when clean shall be 95 - 98% at particle sites down to 0.01 micron.
2.5.6
Ionizing-Collecting Cells
Ionizing-Collecting cell shall be of one-piece construction 18 inches deep in direction of
airflow. All support framing, end plates and ionizer ground electrodes shall be 0.090 inch
thick aluminum. Both repelling and collector plates shall be 0.032 inch thick aluminum,
12.875 inch deep in direction of airflow and rigidly retained in place with tubular spacers and
tie rods. Spacing between plates shall be no less than 0.318 inch. Ionizing electrodes shall be
24 gauge stainless steel spiked design, ionization wires are not acceptable, rigidly supported
both vertically and laterally. Ionizing electrode to ground electrode spacing shall be 1.0625"
and ionizer ground electrodes will be 4.0" in direction of airflow. High voltage support
insulators shall be of self-glazing Cordierite ceramic with all surfaces, including center hole,
glazed to enhance dielectric strength and retard tracking. Flexible wiring connected to the
insulators shall be insulated with form fitting nitirle boots sized to the specific wire size to
insulate and maintain collection efficiency. Insulators shall be mounted out of the airstream,
to reduce contaminant buildup.
2.5.7
System Controls and Power Supply

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and power supplies shall be housed in an appropriate
enclosure. Terminals shall be provided to interconnect the system fan and shall sequence the
detergent wash, soak, rinse, fan force dry and return to operation cycle. All sequence times
shall be factory set. Control initiation shall be fully automatic by time clock, with
semiautomatic push button override.
2.5.8
Odor Neutralizer
The odor neutralizer shall be used to deal with the gaseous phase pollutant.
The unit shall use ozone to neutralize the odors.
The ozone generator shall be silent pulse corona discharge type only and shall be able to treat
the air of all microorganisms and other harmful gases.
The ducted type ozone generator shall be wall mounted and shall be a sealed type system
(installed outside the duct) so that there is no direct contact of the electrodes with the air to be
treated. Ozone generators that project into the ductwork are not allowed. Ozone generators
shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes without interfering with the working of
the air conditioning system during servicing.
The ozone generator shall have an airflow meter mounted on the front panel. Also required is
a moisture indicator that is indicative of the air quality present in the ambient. The moisture

M-5
VOLUME-III
indicator changes color with variation in the intake air quality. It should be blue all the time
for best performance of the ozone unit.
The ozone shall be injected by means of a TTL lined Teflon tubing into the air stream. Ozone
generator cabinet shall be aluminum, gray enamel cabinet. The ozone generator shall have a
built in air dryer, flow sensor interlock and a 10 position switch so as to have an output
ozone concentration control from 0 100%. The unit shall be able to interface with BMS
system.
As an option chemical type odor neutralizer shall be accepted.
2.6
Ecology Unit
The Ecology unit shall be provided at the extract air ductwork of commercial kitchens.
The Ecology unit shall comprise of three bank filters (grease filter, bag filter, electrostatic
filter) along with centrifugal extract fan and odor neutralizer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
INSTALLATION GENERAL
Install all air cleaning devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.2
Reinforce filter holding frames per manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.3
Access doors shall be provided for maintenance and renewal of filter elements and related
items. Maintain necessary clearance for changing filters.
3.1.4
Where air handling equipment is to be used for temporary heating or ventilation of a facility,
do not operate the equipment until specified filter media has been installed. Subcontractor
shall be responsible for maintaining the cleanliness of air handling apparatus and air
distribution systems during construction through regular inspection and changing of filter
media throughout the construction period.
3.1.5
Where air handling apparatus is used during the construction period, install new filter media
prior to start of air balancing. Additionally, deliver one new set of media to the Consultant
prior to substantial completion.
3.2
FILTER GAUGES
Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount gauge on
outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position; install tubing and gauge
valves between gauge and sensor tips. Adjust and level each gauge.

M-6
VOLUME-III
3.3
START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE
3.3.1
Clean and vacuum filter inserts, air handling units and plenums and sections of the air
distribution system to the satisfaction of the Consultant prior to starting air handling systems.
3.3.2
Install or deliver replacement filter units as directed by the Consultant.
3.4

Testing, Balancing and Commissioning shall be as detailed in standards listed in this Section
as well as per section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
3.5
SPARE PARTS
3.2.1
One set of each type of filter for every AHU
END OF SECTION

M-7
VOLUME-III
AIR COOLED WATER PACKAGE CHILLERS

Mechanical Section 23 64 26: Air Cooled Water Chillers
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Microprocessor-controlled air cooled liquid screw chiller shall use screw compressors with
refrigerant HFC-134a.
1.2
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Chiller performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest
edition.
B.
Equipment and installation shall be in compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 (latest

edition).
C.
Cooler and condenser refrigerant side shall include ASME U stamp and nameplate
certifying compliance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1 code for unfired pressure
vessels.
D.
Chiller shall be designed and constructed to meet UL and UL, Canada requirements and
have labels appropriately affixed.
E.
Compressor impellers shall be dynamically balanced and over-speed tested by the

manufacturer at a minimum of 120% design operating speed. Each compressor assembly
shall undergo a mechanical run-in test to verify vibration levels, oil pressures, and
temperatures are within acceptable limits. Each compressor assembly shall be proof
tested at a minimum 204 psig (1406 kPa) and leak tested at 185 psig (1276 kPa) with a
tracer gas mixture.
F.
Entire chiller assembly shall be proof tested at 204 psig (1406 kPa) and leak tested at
185 psig (1276 kPa) with a tracer gas mixture on the refrigerant side. The water side of
each heat exchanger shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.3 times rated working pressure.
G.
Prior to shipment, the chiller automated controls test shall be executed to check for
proper wiring and ensure correct controls operation.
H.
On chillers with unit-mounted compressor motor starter , the chiller and starter shall be
factory wired and tested together to verify proper operation prior to shipment.

A.
Unit shall be stored and handled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Unit shall be shipped with all refrigerant piping and control wiring factory
installed.
C.
Unit shall be shipped charged with oil and full charge of refrigerant HFC-134a or a
nitrogen holding charge as specified on the equipment schedule.
D.
Unit shall be shipped with firmly attached labels that indicate name of manufacturer,
chiller model number, chiller serial number, and refrigerant used.
E.
If the chiller is to be exported, the unit shall be sufficiently protected from the factory
against sea water corrosion to be suitable for shipment in a standard open top, ocean
shipping container.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.4
WARRANTY
Warranty shall include parts and labor for one year after start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever
occurs first. A refrigerant warranty shall be provided for a period of five years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0
AIR COOLED PACKAGE CHILLERS
2.1
Supply and install where indicated air cooled water chillers with twin screw compressors
having capacity not less than that scheduled at 46 degrees centigrade ambient. The water
pressure drop shall not exceed 48 kilopascals.
2.2.
The unit shall operate on 400volts, 50 Hertz, 3 phase electrical service.
2.3.
The unit shall be completely factory assembled on a rugged channel steel base and be
individually performance tested at full and part load conditions. The unit shall be leak tested
and shipped with a full operating charge of refrigerant R-134a or equivalent (Non CFCs and
Non Blends). Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with the latest EUROVENT
EN14511 standard and shall comply with EN60204-1 Safety code, EC/EEC European code
and PED Code for pressure vessels of EUROVENT. Unit ratings shall be in both imperial
and metric systems.
2.4.
Unit casing and all structural members shall be fabricated of continuous galvanized steel and
rugged steel channel. Exterior casing shall be painted with a baked enamel finish minimum
of 150 Micron.
2.5.
Screw compressors shall be fully accessible semi-hermetic mounted on the sliding rails for
easy maintenance, direct drive with maximum 2950 RPM. Bearing groups at each end of
rotors shall be separately housed with pressure lubricated rolling elements. Capacity control
shall be fully modulating by use of a slide valve in the rotor section of the compressors
positioned by hydraulic action to adjust the capacity from 100% to 15% load. Fitments
included shall be suction and discharge service valves and pressure gauges, removable core
filter dryer, sight glass with moisture indicator, oil strainer. Electronic expansion valve,
economizer controlled by EXV for improved efficiency.
2.6.
Compressor motors shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high torque, semi-hermetic induction type
with inherent thermal protection in all three phases. Compressors shall be mounted on
anti-vibration spring isolators to minimize noise and vibration transmission. Chiller composer
shall have acoustic enclosures.
2.7.
Cooler shall be Flooded type with carbon steel barrel, water baffles, and internally finned
copper through-tubes roll expanded into heavy carbon steel tube sheets. The cooler shall be
constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with PED code (or equal) requirements, with a
refrigerant side rating of 2000 KPa and a water side rating of min. 1000 KPa. Shell shall be
integrally insulated with 19-mm thick polyurethane foam mechanically protected by factory
fitted Aluminium cladding for external aggression (Mechanical & UV protection). The chiller
shall have only one inlet/outlet water connections of VICTAULIC type connections to ensure
mechanical decoupling between the unit and the hydronic installation. The evaporator shall be
equipped with a water drain and a purge plug.
2.8.
The condenser coil shall consist of multiple transversal V shaped coils to provide self
protection. Each V will have an angle superior to 50 to ensure optimum air distribution. Each
module shall have 2 coils and max two fans. Coils with integrated sub cooling will be entirely
made of aluminium to limit galvanic corrosion and will offer a resistance to corrosion

M-3
VOLUME-III
compatible with coastal or urban environments. Coil shall be mounted in a painted frame to
reduce corrosion risk and shall be isolated from the Chiller frame by rubber insulating mount.
The coil shall pressure test at 4400 kPa. Coils should have a thickness of 1 inch to generate
low air pressure drop and offer reduced sensitivity to clogging. The fins shall be 0.1mm
thickness and shall in rows protected by the coil rows from top and bottom. Fins shall be
brazed to the coil from top and bottom in an automatic process in an oven to create sturdy
coil/fins body. Manual brazing is not accepted. .Condenser coil shall be easily cleanable using
a high pressure cleaner up to 60 bar pressure rating. The condenser coils shall be leak-tested
by helium gas detection. Coil shall be guaranteed for a period of three years.
Alternately condenser coil shall be constructed of min. 3/8" (9.5mm) mm O.D. seamless
copper tubes mechanically expanded into plate type aluminium fins. Entire condenser coil
must be factory tested for leaks at min. 3100 KPa. All fins shall be with full drawn collars. A
sub cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main condenser coil. Coils and fins shall have
factory applied heresite coating or equal approved. Coil shall be guaranteed for a period of
three years.
2.9.
Condenser fans shall be low noise propeller type with a rotating shroud arranged for vertical
discharge. The fans shall be direct drive by separate fan motors. Fan blades shall be corrosion
resistant composite material construction statically and dynamically balanced. Each fan shall
be protected by a heavy duty fan guard. Condenser fan motors shall be specially purpose built
IP55 totally enclosed with Class-F insulation designed for high ambient temp. operation
without sacrificing any reduction in shaft output to avoid nuisance tripping at high ambient.
All condenser fan motors must be protected externally by means of sensitive ambient
compensated thermal O/L relay located inside the control panel for easy access. The motor
shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings. Fans shall have low RPM which should not
exceed 950 RPM to reduce the noise level.
2.10.
Units shall be provided with automatic head pressure control to permit satisfactory operation
at low ambient air temperatures by cycling condenser fans in response to head pressure
variations.
2.11.
Unit shall be capable of operating at ambient temperatures of 55 degrees centigrade with a

capacity reduction without mechanical failure.
2.12.
Field power connection, control interlock terminals and unit control system shall be centrally
located in a weatherproof enclosure. Panel access doors shall be key locked and include steel
rod door retainers to prevent flapping while open. Dead front panels shall protect service
personnel against accidental contact with live voltage components.
2.13.
Power and starting components shall include individual circuit breaker for each compressor.
Circuit breaker for the control circuit, starting contactors, including individual contactors for
each fan motor, solid state compressor sequence start timers, solid state overload protection in
all phases for the compressor and a unit terminal block for field connection to a single
disconnect switch. Unit shall have single or multiple power connections. Panel to be protected
against direct sun to avoid temperature raise inside the control panel.
2.14.
Unit controls shall include the following minimum components :

-
Microprocessor
Power and Control circuit terminal blocks.
ON/OFF control switch

M-4
VOLUME-III
Replaceable solid state relay panel
8 Digit alpha numeric diagnostic display / set point panel
Thermistor and / or pressure transducers.

Controls shall be capable of performing following functions:
2.15
Automatic compressor lead / lag.
Pump down at beginning and end of every circuit cycle.
Capacity control based on leaving chilled water temperature and compensated by rate
of change of return water temperature.
Limiting of chilled water temperature pull down rate at start upto 0.56 deg. C per
minute of prevent excessive demand spikes at start up.
Leaving chilled water temperature reset.
Unit Safeties
Unit shall be equipped with thermistor and / or pressure transducers and all necessary
components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following
protections:
2.16
Loss of refrigerant charge protection
Low water flow detection
Low chilled water temperature protection
Low and high superheat protection
Low oil protection for each compressor
Low control voltage to unit protection
Ground current protection for each compressor which shuts down compressor when
no more than 2.5 amps are measured to prevent formation of acids.
Compressors shall be provided with following manual reset type
protections.
a.
Pressure Overload
b.
Electrical overload through the use of definite purpose contactors and

calibrated, ambient compensated magnetic trip circuit breakers. Circuit
breakers shall open all three phases in the event of an overload in any one
phase or single phasing condition.
Diagnostics
Diagnostic display module shall be capable of indicating the safety lockout condition by
displaying a code for which an explanation may be scrolled at the display. Protections
included for display shall be:

M-5
VOLUME-III
Compressor lockout
Loss of charge
Low water flow
Low oil pressure
Cooler freeze protection
High or low suction superheat
Thermistor or potentiometer malfunction
Entering and leaving water temperature
Evaporator and condenser pressure
All set points.
The module in conjunction with the microprocessor shall also be capable of displaying the
output of a run test to verify operation of every switch, thermistor, potentiometer, fan and
compressor before the chiller is started.
Chiller should have built in Black box and can store 6 alarms with selective readings 75 scan
before trip and 5 after trip and processor stored 80 scanned data in the black box.
2.17
Multi refrigerant circuits shall be completely independent of each other. Each unit shall have
a minimum of two refrigerant circuits.
2.18
The units shall also include capacity reduction thermostats for operation upto 131 degrees F.
(55 degrees C).
2.19
The units shall have flow switches in all outlet line and shall have operating - hour meters.
2.20
The unit shall be monitored and controlled by chiller Program Manager as detailed.
2.21
Programmable Chiller Plant Manager
2.21.1 A factory furnished, programmed, microprocessor-based controller shall be provided to

supervise and optimize the operation of the individual PIC controllers for each chiller. All
application software actually performing the required control functions shall be factory
supplied with the controller and shall be pre-tested and pre configured.
2.21.2 The network chiller PICs shall interface with the PSC installed on the network. The PSC
shall include software that allows dynamic interaction between the PSC and the chiller PICs
to create a complete chilled water plant system.
2.21.3 The PSC shall not interfere with the PICs stand alone operating or safety algorithms but shall
enhance their operation by providing the following inherent capabilities as a minimum.
-
Control three chillers based on the system load.
Control of associated pumps.
Ability to enable/disable the chiller plant based on the PSC's internal time schedule
and time schedule override, remote contact closure or network command.
Chiller and pump fault logic and the automatic starting of lag chillers or pumps.
Operator selected chiller sequencing or automatic weekly/daily selection based on

fixed rotation or runtime equalization.
Chiller capacity control based on system load.

M-6
VOLUME-III
Demand limiting
Chilled water reset
Power fail restart
Alarm capability
2.21.4 The PSC shall contain factory programmed software for the system comprising of:
-
Two parallel chillers, Three primary pumps constant speed, two secondary pumps
variable speed.
2.21.5 The operator shall be able to modify, add, or delete time schedules, setpoints, chiller
sequences, KW setpoints, etc.
2.21.6 The PSC shall include a 365 day internal electronic clock. The clock shall provide upto eight
occupied / unoccupied periods and shall support hour, minute, day of week, day, month, year
leap year, and holiday scheduling.
2.21.7 The PSC shall maintain its programs in battery backed up RAM. The battery shall be rated at
a minimum for one year's continuous use. Controllers that are supplied with batteries that
require changing before one year shall be backed up by an uninterrupted power supply.
END OF SECTION

M-7
VOLUME-III
AIR HANDLING UNITS
Mechanical Section 23 73 23: Air Handling Units
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORKS INCLUDED
1.1.1
complete the air handling units for the laboratories, library, Residential areas, main kitchens,
and undercroft areas as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2
1.2.1
Noise Control
1.2.2
Vibration Control
1.2.4
Filters
1.2.5
Electric Motors
1.2.6
Electric Motor Starters
1.2.7
Dampers
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
1.3.1
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
1.3.2
AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
1.3.3
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
1.3.4
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
1.3.5
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
1.3.6
AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
1.3.7
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
1.3.8
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
1.3.9
ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
1.3.10 ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.

1.3.11 NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
1.3.12 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3.13 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.3.14 UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
M-2
VOLUME-III
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Shop Drawings:
1.4.1.1 Equipment performance data, dimensioned installation details.

1.4.1.2 Provide radiated and duct bound/discharge noise data for the completed units.
1.4.1.3 Provide a cost for an option to provide and install controllers and control valves for connection
to the BMS. Provide an open architecture language and specify it as Lonworks.
1.5
PRODUCT DATA:
1.5.1
Manufacturer's latest published data for material, gauges, fan performance, capacities, ratings,
equipment and installation, including dimensions, weights, filter assembly, connections, and
filter frames along with electrical characteristics.
1.5.2
Submit sound power level date for both fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
1.5.3
Certified fan curves including volume-pressure-power characteristics from shut-off to free

delivery; indicate the operating point plotted on the relevant fan curve.
1.5.4
Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for
interlock wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
1.5.5
Submit performance, noise and vibration test results of the air handling unit. Provide test
results for review to any air handling unit shipment to the job site.
1.6
ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1
All air handling equipment must be designed to operate in accordance with the minimum
noise criteria scheduled on the drawings.
1.7
PERFORMANCE TESTING
1.7.1
All air handling units designed for greater than 2m/s air flow shall be performance tested at
Factory.
1.7.2
The performance test shall include design air flow, pressure drops (total and components) and
full acoustic (duct bound and last radiated).
1.7.3
Attendance for the performance test shall include the MEP Contractor, Employer, and the
Engineer.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.8.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air

handling units with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
1.8.2
Codes and Standard:

a)
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI
430 Standard for air handling units, display certification symbol on units
of certified models.
M-3
VOLUME-III
b)
ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install cooling coils in accordance

with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
c)
The following CEN standards (Comite European de Normalisation) shall be

maintained:
Mechanical stability according to CEN : CLASS 2A (EN1886)
Tightness according to CEN: CLASS B (EN1886)
Thermal Insulation according to CEN : CLASS T2
Damper leakage less than 0.5% as per CEN Standard
Thermal bridging factor of the casing as per class TB2 CEN standard.
Panel Strength to be D1 class as per Eurovent standard.
d)
Eurovent certification shall be provided/checked on the website as

confirmation that such certification is applicable on the date of submission.
Non Eurovent certified units or Eurovent rated units are not acceptable.
-
Airtight seal material meets NFPA 90A require ments for flame
spread and smoke generation
Casing sheet metal to withstand 1000 -hours salt spray exceeding
ASTM B117
Air filters performance according to ASHRAE Standard 52 -76 or
EUROVENT Standard 5/6
Electric Heater Heating Elements manufactured accor dance to NEC
and UL Space Heating Standard No 1996
Fan performance tested and certified to DIN and AMCA Standard
e)
Fire protection for AHU insulation should be in accordance with NFPA 90A.
f)
Sound power levels shall be based on tests performed in accordance with BS

848 Part 2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Refer to approved Manufacturers list in Appendix.
2.2
PACKAGE AIR HANDLING UNITS
2.2.1
The units shall be draw-through single zone units. Manufacturers of air handling units shall
have ISO 9001 certification.
2.2.2
The unit casings shall be of double skinned panels. Casing shall be assembled with self
supporting modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of zincated steel and
sections along upper sides of the units. Sheet metal thickness shall be not less than 1.0MM for
the inner skin and 0.8MM for the outer skin and made from zincated steel sheets. The outside
of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.2 MM for additional protection.
Inside and outside of panel walls shall be completely smooth.
All casing panels shall be insulated by glass fiber layer of 50mm thickness at 90 Kg/m3
density, incombustible with Class of inflammability:
A1 in accordance to DIN 4102
0 in accordance to ISO 1181.2
M-4
VOLUME-III
Alternatively panels shall comprise of 0.8 mm thick inner and outer skins with infil of
polyurethane foam of 40 Kg/M3 density. The outside of the outer skin shall be plastic
coated to a thickness of 0.2 mm for additional protection and the total panel thickness
shall not be less than 50 mm.
The sound absorption through the panel shall be according to DIN 52210-03 Rw = 42 dB.
The sound reduction through the panel required shall conform to the values below for the
various panel metal thickness.
Thick
VZ/VZ
1.0/0.6
1.5/0.8
1.5/1.0
HZ
63
15
15
15
HZ
125
15
23.5
22.5
HZ
250
33.5
34.5
34.5
HZ
500
41
39
44.5
HZ
1000
42.5
45
47.5
HZ
2000
39
46.5
52
HZ
4000
37
45.5
56
HZ
8000
37
45
56
dB
Rw
36
42
45
(Rw) weighted sound reduction factor, calculated as DIN 52210

Panel thickness (VZ/VZ) IN/OUT in MM
Panels shall be assembled with special rivets. The inspection side of the coil section panels
shall be assembled with bolts and nuts for easy removal of coils. Panel air tightness and
sections upto 2500 Pa as required in EUROVENT 2/2.
The base frame of the units shall be made from sendzimir galvanized sheet metal for size with
largest dimensions upto 2500 MM, and hot dip galvanized U-profile for larger units. Service
doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access doors 400MM and
larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening. Access
doors with width smaller than 400 MM shall be removable type fitted with quick release flap
turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be a anti fungicide
sealant material.
2.2.3
All roof AHUs exposed to ambient are to be fitted weather hoods and with sand trap louvres
and insect screen for FA intake.
2.2.4
Drain pans shall be stainless steel either integrated in the insulated base or placed under the
coil within the coil section. Drain pans shall have drain connection to the service side.
The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior
of panels. In the event that any condensation problems appear after installation, the Contractor
shall undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Any
stacked or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce carry over, such pans
will be piped to the main drain, not into the lower pan.
2.2.5
Fans and shafts shall operate well below their critical speeds. Each shaft assembly shall be
statically and dynamically balanced before shipment from the manufacturer. If any out-ofbalance is apparent on site the Consultant reserves the right to require new factory supplied
units to be provided until satisfactory balance is demonstrated.
2.2.6
The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor
and drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air
handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer.
2.2.7
Dampers, including face and bypass dampers, shall be of galvanized steel construction of the
opposed blade aerofoil blade profile suitable for vertical or horizontal installation. Frame shall
be drilled flange type with same material as the damper blades. Blades shall rotate on
M-5
VOLUME-III
corrosion and temperature resistant plastic gears acting as low friction bearing. Plastic gear
shall be made from Polypropylene for temperatures upto 110 deg.C.
Damper drive shall be square shaft and linkage suitable for manual fixing or mounting of
damper actuator.
Dampers shall be sectionalised to limit the length of blade not more than 1.2 meters in order
to prevent excess blade warping and assure tightness.
2.2.8
Fans shall be double inlet double width centrifugal fan with casing made of galvanized sheet
metal, statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be with aerofoil shaped blades. Motor
and fan assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanized steel base frame with easily
adjustable motor slide rail. All fans shall be selected for maximum efficiency and in no case
less than 70 percent.
2.2.9
Motors shall be totally encased, foot mounted, fan cooled, IP54 with Class 'F' insulation.
Fan bearing shall be re-lubricated type with extended lube lines to terminate outside the fan
section. The bearing shall be selected for life of 200,000 Hours operation (fan manufacturer
shall certify that the bearing selected for the particular duty shall be theoretically suitable for
this duration of operation). Fan drive shall be rated at 150% of the maximum motor power of
the units and shall be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement.
2.2.11 Filters:
Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be easily obtainable from standard suppliers.
The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently elastic gasket to a
standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
Pressure drop tapings shall be integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or filter monitor
to be fitted. Filter materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, non-odorous and offer no
sustenance to vermin. The filter section has to be provided with manometer.
The Filter material shall be pleated to provide a large effective area and shall be supported by
a wire mesh and frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side withdrawal on the inspection
side.
Panel filter shall be cleanable Merv-8 type (35% efficiency) & long bag filter shall be Merv14 type (95% efficiency).
a)
The Prefilter material shall be synthetic and shall be supported by a wire mesh and
frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side withdrawal on the inspection side. The
filter shall be sized at approximately 1.3 m/s face velocity.
b)
Bag Filters, shall be of standard readily available sizes. The filters shall be clamped
against the frame using a cam locking bar.
c)
HEPA filters where applicable shall be as specified in section 23 41 00 (Air Filters).
2.2.12 Chilled water / Heating water coils of capacities as indicated on schedules shall be fabricated
from heavy gauge copper tubing expanded into aluminum fins to give a mechanical bond.
Return bends shall be die formed. Headers shall be heavy section seamless copper tubing with
connections made in steel pipe with anti corrosion protection paint and with external screw
thread. All joints shall be silver brazed. Fittings shall include plugged vent and drain taps for
each section. Coils in contact with outside air (either mixed or full) shall be provided with
factory applied baked heresite coating and anti fungal paint.
M-6
VOLUME-III
The coil shall be designed to operate at 16 bar NP.

2.2.13 Direct expansion coils (where applicable) of capacities as indicated on schedules shall have
aluminium fins with belled collars and bonded to 13mm OD copper tubes by mechanical
expansion. Coils shall be provided with brass distributors with solder type connections and
shall have a minimum of two distributors. Coils shall have full face active with intertwined
circuit. Suction and discharge connections shall be at the same end. After testing, coils shall
be dehydrated and charged with dry air.
Coils in contact with outside air (either mixed or full) shall be provided with factory applied
baked heresite coating and anti fungal paint.
2.2.14 Not used.
2.2.15 The coil shall be assembled in a galvanized steel housing which is drilled to meet the adjacent
sections of the A.H.U. and/or fan. The coil shall be mounted on guide rails for side
withdrawal. Header connection through the unit casing shall be sealed with plastic grommet.
2.2.16 AHUs fans shall be provided with adjustable drive pulleys to give plus or minus 10% from
the rated design speeds. Belt guards shall be provided as standard fitting.
2.2.17 Electric heating coils of capacities as indicated on schedules shall be heavy construction of
304L stainless steel with absolute safety finned tubes. Maximum specific power shall be 4
watts/Cm2.
2.2.18 Heater battery shall be supplied with manual reset over heat thermostat, prewired to terminal
stip.
2.2.19 Air handling units shall match the duties as scheduled.
2.3
THERMAL HEAT WHEEL (HEAT RECOVERY DEVICE) :

The substrate:
The substrate or wheel matrix should be only of pure aluminum foil so as to allow:
a)
b)
c)
Quick and efficient uptake of thermal energy.

Sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer
Maximum sensible heat recovery at a relatively low rotational speed of 20 to
25 rpm.
Non-metallic substrates made from paper, plastic, synthetic or glass fibre media, will
therefore, not be acceptable.
The substrate shall not be made from any material, which is combustible or supports
combustion.
The Desiccant :
The desiccant should be water molecule selective and non-migratory.
The desiccant should be molecular sieve 3, so as to keep the cross contamination to absolute
minimum and also ensure the exclusion of contaminants from the air streams, while
transferring the water vapour molecules.
The desiccant, of sufficient mass, should be coated with non-masking porous binder adhesive
M-7
VOLUME-III
on the aluminum substrate so as to allow quick and easy uptake and release of water vapour.
A matrix with desiccants impregnated in non-metallic substrates, such as synthetic fibre, glass
fibre, etc. will not be accepted.
The rotor/wheel matrix shall have equal sensible and latent recovery in the range of 80%.
The weight of desiccant coating and the mass of aluminum foil shall be in a ratio so as to
ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent heat over the operating range. Accordingly,
a rotor matrix, which has an etched or oxidized surface to make a desiccant on a metal foil
and results in insufficient latent recovery and hence unequal recovery, or a rotor matrix made
from desiccant integrated in a synthetic fibre matrix, which result in insufficient sensible
recovery, high rotation speed, and unequal recovery, will not be accepted.
Rotor:
The rotor shall be made of alternate flat and corrugated aluminum foil of uniform width.
The rotor honeycomb matrix foil should be so wound and adhered as to make a structurally
very strong and rigid media which shall not get cracked, deformed etc. due to change of
temperature or humidity.
The rotor having a diameter upto 2800 mm shall have spokes to reinforce the matrix.
From 2000 mm diameter upwards, the option of a special wing structure, to prevent the rotors
from wobbling or deforming due to the successive pressure differentials, will be available.
Sectioned wheels, with pie segments, capable of being assembled in the field, shall be
available as an option, above 2000 mm in diameter.
The surface of the wheel/rotor should be highly polished to ensure that the vertical run out
does not exceed + 1 mm for every 1 metre diameter, thereby ensuring, negligible leakage, if
labyrinth non contact seals are provided, and minimal drag, if contact wiper seals are
provided.
The radial run out also shall not exceed + 1 mm for every 1 meter diameter, thereby
minimising the leakage/drag on the radial seals, and minimise the fluctuation in the tension of
the drive belt.
The number of wraps (of alternative corrugated and flat foil) for every inch of rotor radii shall
be very consistent so as to ensure uniform air flow and performance over the entire face in the
air stream. Flute height and pitch will be consistent to a very tight tolerance to ensure uniform
pressure drop and uniform airflows across the rotor face.
The rotor shall be a non clogging aluminum media, having a multitude of narrow aluminum
foil channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow, and will allow particles upto 800 microns to
pass through it.
With optimum heat and mass through matrix formed by desiccant, of sufficient mass, coated
on an aluminum foil, the rotor should rotate at lower than 20 to 25 RPM, thereby also
ensuring long life of belts and reduced wear and tear of seals. The media shall be cleanable
with compressed air, or low-pressure steam or light detergent, without degrading the latent
recovery.
The Cassette / casing:
The recovery wheel cassette/casing shall be manufactured from tubular structure to provide a
M-8
VOLUME-III
self supporting rigid structure, complete with access panels, purge sector, rotor, bearings,
seals, drive mechanism complete with belt.
The rotor/wheel should have a field adjustable purge mechanism to provide definite
separation of airflow minimizing the carryover of bacteria, dust and other pollutants, from the
exhaust air to the supply air. It shall be possible, with proper adjustment, to limit cross
contamination to less than 0.04% of that of the exhaust air concentration.
The face and radial seals shall be four (4) pass non-contact labyrinth seals for effective
sealing between the two air streams, and also for a minimum wear and tear ensuring infinite
life of the seals.
2.4
Humidifier:
The AHUs and FAHUs shall have electrode steam humidifier section:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2.5
Type: Self contained, replaceable cylinder, microprocessor con-trolled electrode

steam generating unit.
Cylinders: Disposable, polypropylene plastic with field adjustable steel electrodes.
Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber hosing,
with water fill with air gap and solenoid valve incorpo-rating built-in strainer,
pressure reducing and flow regulating orifice, and drain with integral air gap on drain.
Cabinet: Steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm) with enamel finish, with hinged and lockable access
door.
Control: Fully modulating control to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with
field adjustable maximum capacity; high water probe.
Drain Cycle: Field adjustable drain duration and drain interval.
Steam Distributor: Stainless steel steam dispersion tube.
UVC EMITTERS
Units shall be high output, HVAC-type, germicidal UVC light sources, factory
assembled and tested. Components shall include a housing, reflector, high
efficiency electronic power source, Emitter sockets and Emitter tube, all
constructed to withstand HVAC environments.
DE, SEN and SE Unit housings shall be made of 304 stainless steel, with DE
Units having electrical connectors on both ends to simplify gang wiring and wiring
to power. They shall include mounting holes to assist in securing the fixtures.
DE reflectors shall be constructed of high spectral finished aluminum alloy with a
minimum 85% reflectance of 254 nm UVC energy.
High efficiency electronic power sources shall be 115 or 208/230 V, 50/60 Hz.
They shall be UL listed to comply with UL Stand ard 1995 and capable of igniting
each Emitter at temperatures from 35 - 158 F in airflow velocities common to
HVAC systems. They shall be equipped with RF and line noise suppression.
Emitter tube shall be of the high output, hot cathode, T5 (15mm) diame ter, and
medium bi-pin type. They shall produce 95% of their energy at 254 nm and be
capable of producing the specified output at airflow velocities common to HVAC
systems and at temperatures of 35 - 158 F. UVC Emitters shall produce no
ozone or other secondary contamination.
2.6 Control Valve

The AHU cooling coil shall be provided with two port PICV (pressure independent
balancing and control valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
M-9
VOLUME-III
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.1.1
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.1.2
Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
3.1.3
Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and
electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.2.1
Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained spring
isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements
for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2.2
Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).
Install galvanized steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter
of concrete base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into
structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.
Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling unit using restrained spring isolators. Comply with
requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1
Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).
Install galvanized stainless-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric

pad.
3.2.3
Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
3.2.4
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
M - 10
VOLUME-III
3.2.5
Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
3.2.6
Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on
filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
3.3.1
Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3.2
Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
3.3.3
Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
3.3.4
Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.
Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
3.3.5
Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.
3.3.6
Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4
3.4.1

3.4.2

1
3.4.3
3.4.4


1
Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and
connections for leaks.
Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.
Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Automatic-Roll-Filter Operational Test: Operate filters to demonstrate compliance

with requirements. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.
and equipment.
Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not

pass tests and inspections.
M - 11
VOLUME-III
3.4.5
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
3.5.1
Perform startup service.

1
3.5.2
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermaloverload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
4
Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5
Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with
factory-recommended lubricants.
6
Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7
Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8
Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
9
Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
11
Install new, clean filters.
12
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
3.6
ADJUSTING
3.6.1
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
3.6.2
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7
CLEANING
3.8
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit
and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units
internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels,
cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION
3.9.1
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.
END OF SECTION
M - 12
VOLUME-III
M - 13
VOLUME-III
CLOSE CONTROL UNITS
(COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT)

Mechanical Section 23 81 23: Close Control Units
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1
2
Air conditioning units.

Controls and control panel.
1.3
Seismic Performance: Computer-room air conditioners shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Shop Drawings: For air conditioned room unit. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver and for each color and
texture specified.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, using input from
Installers of the items involved.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air conditioned room unit accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1
2
3
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.

M-2
VOLUME-III
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air conditioned room unit to include in emergency,
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASHRAE Compliance:
1
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 4 "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 "Ventilation Rate Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shell to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
1.6
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of air conditioned room unit and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
Coordinate installation of air conditioned room unit with room access flooring Installer.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.7
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of computer-room air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Humidifiers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS

M-3
VOLUME-III
1
2
Fan Belts: Two sets for each belt-driven fan.

Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
Description: Packaged, single chilled water coil or dual coil (chilled water and direct
expansion with air cooled condensing unit) as shown on drawings, factory assembled, prewired and pre-piped unit, consisting of double skin cabinet, fans, filters, sound attenuators (on
supply and return air), humidifier, electric re-heater, and controls. Complete factory charged
with refrigerant R134a.
B.
The capacity of the close control unit shall be sized based on 20 C at 50 % RH room
conditions.
2.2
CABINET AND FRAME
Structural Frame: 10 gage (3.3 mm) welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, capable of
supporting compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings with welded tubular
steel floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads.
Doors and Access Panels: 18 gage (1.2 mm) galvanized steel with poly-urethane gaskets,
hinges to allow removal of panels, and concealed fastening devices.
Insulation: Thermally and acoustically line cabinet interior with 1 inch (25 mm) thick 1
pound density acoustic duct liner.
Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on textured vinyl enamel.
2.3
EVAPORATOR FANS AND MOTORS
Fans: Double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fans, statically and dynamically balanced, on
steel shaft with self-aligning grease lubricated ball bearings, and V-belt drive.
Motor: TEFC, class F insulation.
V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed, variable and
adjustable pitch motor sheave, minimum of two matched belts, drive rated minimum 2.0 times
nameplate rating of motor.
2.4
COMPRESSORS
Type: Semi-hermetic with suction gas cooled motors, vibration isolators, thermal overloads,
oil sight glass, manual reset high pressure switch, pump down low pressure switch, suction
line strainer, reversible oil pumps, 1450 rpm.
Compressors: Individually serviceable without dismantling other components or removing

unit from service.
Refrigeration Circuits: Two, each with hot gas mufflers, thermal expansion valve with
external equalizer, liquid line solenoid valve, liquid line filter-drier, refrigerant sight glass
with moisture indicator, service shut-off valves and charging valves and accumulator sized for
liquid seal under light load.

M-4
VOLUME-III
2.5
EVAPORATOR COILS
Alternate row circuits, direct expansion cooling coils of seamless copper tubes expanded into
aluminium fins in A-frame configuration.
Mount coil assembly in stainless steel drain pan.
2.6
REMOTE CONDENSERS
Air Cooled: Air cooled refrigerant condenser consisting of corrosion resistant cabinet, copper
tube aluminum fin coils arranged for two circuits, multiple direct drive propeller fans with
permanently lubricated ball bearings single phase motors with internal overload protection;
refer to Section 15065. Refer to Section 15675. Provide capacity control by cycling fans.
2.7
CHILLED WATER COILS
Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with two way modulating valve.
2.8
FILTERS
Media: Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded
wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame; 2 inch (50 mm) nominal thickness.
Rating, ASHRAE Std 52.1:

1 Dust spot efficiency: 25-30 percent.
2 Weight arrestance: 90-92 percent.
3 Initial resistance at 500 FPM (2.54 m/sec) face velocity: 0.30inch WG (75 Pa).
4 Recommended final resistance: 1.0 inch WG (250 Pa).
2.9
REHEAT/HEATING COILS
Heating Coils: Enclosed fin electrical elements arranged for minimum of two stages.
Circuit Protection: Primary and secondary thermal cut outs, differential air pressure switch,
and manual reset overload protection, branch circuit over current protection.
2.10
HUMIDIFIER
Infrared Type: High intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless steel evaporator pan,
serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; pre-piped and
utilizing condensate water from cooling coils with stainless steel or brass float valve
mechanism; located in bypass air stream; with flush cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.
Evaporative Pan Type: Stainless steel pan and cover, serviceable without disconnecting water,
drain, or electrical connections; pre-piped with stainless steel or brass float valve mechanism;
electric heating coil and low water cut-off switch; with flush cycle timer and solenoid drain
valve.
Electrode Steam Type:
1
2
3
Type: Self contained, replaceable cylinder, microprocessor con-trolled electrode

steam generating unit.
Cylinders: Disposable, polypropylene plastic with field adjustable steel electrodes.
Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber hosing,
with water fill with air gap and solenoid valve incorpo-rating built-in strainer,
pressure reducing and flow regulating orifice, and drain with integral air gap on drain.

M-5
VOLUME-III
4
5
6
7
Cabinet: Steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm) with enamel finish, with hinged and lockable access
door.
Control: Fully modulating control to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with
field adjustable maximum capacity; high water probe.
Drain Cycle: Field adjustable drain duration and drain interval.
Steam Distributor: Stainless steel steam dispersion tube.
2.11
ELECTRICAL PANEL
Control Cabinet: NEMA 250; Type 2 enclosure, UL listed, with piano hinged door, grounding
lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock,
and fusible control circuit trans-former.
Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic molded case circuit breaker with handle accessible with
panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched to "off" position.
2.12
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
Solid state with start button, stop button, temporary loss of power indicator, manual reset
circuit breakers, temperature control humidity control, and monitor panel.
Monitor Panel: Back lighted with no visible indicator lights until operating function is
activated; indicators include cooling, humidification, loss of air flow, change filters, high
temperature, low temperature, high humidity, low humidity, high head pressure (each
compressor), and low suction pressure (each compressor).
Temperature and Humidity Control Modules: Solid state plug-in with adjustable set point,
"push-to-test" calibration check button, and built-in visual indicators to indicate mode of
operation.
Location: Through hinged door in front of unit; isolated from conditioned air stream to allow
service while system is operating.
2.13
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Logic Circuitry: Microprocessor shall continuously monitor operation of process cooling

system; continuously digitally display room temperature and room relative humidity; sound
alarm on system malfunction and simultaneously display problem. When more than one
malfunction occurs, display fault in sequence with room temperature, remember alarm even
when malfunction cleared, and continue to display fault until reset.
Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Air Flow, Clogged Air Filter, High Room Temperature,
Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low Humidity, Smoke/Fire, Compressor No. 1 Overload, Compressor No. 1 - Low Pres-sure, Compressor No. 1 - High Pressure, Compressor
No. 2 - Overload, Compressor No. 2 - Low Pressure, Compressor No. 2 - High Pressure,
Water-Under-Floor, and Supply Fan Overload.
Light Emitting Diodes Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification, Dehumidification taking place, Compressor No. 1 operating, Compressor No. 2 operating, Heat
or Reheat operating, Economy Cooling.
Push Buttons: Provide to STOP process cooling system, START process cooling system,
SILENCE audible alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display room relative humidity.
Remote Signalling: Provide termination for remote signalling of system status and alarms.

M-6
VOLUME-III
2.14
CONDENSATE PUMP
Factory mounted condensate pump complete with sump, motor and automatic control.
2.15
WATER SENSOR
Solid state water sensor mounted under the unit to sense the presence of water.
Connection to microprocessor panel to activate an audible alarm upon sensing water.
Message display Water detected in under floor area upon activation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
Examine roughing-in for hydronic piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air conditioned unit air
conditioners will be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Install unit level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install
according to ARI Guideline B.
Unit Mounting: Install using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for
vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1
Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm) .
Suspended Unit: Install using continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with verticallimit stop of size required to support weight of unit.
1
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Fabricate brackets or supports as required.
2
Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser Mounting: Install using elastomeric mounts. Comply with
requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1
3.3
Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm) .
CONNECTIONS

M-7
VOLUME-III
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
Water and Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22

Section "Domestic Water Piping." Provide adequate connections for water-cooled units,
condensate drain, and humidifier flushing system.
Condenser-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water-cooled
units.
Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
3.4


1

2
3
4
Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
After installing unit and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
and equipment.
Unit will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
After start-up service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.
3.5
ADJUSTING
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION

M-8
VOLUME-III
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air
conditioners.
END OF SECTION

M-9
VOLUME-III
FAN COIL UNITS

Mechanical Section 23 82 19: Fan Coil Units
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1

therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
12.1
Furnish and install fan coil units as indicated on drawings
1.2.2
Types of fan coil units specified in this section include the following:
Horizontal units for concealed installations.
Horizontal Cabinet units for exposed installations.
1.2.3
Refer to other sections for vibration control units used in conjunction with fan coil units.
1.2.4
Refer to other sections for chilled water and condensate drain piping required in conjunction
with fan coil units.
1.2.5
Refer to Electrical Services sections for the following work:

Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. Including starters,
disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory
installed by manufacturer.
Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units and between equipment and
field installed control devices.
1.2.6
Provide the related electrical works of this section to comply with the requirements
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fan coil units with
characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years. Manufacturers shall have ISO 9001 certification.
1.3.2
Codes and Standard:

a)
ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan coil units in accordance with ARI 441 Standard
for fan coil units; display certification symbol on units of certified models.
b)
ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install cooling coils in accordance with

ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration and ASHRAE 33-for
testing air coils.
c)
Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and
smoke generation. All equipment wiring shall comply with NEC requirements.
d)
Unit capacity ratings shall be certified in compliance with industry Standard 441-66
for equipment, testing, and rating of fan coil air conditioners as administered at A.R.I.
Entire unit shall be Underwriters Laboratory listed and comply with National
Electric code. When units do not have A.R.I certified ratings, the contractor must
perform capacity tests of the completed installation, which are witnessed by the

M-2
VOLUME-III
Consultant to confirm specified capacity is achieved while not exceeding specified

sound power levels.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1
Product Data : Submit manufacturers technical product data for fan coil units showing
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings fan performance with operating point clearly
indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation
instruction.
1.4.2
Shop Drawings : Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight
loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.
1.4.3
Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
fan coil units. Submit manufacturers ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and
portions to be field- installed.
1.4.4
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,

filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists.
Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.
1.5
1.5.1
Deliver fan coil units with factory installed shipping skids and lifting lugs, pack components
in factory fabricated protective containers.
1.5.2
Handle fan coil units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not
install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air handling unit
manufacturer.
1.5.3
Store fan coil units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
1.5.4
Comply with manufacturers rigging and installation instructions for unloading fan coil units,
and moving them to final location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Units shall be complete with chilled water coil(s), electric heating coil (where indicated on
schedules) fan(s), motor(s), drain pan, and all required wiring, piping, controls and special
features.
2.1.1
Unit Chassis
Horizontal/Vertical Base Unit with Plenum for concealed installation shall have a factory
installed, galvanized steel plenum section and throw away filter. The plenum shall be either
bottom or rear return, lined with 12mm thick glass fiber insulation or equivalent based on
manufacturer standard and include a removable panel to provide an access to the fan/motor
assembly.
Horizontal cabinet unit for exposed installation shall be constructed of steel with recoatable
baked enamel finish. Colour to be approved by the Consultant. Cabinet shall be lined with
12mm thick glass fibre insulation or equivalent based on manufacturers standard and have
removable bottom access panel. Unit shall include hinged bar type return air grille on rear of

M-3
VOLUME-III
unit with throwaway filter and integral double deflection supply grille.
2.1.2
Fan /Motor
Fans shall be direct driven, double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades, and be
statically and dynamically balanced. Fan motors shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor
type with sleeve type bearings and over sized oil reservoirs. Motor shall be suitable for 240V
single phase, 50Hz provided with internal thermal protection.
2.1.3
Coil
Coil shall be equipped with a 3 row coil (minimum) for installation in a 2 pipe system. Coils
shall have either 9mm or 12mm copper tubes, aluminium fins bonded to the tubes by
mechanical expansion and have a working pressure of 16 bar. Each coil shall have a manual
air vent and sweat connections for copper tubes. All coils shall be leak tested and proven
tight. Alternate copper tube diameters shall be acceptable depending upon manufacturing
standards of the manufacturer and subject to approval by Consultant.
2.1.4
Drain pans
The drain pan shall be constructed of galvanized steel extending the entire length and width of
the coil(s) and pitched for drainage. The inside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with
closed cell fire retardant foam insulation. An extension drain pan shall be provided for
installation at the jobsite under the valve package.
2.1.5 The Fan coil unit cooling coil shall be provided with two port PICV (Pressure
independent balancing and control valve).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
Electric wiring between fan motor, fan switch, and automatic control valve, shall be carried
out to comply with the requirements of Division 16 (Electrical). The Contractor shall provide
the necessary quick disconnects for easy removal of the fan section and also provide suitable
terminals for field connections of power and control thermostat wiring.
3.1.2
At the time of testing and commissioning all the throw away filtrers shall be replaced by
permanent washable filters for each fan coil unit. The filters shall be constructed from nonferrous metal with 25mm thickness and a minimum of 72% gravimetric efficiency.
3.1.3
The Contractor shall ensure that units are installed level to ensure that condensate from the
drain pan flows freely. Provide drain lines of uPVC Class E to BS 3505, 25 mm diameter
minimum laid to falls of 1:100, and insulated in accordance with Specification requirements.
Extend condensate to drain to the nearest waste line.
3.1.4
Provide ductwork distribution and terminal air distribution device to adequately condition the
spaces served by the individual fan coil units. Final distribution shall suit the actual room
details and shall in each case be subject to the approval of the Consultant.
3.2
STARTUP AND INSTRUCTIONS

Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work. After air balancing is
complete and permanent sheaves are in place, perform necessary field mechanical balancing
to meet vibration tolerance in Section, Mechanical Sound, vibration and Seismic Control.

M-4
VOLUME-III
3.3

Testing, Balancing and Commissioning shall be as referred to throughout this Section, and in
accordance with Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
The test rig and all necessary blanks for the purpose of sealing the ductwork under test shall
be provided, blanks shall be removed after the test has been approved for each section of the
ductwork.
END OF SECTION

M-5
VOLUME-III
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

Mechanical Section 25 30 00: Building Management And Automatic Control System
M-1
VOLUME-III
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Electrical services
1.1.3
Conform to General Requirements for mechanical services.
1.1.4
Related Work Specified Elsewhere

Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System
Lighting Control System
Emergency Lighting System
1.2
SCOPE OF WORKS
The BMCS shall consist of the following elements:
1.2.1
Microcomputer based remote control panels interfacing directly with sensors, actuators and
environmental delivery systems (i.e., HVAC equipment, lighting systems, etc.). The BMCS
shall interface with the chiller plant automation panel.
The system shall have an inbuilt spare capacity of minimum twenty percent at all levels of
control and network to allow for future expansion.
Two-wire communication networks to allow data exchange between remote panels and the
central Building Management computer.
One personal computer (PC) based central and associated operator station(s) and software
functioning as the primary operator interface for the BMCS.
Electronic and electric controls for all items indicated on drawings and described hereinafter
including sensors, control valves and thyristers.
Submittals, data entry and electrical installation, programming, interfacing with other
systems, start up, test and validation, instruction of Employer's representative on maintenance
and operation, as built documentation, and system warranty.
1.3
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
The Contractor must note that the Specification describes in general terms the control
philosophy for various systems and the means of achieving the same. These are the minimum
requirements only. In view of the rapid changes in the field of controls and related
technology, the Contractor shall include for the latest technology and systems available from
the specified manufacturer at the time of tender. The Contractor shall allow the costs related
to loading the latest version of software available at the time of handing over of the
installation.
The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of Network Area Controller or
Controllers (NAC) within the facility. The NAC shall connect to the Employers local or wide
area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each
building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web
browsers, via the Internet and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to
LonMark/LonTalk (IDC) and/or BACnet (IBC) controllers.

M-2
VOLUME-III
1.4
DESIGN PARAMETERS
The proposed system and components shall be compatible with a wide variety of control
devices using BACnet, LON, Ethernet TCP/IP, ModBus and OPC standard for open system
communications and other current international communication standards. The BMS shall be
capable of being extended with controllers on the BACnet protocol and the LON bus. The
BMS shall allow integrating future BACnet controllers on the process level.
Using appropriate hardware, the system shall be Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc
(ULI) or approved equal for use in energy management (category PAZX), critical process
(category QVAX), security (category APOU), and as the primary control and monitoring
device for smoke control (category UUKL) and fire alarm systems (category UOJZ).
1.5
OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES
1.5.1
The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed

control system with the capability to integrate both the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995
BACnet and LonWorks technology communication protocols in one open, interoperable
system.
1.5.2
The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for
representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to
industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE Standard 135-1995, BACnet, Lontalk, and
LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each
LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide
an XIF file for the device. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS
document showing the installed devices compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3;
with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet
devices shall be via Ethernet.
1.5.3
All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true peer-topeer
communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring polling by a host to pass data
shall not be acceptable.
1.5.4
The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web
browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An
Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server
database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a
supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and
user interface programs shall not be acceptable.
1.5.5
A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage
the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customers internal Intranet
network. Systems employing a flat single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable:
1.5.6
a)
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected
user interfaces.
b)
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up
connected user interfaces.
The field controller(s) shall be provided for manipulation of data from the field controllers for
onward communication to the Management Level. It shall also perform management
functions and event-related communication.

M-3
VOLUME-III
1.5.7
The Control and Interlock system for the process control shall comprise microprocessor based
controllers together with the necessary input and output modules. All the field devices shall
be connected to the respective input and output modules.
Use of dumb input and output modules shall not be permitted only.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
The system shall be installed by competent mechanics, regularly employed by the BMCS
manufacturer with full responsibility for proper operation of the BMCS including debugging
and proper calibration of each component in the entire system. Supplier shall have an in-place
support facility within 10 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all
necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
1.6.2
Codes and Approvals:

The complete BMCS installation shall be in strict accordance to the national and local
electrical codes and the electrical section of these specifications. All devices designed for or
used in line voltage applications shall be UL Listed or approved by an equal regulatory
authority.
All microprocessor based remote DDC devices shall be UL916 Listed or approved by an
equal regulatory authority.
Eropean EMC directive 89/336/EEC/EMC including all its amendments. Tested standard EN
55022 Emission and EN 50082-1 Immunity.
European Low Voltage Directive for Safety 73/23 EEC including all amendments, Tested
Standards EN 60950 and EN 60730-1.
European General Product Safety Directive 92/59/EEC./ Tested standards EN 60730-1.
All microprocessor based remote F&S devices shall be UL864 Listed or approved by an equal
regulatory authority.
All BMCS central equipment shall be UL864 Listed or approved by an equal regulatory
authority.
All BMCS central and remote equipment used in security applications shall be UL1076 Listed
or approved by an equal regulatory authority.
All BMCS central and remote equipment used in access control applications shall be UL294
Listed or approved by an equal regulatory authority.
All electrical environmental control and monitoring devices shall be UL429 and/or UL873
Listed or approved by an equal regulatory authority.
1.6.3
All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC regulation Part 15,
Section 15 governing radio frequency electromagnetic interference and be so labelled.
1.6.4
System shall be designed to provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85%
of rated voltage and at + 3 hertz variation in line frequency.
1.6.5
System shall be designed to provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs
and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients
and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall be a.c. coupled or equivalent

M-4
VOLUME-III
so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication.
1.6.6
All real time clocks missing shall be battery backed.
1.6.7
Plant Control Processors shall comply with ISO 9000.
1.7
ACCEPTABLE BID PROCEDURES
1.7.1
Technical Proposal: It is the intent of this specification to define a state-of-the-art distributed

computerized software Integrated Building Management and Control System which is user
friendly, has known reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be designed,
installed, implemented, and supported by a local office of the manufacturer by people skilled
in providing functional and efficient solutions to building system needs.
To allow evaluation of vendors and systems, a detailed technical proposal shall be provided
and formatted strictly in accordance to this outline. Vendors standard literature not complying
to this format and content requirement will not be considered or evaluated. Proposal
requirements shall be as follow:
Proposed system complete with location and block diagram including central computer type
and memory, peripherals, communication interfaces, all LAN cards, all active hubs and
repeaters, network layout, distributed peer bus connected control/monitor panels with
location, listing of equipment directly connected to a DDC controller, and secondary network
drivers and connected systems.
Provide copies of required UL listing cards.
1.7.2
Compliance Checklist - Provide a specification paragraph-by-paragraph listing of strict wordfor-word compliance or non-compliance. For each item of conditional or non-compliance,
spell out the vendor's substitute response to the feature excepted.
Example:
1.7.3
Paragraph
Comply
2.08 a
2.08 b
2.08 c
Full Compliance
Cull Compliance
Covers are polished
Conditional Comply
Non-Comply
Justification for
Non-Comply
X
X
X
Computer based centra controller featuresl

Day-to-day interactive operator interface description with sample
a)
English/Graphic displays, penetration scheme for display/command and logical

configuring, and examples of alarms and data in various modes
(disabled, fixed, not responding, etc.)
b)
Short cut penetration schemes for direct graphic, point, and command access
c)
Colorgraphic system description with sample system displays, colorgraphic

penetration and command schemes, graphic creation means, library of symbols, and
curve plot
d)
Interactive data editing scheme for modification of system data base and parameters
including operators, peripheral assignments, system configuration, text, time

M-5
VOLUME-III
schedules, point monitoring limits, event-initiated control, and control application

program parameters
1.7.4
e)
Electronic mail/messaging description and samples
f)
Data access control and security scheme
g)
Report descriptions including selection scheme and sample reports for setting up and
displaying extended trend file reports
h)
Sample sequence of operation and specified flow chart display
j)
Sample custom report
k)
Sample text alarm message
l)
Sample of system and point descriptor text
m)
Technical description of all hardware components
n)
Sample alarm report
o)
Sample alarm acknowledgement report
p)
Sample text terminal menu display
Distributed control panel point architecture, memory, real time clock.

Functional description
Scan/Report speed and alarm detection speed
Control and survival capabilities
Life safety interfacing
1.7.5
Communications network architecture, points, and panels

a)
Protocol description, host independent, bus-cut reaction
b)
Bus limitations, distances between active links and hubs, etc.
c)
Number of devices on bus without repeater.
d)
Error checking, collision prevention, recovery
e)
Controller
internal
architecture,
communication
communications, secondary bus drivers.
f)
Point sharing/update scheme
g)
Meantime end-to-end responsiveness for a large fully operational system for analog
alarm report, digital alarm report, panel failure report, host command execution, event
command (within one panel and panel-to panel)
cards,
board-to-board
1.7.6
Available services for full system maintenance, software update and modifications, hardware
spare parts, adds and changes, system training and training classes
1.7.7
Contractor experience/capability, size

M-6
VOLUME-III
a)
Organization with key brief resumes
b)
15 years history of local support of management, engineering, installation, and

maintenance locations and business
c)
Local experience on similar jobs with references
d)
Local facility description
1.7.8
Vendors standard specification data literature.
1.8
SUBMITTALS
1.8.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each control device furnished
showing dimensions, weights, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical
characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instruction and startup instruction.
1.8.2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each electrical control system, containing the
following information:
Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory installed and portions to be field installed.
Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
Include written description of sequence of operation.
Include a complete list of components for each proposed panel.
1.8.3
Submit catalogues for all controls and accessories.
1.8.4
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists, include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals.
1.9

Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain
cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and
to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and
protected from weather.
1.10
MANUALS
1.10.1 The following manuals shall be provided:

An Operators Manual with coloured graphic explanations of operator functions. Although
operator functions are to be self-instructional and menu-interactive from the keyboard
terminal, this manual shall be for off-line study and refresher use.
Computerized printouts of all PCP (Plant Control Processor) data file construction including
all point processing assignments, physical terminal relationships, flowcharts of graphic
program. etc.
M-7
VOLUME-III
A user manual for the integrated spreadsheet package.

A manual including revised As Built documents of all shopping and materials as required
under the paragraph "SUBMITTALS" on this specification.
Five sets of Operators Manuals and As Built Manuals shall be provided to the Employer.
1.11
TRAINING
1.11.1 All training shall be by the BMCS manufacturer and shall utilize specified manuals, as-build
documentation, and the on-line help utility. The following training shall be repeated quarterly
during the warranty period.
1.11.2 Operator training shall include two initial six-hour sessions encompassing:
Sequence of Operation review.
Sign on-Sign off.
Selection of all displays and reports.
Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode.
Modifying English text.
Use of all dialogue boxes and menus.
Modifying alarm limits and start-stop times.
System initialization.
Download and initialization of remote panels.
Purge and/or dump of historical data.
Use of Portable Operators Terminals.
Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors).
Password modification.
Creation and modification of cardholder database.
1.11.3 Supervisor training shall include an additional two hour session encompassing:
Password assignment/modification.
Operator assignment/modification.
Operator authority assignment/modification.
Point disable/enable.
Terminal and data segregation/modification.
Use of portable operator terminal.
Use of spreadsheet package with system data.
Creation and modification of site-specific user-defined cardholder fields.
1.11.4 Programmer training shall include two additional three hour sessions encompassing:
Software review of Sequence of Operation and flowcharts.
Use of diagnostics.
System maintenance procedures.
Review of initialization.
Upload/download and off-line archiving of PCP (Plant control Processor) and PC
system software.
Graphic creation.
Programmer training shall be for two Employer personnel and shall be scheduled by the
Employer with two week notice anytime during the warranty period.
1.12
WARRANTY

M-8
VOLUME-III
1.12.1 All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the BMCS manufacturer
shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from
acceptance date.
1.12.2 Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall be furnished by
the BMCS contractor at no charge to the Employer during the warranty period.
1.12.3 All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated
on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1.1
BUILDING CONTROLLER
A. General Requirements
1. BACnet Conformance
a. Building Controller shall be approved by the BTL as meeting the BACnet
Building Controller requirements.
b. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard,
for a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each
of the functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the
system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal
data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary
information.
2. Building controller shall be of scalable design such that the number of trunks and
protocols may be selected to fit the specific requirements of a given project.
3. The controller shall be capable of panel-mounted on DIN rail and/or mounting
screws.
4. The controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the system
based on information from any objects in the system, regardless if the object is
directly monitored by the building controller module or by another controller.
5. The controller shall be capable of running up to six (6) independent control strategies
simultaneously. The modification of one control strategy does not interrupt the
function or runtime others.
6. The software program implementing the DDC strategies shall be completely flexible
and user-definable. All software tools necessary for programming shall be provided
as part of project software. Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global
strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on-site, using a wide area
network (WAN) or downloaded through remote communications are not acceptable.
Changing global strategies using firmware changes is also unacceptable.
7. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks and support DDC
functions. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to
controller. Programming tool shall be supplied and be resident on workstation. The
same tool shall be used for all controllers.
8. The programming tool shall provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to
each program block in real-time as program is executing. This function may be
performed using the operators workstation or field computer.

M-9
VOLUME-III
9. Controller shall have 6,000 Analog Values and 6,000 Binary Values.
10. Controller IP configuration can be done via a direct USB connect with an operators
workstation or field computer.
11. Controller shall have at a minimum a Quad Core 996Ghz processor to ensure fast
processing speeds.
12. Global control algorithms and automated control functions shall execute using a 64bit processor.
13. Controller shall have a minimum of 1 GB of DDR3 SDRAM on a 533Mhz bus to
ensure high speed data recording, large data storage capacity and reliability.
14. Controller shall support two (2) on-board EIA-485 ports capable of supporting
various EIA-485 protocols including, but not limited to BACnet MS/TP and Modbus.
a. Ports are capable of supporting various EIA-485 protocols including, but not
limited to BACnet MS/TP and Modbus.
15. Controller shall support two (2) portseach of gigabit speedEthernet
(10/100/1000) ports.
a. Ports are capable of supporting various Ethernet protocols including, but not
limited to BACnet IP, FOX, and Modbus.
16. All ports shall be capable of having protocol(s) assigned to utilize the ports physical
connection.
17. The controller shall have at a minimum four (4) onboard inputs, two (2) universal
inputs and two (2) binary inputs.
18. Schedules
a. Building controller modules shall provide normal seven-day scheduling, holiday
scheduling and event scheduling.
b. Each building controller shall support a minimum of 380 BACnet Schedule
Objects and 380 BACnet Calendar Objects.
19. Logging Capabilities
a. Each building controller shall log as minimum 2,000 objects at 15-minute
intervals. Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample
time interval shall be adjustable at the operators workstation.
b. Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site using WAN or remote
communication.
c. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked operators
workstation for long-term archiving if desired.
d. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party
spreadsheet or database programs.
20. Alarm Generation
a. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or
state (either real or calculated). This includes things such as analog object value
changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication
failures.
M - 10
VOLUME-III
b. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted elsewhere.

c. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the
operators terminal or off-site using remote communications.
d. Controller must be able to handle up to 2,000 alarm setups stored as BACnet
event enrollment objects, with system destination and actions individually
configurable.
21. Demand Limiting
a. Demand limiting of energy shall be a built-in, user-configurable function. Each
controller module shall support shedding of up to 1,200 loads using a minimum
of two types of shed programs.
b. Load shedding programs in building controller modules shall operate as defined
in section 2.1.J of this specification.
22. Tenant Activity Logging
a. Tenant Activity logging shall be supported by a building controller module. Each
independent module shall support a minimum of 380 zones.
b. Tenant Activity logging shall function as defined in section 2.1.K of this
specification.
B. BACnet MS/TP
1. BACnet MS/TP LAN must be software-configurable from 9.6 to 115.4Kbps
a. Each BACnet MS/TP LAN shall support 64 BACnet devices at a minimum.
b. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall
be supplied for working with proprietary information.
C. BACnet IP
1. The building controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification
for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP
internetwork, while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to
other BACnet devices on the local area network (LAN).
2. Must support interoperability on WANs and campus area networks (CANs), and
function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD).
3. Each controller shall support at a minimum 128 BBMD entries.
4. BBMD management architecture shall support 3,000 subnets at a minimum.
5. Shall support BACnet Network Address Translation.
6. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall
be supplied for working with proprietary information.
D. Expansion Ports
1. Controller shall support two (2) expansion ports.
a. Combining the two on-board EIA-458 ports with fully loaded expansion ports,
M - 11
VOLUME-III
the controller shall support six (6) EIA-485 trunks simultaneously.

2. Expansion cards that mate to the expansion ports shall include:
a. Dual port EIA-485 card.
b. LON network card.
E. Power Supply
1. Input for power shall accept between 17 and 30VAC, 47 and 63Hz.
2. Optional rechargeable battery for shutdown of controller including storage of all data
in flash memory.
3. On-board capacitor will ensure continuous operation of real-time clocks for minimum
of 14 days.
F. Controller shall be in compliance with the following:
1. UL 916 for open energy management
2. FCC Class B
3. ROHS
4. IEC 60703
5. C-Tick Listed
G. Controller shall operate in the following environmental conditions:
1. -4 to 149 F (-20 to 65 C) without optional battery, or 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) with
optional battery.
2. 0 to 95% relative humidity (RH), non-condensing.
2.1.2 CENTRAL PLANT AND AIR HANDLER APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each air handler and
provide native BACnet application controllers as needed for central plant control that
adequately cover all objects listed in object list. All controllers shall interface to building
controller through either MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol, or Ethernet LAN using
BACnet over Ethernet or BACnet TCP/IP. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall
include input, output and self-contained logic program as needed for complete control of
units. Controllers shall be fully programmable using graphical programming blocks.
Programming tool shall be resident on operator workstation and be the same tool as used
for the building controller. No auxiliary or non-BACnet controllers shall be used.
B. BACnet Conformance
1. Application controllers shall be approved by the BTL as meeting the BACnet
Advanced Application Controller requirements.
2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for
a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include, as a minimum, Analog Input,
M - 12
VOLUME-III
Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Multistate Values, Device, File, and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if
used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the
submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary
information.
C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 12-bit resolution that accept
3K and 10K thermistors, 010VDC, Platinum 1000 ohm RTD, 05VDC, 420mA and
dry contact signals. Any input on a controller may be either analog or digital with a
minimum of three inputs that accept pulses. Controller shall also include support and
modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display.
Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs with 12-bit
resolution shall support either 010VDC or 020mA. Binary outputs shall have LED
indication of status. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs.
Application controller shall include 20VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to
external sensors.
1. All outputs must have onboard Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switches and a status indicator
light. HOA switch position shall be monitored. Each analog output shall include a
potentiometer for manually adjusting the output when the HOA switch is in the Hand
position.
2. The position of each and every HOA switch shall be available system wide as a
BACnet object property.
D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No
batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed
by controller up to 20 times per second (minimum of 10 times per second) and capable of
multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed
using floating-point math and system shall support display of all information in floatingpoint nomenclature at operators terminal.
1. The following control blocks shall be supported:
a. Natural Log
b. Exponential
c. Log base 10
d. X to the power of Y
e. Nth square root of X
f.
5th Order Polynomial Equations
g. Astronomical Clock (sunrise/sunset calculation)

h. Time based schedules
E. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over
installed BACnet LANs or remotely using modem interface. Operator shall program logic
sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on
screen. Application controller shall be programmed using programming tools as described
in operators terminal section.
F. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section
2.10.B.) Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application
controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions
and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode,
M - 13
VOLUME-III
based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific
display requirements at intelligent room sensor.
G. Schedules
1. The controller shall support a minimum of 3 BACnet Schedule Objects and have a
real time clock on board with battery backup to maintain time through a power loss.
H. Logging Capabilities
1. Controller shall support a minimum of 50 trendlogs. Any object in the controller (real
or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the
operators workstation.
2. Controller shall periodically upload trended data to system server for long-term
archiving if desired. Archived data stored in (MS Jet Database or SQL) database form
and shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database programs.
I.
Alarm Generation
1. Alarms may be generated within the controller for any object change of value or state
(either real or calculated). This includes things such as analog object value changes,
and binary object state changes.
2. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the
operators terminal or off-site using remote communications.
3. Controller must be able to handle up to 25 alarm setups stored as BACnet event
enrollment objects, with system destination and actions individually configurable.
J.
The controller processor shall be a 32-bit processor.
K. The packaging of the controller shall provide operable doors to cover the terminals once
installation is complete. The housing of the controller shall provide for DIN rail mounting
and also fully enclose circuit board.
2.2
UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Provide one native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary mechanical
equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers
shall interface to building controller through MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No
gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic
program as needed for complete control of unit.
1. Application controllers shall, as a minimum, support MS/TP BACnet LAN types.
They shall communicate directly using this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8
Kbps, as a native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be approved by the
BTL as meeting the BACnet Application Specific Controller requirements and
support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional
groups:
a. Files Functional Group
b. Reinitialize Functional Group
c. Device Communications Functional Group

M - 14
VOLUME-III
2. Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard, for
Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device,
File, and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system,
shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All
necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can
accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 05VDC, 420mA, dry contact signals and a minimum
of 3 pulse inputs. Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall
also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor.
Controller shall include binary outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.
D. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall
be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller
10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple
devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field
over installed BACnet LANs or remotely through modem interface. Operator shall
program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying
blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using same
programming tools as building controller and as described in operator workstation
section. All programming tools shall be provided and installed as part of system.
E.
Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section
2.10.B.) Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and include an
operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be
programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed
on the sensor.
F.
Intelligent Room Sensor with Touchscreen for FCU and VAV Controllers
Hardware
a. Room sensor shall include:
i.
Backlit touchscreen LCD digital display
ii. Temperature sensor

iii. Humidity sensor
iv. Programmable Status Light indicator
v. CO2 sensor or BACnet MS/TP communication up to 115.2kbps
b.
Temperature sensor shall be a Uni-Curve Type II thermistor with an accuracy
of +/- 0.36 F (0.3 C) at calibration point over the range of 32 to 158 F or better.
c.
Humidity sensor shall have an accuracy of +/-3% from 10 to 90% relative
humidity (RH) or better, non-condensing.
d.
The intelligent room sensors Status Light indicator shall have a minimum of
four (4) colors (blue, red, amber and green) that will cast a glow onto the wall below
the sensor to be used as visual indicator to the occupants of the condition of the
M - 15
VOLUME-III
system. The color and on/off state of the Status Light indicator shall be fully
programmable.
e.
CO2 sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 30 ppm over the range of 05000
ppm or better.
f.
CO2 sensor shall utilize Automatic Baseline Correction to maintain sensor
calibration without the need for manual calibration.
g.
The user shall interact with the smart sensor using a touchscreen, with no
buttons allowed.
h.
The intelligent room sensor shall have provisions for a tamper proof
installation requiring tools to be removed from the wall.
i.
The touchscreen shall have a surface hardness of Mohs 7 or greater to prevent
being easily scratched.
j.
Controller shall function as room control unit, and allow occupant to raise
and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override useall within limits as
programmed by building operator.
2. Display Content
a.
The intelligent room sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room
temperature, and outside temperature at each controller.
b.
The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to add or remove from the
display time-of-day, room humidity, and indoor air temperature to customize the view
for the customer.
c.
The intelligent room sensor must have the capability to show temperatures in
degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
d.
A communication loss or improper communications wiring shall be displayed
on the LCD screen to aid in trouble shooting.
e.
Information about the version of firmware shall be displayable on the LCD
screen.
f.
A cleaning mode will be provided to allow for the touchscreen to be cleaned
without inadvertently making changes to system parameters.
g.
The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to display the status of a
lighting zone and control the on/off state of the zone from the touchscreen using a
tenant-accessible display page.
h.
The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to display the status of a
window zone (e.g., blinds) and control the on/off state of the zone from the
touchscreen using a tenant-accessible display page.
i.
After Hours Override shall:

vi. Override time may be set and viewed in 30-minute increments.
vii. Override time countdown shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by
occupant from the sensor.
viii. Time remaining shall be displayed.
ix. Display shall show the word OFF in unoccupied mode unless a function

M - 16
VOLUME-III
button is pressed.
3. Other Modes
a.
The intelligent room sensor shall also allow service technician access to
hidden functions for advanced system configuration. This functionality shall be
accessed-protected with a configurable PIN number.
b.
Field Service Mode shall allow access to common parameters as dictated by
the applications sequence of operations. The parameters shall be viewed and set from
the intelligent room sensor with no computer or other field service tool needed.
c.
If the intelligent room sensor is connected to VAV controller, Balance Mode
shall allow a VAV box to be balanced and all air flow parameters viewed. The
balancing parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no
computer or other field service tool needed.
4. Intelligent Room Sensor shall be in compliance of the following:
2.2.1
a.
UL Standard for Safety 916
b.
FCC Part 15.107 & 109, Class B, CFR47-15
c.
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)
VAV BOX CONTROLLERSSINGLE DUCT

A. Provide one native BACnet application controller for each VAV box that adequately
covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers shall interface to building
controller through MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used.
Controllers shall include on board CFM flow sensor, inputs, outputs and programmable,
self-contained logic program as needed for control of units.
1. Application controllers shall, at a minimum, support MS/TP BACnet LAN types.
They shall communicate directly through this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and
76.8 Kbps, as a native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be approved by
the BTL as meeting the BACnet Application Specific Controller requirements.
2. Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for
File, and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system,
shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All
necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can
accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 05 VDC, and dry contact signals. Inputs on controller
may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable
programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall
also include binary outputs on board. For applications using variable speed parallel fans,
provide a single analog output selectable for 0-10 V or 0-20 mA control signals.

M - 17
VOLUME-III
Application controller shall include microprocessor driven flow sensor for use in pressure
independent control logic. All boxes shall be controlled using pressure-independent
control algorithms and all flow readings shall be in CFM (LPS if metric).
D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No
batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed
by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control
of multiple devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely
modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely using modem interface.
Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen
and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using
the same programming tool as Building Controller and as described in operators
workstation section. All programming tools shall be provided as part of system.
E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section
2.10.B.) Display on room sensor shall be programmable at application controller and
include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data
shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which
button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operations for specific display
requirements for intelligent room sensor.
F. On board flow sensor shall be microprocessor-driven and pre-calibrated at the factory.
Pre-calibration shall be at 16 flow points as a minimum. All factory calibration data shall
be stored in non-volatile memory. Calibration data shall be field adjustable to compensate
for variations in VAV box type and installation. All calibration parameters shall be
adjustable through intelligent room sensor. Operators workstation, portable computers,
and special hand-held field tools shall not be needed for field calibration.
G. Provide duct temperature sensor at discharge of each VAV box that is connected to
controller for reporting back to operators workstation.
2.2.2
TOUCH SCREEN COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT

A. BACnet Conformance
1. Touch screen communicating thermostats shall be approved by the BTL as meeting
the BACnet Application Specific Controller requirements.
2. Touch screen Communicating Thermostats shall, at a minimum, support MS/TP
BACnet LAN types. They shall communicate directly through this BACnet LAN at
9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as a native BACnet device.
File, and Program Object Types.
4. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented
and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for
working with proprietary information.
B. Touch screen Communicating Thermostat hardware shall:
1. Include a 32 Bit processor
2. Include a backlit touch screen for the user interface, buttons are not allowed.
3. Include Three (3) universal inputs with 12-bit resolution that can accept 3K and 10K
Type II thermistors, 0-10VDC, 05 VDC, 4-20mA, and dry contact signals. Inputs on
controller may be either analog or digital.

M - 18
VOLUME-III
4. Include built-in temperature sensor.

5. Include built-in humidity sensor.
6. Include Six (6) relay outputs on board.
7. Include Two (2) analog outputs with 12-bit resolution. Each auto-detecting for 0-10
V or 4-20 mA control signals.
8. Meet the requirements of Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy
Management Equipment (PAZX) under the UL Standard for Safety 916.
9. Meet the requirements of EMC Directive (European CE Mark) EN 60950.
10. Meet the requirements for FCC Part 15, Class B.
11. Be powered by 24VAC power.
2.3
USER INTERFACES - GENERAL
2.3.1
Overview
The design of the BMS shall be capable of providing a range of user interfaces including:
Main Server(s) and Clients
Panel PCs for plant room applications
Hand-Held and Pocket PCs
All communications between the user and the system shall be in clear language, without
reference to special code or codes.
It shall be a fundamental requirement that the user interfaces are easy to use and intuitive
throughout. The use of window techniques such as "drag and drop" is preferred.
2.3.2
Password Access
BMS user interfaces shall be accessible after logging on by entering a password.
All user interfaces shall use the same access regime such that each user will retain their access
criteria and access levels across all user interfaces.
It shall be possible to grant or deny access to each of the various functions for individual
users.
2.3.3
Help facility
A complete 'help' facility shall provide information about the system and its use. This shall be
made available to the user.
The information provided shall be in simple clear language.
2.4
BMS TERMINAL & CLIENT TERMINALS

M - 19
VOLUME-III
2.4.1
General System Architecture

The BMS shall be based on open system architecture and shall support industry standard
protocols like Lon Works, BACnet, ModBus, OPC, EIB, ODBC, XML, SOAP and Advance
DDE. The system shall be designed on a distributed computing principle, assuring that no
single point of failure exists in the system. Furthering this concept, the system shall comprise
of the following discrete and segregated layers:
Management Layer Comprising of supervisory database servers and Human Machine
Interfaces connected on a BACnet/IP network
Supervisory Layer Comprising of BACnet gateways, and is applicable only when the
Automation Layer comprises of controllers with Lonworks protocols
Automation Layer Comprising of BACnet/LonMark controllers managing / monitoring
various electromechanical system including field level components
The data communication between the Automation/Supervisory and Management layers shall
be through Ethernet Network using TCP/IP protocol.
A BACnet / IP or BACnet / Ethernet router connects the Automation / Supervisory Layer to
the Management Layer; whilst a BACnet/IP or BACnet / Ethernet gateway performs the
translation of Lon protocol based Automation Layer to the BACnet based Supervisory Layer.
2.4.2
The Management Layer

The Management Layer shall comprise of a distributed network of Database Servers,
Operator Stations, Print Servers, and BACnet Servers etc. The system shall use a Client
Server architecture in which the Database Servers shall have the requisite Clients to access
data from the Automation/Supervisory Layer Controllers. Furthermore, the Database Servers
shall act as data providers for Operator Workstations and other data consumers like Central
Monitoring System, ERP systems, Computerized Maintenance Management Systems,
Financial Systems etc. The Database Servers shall have the capability to provide data to these
systems via BACnet Server, OPC Server, Advance DDE Server, XML, SOAP, or ODBC.
The management layer shall be able to deal with the high data traffic with complex data
structures between management stations and between the management station and the process
level.
The management layer equipment and services shall be able to support current and future
building management standard in order to allow backward and forward compatibility.
The network technology must be based on BACnet/IP and Ethernet, and be compatible with
the latest LAN, WAN technology. The Database Server Computers and Operator Workstation
hardware shall be capable of interfacing to an IEEE 802.3 Standard Local Area Network
(LAN).
The Ethernet network infrastructure including cabling, active and passive components shall
be provided. The BACS vendor shall co-approve the patch panels and cables prior to order by
the MEP contractor (as per structured cabling specifications). All active and passive
components after the patch panels required to interface to the BACS system shall be provided
by the BACS vendor in his scope.
The following sections define the functional requirements of each of the components on the
Management Layer:
2.4.2.1 Redundant Database Servers

M - 20
VOLUME-III
Hardware
The PC hardware for the Server for each sector shall comprise of the following:
Intel Core i7 processor running at a minimum of 3 GHz
4 GB of RAM
17 Flat Panel Display
A 500 GB Hard disk drive
A DVD ROM / CD RW drive
A tape backup unit
A Gigabit Ethernet Network Card
Software
The BMS system server shall be based around the Microsoft Windows 32 bit multitasking
environment, Windows 2000 Server. The BMS system shall be a true 32-bit application to
take advantage of Microsoft Windows 2000s enabling technologies. Any 16-bit system
running on the Microsoft platform (such as those originally based on MSDOS and Microsoft
Windows 3.x) shall not be acceptable.
Standard services supported by the server computer operating system will include the
following:
Multi-tasking Multi-user support
TCP / IP Network Support
Graphic Display Building Editor
Application software.
Hot Backup Server
This facility shall enable the system server to operate in high availability architecture with no
single point of failure. To achieve this, the facility must provide specific features.
The system must be capable of running a pair of similarly configured computers in a hot
backup configuration where at any point in time, one is the acting primary and the other the
acting as the Hot Backup. An online database duplication mechanism must be supported.
Scanning I/O on two separate systems and processing independently is not acceptable.
The database duplication must be performed on a per-transaction basis for two reasons:
a.
To ensure that the duplicated Backup database is consistent at all time with the
primary database.
b.
To avoid unnecessary loading of field devices caused by duplicate polling.
It must be possible to remove one of the redundant systems for maintenance without
interrupting operation, and upon its reinstatement, re-synchronize the database, again without
interruption to system operation. A method of manually initiating a fail over must be provided
M - 21
VOLUME-III
to assist with such maintenance operations.

Failure of either system must be announced audibly and visually via the alarming subsystem.
To accommodate recoverable faults, the failed system must be able to reboot automatically
after non-fatal errors and assume the role of acting as Hot backup automatically.
The above specification is a minimum requirement. Vendor to propose the exact hardware
based on his system requirements.
2.4.2.2 OPERATORS WORKSTATION
A. General structure of workstation interaction shall be a standard client/server relationship.
Server shall be used to archive data and store system database. Clients shall access server
for all archived data. Each client shall include flexibility to access graphics from server or
local drive. Server shall support a minimum of 50 simultaneous clients.
1. Operator workstation shall be approved by the BTL as meeting the BACnet
Advanced Work Station (AWS) requirements.
2. Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for
3. Standard BACnet object types accessed by the AWS shall include as a minimum:
Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary Input, Binary
Output, Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification Class, Program, and
Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be
4. The AWS shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections.
Must support remote connection to server using a thick client application. This device
shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ethernet
LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support
interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs).
AWS shall support Foreign Device Registration to allow temporary workstation
connection to IP network.
C. Data Displays
1. Data displays shall render all data associated with project as called out on drawings
and/or object type list supplied. Graphic files shall be created using digital, full color
photographs of system installation, AutoCAD or Visio drawing files of field
installation drawings, and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings.
2. Data displays shall render all data using iconic graphic representations of all
mechanical equipment. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text, and
dynamic object data together on each display and shall include animation.
Information shall be labeled with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate
engineering units. All information on any display shall be dynamically updated
without any action by the user.
3. Data display frame shall allow user to change all field-resident AWS functions
associated with the project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules, exception schedules,
M - 22
VOLUME-III
etc., from any screen, no matter if that screen shows all text or a complete graphic
display. This shall be done without any reference to object addresses or other
numeric/mnemonic indications.
4. Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input
objects may also be displayed as individual graphic items on the display screen as an
overlay to the system graphic.
5. All displays and programming shall be generated and customized by the local use
energy management and control system (EMCS) supplier and installer. Systems
requiring factory development of graphics or programming of DDC logic are
specifically prohibited.
6. AWS shall be supplied with a library of standard graphics, which may be used
unaltered or modified by the operator. AWS shall include a library of equipment
graphic components to assemble custom graphics. Systems that do not allow
customization or creation of new graphic objects by the operator (or with third-party
software) shall not be allowed.
7. Data display frame shall include customizable and persistent tree navigation for
building, equipment and system diagnostic centric display organization.
8. Each display may be protected from viewing unless operator credentials have the
appropriate access level. An access level may be assigned to each display and system
object. The menu label shall not appear on the graphic if the operator does not have
the appropriate security level.
9. Data displays shall have the ability to link to content outside of the EMCS system.
Such content shall include, but is not limited to launching external files in their native
applications (for example, a Microsoft Word document) and launching a web browser
resolving to a specified web address.
10. The AWS shall have the ability to support 20 concurrent web clients.
11. Data displays shall support:
a. Graphic items with custom geometry that offer both color gradient shading and
variable opacity in scale to system variables and range setpoints.
b. Clear and custom geometry navigation buttons to provide intuitive navigation.
c. Graphic files in JPG, PNG, and GIF file types.
d. Viewing of 1,024 system data points in a single screen.
D. Password Protection
1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on.
Access shall be limited to operators assigned functions when user is logged on. This
includes displays as outlined above.
2. AWS shall provide security for a minimum of 200 users. Each user shall have an
individual User ID, User Name, and Password. Entries are alphanumeric characters
only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User ID shall be 08 characters, User
Name shall be 029 characters, and Password shall be 48 characters long.
3. Each user shall be allowed individual assignment of only those control functions,
menu items, and user-specific system start display, as well as restricted access to
discrete BACnet devices to which that user requires access.
M - 23
VOLUME-III
4. All passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be adjustable online at the
operators terminal.
5. Users shall also have a set access level, which defines access to displays and
individual objects the user may control. System shall include 10 separate and distinct
access levels for assignment to users.
6. The system shall include an Auto Logout feature that shall automatically logout user
when there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time
period shall be adjustable by system administrator. Auto Logout may be enabled and
disabled by system administrator. Operator terminal shall display message on screen
that user is logged out after Auto Logout occurs.
7. The system shall permit the assignment of an effective date range, as well as an
effective time of day, that the User IDs are permitted to authenticate.
E. Operator Activity Log
1. An Operator Activity Log that tracks all operator changes and activities shall be
included with AWS. System shall track what is changed in the system, who
performed this change, date and time of system activity, and value of the change
before and after operator activity. Operator shall be able to display all activity, sort
the changes by user and also by operation. Operator shall be able to print the Operator
Activity Log display.
2. Log shall be gathered and archived to a hard drive on AWS as needed. Operator shall
be able to export data for display and sorting in a spreadsheet.
F. Scheduling
1. AWS and web client shall show all information in easy-to-read daily format including
calendar of this month and next. All schedules shall show actual ON/OFF times for
day based on scheduling priority. Priority for scheduling shall be events, holidays and
daily, with events being the highest.
2. Holiday and special event schedules shall display data in calendar format. Operator
shall be able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these calendars.
3. Operator shall be able to change all information for a given weekly or exception
schedule if logged on with the appropriate access privileges.
4. AWS shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up of schedules. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have its own pulldown selection for startup or may be started by right-clicking on value displayed on
graphic and then selecting Schedule.
5. Scheduling shall include optimum start based on outside air temperature, current
heating/cooling setpoints, indoor temperature and history of previous starts. Each and
every individual zone shall have optimum start time independently calculated based
on all parameters listed. User shall input schedules to set time that occupied setpoint
is to be attained. Optimum start feature shall calculate the startup time needed to
match zone temperature to setpoint. User shall be able to set a limit for the maximum
startup time allowed.
6. Schedule list shall show all schedules currently defined. This list shall include all
standard, holiday and event schedules. In addition, user shall be able to select a list
that shows all scheduled points and zones.
7. Display of all three schedules must show all ON times for standard, holiday and event
schedules in different colors on a given day. In addition, OFF times for each must
M - 24
VOLUME-III
also be shown in additional colors. User shall be able to select from standard calendar
what days are to be scheduled and same display shall show all points and zones
affected. User shall be able to set time for one day and select all days of the week that
shall be affected as a recurrence of that same schedule for that given day.
8. Any displayed data that is changeable by the operator may be selected using the right
mouse button and the schedule shall then be selectable on the screen. Selection of the
schedule using this method shall allow the viewing of the assigned schedule allow the
point to be scheduled.
9. Schedule editor shall support drag-n-drop events and holidays onto the schedule
calendar.
10. Schedule editor shall support drag-n-drop events default to a two-hour period, which
can then be adjusted by the user.
11. Schedule editor shall support drag-n-drop holidays default for OFF all day and can be
edited for multiple-day holidays.
12. Schedule editor shall support the view of affected zones when adding or editing timed
events of a schedule.
G. Alarm Indication and Handling.
1. AWS shall provide visual, printed, and email means of alarm indication. Printout of
alarms shall be sent to the assigned terminal and port. Alarm notification can be
filtered based on the User IDs authorization level.
2. Web client shall display a persistent alarm state for the system regardless of the data
view including points in alarm but not acknowledged, and points that have gone into
alarm and returned to normal without being acknowledged.
3. Alarm History shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the
hard disk of the AWS. Each entry shall include a description of the event-initiating
object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm message of at least 256
characters in length. Entry shall include time and date of alarm occurrence, time and
date of object state return to normal, time and date of alarm acknowledgment, and
identification of operator acknowledging alarm.
4. Alarm messages shall be in user-definable text (English or other specified language)
and shall be delivered either to the operators terminal, client or through remote
communication using email (Authenticated SMTP supported).
5. AWS shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-down
selection for startup or may be started by right-clicking on value displayed on graphic
and then selecting alarm setup.
6. AWS shall support color-coded indication of current alarms as follows:
a. Red indicator shows number of active alarms that have not been acknowledged.
b. Yellow indicator shows number of alarms that are still active but have been
acknowledged.
c. Blue indicator shows number of alarms that have returned to normal but have not
been acknowledged.
d. Color-coded indicators, when selected by the user, navigate to a pre-filtered view of
alarm history.
M - 25
VOLUME-III
e. Alarm history can be filtered by color-coded indicator states.

7. Alarm annunciation includes navigation link to a user-selected display or URL.
8. User can silence audible annunciation for the current session.
9. User can disable auto-refresh of alarm annunciation for current session.
mouse button and the alarm shall then be selectable on the screen. Selection of the
alarm using this method shall allow the viewing of the alarm history or allow the
creation of a new alarm.
H. Trendlog Information
1. AWS shall periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the building
controllers and store the information in the system database. Stored records shall be
appended with new sample data, allowing records to be accumulated. Systems that
write over stored records shall not be allowed unless limited file size is specified.
System database shall be capable of storing up to 50 million records before needing
to archive data. Samples may be viewed at the web client. Operator shall be able to
view all trended records, both stored and archived. All trendlog records shall be
displayed in standard engineering units.
2. AWS shall be capable of trending on an interval determined by a polling rate, or
change-of-value.
3. AWS shall be able to change trendlog setup information. This includes the
information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All
operations shall be password protected. Viewing may be accessed directly from any
and all graphics on which a trended object is displayed.
4. AWS shall include a Trendlog Wizard for setup of logs. Wizard shall walk user
through all necessary steps. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for startup,
or may be started by right-clicking on value displayed on graphic, and then selecting
Trendlogs from the displayed menu.
5. AWS shall be capable of using Microsoft SQL as the system database.
mouse button and the trendlog shall then be selectable on the screen. Selection of the
trendlog using this method shall allow the viewing of the trendlog view.
7. Trendlog viewer shall provide:
a. Software that is capable of graphing the trend-logged object data shall be included.
b. Access and ability to create, edit and view are restricted to users by user account
credentials
c. Specific and repeatable URL defines the trendlog(s) that comprise the view.
d. Call out of trendlog value at intersection of trend line and mouse-over vertical axis.
e. Trendlog and companion logs can be configured to display on one of two
independent vertical scales.
f.
Click zoom for control of data set viewed along either graph axis.
g. User-specifiable start and end dates as well as a fast scroll features that supports click
zoom of macro scale view of the data for quickly finding data set based on visual
M - 26
VOLUME-III
signature.
h. User export of the viewed data set to MS Excel.
I.
i.
Web browser-based help.
j.
Optional min/max ranges (Upper Control Limits, Lower Control Limits) for each
value.
Energy Log Information

1. AWS shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field
equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be appended with new
data, allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall not
be allowed unless limited file size is specified. Display all energy log information in
standard engineering units.
2. All data shall be stored in database file format for direct use by third-party programs.
Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.
3. AWS operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This
includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be
logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall support
using flow and temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.
4. AWS shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and
peak values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly
formats. In each format, the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to
view.
J.
Demand Limiting
1. AWS shall include demand limiting program that includes two types of load
shedding. One type of load shedding shall shed/restore equipment in binary fashion
based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. The other type of
shedding shall adjust operator-selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based
on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be
implemented independently on each and every zone or piece of equipment connected
to system.
2. Binary shedding shall include minimum of five (5) priority levels of equipment
shedding. All loads in a given priority level shall be shed before any loads in a higher
priority level are shed. Load shedding within a given priority level shall include two
methods. In one, the loads shall be shed/restored in a first off-first on mode, and in
the other the loads are just shed/restored in a first off-last on (linear) fashion.
3. Analog shed program shall generate a ramp that is independently used by each
individual zone or individual control algorithm to raise the appropriate cooling setting
and lower appropriate heating setting to reduce energy usage.
4. AWS shall be able to display the status of each and every load shed program. Status
of each load assigned to an individual shed program shall be displayed along with
English description of each load.
K. Tenant Activity
1. AWS shall include program that monitors after-hours overrides by tenants, logs that
data, and generates a bill based on usage and rate charged for each tenant space.
Tenant Activity program shall be able to assign multiple zones, from a list of every
zone connected to system, to a particular tenant. Every zone is monitored for afterGCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.
M - 27
VOLUME-III
hours override usage and that data logged in AWS. Operator may then generate a bill
based on the usage for each tenant and the rate charged for any overtime use.
2. Configuration shall include entry of the following information for use in logging and
billing:
a. Tenants contact name and address
b. One or multiple tenant zones that make up a total tenant space, including a separate
billing rate for each separate zone
c. Minimum and maximum values an event duration and event limit
d. Property management information
e. Overall billing rate
f.
Seasonal adjustments or surcharge to billing rate
g. Billing notification type including, but not limited to printer, file and email
h. Billing form template
3. Logging shall include recording the following information for each and every tenant
event:
a. Zone description
b. Time the event begins
c. Total override time
d. Limits shall be applied to override time
4. A tenant bill shall be generated for a specific period using all the entered
configuration data and the logged data. User with appropriate security level shall be
able to view and override billing information. User shall be able to select a billing
period to view and be able to delete events from billing and edit a selected tenant
activity events override time.
L. Reports
1. AWS shall be capable of periodically producing reports of trendlogs, alarm history,
tenant activities, device summary, energy logs, and override points. The frequency,
content, and delivery are to be user adjustable.
2. All reports shall be capable of being delivered in multiple formats including text- and
comma-separated value (CSV) files. The files can be printed, emailed, or saved to a
folder, either on the server hard drive or on any network drive location.
M. Configuration/Setup
1. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall
include, but not be limited to system time, day of the week, date of daylight savings
set forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port and speed, etc.
Items shall be modified using understandable terminology with simple mouse/cursor
key movements.
N. Field Engineering Tools
1. AWS shall include field engineering tools for programming all controllers supplied.
M - 28
VOLUME-III
All controllers shall be programmed using graphical tools that allow the user to
connect function blocks on screen that provide sequencing of all control logic.
Function blocks shall be represented by graphical displays that are easily identified
and distinct from other types of blocks. Graphical programming that uses simple
rectangles and squares is not acceptable.
2. User shall be able to select a graphical function block from menu and place on screen.
Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be downloaded to
controller without any reentry of data.
3. Programming tools shall include a real-time operation mode. Function blocks shall
display real-time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and outputs when
in real-time operation. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices and
countdown of timer devices in graphical format.
4. Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications that
include logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be able to
select unit type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit to be
controlled. Supply minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation software.
5. Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for detection of devices
connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning the entire network. This
function shall display device instance, network identification, model number, and
description of connected devices. It shall record and display software file loaded into
each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the computers hard drive. If
needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller using the mouse.
6. AWS shall automatically notify the user when a device that is not in the database is
added to the network.
7. AWS shall include backup/restore function that will back up entire system to selected
medium and then restore system from that medium. The system shall be capable of
creating a backup for the purpose of instantiating a new client PC.
8. The system shall provide a means to scan, detect, interrogate, and edit third-party
BACnet devices and BACnet objects within those devices.
O. Workstation Hardware
1. Provide operators workstation(s) at location(s) noted on the plans.
2. AWS server
a. 64-bit OS
b. Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012
c. 2 GHz (or better), one or more dual-core or quad-core processors
d. 8 GB RAM or higher
e. 3 GB of hard drive space required for base installation without application data
f.
Network interface card (10/100/1000 Mbps)
P. Software
1. At the conclusion of the project, contractor shall leave with owner a CD-ROM that
includes the complete software operation system and project graphics, setpoints,
system parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to completely restore the
M - 29
VOLUME-III
system in the case of a computer malfunction.
2.4.2.3 Web Client

1. EMCS supplier shall provide an HTML5-based browser access to the AWS as part of
standard installation. User must be able to access all displays of real-time data that are
part of the AWS using a standard web browser. Web browser shall tie into the
network through owner-supplied Ethernet network connection. The web client shall
support a minimum of 200 users with a single license.
2. Browser shall be standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer v10.0 or later,
Firefox v19.0 or later, Chrome v24.0 or later, and Safari v7.1.1 or later. No special
vendor-supplied software shall be needed on computers running browser. Data shall
be displayed in real-time and update automatically without user interaction.
3. Web pages shall be automatically generated using HTML5 from the data display files
that reside on the AWS. Any system that requires use of an HTML editor for
generation of web pages shall not be considered.
4. Access through web client or thick client shall utilize the same hierarchical security
scheme as the AWS. User shall be asked to log on once the client makes connection
to the AWS. Once the user logs on, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked
by the AWS. The user shall be able to change only those items he or she has authority
to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the users who have
logged on to the system, regardless of whether those changes were made using a web
client, thick client or through the AWS.
5. Shall provide User Session Management including the ability to view all connected
user sessions to the web client, see how long they have been active/inactive for each
unique session, and force log-out for any or all sessions.
6. Shall provide menu-style navigation access to primary features, i.e. alarm history,
DataViewer, Search scheduled points and Zones, System Activity, User Session
Management, and Top Display
7. Web client shall, at a minimum, support the following tablets:
a. Android platform:
1. Google Nexus
2. Samsung Galaxy Note
b. Apple platform
1. Ipad
2. Apple Ipad Mini
2.4.2.4 Field Engineering Tools
b. 1. AWS shall include field engineering tools for programming all controllers
supplied. All controllers shall be programmed using graphical tools that allow the
user to connect function blocks on screen that provide sequencing of all control
logic. Function blocks shall be represented by graphical displays that are easily
identified and distinct from other types of blocks. Graphical programming that
uses simple rectangles and squares is not acceptable.
M - 30
VOLUME-III
c. 2. User shall be able to select a graphical function block from menu and place
on screen. Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be
downloaded to controller without any reentry of data.
d. 3. Programming tools shall include a real-time operation mode. Function blocks
shall display real-time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and
outputs when in real-time operation. Animation shall show change of status on
logic devices and countdown of timer devices in graphical format.
e. 4. Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications
that include logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be
able to select unit type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit
to be controlled. Supply minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation
software.
f.
5. Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for detection of devices
connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning the entire network. This
function shall display device instance, network identification, model number, and
description of connected devices. It shall record and display software file loaded
into each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the computers hard
drive. If needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller using
the mouse.
g. 6. AWS shall automatically notify the user when a device that is not in the
database is added to the network.
h. 7. AWS shall include backup/restore function that will back up entire system to
selected medium and then restore system from that medium. The system shall be
capable of creating a backup for the purpose of instantiating a new client PC.
i.
2.4.3
8. The system shall provide a means to scan, detect, interrogate, and edit thirdparty BACnet devices and BACnet objects within those devices.
Audit Trail
A transaction log of all user and system actions shall be provided with records. This file shall
be capable of being used in a circular mode i.e. overwriting the oldest data. It shall be
possible to review individual users actions per BMS terminal such as log on / off time, any
points which have been manually over-ridden / placed to auto, created, edited, up/down
loaded, file transfers, creation or amendment of log data files as a minimum. All background
system activities such as controller file requests shall also be logged.
Audit trail shall be available in the ODBC option.
2.5
SCHEMATIC INTERFACE
2.5.1
A schematic event based interface shall be included and be an integral part of the standard
operating software and included on all BMS terminals. Following the initial display of a
particular schematic diagram, the status of plant and measured values will be obtained from
the controller and displayed as appropriate. Subsequent refreshing of this data shall only
occur either when the status of an item of plant changes (e.g.: on to off) or where the
measured value changes by a pre-defined amount. The use of event based schematics ensures
that, as the programmable controllers are updating the BMS terminal when they register an
point value change being presented on the schematic.
2.5.2
It shall be possible to create schematic backgrounds or points utilising bitmaps with 24bit true
colour resolution, these shall have a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Points shall be

M - 31
VOLUME-III
able to appear if a given plant condition exists.

2.5.3
It shall be possible to log on to the system via the schematic interface 2.5.4 It shall be possible
to indicate current status or value of individual points in the system together with their
location on the schematic diagram.
2.5.5
It shall be possible for the user to create new schematics or modify existing ones (subject to
password authority) without reference to the BMS contractor or manufacturer.
2.5.6
Creation or modification of schematic diagrams shall be possible while the BMS terminal is
on line.
2.5.7
An integrated library of standard symbols representing fans, pumps, valves, etc. shall be
provided for use when creating new schematics.
2.5.8
It shall be possible to allocate and display a schematic diagram at any and every level of the
system structure, e.g. building, plant, zone and point.
2.5.9
It shall be possible to employ active areas of the schematic (hot spots) to permit a hierarchical
or lateral linkage between diagrams without recourse to a subordinate or superior routine.
2.5.10 It shall be possible to manually override the state or value of an point or return it to its
automatic state directly from the schematic diagram.
2.5.11 During normal operation it shall be possible to perform edit functions to the parameters to be
modified, this shall include:
-
Time schedules with graphical edit facility
Time extension of plant enabling up to 18 hours extension
Holiday schedules
Alarm high and low limits, transient time filters and hysteresis
Set Value and where applicable slope correction
Control PID terms
Optimiser occupancy, leaving and low limit set values
2.5.12 It shall be possible to automatically indicate the status of plant by a configured colour change
of the symbol. In the case of analogue points it shall be possible to configure a colour change
of the schematic as the measured value changes e.g.: pipe work to be shown changing in
increments from dark blue to light red as the temperature increases.
2.5.13 It shall be possible to represent measured values as either symbols, which change according to
the measured value, or text. Examples of a symbol representation are:
-
A temperature might shown as a thermometer with a graduated scale
A water tank with water level rising and falling combined might be shown as with
colour change to represent its temperature level.
Where text is used it shall utilise engineering values such as Temp 21.2C.
2.5.14 A "zoom" facility shall be provided whereby a selected area of the schematic diagram may be
M - 32
VOLUME-III
enlarged to show greater detail.

2.5.15 Configurable, the schematic interface shall be automatically displayed following the powerup of the BMS Terminal.
2.5.16 Where the existing display is representative of only a part of the installed plant it shall be
possible to enable a full composite display as a sub-display at the base of the screen for
reference purposes.
2.6
TEXT INTERFACE
2.6.1
The BMS terminal shall provide a two-pane window with one pane showing the plant/point
index and the other showing requested values.
2.6.2
The index pane shall be active to indicate the following by selection
2.6.3
2.6.4
Points selected for logging
Points currently in alarm
Points selected for database alignment.
A toolbar shall be provided for regularly performed functions. A toolbar shall be selected for
off/view to provide access to the following:
-
Printing
Saving information to disk
Log in
Log out
System set-up
Short form editing
Logging set-up
Historical log information
Dynamic log information
Transaction logging
System diagnostics
Schematic interface
A status bar shall be provided for regularly viewed information. The status bar shall be
selected for off/view and be configurable per user to provide the following:
-
Date, time, current user name.

Communications status.
Mnemonic, controller number, controller Point number, Point type (e.g. AI, DI, DO,
TIM, SPA, OPT etc.).
Number of alarms in the file, total alarms, cleared, acknowledged, unacknowledged,

M - 33
VOLUME-III
delayed.
2.6.5
The layout of the system manger shall be configurable per user allowing a customised
environment to meet individual users needs. It shall be configurable for font type and size,
window positions, status bar contents and both point and alarm review formats.
2.6.6
It shall be possible to carry out the following commands by use of dedicated function keys on
the keyboard or by the mouse :
-
Manual on - digital points
Manual off - digital points
Auto - analogue and digital points
Temporary on - time schedules
Temporary off - time schedules
Set to value - analogue points
Alarm review
Point type review
Point group review
Plant review
Hours run review
Review cancel
Schematic enable
Printer on/off
Log on
Log off
Help
2.6.7
It shall be possible on a per user basis to create a number of points requiring manual control
in a specific sequence with appropriate time delays into a single command routine. This
routine shall be able to be initiated at any time by the operator and all events associated shall
be recorded as part of the transaction logging function.
2.6.8
It shall be possible to address buildings, plant, zones, points etc., using clear language
descriptions. Each individual point may also be identified by a unique alphanumeric
mnemonic. However, systems relying solely on mnemonic address entry shall not be
accepted.
2.6.9
There shall be a minimum of four hierarchical levels of address available, typically:

-
Level one shall identify the Building

M - 34
VOLUME-III
Level two shall identify the Plant
Level three shall identify the Zone
Level four shall identify the Control Element (e.g. sensor)
2.6.10 Reviews shall be via drag and drop from within the pane allowing individual or a group of
points to be displayed. It shall be possible to select an individual point type or selection of
point types to be included within a review.
2.6.11 The review information display for each point type shall be configurable per user for font
type and size and selection of information to be displayed, thus allowing the necessary level
of information to suit the users requirement and shall include as a minimum the following:
-
Date / time of review.
Mnemonic, controller number, controller point number, point type (e.g. AI, DI, DO,
time, set-point etc.).
S hort point title, long point title.
Primary value (e.g. Flow 1.5L/s), secondary value (e.g. totalised 2950 Litres).
Cross-referenced controlling point (reason for state).
Alarm and limits if applicable.
Totalised values and limits if applicable (e.g. hours run and maintenance levels).
2.6.12 In addition to the information above it shall be possible to provide clear language descriptions
of each point extracted from the plant index. To avoid cluttering the screen only the last four
most significant index sections shall be displayed.
2.6.13 It shall be possible to enter any of the subroutines such as the editor functions, alarm or
logging function from the system manager without closing down the BMS terminal or the
programs currently running.
2.6.14 It shall be possible to store separate display groups per user. These group reviews can be run
on user request and shall provide a consistent review mechanism. It shall be possible to print
or save to disk the contents of the review.
2.6.15 It shall be possible to add new points, and reconfigure or modify existing points without
recourse to the manufacturer and without taking any part of the system offline.
2.6.16 There shall be a facility to easily modify parameters from within the system manager via a
graphical editing environment. This short form editing shall only present operational
information for modification. As a minimum this shall include:
-
Time schedules with graphical edit facility
Time extension of plant
Holiday schedules
Alarm high and low limits, where multiple limits exist it shall be possible to edit all
alarm transient time filters and hysteresis

M - 35
VOLUME-III
2.7
Set value and where applicable slope correction
Control PID terms
Optimiser occupancy, leaving and low limit set values
AUTOMATIC TIME CHANGE

It shall be possible to programme the system in advance to automatically modify both the
terminal and controller time for time change or daylight saving mode.
It shall be possible on a daily basis to configure the system to synchronise the time from the
main site server to a selection or all controllers on the site.
2.8
ALARMS
2.8.1
General
The BMS provides a vehicle for the visibility of plant failure, patterns, annunciation of alarms
and the reporting function. In particular it shall provide the standard functions stated below:
2.8.2
Alarms shall be generated under the following conditions:
Digital input contact change from normal to alarm condition (either open or closed).
Digital input condition either matches or mismatches another digital point type.
Digital point has accumulated hours run totalisation limits.
Analogue input has exceeded high or low limit alarm level.
Analogue input totalisation has exceeded alarm level.
Maximum demand alarm condition.
Conditional based on a number of digital / analogue conditions being met.
All alarms shall have the ability to be filtered to eliminate nuisance alarms. Methods shall
include:
-
transient inhibit timers to make allowance for fluttering contacts or slow internal
responses
inhibits timers checking that the condition has been active for a set time for both into
alarm and alarm clear
inhibits timers allowing for alarms which are cross referencing to other plant to
stabilise
It shall be possible to enter a hysteresis value on analogue alarms.

It shall be possible to send alarms to a file at the BMS terminals without presenting them to
the users until a predetermined time such as a shift change when all delayed alarms received
will be presented to the users for appropriate action.
If alarm conditions are not cleared then these shall be retransmitted after a predetermined time
M - 36
VOLUME-III
configurable based on alarm priority. These shall be identified as a distinct alarm to represent
their retransmission.
The annunciation of each alarm filter shall be configurable for both colour and text.
Alarm presentation shall configurable per user, for font type and size and selection of
information to be displayed for each point type thus allowing the necessary level of
information to suit the user requirement. The alarm review format selection shall include as a
minimum the following:
-
Date / time of alarm
Mnemonic, controller number, controller point number, point type (e.g. AI, DI, DO,
time, set-point etc.).
Short point title, long point title.
Primary value (e.g. Flow 1.5 L/s), secondary value (e.g. totalised 2950 Litres).
Alarm priority and limits if applicable.
Totalised values and limits if applicable (e.g. hours run and maintenance levels).
Name of the user who acknowledged the alarm, time of acknowledgement and BMS
terminal number.
Supporting text if entered at the time of acknowledgement.
The printout for alarms shall contain information as detailed above.

Alarm status shall be identified by a coloured icon representing unacknowledged alarms,
acknowledged alarms, alarm clear and re transmitted alarms.
It shall be possible to extract information via filters from the alarm database for presentation
in a management report for alarm activity. It shall be possible to filter for a given alarm type,
start/end time and date, relative time, selection of either mnemonic, mask, controller number
point number, etc. This shall present information in a dedicated window for analysis and
printing. This window shall be live with new alarm events that meet the filter requirements
being displayed.
Alarms shall be able to initiate BMS terminal actions on specific alarm activity, such as high
temperature alarm, Hours run alarm limit 1, etc. These BMS terminal actions shall include the
ability to present a schematic associated with the alarm, a multimedia sound file being played,
a Windows *.exe application being triggered and opening of documents.
Alarms shall automatically be printed on the BMS terminal printers allocated, or alternatively
IT networks printer.
Where colour printers are utilised it shall be possible to print alarms in red and alarm clear in
black.
It shall be possible to produce an extended text message to accompany the annunciation of
any alarm. This shall provide further information about the alarm and any action required to
be taken by the user or indicate that automatically programmed in the system. These messages
shall contain multiple lines of text and automatically printed on a designated printer local to a
BMS terminal. There shall be no practical limit to the length of messages created.
M - 37
VOLUME-III
Acknowledgement of alarms shall be automatically printed and will indicate the time, date,
and any message generated by the user.
It shall be possible to allocate alarm priorities into single or group acknowledgements
allowing high priority alarms to be individually acknowledged by the user or several low
priority alarms to be acknowledged in one action. It shall be possible to acknowledge a
selection of the new alarms received.
2.8.2
Alarm Banner
Alarms shall be displayed via an alarm banner present across all system screens to provide
instant visibility of system wide alarms and access to individual filters. This banner shall be
configurable for always displayed or if hidden the banner shall be shown when an alarm event
occurs.
The alarm status banner shall provide a display filters each detailing the current active alarm
information and alarm Acknowledgement State per filter. It shall be possible by selecting the
active alarm total to review that points are in alarm for the specific filter.
The alarm banner shall enable each filter to be customised by configurable alarm filter text
and bell colour allowing definition such as Critical Alarms, General Alarms and Low level
alarms.
The alarm banner shall show the alarm status per each filter with the total number of points
currently in alarm as received at the BMS terminal, and acknowledgement state e.g. grey - no
alarms, flashing grey / colour - unacknowledged alarms, colour stable - alarm condition
present and acknowledged. It shall be possible by clicking on the totals active alarm button to
display a summary of points currently in alarm for that filter.
2.9
DATA LOGGING
2.9.1
General
Data logging shall be available in the following forms:
2.10
Controller/Server Based: Logging sets which are specified at the BMS terminal are
loaded into multiple controllers for operation and whose data is automatically sent to
selected servers.
Real Time Displayed: Logging sets which are specified at the BMS terminal are
loaded into multiple controllers for operation and whose data is automatically
displayed at selected BMS terminals.
Controller: A mechanism in every programmable controller that automatically logs

every point on a regular basis. This circular log is viewed on request from any remote
or mobile user interface
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
2.10.1 General
The energy management software shall provide as a minimum the following functions :
2.10.2 Time Control Modes
There shall be no limit to the number of time schedules each of which can have any point or
M - 38
VOLUME-III
number of points assigned.

Each time programme shall operate over a seven-day week and allow for on/off periods per
time programme.
There shall be a facility to cross reference to a core time schedule via a relative schedule
allowing an offset of +/- time in minutes based on the core time schedule on/off periods.
A calendar schedule shall allow advance programming defining which time or relative
schedules are to be utilised for the advance dates to provide a variable switching pattern over
a calendar period.
There shall be no limit to the number of holiday schedules. Any time schedule or number of
time schedules may be assigned to any holiday schedule.
It shall be possible to programme holidays 365 days in advance.
2.10.3 Optimum start/stop control
There shall be no limit to the number of optimum start schedules. Any point can be assigned
to any optimiser.
The system shall start the plant at the latest possible time to achieve the desired internal
temperature by target time. Configurable, one of two algorithms shall be used:
-
by use of a linear algorithm monitoring outdoor air and space temperatures
by use of a logarithmic algorithm relating to inside temperature only Similarly the

system shall stop the plant at the earliest possible time before the end of the
occupancy without ambient conditions deteriorating below pre-set acceptable limits.
This shall operate in heating or cooling mode or a combination of both.

The optimiser programme shall be self-adjusting, the amount of adjustment being user
defined between 0% and 100%.
The user shall have the option of defining the termination of plant run-up or boost on target
temperature being achieved, target time being reached, or whichever occurs first.
The following reports shall be available for selection by the system user as required for each
schedule:-
Report at commencement of run up.
Report at termination of run up.
Report at commencement of run down.
Report at leaving time
Report at premature run down
Report of low temperature stop/start
Report at start of occupancy.
2.10.4 Anti-condensation/frost protection control

During plant off times the space and outdoor temperature shall be monitored continuously.
M - 39
VOLUME-III
When the temperature falls to a pre-set low limit, the plant shall start to prevent formation of
condensation or water freezing.
It shall be possible to set the differential between plant on and plant off temperature under
these conditions to minimise plant cycling.
2.10.5 Enthalpy control mode
For air-conditioned plant it shall be possible to monitor both fresh air enthalpy and extract air
enthalpy.
It shall be possible for the comparison of fresh air and return air enthalpy to be used to set
damper control mode for minimum energy usage.
2.10.6 Night Purge
When plant is operating in a cooling mode the system shall monitor both the external and
internal temperatures. Providing the external temperature is less than the desired and actual
internal temperatures at a pre-set time, the plant shall operate in a full fresh air mode for fixed
time duration. This is in order to flush the building with cooler fresh air, thus reducing
chiller load at occupancy start and providing fresh air into the building.
2.10.7 Load Cycling
The system shall be capable of cycling loads to reduce electrical consumption. The
programme shall have a user defined cycle period and maximum off time. A temperature
detector shall be assigned to each plant on the load cycling programme. Should the space
temperature exceed pre-set limits the load cycling shall be overridden and the plant returned
to the time control programme until the space temperature has returned to an acceptable level.
2.11
USER PROGRAMMABLE SOFTWARE

The system shall have a flexible software package to allow a user with minimal knowledge of
software programming to construct unique programmes for plant control and management
information.
The package shall provide, but not be limited to, the following functions :
-
Auto changeover of pumps, fans etc. on time programme, hours run or event (pump
trip etc.).
Damper enthalpy override
Degree day calculations
Boiler and fridge efficiency calculations
Time delays and sequenced interlocks
Cost savings calculations
Full arithmetic operators shall be available for use in the programmes as required e.g.: +, -, /,
*, ().
Programmes shall permit the use of comparison statements such as: =, >, <, =< etc.
Programmes shall permit logical operators to be used such as: NOT, AND, OR, XOR AND
M - 40
VOLUME-III
MASK.
Direct reference to any point shall be available to obtain its current value. Such references
shall be using standard language such as, ON, OFF, OPEN, CLOSE, MANUAL, SETPOINT,
EXPIRED TIME, PRIORITY, ALARM - e.g.: the programme shall support conditional
statements (IF...THEN...ELSE) and branches (GOTO).
It shall be possible to refer to secondary values of points such as in optimisers to determine
which mode they are currently operating e.g.: run-up, occupancy, frost, run-down etc.
It shall be possible to refer to time and calendar functions directly such that DATE, TIME,
HOUR, MINUTE functions may be used.
2.12
It shall be possible to set timers for example so that a timed delay may be produced before an
action is carried out.
PID CONTROL
The system shall be capable of performing proportional control, integral control, derivative
control or any combination of the three utilising direct digital control techniques.
he primary input to a control loop shall be ether a measured value (C, %RH, etc.) or a
calculated value).
The secondary or reset input shall be either a measured value (C, or %RH etc.) or a
calculated value. The secondary reset input characteristic may be a 3-step segment function. It
shall be possible to view this in a graphical format and modify characteristics by mouse
control.
Additional sun or wind influence may be input.
The set-point of any control loop shall be capable of being adjusted by time, event or as a
result of a calculation.
It shall be possible to reference a number of control loops to the same primary input point to
achieve multistage control.
Where a step-controlled output is utilised, it shall be possible to rotate the order in which the
steps are switched by time, or as the result of a calculation.
Valve and damper control shall be via 0-10 Vdc. Control loop set-up shall be via a graphical
tool to enable sampling test and trend display.
2.13
AUTO POWER UP
The system shall sequence the reinstatement of plant after a power failure. When a standby
generator is in operation, the system shall limit the number of plants in operation according to
the load on the generator.
It shall be possible to configure a fixed limit in addition to the floating limit determined by
generator capacity.
It shall be possible to monitor any overload condition of the standby generator so that if an
overload is detected reinstatement of the loads shall be prevented and loads switched off until
the condition is cleared.
2.14
INTEGRATION AND INTERFACING WITH OTHER SERVICES

M - 41
VOLUME-III
The system shall be capable of integration with other building services level by simple
hardware (electrical) methods or by the use of a computer-based communications protocol.
Where a communications protocol is used, integration controllers shall provide this facility
and shall be capable of integrating with systems such as fire, security, lifts, lights, etc. The
integrity of the individual systems shall be maintained and the failure of one system will not
adversely effect the operation of the others.
The integration controller shall provide a means of a consistent user interface for presentation
of third-party information at each of the BMS terminals.
Cross-referencing points of third-party systems shall be required such that the points created
may have similar attributes as the points in main system and used in the same way as other
BMS points to create intelligent control strategies.
Thus it shall be possible for the integration controller points to be used by the system as a
whole for control and monitoring purposes as well as for the annunciation of alarms, logging,
display, maintenance etc.
The integration controller shall have a self-analysis feature with in-built diagnostics and shall
transmit any malfunction messages to the designated BMS terminal.
As a minimum each integration controller shall provide a port for connection to the LAN.
Implementation of an integration controller shall be carried out in software and hardware.
Hardware that is dedicated to this function is preferred and shall be capable of being
connected directly to the main BMS LAN. Integration may equally be incorporated direct into
a controller if required.
Alternatively the use of an PC which is running integration controller software shall be used.
This shall utilise standard developers tools for mapping of parameters from systems providing
OPC (OLE for process control) and DDE/NetDDE.
2.15
OPEN SYSTEMS
2.15.1 General
A fundamental requirement is that an open system architecture shall be provided.
The system offered shall be flexible and incorporate multiple proprietary systems / protocols
such as Bacnet, Lontalk, LonWorks, LonMark, Modbus, EIB etc. with full
interoperability.
Interoperability is defined that controllers from proprietary system A can be connected to
the system architecture where there may be controllers from proprietary system B. Values
from either system can be equally logged, alarmed, displayed on schematics, audit trailed for
changes and interact to provide the most economical building control strategy. The open
system shall be the middleware to achieve this integration.
The system shall be able to utilise different protocols and architectures to maximize the media
infrastructure.
The system offered shall ensure that different vendors shall be able to equally tender
competitively, add and amend or change the system for future new sections.
2.16
OPC

M - 42
VOLUME-III
As an option, an interface shall be available which supports OPC (OLE for process control)
for presenting values from other OPC compliant systems on the BMS schematic interface.
2.17
ODBC COMPLIANT DATABASE

As an option, an ODBC-compliant database shall be provided. It shall be possible to extract
logging data records form this for open access for use by database packages such as Access,
Oracle etc.
It shall be possible to use SQL to extract data from the ODBC-compliant database. Alarms,
logged data and audit trail shall be available with this option
2.18
LONWORKS
The BMS system shall have the ability to integrate with other systems that conform to
LonWorks networks and LonMark equipment.
The integration shall be achieved by the use of an integration controller connected at either
the backbone network or a controller network.
The connection to the LON devices shall utilise FTT-10A Network Transceivers complying
with the requirements of EIA 790.3 Free Topology twisted pair channel specification
(78Kbps) supporting star, home run, multi-drop and loop wiring technologies.
The integration shall provide 2 way communications between the connected systems and it
shall be possible to access network variables for display at the BMS terminal.
2.19
EIB
The BMS system shall have the ability to integrate with other systems that conform to EIB.
EIB is a system for Home & Building Automation based on a decentralised, peer-to-peer,
OSI-compliant network operating system. It uses a serial transmission protocol.
The integration shall be achieved by the use of an integration controller connected at either
the backbone network or a controller network.
The connection shall be over either twisted pair (9,600 bps). The engineering shall be
performed using ETS EIB Tool Software.
shall be possible to interface not less than 500 points per integration controller for display at
the BMS terminal.
2.20
BACNET
The BMS system shall have the ability to integrate with other Building Control and
Automation systems that conform to ASHRAEs BACnet communications standard
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995 The integration shall be achieved by the use of an integration
controller connected at either the backbone network or a controller network.
The connection shall be over either Ethernet conforming to ISO standard IEEE 802.3
shall be possible to transfer not less than 800 points for display at the BMS terminal.
A minimum of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995 BACnet conformance class 3 shall be included.
2.21
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CONTROL DEVICES

M - 43
VOLUME-III
Chilled Water Automatic control valves 2" and smaller shall be screwed type, of red brass
material and valves 2" and larger shall be cast iron type and flanged. Valves shall be ANSIrated to withstand the pressures and temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainlesssteel stems and spring loaded Teflon packaging with replaceable discs. All valves shall have
the manufacturers name/logo embossed on the valve.
2.21.1 Chilled Water Valves shall be sized for a pressure drop greater than or equal to the coil they
serve.
2.21.2 Chilled Water valves shall be two-way type as specified in the sequence of operation. Shall be
PN16, bronze body. Stems shall be polished stainless-steel suitable temperature range of 2 to
110C.
2.21.3 All automatically controlled devices, shall be provided with electric / electronic actuators
sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action and tight close-off.
2.21.4 Actuators shall be provided with suitable corrosion resistant linkages for valves or dampers.
Except as specified herein, all actuators shall be sized for the load/close off encountered in
strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations. All actuators on outside air dampers,
relief air dampers, and convertor steam valves shall be heavy duty type with oil immersed
gear train. All actuators shall drive to their "normal" position anytime their associated AHU
(etc.) is shut down.
2.21.5 Direct coupled modulating actuators shall be 24 volt type with 2 to 10 VDC control signal.
Direct coupled on/off actuators shall be 24 VAC. The torque and the close off ratings shall
match the application used.
2.21.6 Firestats shall be 135 degrees manual reset type.
2.21.7 Duct Smoke Detectors shall contain an air sampling chamber with sampling tubes extending
through the width of the air duct. Alarm status indicating lights shall be visible on the front of
the detector.
2.21.8 DDC/FCU Controller
Controller shall consist of a one piece DDC controller complete with microprocessor, power
supply, self calibrating pressure transducer, and integral actuator. Provide DDC/FCU
controller factory fit and calibrated for the minimum and maximum air flows scheduled on the
drawings.
Controller housing shall be UL 94-5 5V or equivalent listed material for use in ceiling plenum
applications without need of special metal enclosure. Controller shall work over an ambient
temperature operating range of 0-55C (32-122F), 5- 95% non condensing humidity. Power
supply to unit shall be 20-30 VAC, 50 Hz, maximum power consumption of 5VA.
For reheat applications, provide factory fitted power relays rated for coils as required. Mount
relay in electric control enclosure and wire to DDC/FCU controller.
Controller shall be UL 916 listed, CE mark compliant, and conform to IEC 801.4 transient
and surge immunity standards. UL and CE marks shall appear on product labels.
Unit shall operate properly over inlet velocity pressure range of 0.00 to 2.00 in WC (0-500
Pa). End to end accuracy shall be +/- 5% of flow measured at 250 Pa inlet velocity pressure.
Cooling only model DDC/FCU controller shall be used in cooling only applications. Cooling
M - 44
VOLUME-III
and reheat model DDC/FCU controller shall be used in reheat applications and contain 3
Form A relays, pilot duty rated for control of floating proportional, time proportional or
staged reheat valves and coils.
Integral damper actuator shall be 53 lb-in (6 N-m) torque, over the shaft mounting type.
Stroke shall be fully adjustable from 0-90 degrees rotations with visible position indicator.
Actuator shall be equipped with manual position override. The actuator stroke time shall be
3.6 minutes maximum for 90 degree rotation at 50 Hz operation.
Room temperature sensor shall be complete with digital LCD display. Temperature sensor
shall permit local adjustment of temperature setpoint, minimum flow, and maximum flow.
Temperature sensor shall permit display of any of the four variables such as room
temperature, room temperature set point, air flow and maximum flow setpoint.
The VAV room digital thermostat shall also display the following:
Room space temperature (Degree C or in Degree F freely configurable)
Room temperature setpoint (Degree C or in Degree F freely configurable)
Maximum flow
Minimum flow
The room temperature sensor shall be wired to the DDC/FCU controller using a two wire non
polarity sensitive cable.
The room thermostat shall have plug-in facility to a portable operator terminal to get the
following additional operation such as:
It shall be possible to modify the FCU controller parameters from the room thermostat key
buttons without the use of any additional devices.
The controller should have the option of working along with a duct thermostat and any dry
contacts.
2.22
ELECTRONIC DATA INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
2.22.1 General
Input/output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the remote
panel for accurate, responsive, noise-free signal input/output. Control input response shall be
high sensitivity and matched to the loop gain requirements for precise and responsive control.
In no case shall computer inputs be derived from pneumatic sensors or thermocouple.
Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type of 100, 1000, or
3,000 ohm platinum, or 20,000 ohm.
Space temperature sensors shall be in attractive housing made from flame retardant ABS.
Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of
operation. The terminal box shall be IP54 and of flame retardant plastic.
Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper, monel or stainless-steel well. The
sensor shall have an accuracy of class B as per DIN IEC 751.
M - 45
VOLUME-III
Outside air, return air, discharge air, space and well sensors shall have + or - 1.0 degrees F
accuracy between 32 degrees and 212 degrees.
Relative humidity sensors shall be capacitance type with 10% to 90% range. Duct mounted
humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Wall mounted sensors shall be
provided with decorative covers identical to temperature sensors.
Differential and Static Pressure Sensors and Switches:
Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be of the adjustable set point and differential pressure type.
Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than one inch water
column (WC), they shall be piped across the fan. For fractional horsepower and non-ducted
fans, relays or auxiliary contacts may be used. Maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10
inches water column.
Pump proof-of-flow switches shall be of the adjustable differential pressure or flow type as
specified in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be 150 psi rated
except chilled water flow switches shall be provided with totally sealed vapor tight switch
enclosure on 300 psi body. Differential pressure switches shall have valved manifold for
servicing.
Air flow and duct static pressure analog sensors shall be high accuracy suitable for the low
pressures to be encountered.
Water flow analog sensors shall be IP66 magnetic type, cast steel up to 25 mm and Aluminum
alloy for sizes 40mm and above. Operational accuracy shall be 5%. It shall be suitable for
240 VAC with a current output of 4-20mA. The electrodes shall be detachable for easy
cleaning; it should not require the removal of the flow meter. The flow meter shall have an
3.5 segment 7 LED indicator.
Control relays and analog output transducers shall be compatible with PCP output signals.
Relays shall be suitable for the loads encountered.
2.22.2 BMS NETWORK
BMS network shall be established using the Structured Cabling System. This shall be
supplied by the specialist structured cabling system vendor, as part of the MEP contractors
scope of work. This shall be Level 4 type or higher as per latest standards for LON systems
and Cat 6, UTP for BACnet systems. Cables. F.O. Cables, Active Components,
Termination, etc shall be provided for a high speed network connection.
BMS submittal without the design of BMS Structured Cabling System shall not be
acceptable. Cable selections shall meet individual requirements as set out by the protocols.
2.23
23.1
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM:
The chiller plant comprises of 4 nos air cooled water chillers, 5nos primary chilled
water pumps, and 3 nos secondary pumps.
a.
The Chillers and pumps (primary and secondary) shall be controlled using the fully
programmable type DDC controllers through the Chiller Programmable Supervisory
Controller (PSC) as specified in Section 7, Part A, which shall be interfaced with the BMS
using the supplier software. The DDC controllers and its expansion modules shall be capable
of communicating on peer-to-peer basis with the similar DDC controllers / expansion

M - 46
VOLUME-III
modules via communication bus cable.

The DDC controller shall have the following facilities:
-
The controllers shall be modular and to increase the reliability the controllers with
maximum 50 I/O points shall be used. Also to increase the reliability maximum 16
controllers can be connected per data bus.
The controller shall have own resident real time clock and independent time channels
for time scheduling.
The custom made program shall be on EEPROM and hence shall not require any
battery back up.
A port should be provided for connecting Portable operator terminal
The DDC shall do the weekly duty sequencing of the Chillers and pumps to
approximate the equal wear and tear.
Communicate with the panel fascia mounted Operator terminal for temperature set
point and display for the set and actual temperature, run hours. The operator terminal
shall be menu driven, alphanumeric display and have at least 3 levels of password
protected access. The operator terminal shall display the data of the DDC controllers
connected on the same bus. The desired temperature and pressure set points shall be
set using the operator terminal
The DDC shall control these equipments when their H/O/A switch is in AUTO position. The
system shall include the butterfly valves for the Chillers and immersion temperature sensors
as shown in the control schematic drawing.
The DDC controllers shall be enclosed in an IP 54 enclosure meeting the local electrical
authority regulations. These shall have all the required relays, transformers, and auxiliaries etc
to make it functional. A 230 V AC, 50 Hz power supply shall be provided for this panel. The
DDC panel shall be located besides the MCC panel.
The pressurization unit shall be controlled with its own integral controls. It shall provide volt
free contact for the Run and Common fault status for monitoring on the Operator terminal via
the DDC controller.
B.
Chiller and primary pump controls

Based on the load sensed by the chilled waterside temperature sensors the DDC shall be
programmed to start/stop the Chillers and pumps.
When the Chiller is required to be switched ON the following sequence shall be followed:
-
Open the lead chiller chilled water butterfly valve

Confirm its open status from the butterfly valve limit switch
Enable the lead duty primary water pump
Confirm the chilled water supply temperature
Enable the lead duty secondary pump
Enable the chiller.
Once enabled the Chiller integral control shall takeover the control of the Chiller compressor
loading, unloading, protection etc. The chiller supplier shall supply the flow switches and
integrate the same in its protection circuits.

M - 47
VOLUME-III
When the Chiller has to be disabled first the Chiller shall be disabled, primary pump shall be
switched off and then the butterfly valves shall be closed. The DDC shall comply to the
earlier mentioned specs enabling flexibility in programming of the setpoint, time delays,
differential value etc.
Incase the running Chiller trips (common fault) the next lead Chiller shall be enabled
automatically incase it is not working. Similarly when the duty pump trips the standby pump
shall be enabled automatically.
The DDC shall do automatic weekly sequencing on the chillers and pumps so as to achieve
approximate equal wear and tear.
Each chiller shall provide volt free contact for the Run and Common fault status to the DDC
controller. Similarly the Pump starter panel shall provide the volt free contact for the Run and
trip status for each of the pump.
C.
Chilled Water Secondary Pumps

These pumps shall be run in duty/standby mode as indicated on the drawings. Each of these
pumps shall come complete with individual VFDs.
As a minimum, one pump of each pump set shall run at all times.
The BMS shall monitor all pressure differential points as indicated on the drawings. The
BMS shall totalize and average all pressures and provide the appropriate output to the VFDs.
The speed output signal shall be sent to all three VFDs simultaneously.
Since the system will operate in duty/standby pump mode the following shall be
implemented:
The BMS shall monitor the flow rate of the secondary system and use this signal to destage
the pumps.
The system shall attempt to maintain design conditions with the use of one pump. If after an
adjustable/preset time limit of 5 minutes, the system pressure remains below the set point with
one pump running, the BMS shall start the next pump at low speed. The speed of the second
pump shall continue to increase till the pump is operating at 50% capacity. The speed of the
lead pump shall be simultaneously reduced to 50%.
Addition of other pumps shall be as per the aforementioned sequence The BMS shall then
increase or decrease the speed of all pumps simultaneously to maintain the system pressure
set point. The BMS shall continuously monitor the secondary system flow rate and shall stop
the lag pumps when the system flow rate or pump speed falls below 40% of the total flowrate
of the combined pumps. The BMS shall then increase the speed of the lead pump to 100%.
The speed of the lead pump shall be increased or decreased to maintain system pressure.
The BMS shall continuously monitor the run time of each pump. The BMS shall rotate each
pump to be the lead pump after every 200 hours of run time. The BMS shall select the next
pump in the sequence as the lag pump.
If one of the pumps should fail then, the lag pump shall become the lead pump and the
idle/standby pump shall become the lag pump.
D. INDEX CIRCUIT BYPASS VALVE:

2 port motorized bypass valve is installed in the index circuit. When the secondary pump is
running at minimum speed and the differential pressure in the index circuit is higher than the preGCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.
M - 48
VOLUME-III
defined set point of 2.5 bar (adjustable), the DDC controller will generate an analogue output to
open the 2 port valve.
E. ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS in case of following conditions:
VFD Fault (Pump will be commanded to shutdown)
No Run status from the VFD in the event of pump being commanded to switch-on
(Pump will be commanded to shutdown)
F.
DATA POINT LIST:
For all other points being monitored / controlled by BMS, refer Data Point Schedule.
2.23.2 PRESSURISATION UNIT:
This system operates under its own dedicated controls; hence the operating sequence of this
system is not covered under this document.
BMS monitors the pump run status, common fault status and panel healthy status through
voltfree contact to DDC from the panel.
ALARMS:
Common fault
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.3 CHEMICAL DOSING UNIT:
BMS monitors the pump run status, pump Auto and pump trip status through voltfree
contact to DDC from the panel.
ALARMS:
-
Trip
DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.4 FRESH AIR AHU WITH HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL

2.23.4.1 PLANT CONFIGURATION
The Fresh Air Handling Unit shall comprise of an AHU supply air fan provided with constant
speed motor, CHW cooling coil with 2 way PICV valve, Sensible Heat Recovery Wheel,
Enthalpy Heat Recovery Wheel, HW heating coil with 2 way PICV valve (or Electric heating coil
M - 49
VOLUME-III
with thyrisor control as applicable), 2 banks of filters on supply side and 1 bank of filter on
exhaust side, UVC emitter after the cooling coil.
The system shall also comprise an extract air fan corresponding to this AHU. Air from the space
etc. shall be removed by the extract fan. The extract air fan shall comprise of a fan section with a
variable speed motor. The fresh air shall be pre cooled by the extract air before its entry to the
cooling coil. This section of the AHU shall act as enthalpy heat recovery section. The fresh air
shall then be cooled over the cooling coil and again pass through the sensible heat recovery
wheel.
2.23.4.2 AHU AND EXHAUST FAN MONITORING AND START/STOP

The motor control center serving the 100 % fresh air AHU and the extract fan shall have an
"HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It shall be possible to start the FAHU and the extract fan directly
when the switch positions are in manual. When this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC
controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch is monitored.
The air flow switches AFS are mounted across the FAHU supply & extract fan to detect airflow.
Each airflow switch is connected to a digital input of the DDC controller.
2.23.4.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL AND HUMIDITY MONITORING
Temperature sensor shall be located in the supply air duct. The supply air temperature shall be
maintained precisely at the desired set point via the 2 way PICV valve located on the chilled
water & Heating water coils.
Temperature and humidity sensor shall be located in the return air duct and the return air
temperature and RH shall be monitored by BMS.
Temperature sensors are also provided before the sensible heat wheel for monitoring purpose.
2.23.4.4 DIRTY FILTER STATUS
For the FAHU, there shall be one differential pressure switch DPS, one across each filter bank. If
the air pressure exceeds the setting on the differential pressure switch, a signal is relayed to the
DDC, which shall give a dirty filter alarm.
2.23.4.5 OTHER TEMPERATURE / RH MONITORING POINTS

An outside air combined temperature and RH sensor is located in a shaded area that will monitor
the ambient temperature and relative humidity.
A temperature sensor is located at the discharge of the enthalpy heat recovery wheel to monitor
the coil entry temperature.
Pressure sensors shall be located on the supply air duct and return air duct to monitor the
respective duct pressures.
2.23.4.6 FIRE MODE OPERATION:
In case of Fire alarm signal the system will be automatically shut down from the Fire Alarm
system. However, backup command shall be available from the DDC controller such that the
supply air fan will be switched-off; the fresh air dampers will be fully closed. The Return air
fan VFD goes to 100% and the return air damper will also be opened 100% to ventilate/
M - 50
VOLUME-III
release the overpressure in the lab space after the suppression gas is flooded in the lab space.
The 2 port chilled water valve actuator will be fully closed. Fire alarm signal will be
generated on BMS.
2.23.5 Kitchen Air Handling Unit

The air handling unit shall comprise of an AHU supply air fan provided with variable
speed motor. CHW cooling coil with 2 way PICV valve and filter banks. These shall
be interlocked with Kitchen roof Extract Fan.
AHU Fan Monitoring and Start/Stop
The motor control center serving the re-circulating AHU shall have an "HAND-OFFAUTO" switch. It shall be possible to start the fan directly when the switch positions
are in manual. When this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes
charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch is monitored.
The air flow switches are mounted across the AHU supply fan to detect airflow. The airflow
switch is connected to a digital input of the DDC controller.
Temperature control
Temperature and humidity sensor shall be located in the return air duct. The temperature shall
be maintained at the desired set point via the 2 way modulating combination control valve
located on the chilled water coil.
In the winter season when the ambient temperature is less than or equal to the temperature set
point, the cooling coil shall be bypassed and only electrical heater shall be activated to
achieve the desired temperature set point.
Dirty Filter Status
For the AHU, there shall be one differential pressure switch, across filter bank. If the air
pressure exceeds the setting on the differential pressure switch, a signal is relayed to the
DDC, which shall give a dirty filter alarm.
All other points as indicated in data point and control schematics shall be monitored
and controlled by BMS.
2.23.6 Kitchen / Kitchen Hood Extract Fan
The motor control center serving the Fan shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It shall
be possible to start the fan directly when the switch positions are in manual. When this switch
is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO"
position of the switch is monitored.
The air flow switch is mounted across the fan to detect airflow. The airflow switch is
connected to a digital input of the DDC controller.
The BMS shall also monitor the filter status of the filter banks via a differential pressure
switch; fan trip alarm shall also be monitored.
Kitchen Makeup Air Fan
The motor control center serving the Fan shall have an "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It
shall be possible to start the fan directly when the switch positions are in manual.
M - 51
VOLUME-III
When this switch is in "AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this
purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch is monitored.
The air flow switch is mounted across the fan to detect airflow. The airflow switch is
connected to a digital input of the DDC controller. The BMS shall also monitor the
filter status of the filter banks via a differential pressure switch.
The BMS shall also monitor the fan trip alarm.
Supply and Extract Fans
The necessary interlock between the makeup and extract fans wherever required
shall be provided by the BMS.
2.23.7 VARIABLE AIR AHUs (WITH VFD):

2.23.7.1CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
The AHU comprises of supply fan with VFDs, cooling coil with modulating 2 port chilled
water valve, electric duct heater, and panel filter.
2.23..7.2 AUTO MODE AHU MONITORING & START/STOP:
The motor control center serving the AHU has a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It is possible
to start the AHU directly when the switch position is in HAND. When this switch is in
"AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of
the switch is monitored. The AHU will be enabled automatically when the HAND-OFFAUTO switch is in AUTO position and the time channel is activated.
The DDC controller will first Open the fresh air and return air dampers to preset positions;
Return air damper to 80 % (adjustable) and Fresh Air damper to 20 % (adjustable). After
getting the open status from the Return air & Fresh air damper, the supply air fan will be
commanded to switch-on.
A differential pressure air flow switch is connected across the fan, which proves the air flow
status. The air flow switch is connected to digital input of the DDC controller. When the fan
is commanded to switch-on and no air flow is detected across the fan, after a delay of 30 secs
(adjustable) air flow fail alarm will be generated by the BMS and the AHU will be shut down.
When the AHU is in normal stop mode or in an alarm shutdown condition the fresh air and
Return air dampers and the chilled water valve will be fully closed.
2.23.7.3FAN VFD CONTROL:
The air flow monitoring station in the supply air duct and the duct static pressure sensor
installed in 2/3rd of the supply air duct will relay the air flow measurement and the static air
pressure signal to the DDC controller. In case the VAV boxes in the rooms modulate to open
or close positions depending on the space temperature & the setpoint, resulting in change in
the duct static pressure above or below the setpoint of 350 Pa (adjustable), the DDC controller
will give a modulating output to the fan VFD to increase or reduce the speed of the supply air
fan.
2.23.7.4 AHU TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
Temperature sensor shall be located in the supply air duct. The supply air temperature shall be
maintained precisely at the desired set point via the 2 way modulating valve located on the chilled
water coil.
M - 52
VOLUME-III
.
2.23.7.5AIR QUALITY CONTROL
Air quality sensors shall also be located in the return air duct of the AHU. Based on the return
air quality, the DDC controller shall modulate the fresh air damper on the fresh air duct to
either increase or decrease the fresh air quantity. The air flow monitoring station in the fresh
air duct shall validate the fresh air flow and convey the measured air flow to the Fresh air
handling unit.
The minimum fresh air flow to the AHU shall be equal to the total extract air from the toilet
extract fans (constant air flow fans).
2.23.7.6AHU FILTER:
The differential pressure switch is installed across the pre & bag filters in supply duct. In case
the differential pressure exceeds the pre-set value on each switch, respective alarms are
generated on the BMS.
2.23.7.7ALARMS:
-
No air flow detected across the fan in the event of fans being commanded to switch-on
(Fan will be commanded to shutdown).
Fire Alarm Signal (Supply Fan will be commanded to shutdown, Fan will be
automatically started after the fire alarm has been reset from the field & from the BMS
Management Station.
Supply temperature exceeds pre-defined high limit.
Return air quality exceeds pre-defined high limit.
Pre-filter / Bag filter is dirty.
Fan is not running in Auto Mode.
2.23.7.8 DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.8 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS (CCU):
2.23.8.1CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
The CCU comprises of supply fan with constant speed motor, 2 port chilled water valve, steam
humidifier, electric heater and 2 filter banks.
2.23.8.2 AUTO MODE AHU MONITORING & START/STOP:
The motor control center serving the CCU has a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It is possible to
enable the CCU directly when the switch position is in HAND. When this switch is in "AUTO"
position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch is
monitored. The CCU will be started automatically when the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch is in
AUTO position and the time channel is activated.
When the CCU is in normal stop mode or in an alarm shutdown condition, the chilled water valve
will be fully closed.
M - 53
VOLUME-III
2.23.8.3 TEMPERATURE/RH CONTROL:

The temperature/rh sensor is mounted in the space. The sensor relays the temperature signal
to the DDC controller. In case the return air temperature is higher than the set point of 13C
(adjustable), the DDC will give a modulating signal to chilled water valve actuator to open.
Humidity at the desired level shall be maintained by overriding the cooling valve control. In the
event of the supply air temperature dropping due to dehumidification cycle the electric reheat coil
shall be activated by CCU microprocessor.
In the event of low relative humidity during winter the CCU microprocessor shall activate the
steam humidifier in order to add moisture and increase the relative humidity.
2.23.8.4 AHU FILTER:
The differential pressure switch is installed across the pre & bag filters. In case the differential
pressure exceeds the pre-set value on each switch, respective alarms are generated on the
BMS.
2.23.8.5 ALARMS:
Fan trip (Fan will be commanded to shutdown)
No air flow detected across the fan in the event of fan being commanded to switch-on
(Fan will be commanded to shutdown)
Space temperature exceeds pre-defined high limit
Pre-filter is dirty
Bag-filter is dirty
Fan is not running in Auto Mode
2.23.8.6 DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.9 VAV Controls
Room temperature is sensed by the room with built in temperature sensor mounted in the area.
The room unit should communicate with the VAV controller via the bus and shall have LCD
display.
The controllers compares this with the set point and based on the deviation generates the
output which modulated the dampers (via damper actuator) mounted at the inlet of the VAV
box so as to achieve the desired temperature conditions.
2.23.10 Fan Coil Units:
The Room Control Unit type will have a built-in temperature sensor, set point potentiometer
and fan 3-speed auto/manual selection with digital display. The room unit relays the actual
room temperature and set point to the Controller, which accordingly modulates the 2 way
chilled water valves and the electric duct heater (where applicable) to achieve the desired
room temperature in summer and winter. In the meantime the controller varies the speed with
temperature (when selection is in auto mode).
2.23.10.1 Fan Coil Units in public areas
M - 54
VOLUME-III
FCU controllers for public areas and service / utility rooms shall be connected to the BMS
workstation for monitoring and control of FCUs. Return air sensor shall be provided behind
the FCU.
2.23.11 Fan Coil Units for Hotel guest rooms:
These fan coil units shall be communicating type with interface to the guest room
management system.
Provide an automatic three speed thermostat that will interface with the fan coil unit controller
to operate the modulating two-way control valve and the electric duct heater.
The BMS shall continuously monitor all of the points as indicated on the control schematic
and control the system.
The BMS system shall be able to place each fan coil unit in either an occupied or an
unoccupied mode.
In the occupied mode, the thermostat shall control the 2-way modulating pressure
independent control valve in summer and the electric heater in winter, and the fan speed. On
a call for cooling, the fan coil unit shall be started on low speed and the control valve shall
open fully. If after a predetermined time limit, the space is not satisfied, then the fan shall be
placed on medium speed and subsequently high speed. The space shall be maintained at 23C
+/- 1C in summer and at 22 C +/- 1C in winter. If the space is satisfied and is beginning to
over cool, then the fan speed shall be lowered from high to low gradually. Only after the fan
is on low speed, that the 2-way modulating valve shall start to close in order to maintain space
temperature.
In the unoccupied mode, the thermostat shall override the BMS and start the fan coil unit as
the temperature reaches 27C in summer / 18 C in winter. Fan coil unit shall stop as space
temperature reaches 23C in summer / 22 C in winter.
Provide the following alarms: Fan coil Unit failure.
2.23.12 Fan coil units for rentable areas (Shops, etc.)
These Fan Coil Units shall operate on a standalone basis.
Provide an automatic three speed thermostat that will interface with the fan coil unit controller
to operate the modulating two-way control valve.
No winter heating duct heater is considered.
2.23.13 HEAT EXCHANGERS:

For each Heat Exchanger, there is a modulating valve in supply line of the primary side of the
heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER PRIMARY SIDE MODULATING VALVE CONTROL:
The temperature sensor is mounted in the supply line of the secondary side of the heat
exchanger. The sensor relays the temperature signal to the DDC controller. In case the supply
temperature is higher than the pre defined set point the DDC will give a modulating signal to
valve actuator in the primary side of the heat exchanger to open.
BMS also monitors the temperatures and pressures of the return line on the secondary side of
M - 55
VOLUME-III
the Heat exchanger unit as shown in the data point list

ALARMS:
Alarm will be generated on the BMS in case of high supply side temperature:
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.14 SMOKE EXHAUST FANS / MAKE UP AIR FANS ( CORRIDORS) :
The smoke fans and make up air fans shall be directly controlled by the fire alarm panel. The
fans shall be directly interlocked with the fire alarm panel. There shall be a motorized damper on
the exhaust duct connecting the smoke exhaust fans and on the makeup air duct to each floor.
The fans shall operate directly on receipt of fire alarm signal. However, the fans run status is
monitored on BMS through a digital input signal to DDC from differential pressure air flow
switch mounted across each fan.
The smoke/ makeup air fans shall have a dedicated duct risers and branch ducts connected to each
floor. The branch ducts shall have motorized on/off dampers. The dampers shall open at the fire
floor based on a fire alarm signal. Motorized dampers on all other floors without fire shall remain
closed.
ALARMS:
Fan trip
Fire Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.15 STAIRCASE/ LIFT SHAFT PRESSURIZATION FANS
AUTO MODE FAN MONITORING & START/STOP:
Each staircase pressurization fan is directly controlled by Fire Alarm System. However, override
facility is available to enable or disable the fan from BMS. In the event of smoke or fire detected
by Fire Alarm System, first the fresh air motorized damper will be opened and the fan will be
started by the Fire Alarm System. Fire Alarm signal will be reported to DDC.
In case the staircase/Lift shaft pressurization fan is to be operated from BMS the following
sequence shall be followed.
Differential pressure sensor is installed in the stairwell. The differential pressure sensor relays the
signal to DDC controller for monitoring the differential pressure.
The motor control center serving the fan has "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switches. It is possible to
start the fan directly when the switch position is in HAND. When this switch is in "AUTO"
position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the
switch is monitored. The DDC shall control the fan speed by giving a modulating 0-10vdc
output to the VFD. The DDC shall also monitor the VFD fault and trip. The VFD speed
feedback shall be available to the DDC controller as 0-10vdc for monitoring in BMS.
M - 56
VOLUME-III
status. The air flow switch is connected to digital input of the DDC controller.
ALARMS:
Staircase differential pressure exceeds pre-defined high limit of 75 Pa (adjustable)
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.16 GENERAL EXTRACT FANS (DUTY/STANDBY) :
AUTO MODE FAN MONITORING & START/STOP:
The motor control center serving the fans has a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It is possible to
start the fans directly when the switch position is in HAND. When this switch is in
"AUTO" position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of
the switch is monitored. The fans will be started automatically when the HAND-OFFAUTO switch is in AUTO position and the time channel is activated.
These fans shall operate 24 hours and shall be connected to safety cabinets (chemical and gas
storage cabinets) and extraction points in the labs.
The DDC controller will first open the exhaust air damper. After getting the damper status,
the exhaust fan will be commanded to switch-on.
status. The air flow switch is connected to digital input of the DDC controller. When the fan
is commanded to switch-on and no air flow is detected across the fan, after a delay of 60 secs
(adjustable) air flow fail alarm will be generated by the BMS and the fan will be switched-off.
The extract fan shall have mixing box with a bypass duct and modulating motorized damper
on the extract side for dilution of the extracted air. The dilution ratio shall be 100% of the
intake air flow.
ALARMS:
-
No air flow detected across the fans in the event of fans being commanded to switch-on
(Fan will be commanded to shutdown)
Fan is not running in Auto Mode
DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.18 WATER PUMPS:

AUTO MODE PUMP MONITORING & START/STOP:
The motor control center serving the pump has a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" switch. It is possible to
start the pump directly when the switch position is in HAND. When this switch is in "AUTO"
position, the DDC controller takes charge. For this purpose, the "AUTO" position of the switch is
monitored. The pump will be started automatically when the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch is in
AUTO position and the time channel is activated.
BMS monitors the run status through voltfree contact to DDC from the panel and the supply
M - 57
VOLUME-III
header pressure via water pressure sensor.

The cold and hot water main distribution pumps shall have VFD to modulate the pumps speed
based on the water demand via the pressure sensor feedback.
ALARMS:
VFD /Pump Trip
Supply header high pressure
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.19 FIRE PUMPS:

BMS monitors the pump the run status through voltfree signals to DDC from each pump
panel and the supply header pressure through 0 10V signal from the pressure sensor.
ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS for each Fire Pumps in case of following conditions:
- Pump Trip Alarm
DATA POINT LIST

2.23.2- WATER TANKS & FUEL TANKS:
BMS monitors the Tank Level through an analogue 0-10 VDC signal to DDC from the water
/ Fuel differential pressure mounted in the supply pipe.
ALARMS:
Tank High Level Alarm
Tank Low Level Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.21 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM:

The Hot water system shall be via Solar system plus gas fired hot water boilers to provide
domestic water heating and hot water to the heating coils of hotel FAHUs. The hot water
system shall include controls for solar system, boilers, circulating pumps, hot water
distribution pumps, Hot Water storage Calorifiers (with 3 way control valve) and Hot Water
Recirculating Pump set including the monitoring of the temperature controls in hot water
supply & return pipes and the cold water feed pipe, in addition to the 3-way control valve for
the hot water heating coil of FAHUs.
M - 58
VOLUME-III
A dedicated control panel will operate the hot water system. This control panel will transmit
volt free contact signals to monitor and control the following status:
Auto Position of H/O/A switch

Enable/ Disable Command of boilers, burners, hot water distribution pumps,
reticulating hot water pumps, solar pumps.
Trip Alarms
Panel Healthy status
Common Fault Alarm
Hot water Supply & return Temperature for each boiler and common header
Hot water supply & return Temperature for solar circuit.
Hot water supply and return temperature for each calorifier.
Cold water feed temperature.
Ambient temperature.
The hot water Supply / Return and Cold Water Feed temperatures shall be monitored via
immersion temperature Sensor. The Panel Healthy Status shall be monitored by the BMS. All
other points as indicated in the Control Schematics.
The hot water supply / return temperatures from boilers shall be 95 C/ 75 C. The circulation
pumps shall operate to achieve this temperature. If the temperature is achieved these pumps
shall stop.
The solar system circuit shall heat the water inside the calorifiers to 60 C. In case the
temperature is not achieved by the solar system then the boilers shall start to achieve the
required temperature.
The hot water supply temperature to rooms shall be modulated via a 3-way mixing valve
between the hot water and cold water line to provide the required set temperature.
Hot water circulating pumpsets:
The Pump set consists of 2 pumps (1 Duty +1 Stand by) which are constant speed pumps.
The pumps are controlled by the Starter Panel serving the Pumps. The BMS only monitors the
Panel Healthy Status. The BMS shall monitor the run & failure status of the pumps via
volt free contacts from the respective motor control centers.
All other points as indicated in the Control Schematics.
2.23.22 WATER FILTERATION SYSTEM
This system operates under its own dedicated controls; hence the operating sequence of this system is
not covered under this document.
BMS monitors the pumps for run status and trip alarms through voltfree signals to DDC from each
pump panel, water filter dirty alarm and water tank levels as shown in the data point schedule.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.23 GREY WASTE WATER RECYLING SYSTEM

This system operates under its own dedicated controls; hence the operating sequence of this system is
not covered under this document.

M - 59
VOLUME-III
BMS monitors the PH value of incoming waste and treated water discharge which shall be rendered as
0-10vdc signals to DDC from the unit panel shown in the data point schedule.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.24 IRRIGATION PUMPS:
BMS monitors the pump the run status through volt free signals to DDC from each pump
panel and the supply header pressure through 0 10V signal from the pressure sensor.
ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS for each irrigation water Pumps in case of following
conditions:
- Pump Trip Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.26 SUMP/SEWAGE/SURFACE WATER PUMPS
BMS monitors the pumps for run status and trip alarms through voltfree signals to DDC from
each pump panel as shown in the data point schedule.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.27 LIFT MONITORING SYSTEM:
This system operates under its own dedicated controls; The lift control panel will transmit
VFC signals to the DDC controller to monitor the following status
-
Run Status
Failure Alarm
Lift Cabin Alarm
The BMS shall transmit the signals to the lift control panels to shut down lifts as required by
the building operator manually from the BMS workstation or automatically based on timing.
DATA POINT LIST:

M - 60
VOLUME-III
2.23.28 GAS LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM:

In the event of gas leak as sensed by the Gas Leak detection Panel a gas leak alarm shall be
initiated and transmitted to BMS.
ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS for unit in case of following conditions which shall be
rendered as voltfree contacts to DDC:
Gas Leak
Unit Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.30 WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM:

In the event of water leak as sensed by the water Leak detection Panel a gas leak alarm shall
be initiated and transmitted to BMS.
ALARMS:
-
Water Leak
Unit Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.31 FUEL OIL DETECTION SYSTEM/ GAS DETECION SYSTEM:
In the event of fuel- oil/ LPG Gas as sensed by the Leak detection Panel a leak alarm shall be
initiated and transmitted to BMS.
ALARMS:
-
Fuel-oil Leak / Gas Leak

Unit Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:

2.23.32 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM:

M - 61
VOLUME-III
ALARMS:
Volt free contacts / BACNet integration will be available in each main control panel for status
monitoring / alarm in the following conditions:
Power On/Off Alarm
Common Fault Alarm
These shall be connected to the DDC Controllers
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.33 ENERGY MONITORING UNITS / LV PANELS:
EMU's shall be provided for all the LV panels as shown in the single line diagrams. These
shall be communicating via industry standard open protocol and integrated directly with the
BMS. EMU shall provide voltage, currents for each phase, power factor, active power,
reactive power, instantaneous Kw, harmonic analysis etc (atleast 13 parameters)
ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS for unit in case of following conditions:
Common Fault Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.34 DIESEL GENERATOR & MAIN FUEL TANK
ALARMS:
The generator control panel will provide volt free contacts to BMS for status monitoring.
These shall be connected to DDC Controllers.
Generator Run Status.
Generator Common Fault alarm indication.
Battery Healthy / Battery charge fault
Generator " NOT IN AUTO MODE" alarm
Main fuel tank high level alarm
Main Fuel tank low level alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.35 COLD ROOMS, REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS
The BMS system shall retrieve the temperature readings from each freezer , refrigerators &
the cold rooms through an NTC signal (0-10 V) / RTD sensors will be available at the
freezers side. The measured voltage output shall be divisional by 100 to obtain 0.1C
accuracy and the NTC outputs shall be compatible with the BMS system
The output signal will be configured as below :
M - 62
VOLUME-III
Freezers type
1. Deep Freezer
2. Freezer
3. Refrigerator
4. Cold rooms
Temp Range (oC)

0 to -80
0 to -20/-40
0 to +4
+10 to -90
Output voltage signal (VDC)

0 ( at 0oC) to 10 (-100 oC)
0( at 0oC) to 10 (-50oC)
0( at 0oC) to 10 ( +50oC)
0 ( at+10oC) to 10 (-90 oC)
In case, if the RTD signal is not compatible with BMS, then the contractor to provide
appropriate converters of Resistance to voltage shall be installed.
ALARMS:
The cold rooms, freezers will convey the following volt free signals to the DDC Controller.
High temperature alarm
Common Fault.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.36 UPS:
ALARMS:
UPS shall be communicating via industry standard open protocol and integrated directly with
the BMS for status monitoring and alarm in the following conditions:
Common Fault Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.37 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM:
ALARMS:
Alarms will be generated on the BMS for unit in case of following conditions:
System Common Fault Alarm
Status Monitoring
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.38 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM:

M - 63
VOLUME-III
ALARMS:
The above system shall be integrated to the BMS via Software integration through Industry
Standard Open Protocols in each Panel. Contractor should ensure that the integration
requirements mentioned are also incorporated in the relevant specification of Individual
Systems
System Common Fault Alarm
Status Monitoring
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.39 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM:
Lighting control System shall be software integrated (EiB / CBus ) with BMS for remote
programming and control. External lights and sign boards shall also be controlled remotedly.
The timing functions, automatic operation functions etc shall also be achieved through BMS.
All external elevation lights, landscape lights, etc. shall be connected to lighting control
system and integrated to BMS. Dedicated lighting control systems are proved in the building.
For operation of the systems refer the lighting control schematic and the relay schedule.
The lighting control system shall be fully integrated with the BMS.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.40 PUBLIC ADDRESS / MUSIC SYSTEM:
Volt free contacts will be available in the Public address system rack for status monitoring /
alarm in the following conditions:
Power On/Off Alarm
Common Fault Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.41 CCTV SYSTEM:
Volt free contacts will be available in the CCTV system rack for status monitoring / alarm in
the following conditions:
Power On/Off Alarm
Common Fault Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:

M - 64
VOLUME-III
2.23.42 FAADE LIGHTING SYSTEM / FAADE DB:

The Lighting circuits / DB shall be controlled via "ON / OFF" command from EIB and BMS
The ON / OFF position shall also be monitored and switched.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.43 FOUNTAINS / WATER FEATURES:
Volt free contacts will be available in the CCTV system rack for status monitoring / alarm in
the following conditions:
Power On/Off Alarm
Common Fault Alarm
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.44 GENERATOR PARRELLELING / SYNCHRONIZING PANEL:
ALARMS:
The above panel shall be integrated to the BMS via Software integration through Industry
Standard Open Protocols. The following points are to be monitored. Contractor should ensure
that the integration requirements mentioned are also incorporated in the relevant specification
of Individual Systems
ON / OFF status of main incoming breakers
ON / OFF Status of bus couplers.
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.45 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES:
Each of the ATS switch shall be integrated to the BMS via Software integration through
Industry Standard Open Protocols to monitor the following.
ATS status Monitoring
DATA POINT LIST:
2.23.46 Hotel Equipment
Various hotel equipment (e.g. Freezers, coolers, etc.) in main Kitchen shall be interfaced with
BMS for status monitoring (Volt Free Contacts).
2.23.47 Signage DB
The Lighting Circuits shall be controlled via ON/OFF command from EIB and BMS. The
ON/OFF position shall also be monitored switched.
M - 65
VOLUME-III
2.23.48 Aircraft Warning Lights

Volt free contacts will be available for status monitoring. These shall be connected to DDC
panels.
2.23.49 VFDs
VFDs integration shall be software based using MODbus.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1
All wiring and tubing shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner.
All wiring and tubing exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles
to the building structure. All piping and wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and
anchored to prevent obstruction to devices and terminals.
3.1.2
The contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation required for a fully functional
system and not shown on the electrical plans or required by the electrical specifications. All
wiring shall be in accordance to all local and national codes. All line voltage wiring, all
wiring exposed, and all wiring in equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit in accordance
to the electrical specifications. All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum THHN and
shielded if required. All wiring in the central control room shall be concealed in an approved
manner.
3.1.3
The contractor shall enter all computer programs and data files into the related computers
including all control programs, initial approved parameters and settings, English descriptors,
and color graphics complete with dynamic dispersed data. In addition, the following features,
to be user implemented, shall have samples installed by the vendor for training and validation:
a)
Trend log
b)
Alarm message (action taking message)
c)
Run time maintenance message
d)
Trouble action message
e)
Dynamic Trend Plot (6 points)
3.1.4
The contractor shall maintain diskette copies of all data file and application software for
reload use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. One copy shall be delivered to
the Employer during training session, and one copy shall be archived within a local software
vault provided by the BMCS manufacturer within 15 miles of the OS.
3.1.5
The contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all connected hardware and
software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the approved specifications
and sequences of operation submitted.
3.1.6
Witnessed validation demonstration shall consist of:

Running each specified report.
Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability.

M - 66
VOLUME-III
Demonstrate parameter changes.

Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update and direct
access to graphics.
Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode.
Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs (6 loops
minimum).
Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.
Demonstrate on-line user guide and help function and mail facility.
Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive upline and downline load,
and demonstrate specified diagnostics.
Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot and graphic construction operating
simultaneously via split screen.
Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm
archiving and color banding.

M - 67
VOLUME-III
APPENDIX - A
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES FOR
MECHANICAL WORKS / COMMISSIONING

Appendix A : Schedule of Approved Manufactures for Mechanical Works
M-1
VOLUME-III
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed below or
Equal approved. All proposed materials shall fully comply with specifications and contract documents
requirements
S. No.
A)
MATERIALS
MANUFACTURERS
HVAC
Air Cooled Chillers

(Europe / USA)
Chilled water pumps

(Europe / USA)
Air Handling Units

(Europe / USA)
Fan Coil Units (International make)
Close Control Units

(Europe / USA)
Chilled water Pressurization Units

(Europe / USA)
Chemical Treatment
(Europe / USA)
Carrier
Trane
York
McQuay
ITT Bell & Gossett
Grundfos
Ritz
KSB
Armstrong
Euroclima
Mekar
VTS Clima
Trane
McQuay
Carrier
York
Sinko
Euroclima
Mekar
VTS Clima
McQuay
Trane
Carrier
York
Liebert
Airedale
Uniflair
Data aire
Compu aire
ITT Bell & Gosset
Grundfos
Armstrong
Holden & Brook
Pillinger
Metito
Veolia
Culligan
Water Bird

M-2
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
Plate Heat Exchanger
Extract / Supply air / Smoke Fans

(Europe / USA)
10
Variable/Constant Air Volume Units

(Europe / USA)
11
Air Filters (Europe / USA)
12
13
Air Curtains
Electric Duct Heaters
14
Building Management System / Room

Management system
(Europe / USA)
15
Ecology Unit for Kitchen extract air /

Electrostatic Filters
(Europe / USA)
16
Fire Dampers, Motorized Fire/ Smoke

Dampers
MANUFACTURERS
Alpha Laval
Sondex
Swep
Tranter
Danfoss
System Air
Penn
Greenheck
Twin City
Flaktwoods
Rosenberg
Ventaxia
Sodeca
Dynaire
S&P
Nuaire
Tuttle & Bailey
Titus
Trox
Price
Metal Air
AAAF
Cambridge
CamfiFarr
Glassfloss
Berner
Frico
DCM Air Curtains
National
Reddi Heat
Indeeco
Markel
Total Line
Siemens
Honeywell
Johnson Controls
Sauter
ALC
Tecnovox
Purified Air / Bioclimatic
Halton
Trion
SPC
Trox

M-3
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
17
Volume Control Dampers / NRDs.
18
Air Outlets (Grilles & Diffusers)
19
Sound Attenuator (Silencer)
20
GI Ductwork
21
Stainless Steel Ductwork
22
Fire rated Ductwork
23
Duct & Pipe Supports
24
Valves for Chilled water system
MANUFACTURERS
Ruskin
Safid
Aldes
KBE
Safid
Aldes
Action Air
KBE
Gmamco
Air Master
Technalco
Beta
Safid
Aldes
Kinetics
Safid
Absol
AAT (Seagull HVAC)
Gmamco
IAC (Arabian Thermal Aire Industries)
Swegon (Intercool)
Vibro Acoustics (Prime Technology)
Nippon
Cape
Kawasaki
Iscore
Jindal
Leminar
Century
Weather maker
Gulf Duct
Flamebar
Dura steel
Promat
Leminar
Hilti
Grinnel
Flammco
Mupro
Weicco
Tour & Anderson
Hattersley
Crane
Peggler

M-4
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
25
Pressure Independent Control Valve-PICV for

FCU /AHU / CCU connections
(Europe / USA)
26
Strainers (Europe / USA)
27
Gauges / Thermometers (Europe / USA)
28
Air Vent (Europe / USA)
29
Black Steel Pipes and Fittings
30
Grooved Fittings & Coupling UL/FM

(Europe / USA)
31
Vibration Isolators
32
Floating Floor
MANUFACTURERS
Danfoss
Flowcontrol
Oventrop
Frese
Belimo
Danfoss (Technoflow)
Tour Anderson
Mueller Steam
Armstrong
Sarco
Crane
Hattersley
H.O. Treice
Weiss
Dwyer
Weksler
Hunter
Armstrong
Crane
Fischer
Pipes:
Kawasaki
K&S
SPP
Grinnel
Nippon
Any European/Japanese Make
Fittings: Crane
Nefit
Benken
Any European / International
make.
Victualic
National
Grinnel
Smith Cooper
Mason
Kinetics
CDM
CMS
Optima
VMC group
Vibro Acoustic
Kinetics
Mason
Christie & Grey

M-5
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
33
Fibreglass Insulation
34
Elastomeric Rubber insulation (Europe)
35
Sound Liner
36
Pipe Flexible Connector
37
Flexible Ducts
38
Flexible Duct Connector (Insulated type)
39
Access Doors
40
Adhesive and Coatings / Vapour Barrier
41
Testing & Commissioning Agency
B)
Plumbing & Drainage
Multilayer Composite Pipes for plumbing

pipework (cold & hot)
PEX Pipes and Fittings (in wall chase)
MANUFACTURERS
CDM
Isolgomma
Kimmco
Knauf
Afico
K Flex
Armaflex/Armacell
Kai Flex
Kimmco
Knauf
Armacell
Rockwool
Owens-corning (Afico)
Mason
Kinetics
Tozen
Weicco
Safid
Thermoflex
ATCO
Supaflex
Aeroduct
Flotek
Durodyne
Clim/Climatech
Cain
Aeroduct
Zest
Safid
Ruskin
Foster
Miracle
Childers
Fevicol
Napco
CML
i2i
Sutton
Prime technology
Poloplast
Valsir
Uponor
Geberit
Banniger
Wirsbo
Fripex

M-6
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
Copper Pipe and Fittings
uPVC / HDPE Pipe and Fittings
Valves, Strainers & Accessories

(Europe / USA)
Sound Proof Polypropylene Drainage Pipes &

Fittings ((Europe)
Acoustic Lagging for Drainage Pipes (Europe /

USA)
Water Hammer Arrestor / Back Flow Preventer

(Europe / USA)
Hangers & Supports
10
Water Pumpsets (Europe / USA)
MANUFACTURERS
JRG Sanipex
Becker
Crane Enfield
Wednesbury
Yorkshire
Mueller
Nibco
MM Kembla
Outokumpu
Hepworth
Terrain
Marley
Cosmoplast
Durapipe
George Fischer
Uponor
Geberit
Shield
Hurner
Hattersley
Crane
Nibco
Peggler
Tour & Anderson
Tozen
Argo
Skolan DB
Wavin AS
Poloplast
Kinetics
Soundseal
Silent Lay
Sioux Chief
Zurn
PPP
Watts
Wade
Hilti
Grinnel
Flamco
Mupro
ITT Bell & Gosset / ITT Vogel
Grundfos
KSB
Ritz

M-7
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
12
Pressure Reducing Valve (Europe / USA)
13
Gas Fired Hot Water Boiler
MANUFACTURERS
Armstrong
Ebara
Honeywell
Baily
Watts
Zurn Wilkins
Buderus/ Bosch
Cleaver Brooks
Ecotherm
Cochran
Turbopower
Fulton
William Robey
Ajax Boilers
Ecotherm
A.O.Smith
Ariston
14
Hot Water Storage Calorifier
GMS
Lacaze
Precision
MG
Ariston
15
Electric Water Heater (Europe)
A.O.Smith
Zanussi
Solahart (Australia)
Bosch (Germany)
16
Solar Hot water System
Vaillant (Germany)
Ecotherm (Austria)
Giordano (France)
Tisun (Austria)
Sekisui (Japan)
17
GRP Water Tanks
Mitsubishi (Japan)
Bridgestone (Japan)
Metito
18
Water Filtration & Softening Systems / RO

Plant / Grey Waste water Recycling Plant
(Europe / USA)
Veolia
Culligan
Water Bird
ABS
19
Sewage / Sump Pumps (Europe)
KSB
Flygt
Grundfos
20
Floor Drain / Roof Drain (Europe/ USA)
Kessel
ACO

M-8
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
MANUFACTURERS
Frost
Zurn
Wade
Dallmer
Jay R Smith
Stanton
Brickhouse / Broads
21
Manhole covers / Gulley Trap Covers /

Gratings
(Europe)
Eccles
Passavant
Elkington
Self Lock
23
Grease/ oil Separator
Kessel
Aco
ABB-Kent
Kamstrup
24
Water Meter (Europe)
Schluberger
Hersey
Aquametro
C)
Fire Fighting
ITT Bell & Gossett
1.
Fire Pumps - UL/FM

(Europe / USA)
Aurora
Peerless
Patterson
SPP
Caterpillar
Diesel Engine UL/FM
Clarks
(Europe / USA)
Cummins
Firedriver
Zenith
Lloyds
Gujarat Steel , Tata
Galvanised Steel Pipes & Fittings
Shields
Surya
Econosto
Universal Tube
Grinnell
Grooved Fittings - UL/FM)
Shield
(Europe / USA)
Central
Victaulic
Shields
HDPE pipes & Fittings (for buried pipes)
ISCO
IPF

M-9
VOLUME-III
S. No.
MATERIALS
MANUFACTURERS
Hepworth
VIKING
Fire Fighting Equipment (Fire hose, Nozzle,

Fire hose reel, Landing valve, Fire
Extinguishers, External Fire Hydrant, etc)
UL/FM, LPCB, BSI
(Europe / USA)
MARSHAL
ANSUL
ANGUS
SEFECO
NAFFCO
CHUBB
Viking
Angus
Sprinkler System including all related valves

and accessories (Europe / USA)
Victaulic
Grinnell
Tyco
Shields
ANSUL
MINIMEX
Clean Agent Fire Suppression System

UL/FM
(Europe / USA)
LPG
SIEMENS
Chemetron
Fike
Naffco
Kidde Fenewal
Viking
Foam System UL/FM

(Europe / USA)
10
Fire Stop Materials
11
LPG System
Angus
Marriog
Chemguard
Tyco
3M
Hilti
Astroflame
Abesco
Nullifier
GASCO or equivalent specialist
approved by local Civil Defence

M-10
VOLUME-III
PART - II
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
Part II : Electrical Services

Mechanical

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Mechanical

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

A-PDF Split DEMO : Purchase from www.A-PDF.

com to remove the watermark

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

General Requirements (Mechanical)

Design Criteria ( Mechanical)

Noise & Vibration Control Requirement

Fire Stopping Material

DIVISION 21 : FIRE SUPPRESSION

Water Based Fire Suppression Systems

Wet Pipe Sprinkler System

Foam Water Sprinkler System

Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems FM 200 System

Expansion Fittings And Loops

Sleeves for Plumbing

Escutcheon for Plumbing

Meters And Gages for Plumbing

Hangers And Supports for Plumbing

Identification for Plumbing

Cleaning of Piping Systems

Valves for Plumbing

Plumbing Pipe work

Domestic Water Pumps

Water Storage Tanks

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

Sanitary Sewerage Pumps

Submersible Sump Pumps

Domestic Water Filtration

Grey Waste Water Recycling Plant

Solar Water Heaters & Accessories

Gas Fired Hot water Boiler system and HW Calorifiers

Plate Heat Exchanger

Liquefied Petroleum Gas System (LPG)

Fuel Handling System

DIVISION 23 : HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Meters And Gages for HVAC

Brackets Anchors and Supports

Mechanical Sound, Vibration & Seismic Control

UltraViolet (UVC) Irradiation System / UVC Emitter

Testing, Inspections & Commissioning

Hydronic Piping and Accessories

Packaged Pressurization Sets

HVAC Water Treatment

Air Chambers and Plenums

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

Duct Silencers (Attenuators)

Generator / Boiler Flues

Air Terminal Units ( VAV & CAV)

Air Outlets And Inlets

Air Filters & Ecology Units

Air Cooled Water Package Chillers

Air Handling Units

Close Control Units

Fan Coil Units

DIVISION 25 : INTEGRATED CONTROLS & BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Building Management And Automatic Controls System

Schedule of Approved Manufactures For Mechanical Works /

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

GCE 161 RICEC Hotel Building, Riyadh, KSA.

Mechanical Section 01 00 00: General Requirements

EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS. .......................................................................... 7